JP2015065981A - Encapsulated ball type game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide an encapsulated ball type game machine capable of controlling a control device efficiently.SOLUTION: An encapsulated ball type game machine comprises: an owned ball number display device capable of displaying the number of balls owned by a player; and display control means for controlling the display of the owned ball number display device. The display control means changes the display mode of the owned ball number display device in accordance with the situation of the owned ball number. For example, the display control means blackouts the display of the owned ball number display device, before the game and in the case where the owned ball number of the player is 0, so that the ball number owned by the player is 0 in the play. In the case of no counted ball number, the owned ball number display device is lit to display 0, and the owned ball number of the player during the play is 0. In the case of the number-counted balls, 0 is displayed in flashes in the owned ball number display device.

Description

  The present invention relates to an enclosed ball type gaming machine.

In a game hall where game machines for paying out game balls as a result of games are installed, in order to replenish and polish the game balls used for the game machines, for example, a large supply and polishing facility for circulating the game balls on an island basis is required. It is. An encapsulated ball game machine that eliminates the need for these large-scale replenishment / polishing facilities and has no real ball payout has been proposed.
For example, there is an example of the following enclosed ball type gaming machine (see Patent Document 1).

JP 2006-325929 A

However, in the enclosed ball type gaming machine, there are many elements that need to be controlled, such as control of the game, control of the launching and circulation of the game ball, management of the number of balls, control for prevention of fraud, and the like.
Therefore, it is required that the control device of the gaming machine can be controlled efficiently.

  Therefore, an object of the present invention is to provide an enclosed ball type gaming machine that can efficiently control a control device.

According to the first aspect of the present invention, it is possible to perform a game by enclosing a predetermined number of game balls in a game machine main body and firing the enclosed game balls into a game area. With a game control device that manages the progress of
The game control device determines whether the game result is in a predetermined profit state or any other state, and in the case of a predetermined profit state, the player's profit is increased in correspondence with a predetermined number of prize balls. Let
In the enclosed ball type gaming machine that plays the game by circulating the enclosed game ball by collecting the game ball that has passed through the game area and guiding it to the launch position,
A ball number display device capable of displaying the number of balls of the player;
Display control means for controlling the display of the number-of-balls display device,
The display control means includes
The display mode of the number-of-balls display device is changed according to the number of balls held.

  ADVANTAGE OF THE INVENTION According to this invention, the enclosed ball type game machine which can control a control apparatus efficiently can be provided.

It is a front view of a pachinko machine. It is a front view of the game board of a pachinko machine. It is a back view of a pachinko machine. It is a figure which shows a circulation apparatus. It is a system block diagram of a pachinko parlor. It is a block diagram which shows the control system of a pachinko machine. It is a figure which shows an operation display apparatus. It is a figure which shows the detailed structure of a nighttime monitoring switch. It is a figure which shows the detailed structure of a package display apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the main process of a game control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the main process of a game control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows a payout command reception interruption process. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process of a game control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows an error monitoring process. It is a flowchart which shows a winning opening switch monitoring process. It is a flowchart which shows fraud & winning prize monitoring processing. It is a flowchart which shows a winning number counter update process. It is a flowchart which shows payout command transmission processing. It is a flowchart which shows a prize display LED edit process. It is a flowchart which shows a prize display LED edit process. It is a flowchart which shows a grinding | polishing apparatus control process. It is a flowchart which shows production command setting processing. It is a flowchart which shows a ball number command transmission process. It is a flowchart which shows the main process of the payout control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the main process of the payout control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows a main control command reception interruption process. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process of a payout control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows a switch monitoring process. It is a flowchart which shows a launch ball detection switch monitoring process. It is a flowchart which shows a foul ball | bowl detection switch monitoring process. It is a flowchart which shows an out ball | bowl detection switch monitoring process. It is a flowchart which shows a count switch monitoring process. It is a flowchart which shows a counting ball use switch monitoring process. It is a flowchart which shows an error monitoring process. It is a flowchart which shows an error cancellation switch monitoring process. It is a flowchart which shows an enclosing ball | bowl number monitoring process. It is a flowchart which shows a board surface ball number error monitoring process. It is a flowchart which shows a frame open | release error monitoring process. It is a flowchart which shows a discharge permission signal edit process. It is a flowchart which shows a number-of-balls addition process. It is a flowchart which shows a ball | bowl feed control process. It is a flowchart which shows a payment / rest control process. It is a flowchart which shows a payment control process. It is a flowchart which shows a break control process. It is a flowchart which shows a payment start monitoring process. It is a flowchart which shows adjustment write completion monitoring processing. It is a flowchart which shows a payment end monitoring process. It is a flowchart which shows a break start monitoring process. It is a flowchart which shows a break start ACK monitoring process. It is a flowchart which shows a break end monitoring process. It is a flowchart which shows a card unit reception analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows the card unit reception analysis process 1. FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the card unit reception analysis process 2. FIG. It is a flowchart which shows a regular command transmission process. It is a flowchart which shows an external information edit process. It is a flowchart which shows a game machine ID signal edit process. It is a flowchart which shows game machine ID output processing. It is a flowchart which shows LED edit processing. It is a flowchart which shows a ball number LED editing process. It is a flowchart which shows a number-of-balls display data setting process. It is a flowchart which shows count ball number LED edit processing. It is a flowchart which shows polishing apparatus control processing. It is a flowchart which shows a main control command setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the polishing apparatus control processing of an effect control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the liquid crystal data setting process of an effect control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the sub liquid crystal data setting process of an effect control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the appearance character selection process of an effect control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the grinding | polishing control processing of a grinding | polishing control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the operation display apparatus edit process of a card unit. It is a flowchart which shows the return button monitoring process of a card unit. It is a flowchart which shows the adjustment process of a card unit. It is a flowchart which shows the game machine ID collation process of a card unit. It is a figure explaining the display mode of the number of balls of a number-of-balls indicator. It is a figure explaining the display mode of the number-of-balls indicator at the time of payment. It is a figure explaining operation | movement of a level meter. It is a figure explaining operation | movement of a main liquid crystal display device and a sub liquid crystal display device. It is a figure explaining operation | movement of a main liquid crystal display device and a sub liquid crystal display device. It is a timing chart of operation | movement of grinding | polishing control of an enclosure bulb | ball. It is a figure which shows the example of a screen of the display apparatus in grinding | polishing control of an enclosure bulb | ball. It is a figure which shows the operation example of an operation display apparatus. It is a figure explaining operation | movement of a decoration ball display apparatus. It is a timing chart which shows operation | movement of a nighttime monitoring switch. It is a timing chart which shows operation | movement of a nighttime monitoring switch. It is a timing chart of display control of a prize display LED. It is a timing chart which shows display update control of the number of balls. It is a figure which shows operation | movement of an operation display apparatus. It is a figure explaining the counting method of the number of balls with a modification. It is a figure explaining the counting method of the number of balls with a modification. 12 is a flowchart illustrating a launch permission signal editing process according to the second embodiment. 10 is a diagram illustrating an example of setting a polishing period in the display device of Example 2. FIG. 6 is a timing chart of the operation of polishing control of the encapsulated sphere of Example 2. It is a front view of the pachinko machine of Example 3. It is a figure which shows the operation example of the operation display apparatus of Example 3. FIG. It is a figure which shows the operation example of the operation display apparatus of Example 4. FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the monitoring switch information reception process of the card unit of Example 5. It is a front view of the pachinko machine of Example 6. It is a front view of the pachinko machine of Example 7. It is a figure which shows the game board of Example 8. FIG. It is a figure which shows the game board of Example 9. FIG. It is a figure which shows the package display apparatus of Example 10. FIG. It is a figure which shows the package display apparatus of Example 11. FIG. It is a figure which shows the package display apparatus of Example 12. It is a figure which shows the package display apparatus of Example 13. FIG. It is a timing chart which shows the display update control of the number of balls of Example 14. It is a front view of the pachinko machine of Example 15. It is a figure which shows the game board of Example 15. FIG. It is a reverse view of the pachinko machine of Example 15. It is a figure which shows the circulation structure of the enclosure bulb | ball of Example 15. FIG. It is a block diagram which shows the control system of the pachinko machine of Example 15. It is a block diagram of the grinding | polishing apparatus and feeding apparatus of Example 15. It is a figure which shows the detailed structure of the nighttime monitoring switch of Example 15. It is a figure which shows the block configuration which collates the game machine ID of Example 15. FIG. It is a figure which shows the structure of the encryption communication of Example 15, and a backup power supply. It is a figure which shows the detailed structure of the drawer connector of Example 15. FIG. It is a figure which shows the detailed structure of the drawer connector of Example 15. FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the main process of the game control apparatus of Example 15. It is a flowchart which shows the game state information transmission process of the game control apparatus of Example 15. FIG. 25 is a flowchart illustrating main control ID transmission processing according to a fifteenth embodiment. 25 is a flowchart illustrating a checksum calculation process according to the fifteenth embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the initial value random number update process of Example 15. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process of Example 15. It is a flowchart which shows the input process main process of Example 15. 25 is a flowchart illustrating output processing according to the fifteenth embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the random number update process 1 of Example 15. It is a flowchart which shows the random number update process 2 of Example 15. 29 is a flowchart illustrating an error / injustice monitoring process according to a fifteenth embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the illegal prize-winning monitoring process of Example 15. It is a flowchart which shows the electromagnetic wave fraud monitoring process of Example 15. It is a flowchart which shows the magnet fraud monitoring process of Example 15. 18 is a flowchart illustrating an error check process according to a fifteenth embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the winning opening switch monitoring process of Example 15. 27 is a flowchart illustrating LED editing processing according to the fifteenth embodiment. 27 is a flowchart showing a winning display LED editing process according to the fifteenth embodiment. 27 is a flowchart illustrating received command determination processing according to the fifteenth embodiment. 25 is a flowchart illustrating payout command editing processing according to the fifteenth embodiment. 25 is a flowchart illustrating payout command editing processing according to the fifteenth embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the payout command transmission process of Example 15. It is a flowchart which shows the communication abnormality monitoring process of Example 15. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure game process of Example 15. It is a flowchart which shows the starting port switch monitoring process of Example 15. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure start port switch common process of Example 15. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure pending | holding information determination process of Example 15. It is a flowchart which shows the big winning opening switch monitoring process of Example 15. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure normal process of Example 15. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure normal process transfer setting process 1 of Example 15. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure 1 fluctuation start process 1 of Example 15. FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the big hit flag 1 setting process of Example 15. It is a flowchart which shows the big hit determination processing of Example 15. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process of Example 15. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure information setting process of Example 15. FIG. 25 is a flowchart illustrating a variation pattern setting process according to the fifteenth embodiment. 29 is a flowchart illustrating a 2-byte sorting process according to the fifteenth embodiment. 27 is a flowchart illustrating distribution processing according to the fifteenth embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the change start information setting process of Example 15. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure 2 fluctuation start process of Example 15. It is a flowchart which shows the big hit flag 2 setting process of Example 15. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process of Example 15. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure change process transfer setting process (special figure 1) of Example 15. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure change process transfer setting process (special figure 2) of Example 15. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure fluctuation process of Example 15. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure display process transition setting process of Example 15. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure display process of Example 15. It is a flowchart which shows the fanfare / interval process transition setting process 1 of Example 15. It is a flowchart which shows the production mode information check process of Example 15. It is a flowchart which shows the time shortening fluctuation frequency update process of Example 15. FIG. 38 is a flowchart illustrating a time-short end setting process according to the fifteenth embodiment. 29 is a flowchart illustrating processing during a fanfare / interval according to a fifteenth embodiment. 29 is a flowchart illustrating processing during a fanfare / interval according to a fifteenth embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the solenoid information setting process of Example 15. It is a flowchart which shows the process transition setting process 1 of the big prize opening open | release of Example 15. FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the process transition setting process 2 during the big prize opening opening of Example 15. It is a flowchart which shows the special winning opening open process of Example 15. It is a flowchart which shows the big winning opening residual ball process transfer setting process of Example 15. It is a flowchart which shows the process transition setting process 3 during the big prize opening opening of Example 15. FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing a special winning opening remaining ball process according to Embodiment 15. FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the fanfare / interval process transfer setting process 2 of Example 15. It is a flowchart which shows the big hit end process transfer setting process of Example 15. It is a flowchart which shows the big jackpot end process of Example 15. It is a flowchart which shows the big hit end setting process 1 of Example 15. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot end setting process 2 of Example 15. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure normal process transfer setting process 3 of Example 15. It is a flowchart which shows the production command setting process of Example 15. It is a flowchart which shows the symbol variation control process of Example 15. It is a flowchart which shows the usual game process of Example 15. 27 is a flowchart illustrating a gate switch monitoring process according to the fifteenth embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the general power prize winning switch monitoring process of Example 15. It is a flowchart which shows the usual figure normal process of Example 15. It is a flowchart which shows the usual figure normal process transfer setting process 1 of Example 15. It is a flowchart which shows the process transition setting process in the common figure fluctuation of Example 15. It is a flowchart which shows the process during common figure change of Example 15. It is a flowchart which shows the process transition setting process in the normal map display of Example 15. It is a flowchart which shows the process during normal map display of Example 15. It is a flowchart which shows the process transition setting process during a normal figure of Example 15. It is a flowchart which shows the process during a common figure of Example 15. It is a flowchart which shows the general electric operation transfer setting process of Example 15. It is a flowchart which shows the general electric power residual ball process of Example 15. It is a flowchart which shows the end process shift setting process of the common figure of Example 15. It is a flowchart which shows the end process per common figure of Example 15. It is a flowchart which shows the usual figure normal process transfer setting process 2 of Example 15. It is a flowchart which shows the main process of the payout control apparatus of Example 15. It is a flowchart which shows the nighttime monitoring information reception process of Example 15. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process of the payout control apparatus of Example 15. FIG. 25 is a flowchart illustrating main control command reception processing according to a fifteenth embodiment. FIG. FIG. 25 is a flowchart illustrating main control ID reception processing according to the fifteenth embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the card unit command reception process of Example 15. 27 is a flowchart illustrating switch monitoring processing according to the fifteenth embodiment. FIG. 38 is a flowchart illustrating an out-sphere detection switch monitoring process according to the fifteenth embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the safe ball | bowl detection switch monitoring process of Example 15. It is a flowchart which shows the launch ball detection switch monitoring process of Example 15. 25 is a flowchart illustrating error / injustice monitoring processing according to the fifteenth embodiment. 27 is a flowchart illustrating an error release switch monitoring process according to the fifteenth embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the enclosure ball number monitoring process of Example 15. It is a flowchart which shows the board surface ball number error monitoring process of Example 15. It is a flowchart which shows the winning number abnormality monitoring process of Example 15. 27 is a flowchart illustrating a frame opening error monitoring process according to the fifteenth embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the frame switch abnormality monitoring process of Example 15. It is a flowchart which shows the frame radio wave fraud monitoring process of Example 15. It is a flowchart which shows the small ball fraud monitoring process of Example 15. It is a flowchart which shows the magnetic body bulb | ball fraud monitoring process of Example 15. It is a flowchart which shows the nighttime monitoring fraud monitoring process of Example 15. 29 is a flowchart illustrating a launch control process according to the fifteenth embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the discharge permission condition setting process of Example 15. 18 is a flowchart showing a polishing apparatus control process according to Embodiment 15. 27 is a flowchart illustrating a feeding device control process according to the fifteenth embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the number-of-balls management process of Example 15. It is a flowchart which shows the count switch monitoring process of Example 15. It is a flowchart which shows the counting ball use monitoring process of Example 15. It is a flowchart which shows the ball removal control process of Example 15. It is a flowchart which shows the adjustment control process of Example 15. It is a flowchart which shows the adjustment start monitoring process of Example 15. It is a flowchart which shows the adjustment write completion monitoring process of Example 15. It is a flowchart which shows the payment end monitoring process of Example 15. It is a flowchart which shows the break control process of Example 15. It is a flowchart which shows the break start monitoring process of Example 15. It is a flowchart which shows the break end monitoring process of Example 15. 27 is a flowchart illustrating LED editing processing according to the fifteenth embodiment. 29 is a flowchart illustrating error LED editing processing according to the fifteenth embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the number-of-balls LED editing process of Example 15. It is a flowchart which shows the number-of-balls display data setting process of Example 15. It is a flowchart which shows the count ball number LED edit process of Example 15. FIG. 25 is a flowchart illustrating main control command transmission processing according to a fifteenth embodiment. FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the card unit command transmission process of Example 15. It is a flowchart which shows the card unit command transmission process of Example 15. 29 is a flowchart illustrating a recovery response process according to the fifteenth embodiment. 27 is a flowchart illustrating a recovery detail response process according to the fifteenth embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the communication start response process of Example 15. It is a flowchart which shows the communication end response process of Example 15. It is a flowchart which shows the status information response process of Example 15. It is a flowchart which shows the card insertion response process of Example 15. It is a flowchart which shows the card return response process of Example 15. It is a flowchart which shows the break confirmation response process of Example 15. It is a flowchart which shows the break start response process of Example 15. It is a flowchart which shows the break end response process of Example 15. It is a flowchart which shows the adjustment confirmation response process of Example 15. It is a flowchart which shows the adjustment start response process of Example 15. It is a flowchart which shows the adjustment completion response process of Example 15. It is a flowchart which shows the count use response process of Example 15. 25 is a flowchart showing a gaming machine ID transmission process according to the fifteenth embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the game stop signal edit process of Example 15. It is a figure explaining the display of the number of balls at the time of the power failure recovery of Example 15. FIG. 18 is a timing chart of the operation at the time of power failure recovery in Example 15. It is a figure explaining operation | movement of the main liquid crystal display device at the time of a power failure recovery of Example 15, and a sub liquid crystal display device. It is a timing chart of the operation | movement which detects the irregular | improper sphere (magnetic body sphere) of Example 15. 22 is an operation timing chart for detecting illegal spheres (small spheres) in Example 15. It is a figure which shows the modification of the circulation structure of the enclosure bulb | ball of Example 15. FIG.

Hereinafter, as a first embodiment of the present invention, a mode example in the case where the present invention is applied to a pachinko machine that is an enclosed ball type gaming machine will be described with reference to the drawings.
A. Front Configuration of Pachinko Machine First, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine of this example will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine 1 (enclosed ball game machine) of this example.

  This pachinko machine 1 is called a so-called encapsulated ball game machine, and includes a game control device (see FIG. 6) for managing and controlling the progress of the game, and a predetermined number (for example, 30) in the game machine body. ) Of game balls, and based on the number of possessed balls (game value) based on the valuable value information (ball rental number) input from the card unit (CR unit) 15 as a game medium lending device, The enclosed game ball is fired into the game area to play a game, and it is determined whether the game result is in a predetermined profit state or other state. Circulating this enclosed game ball by increasing the number of possessed balls (game value) that is the player's profit according to the number of prize balls and collecting the game balls that have passed through the game area and guiding them to the launch position It is a mechanism to use and play pachinko gamesHere, the card unit 15 corresponds to a medium control unit that reads and writes information recorded in a game storage medium (game card or the like).

Here, the material of the game ball sealed in the pachinko machine 1 will be described.
As the material of the game ball, a non-magnetic material is used, and specifically, for example, austenitic stainless steel SUS316 is used. This is because a non-magnetic sphere is used as a countermeasure against improper magnets, and it does not rust even without plating.
Typical austenitic stainless steels include SUS304 (18Cr-8Ni) and SUS316 (18Cr-12Ni-2.5Mo). By adding Ni (nickel), it becomes austenite at room temperature and becomes a non-magnetic material. SUS316 is particularly excellent in corrosion resistance.
As the number of game balls to be encapsulated, for example, 30 are encapsulated. Note that the number of enclosing balls is not limited to the predetermined number 30 as described above, and for example, 20 enclosing balls may be encapsulated.

The pachinko machine 1 has a machine frame 2 fixed to an island where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, and is pivotally supported by the machine frame 2 at a hinge portion 3 so that the machine frame 2 can be pivoted. And a front frame 4 that can be freely opened and closed. A game board 20 (shown in FIG. 2) is attached to the front frame 4.
A glass frame 5 is attached to the front frame 4 so as to be openable and closable so as to cover the upper front side. Note that a game area 22 (to be described later) of the game board 20 can be viewed from the front through a glass plate (a transparent plastic board may be omitted) held by the glass frame 5. The glass frame 5 is pivotally supported by the front frame 4 at the hinge portion 3 so as to be opened and closed. That is, the glass frame 5 including the glass plate opens the front surface of the game board 20 from a normal use state (closed state) covering the front surface of the game board 20 (a front surface including a game area 22 described later) with a slight gap. It is possible to operate in a state (open state). In the open state of the glass frame 5, for example, an operator inserts a hand into the front surface of the game board 20 to release a clogged ball in the game area 22 or to insert a missing game ball. Is possible.
In addition, although the front frame 4 is called by the name of a game frame and the glass frame 5 may be called by the name of the front frame, in this embodiment, the front frame 4 and the glass frame 5 are used for explanation.

Here, the general concept of the machine frame 2, the front frame 4, and the glass frame 5 will be described.
From the large classification of frames, the machine frame 2, the front frame 4, and the glass frame 5 are included in the concept of frames. When the frame is divided into an outer frame and an inner frame, the outer frame is referred to as a “support” in the superordinate concept, and the inner frame is referred to as a “main body frame” in the superordinate concept. In this case, the machine frame 2 corresponds to an outer frame, and the front frame 4 corresponds to an inner frame.
However, the concept of “support” may include the concept of outer frame + inner frame, and may also be expressed as a concept including a casing whose rear surface is closed.
On the other hand, the concept of “main body frame” includes the concept of an inner frame + glass frame.
The glass frame 5 is referred to as a “transparent plate holding frame” in the superordinate concept. In this case, the “transparent plate holding frame” may be expressed by a concept including an upper plate and an upper plate + lower plate.
Therefore, the concept of the machine frame 2, the front frame 4, and the glass frame 5 is as follows.
Machine frame 2: Outer frame: “Support”
Front frame 4: Inner frame: “Body frame”
Glass frame 5: “transparent plate holding frame”

As other fine names, the concept of the machine frame 2, the front frame 4, and the glass frame 5 may be referred to as follows.
Machine frame 2: Second machine frame, support frame Front frame 4: First machine frame, front frame, frame base, game frame,
Glass frame 5: decorative frame, transparent plate assembly In addition, Example 1 is an example of an enclosed ball type gaming machine, and the upper plate and the lower plate are not installed, but the upper plate is a “reservoir” (the lower plate is The lower plate is sometimes referred to by the concept of “receiving tray”.

Returning to the description of FIG. 1, the lower panel 6 is provided below the glass frame 5, and the operation display device 7, the number-of-balls display 40, and the decorative ball display device 250 are arranged on the lower panel 6. ing. The decorative ball display device 250 includes an upper decorative ball display device 250a and a lower decorative ball display device 250b. The upper decorative ball display device 250a is designed to create an image of a so-called upper plate, is arranged on the upper side of the operation display device 7, and includes a large number of LEDs. In the upper decorative ball display device 250a, for example, when the number of balls held by the player is 100 or more, all the LEDs are turned on or moved and blinked, and when the number of held balls is 50 or less, half of all the LEDs are turned off. Control of the decoration is performed.
On the other hand, the lower decorative ball display device 250b is designed to create an image of a so-called ball box, and is disposed on the lower side of the operation display device 7 (lower than the ball holding number display 40). It consists of LEDs. In the lower decorative ball display device 250b, for example, when the number of counted balls = 0, all the LEDs are turned off, and during the counting of the number of balls, the lower decorative ball display device that images the ball box from the upper decorative ball display device 250a. Decoration control is performed so that the LED (this part corresponds to the counting decoration unit 250c as described below) is moved and blinked so that the sphere moves toward 250b. Then, the LED is turned on sequentially from the lower part of the lower decorative ball display device 250b in the image of a ball box according to the number of counted balls, and the decoration control is performed so that the player can know the approximate number of counted balls by the number of LEDs turned on. (Details will be described later in the operation). The portion where the LED of the lower decorative ball display device 250b moves and blinks during counting of the number of balls is referred to as a counting decoration unit 250c.
The number-of-balls display 40 (number-of-balls display device) displays the number of balls possessed by the player (that is, the game value as a player's profit), and six 7-segment LEDs are arranged. 6 digits (number of balls) can be displayed.
Here, the number-of-balls display 40 constitutes first game value display means for displaying the game value of the player under the management of the game machine (specifically, the payout control device 230).

Further, the lower panel 6 is provided with a counting switch 311, a break switch 312, a counting ball display 313, a counting ball use switch 314, and an effect operation switch 9.
The counting switch 311, the break switch 312, and the counting ball use switch 314 are turned on (or alternately turned on and off) when the player presses the operation unit (button) on the surface of these switches. Further, the counting ball display 313 is configured to light up if there is a counting ball.
The count switch 311 is operated when the player desires to count the number of balls, and when the count switch 311 is pressed, the count of the number of balls is started. A count switch LED is provided inside the count switch 311, and the count switch LED is lit when urging to press the count switch 311. As described above, the counting switch 311 has a configuration in which the counting switch LED is incorporated.
The break switch 312 is operated when the player desires to take a break. When the break switch 312 is pressed, the gaming machine shifts to the break mode. A break switch effective LED is provided inside the break switch 312. The break switch effective LED lights up when a break is possible. As described above, the break switch 312 has a built-in break switch effective LED.

The counting ball use switch 314 is operated when the player wishes to move the ball from the counting ball number to the holding ball number. When the counting ball use switch 314 is operated once, the counting ball use number is determined from the counting ball number. The movement of the ball (for example, a predetermined amount = 100 balls) is started. In other words, the counting ball use switch 314 corresponds to the concept of a switch used to start an operation of transferring a ball from a ball box to an upper plate. A counting ball use switch LED is provided inside the counting ball use switch 314, and the counting ball use switch LED is lit when the ball can move from the counting ball number to the holding ball number. As described above, the counting ball use switch 314 has a built-in counting ball use switch LED.
The production operation switch 9 can be involved in the production within a certain range and is operated by the player. The production operation switch 9 has a push button type switch (indicated as button P in FIG. 1) in the center and corresponds to a so-called cross key. It has four switches arranged vertically and horizontally. The push button type switch (button P) at the center can be involved in the production within a certain range when pressed by the player, and appears on the screen of the display device 41 by pressing the four switches arranged vertically and horizontally, for example. You can select numbers and symbols.
On the other hand, the pachinko machine 1 is provided with the card unit 15 (card type medium control unit). The card unit 15 inserts a game card (storage medium: game value storage medium) into the card slot 201, and the player operates the ball lending button 303 (see FIG. 7) of the operation display device 7, A predetermined number of balls can be lent (increased number of balls) within the range of valuable value information (for example, the number of balls lent) recorded on the game card.

In addition, the card unit 15 is provided with a cash slot 202. The cash input port 202 is capable of inputting cash. By inserting a predetermined banknote (for example, 1000 yen, 5000 yen, or 10,000 yen), the cash slot 202 falls within the range of the ball lending degree corresponding to the amount of the inserted banknote. A game ball is rented (ie, lending a ball; increasing the number of balls held). At this time, a prepaid card (a visitor card described later) corresponding to the inserted cash is issued inside the card unit 15.
As game cards that can be used in the card unit 15, in addition to prepaid cards (hereinafter referred to as visitor cards) that can be used by non-member general players, it is also possible to use a unique membership card called a house card. Yes, in that case, a membership card as a game card is inserted into the card slot 201. When this member card is inserted, it is possible to use a configuration in which the storage can be used on condition that the password of the member is input on the screen of the message / operation area unit 306 of the operation display device 7. Note that an LCD touch panel type screen is adopted as the screen of the operation display device 7, and the player can touch the touch panel with a finger and input a personal identification number.
Further, a card unit error notification LED 203 is disposed in the card unit 15, and the card unit error notification LED 203 notifies of an error that has occurred in the card unit 15.

As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 20 has game nails planted on the front surface of a plate-like base material (so-called veneer). 22 is formed. The game area 22 is an area where a game ball that has been thrown in is dropped from above and a determination of whether it is out or safe (determination of whether or not a prize has been won) is made. Is configured such that data of a predetermined number of game balls set in accordance with the type of winning opening is added to the number of balls held by the player as a prize ball.
Returning to FIG. 1, a key insertion portion 8 of a locking device (not shown) for the front frame 4 and the glass frame 5 is formed at the opening / closing side (right side in FIG. 1) of the front frame 4. .

Further, the operation display device 7 provided at the lower part of the glass frame 5 is for displaying the number of ball lending and the like and performing operations such as ball lending (see FIG. 7 for details).
Here, the operation display device 7 is under the control of the card unit 15 and is controlled by the card unit 15, and is attached to the pachinko machine 1 later when the pachinko machine 1 is installed. That is, when installing the pachinko machine 1 in the amusement store, first the pachinko machine 1 is installed, then the card unit 15 is installed, and then the operation display device 7 is attached to the installed pachinko machine 1. It has become. Note that the pachinko machine 1 may be installed after the card unit 15 is installed. Also in this case, the operation display device 7 is attached after the pachinko machine 1 is installed.
Next to the operation display device 7, as described above, the presentation operation switch 9 (first production operation unit) is a push button type operated by the player and has four switches arranged vertically and horizontally. Is provided.
The lower panel 6 is provided with a lower speaker 10 that outputs sound effects and the like, a firing operation handle 11 that performs a launching operation of a game ball, and an ashtray 12.
Furthermore, in FIG. 1, what is shown by the code | symbol 13 is the decoration lamp which uses LED (light emitting diode) provided in the front surface of the glass frame 5 as a light emission source, and what is shown by the codes | symbols 14a and 14b of the glass frame 5 It is a plurality of moving lights provided on the lower front surface. Although not shown, the moving lights 14a and 14b include an LED as a light source and a motor as a drive source. Here, the decoration lamp 13 and the moving lights 14a and 14b constitute the decoration display LED 141 shown in FIG.
Further, in FIG. 1, reference numerals 16 a and 16 b denote upper speakers that output sound effects and the like provided on the upper left and right sides of the glass frame 5.

Further, in the first embodiment, a level meter left 17L and a level meter right 17R as variable display devices are provided on the left and right sides of the game board 20, respectively. These level meter left 17L and level meter right 17R have display portions 17a and 17b that are mechanically movable up and down, respectively, and the display portions 17a and 17b are reliability meters related to big hits in normal times. As shown above, an effect that shows the big hit reliability by moving up and down (for example, an effect that increases as the degree of expectation for the big hit increases), and if there is a counting ball, one level meter, for example, the level meter right 17R, The function of the counting display device is exhibited to produce an effect of displaying the counting ball number in an analog manner.
Here, the analog display of the number of counting balls means that the display unit 17b moves up and down according to the number of counting balls, stops at a low position when the number of counting balls is small, and moves to a high position when the number of counting balls increases. It is an effect that informs the player about the number of counted balls in analog. That is, the display unit 17b is configured to rise as the number of counting balls increases, so that the player can grasp the approximate number of counting balls sensuously.
In addition, when the operation of the pachinko machine 1 is stopped due to a power failure, the display unit 17b is configured to stop at the position of the number of counting balls at the time of the power failure and remain at that position (because of a mechanically movable mechanism), It is possible to notify the player that the acquired game ball is held.

B. 2. In FIG. 2, reference numeral 21 denotes a guide rail of the game board 20. As described above, a game area 22 is formed by surrounding a substantially circular area on the front face of the game board with the guide rail 21. ing.
As shown in FIG. 2, the game area 22 includes an out ball inlet 23, a center case 24, a first start winning port 25, a second starting winning port 26 as an ordinary electric accessory (general power), and a variable winning device. 27, general winning holes 28 to 31, a general start gate 32, a sub liquid crystal display device 33, a number of game nails (not shown), and the like. A collective display device 35 is provided outside the game area 22 of the game board 20. The game nails flow down while hitting the game balls that have entered the upper part of the game area 22, and a plurality of game nails are planted in the game area excluding the attachment portion such as the center case.

Here, the above-described out-ball inflow port 23 is a portion through which a ball that has passed through the game area and the game result is out (out) flows in, and has a different concept from the number of outs described later.
That is, all the balls launched into the game area 22 by the operation of the launch solenoid 173 described later, except for the foul balls, will be played in the process of flowing down the game area 22, and the balls won in any of the winning openings. Is a safe (winning), and a ball that does not win any of the winning mouths results in a game result of out. In that case, the safe ball generates a prize ball, but in the case of an enclosed ball game machine, the prize ball number is only electronically added to the number of possessed balls, and no real ball is discharged. Then, as shown in FIG. 4, the safe ball flows into a game ball inlet 71 for taking in a collected ball from the board surface (game board 22).
On the other hand, an out ball that does not win any of the winning holes becomes a game result of losing (out), and after passing through the out ball inlet 23, it flows into the game ball inlet 71 for taking in the collected balls from the board surface (game board 22). To do.
In addition, although the ball that became a foul was fired to the game area 22 by the operation of the launch solenoid 173, but did not reach the game area 22, it flowed into the game ball inlet 71 without generating a game result. Again, it will return to the launch position.
The number of outs to be described later is a concept including a safe (winning) ball and an out (out) ball. In short, a game result is generated by passing through the game area 22, and the outside (here, the game board 20). This is a ball that is collected outside the board (not outside the gaming machine) and does not include a foul ball. For this reason, the number of balls that come out of the game board 20 after the game is ended is called the number of outs. On the other hand, the foul ball once comes out of the game board 20 but is not included in the number of outs because the game has not ended. The number of outs is detected by an out sphere detection switch 163 shown in FIG. 6 described later, and the foul sphere is detected by a foul sphere detection switch 162 shown in FIG. 6 described later.

The center case 24 is a member that surrounds the front periphery of the display unit 41a (shown in FIG. 2) of the display device 41 (shown in FIG. 6) attached to the back side of the game board 20. Although not shown in the figure, the center case 24 includes lamps that use LEDs for production or decoration as light sources, and electric accessories that enhance production effects in cooperation with production display on the display device 41 (for example, An accessory having a movable part that is operated by a driving source such as a motor or a solenoid).
Here, the center case 24 is classified into a “game board structure” from a large classification, and is represented by a superordinate concept “game effect component”. The “game production component” includes the concept of “center front frame + center back frame”.
Note that lamps for effect or decoration are also provided in portions other than the center case 24 of the game board 20 (may be outside the game area 22). It should be noted that lamps for performance or decoration provided on the game board 20 (including the center case 24) constitute a board decoration device. The electric accessory provided in the center case 24 constitutes a board effect device. It should be noted that the electric accessory constituting the board effect device may be provided at a place other than the center case 24 of the game board 20.

The display device 41 (production means) includes, for example, a liquid crystal display device, and is usually called a variable display device. In addition, as the name of the display device 41, there are various names such as a special figure display device, a symbol variation device, a variable symbol display device, an identification information variation device, an identification information variation display device, etc. Items with the same function are in the same category.
The display device 41 has a display unit 41a (screen) capable of displaying identification information (referred to as a special figure) such as numbers and characters, and can display a plurality of special figures. For example, special charts are displayed in three vertical columns on the left, center, and right, and special figures consisting of numbers, letters, etc. in each column are displayed in a stopped state (stop display), or in a fluctuating state (for example, vertically) Display in a scrolling state) (that is, a variable display).
Here, the display device 41 constitutes a first display device managed by the gaming machine.
In addition to the special figure, the display unit 41a can display an image for production such as a background image or a character image or an information notification image, or an image corresponding to a so-called common figure. Note that the special figure is identification information that is variably displayed in the variable display game related to the big hit, and the common figure is identification information that is variably displayed in the variable display game related to the common figure (not the big hit). .

The start winning ports 25 and 26 are winning ports that function as start winning ports for special drawings as will be described later. In this example, they are arranged side by side as shown in FIG. The upper first start winning opening 25 is always open. The lower second start winning opening 26 has opening / closing members 26a on both left and right sides, and when these opening / closing members 26a are opened in a reverse C shape, a winning can be made. As shown in FIG. It is impossible to win if it is closed. The start winning ports 25 and 26 are disposed below the center portion of the center case 24.
The second start winning opening is also referred to as an ordinary electric accessory (general power), and corresponds to an ordinary variable winning device.
The variable winning device 27 is a device (so-called attacker) having a large winning opening 27a that is opened and closed by an opening / closing member 27b. This special winning opening 27a is opened on condition that a big hit, which will be described later, is made, and game balls can be won.

As described above, for example, an image of a normal map is also displayed on the display unit 41a (screen) of the display device 41 in addition to the special drawing. The general game will be described as follows. In this case, the display device 41 corresponds to a general-purpose display device.
When the game ball passes through the normal map start gate 32, the normal map variable display game by the variable display of the normal map on the display unit 41a or the like (an independent general map display device may be arranged separately from the display device 41). (Hereinafter, referred to as a normal map display game) is performed, and if the stopped general map is in a predetermined mode (specific display mode), a privilege called per map is granted.
When hitting the usual figure, a game is held in which the pair of opening and closing members 26a of the second start winning opening 26 are opened in a reverse C shape, and are temporarily held for a predetermined opening time, and the game ball is started. It becomes easier to win, and accordingly, the number of executions of the special figure variable display game increases and the possibility of winning a big game increases.
Further, during the above-described variable display game, when a game ball is further won in the general figure start gate 32, the display unit 41a or the like (even if the original general figure start memory display is arranged separately from the display device 41). (Preferably), the pending display of the usual figure start memory is executed, for example, up to four are stored, and after the usual variable display game is completed, the above-mentioned usual figure variable display game is repeated based on the memory. In addition, if the probability of the usual figure is set to a high probability, it becomes easier to hit the ordinary figure.

Here, the short time will be described as follows.
Abbreviation of time is an abbreviation of “time reduction”. After the big hit, the special figure and the usual figure change time is shortened more than usual, the time efficiency is increased, and the probability per ordinary figure is increased. The number of executions of a variable display game with a certain special figure by supporting the winning at the starting gate by opening the (second starting winning gate 26) (including extending the opening time of the electric train longer than usual) It is a function to change the special figure efficiently without reducing the number of balls (number of balls). Hereinafter, such a state in which the time reduction is being executed is referred to as a normal power support state or a time reduction state.

Next, the collective display device 35 displays a so-called ordinary figure display, special figure display, a special figure or general figure start-up memory hold display (sometimes referred to as a special figure hold display, a general figure hold display), a game, Display of status, for example, a plurality of indicators using LED as a light source (for example, a display composed of one small lamp, or a 7-segment display capable of displaying numbers as a special figure) Instrument). Note that the start memory hold display (in some cases, simply referred to as the start memory display) is a display for informing the number of start memories that are held in a state in which the variable display game is not executed, and generally Is displayed by lighting a lamp or the like for each start memory. In other words, if there are three start memories, the three lamps are turned on or three figures are displayed.
A detailed configuration of the collective display device 35 will be described later with reference to FIG.

Note that what is displayed by the indicator of the collective display device 35 is the special figure or the ordinary figure (formal special figure or ordinary figure), whereas the above-described display unit of the variable display device 41 or the like. The special map and the general map display to be performed are dummy displays for effects for the player. For this reason, the special display and the general figure as viewed from the player indicate the dummy display. In the following, when emphasizing this dummy display, for example, “decorative map” and “decorative map” are described.
As described above, the collective display device 35 (see FIG. 6 described later for details) may be difficult for the player to recognize, but is directly controlled by the game control device 54 described later. It is what is used. For example, a special chart start memory display (special figure hold display) for a player that is more easily recognized by the player is displayed on the display unit 41 or a plurality of lamps provided on the game board 20 as described above, for example. (Light emitting unit).
In the present embodiment, as described above, the sub liquid crystal display device 33 is provided, and the sub liquid crystal display device 33 is provided on one side of the game area 22 and on the side of the display unit 41a in the display device 41 (almost). Near the center of the board). In contrast to the sub liquid crystal display device 33, the display device 42 is referred to as a main liquid crystal display device for convenience of explanation.
The sub liquid crystal display device 33 is formed smaller than the display device 41 and has a configuration capable of displaying various information on a liquid crystal screen, and is controlled by an effect control device 53 on the gaming machine side. Specifically, the sub liquid crystal display device 33 displays the number of counting balls, and when there is no counting ball, displays an effect (for example, a model name display or an effect linked with the main liquid crystal display device). However, although the sub liquid crystal display device 33 displays the number of counting balls, there are cases where the effect display is prioritized over the counting ball number display (for example, when a reach with a high degree of expectation for a big hit occurs). Later on).

C. Next, FIG. 3 is a diagram showing a back mechanism of the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment.
Here, the back mechanism is called by the concept of a back surface structure from a large classification. The back surface structure corresponds to the concept of the center back frame, and the back surface structure may be represented by the concept of a back partition plate, a back decoration unit, a back structure, and a rear unit.
In FIG. 3, main components of the back mechanism in the pachinko machine 1 include an external information terminal board 51, a card unit connection terminal board 52, an effect control device 53, a game control device 54, a payout control device 230, a circulation device 55, a polishing device. There are a device 56, a launching device 57, a power supply device 58, a polishing control device 59, and the like.
In addition, there is no component equivalent to a conventional storage tank (upper tank) or a safe unit (non-enclosed ball type).

The external information terminal board 51 is a substrate for wiring connection between the pachinko machine 1 side and the card unit 15 side, and only transmits information unilaterally from the pachinko machine 1 side to the card unit 15 side. There is no input from the side to the pachinko machine 1 side. In particular, the external information terminal board 51 is used to output game information from the pachinko machine 1 to the hall computer 86 (described later) via the card unit 15.
On the other hand, the card unit connection terminal board 52 is also a board for wiring connection between the pachinko machine 1 side and the card unit 15 side, but not only transmits information from the pachinko machine 1 side to the card unit 15 side but also the card unit. This is a board for wiring connection that allows input from the 15 side to the pachinko machine 1 side. That is, it is a board for wiring connection that can transmit information from both the pachinko machine 1 and the card unit 15.
As described above, since the operation display device 7 is under the control of the card unit 15 and is controlled by the card unit 15, the operation display device 7 is directly connected to the card unit 15 through a harness. It is like that. Therefore, an opening 69 for harness connecting the operation display device 7 and the card unit 15 is provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 1. Therefore, the card unit 15 can input and output information, signals, and the like with the operation display device 7 via a directly connected harness.
In the present embodiment, the external information terminal board 51 and the card unit connection terminal board 52 are separated from each other. However, they may be configured as a single substrate, for example.
The effect control device 53 drives and controls the display device 41, the lower speaker 10, the upper speakers 16a, 16b, and the like based on a control command output from the game control device 54, and realizes this control function in a predetermined case. A circuit board is accommodated.

  The game control device 54 is a main control device (main board) that manages a game such as a special drawing, and various switches, solenoids, Electric components such as lamps (electrical accessories) are electrically controlled, and control information is sent to other control devices to comprehensively manage and control the progress of the game, including a microcomputer that performs these controls A circuit board on which a circuit is formed is housed in a predetermined case 61. The case 61 has a security structure that prevents easy opening by the four caulking portions 62a, 62b, 62c, and 62d. In other words, in a state where the crimped portion is sealed, the structure cannot be opened unless the crimped portion is destroyed. Further, only the number of times corresponding to the number of crimped portions can be sealed. On the back side of the game control device 54, an inspection device connection terminal 63 to which a cable for the authorities to inspect the pachinko machine 1 is connected.

  The payout control device 230 manages the number of encapsulated balls and the number of balls held (payout control board), and a circuit board on which a circuit including a microcomputer for performing the control is formed is housed in a predetermined case 64. It becomes the composition. The case 64 has a security structure that prevents easy opening by four caulking portions 65a, 65b, 65c, and 65d. In other words, in a state where the crimped portion is sealed, the structure cannot be opened unless the crimped portion is destroyed. Further, only the number of times corresponding to the number of crimped portions can be sealed. On the back side of the payout control device 230, an inspection device connection terminal 66 to which a cable for the authorities to inspect the pachinko machine 1 is connected, an error display LED 67 that lights (or blinks) when a predetermined abnormality occurs, and an error is released An error canceling switch 68 is provided for this purpose.

The circulation device 55 is for circulating the encapsulated sphere enclosed in the pachinko machine 1, and a polishing device 56 is disposed in the circulation path (details will be described later).
The launching device 57 launches a sphere, and is configured by housing a device that realizes this function in a predetermined case. The power supply device 58 uses a commercial AC power supply (for example, AC 100 V) as an input power supply, and supplies necessary power to each control device and each electronic component of the pachinko machine 1 from this input power supply. Note that the commercial AC power supply is not limited to AC 100 V, and for example, an AC 24 V may be supplied to each gaming machine in units of islands and the AC 24 V may be used as an input power source.

FIG. 4 is a diagram illustrating an internal configuration of the circulation device 55.
In FIG. 4, the circulation device 55 is formed in a flat plate structure having a predetermined thickness, and a flow path (described later) for circulating an enclosed ball (enclosed game ball) is formed therein. The circulation device 55 is provided with a polishing device 56 in the flow path portion. The flow path in the circulation device 55 constitutes a circulation path for the encapsulated sphere. Note that a game ball inlet 71 for taking in a collected ball from the board surface (game board 22) is opened at the upper part of the circulation device 55 in FIG.
As described above, the safe ball and the out ball that have finished the game on the game board 22 are taken in the game ball entrance 71 as the collection balls, and the foul balls that have become fouls without being fired on the game board 22 are also collected balls. Is taken in as. Since the foul ball has not reached the game area 22, no game result is generated, but it flows into the game ball inlet 71 and returns to the launch position again.
The polishing device 56 polishes the encapsulated sphere, and the sphere that has flowed from the lower inlet 72 is lifted by the lifting screw 73 by the power of the polishing motor 70, and a polishing member 74 (for example, a polishing cloth) disposed therein is used. ) Is polished and discharged from the upper outlet 75 through the polishing outlet switch 76. The polishing outlet switch 76 detects the sphere discharged from the upper outlet 75, and if the polishing outlet switch 76 does not detect the discharge of the sphere from the upper outlet 75 for a certain period of time or more, abnormalities such as a sphere clogging in the polishing apparatus 56 are detected. Thus, the polishing motor 70 of the polishing apparatus 56 is prevented from continuing to rotate (details will be described later).
Note that the sphere flows into the polishing device 56 through the polishing inflow guide path 80 in which the sphere is switched by the switching valve 79 via the sphere feed channel 78 provided subsequent to the sensor channel 77 in the circulation device 55. In other cases, the switching valve 79 blocks the inflow of the sphere into the polishing inflow guide path 80.

That is, in a state in which the encapsulated sphere does not flow into the polishing device 56 (hereinafter referred to as encapsulated sphere circulation), the circulator 55 is connected to the out sphere (including the safe sphere) and the foul from the game sphere inlet 71 opened at the top of the circulator 55. The sphere is caused to flow into the sensor flow path 77 and the sphere is moved downward by gravity, and the sphere flowing down from the game sphere inlet 71 in this way is caused by its own weight to cause the first enclosed sphere detection switch 164 (encapsulated sphere detection 1SW) and the second Ball feed for firing a ball through a ball feed channel 78 provided subsequent to the sensor channel 77 after passing through the sensor channel 77 in which the enclosed ball detection switch 165 (encapsulated ball detection 2SW) is arranged. It is configured to be sent to the device (device provided on the left end side in FIG. 4). A switching valve 79 is provided in front of the ball feeding device (the device provided on the left end side in FIG. 4) in the ball feeding flow path 78. The switching valve 79 is provided with a switching solenoid 79S (see FIG. 6), and is a position that prevents a part of the ball feed passage 78 from being slid by the switching solenoid 79S to open the polishing guide port 80a during circulation of the enclosed sphere. The sealed ball type is not moved to the lower polishing inflow guide path 80.
Therefore, during the enclosed ball circulation, the enclosed ball, which is a collected ball from the board surface (game board 20), flows from the game ball inlet 71, passes through the sensor flow path 77, passes through the ball feed flow path 78, and passes through the ball. The ball sent to the ball feeding device for launching and is sent to the launch position is launched toward the game area 22 along the rail 21 by the power of the launch solenoid 173 (shown in FIG. 6) of the launch device, The route of circulating out of the game ball inlet 71 as a collection ball again as an out ball (including a safe ball) or a foul ball circulates repeatedly.

Here, as described above, the switching valve 79 does not slide the switching solenoid 79S, the switching valve 79 urges the valve body by the spring to close the polishing guide port 80a, and the sealed ball does not flow into the polishing device 56. (Encapsulated ball circulation) corresponds to a normal state in which the game ball is circulated through the game board 20 inside the pachinko machine 1 without using the polishing device 56, and this route is referred to as a game circulation route. Therefore, in the game circulation path, an encapsulated sphere that is a collection sphere from the board surface is a game ball inlet 71, a sensor channel 77, a ball feed channel 78, a ball feed device, and the launch solenoid 173 of the launch device launches the ball onto the board surface, Under the surface of the board, the path again passes through the game ball entrance 71 as a collected ball.

On the other hand, when the ball is polished by flowing the sealed ball into the polishing device 56 instead of circulating the sealed ball, the ball feeding device in the ball feeding flow path 78 (the device provided on the left end side in FIG. 4) is in front. The provided switching valve 79 slides a part of the ball feed channel 78 by the switching solenoid 79S to open the polishing guide port 80a, and the encapsulated sphere is passed through the polishing guide port 80a to the lower polishing inflow guide channel 80 by gravity. Operates to move. As a result, the encapsulated spheres present in the sensor flow path 77 and the ball feed flow path 78 are guided by gravity to the lower polishing inflow guiding path 80 through the polishing guide opening 80a, and flow through the polishing inflow guiding path 80 to enter the lower inlet. From 72, it flows into the polishing apparatus 56, and ball polishing is performed. When the polishing of the sphere by the polishing device 56 is completed, the sphere is discharged from the upper outlet 75 through the polishing outlet switch 76 to the sensor flow path 77 and flows again into the polishing device 56 from the lower inlet 72 through the above-described path. The ball will be polished. Therefore, during the ball polishing, the ball polishing by the polishing device 56 is performed by circulating through the above-described path.
Here, as described above, the switching valve 79 slides a part of the ball feeding flow path 78 by the switching solenoid 79S to open the polishing guide port 80a, and the encapsulated sphere flows into the lower polishing through the polishing guide port 80a by gravity. The state where the encapsulated sphere is moved to the guide path 80 and the encapsulated sphere flows into the polishing device 56 (during the encapsulated sphere polishing) corresponds to a sphere polished state in which the encapsulated sphere is guided to the polishing device 56 to perform polishing. That's it. Therefore, as for the polishing circulation path, the enclosed sphere is a sensor flow path 77, a ball feed flow path 78, a polishing guide port 80a, a polishing inflow guide path 80, a lower inlet 72, a polishing device 56, an upper outlet 75, a polishing outlet switch 76, and a sensor again. It becomes the path | route of discharge | emission to the flow path 77. FIG.
The switching valve 79 constitutes a path switching means for switching to either the polishing circulation path or the game circulation path.

Further, as shown in FIG. 4, the sensor flow path 77 into which the sphere flowing in from the game ball inlet 71 and the sphere discharged from the upper outlet 75 of the polishing apparatus 56 flows in gently to reduce the momentum of the sphere flowing down. It has an inclined shape. Then, the sphere that has flowed into the sensor flow channel 77 is caused by its own weight, and the sensor flow channel 77 in which the first enclosed sphere detection switch 164 (encapsulated sphere detection 1SW) and the second enclosed sphere detection switch 165 (encapsulated sphere detection 2SW) are arranged. Then, the ball is fed to a ball feeding device (device provided on the left end side in FIG. 4) for launching a ball through a ball feeding channel 78 provided subsequent to the sensor channel 77.
Here, the first enclosed sphere detection switch 164 is provided so as to detect a sphere located at a position lower than the second enclosed sphere detection switch 165 on the relatively downstream side of the sensor flow path 77. On the other hand, the second encapsulated sphere detection switch 165 is positioned higher than the first encapsulated sphere detection switch 164 on the relatively upstream side of the sensor flow channel 77 (upstream side of the first enclosed sphere detection switch 164). It is provided to detect a sphere. The first encapsulated ball detection switch 164 is a sensor that detects the lower limit of the number of balls encapsulated as a game ball, and the second encapsulated ball detection switch 165 detects the upper limit of the number of balls encapsulated as a game ball. It is a sensor. This is because the encapsulated spheres need to be encapsulated in the pachinko machine 1 without excess or deficiency. It is provided to confirm that there are encapsulated balls. The sensor flow path 77 and the ball feed flow path 78 may or may not be provided as an integral flow path.

  Of the circulation paths through which the encapsulated balls circulate, the downstream flow path (the flow path comprising the sensor flow path 77 and the ball feed flow path 78) through which the game balls collected from the game area flow toward the launch position is The vicinity of the launch position (near the leftmost ball feeder in FIG. 4) is the lowest position, and as shown in FIG. The first encapsulated ball detection switch 164 is arranged to detect the game ball at the first position in the downstream flow path, and the second encapsulated ball detection switch 165 is the first encapsulated ball detection switch 165 in the downstream flow path. It arrange | positions so that the game ball in the 2nd position upstream from a position may be detected. Here, the first position is the most upstream game ball when the game balls are accumulated in the downstream flow path by the minimum number within the appropriate range of the number of enclosed balls (the number of enclosed game balls). Is set to a position where the first enclosed ball detection switch 164 detects. Further, the second position is such that when a number of game balls exceeding the appropriate range of the number of encapsulated balls are accumulated in the downstream flow path, the second encapsulated ball detection switch 165 detects the game ball, and the appropriate range of the number of encapsulated balls is detected. The second enclosing ball detection switch 165 is set to a position that does not detect the game ball when the game balls are accumulated in the downstream flow path by the maximum number of the game balls.

In addition, at least a part (preferably the whole) of the enclosed sphere flow path (the flow path including the above-described sensor flow path 77, the ball feed flow path 78, and the polishing inflow guide path 80) in the circulation device 55 is disposed inside. The game ball can be viewed from the outside (at least from the back side of the pachinko machine 1). Thereby, the state of the flow of the spheres in the circulation device 55, the presence or absence of the occurrence of clogging, and the state of the number of encapsulated spheres can be visually confirmed. For example, the flow path of the encapsulated sphere is made of a transparent or semi-transparent member, or a predetermined number of internal viewing openings (thin slits, a plurality of minute holes, etc.) large enough to prevent the sphere from flowing out are formed. By configuring with the formed member, the internal ball can be visually recognized from the back side of the pachinko machine 1.
Although not shown in detail, for example, the entire back wall of the circulation device 55 is made of a transparent member, so that the sensor flow path 77, the ball feed flow path 78, and the polishing inflow guide path 80 as shown in FIG. It is good also as a structure which can visually recognize the whole inside. Preferably, at least in the downstream flow path (the sensor flow path 77 and the ball feed flow path 78), the internal sphere can be visually recognized from the outside, whereby the number of enclosed spheres can be visually confirmed. ing. Although not shown, a mark may be formed on the circulation device 55 so that it is possible to accurately determine whether or not the number of encapsulated balls is appropriate by this visual confirmation. For example, marks (indicating signs) may be formed on the back side of the circulation device 55 at a predetermined number of 30 positions of the enclosing sphere. In this way, when adding a sphere when the encapsulated sphere is insufficient, it is easy to understand because it is sufficient to add up to this mark. Also, if there is an excess of encapsulated spheres, it is easy to understand because it is only necessary to pass the sphere to this mark.

  Further, the ball feeding device is a device that sends the balls flowing down the ball feeding flow path 78 one by one to the firing position of the launching device 57 using the ball feeding solenoid 172 shown in FIGS. 4 and 6 as a drive source. The ball sent to the launch position can be launched toward the game area 22 along the rail 21 by the power of the launch solenoid 173 (shown in FIG. 6) of the launch device 57. As shown in FIG. 4, the ball feeding device is provided with a shot ball detection SW 161. The fire ball detection SW 161 is a sensor that detects the balls to be fired one by one.

D. Next, FIG. 5 is a diagram showing a system configuration of a game hall where a large number of pachinko machines 1 according to the present embodiment are installed.
In FIG. 5, the game hall includes a card management device 81, a card issuing machine 82, a card settlement machine 83, a prize exchange device 84, a ball management device 85, a hall computer 86, a number of pachinko machines 1a to 1n, and card units 15a to 15a. 15n is arranged.
In addition, an external management device 91 is disposed outside the game hall.
The card management device 81 is connected to a card company (not shown) via a telephone line (for example, a digital line such as ISDN), and the card company receives various information of the card management device 81 as necessary. . The amusement hall is connected to the card company via a telephone line in order to obtain or inquire about card issuance information or necessary information from the card company.

The card management device 81 is connected to the card issuing machine 82, the card settlement machine 83, the prize exchange device 84, the ball management device 85, and a large number of card units 15a to 15n via the information transmission path 87, It is connected to the hall computer 86 via an information transmission path 88.
The card management device 81 treats the card issuing machine 82, the card settlement machine 83, the gift exchange device 84, the ball management device 85, and a large number of card units 15a to 15n as terminal devices, and manages information on these terminal devices. In addition to performing control, identification information (card ID) of a game card (member card or visitor card) inserted / extracted into each terminal device, information on the number of balls lent or stored in each game card (valuable) Control processing for storing and managing value information) is performed. For example, processing for updating and storing the balance of the ball lending number for each card ID is performed by obtaining necessary information from each card unit, the card issuing machine 82, and the like.

The card issuing machine 82 issues cards (storage media) purchased from a card company to a player as a membership card, and adds, for example, 1000 yen, 2000 yen, 3000 yen, and 5000 yen ball lending (value). And issue the card. The card issuing machine 82 transfers information (for example, the card ID of the card, the number of balls lent or sales information, etc.) to / from the card management device 81 via the information transmission path 87 and issues the card. Perform the necessary control.
Note that the game card includes a membership card and a visitor card. The membership card is issued after registering as a member, and the number of ball lending (corresponding to a ball lending amount), the number of balls held, and the number of balls stored can be registered. The visitor card is a card for a player who is not a member, is stocked in the card unit 15, and is issued in the card unit 15 when cash is inserted into the card unit 15 as will be described later. This visitor card can register the number of balls lending and the number of balls held, but not the number of balls stored. In addition, the number of balls held is valid only on that day, and the number of balls stored can be used by changing to the number of balls held at a later date. In this specification, it is described that the number of balls held corresponds to the game value, but the number of stored balls corresponds to the same valuable value as the number of balls lent.

The card checkout machine 83 is for paying out the game card based on the ball loan balance of the game card (visitor card or member card), and returns, for example, an amount corresponding to the ball loan balance in cash. The card settlement machine 83 also has a function of transferring information (for example, information on the number of spheres) to the card management device 81 via the information transmission path 87.
The prize exchange device 84 performs processing for exchanging with a prize desired by the player based on the number of balls held by the game card. For example, a store clerk at the game hall operates the prize exchange device 84 to give the player a prize. Give away a free gift. In the gift exchange device 84, in the case of a membership card, it is also possible to perform storage processing by exchanging the number of balls held for the number of balls stored.
When exchanging a prize or storing a prize, the prize exchanging device 84 transmits the card ID of the game card and the number of balls stored in the game card to the ball management device 85 (in this example, For example, it is transmitted from the prize exchange device 84 to the ball management device 85). The holding ball management device 85 collates the received card ID and holding ball number with the card ID and holding ball number stored in the holding ball number file for each card of the holding ball management device 85 described later. If the result of collation by the holding ball management device 85 is transmitted to the prize exchange device 84 as correct / incorrect information, the received prize exchange device 84 can know whether the number of held balls stored in the game card is correct.
Note that the prize exchange device 84 transmits only the card ID of the game card to the ball management device 85, and transmits the number of balls held in the number-of-card possession number file of the ball management device 85 described later. You may request that you do. In this way, the prize exchange device 84 can know whether the number of balls stored in the game card is correct or not by collating the received number of balls with the number of balls stored in the game card. .

The ball management device 85 is connected to a card management device 81, a card issuing machine 82, a card settlement machine 83, a prize exchange device 84, and a large number of card units 15a to 15n, and a player is based on information from each of these devices. Control is performed to store and manage information on the number of balls possessed by the player (game value information). For example, control processing is performed such as storing the number of balls held in association with a card ID (card identification information) in a storage area called a number-of-balls file for each card.
The card units 15a to 15n are arranged adjacent to the pachinko machines 1a to 1n, respectively, and are connected as described above so that information can be transmitted. And it is the structure which transmits the number of balls and external information (various game information output outside from each pachinko machine 1a-1n) from many pachinko machines 1a-1n to card unit 15a-15n.
The ball management device 85 can also communicate with the hall computer 86 via the card management device 81 and has a function of performing processing according to collation of ball number data from the hall computer 86 and the like.

The card units 15a to 15n, when a game card is inserted, read the game card information (ball lending number data, etc.) and perform processing for lending the ball, or the number of balls possessed by the player ( (Which may be encrypted) is stored in a game card, and information is transferred to / from the card management device 81 via an information transmission path 87.
The card units 15a to 15n are configured to periodically receive the number of balls and external information (various game information as described above) from the pachinko machines 1a to 1n, respectively. The card units 15a to 15n transmit external information collected from a number of pachinko machines 1a to 1n (various game information output from the pachinko machines 1a to 1n) to the hall computer 86 via the information transmission path 87. To do.

The hall computer 86 is installed in the game room management room, and is connected to the card units 15a to 15n via the information transmission path 87. The pachinko machines 1a to 1n are connected to the card units 15a to 15n. And collects necessary data from the ball management device 85 via the card management device 81 and supports various game states. It organizes the data to be played and manages the business of the game hall.
Specifically, necessary data is collected from a large number of pachinko machines 1a to 1n via the card units 15a to 15n, and necessary data is collected from the holding ball management device 85 via the card management device 81. Arrange data corresponding to various game states, display the arranged data on the display, and perform calculation processing of data necessary for business. Although different from the embodiment, the external information (various game information) transmitted to the hall computer 86 through the card units 15a to 1n is transmitted directly from the pachinko machines 1a to 1n to the hall computer 86. Also good.

The external management device 91 is connected to the card management device 81 via the information transmission path 92 and is managed by a third party by being arranged outside the game hall, and is related to the game card in the game hall outside the store. It has a function to back up information.
For example, data such as the number of stored balls for each gaming card, IDs of a large number of gaming cards, and a number of gaming machine IDs are collected via the card management device 81, and the number of stored balls for each gaming card is managed. Each process (including data backup) such as management of gaming machine ID is performed. In addition, if there is an inquiry from the game hall, the data is supplied as necessary. In this embodiment, the pachinko machine 1a to 1n is turned on, and the gaming machine ID (or the payout unique ID (in the embodiment described later) ( Including the unique ID of the payout control device), and the result of the verification can be transmitted to the game arcade.
Further, when the game hall quits business and closes the store, the external management device 91 provides information on management of the number of stored balls for each game card of the customer to a trusted institution.

E. Configuration of Control System Next, a control system of the pachinko machine 1 of this example will be described with reference to FIG. In the drawings and the following description, “SW” means a switch, and “SOL” means a solenoid. Further, in the drawings, when the name of the member is long, it is difficult to show the illustration, and therefore, the drawing may be appropriately shortened (illustrated).
The pachinko machine 1 includes a game control device 54, an effect control device 53, a payout control device 230, a polishing control device 59, and a power supply device 58 as main components of the control system. Necessary power is supplied from the power supply 58 to each of these devices and each electronic component shown in FIG.
In the first embodiment, a device for controlling the progress of the game (a conventional game control) is a device (payout control device) that performs the enclosed ball control (control of the number of enclosed balls, control of addition / subtraction processing of the number of balls) The apparatus is separated from the apparatus, and the program of each control apparatus is simplified and the control burden is reduced. For example, a device in which such a payout control device and a game control device are integrated may be provided as the game control device 54. In this case, signals and commands sent from the game control device to the payout control device become unnecessary, and the control burden is reduced, and space and power can be saved.

(Game control device related)
First, the configuration of the game control device 54 of the pachinko machine 1 and the equipment connected to the game control device 54 will be described.
The game control device 54 is a main control device (main board) that manages games such as special drawings, and includes a CPU 111, a ROM 112, a RAM 113, a test firing test terminal 115 for an inspection device, and an inspection device connection terminal 63. Yes.
The game control device 54 constitutes a control device, game control means, and display control means.

The CPU 111 executes a game program for managing a game such as a special figure and performs arithmetic processing necessary for game control. The ROM 112 stores a game program, and the RAM 113 is used as a work area (work area) when executing processing based on the game program.
The RAM 113 is provided with backup power supply means (not shown, for example, composed of a large-capacitance capacitor) that supplies power even in the event of a power failure. If the power is restored from the power failure within the continued time, the data in the RAM 113 is retained.
The CPU 111, the ROM 112, and the RAM 113 correspond to a gaming microcomputer as a gaming arithmetic processing device, and are manufactured as, for example, an IC for an amusement chip.
The amusement chip IC stores a manufacturer code and a product code in addition to a chip code as individual identification information for individually identifying the IC chip, and can output these codes as a gaming machine ID. is there.

The test firing test terminal 115 is a terminal to which a cable for transmitting various game information obtained from the CPU 111 to the inspection device is connected. Note that the test firing test terminal 115 and related parts are used in the test institution and are removed at the time of shipment, and are not mounted in the game control device 54 used in the game hall.
The inspection device connection terminal 63 is a terminal to which a cable for the authorities to inspect the pachinko machine 1 is connected after the pachinko machine 1 is installed in the game hall.

The game control device 54 includes a first start port switch 120 (start port 1SW in FIG. 6), a second start port switch 121 (start port 2SW in FIG. 6), a gate switch 122, a winning port switch 123, a count switch 124, Detection signals from the magnet sensor 142, the radio wave sensor 143, and the vibration sensor 144 are input.
The first start port switch 120 is a sensor for detecting winning balls one by one for detecting the game balls won in the first start winning port 25, and the second start port switch 121 is awarded to the second start winning port 26. This is a sensor for detecting a winning ball that detects the gaming balls one by one.
The count switch 124 is a similar sensor that detects a game ball won in the big winning opening 27a of the variable winning device 27. Further, the winning port switch 123 is a similar sensor provided for the general winning ports 28 to 31, and when there are n general winning ports, one is provided for each and n is provided as a whole. Instead of providing one sensor for each general winning opening, one sensor may be provided for a plurality of general winning openings. The gate switch 122 is a sensor for detecting one game ball passing through the usual starting gate 32 one by one.
Each of the sensors 120, 121, 122, 123, and 124 for detecting these game balls is a proximity switch in this example, and outputs a negative logic detection signal such as a high level of 11V and a low level of 7V. It is configured.

When there is a winning at the winning opening, the game control device 54 sends a prize ball number command corresponding to the winning to the payout control device 230. The payout control device 230 performs a process of adding the number of winning balls corresponding to the winning to the number of possessed balls based on the winning ball number command corresponding to the winning sent from the game control device 54.
Further, the game control device 54 performs a process of displaying the number of winning balls corresponding to the winning on the winning display LED 355 of the collective display device 35 when there is a winning at the winning opening.

Specifically, when the game control device 54 has won a prize opening, the game control device 54 determines the number of winning balls corresponding to the winning and outputs a winning ball number command for adding the number of winning balls to the number of possessed balls. Processing to transmit to 230 is performed. The winning awards are all winning awards with a prize ball discharge (a process of actually paying out a ball or adding to the number of balls in the case of an enclosed ball type). There are a large winning opening 27a and general winning openings 28 to 31 of the variable winning apparatus 27.
In the game control device 54, the number of winning balls associated with winning a prize is set as follows.
・ Large prize opening 27a = 13 ・ Starting prize opening 25 = 3 ・ Starting prize opening 26 (Fuden) = 1 piece ・ General prize opening 28-31 = 10 pieces

The magnet sensor 142 is a sensor that detects the proximity of the magnet to the pachinko machine 1, and is used to detect fraud caused by the magnet. The radio wave sensor 143 is a sensor that detects the transmission of radio waves. For example, the radio wave sensor 143 is used to detect that unauthorized radio waves are transmitted to the pachinko machine 1 using a radio wave oscillator or the like. The vibration sensor 144 is a sensor that detects that vibration has been applied to the pachinko machine 1, and is particularly for detecting unauthorized vibration such as shaking the table (or hitting it abnormally).
The game control device 54 determines fraud based on detection signals from the magnet sensor 142, the radio wave sensor 143, and the vibration sensor 144, and transmits a fraud occurrence command or the like to the effect control device 53 when it is determined to be fraudulent. Then, processing such as causing the display device 41 to display an error under the control of the effect control device 53 is performed. In addition, the game control device 54 transmits the fraud information to the payout control device 230, and the payout control device 230 transmits the fraud information to the hall computer 86 via the card unit 15.

Next, the game control device 54 is connected to the effect control device 53, the general power solenoid 131, the special prize opening solenoid 132, and the collective display device 35 as necessary devices for the progress and effect of the game.
The general electric solenoid 131 is a solenoid that opens and closes the opening / closing member 26a of the second start winning port 26, and the large winning port solenoid 132 is a solenoid that opens and closes the opening / closing member 27b of the variable winning device 27. The game control device 54 outputs necessary control signals to the ordinary electric solenoid 131, the special prize opening solenoid 132, and the collective display device 35.
Further, data (for example, an effect command) is transmitted from the game control device 54 to the effect control device 53 by serial communication.
Further, the game control device 54 is configured to transmit data (for example, a command (eg, a prize ball number command) necessary for managing the enclosed ball) to the payout control device 230 by serial communication.

(Discharge control device related)
Next, a configuration of the payout control device 230 and devices connected to the payout control device 230 will be described.
The payout control device 230 manages the number of encapsulated balls and the number of balls held (payout control board), and includes a CPU 231, a ROM 232, a RAM 233, a test firing test terminal 234 for an inspection device, an inspection device connection terminal 235, A launch control circuit 236, an error release switch (error release SW) 68, and an error display LED 67 are provided.
The payout control device 230 performs control for paying out the winning ball in accordance with a signal (payout control command) from the game control device 54 (the paying out of the winning ball is added to the number of balls held). On the other hand, from the payout control device 230, frame opening information (information indicating whether or not the opening of the front frame 4 has been detected by the night monitoring switch 126) and game control device monitoring information (main board (game control device) by the night monitoring switch 126). 54) (information indicating whether or not removal is detected) can be transmitted to the card unit 15 (details will be described later).
The payout control device 230 comprises a control device, an enclosed ball control means, a counting means, a counting operation control means, an input period limiting means, a game value storage means, a game value display control means, a polishing control means, a clear control means, and a display control means. To do.

The CPU 231 executes a predetermined program to perform necessary arithmetic processing regarding the enclosed ball control, gaming ball payout (prize ball payout or rental ball payout), management of the number of balls, frame opening information, and game control device monitoring information. . The ROM 232 stores the program, and the RAM 233 is used as a work area (work area) when executing processing based on the program.
Here, the RAM 233 constitutes a game value storage means and stores the number of possessed balls as the game value. Specifically, the RAM 233 stores a change in the game value of the player, and subtracts the fired ball to win the prize ball. By repeating the addition of the number, the player's number of balls will be updated and stored in real time. Since the subtraction of the fired ball and the addition of the number of prize balls are performed by processing based on the program, the RAM 233 (game value storage means) stores real-time changes in the number of balls held.
The RAM 233 is provided with backup power supply means (not shown, for example, comprising a large-capacitance capacitor) that supplies power even in the event of a power failure. If the power is restored from the power failure within a period during which the power can be continuously supplied, the data in the RAM 233 is retained.

The payout control device 230 specifically performs processing from launching to collection of the enclosed ball as a control necessary for the enclosed ball game, and the number of balls held according to the prize ball number command from the game control device 54. In addition, in the first embodiment, ball lending control (ball lending addition processing), counting the number of balls, and the like are performed.
In addition, when the payout control device 230 receives a prize at the winning opening, a prize ball number command corresponding to the winning is sent from the game control device 54, so that a prize corresponding to the winning is based on the prize ball number command. A process of adding the number of balls to the number of balls held is performed (as described above). For example, when there is a continuous change in the number of balls held by the player (game value), the number of balls held in the RAM 233 (game value storage means) The memory of the number is updated immediately. However, when the number-of-balls display 40 (game value display means) displays the number of balls of the player, the number of balls is updated for a predetermined period (for example, 0.3 seconds). ) Is controlled at intervals.
Specifically, the RAM 233 as an internal memory stores a change in the number of balls held by the player, and the game is repeated by subtracting the fired balls, adding the number of prize balls, and adding the foul balls. It will be updated and stored in real time how much the number of balls the person will have. On the other hand, the payout controller 230 subtracts the number of balls fired from the number of balls held, adds the number of prize balls, and adds a foul ball by processing based on the game program, so that the RAM 233 can determine the number of balls held in real time. Memorize changes. On the other hand, the payout controller 230 updates the number of balls when the number-of-balls display 40 displays the number of balls of the player, and the RAM 233 updates and stores the number of balls in real time. Unlike the above, control is performed so that the updated number of balls is displayed at intervals of a predetermined period (for example, 0.3 seconds).
The test firing test terminal 234 is a terminal to which a cable for transmitting various kinds of information in the enclosed ball control and the game ball payout control obtained from the CPU 231 to the inspection device is connected. Note that the test firing test terminal 234 and related parts are used in the test institution and are removed at the time of shipment, and are not mounted on the payout control device 230 used in the game hall.
The inspection device connection terminal 235 is a terminal to which a cable for the authorities to inspect the pachinko machine 1 is connected after the pachinko machine 1 is installed in the game hall.

  The launch control circuit 236 is built in the payout control device 230, and receives a necessary power supply from the payout control device 230 and also receives a fire permission signal. The launch control circuit 236 is required to receive the ON data of the launch permission signal, and the launch solenoid that launches the game ball at the launch position according to the operation of the launch volume 171 (that is, the rotation operation of the launch operation handle 11). 173 is controlled. In addition, signals from the touch sensor 174 and the firing stop switch 175 are input to the payout control device 230. The touch sensor 174 detects whether or not the player has touched the firing operation handle 11 that operates the firing volume 171, and the firing stop switch 175 temporarily stops the firing of the game ball. It is operated by a player.

Note that the ball feed solenoid 172 that sends the game ball to the launch position is directly controlled by the payout control device 230. For the control process, a signal from the touch sensor 174 is input to the payout control device 230.
An apparatus that includes the above-described firing solenoid 173 and launches a game ball at a launch position (not shown) into a game area is referred to as a launch device 57. This launching device 57 is controlled by a payout control device 230 including a firing control circuit 236, and a state where launching of a game ball is permitted by a control process of these control devices (a state where ON data of a launch permission signal is set) ) Can only launch game balls. In the state where the launch of the game ball is prohibited (the state where the off data of the launch permission signal is set), even if the game ball is at the launch position and the player operates the launch operation handle 11, the game ball is launched. Not. Further, the launching device 57 has a member called a spear for hitting a game ball in order to launch, and a launch position is at the tip of the spear (tip).
Since the number of game balls fired by operating the firing operation handle 11 is regulated to be 100 shots per minute according to a predetermined rule, the payout control device 230 and the launch control circuit 236 control the ball feed solenoid 172. , Within a range of 100 shots / minute (approximately one shot in 0.6 seconds (s)).

The error cancel switch (error cancel SW) 68 outputs a signal for canceling the error when operated when there is an error in the payout control process and the process is stopped.
The error display LED 67 lights a specific number according to the content of the error when there is an error in the payout control process.
Further, the payout control device 230 is connected to the number-of-balls display 40, the count switch 311, the break switch 312, the countball display 313, and the countball use switch 314 in relation to the devices arranged on the lower panel 6. Yes. The operation display device 7 is directly connected to the card unit 15 through a harness and is managed and controlled by the card unit 15, so that the operation display device 7 is not under the control of the payout control device 230.
The payout control device 230 receives detection signals from the counting switch 311, the break switch 312 and the counting ball use switch 314, and outputs necessary control signals to the holding ball number display 40 and the counting ball display 313. In addition, necessary control signals are output to the LEDs built in the counting switch 311, the break switch 312 and the counting ball use switch 314.
For example, in order to display the number of balls held, the driving signal capable of driving the six LEDs of the seven segments of the number of balls holding display 40 is output to the ball holding number display 40. When there is a counting ball, the counting ball display 313 is configured to output a signal for lighting it. For the LEDs built in the counting switch 311, the break switch 312, and the counting ball use switch 314, when a condition for lighting each LED is satisfied, a driving signal capable of lighting each LED is output.

Here, the concepts such as the number of possessed balls and the number of counted balls are organized and described as follows.
・ Number of balls: Number of balls that can be fired ・ Number of balls to be counted: Number of stored balls moved from the number of balls held (stored balls that cannot be temporarily fired)
Specifically, the number of balls possessed is the number of balls that the player has acquired and can be fired. In the example of a gaming machine using real balls, the ball that can be fired on the upper plate or the lower plate It corresponds to a number of images, and it is a ball that has not moved to the ball box.
On the other hand, the number of counted balls is the number of stored balls moved by counting from the number of balls held by the player. In the example of a gaming machine using real balls, It corresponds to the image of the number of balls moved out of the ball box, and it is the ball in the ball box. By operating the counting switch 311, the number of balls can be moved to the number of counting balls.
Total number of balls: The total number of balls held by the player, which is represented by the number of balls held + the number of balls counted = the total number of balls held.
・ Number of updated balls: Changed number of balls from previous number of balls ・ Number of updated balls: Number of changed balls from previous number of counted balls ・ Use of counting balls: Move the ball from the number of counting balls to the number of balls In detail, “Using counting balls” is an example of a game machine that uses real balls. In the example of a game machine that uses real balls, the balls (counting balls) that have moved from the upper plate or lower plate to the ball box are moved again to the upper plate. This corresponds to the concept of moving (back) and using. In order to use the counting ball, the counting ball use switch 314 may be operated, and a predetermined amount (for example, 100) of the balls moves from the counting ball number to the number of holding balls by one operation. .
・ Number of stored balls: Number of balls that can be replayed after the game on the gaming machine has been completed and the player has stored the total number of balls stored on the membership card. It is possible to play again using the or to exchange prizes. If you move the table, you will play again using the current day's storage, but if you are a guest member, you will not be able to store the ball but simply use the stored ball data recorded on the game card to replay it on another table. Will play.
In the case of payment, the total number of balls is written in the game card. At this time, the total number of balls held is sent to the card unit 15 and the card unit 15 performs a settlement process.

In the first embodiment, the number of held balls and the number of counted balls are configured to be managed by the payout control device 230, and these data are stored and held in a predetermined storage area of the RAM 233 of the payout control device 230.
The data on the number of possessed balls and the number of counted balls is also sent to the card unit 15 and can be displayed on the message / operation area unit 306 of the operation display device 7 under the control of the card unit 15. ing. However, although the number of balls held and the number of balls counted are displayed on the operation display device 7, the payout control device 230 is only used to control the increase or decrease in the number of balls held or the number of counted balls stored after moving from the number of balls held. Has come to control. The card unit 15 periodically receives data from the payout control device 230, and displays details of the number of balls held and the number of counted balls on the operation display device 7 based on the received data.
The data on the number of balls held and the number of balls counted are also sent from the payout control device 230 to the effect control device 53 via the game control device 54, and the upper part of the decorative ball display device 250 is controlled by the effect control device 53. The decoration of the number of balls held and the number of counted balls is performed using a number of LEDs of the decorative ball display device 250a and the lower decorative ball display device 250b. Furthermore, it is possible to display the number of counted balls on the sub liquid crystal display device 33 under the control of the effect control device 53, and it is possible to perform analog display of the number of counted balls on the level meter right 17R. .

Specifically, the number of balls held and the number of counting balls are displayed by the following devices.
・ Number-of-balls display 40: Digitally displays the number of balls held (managed by the payout controller 230)
Counting ball display 313: Displays the presence or absence of a counting ball (lights up when there is a counting ball) (managed by the payout controller 230)
-Decoration ball display device 250: Analog decoration display of the number of balls held and the number of counting balls with a large number of LEDs (managed by the production control device 53)
Sub liquid crystal display device 33: When there are counting balls, the number of counting balls is displayed digitally (managed by the effect control device 53)
Level meter right 17R: When there is a counting ball, the counting ball number is displayed in analog (managed by the effect control device 53)
-Operation display device 7: Displays details of the number of balls and counting balls in digital or analog (managed by card unit 15)

The payout control device 230 is connected to the card unit 15 via the card unit connection terminal plate 52 so that bidirectional information can be transmitted to the card unit 15. Therefore, the card unit connection terminal plate 52 is mainly used for input / output of information, signals, and the like between the card unit 15 and the payout control device 230 on the pachinko machine 1 side.
Then, the payout control device 230 displays the number of balls on the ball count display 40, or counts the number of balls by the operation of the counting switch 311 and shifts it to the count ball number (concept to move to a so-called ball box). It is possible to do. In addition, when the number of balls held is counted and transferred to the counting ball number, the payout control device 230 performs control to turn on the counting ball display 313 by determining that there is the counting ball number.
Here, the control concept of “counting the number of balls and transferring them to the ball box of the number of balls” is an example of a game machine that pays out with real balls. This is the same as the work of physically transferring to an external ball box (details will be described later).
Further, when the counting ball use switch 314 is operated, the payout control device 230 also performs control to move a predetermined amount (for example, 100 balls) from the counting ball number to the holding ball number by one operation.
On the other hand, the payout control device 230 transmits the data on the number of balls held and the number of balls counted to the effect control device 53 via the game control device 54, and the effect control device 53 controls the lighting / flashing of the decorative ball display device 250. The sub liquid crystal display device 33 is configured to perform display control of the number of counted balls and analog display control of the number of counted balls at the level meter right 17R.

Here, the transmission of information will be described. As described above, the payout control device 230 is connected to the card unit 15 via the card unit connection terminal plate 52, and is enclosed from the payout control device 230 to the card unit 15. Various information in the ball game (for example, various information including the number of possessed balls and the number of counted balls) is sent at predetermined intervals (for example, 400 ms). Note that the number of balls held and the number of balls counted are not changed, but the actual number at that time is transmitted, so that it is not necessary to take measures against data loss.
The card unit 15 manages the control of the operation display device 7 on the basis of various information from the payout control device 230, and displays the player's number of balls (game value) and the number of counted balls in the message / operation area unit 306. To do.
In this example, as described above, various game information from the game control device 54 and various information in the enclosed ball game (various information including the number of possessed balls and the number of counted balls) are sent from the payout control device 230 to the card unit 15. Although transmission is performed at predetermined intervals (for example, 400 ms), necessary information may be transmitted from the dispensing control device 230 when a request is made from the card unit 15. Further, the various types of information may be transmitted from the game control device 54 to the card unit 15 instead of from the payout control device 230.

On the other hand, the payout control device 230 is connected to the card unit 15 via the external information terminal board 51, and game information can be transmitted from the payout control device 230 to the card unit 15.
The card unit 15 is connected to the hall computer 86 and the ball management device 85. Therefore, the external information terminal board 51 is mainly used for transmitting game information from the payout control device 230 on the pachinko machine 1 side to the hall computer 86 or the ball management device 85 via the card unit 15.
Specifically, from the payout control device 230, via the external information terminal board 51, via the card unit 15, to the hall computer 86, various game information from the game control device 54 and control of the enclosed ball and payout control of the game ball. Various information in is output. The game information includes, for example, a signal that informs the signal input to the game control device 54 to the outside, a jackpot signal that informs the jackpot that occurs in the course of the game, and a winning at the start opening that is a condition for changing the symbol. Start signal to notify, symbol change start signal to trigger symbol variation start or symbol variation stop signal to trigger symbol variation, indicating that the game state is advantageous to the player (so-called probability variation state, time-short state) There are privilege status signals.
In addition, the payout control device 230 outputs information on the number of balls held (game value information) and the like to the card unit 15 via the external information terminal board 51, and the ball unit management device 85 and the hall computer 86 from the card unit 15. Information on the number of balls held (game value information) is output.

Next, as a signal from various switches necessary for encapsulated sphere control and the like, the payout control device 230 includes a firing sphere detection switch 161, a foul sphere detection switch 162, an out sphere detection switch 163, and a first encapsulated sphere detection switch 164. Detection signals from the enclosed sphere detection 1SW in FIG. 6 and the second enclosed sphere detection switch 165 (encapsulated sphere detection 2SW in FIG. 6) are input.
The shot ball detection switch 161 is a sensor that detects one ball at a time in the game area 22 by operation of the shot volume 171 (details will be described later), and the foul ball detection switch 162 is a game area 22 of the shot. It is a sensor that detects the balls that have become fouls without reaching. The out ball detection switch 163 is a sensor that detects one ball collected from the game area 22 (including both out ball and safe ball) one by one.
As described above, the first enclosed sphere detection switch 164 and the second enclosed sphere detection switch 165 are arranged in the sensor flow path 77 of the circulation device 55 (see FIG. 4), and are for checking the number of enclosed spheres. .
The payout control device 230 receives the detection signals from the switches 161 to 165, monitors the behavior of the sphere from launching to collection of the encapsulated sphere, checks for the presence of a foul sphere, and checks the maximum and minimum number of encapsulated spheres. In addition to the above processing, control is performed such as processing to add to the number of balls held based on the ball lending information (ball lending number command) sent from the card unit 15.

Further, a glass frame opening switch (glass frame opening SW in FIG. 6) 125 and a night monitoring switch 126 (night monitoring SW in FIG. 6) are connected to the payout control device 230.
The glass frame opening switch 125 is a sensor that detects that the glass frame 5 is opened.
The night monitoring switch 126 monitors the opening of the front frame 4 and also monitors the removal of the game control device 54. The night monitoring switch 126 is configured to hold the information that the opening of the front frame 4 is detected even when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, and the night monitoring information (game control device monitoring information) when the main power is turned on. ) Are output to the outside with a delay, and the detailed configuration will be described later with reference to FIG.
The night monitoring switch 126 may detect that the glass frame 5 has been opened, in addition to detecting that the front frame 4 has been opened and the removal of the game control device 54. In this way, it is possible to cope with fraud by opening the glass frame while omitting the glass frame opening switch 125 to reduce the cost.
Here, the night monitoring switch 126 constitutes a front frame opening detection means and a main board monitoring means.

(Production control device related)
Next, the configuration of the effect control device 53 and devices connected to the effect control device 53 will be described.
The effect control device 53 includes a main control microcomputer, a video control microcomputer that performs video control exclusively under the control of the main control microcomputer, a VDP as a graphic processor that performs image processing for video display on the display device 41, It has a sound source LSI that controls the output of various melody and sound effects, etc., but its detailed configuration is omitted.

The production control device 53 analyzes the control command from the CPU 111 of the game control device 54, determines the production content and controls the content of the output video of the display device 41, or instructs the sound source LSI to play the reproduced sound. The lower speaker 10 and the upper speakers 16a and 16b are driven to produce sound effects, etc., and the processing such as the drive control of the decoration display LED 141 described above is executed, and the production content is determined according to the signal from the production operation switch 9 And control the production.
Further, the effect control device 53 is configured to transmit the number of balls and the number of counted balls from the payout control device 230 via the game control device 54, and the effect control device 53 displays the decorative ball display. A number of LEDs on the upper decorative ball display device 250a and the lower decorative ball display device 250b are controlled to be turned on and off in accordance with the number of balls held and the number of balls counted.
Further, the effect control device 53 performs control to display the number of counting balls on the sub liquid crystal display device 33 (indicated as the sub display device in FIG. 6) or to display the effect when there is no counting ball.
In addition, the effect control device 53 causes the level meter left 17L and the level meter right 17R to perform an effect indicating the jackpot reliability by moving the display units 17a and 17b up and down as a reliability meter related to the jackpot at the normal time. If there is a counting ball, the display unit 17b is moved up and down as a counting display device, and control is performed to produce an effect of displaying the approximate number of counting balls in analog form. On the other hand, when the operation of the pachinko machine 1 is stopped due to a power failure, the effect control device 53 is configured to stop the display unit 17b at the position of the number of counting balls at the time of the power failure and to stay at that position. Control is performed to notify the player that the approximate game ball acquired by the stop position of the unit 17b is held.

Next, the effect control device 53 is connected to the polishing control device 59 as a device necessary for the processing of the game ball polishing. The polishing control device 59 includes an RTC (real time clock) 60 inside, and performs processing necessary for polishing the game ball by controlling the operation of the polishing device 56 based on an instruction from the effect control device 53. The reason why the RTC 60 is provided is to enable control based on information such as date and time. For example, the production control device 53 reads the information of the RTC 60 so that a special production can appear, or the time zone for polishing the game ball can be freely set.
The production control device 53 exchanges signals with the polishing control device 59, and the polishing control device 59 sends a control signal (for example, forward rotation data) to the polishing motor 70 based on an instruction from the production control device 53. (Or a signal corresponding to the reverse rotation data) is appropriately output, and upon receiving this control signal, the polishing motor 70 operates the polishing device 56 for polishing the encapsulated sphere enclosed in the pachinko machine 1 (forward or reverse). Actuated in the direction).
Specifically, the dispensing control device 230 sets a predetermined period when the power is turned on as a polishing period, transmits a polishing start command to the game control device 54 at the start of polishing, and sends a polishing stop command to the game control device 54 when polishing is stopped. Control to send. During the polishing period, game balls cannot be launched.
When the game control device 54 receives a polishing start command from the payout control device 230, the game control device 54 transmits a polishing start command to the effect control device 53, and receives a polishing stop command, and controls to transmit a polishing stop command to the effect control device 53. Do.
When the production control device 53 receives the polishing start command from the game control device 54, the production control device 53 instructs the polishing control device 59 to start polishing, and displays on the screen of the display device 41 from reception of the polishing start command to reception of the polishing stop command. Control to do.

The polishing control device 59 controls the polishing device 56 so as to perform polishing only for a predetermined period in accordance with a polishing instruction from the effect control device 53. In this case, the polishing control device 59 executes processing necessary for polishing the encapsulated sphere such as driving of the polishing motor 70 and operation of the switching solenoid 79S in accordance with a polishing device program to be described later.
That is, a polishing motor 70, a switching solenoid 79S and a polishing outlet switch 76 are connected to the polishing control device 59, and the polishing motor 70 is sealed inside the pachinko machine 1 based on a control signal from the polishing control device 59. The polishing device 56 for polishing the encapsulated sphere is operated (operated in the forward direction or the reverse direction). The switching solenoid 79S opens the polishing guide port 80a when polishing the encapsulated sphere. Normally (when the encapsulated sphere is not polished), the switching solenoid 79S is guided to polish by the valve body (details not shown). When the port 80a is closed (for example, the valve body is biased by a spring and displaced to a position where the polishing guide port 80a is closed), and the valve control signal is received from the polishing control device 59, the switch is in the closed position. The valve body of the valve 79 is sucked and displaced to a position where the polishing guide port 80a is opened. As a result, the polishing guide port 80a that closes the movement of the sphere from the ball feed channel 78 to the polishing inflow guide channel 80 is opened, and the encapsulated sphere in the ball feed channel 78 is lowered through the polishing guide port 80a by gravity. It moves to the polishing inflow guide path 80.
The polishing outlet switch 76 detects the sphere discharged from the upper outlet 75 as described above, and outputs a sphere discharge detection signal to the polishing control device 59 when the discharge of the sphere from the upper outlet 75 is detected. If the polishing control device 59 cannot receive the ball discharge detection signal from the polishing outlet switch 76 for a certain time or more even though the ball polishing control is in progress, it is determined that there is an abnormality such as a ball clogging in the polishing device 56 and is necessary. (For example, the polishing motor 70 is stopped).

Here, in the first embodiment, as described above, the polishing control device 59 exchanges signals with the performance control device 53, but inputs signals to the game control device 54 and the payout control device 230. Not. Similarly, the polishing device 56 does not input a signal to the game control device 54 or the payout control device 230, and the polishing motor 70 of the polishing device 56 only operates in response to a control signal from the polishing control device 59. . That is, no information is input from the polishing control device 59 and the polishing device 56 to the game control device 54 and the payout control device 230, and from the game control device 54 and the payout control device 230 to the polishing control device 59 and the polishing device 56 in one direction. It is configured to transmit information.
In this way, the polishing control device 59 does not input any information (for example, input of information such as signal input, data input, command input) to the game control device 54 (main board) or the payout control device 230. The configuration is not performed, and the configuration is such that the encapsulated sphere is polished by an instruction (polishing start command) from the game control device 54 (main substrate) or the payout control device 230. For short, it will be referred to as “subification”. Here, information is input including signal input and data input.
The game control device 54 (main board) and the payout control device 230 are devices that are directly related to the center of the game, such as the progress and management of the game, whereas the effect control device 53 and the like are generally game control devices 54, for example. Since it is a device that operates passively in response to an instruction from the (main board) or the payout control device 230, it is generally referred to as a sub board.
In the first embodiment, the polishing control device 59 is simply configured to send and receive signals to and from the effect control device 53 (sub board), and also falls within the category of the sub board. In the first embodiment, for operation, the operation of the polishing control device 59 does not directly affect the game control device 54 (main board) or the payout control device 230, and the polishing control device 59 is not connected to the game control device 54 ( A configuration in which no information is input to the main board) or the payout control device 230, and the sealed ball is polished by an instruction (polishing start command) from the game control device 54 (main board) or the payout control device 230. Thus, the polishing control device 59 (including the polishing device 56) is configured to be “sub-configured”. Therefore, the game control device 54 (main board) and the payout control device 230 are not directly affected by the polishing control device 59 (including the polishing device 56).

In this way, by substituting the polishing control device 59 (including the polishing device 56), the control burden on the game control device 54 and the payout control device 230 is reduced. Specifically, it is only necessary to send a polishing start command from the game control device 54 or the payout control device 230 to the effect control device 53, and when the effect control device 53 receives the polishing start command, the polishing control device 59 starts polishing. In response to the polishing instruction from the effect control device 53, the polishing control device 59 executes processing necessary for polishing the encapsulated sphere, such as driving the polishing motor 70 and operating the switching solenoid 79S, for a predetermined period. The game ball is polished.
Thus, the game control device 54 and the payout control device 230 can operate the “sub-substituted” polishing control device 59 (including the polishing device 56) only by sending a polishing start command to the effect control device 53. Since the game control device 54 and the payout control device 230 need only perform a simple process of sending a command to polish the encapsulated ball, the control burden on the game control device 54 and the payout control device 230 is remarkably reduced.
Moreover, since there is no direct influence on the game for the sub-device, there are few restrictions on the components to be mounted. That is, there is a merit that the limitation of ROM capacity and the limitation of parts are relaxed. Therefore, the design can be performed without worrying about the ROM capacity, and for example, the choice of parts can be expanded, and an RTC (real time clock) can be mounted, thereby expanding the range of production. In addition, options for parts such as sensors are widened, leading to cost reduction. Furthermore, “sub-substituting” has an advantage that the inspection is simplified because there is no direct influence on the game.
In the first embodiment, the game control device 54 and the payout control device 230 are separated from each other. However, such a device in which the game control device 54 and the payout control device 230 are integrated as a game control device. In this case, the game control device including the payout control device 230 is the main board. Therefore, there is a concept that the payout control device 230 of the first embodiment is also handled as a main board and included in the main board. Even if the payout control device 230 of Embodiment 1 itself is included in the main substrate in accordance with this concept, in Embodiment 1, the polishing control device 59 has a configuration in which no information is input to the payout control device 230, and polishing is performed. The control device 59 (including the polishing device 56) is “sub-configured”. Therefore, the above-mentioned merit can be exhibited.

(Power supply)
Next, the configuration of the power supply device 58 will be described.
The power supply device 58 generates DC voltage such as DC32V, DC12V, and DC5V from the AC power supply, and supplies necessary power to the game control device 54, the effect control device 53, the payout control device 230, and each electronic component shown in FIG. A power switch 181 and a RAM clear switch 182 are provided.
Here, as described above, the power supplied from the power supply device 58 in the pachinko machine 1 during normal time (when power is supplied to the pachinko machine 1) is referred to as a main power supply, and the main power supply includes the game control device 54. The power supply currently supplied to each apparatus of the machine 1, an electronic device, a sensor, etc. is pointed out.
The power supply device 58 supplies the RAM 113 of the game control device 54 and the RAM 233 of the payout control device 230 when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off in addition to the main power supply (that is, when the main power supply is cut off). It also has a backup power source.
Therefore, the power supply device 58 has a backup power supply unit (corresponding to backup power supply means), and the backup power supply unit is composed of a large capacity capacitor such as an electrolytic capacitor. The backup power is supplied to the RAM 113 of the game control device 54 and the RAM 233 of the payout control device 230, and the data stored in the RAM 113 and RAM 233 is held even during a power failure or after the power is shut off.
The power switch 181 turns on / off the AC power supplied to the power supply device 58 and is used for starting and stopping the power supply device 58. The RAM clear switch 182 initializes the RAM 113 inside the game control device 54, the RAM 233 of the payout control device 230, and the like.

(Operation display device)
Next, details of the operation display device 7 will be described.
As described above, the operation display device 7 is directly connected to the card unit 15 by the harness.
FIG. 7A is a diagram showing the operation display device 7.
The operation display device 7 is composed of a liquid crystal display with a touch panel that can be operated by a player touching the touch panel with a finger, and displays a ball rental rate on the operation display device 7 as shown in FIG. A ball rental rate indicator 301, a remaining amount indicator 302 for displaying the remaining amount of a prepaid card (for example, a visitor card), a ball rental button 303, a return button 304, a store / replay button 305, A message / operation area 306 and a switching button 307 are arranged.

The ball lending rate display 301 displays a ball lending rate when lending a game ball from the card unit 15. For example, when lending one ball at 4 yen, a display of “ball lending: 4 yen per ball” is displayed. To do. In addition, when lending a ball for 1 yen, the display “ball lending: 1 yen per ball” is displayed. In the pachinko machine 1 of this example, it is possible to lend a ball at a rate of 4 yen per ball or 1 yen per ball.
The remaining amount display unit 302 displays the remaining amount of the prepaid card (for example, visitor card). At this time, for example, the remaining amount is displayed in units of 1 yen such as “5000 yen” of the remaining amount.
The ball lending button 303 is operated when the player desires a predetermined number of ball lending.

The return button 304 is operated when the player simply returns a game card (including a prepaid card (for example, a visitor card)) before the game, and when the card is returned after settlement (game end) (that is, the game is finished). , Used for checkout). Therefore, in this embodiment, no checkout button is arranged.
In the case of adjusting the number of balls held, in this embodiment, it is started by operating the return button 304.
That is, when the player presses the return button 304, the card unit 15 transmits a payment instruction to the payout control device 230 in order to start the payment. Upon receiving the payment instruction, the payout control device 230 transmits the total number of balls (number of balls held + number of balls counted) data to the card unit 15, and the card unit 15 records the total number of balls held on the game card, Process to discharge. Next, when the card unit 15 finishes recording the total number-of-balls data for the game card, the card unit 15 notifies the payout control device 230 to that effect, and the payout control device 230 stores (for example, stores it in a predetermined area of the RAM 233). Clear the data such as the number of holding balls, the number of counting balls, etc., the settlement ends, and the game card is returned. The card unit 15 records the total number of balls data on the game card, but the payout control device 230 stores data such as the number of balls held and the number of balls counted until the game card is recorded. Therefore, the management of the number of possessed balls and the number of counted balls is not transferred to the card unit 15.

Next, the store / replay button 305 stores a ball acquired by the player using a member card unique to the game hall called a house card, or stores a ball stored in the member card. In addition to the use of replaying, it is operated when using the number of balls that have been moved by the table (the same treatment as the number of stored balls).
The message / operation area unit 306 is used to display the number of stored balls, the number of balls held and the number of balls counted, in addition to the member having a membership card inputting a password or displaying a business message at the time of storing / replaying. It is a place to display details. In addition, the message / operation area unit 306 also displays the number of ball lending.
Further, the message / operation area unit 306 is configured to be able to display the number of balls held and the number of counted balls in an analog manner (analog display using a figure that looks like a ball box) (details will be described later in a specific example). .

Although the operation display device 7 (including the message / operation area unit 306) is arranged in the pachinko machine 1, ball rental, storage, settlement (however, recording on the card as described above), replay Play, return of game cards, and the like are controlled and managed by the card unit 15.
The switch button 307 performs an operation of switching information displayed on the message / operation area unit 306 of the operation display device 7. When the switch button 307 is operated (touched), presentation assistance information such as character introduction is displayed in the card unit. 15 is transmitted to the operation display device 7 and displayed on the operation display device 7. When the switching button 307 is not operated (touched), a normal operation screen based on the operation of the ball lending button 303, the return button 304, the storage / replay button 305, etc. is displayed.

Next, a case controlled and managed by the card unit 15 will be described. For example, when a game is started, when a player inserts a 1000 yen banknote into the cash insertion slot 202 of the card unit 15 (at this time, the card unit 15). 15, a 1000 yen prepaid card has been issued), and the ball lending number corresponding to the amount of the inserted banknote is displayed in the message / operation area 306. When the player presses the ball lending button 303, the ball lending addition processing is performed within the range of the displayed ball lending number, and the number of balls increased as a result of this ball lending addition processing is displayed on the ball number display 40. Is displayed. For example, when the ball lending button 303 is pressed once, the ball lending is performed five times, the number of balls held is increased by 125, for example, and the number of balls held displayed on the ball holding number display 40 is also increased by 125.
In this case, operation information indicating that the ball lending button 303 has been pressed is sent from the operation display device 7 to the card unit 15 via the harness, and a ball lending instruction (i.e., a game control device 54) is sent from the card unit 15 to the gaming machine (i.e. (Addition instruction to the number of balls held).

  On the other hand, if the player wishes to lend a ball within the range of the frequency of a game card (including a prepaid card (eg, a visitor card)), the player inserts the game card into the card slot 201 of the card unit 15. The remaining number of balls remaining in the game card is displayed in the message / operation area 306. Next, when the player operates the ball lending button 303 of the message / operation area unit 306, the ball lending (number of balls held) within a range of the valuable value information (ball lending number) recorded on the game card. And the number of balls lent out is displayed on the number-of-balls display 40. In this case, not only the pure ball lending number is displayed on the ball holding number display 40 but the ball lending number is added to the previous ball holding number so that the total number of balls is displayed. 40. Therefore, when the previous number of balls held = 0, only the number of balls lent is displayed on the number-of-balls display 40.

  Further, when the player desires to use the stored ball within the range of the number of stored balls recorded in the game card, the player inserts the game card into the card insertion slot 201 of the card unit 15, and the message / operation area section When the member's password is entered on the screen of 306, the number of stored balls remaining in the game card is displayed in the message / operation area 306. Next, when the player operates the storage / replay button 305 of the message / operation area 306, within the range of the number of stored balls recorded on the game card, Increase) and the number of used balls is displayed on the number-of-balls display 40. In this case, the total number of balls is displayed on the number-of-balls display 40 so that the number of used balls from the stored ball is added to the previous number of balls.

When the game is over, the settlement process is performed by touching the return button 304, and the game card in which the total number of balls is recorded is ejected from the card unit 15. Therefore, there is no settlement switch arrangement.
The player holds the ejected game card and inserts it into the card settlement machine 83, so that the card settlement machine 83 settles it (for example, a prize exchange receipt is ejected and can be exchanged for a prize at the counter in the hall).
When the break switch 312 is pressed, the game card is ejected and the gaming machine is in a state where it cannot play. At this time, the break switch effective LED built in the break switch 312 is turned on to notify that the break is possible.

When the game ball is won, the payout control device 230 electronically increases the number of balls held by the player (that is, the number of balls held in the game value storage means by performing the ball addition process). And the like are displayed on the number-of-balls display 40.
Further, as shown in FIG. 6, the operation display device 7 described above is connected to the card unit 15 via a harness, and the operation signal of the ball lending button 303 arranged on the operation display device 7 is transmitted via the harness. The operation display device 7 sent to the card unit 15 displays the remaining amount of the prepaid card based on a signal output from the card unit 15 via the harness.
On the other hand, the card unit connection terminal plate 52 is a board for wiring connection between the pachinko machine 1 side and the card unit 15 side. Is controlled to be impossible to fire.

In this example, the operation display device 7 is provided with a return button 304 for performing a game card return operation. The return button 304 is operated when the player desires to return the game card before starting the game, and is operated when the card is returned after settlement (game end) as described above. As an example of the former, for example, a game card is purchased, and the game card is inserted into the card unit 15 of a certain gaming machine, but the player changes his mind and moves to another table.
It should be noted that when the game is started, a control for deleting the return button 304 from the screen of the operation display device 7 may be performed.
Further, although different from the first embodiment, a configuration may be adopted in which a settlement switch is arranged, and if the settlement switch is pressed, the total number of balls is transferred to the game card and the game card is ejected by the return button 304.

As shown in FIG. 6, the operation display device 7 described above is connected to the card unit 15 via a harness, and the operation display device 7 receives a message based on a control signal output from the card unit 15 via the harness. In addition to performing detailed display and analog display (ball box display) of the number of balls held in the operation area unit 306, the number of balls can be determined according to the operation of the counting switch 311 under the management of the payout control device 230 of the pachinko machine 1. It also performs detailed display of the number of balls counted by counting the number of moved spheres, control for analog display (ballbox display), display control during checkout, and the like.
Further, the card unit 15 outputs a control signal necessary for display of the operation display device 7, ball lending, storage and the like to the operation display device 7, and the operation display device 7 performs various displays based on the control signal from the card unit 15. It responds to the screen configuration necessary for ball lending, storage, etc., and the operation of various buttons.
Here, the card unit 15 constitutes game value management means, return operation means, settlement means, switching control means, and display mode change control means. The operation display device 7 constitutes a second display device managed by the card unit, and constitutes a second game value display means for displaying the game value of the player by the management of the card unit 15. The counting switch 311 constitutes a counting operation means capable of operating the counting means by a player's operation. The return button 304 constitutes a return operation means capable of operating the operation of returning the game value storage medium from the card unit by the player's operation.

(Card unit control system)
Next, the control system of the card unit 15 will be described with reference to FIG.
FIG. 7B is a diagram showing a control system of the card unit 15.
In FIG. 7B, an image input personal computer 700 is connected to the card unit 15, and the image input personal computer 700 includes a USB memory terminal and a DVD device. Production assistance information such as character introduction is stored in a storage medium such as a USB memory or a DVD, and these storage media are attached to the image input personal computer 700 to be accessible, and the attached storage medium is accessed to access the character. Production assistance information such as introduction is read by the image input personal computer 700 and temporarily stored in an internal RAM or the like. When the storage of the presentation assistance information such as the character introduction is completed, the storage medium such as the USB memory or the DVD is removed from the image input personal computer 700.

Note that, as described above, using the image input personal computer 700, the operation assisting information such as character introduction is stored in the image input personal computer 700 from a storage medium such as a USB memory or a DVD. Performed when changing models.
Further, the presentation assistance information such as character introduction is not limited to being stored in a storage medium such as a USB memory or a DVD, but may be another storage medium such as a CD, a hard disk device, an SSD, and the like. Anything is possible. Further, the image input personal computer 700 may be placed in an environment connected to the Internet, and presentation assistance information such as character introduction may be input to the image input personal computer 700 from a remote place through the Internet line and stored.

  Next, the production assistance information such as the character introduction stored in the image input personal computer 700 is transmitted to the card unit 15. This is because the image input personal computer 700 is connected to the card unit 15 when changing the model of the gaming machine. And the card unit 15 reads the production assistance information such as the character introduction stored in the image input personal computer 700. The read presentation assistance information such as the character introduction is stored in the card unit 15 (for example, an internal storage device, particularly a non-volatile flash memory). The card unit 15 is capable of holding the production assistance information such as the stored character introduction even when the power is turned off at the closing of the amusement store or even during a power failure. In FIG. 7B, for the sake of convenience, the data flow in the case where the production assistance information such as the character introduction is stored in the card unit 15 is indicated by the arrow of the display data.

The card unit 15 is directly connected to the operation display device 7 by a harness, and from the card unit 15 display data (ball rental relations, various data such as storage / replay, etc., as well as production assistance information such as character introductions) Is transmitted to the operation display device 7, and switching information based on touch information of various buttons and operation of the switching button 307 is transmitted from the operation display device 7 to the card unit 15. The switching information is one piece of touch information, but is separately provided as switching information in order to clarify the operation of the switching button 307.
When the switching button 307 is operated (touched), presentation assist information such as character introduction is transmitted from the card unit 15 to the operation display device 7 and displayed on the operation display device 7.

  On the other hand, the production control device 53 is connected to the display device 41, and the display data is output from the production control device 53 to the display device 41. The display device 41 is based on the display data and displays a special figure (decoration special figure) game. Display the production. Therefore, in Example 1, the production control device 53 is not connected to the operation display device 7, and there is no switching circuit for switching the connection between the production control device 53 and the operation display device 7. Therefore, all the production assistance information such as character introduction is transmitted to the operation display device 7 via the card unit 15.

For example, when the player touches the switching button 307, presentation assistance information such as character introduction is transmitted from the card unit 15 to the operation display device 7 and displayed on the operation display device 7.
Specifically, when the player touches the switching button 307, the model name of the gaming machine (pachinko machine 1) and the game description are displayed in the message / operation area unit 306 of the operation display device 7. For example, “CRXXXXX” is displayed as the model name, and “High probability until hitting 100 special charts after big hit” is displayed as the game description.
Thereby, the player can receive the model name and the game description only by a simple operation of touching the switching button 307, which is convenient.
In this state, when the switching button 307 is touched again, the switching button 307 is configured to switch only display / non-display (non-display) of the production auxiliary information on the operation display device 7, and therefore, from the display screen of the production auxiliary information Return to normal screen display again.
In addition, when switching to the screen for model name and game description, all screens may be used for introduction of model name and game description, but display of ball rental relationship may be necessary during game, Even if the screen is switched to a screen for explaining the model name or the game description, a structure related to ball rental may be left on a part of the screen.
Also, when there is no need for ball rental such as during big hits, the display of ball rental relations may be turned off.

In addition to the image input personal computer 700, a payout control device 230 is connected to the card unit 15 (in FIG. 7B, the external information terminal board 51 is omitted for convenience of explanation). Information on the number of balls and the number of balls counted (referred to as the number of balls held in FIG. The message / operation area 306 displays details of the number of balls held and the number of counted balls.
As described above, the operation display device 7 is installed in the pachinko machine 1 in appearance, but is directly connected to the card unit 15 by the harness and is under the control of the card unit 15. The operation display device 7 is not controlled. That is, the operation display device 7 is not a device on the pachinko machine 1 side but a device on the card unit 15 side.

(Night monitoring switch)
Next, a detailed configuration of the night monitoring switch 126 (denoted as night monitoring SW in FIG. 8) will be described with reference to FIG.
As shown in FIG. 8, the nighttime monitoring switch 126 includes a backup power source 321, a frame opening detection unit 322, a disconnection detection unit 323, a frame release and disconnection storage unit 324, and an output delay unit 325.
Main power to the night monitoring switch 126 is supplied from the payout controller 230, and the night monitoring switch 126 is normally operated by the main power. On the other hand, the night monitoring switch 126 includes a backup power source 321 and operates by the backup power source 321 when the main power supply is cut off. As the backup power source 321, for example, a primary battery is used. The primary battery is a battery (chemical battery) that can only discharge DC power, and is a battery other than the secondary battery. For example, a dry battery is used.
The backup power source 321 supplies power to the frame opening detection unit 322 and the frame opening / disconnection storage unit 324 when the main power is off.
Further, the backup power source 321 allows current to flow through a route connected in a loop, such as the payout control device 230 → the game control device 54 → the payout control device 230 → the night monitoring switch 126. When the disconnection is detected by the disconnection detection means 323, it is possible to detect that the game control device 54 has been removed.

The monitoring function of the night monitoring switch 126 is as follows.
(A) Monitoring of opening of front frame 4 (main body frame) This is realized by the frame opening detection means 322. That is, the frame opening detection means 322 is a sensor that detects the opening of the front frame 4 and outputs information (frame opening information) indicating whether or not the opening of the front frame 4 has been detected.
(B) Monitoring of removal of game control device 54 This is realized by the disconnection detecting means 323. That is, as described above, the disconnection detecting means 323 is used when the current of the backup power source 321 flows through a loop-connected route such as the payout control device 230 → the game control device 54 → the payout control device 230 → the night monitoring switch 126. Detects that the route is not broken and the game control device 54 is not removed. On the other hand, when the current of the backup power source 321 does not flow through this route, it is detected that the game control device 54 has been removed because the route is disconnected.
Thus, the disconnection detection means 323 detects whether or not the route is disconnected, thereby determining that the game control device 54 has been disconnected as a disconnection and monitoring the removal of the game control device 54. The detection information of the disconnection detecting means 323 is the game control device monitoring information as described above, and this is information indicating whether or not the night monitoring switch 126 has detected the removal of the main board (game control device 54). The disconnection detecting means 323 can monitor the removal of the game control device 54 when the main power is supplied and when the main power is off.
In FIG. 8, “open information” means the frame opening information when the main power is on (normal time), and means the information stored when the main power is off (night). The information is collectively referred to as “night monitoring information”.

The frame opening and disconnection storage means 324 stores and holds monitoring information (frame opening information) of the front frame 5 by the frame opening detection means 322 and removal monitoring information of the game control device 54 by the disconnection detection means 323. In particular, the frame opening and disconnection storage means 324 is supplied with backup power from the backup power source 321 when the main power is off, so that the memory can be held when the main power is off.
The monitoring information (frame opening information) of the front frame 4 and the removal monitoring information of the game control device 54 by the disconnection detection means 323 are not delayed in normal time (when main power is supplied), and each monitoring information is immediately sent out. 230. On the other hand, when the main power is turned off at night or the like, each monitoring information is stored and held by the frame opening and disconnection storage means 324. It is configured to output to the payout control device 230 with a delay for a predetermined period.
The output form of each monitoring information is as follows.
While the front frame 4 is closed, the output of the frame opening detection means 322 is turned on. On the other hand, while the front frame 5 is open, the output of the frame open detection means 322 is off. For example, “on” means an H level signal, and “off” means an L level signal.
When the game control device 54 is not removed, the output of the disconnection detecting means 323 is turned on. On the other hand, when the game control device 54 is detached, the output of the disconnection detecting means 323 is turned off. For example, “on” means an H level signal, and “off” means an L level signal.
The frame opening detection means 322 detects not only the opening of the front frame 4 but also the opening of the glass frame 5, for example, and detects the opening information of the glass frame 5 (information including opening and non-opening). You may make it memorize | store in the frame open | release and disconnection memory | storage means 324. FIG.

The output delay means 325 is monitoring information on the front frame 5 by the frame opening detection means 322 stored and held in the frame opening and disconnection storage means 324 at night when the main power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned off (frame opening information). ) And the removal monitoring information (game control device monitoring information) of the game control device 54 by the disconnection detecting means 323 when the main power is turned on when the main power is turned on, etc., when the main power is turned on. Is output to the payout control device 230 after being delayed by a predetermined period.
The output delay means 325 is realized by a delay circuit using a logic IC, for example, but the output delay means 325 may be realized by a delay means by a simple CR circuit (delay by CR time constant), for example.

Thus, since the night monitoring switch 126 includes the output delay means 325, the frame opening information and the game control device monitoring information stored when the main power supply is turned off after the main power supply is started are stored in the main power supply. The output is output to the external payout control device 230 after being delayed by a predetermined period from the ON timing. Here, the game control device monitoring information is also referred to as night monitoring information as shown in FIG.
The payout control device 230 receives the frame opening information and game control device monitoring information (nighttime monitoring information) at the internal input port and outputs them to the CPU 231. The CPU 231 stores the frame opening information and game control device monitoring information in the RAM 233, and then This is a configuration for transmitting to the card unit 15 (details will be described later).

(Batch display device)
Next, a detailed configuration of the collective display device 35 will be described with reference to FIG.
FIG. 9A is an enlarged view of the collective display device 35. 9A, the collective display device 35 includes a special figure 1 display 351, a special figure 2 display 352, a special figure 1 hold LED 353, a special figure 2 hold LED 354, a winning display LED 355, a universal figure LED 356, and a general figure hold LED 357. , A round display LED 358 and a status display LED 359, and these elements are integrally formed on the substrate of the collective display device 35.
The special figure 1 indicator 351 is composed of 7-segment LEDs, and displays the special figure 1 (including fluctuation display, stop state display, etc.). Various display modes are adopted depending on which segment is lit (or blinks) among the seven-segment LEDs. The various display modes are, for example, “outside” stop, “big hit” stop, “being fluctuated”, etc., for Special Figure 1.
Similarly, the special figure 2 indicator 352 is composed of 7-segment LEDs, and displays the special figure 2 (including a change display, a stop state display, etc.). Various display modes are adopted depending on which segment is lit (or blinks) among the seven-segment LEDs. The various display modes are, for example, “outside” stop, “big hit” stop, “being changed”, etc., for the special figure 2.

  Note that, as described above, the variable display game according to FIG. 1 and FIG. 2 is that when the game ball enters the first start winning opening 25 and a special figure start winning (first start winning) occurs, When the first variation display game by the variation display of the decoration special figure 1 is performed on the display device 41 and the game ball enters the second start prize opening 26, a special figure start prize (second start prize) occurs. The display device 41 performs the second variation display game based on the variation display of the decoration special figure 2, but displays the aspects of the variable display game of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 instead of the decoration special figure. These are the special figure 1 display 351 and the special figure 2 display 352 arranged in the collective display device 35.

The special figure 1 hold LED 353 displays the number of the special figure 1 held. The special figure 1 hold number indicates that the game ball enters the first start winning opening 25 to receive a special figure start prize (first start prize). ) Is the number of holds stored with an upper limit of four.
Similarly, the special figure 2 hold LED 354 displays the hold number of the special figure 2, and the special figure 2 hold number is the special figure start prize (first figure) when the game ball enters the second start prize opening 26. This is the number of suspensions stored with an upper limit of 4 when a (2 start winning) occurs.
As shown in FIG. 9C, the special figure 1 hold LED 353 and the special figure 2 hold LED 354 are configured to display 1 to 4 hold numbers with three LEDs in this example for common use. Yes. That is, as shown in FIG. 9C, 1 to 4 hold numbers are displayed in the following manner.
-Hold number = 1: One LED at the left end is lit-Hold number = 2: One second LED from the left end is lit-Hold number = 3: One third LED from the left end is lit-Hold number = 4 : All three LEDs are lit. Note that the LEDs may not be lit but may be blinking.

The winning display LED 355 displays the number of winning balls corresponding to winning in the winning opening, and corresponds to a winning display device. Here, winning a prize opening means all winning a prize outlets with a winning ball discharge (actually paying out a ball or adding to the number of balls in the case of an enclosed ball type). 25, 26, the big winning opening 27a of the variable winning apparatus 27, and the general winning openings 28-31.
In the case of the present embodiment, the pachinko machine 1 is an enclosed ball type gaming machine, and therefore, a winning ball corresponding to winning in the winning opening is added to the number of balls held. On the other hand, in a normal gaming machine, the winning ball corresponding to the winning at the winning opening is actually discharged (paid out) to the upper plate.

The number of winning balls associated with winning a prize is as follows.
・ Large winning opening 27a = 13 ・ Starting winning opening 25 = 3 ・ Starting winning opening 26 (Fuden) = 1 ・ General winning opening 28-31 = 10 The winning display LED 355 consists of two 7-segment LEDs, A 2-digit number can be displayed as the number of winning balls. The display time of the number of prize balls is as follows.
-Normal mode (normal gaming state) = 1 second (s)
(Small hits and medium hits are included in the normal mode)
・ Special mode (big hit, probability fluctuation, short time (under normal power support) = 0.5 seconds (s)
Note that the special mode is a concept indicating a state where there is a high possibility that a game ball will win continuously, such as during a big hit.

The general-purpose LED 356 is composed of a single LED, and performs normal-state display (including change display, stop state display, and the like). As the display mode, for example, “out of contact” stop = light-off, “hit” stop = light on, “during change” = blinking.
The multi-purpose hold LED 357 displays the number of general-purpose holds, and the general-purpose hold number indicates that when the game ball passes the general-purpose start gate 32, the general-purpose LED 356 of the collective display device 35 is activated. A normal figure state display is performed, and at the same time, the display part 41a displays a normal figure change display game by a change display of the normal figure as a decorative general figure state display. In this way, the game ball has passed the normal figure start gate 32. In this case, it is the number of holds stored with an upper limit of four.
As shown in FIG. 9 (c), the general map hold LED 357 is composed of 1 to 4 LEDs in the present example for common use, as shown in FIG. 9C. It has a structure that can display the number of holds on the map. In addition, the display mode of the usual number of hold is the same as the example of FIG. 9C, and detailed description is omitted.

The round display LED 358 displays the number of rounds when a big hit is generated in accordance with the start winning of the special figure 1 or the special figure 2 and the big hit game is executed. As shown in FIG. For this reason, in this example, four types of rounds can be displayed with four LEDs.
Specifically, as shown in FIG. 9B, three types of rounds are displayed in the following manner.
• ○ + (2) = 2 rounds displayed • ○ + (11) = 11 rounds displayed • ○ + (16) = 16 rounds displayed In the above, ○ indicates lighting of one LED. Also, (2), (11), and (16) are the stickers on which the numbers (2), (11), and (16) are drawn on the surface of the main body of the collective display device 35 on the front side of the LEDs. In addition, the display corresponding to the number of rounds is performed by three LEDs. For example, a sheet may be used instead of the seal.

As a result, if the LED corresponding to the sticker (2) is lit, it is easily understood that there are two rounds. Similarly, if the LED corresponding to the seal (11) is lit, it is known that the round is 11 rounds, and if the LED corresponding to the seal (16) is lit, it is understood that the round is 16 rounds. Become.
When two rounds of display are performed, one LED corresponding to “◯” and two LEDs corresponding to the seal (2) are lit simultaneously. This is the same when displaying 11 rounds and 16 rounds, and one LED corresponding to ○ is turned on together. Also, in other round games, only one LED corresponding to ○ is lit. Each LED may be blinking instead of lighting.
Note that the round display LED 358 has four LEDs, one of which does not correspond to the seal, but the LED may be used as a spare. That is, when the number of rounds is four, four types of rounds can be expressed by lighting the four LEDs corresponding to the number of rounds.

Also, sticking the numbers (2), (11), and (16) on the main body surface of the collective display device 35 on the front side of the LED is a big hit round, depending on the model of the pachinko machine 1 Since the number may change, it is possible to change to the difference in the number of rounds, etc., as long as the seal is changed, so that such a flexible response is possible.
In addition, the performance indication of the model is also written on the seal. The performance display includes, for example, model name, jackpot probability (including a high probability at the time of probability change and a low probability at the normal time), a probability change ratio, the maximum number of jackpots (the limit value of the number of jackpots), the number of winning balls, and the like. The performance display by the sticker may be described in a place different from the collective display device 35 (that is, the sticker may be pasted in another place).
The state display LED 359 displays the gaming state of the pachinko machine 1 and is composed of two LEDs. As the display of the gaming state, for example, “probability variation state” and “time saving state” are displayed by lighting (or blinking) each one LED.

F. Outline of Game Next, an outline of a game performed in the pachinko machine 1 of this example and a flow of the game will be described.
At the beginning of the game (or before the game), the customer is waiting (during the demonstration), and a command for instructing the display of the customer waiting screen is transmitted from the game control device 54 to the effect control device 53, On the display unit 41a of the display device 41, a customer waiting screen (moving image or still image) is displayed.
Then, when the player inserts, for example, a game card into the card unit 15 and performs a ball lending operation with a predetermined unit frequency (presses the ball lending button 303 of the operation display device 7 once, for example), a predetermined number of balls (For example, 125) are added and displayed by the ball count indicator 40 of the lower panel 6. At this time, the ball lending number data (valuable value information) of the game card is reduced by the predetermined number (for example, five degrees corresponding to 500 yen). Note that the number of balls possessed corresponds to the game value that is the profit of the player as described above, and the data on the number of balls possessed is stored in, for example, the RAM 233 (game value storage means) in the payout control device 230.

When the player operates the firing operation handle 11 with the above-mentioned number of possessed balls, the game ball at the launch position is driven into the game area 22 through the guide rail 21, and the game ball that has been placed is special. When the winning winning opening 25 or 26 shown in the figure is won (that is, when there is a special drawing starting prize), the collective display device 35 displays the variation of the special drawing 1 or the special drawing 2 and the decorative special drawing. A command for instructing a variable display is transmitted from the game control device 54 to the effect control device 53, and a display (for example, scrolling) in which the decorative special figure (consisting of numbers, characters, symbols, patterns, etc.) is changed (for example, scrolled) on the display unit 41a ( A so-called fluctuation display game is performed, and a special figure fluctuation display game (hereinafter referred to as a special figure fluctuation display game) is performed. On the other hand, the sphere that has been removed without winning the prize flows into the out sphere inlet 23.
The ball that has fallen on the game area 22 becomes out or safe, passes through the game area 22, flows down to the game ball inlet 71 of the circulation device 55, is collected and circulated by the circulation device 55, and is guided to the launch position again. Will be. In this manner, the pachinko game is performed by circulating the enclosed game balls.

This inventive concept is shown as follows.
A predetermined number of game balls can be encapsulated in the gaming machine main body, and the enclosed game balls can be launched into the game area to play a game, and the game balls launched into the game area Control means for increasing the game value, which is the player's profit, according to the game result, and by collecting the game balls that have passed through the game area and guiding them to the launch position, the enclosed game balls can be recycled and used. It is a concept of an enclosed ball type gaming machine that performs a game.

Here, increasing the game value, which is the player's profit, according to the game result of the game ball fired in the game area, in other words, whether the game result is in a predetermined profit state or other state? In the case of a predetermined profit state, the player's profit (game value) is increased in correspondence with the predetermined number of prize balls. For example, the game ball becomes safe or out If it is determined that it is safe, for example, the number of balls held by the player is increased. “Safe” corresponds to a ball entering a winning opening (including general winning openings 28 to 31 and start winning openings 25, 26, etc.).
In addition, the game value (for example, the number of possessed balls) that is the profit of the player according to the game result is increased. Including special cases where a special game condition) occurs and the big prize opening is opened, and a lot of prize balls are added to the number of possessed balls by winning a game ball in the big prize opening. This is equivalent to increasing the game value. Note that the gaming value that is the profit of the player is not necessarily limited to the number of balls corresponding to the number of game balls, and the number of points may be used instead of the number of balls held. However, in this example, unless otherwise indicated, the embodiment uses a number of balls that corresponds to the number of game balls as the game value.
Further, the game value (the number of possessed balls or the number of points) is added according to the game result as described above, while being subtracted by the number of game balls fired. For example, when the number of possessed balls corresponding to the number of game balls is used as the game value, the number of possessed balls is decremented by “1” every time the game ball is launched.

And, if the stop result mode of the above-mentioned special figure fluctuation display game (a combination of special figures derived by the fluctuation display) is a special result aspect (for example, “3, 3, 3”, etc.), it is a big hit. A privilege to be called is given to the player. In terms of control, for example, a value such as a big hit random number is extracted and stored on the condition that there has been a start prize, and this extracted and stored random number value is compared with a predetermined determination value at the time of determination. Based on the comparison determination result, whether or not to make a big hit is determined in advance, and the variable display game is started in response to this determination.
Further, if the stop result mode of the variable display game is a specific mode of the special result mode (for example, “7, 7, 7”), it will be the big hit and after the big hit game (a special prize described later) After the period), the game state shifts from the normal mode to the probability change mode. In this probability variation mode, control is performed to increase the probability that the special figure will be a big hit (hereinafter referred to as the special figure big hit probability). In some cases, the above-described time-short state control is also performed.

  When the jackpot is reached and the jackpot state is reached, a fanfare period (a period in which an output of a sound effect that produces a jackpot is executed) is passed, and the jackpot of the variable prize winning device 27 is set for a predetermined time (for example, In the range not exceeding 30 seconds), for example, an opening operation (a jackpot round) that is temporarily opened for a period of up to 10 winnings is performed. This release operation is repeated for a specified number of rounds. In this jackpot state, a command for instructing display of a jackpot screen for directing the jackpot state or informing the player of the number of rounds of jackpot is transmitted from the game control device 54 to the effect control device 53 for display. In the unit 41a, such a big hit display is executed.

The period in which the jackpot is in effect (the fanfare period, the period of the jackpot round in which the jackpot is open, the interval period between the jackpot round and the next jackpot round, and the ending period) are the special prize period. It corresponds to.
In addition, as the number of rounds of the big hit, for example, a big hit of 15 rounds is usually the main big hit, but a configuration that generates a 16R big hit as a premier or other configurations may be used. Further, there may be a two-round big hit or the like as a so-called abruptness (a sudden probability change in which the big hit probability changes via a big hit with few balls).

In addition, when a game ball is further won in the start winning opening 25 or 26 during the special figure variation display game or the big hit, a special display start memory hold display is performed on the display unit 41a or the like, for example, up to four. After the special figure fluctuation display game or the big hit state is stored, the special figure fluctuation display game is repeated or returned to the customer waiting state based on the start memory.
That is, if the variable display game ends with a big hit, the game shifts to a big hit state, and if the variable display game ends with a start and there is a start memory, the variable display game is executed again, and the variable display game ends with a start and no start memory is stored. If the big hit ends and there is a start memory, the variable display game is executed again. If the big hit ends and there is no start memory, the flow returns to the customer wait state.

  In this embodiment, for example, two types of special chart start memory (special map start memory) are displayed (special figure 1 hold display and special figure 2 hold display). A variation display game (a first variation display game and a second variation display game) is executed. That is, when a special figure start prize (first start prize) due to the game ball entering the first start prize opening 25 occurs, the display device 41 plays the first variation display game by the variation display of the special figure 1. When a game ball wins the first start winning opening 25 during any special figure variation display game or the like, one first start memory (start memory corresponding to the special figure 1 hold display) is stored. On the other hand, the first variation display game by the variation display of the special figure 1 is performed on the display device 41 after the special figure fluctuation display game is finished.

When a special figure start prize (second start prize) due to the game ball entering the second start prize opening 26 is generated, a second variation display game based on the variation display of the special figure 2 is performed on the display device 41. When a game ball wins the second start winning opening 26 during any special figure variation display game or the like, one second start memory (start memory corresponding to the special figure 2 hold display) is stored. On the other hand, the second variation display game by the variation display of the special figure 2 is performed on the display device 41 after the above special figure fluctuation display game ends. When both the first start memory and the second start memory are present, either the first variation display game or the second variation display game is executed first in accordance with a preset rule. For example, a mode in which the second variable display game corresponding to the second start winning opening 26 is preferentially performed (that is, a mode in which the second start memory is preferentially consumed) or two types of variable display games are alternately displayed. There may be a mode to be performed.
On the other hand, when the game ball passes through the usual figure starting gate 32 during the game, the aforementioned usual figure variation display game is performed. Since this ordinary map display game has been described above, the description thereof is omitted here.

Here, when it is determined that the game ball is safe and the number of balls held by the player is increased, the ball enters the winning port (including the general winning ports 28 to 31 and the starting winning ports 25, 26, etc.). In addition, when a big hit occurs and shifts to the big win state, the bonus winning hole 27a of the variable winning device 27 is temporarily within a range not exceeding a specified time (for example, 30 seconds), for example, for a period up to ten winnings. The jackpot round to be released is repeated for a predetermined number of rounds, and the player wins a large number of winnings.
In this case, all the winning balls associated with winning are displayed by the winning display LED 355 in the collective display device 35. The winning here is all winnings that involve winning ball discharge (a process of actually paying out balls or adding to the number of balls in the case of an enclosed ball type). , 26, the large winning opening 27a of the variable winning apparatus 27, and the general winning openings 28-31. Regardless of which winning ball is won in any of these winning holes, a predetermined time is displayed by a winning display LED 355 consisting of two 7-segment balls (the normal mode is 1 second and the special mode is 0.5 seconds). Therefore, the player can easily know where on the board (game board 20) the prize is won and how many prize balls are obtained. Therefore, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that does not lower the interest of the game.

Further, the number of balls possessed by the player (game value) is indicated by the number-of-balls display 40 (game value display means) that displays the number of balls possessed by the player (game value) under the management of the payout control device 230 (game machine side). ) And the message / operation area unit 306 (second game value display means) of the operation display device 7 which displays the number of players' balls (game value) by the management of the card unit 15. .
In this case, various information (various information including the number of balls) of the gaming machine (pachinko machine 1) is sent periodically (for example, every 400 ms) from the payout control device 230 to the card unit 15. In the message / operation area 306 of the operation display device 7 under the management of the card unit 15, the number of players' balls (game value) can be displayed.
The number of balls held by the player is always digitally displayed on the number-of-balls display 40. Thereby, the player can grasp | ascertain the number of balls. However, since the number-of-balls display 41 is small, it is not easy to intuitively grasp the number of balls when the number of balls is increased.

  On the other hand, the message / operation area unit 306 of the operation display device 7 is a liquid crystal display larger than the number-of-balls display 40, and the number of balls held in the message / operation area unit 306 is displayed in an analog form in a figure that looks like a ball box. . For example, if the number of balls held by the player increases as the big hits continue, the figure that looks like a ball box is displayed as an analog such as two boxes, three boxes,. As a result, when the player has a large number of balls, the number of balls held in the message / operation area 306 is displayed in an analogy with a shape that looks like a ball box. Can be done.

Next, if the player wants to count the number of balls to be counted, that is, in the case of a game machine with a method of paying out with real balls, the acquired number of balls is outside the gaming machine. If you want to do the same thing electronically as the work of physically moving to the ball box, you can do it as follows.
When the player's number of balls is displayed on the number-of-balls display 40, when the counting switch 311 arranged on the lower panel 6 of the pachinko machine 1 is pressed, the number of balls is sequentially counted to obtain the counted number of balls. The counted number of possessed balls becomes the counted number of balls, and is held and managed by the payout control device 230. However, the number of balls held and the number of counted balls are sent periodically (for example, every 400 ms) from the payout control device 230 to the card unit 15, and thus the operation display device 7 under the management of the card unit 15. On the screen of the message / operation area unit 306, a digital display (numerals) of the number of counting balls and an analog display (analog display using a figure that looks like a ball box) are displayed.
Similarly, the player's number of balls displayed on the number-of-balls display 40 is displayed on the screen of the message / operation area 306 of the operation display device 7 in an analog manner (analog with a figure that looks like a ball box). Display) or an explanation of the number of balls held.
The data on the number of balls held and the number of balls counted are also sent from the payout control device 230 to the effect control device 53 via the game control device 54, and the upper part of the decorative ball display device 250 is controlled by the effect control device 53. Since decoration of the number of balls and the number of counting balls is performed using a large number of LEDs of the decorative ball display device 250a and the lower decoration ball display device 250b, the number of balls and the number of counting balls are particularly exhibited while exhibiting decorativeness. The player can easily grasp it.

By seeing the digital display (numbers) or analog display (analog display with a figure that looks like a ball box) on the screen of the message / operation area unit 306 of the operation display device 7, how much the player has. It is easy to see if the number of balls has moved to the number of balls counted. That is, in an example of a gaming machine that pays out with a real ball, it is the same as knowing how much the acquired number of possessed balls is physically transferred to a ball box outside the gaming machine.
In this way, if the counting switch 311 is pressed to count the number of balls, the counted number of balls is held and managed by the dispensing control device 230 as the counted number of balls, but from the dispensing control device 230 to the card unit 15. On the other hand, since the number of possessed balls and the number of counted balls are sent regularly (for example, every 400 ms), the control of the card unit 15 causes “more counting”, “game end”, When each button of “Continue game” appears and touch “End of game” from here, the message “Please press return button” appears and prompts the settlement. After that, when the return button 304 is pressed, the total The number of balls held (the number of balls held + the number of balls counted) is written (recorded) on the game card, and the settlement ends, and the game card is returned.

On the other hand, when the “continue game” button is touched, a message “start firing” appears, prompting the launch, and then the launch handle 11 can be operated to continue the game.
Further, when replay is desired using the number of counting balls, by operating the counting ball use switch 314, for example, 100 pieces move to the number of possessed balls per operation and can be fired.
In this way, even when a game is played with an enclosed ball type gaming machine, the player can count the number of possessed balls without a sense of incongruity with a feeling close to transferring the acquired game balls to the ball box. Then, the counted number of balls counted from the number of held balls is held, and thereafter, settlement or replay can be easily performed.

Next, the following display control is performed on the screen of the message / operation area unit 306 of the operation display device 7.
Normally (in the initial state), under the management and control of the card unit 15, processing such as ball rental, storage, settlement (card recording process), replay, game card return, etc. is performed, and ball rental, storage Information necessary for ball, checkout, replay, game card return, etc. is displayed on the message / operation area 306 of the operation display device 7.
On the other hand, when the player touches the switching button 307 of the operation display device 7, presentation assistance information such as character introduction is transmitted from the card unit 15 to the operation display device 7 and displayed on the operation display device 7. Specifically, when the switch button 307 is touched, the model name of the gaming machine (pachinko machine 1) and the game description are displayed in the message / operation area unit 306 of the operation display device 7. For example, “CRXXXXX” is displayed as the model name, and “High probability until hitting 100 special charts after big hit” is displayed as the game description. Thereby, the player can receive the model name and the game description only by a simple operation of touching the switching button 307, which is convenient.
In this state, when the switching button 307 is touched again, the switching button 307 is configured to switch only display / non-display (non-display) of the production auxiliary information on the operation display device 7, and therefore, from the display screen of the production auxiliary information Return to normal screen display again.

Further, in this embodiment, a night monitoring switch 126 is provided, and the night monitoring switch 126 is a sensor that can detect both the opening of the front frame 4 and the removal of the game control device 54 (in detail). Frame opening detection means 322, disconnection detection means 323), and information indicating that the front frame 4 has been released and information from which the game control device 54 has been removed are stored in the pachinko machine 1 by the frame release and disconnection storage means 324. It is the structure which hold | maintains also in the interruption | blocking state.
Therefore, particularly when the game hall is closed at night and the front frame 4 of the pachinko machine 1 is opened, information that detects that the front frame 4 is opened (for example, L level as off data) ) Is held by the frame opening / breaking storage means 324 even at night. The night monitoring switch 126 can detect both the state where the front frame 4 is opened and the state where the front frame 4 is not opened. As described above, the night monitoring switch 126 monitors the front frame 4. The detection signal is referred to as frame opening information.
In addition, when the game control station 54 of the pachinko machine 1 is removed at night when the game hall is closed, information on the removal of the game control apparatus 54 (for example, an L level signal as off data) is displayed. The frame opening and disconnection storage means 324 holds even at night. The night monitoring switch 126 can detect both the state where the game control device 54 is removed and the state where the game control device 54 is not removed. As described above, the night monitoring switch 126 controls the game control. The detection signal that monitors the removal of the device 54 is referred to as game control device monitoring information.
For convenience of explanation, the output monitored to detect both the state in which the front frame 4 is opened and the state in which the front frame 4 is not opened by the night monitoring switch 126 is referred to as frame opening information. The output monitored to detect both the state where the game control device 54 is removed and the state where it is not removed by the switch 126 is referred to as game control device monitoring information (nighttime monitoring information).

  Next, when the pachinko machine 1 is activated by turning on the power (turning on the main power) in the next morning, the opening information for monitoring whether or not the front frame 4 is opened at night and the game for monitoring whether or not the game control device 54 is removed. The control device monitoring information is taken into the payout control device 230 when the payout control device 230 reads the output signal from the night monitoring switch 126. The payout control device 230 is ready to start up from the time when the main power is turned on. (For example, prohibiting all interrupts, initial setting of CPU peripheral circuits (including serial ports), etc.) takes some time. When the frame opening information and the game control device monitoring information are input to the payout control device 230 from the nighttime monitoring switch 126 during the start-up preparation period, there is a possibility that these pieces of information cannot be captured.

Therefore, when the main power supplied from the power supply device 58 is turned on, the main power is immediately supplied to the payout control device 230, and the main power is also supplied to the night monitoring switch 126 via the payout control device 230. However, since the night monitoring switch 126 has an output delay means 325 inside, the frame opening information and the game control device monitoring information stored / held in the frame opening / disconnection storage means 324 are supplied to the main power supply by the output delay means 325. It is output to the payout control device 230 after a predetermined period of delay from the ON timing.
Thereby, after the start-up preparation period in the payout control device 230 elapses, the frame opening information and the game control device monitoring information of the night monitoring switch 126 are output to the outside and input to the payout control device 230, and the payout control device. The frame opening information and the game control device monitoring information stored in the RAM 233 are transmitted to the card unit 15.
Therefore, after the start-up preparation period of the payout control device 230 elapses, the frame opening information and the game control device monitoring information of the night monitoring switch 126 are taken into the payout control device 230, so that the frame opening information and the game control device monitoring are monitored. There is no possibility that the information cannot be taken in, the frame opening information and the game control device monitoring information can be taken in reliably, and the security against fraud is improved.

On the other hand, when the store clerk of the game store turns on the RAM clear switch 182 to return the pachinko machine 1 to the initial state in preparation for opening the store, the RAM 113 in the game control device 54, the RAM 233 in the payout control device 230, etc. are initialized. Will be converted.
Here, in this embodiment, when the RAM clear switch 182 is turned on, the RAM 233 in the payout control device 230 is initialized and cleared, and then the frame opening information of the night monitoring switch 126 and the game control device. The monitoring information is taken into the payout control device 230 and stored in the RAM 233. Thereafter, the frame opening information and the game control device monitoring information stored in the RAM 233 are transmitted from the payout control device 230 to the card unit 15. Therefore, there is no problem that the frame opening information and the game control device monitoring information in the RAM 233 are erased by turning on the RAM clear switch 182.
The information stored in the RAM 233 is cleared only because the information before the nighttime monitoring switch 126 frame opening information and game control device monitoring information is taken into the payout control device 230 is used.
When the payout control device 230 receives the frame opening information and the game control device monitoring information reception notification from the card unit 15, it sends a monitoring information transmission normal command to the game control device 54.

Further, in the payout control device 230, when the frame release information and the game control device monitoring information are not transmitted to the card unit 15 (for example, the reception of the frame release information and the game control device monitoring information is not received from the card unit 15). If), the monitoring information transmission error flag is set, and a monitoring information transmission error command is transmitted to the game control device 54. When the monitoring information transmission error command is transmitted from the payout control device 230 to the game control device 54, the game control device 54 transmits a monitoring information transmission error command to the effect control board (effect control device 53). Thereby, the effect control device 53 displays an error message on the display device 41 based on the information transmission error command, for example, indicating that the command related to the frame opening information and the game control device monitoring information is not transmitted to the card unit 15. Control and inform the store clerk.
Note that an abnormality signal may be output from the payout control device 230 to the error display LED 67 so that the error display LED 67 is lit (or flashes).
On the other hand, in the payout control device 230, when the frame release information and the game control device monitoring information are transmitted to the card unit 15 (for example, when receiving the receipt of the frame release information and the game control device monitoring information from the card unit 15). Transmits a monitoring information transmission normal command to the game control device 54. When the monitoring information transmission normal command is transmitted from the payout control device 230 to the game control device 54, the game control device 54 transmits the monitoring information transmission normal command to the effect control board (effect control device 53).
The effect control device 53 performs control such as displaying a message on the display device 41 indicating that a command related to frame opening information and game control device monitoring information is transmitted to the card unit 15 based on the monitoring information transmission normal command. You may perform and inform a store clerk.

Thus, at night when the game hall is closed, for example, when a suspicious person opens the front frame 4 of the pachinko machine 1 and attaches an illegal board or the like, the night monitor switch 126 causes the front frame 4 to The open state is detected, and the frame open information is retained even when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is shut off. Even when the game control device 54 is removed at night, the night monitoring switch 126 detects that the game control device 54 has been removed, and the game control device monitoring information is retained even when the pachinko machine 1 is powered off. Has been.
The next morning, when the main power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the main power is supplied to the payout control device 230 and the night monitoring switch 126. Since the night monitoring switch 126 includes the output delay means 325 inside, the frame is opened. The frame opening information and game control device monitoring information stored and held in the disconnection storage means 324 are output to the payout control device 230 by the output delay means 325 after a predetermined period of delay from the main power-on timing.
Next, when the payout control device 230 reads the detection signal (the frame opening information and the game control device monitoring information) from the night monitoring switch 126, the frame opening information and the game control device monitoring information stored in the RAM 233 are stored. For example, the card unit 15 notifies the error, or outputs error information to the hall computer 86 (further, it may be possible not to lend the ball). Further, when the front frame 4 is illegally opened and frame opening information is generated, or when the game control device 54 is removed and game control device monitoring information is generated, those error states are displayed on the display device 41. The
Accordingly, the store clerk looks at the error notification of the display device 41 and the card unit 15 to check the pachinko machine 1 and take appropriate measures for the attachment of, for example, an illegal board (for example, removal of the illegal board, etc. and normal inspection). ) And security against fraud can be improved.

Further, in this embodiment, the polishing control device 59 (including the polishing device 56) is not limited to the pachinko machine 1 being operated, and even when the store is closed and the power is turned off, the game control device 54 (main board) ) And information input (for example, input of information such as signal input, data input, command input, etc.) is not performed at all to the payout control device 230. That is, the polishing control device 59 (including the polishing device 56) is “sub-configured”. Therefore, by substituting it, there is a merit that the limitation of ROM capacity and the limitation of parts are relaxed.
When the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the polishing device 56 operates to polish the game ball with a predetermined period when the power is turned on as a polishing period. While the game ball is being polished, the ball is stopped from firing and the game cannot be played.
Specifically, the payout control device 230 transmits a polishing start command to the game control device 54 at the start of polishing when the power is turned on, and when the game control device 54 receives the polishing start command from the payout control device 230, the effect control device 53 Send a polishing start command. When the production control device 53 receives the polishing start command from the game control device 54, the production control device 53 instructs the polishing control device 59 to start polishing, and displays on the screen of the display device 41 from reception of the polishing start command to reception of the polishing stop command. Control to do.
In response to a polishing instruction from the production control device 53, the polishing control device 59 performs processing necessary for polishing the encapsulated sphere, such as driving the polishing motor 70 and operating the switching solenoid 79S, for a predetermined period of time. Polishing is performed.
In the polishing process, the polishing motor 70 of the polishing device 56 is turned on and started by the control of the polishing control device 59, and the switching solenoid 79S of the switching valve 79 slides a part of the ball feed flow path 78 to polish the polishing guide port. 80a is opened, and the encapsulated sphere existing in the sensor flow path 77 and the ball feed flow path 78 is moved by gravity to the lower polishing inflow guiding path 80 through the polishing guiding opening 80a, and the polishing device 56 is passed through the polishing inflow guiding path 80. Lead to. Such an operation (ie, displacement: slide) of the switching solenoid 79S is referred to as switching the path of the encapsulated sphere to the “polishing side”. That is, in this case, the encapsulated sphere circulates through the polishing device 56 and becomes a route for polishing.
On the other hand, an operation in which the switching solenoid 79S closes the polishing guide port 80a without sliding a part of the ball feed passage 78 is referred to as switching the path of the encapsulated sphere to the “normal side”. That is, in this case, the encapsulated ball does not circulate through the polishing device 56, passes through the game board 20 and flows into the circulator 55, and the ball feed for firing the ball through the sensor flow channel 77 and the ball feed flow channel 78. The ball sent to the device and sent to the launch position is launched toward the game area 22 along the rail 21 by the launch solenoid 173 of the launch device, and recovered again as an out ball (including a safe ball) or a foul ball. It becomes a normal encapsulated ball circulation route in which the route of flowing in from the game ball inlet 71 as a ball is repeatedly circulated.

When the switching solenoid 79S switches the path of the encapsulated sphere to the “polishing side”, the encapsulated sphere starts to flow into the polishing apparatus 56, and the inflowed sphere is lifted by the lifting screw 73 by the power of the polishing motor 70, And is discharged from the upper outlet 75 via the polishing outlet switch 76 and flows into the sensor flow path 77 again. Thereafter, during ball polishing, the encapsulated sphere is guided again to the polishing device 56 through the sensor flow path 77, the ball feed flow path 78, the polishing guide port 80a, and the polishing inflow guide path 80, and polishing is repeated. .
If the polishing outlet switch 76 does not detect the discharge of the sphere from the upper outlet 75 for a certain time or more, it is determined that there is an abnormality such as a clogged ball in the polishing device 56, and the polishing motor 70 of the polishing device 56 is prevented from continuing to rotate. .
Next, after the switching solenoid 79S switches the path of the encapsulated sphere to “polishing side”, when a predetermined time T1 elapses, the path of the encapsulated sphere is switched to “normal side”. Thereafter, when the predetermined time T2 further elapses and the predetermined time T3 elapses after the polishing outlet switch 76 is turned on, the driving of the polishing motor 70 is stopped. Furthermore, when the production control device 53 receives the polishing stop command, the display device 41 stops the display of the sphere displayed on the screen during polishing.
Note that when the driving of the polishing motor 70 is stopped, the polishing motor 70 does not consume power. Further, when the path of the enclosing ball is switched to the “normal side”, the switching solenoid 79S closes the polishing guiding port 80a by the valve body of the switching valve 79 (for example, the polishing valve is energized by a spring to polish the polishing guiding port). In this state, the switching solenoid 79S does not consume power.
Thus, when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the path of the encapsulated sphere is switched to the “polishing side” for a predetermined time T1, and the encapsulated sphere is polished by the polishing device 56. Next, when the polishing of the encapsulated sphere is completed, the game is ready, and the encapsulated sphere is circulated without going through the polishing device 56 during the game.
In addition, the game control device 54 (main board) and the payout control device 230 simply issue a polishing start command and a polishing stop command to the effect control device 53, and under the control of the effect control device 53, the polishing control device 59 (polishing device). Therefore, the control burden on the game control device 54 (main board) and the payout control device 230 can be reduced, and the efficiency is improved.

Further, when the number of balls is generated during the game of the pachinko machine 1, the decoration with a large number of LEDs of the upper decorative ball display device 250a and the lower decorative ball display device 250b in the decorative ball display device 250 is performed.
For example, in the upper decorative ball display device 250a, when the number of balls held by the player is 100 or more, all LEDs are lit or blinking, and when the number of balls held is 50 or less, half of all LEDs. The decoration is controlled so that is turned off.
Further, in the lower decorative ball display device 250b, for example, when the number of counted balls = 0, all the LEDs are turned off, and while counting the number of balls, the lower decorative ball display device 250a is imaged from the upper decorative ball display device 250a. The decoration is controlled so that the LED (that is, the LED of the counting decoration unit 250c) is blinked so that the sphere moves toward the sphere display device 250b. Then, the LED is turned on in order from the lower part of the lower decorative ball display device 250b, which is an image of a ball box according to the number of counted balls, and decoration control is performed so that the player can know the approximate number of counted balls by the number of LEDs turned on. Done.
In this way, since the decoration of the number of balls held and the number of counted balls is performed using a large number of LEDs in the decorative ball display device 250, the expression of the number of balls held and the number of counted balls close to the real ball is given to the player. can do. Therefore, the player can easily understand the number of balls held and the number of balls counted.

In addition, when the number of balls held during the game of the pachinko machine 1 is generated, the number of balls held by the player is displayed on the number-of-balls display 40, but at this time, it is arranged on the lower panel 6 of the pachinko machine 1. When the counting switch 311 is pressed, as described above, the number of balls held is counted and becomes the number of counted balls, and displayed on the message / operation area 306 of the operation display device 7 (for example, digital display of the number of counted balls) (Numerical value)) and analog display (analog display with a figure that looks like a ball box). When the counting ball number is present, the counting ball display 313 is lit to notify.
In this state, when the player wants to return from the number of counted balls to the number of possessed balls, the player uses a counting ball use switch 314. That is, when the player desires to move the ball from the number of counting balls to the number of possessed balls, the counting ball use switch 314 is operated. When the number of counting balls is present, the counting ball indicator 313 is lit, so that the player can know. In addition, the counting ball use switch LED built in the counting ball use switch 314 is turned on when the ball can move from the counting ball number to the holding ball number, so that the player also has the counting ball number. I understand that. Note that the case of returning from the counted number of balls to the number of balls held corresponds to the concept of moving a ball from a so-called ball box to an upper plate.
When the counting ball use switch 314 is operated once, a predetermined amount (for example, 100 balls) of the counting ball moves to the number of holding balls. Thereby, the player can play again using the number of balls moved. The movement from the counted number of balls to the number of possessed balls is displayed on the message / operation area 306 of the operation display device 7 (details will be described later).

Next, in the present embodiment, the following control is performed with respect to the display of the number of balls held in the number-of-balls display 40.
The number-of-balls display 40 can display six-digit numbers (number of balls) by arranging six 7-segment LEDs, and displays the number of balls acquired by the player. The display mode is as follows: Controlled.
When the number of balls held is zero before the game (before the game card or cash is inserted), the ball number indicator 40 is turned off.
Further, when the number of balls held is 0 during the game and there is no counting ball, 0 is lit up.
On the other hand, when the number of balls held is 0 during the game and there is a counting ball, 0 is displayed blinking.
Note that the display data of the number-of-balls display 40 is backed up by the RAM 33 of the payout controller 230 even during a power failure.
Therefore, the difference in the state of the number of held balls 0 can be produced only by the difference in the display mode of the held ball number display 40, so that the control efficiency is improved.
In addition, even if the number of balls is 0, the display mode is changed before and during the game (before the game card or the cash is inserted). Therefore, for example, if 0 is lit on the ball number display 40, the card to be returned to the player Can be recognized in the card unit 15. In particular, it is convenient because the presence of a return card can be confirmed when the power is restored.
Since the display mode changes depending on whether or not there is a counting ball even if the number of balls is 0, for example, if 0 is flashing on the ball holding number display 40, the player can recognize that there is a counting ball. Can do.

Next, in this embodiment, a level meter left 17L and a level meter right 17R are respectively provided on the left and right sides of the game board 20, and these level meter left 17L and level meter right 17R are mechanically movable up and down. Display units 17a and 17b, respectively, and the display units 17a and 17b normally move up and down as a reliability meter related to big hits to produce a big hit reliability. If there is a counting ball, for example, The level meter right 17R provides an effect of displaying the number of counted balls in analog form.
Therefore, since both the effect as a reliability meter regarding the big hit and the effect of displaying the number of counted balls can be performed, the efficiency of the control is good.
Further, in this embodiment, the sub liquid crystal display device 33 is arranged on one side of the game area 22, and the sub liquid crystal display device 33 displays the number of counting balls, and when there is no counting ball, the effect display is performed. (For example, a model name display or an effect linked with the main liquid crystal display device) is performed.
Therefore, since the sub-liquid crystal display device 33 for effect display controlled by the game control device 54 of the pachinko machine 1 can display the number of counted balls, the efficiency is high. Further, since the sub liquid crystal display device 33 displays the number of counted balls and various effects near the center of the board surface, there is an advantage that it is easy to see.

G. Control system operation (game control device)
Next, the control contents of the game control device 54 will be described with reference to FIGS.
[Main processing of game control device]
First, the main process of the game control device 54 will be described with reference to FIGS.
This main process is started based on the fact that the CPU 111 is forcibly reset. That is, when the power switch 181 of the power supply 58 that supplies power to the game control device 54 is turned on, a reset signal is sent from the power supply 58 at a predetermined timing (during a predetermined reset period when the power is turned on). When the reset terminal of the CPU 111 is turned on by being input to the control device 54 and this reset signal is subsequently released, the CPU 111 is activated. Similarly, when the power is restored from a power failure, the CPU 111 is activated after the reset signal is released and then released. Further, when the operator wants to initialize the RAM 113 and the like of the game control device 54, it is necessary to turn on the power switch 181 while turning on the RAM clear switch 182 (initialization switch) of the power supply device 58. There is. Note that the RAM 113 is represented as RWM in FIG.

When the CPU 111 is started, first, all interrupts (that is, all interrupts) are prohibited, the CPU peripheral circuit (including the serial port) built in the CPU 111 is initialized, and access to the RAM 113 is permitted. An off signal (a signal corresponding to a binary signal “0”) is output to all output ports (steps S1 to S4).
Since each output port is turned off (reset) by the reset signal, it is not always necessary to output the off signal to each output port in software, but step S4 is provided here just in case. .

After step S4, another board activation waiting timer is set in step S5. This is a state in which a control device other than the game control device 54 (main board) (for example, the effect control device 53, the payout control device 230, etc.) is activated and can reliably capture commands from the game control device 54. Since it takes a predetermined period to become, the delay time is set by the other board activation wait timer.
Next, the process proceeds to step S6, and a payout command reception interrupt is permitted. In this case, since a command may be transmitted from the payout control device 230 to the game control device 54, an interrupt for receiving the command is permitted (details will be described later in a subroutine).
Next, the process proceeds to step S7 to determine whether or not a power failure has occurred. The determination here is performed using, for example, a power failure detection signal (not shown in step S7, but the same determination as in steps S33 to S35 described later is performed). If it is determined in step S7 that a power failure has not occurred, the process proceeds to step S8, and the other board activation wait timer is updated (decremented) by “−1”. Next, in step S9, it is determined whether or not the other board activation waiting timer has become “0”. If not, the process returns to step S7 to repeat the loop. Then, the loop is repeated, and if the other board activation waiting timer becomes “0”, the determination result in step S9 becomes YES, and the process proceeds to step S10 and subsequent steps. Therefore, at this time, the respective processes of the pachinko machine 1 are sequentially activated.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step S7 that a power failure has occurred, the process jumps to step S36 shown in FIG. At this time, processing for power failure is sequentially performed (details will be described later).

If no power failure has occurred and the process proceeds from step S9 to step S10, it is first determined in step S10 whether there is a gaming machine ID transmission request. This is because there is a case where a command requesting transmission of the gaming machine ID is sent from the payout control device 230 to the game control device 54, and it is determined whether or not there is the request command. If there is no gaming machine ID transmission request, it waits in this step S10, and if a gaming machine ID transmission request comes, it will progress to step S11 and will perform main control ID transmission processing. Thereby, the gaming machine ID of the game control device 54 (main board) is transmitted to the payout control device 230.
Next, in step S12, it is determined whether or not monitoring information has been received.
Here, the monitoring information is frame opening information indicating whether or not the opening of the front frame 4 is detected by the night monitoring switch 126, and whether or not the night monitoring switch 126 detects the removal of the main board (game control device 54). It is a concept including game control device monitoring information indicating
The processing in step S12 includes frame opening information indicating whether or not the front frame 4 has been opened at night, and a game control device indicating whether or not the game control device 54 has been removed at night. The monitoring information is taken into the payout control device 230 when the payout control device 230 reads the output signal from the night monitoring switch 126, and then sent to the effect control device 53 via the game control device 54. However, it is determined whether or not the game control device 54 has received the monitoring information from the payout control device 230.
If the monitoring information has not been received, the process stands by in step S12. If the monitoring information has been received, the process proceeds to step S13 to determine whether a monitoring information transmission error command has been received. This is because the frame opening information indicating whether or not the front frame 4 has been opened at night and the game control device monitoring information indicating whether or not the gaming control device 54 has been removed at night are detected. When the payout control device 230 reads the output signal from the night monitoring switch 126, it is taken into the payout control device 230 and then sent to the card unit 15 but is not received within a certain time by the card unit 15. In this case, since the monitoring information transmission error command is sent from the payout control device 230 to the effect control device 53 via the game control device 54, an error notification is made, so that the monitoring information transmission error command from the payout control device 230 is sent. Is determined by the game control device 54.

If the monitoring information transmission error command has been received in step S13, the process proceeds to step S14 to set the monitoring information transmission error flag, and in step S15, the monitoring information transmission error command is transmitted to the effect control device 53 (effect control board). To do. Thereby, in the production | presentation control apparatus 53, monitoring information is not transmitted to the card unit 15, but the production which displays on the display apparatus 41 that the error generate | occur | produced will be performed.
After step S15, the process proceeds to step S16. On the other hand, if the monitoring information transmission error command has not been received in step S13, the process jumps to step S16.
In step S16, it is determined whether an operation fraud error command has been received. This is to determine whether or not the game control device 54 has received it from the payout control device 230 when there is at least one error information of unauthorized opening of the front frame 4 or unauthorized removal of the game control device 54. To do. Note that there are two types of “commands related to monitoring information” (see main processing of the payout control device 230 (FIGS. 24 and 25)) transmitted by the payout control device 230, with or without monitoring information. Corresponds to "Operation error occurrence error command". If an operation fraud occurrence error command has been received in step S16, the operation proceeds to step S17 to set an operation fraud occurrence flag, and in step S18, the operation fraud occurrence command is transmitted to the effect control device 53 (effect control board). As a result, the display control device 53 displays on the display device 41 that at least one error has occurred among the unauthorized opening of the front frame 4 and the unauthorized removal of the game control device 54 based on the operation fraud occurrence command. Will produce an effect.
After step S18, the process proceeds to step S19. On the other hand, if no operation error occurrence error command has been received in step S16, the process jumps to step S19.

In step S19, it is determined whether the power is turned on while the RAM clear switch 182 of the power supply device 58 is being pressed (operated). If the power is turned on while the RAM clear switch 182 is being pressed, the process proceeds to step S20, and it is determined whether or not the operation is in an error state. This is because, when the RAM clear switch 182 is pressed, all the data in the RAM 113 and CPU 111 and the like are cleared and initialized, so it is determined whether or not there is an invalid operation error state before the initialization. It is. At this time, if it is in the operation invalid error state, the information of the operation illegal error is initialized (cleared) and disappears, so that it is not erased.
That is, if it is determined in step S20 that the operation is in an error state, the process proceeds to step S21, where it is determined whether all values in the power failure inspection areas 1 and 2 of the RAM 113 are normal power failure inspection area check data. If so, the process proceeds to step S22 assuming that the power is restored (when the power is restored), and if abnormal (if not stored normally), the process branches to step S26. The power failure inspection area check data is set in step S38 to be described later. In this step S21, since it is determined whether or not it is a power failure recovery time using a plurality of check data in this way, it is highly reliable to determine whether or not it is a power failure recovery time.

Next, in step S22, a checksum of data in the RAM 113 (RWM) is calculated, and in step S23, it is compared with the checksum at the time of power-off, and it is determined whether or not the value is normal (match). If the checksum is not normal (that is, when the data in the RAM 113 is corrupted), the process proceeds to step S26, and if the checksum is normal, the process proceeds to step S24.
In step S24, processing for power failure recovery (initial value setting) is executed. That is, all the power failure inspection areas are cleared, the checksum area is cleared, and the areas related to error and fraud monitoring are reset. Next, in step S25, a power failure recovery command (power failure recovery command) corresponding to the state of the gaming machine is transmitted to the effect control device 53 (effect control board). After step S25, the process proceeds to step S29 shown in FIG.

The command at the time of power failure recovery (power failure recovery command) includes information notifying the state at the time of power failure (game state, rest state, settlement state). For example, if there is a power outage during a break, information indicating that it was during a break (for example, the same command as the break start command) may be included in this power outage recovery command. The received effect control device 53 resumes the display on the display device 41 for notifying the break during the power failure, for example, after the power failure is restored. In addition, when there is a power failure during settlement, information indicating that settlement is in progress is included in this power failure recovery command, and the presentation control device 53 that has received this command at the time of power recovery recovers, for example, at the time of power failure The display on the display device 41 for informing the settlement being performed is resumed as it is after the power failure recovery. Accordingly, the player can clearly recognize that the state at the time of the power failure is stored in the RAM 113 and the state is resumed at the time of the power failure recovery, and the player does not feel uneasy at the time of the power failure recovery.
Further, the power failure recovery command (power failure recovery command) includes the error information in the case of the operation error error state as described above, and the presentation control device 53 that received this command at the time of power failure recovery For example, the display on the display device 41 for notifying the operation error status that was being executed at the time of a power failure is resumed as it is after the power failure is restored.

Next, when it is determined in step S20 that the operation is not in an error state or when the process jumps from step S21 or S23 to step S26, the processing from step S26 including step S26 is performed.
When the processing proceeds to step S26 and subsequent steps, processing such as initialization of data (excluding the access prohibited area) in the RAM 113 of the game control device 54 is performed. That is, in step S26, all areas of the RAM 113 to be used are cleared. Specifically, in RAM 113, all work areas before the access prohibited area are cleared, and all stack areas after the access prohibited area are cleared. Next, in step S27, an initial value upon power-on is saved in the area to be initialized, and in step S28, a command for power-on (power-on command) is transmitted to the effect control device 53 (effect control board). When the power-on command is transmitted, in response to the power-on command, the effect control device 53 performs initialization such as setting the operation position of the motor of the frame effect device to the initial position. As described above, since the RAM 113 is initialized after confirming that it is not in the state of illegal operation error, the frame opening information at the time of power-off is not lost and security is high.

When the process proceeds to step S29 via step S28 or when the process jumps from step S25 to step S29, a CTC (Counter / Timer Circuit) circuit provided in the CPU 111, for example, is activated in step S29 shown in FIG. The CTC circuit is a circuit for timer interruption.
Next, in step S30, activation setting of a random number generation circuit provided in a CPU peripheral circuit built in the CPU 111 is performed. This random number generation circuit generates a part of each special figure or ordinary random number in hardware. However, the initial values of some of these random numbers are set in software by the processing in step S32 described later.
Note that the random numbers related to the special figure include jackpot random numbers (random numbers for determining whether to win or not), jackpot symbol random numbers 1, 2 (random numbers for determining jackpot stop symbols), fluctuation pattern random numbers (reach of reach) Random number for determining a variation pattern including presence / absence), stop symbol random number (random number for determining outlier stop symbol), and the like. In addition, examples of random numbers related to ordinary maps include random numbers per ordinary figure (random numbers for determining whether or not per ordinary figure). Among these, the random numbers targeted in steps S30 and S32 are, for example, jackpot random numbers, random numbers per common figure, jackpot symbol random numbers 1, 2. Note that the random numbers related to the special figure may be common to the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 when there are two types of special figures, or may be provided separately.

Next, in step S31, all interrupts (that is, all interrupts) are permitted. When the process proceeds to the next step S32, an initial value random number update process is performed in step S32. The initial value random number update process is a process for updating the initial value of the random number so that it is difficult to deliberately hit the game ball at the timing to fire.
Next, in step S33, the number of checks of the power failure monitoring signal (for example, twice) is set, and in the next step S34, it is determined whether or not the power failure monitoring signal is on. The process proceeds to step S35, and if not turned on, the process returns to step S32. During normal operation, steps S34 to S32 are repeated.

And when it progresses to step S35, it will be determined whether the ON state of a power failure monitoring signal is continued by the number of times of the check. If negative, it is determined that a power failure has not occurred and the process returns to step S34.
When the power failure monitoring signal is turned on, this power failure monitoring signal may be used as an NMI interrupt signal to interrupt the process being executed and forcibly execute the power failure processing after step S36. However, with the configuration of this example, the power failure monitoring signal is turned on temporarily and momentarily due to noise, etc., even though no power failure has actually occurred, since the power failure monitoring signal is turned on multiple times in step S35. In this case, there is an advantage that it is not erroneously determined that a power failure has occurred.

In step S36, all interrupts (that is, all interrupts) are prohibited, then all outputs are turned off in the next step S37 (off data is output to all output ports), and then a power failure occurs in step S38. Execute information setting processing. In the power failure information setting process, the power failure inspection area check data 1 is saved in the power failure inspection area 1 and the power failure inspection area check data 2 is saved in the power failure inspection area 2.
After step S38, in the next step S39, a checksum of the data in the RAM 113 is calculated and saved in a predetermined checksum area. Then, in step S40, access to the RAM 113 is prohibited, and the process waits.
In addition, the power failure process of the above steps S36-S40 is performed before a power supply voltage falls below the operating voltage of CPU111 by a power failure (a normal power supply interruption is included).
Further, as described above, if it is determined in step S7 that a power failure has occurred, the process jumps to step S37, performs the processing from step S37 described above, and finally prohibits access to the RAM 113 in step S40, and then waits. Will do.

[Drawing command reception interrupt processing]
Next, payout command reception interrupt processing of the game control device 54 will be described with reference to FIG.
In this process, an interrupt for receiving a command transmitted from the payout control device 230 to the game control device 54 is performed.
When this routine is started, the register is first saved in step S51. Next, in step S52, the payout serial reception buffer status is read, and in the subsequent step S53, it is determined whether there is reception data. This is because a command (for example, a polishing start command) may be transmitted from the payout control device 230 to the game control device 54, so that the presence or absence of received data of the command is determined.
If it is determined in step S53 that there is received data, the process proceeds to step S54, where the command is read from the payout serial reception buffer. Next, a payout command determination table is set in step S55, and determination data corresponding to the command is acquired in step S56. Next, in step S57, it is determined whether or not the determination data is normal. If it is normal, the address of the information setting area corresponding to the command is acquired in step S58.

Here, since various areas are assigned with addresses assigned to the information setting area, for example, a polishing start flag for a polishing start command and a polishing end flag for a polishing end command. The address of the information setting area corresponding to the command received from the payout control device 230 is acquired.
For example, if the command received from the dispensing control device 230 this time is a polishing start command, the address of the polishing start flag assigned to the polishing start command is acquired.
In addition, as flags set in addition to the above-described commands in the information setting area, for example, flags corresponding to error state flags (for example, encapsulated ball number error, floating ball (so-called staphylococcal error)), etc. There is.
In the above case, the same area may be used for the same type of command, and the value may be changed. For example, the following may be used.
If the command is related to the polishing of the encapsulated sphere, the following values are used.
“0”: No instruction to polish the enclosed sphere “1”: Instruction to start polishing the enclosed sphere • “2”: Instruction to finish polishing the enclosed sphere

After step S58, the process proceeds to step S59, where the value meant by the command is saved in the information setting area. This is to decode the instruction content of the command received from the dispensing control device 230 and hold it in the information setting area. For example, if the command received from the dispensing control device 230 is a polishing start command this time, the polishing start command By reading the address of the polishing start flag assigned to, the flag called the polishing start flag is read out, and from now on, the command to start polishing the encapsulated sphere is decoded and saved. is there.
After step S59, the process returns to step S52 to repeat the loop. Then, all payout serial reception buffer statuses are read out, and the loop from step S52 to step S59 is repeated. If it is determined in step S53 that there is no reception data, the process branches from step S53 to step S60.
After branching to step S60, the payout command reception interrupt request is cleared to resume the main routine in step S60, the register saved in step S61 is restored, all interrupts are permitted in step S62, and Return to the interrupted process. In FIG. 12 and the like, “return = RETI” means returning to the process interrupted at the time of interrupt. On the other hand, “RET” represents a return from the subroutine to the original routine.

[Game control device timer interrupt processing]
Next, the timer interrupt process of the game control device 54 will be described with reference to FIG.
This timer interrupt process is started by the processes of steps S29 and S31 in the main process described above, and is repeatedly executed at a predetermined timer interrupt period.
In this timer interrupt process, first, in step S71, register saving and interrupt prohibition are executed as necessary, and then the input process in step S72 is executed. In this input process, detection signals of the above-described sensors (start port switches 120 and 121, gate switch 122, winning port switch 123, count switch 124, magnet sensor 142, radio wave sensor 143, vibration sensor 144, etc.) are read. Run. Specifically, the output value of each sensor is determined at each timer interruption period, and when the output value of the same level continues for the specified number of times (for example, twice), the level of this output value is detected by each sensor. Read as deterministic value of signal. When it is read that any one of the sensors is on, a flag (input flag) indicating that is set.
Signals from various switches necessary for enclosing ball control such as the night monitoring switch 126, the glass frame opening switch 125, and the switches denoted by reference numerals 161 to 165 in FIG. 6 are input to the payout control device 230. It is not handled in the input process of the game control device 54.

Next, in step S73, output processing for setting and outputting the output data set in steps S80, S81, S82, S83, S84 and the like, which will be described later, to the corresponding output port is executed.
Next, in steps S74 and S75, random number update processes 1 and 2 are executed, respectively. Here, the soft random number related to the special drawing and the soft random number related to the general drawing are updated. As soft random numbers related to special figures, for example, jackpot symbol random numbers 1, 2 (random numbers for determining jackpot stop symbols), variation pattern random numbers (random numbers for determining variation patterns including presence / absence of reach action), stop symbol random numbers ( Random numbers for determining outage stop symbols). Here, the update of the random number is executed by increasing the random number by, for example, “1”. Therefore, each time this timer interrupt processing routine is repeated, the random number changes, and the extracted value of the soft random number maintains at randomness.

  In this example, there are three types of variation pattern random numbers: variation pattern random numbers 1-3. Among these, the fluctuation pattern random number 1 is a random number for selecting the reach system of the second half fluctuation (the fluctuation after the start of reach), and the fluctuation pattern random number 2 is a detailed presentation distribution (for example, plus one frame) from the reach system. The special pattern stops or the special figure stops at minus one frame), and the variation pattern random number 3 is a random number for selecting the first half variation (variation before the start of reach). is there. The variation pattern random number may directly determine all of the variation modes, but in this example, the effect control device 53 determines the specific mode. For example, only the variation time and reach system (rough type of reach) are determined by the variation pattern random number 1, and the production control device 53 determines a specific variation mode based on the determined variation time and reach system.

Next, timer update processing is performed in step S76. Thereby, the update of various timers handled by the processing in the game program is performed in an integrated manner. For example, the initial value setting, value determination, and processing based on the determination result are performed by another routine, but if the initial value is set, the update may be performed by the timer update processing. Moreover, the timer used for each determination mentioned later may be updated as mentioned above, for example, may be updated by a corresponding routine.
Next, an error monitoring process is executed in step S77. This is a process for monitoring undetected errors of the above-described sensors and detection signals from the magnet sensor 142, the radio wave sensor 143, the vibration sensor 144, and the like. It should be noted that illegal winnings other than when the special winning opening 27a and the public power supply 26 are not open are monitored in the process of step S79 described later.

For example, the types of errors monitored in this error monitoring process are as follows.
・ Switch abnormality (connector disconnection, switch failure, etc.)
・ Magnetic fraud ・ Vibration fraud ・ Radio wave fraud

Next, the process proceeds to step S78, and it is determined whether payment is being made or a break is in progress. This is determined based on information from the payout control device 230.
If the account is being settled or resting, the process jumps from step S79 to step S82 and proceeds to step S83. This is to jump to step S83 without executing steps S79 to S82 related to the progress of the game in order to prevent the enclosed ball game from being performed during settlement or rest.
If it is not being settled or resting, the process proceeds to step S79 and a winning mouth switch monitoring process is executed. The winning opening switch monitoring process monitors the input flags (start opening switches 120 and 121, winning opening switch 123, and count switch 124 in the special figure) set as described above, for example, the input flag of the count switch 124 is set. If so, processing such as addition of the number of balls of 15 prize balls (awarding) is executed (details will be described later).

Next, a payout command transmission process is performed in step S80. This is a process of transmitting a command from the game control device 54 to the payout control device 230 (details will be described later).
Next, the process proceeds to step S81 to perform special figure game processing. In the special figure game process, overall control of the special figure variable display game is performed. That is, when the change start condition (start condition of the change display game) is satisfied, the determination of the big hit random number, the process of setting the combination (result form) of the special figure stop pattern, and the process of setting the change form of the special figure Is done.
Here, when the change start condition is satisfied, when the start-up prize is received in the waiting state and the change display game is started, the change display game ends and the start display is stored and the change display game is executed again. When the game is played, there are three types when the jackpot is over, the start-up memory is stored, and the variable display game is executed again.
In this special figure game process, a process of setting various output data related to the special figure variable display game is also performed. That is, the content (command data) of a command to be transmitted to, for example, the effect control device 53 is set in accordance with the game state of the special display variable display game.

Next, in step S82, processing for the usual variable display game is performed. That is, processing for setting the content of a command to be transmitted to the production control device 53 or the like in accordance with the usual variable display game state is performed.
After step S82, the process proceeds to step S83. The process proceeds to step S83, in addition to the case where the process proceeds through step S82, as described above, sometimes the determination result in step S78 is YES. In step S83, external information editing processing is executed. This is to edit data to be output from the game control device 54 to an external device such as the hall computer 86 or the card unit 15.
However, the game control device 54 sends necessary information to the game computer 86 and the ball holding management device 85 via the card unit 15 via the external information terminal board 51 and the card unit connection terminal board 52 via the payout control device 230. Is output.

Next, an LED editing process is performed in step S84. This is a process for various LEDs (for example, various displays of the collective display device 35 and processing related to the display of the LEDs. In this LED editing process, the special graphics determined in the special game process in step S81). Also included is a process for displaying the symbols and other information of the usual figure determined in the usual figure game process in step S82 on various indicators and LEDs constituting the collective display device 35.
Next, a polishing apparatus control process is performed in step S85. This gives an instruction to the polishing control device 59 to control the operation of the polishing device 56 for encapsulated spheres (details will be described later). Next, a ball number command transmission process is performed in step S86. This transmits a command to the effect control device 53 and causes the effect control device 53 to control the decorative ball display device 250 (details will be described later).
After step S86, to resume the main routine, the timer interrupt request is cleared in step S87, the saved register is restored in step S88, all interrupts are permitted in step S89, and Return to the interrupted process.

[Error monitoring processing]
Next, the error monitoring process S77 in the timer interrupt process will be described with reference to FIG.
When this routine is started, the routine returns after executing the switch abnormality monitoring process at step S101, the radio wave fraud monitoring process at step S102, the magnet fraud monitoring process at step S103, and the vibration fraud monitoring process at step S104.
As described in step S77 (FIG. 13), the switch abnormality monitoring process is a process for monitoring an abnormality such as a connector disconnection or a switch failure. The radio wave fraud monitoring process, the magnet fraud monitoring process, and the vibration fraud monitoring process are processes for monitoring the radio wave fraud, magnet fraud, and vibration fraud described in step S77.

[Prize mouth switch monitoring process]
Next, the winning opening switch monitoring process S79 in the timer interruption process will be described with reference to FIG.
The winning opening switch monitoring process is a process for monitoring whether or not there is an input of a signal (a change in signal) from a switch provided at each of the various winning openings.
In the winning opening switch monitoring process, firstly, a winning monitoring table of the winning opening switch in the large winning opening is prepared (step S111). There is a count switch 124 as a prize opening switch in the big prize opening. Next, a fraud & prize winning monitoring process is performed (step S112). This is to monitor the winning of a regular game ball (such as at the time of a big hit) to the big winning opening 27a and to monitor the winning to an illegal big winning opening 27a other than the big win.
Next, a winning monitoring table for a winning switch in the ordinary electric train is prepared (step S113). There is a second start port switch 121 for detecting a winning to the second start winning port 26 as an ordinary electric accessory (general power).
Next, fraud & prize winning monitoring processing is performed (step S114). This is to monitor the winning of a regular game ball to the second start winning opening 26 as a normal electric accessory (general power) and monitor the winning to the illegal second starting winning opening 26. Next, a prize monitoring table (for example, a list indicating switches that do not require fraud monitoring) of a prize opening switch that does not require fraud monitoring is prepared (step S115). As the winning opening switch that does not require fraud monitoring, for example, there are a first starting opening switch 120 and a winning opening switch 123 provided for the general winning openings 28 to 31.
For prize winning switches that do not require fraud monitoring, winning detection processing is performed without fraud monitoring, so a prize monitoring table is prepared for this process, and the winning number counter updating process for updating the winning numbers in the next step (Step S116) is executed. The detailed procedure of the winning number counter updating process will be described later.
After step S116, the process returns to the timer interrupt process.

[Unauthorized & winning monitoring process]
Next, the fraud & prize winning monitoring process (step S112, step S114) in the above-described winning opening switch monitoring process will be described with reference to FIG.
The fraud & prize winning monitoring process is a process performed on the count switch 124 of the big prize opening or the second start opening switch 121 in the ordinary electric power. Here, in addition to the detection of the winning, fraud is monitored. This is because the large winning opening (special variable winning device 27) and the ordinary electric power (ordinary variable winning device 26) are likely to be fraudulently forcibly opening the opening / closing member to insert the game ball and paying out the winning ball.
In the fraud & winning monitoring process, first, the target fraud monitoring period flag is checked (step S121), and it is determined whether or not it is during the fraud monitoring period (step S122). If it is not during the fraud monitoring period, the process jumps to step S133 to perform the processing after step S133.
On the other hand, if it is during the fraud monitoring period, it is checked whether or not there is an input to the winning port switch subject to error monitoring (the count switch 124 of the large winning port or the second start port switch 121 in the ordinary power system) (step S123). If it is determined that there is no input (step S123; NO), the process jumps to step S135, and if it is determined that there is an input (step S123; YES), the process proceeds to step S124, and the target illegal winning number is updated (+1) ( Add) and go to step S125.

In step S125, it is checked whether the number of fraudulent winnings after the addition exceeds the number of fraud determinations to be monitored (for example, 5). The number of judgments is five, for example, when a large winning opening in the open state is converted to a closed state, the game ball is caught by the door member of the large winning opening, and the gaming ball passes the valid period of the count switch. This is because it is not determined to be illegal when winning a prize or when noise occurs in the signal, that is, it is not illegal but is not easily determined as an error. If it is determined that the determination number has not been exceeded (step S125; NO), the process jumps to step S133. If it is determined that the determination number has been exceeded (step S125; YES), the process proceeds to step S126.
In step S126, the number of fraudulent winnings is limited to the number of fraud occurrence determination, and in step S127, an initial value (for example, 60000 ms) is saved in the target fraudulent winning notification timer area, and then a target fraudulent winning occurrence command is prepared. (Step S128) Further, an illegal winning flag is prepared as an illegal flag (Step S129).

Next, the prepared fraud flag is compared with the value of the target fraud flag area (step S130). If they do not match (step S130; NO), the process proceeds to step S131, and the prepared fraud flag is set as the target fraud flag area. After saving (step S131), an effect command setting process is performed in step S132, and the fraud & prize winning monitoring process is terminated.
Therefore, if fraud has occurred as described above, the fraud notification command is transmitted to the effect control device 53, and the fraud notification is made.
On the other hand, if YES in step S130, that is, if the prepared fraud flag matches the value of the target fraud flag area, it can be determined that the state is the same as the state already taught to the production control device 53, step S131, The unauthorized & winning monitoring process is terminated without performing the process of step S132. This is because the command is transmitted only when the flag changes.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S122 that it is not under fraud monitoring and the process branches to step S133, or if it is determined in step S125 that the number of determinations has not been exceeded (step S125; NO) and the process branches to step S133, step S133 Then, a prize monitoring table of the prize opening switch subject to fraud monitoring (the count switch 124 of the big prize opening or the second start opening switch 121 in the ordinary electric train) is prepared. Then, after executing the process of updating the winning number counter, that is, the process S134 of counting the number of winnings as the target of the prize ball addition, the target illegal winning notification timer has already timed up or (-1) timed up after updating If the illegal prize notification timer is not “0”, (−1) is updated (step S135), and the check result is determined in step S136 (that is, whether the illegal prize notification timer is “0”). To do.
If the target unauthorized prize notification timer has not expired or has not expired after (-1) update, the determination in step S136 is NO, and the routine is repeated and the routine is repeated.

  If the target unauthorized prize notification timer has already timed up or has expired after (-1) update, the process proceeds to step S137 to prepare a target unauthorized prize release command, and in step S138, the unauthorized prize is released as an unauthorized flag. The flag is prepared, and then the process proceeds to step S139, where it is determined whether or not it is the moment when the illegal prize notification timer becomes 0. If not, the routine returns and the routine is repeated, and the illegal prize notification timer becomes 0 At the moment, the process proceeds to step S140 to clear the target illegal winning number, and then the process proceeds to step S130. Thereafter, the processes after step S130 are executed. Therefore, at this time, an unauthorized winning cancellation command is transmitted to the effect control device 53, and the unauthorized notification is canceled.

[Winner counter update process]
Next, the winning number counter updating process (step S116) in the above-described winning opening switch monitoring process and the winning number counter updating process (step S134) in the fraud & winning monitoring process will be described with reference to FIG.
In the input number counter update process, first, the number of winning port switches to be monitored is acquired from the winning port monitoring table acquired in the above-described winning port switch monitoring process (step S151).
Here, the information defined in the winning table of the winning monitoring table prepared in the winning opening switch monitoring process is as follows.
(A) Number of repetitions: Number of switches to be monitored (b) Data for determining whether there is an input (monitoring switch bit): Defined for each switch (c) Lower address of winning number counter area: Defined for each switch Then, it is checked whether there is an input of a detection signal (more precisely, a change in input) from the prize-winning switch to be monitored (step S152). If it is determined that there is no input (S152; NO), the process jumps to step S157. If it is determined that there is an input (S152; YES), the value of the target winning number counter area is loaded in the next step S153.

Then, the target winning number counter is updated (+1) in step S154, and it is checked whether or not it overflows in step S155. If it is determined that the counter overflow has not occurred (step S155; NO), the process proceeds to step S156, the updated value is saved in the winning number counter area, and the process proceeds to step S157.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step S155 that a counter overflow has occurred (S155; YES), step S156 is skipped and the process jumps to step S157. The maximum storage number (for example, 255 for 1 byte size and 65535 for 2 byte size) is determined depending on the size of the winning number counter area provided. A lot of information on the number of prize balls to be lost will be lost. In order to avoid this, in step S154 and step S155, the contents of the area are not updated suddenly, and the update is performed after confirming that (+1) is set to “0” outside the area. ing.
In step S157, it is determined whether the monitoring process for all the switches has been completed. If the process has been completed (step 157; YES), the input number counter update process is terminated, and if not completed (step S157; (NO), it returns to step S152 and repeats the said process.

[Payout command transmission processing]
Next, the payout command transmission process (step S80) in the above-described timer interrupt process will be described with reference to FIG.
In the payout command transmission process, first, in step S161, it is determined whether or not write counter = read counter. This is because the command is sent from the game control device 54 to the payout control device 230 by serial communication, so that the values of the serial buffer writing and reading counters are determined. If it is determined in step S161 that the write counter is not a read counter, the process proceeds to step S162. On the other hand, if it is determined that write counter = read counter, the process branches to step S172.
First, when the process proceeds to step S162, the payout serial transmission buffer status is read in step S162, and it is determined in step S163 whether or not the transmission buffer is full (the transmission buffer is full).
If the transmission buffer is full, the routine ends and returns.
On the other hand, if the transmission buffer is not full, the process advances to step S164 to update the read counter by (+1). Next, in step S165, a command is loaded from the payout command area corresponding to the lead counter, and in the subsequent step S166, the loaded command area is cleared.

In step S167, the command is written in the payout serial transmission buffer. As a result, a command is transmitted from the game control device 54 to the payout control device 230 by serial communication using the serial communication function of the CPU 111 in the game control device 54.
Next, in step S168, the payout serial transmission buffer status is read out. In step S169, it is determined whether or not transmission (command transmission) is in progress. If transmission is in progress, the process returns to step S161 to repeat the loop. . If the transmission is not in progress (NO in step S169), the process proceeds to step S170 to initialize the transmission circuit. Next, the process proceeds to step S171, where the command is rewritten to the payout serial transmission buffer, and then the process returns to step S161 to repeat the loop.
In this flowchart, the command is transmitted in a 1-byte configuration. However, the command is not limited to this. For example, as in the production command, the command has a 2-byte configuration such as “MODE” and “ACTION”. Also good. Further, it may have a more byte structure. In those cases, a flowchart corresponding to a plurality of bytes may be used.

  Next, if it is determined in step S161 that the write counter = read counter, the process branches to step S172. In this case, if the command transmission adjustment timer is not “0” in step S172, (−1 )Update. Next, the process proceeds to step S173, where it is determined whether or not the command transmission adjustment timer is “0”. If the command transmission adjustment timer is not “0”, the process returns and the routine is repeated. When the command transmission adjustment timer reaches “0”, the process goes to step S174 to check whether there is a count number other than “0” in the winning number counter area provided for each winning opening. If it is determined that there is no count number (step S174; NO), the process proceeds to step S175, where the address of the winning number counter area to be checked is updated, and the counting numbers of all the winning number counter areas are checked. Whether or not has been completed is determined (step S176). If it is determined that all checks have been completed (step S176; YES), the payout command transmission process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S176 that all checks have not been completed (step S176; NO), the process returns to step S174 and the above process is repeated.

If it is determined in step S174 that there is a count number (step S174; YES), the process proceeds to step S177, and the count number in the target winning number counter area is subtracted (-1). Thereafter, a prize ball command table is set in step S178.
In the prize ball command table, the number of prize balls associated with winning is set as follows.
・ Big winning port 27a = 13 ・ Starting winning port 25 = 3 ・ Starting winning port 26 (general power) = 1 piece ・ General winning ports 28 to 31 = 10 Then, in step S179, the address of the winning number counter area is set Get the corresponding prize ball command.
Here, the command will be described as follows.
Payout command: A collective term for commands that the game control device 54 exchanges with the payout control device 230. Depending on the type of command, there is transmission / reception or one-sided communication.
Prize ball command: A command representing the number of prize balls, and one-sided communication from the game control device 54 to the payout control device 230. The prize ball command is a concept smaller than the payout command representing the generic name of the command, and the prize ball command is one of the payout commands.

After step S179, the process advances to step S180, where the payout serial transmission buffer status is read. In step S181, it is determined whether the transmission buffer is full (transmission buffer is full). If the transmission buffer is full, the routine ends and returns.
On the other hand, if the transmission buffer is not full, the process proceeds to step S182 and a command (for example, a prize ball command) is written in the payout serial transmission buffer. Thus, a command (for example, a prize ball command) is transmitted from the game control device 54 to the payout control device 230 by serial communication using the serial communication function of the CPU 111 in the game control device 54.
Next, the process proceeds to step S183, where it is determined whether transmission is in progress (command transmission is in progress). If transmission is in progress, the process jumps to step S186. On the other hand, if not transmitting, the process proceeds to step S184 to initialize the transmission circuit, and in the subsequent step S185, the command is rewritten in the payout serial transmission buffer, and then the process proceeds to step S186. In step S186, an initial value (for example, 500 ms) is set in the command transmission adjustment timer. Next, a main prize ball remaining number update process is performed in step S187. In this method, data for outputting one pulse for every 10 winning balls as external information as external information is updated.
In this way, the command is transmitted from the game control device 54 to the payout control device 230 by serial communication. Since the serial communication is performed using the serial communication function of the CPU 111 in the game control device 54, there is an advantage that the configuration is simple.
In the above flow chart, the left column (step S162 to step S171) in FIG. 18 transmits gaming machine status information, and the left column (step S172 to step S187) transmits a prize ball instruction command (prize ball command). It corresponds to the control to do. This is because the state information of the gaming machine is preferably sent to the payout control device 230 as soon as possible, and all set commands are transmitted. In addition, although it is possible to send a prize ball instruction command (prize ball command) at once, in order to give the player a sense that the ball is being paid out, a time lag is created and sent one by one. The process enhances the sense of excitement in the game.

In addition to the prize ball command, the commands transmitted from the game control device 54 to the payout control device 230 will be described together as follows.
<Command for notifying various states of gaming machine: gaming machine information command>
-Command to notify whether the symbol is changing-Command to notify the end of symbol change-Command to notify the jackpot-Command to notify in special mode-Command to notify the game machine (main control) RAM clear The above is an example Other than these, commands may be included. Further, the command (game machine information command) for notifying various states of the gaming machine may be composed of one command, but may be composed of a plurality of commands.
<Commands to notify various error conditions of gaming machine: gaming machine error information command>
・ Switch abnormal command ・ Prize prize illegal command ・ Penden illegal command ・ Radio wave illegal command ・ Magnetic illegal command ・ Vibration illegal command Other commands for notifying error information other than the above may also be included Good.

[LED editing process]
Next, the LED editing process (step S84) in the above-described timer interrupt process will be described with reference to FIG.
When this routine is started, a winning display LED editing process (step S191) and a special figure / general chart / game state display LED editing process (step S192) are sequentially executed, and then the process returns.
Here, in the winning display LED editing process, processing related to the display of the winning display LED 355 in the collective display device 35 is executed (details will be described later in a subroutine). In the special drawing / general drawing / game state display LED editing process, setting of display data for performing various displays on each display device constituting the collective display device 35 is executed.

[Winning display LED editing process]
Next, the winning display LED editing process in step S191 of the LED editing process will be described with reference to FIG.
When this routine is started, first, if the winning display output control timer is not “0” in step S201, the timer is updated (decrement) by “−1”, and in step S202, the winning display output control timer is “0”. It is determined whether or not. This is because the winning display output control timer is set to an initial value (for example, 1500 ms in the normal mode) in step S211 described later, and "-1" is updated (decremented) from the initial value. Is determined to be “0”.

If the decision result in the step S202 is YES, the process advances to a succeeding step S203 to judge whether or not the winning display read counter is equal to the winning display light counter. This is to determine whether or not the current number of winning balls has been read out from the winning display number storage area storing the number of winnings. If the determination result in step S203 is NO, it is determined that the winning display read counter is not equal to the winning display light counter and the current winning ball number has not been read from the winning display number storage area, and the process proceeds to step S204.
On the other hand, if the determination result in step S203 is YES, the winning display read counter is equal to the winning display light counter, and it is determined that the current number of winning balls has been read from the winning display number storage area, and the process branches to step S215. In step S215, the turn-off data is saved in the winning display LED output data area, and then the process returns. As a result of the processing in step S215, the winning ball display of the winning display LED 355 disappears.

When the process proceeds to step S204, first, the winning display lead counter is updated (incremented) by “+1” in step S204, and then in step S205, the current winning ball is stored from the winning display number storage area corresponding to the winning display lead counter. Load a number. Next, in step S206, winning display LED pattern data corresponding to the number of prize balls loaded in step S205 is set. The winning display LED pattern data is data for determining which of the seven segments is to be lit (or blinked) because the winning display LED 355 of the collective display device 35 is composed of two 7-segment LEDs. It is. For example, when displaying the number of winning balls = 10, the lighting data of each segment is set so that “10” of two digits is displayed by two LEDs.
In step S207, the winning display LED pattern data set in step S206 is saved in the winning display LED pattern data area, and the process proceeds to step S208.

In step S208, it is determined whether or not the current gaming state is in the special mode.
The special mode means during a big hit, during a probability change, during a short time (under normal power support: under support with a low probability). On the other hand, the normal mode is a normal gaming state other than the special mode.
If it is not in the special mode in step S208, the process proceeds to step S209 to save “1” as the winning display LED lighting time number, and then proceeds to step S211. When the winning display LED lighting time number = “1”, the winning display by the winning display LED 355 is controlled at the timing of 1 second ON (lighted) and 0.5 seconds OFF (lighted off).
In this case, the winning display output control timer is set to “375” as an initial value. This is because the repetition timing of this routine is every 4 ms, so “375” × 4 ms = 1500 ms. From 1500 ms to 1000 ms (1 second) is ON, and the subsequent 500 ms (“125” × 4 ms = 500 ms) is OFF. This is because the winning display can be controlled at a timing of 1 second ON (lights on) and 0.5 seconds off (lights off).
Accordingly, the winning display is ON (lit) for 1 second while this routine is repeated “250” times from the initial value 1500 ms, and then the winning display is 0.5 seconds while this routine is repeated “125” times. Control is performed at the timing of OFF (light-off).

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S208 that the special mode is being used, the process proceeds to step S210, where “2” is saved as the winning display LED lighting time number, and then the process proceeds to step S211. When the winning display LED lighting time number = “2”, the winning display by the winning display LED 355 is controlled at a timing of 0.5 seconds ON (lighted) and 0.1 seconds OFF (lighted off).
In this case, the winning display output control timer is set to “150” as an initial value. This is because the repetition timing of this routine is every 4 ms, so “150” × 4 ms = 600 ms. From 600 ms to 500 ms (0.5 seconds) is ON, and the subsequent 100 ms (“25” × 4 ms = 100 ms) is This is because by turning OFF, the winning display can be controlled at the timing of 0.5 seconds ON (lights on) and 0.1 seconds OFF (lights off).
Accordingly, while the routine is repeated “125” times from the initial value of 600 ms, the winning display is turned ON (lit) for 0.5 seconds, and thereafter, the winning display is 0. 0 while the routine is repeated “25” times. Control is performed at a timing of OFF (extinguishment) for 1 second.
In the special mode, the winning display time by the winning display LED 355 is set to ON (lighted) for 0.5 seconds, which is shorter than the game ball firing interval (0.6 seconds). That is, the number of game balls fired by the operation of the firing operation handle 11 is defined as 100 shots per minute according to a predetermined rule. Therefore, the payout control device 230 controls the ball feed solenoid 172 to control 100 shots / minute. Although it is set to fall within the range of (one ball is fired in approximately 0.6 seconds (s)), the winning display time by the winning display LED 355 is 0.5 seconds, compared to the firing interval of 0.6 seconds. Since the ON (lighted) is shorter, the number of winning balls displayed by the winning display LED 355 does not stagnate even if the winning balls associated with winning are continuous, such as during a big hit.

As described above, when the process proceeds from step S209 or step S210 to step S211, in step S211, the timer initial value corresponding to the winning display LED lighting time number is saved in the winning display control timer area. As described above, in the normal mode, since the winning display LED lighting time number = “1”, the winning display output control timer is saved to “375” as an initial value. Thus, since the repetition timing of this routine is every 4 ms, “375” × 4 ms = 1500 ms, and the winning display is ON (lit) for 1 second while this routine is repeated “250” times from the initial value 1500 ms. Thereafter, while this routine is repeated “125” times, the winning display is controlled at a timing of 0.5 seconds OFF (lights off).
In the special mode, the winning display LED lighting time number = “2”, so that the winning display output control timer is saved to “150” as an initial value. Thus, since the repetition timing of this routine is every 4 ms, “150” × 4 ms = 600 ms, and the winning display is ON for 0.5 seconds while this routine is repeated “125” times from the initial value 600 ms ( After that, while the routine is repeated “25” times, the winning display is controlled at the timing of OFF (extinguish) for 0.1 seconds.

  Next, the process proceeds to step S212, and the winning display LED pattern data corresponding to the number of winning balls set in step S206 is loaded. Subsequently, in step S213, the winning display LED pattern data loaded in step S212 is received as the winning display LED output data area. After saving, return. Thereby, the display of the winning display LED 355 of the collective display device 35 is controlled according to the winning display LED pattern data set in step S20 at the control timing of the winning display LED lighting time number = “1” or “2”. Then, the fact that the player has won a prize and the number of prize balls corresponding to the prize are notified.

  On the other hand, if the winning display output control timer is not “0” in step S202, the process branches to step S214 to determine whether the winning display control timer is in the lighting section. This is to determine whether or not the winning display is an ON (lighted) section (period), and the determination value in step S214 differs depending on the value of the lighting time number. If the determination result of step S214 is the ON section, the process proceeds to step S212, and the winning display LED pattern data corresponding to the number of winning balls is loaded, and then the process of step S213 is performed. Thereby, the section where the winning display is ON (lighted) continues. If the winning display control timer is not in the lighting period in step S214, the process proceeds to step S215, the extinction data is saved in the winning display LED output data area, and the process returns. Thereby, the winning ball display of the winning display LED 355 disappears.

[Polishing device control processing]
Next, the polishing apparatus control process (step S85) in the above-described timer interrupt process will be described with reference to FIG.
When this routine is started, it is determined in step S221 whether or not a polishing start flag is set. The polishing start flag is set by receiving a polishing start command from the payout control device 230, and receives the polishing start command from the payout control device 230 in the payout command reception interrupt process in the game control device 54. .
In step S221, a polishing start command is received from the dispensing control device 230, and it is determined whether or not the polishing start flag is set (set).
If it is determined in step S221 that the polishing start flag is set, the process proceeds to step S222, where a polishing start command is prepared, and in step S223, an effect command setting process is performed. The effect command setting process sets a command for transmitting a command from the game control device 54 to the effect control device 53 by serial communication.
As a result, a polishing start command is sent to the effect control device 53 by serial communication.

After step S223, the polishing start flag is cleared at step S224, and the polishing flag is set at step S225. The in-polishing flag is used for the game control device 54 to grasp that the enclosing ball is being polished.
Next, in step S226, it is determined whether the polishing end flag is set. The polishing end flag is set by receiving a polishing end command from the payout control device 230, and the polishing end flag is received from the payout control device 230 in the payout command reception interrupt process in the game control device 54. .
In step S226, a polishing end command is received from the dispensing control device 230, and it is determined whether the polishing end flag is set (set).
If it is determined in step S226 that the polishing end flag is set, the process proceeds to step S227, where a polishing end command is prepared, and in step S228, an effect command setting process is performed. As described above, the effect command setting process sets a command for transmitting a command from the game control device 54 to the effect control device 53 by serial communication.
As a result, a polishing end command is sent to the effect control device 53 by serial communication.

After step S228, the polishing end flag is cleared in step S229, the polishing flag is also cleared in step S230, the routine is ended, and the process returns.
On the other hand, if the polishing start flag is not set in step S221, the process jumps to step S226. Therefore, in this case, no polishing start command is prepared, and the polishing start command is not sent to the effect control device 53.
If the polishing end flag is not set in step S226, the routine is ended and the process returns. Therefore, in this case, the polishing end command is not prepared, and the polishing end command is not sent to the effect control device 53. The encapsulated sphere is continuously polished for a predetermined period from the start of polishing.

[Direction command setting processing]
Next, the effect command setting process (step S132) in the above-described fraud & winning monitoring process and the effect command setting process (step S223) in the polishing apparatus control process will be described with reference to FIG.
When this routine is started, an effect command (MODE) is written in the effect serial transmission buffer in step S241. Thereby, the effect command (MODE) is transmitted from the game control device 54 to the effect control device 53 by serial communication using the serial communication function of the CPU 111 in the game control device 54.
Next, in step S242, the effect serial transmission buffer status is read, and in step S243, it is determined whether transmission is in progress (during transmission of the effect command (MODE)). If transmission is in progress, the process jumps to step S246. On the other hand, if the transmission is not in progress (NO in step S243), the process proceeds to step S244 to initialize the transmission circuit. Next, the process proceeds to step S245, where the effect command (MODE) is rewritten in the effect serial transmission buffer, and then the process proceeds to step S246.
Here, in the case of this flowchart, the command is transmitted in a 2-byte configuration such as “MODE” and “ACTION”, as in the case of a production command. In those cases, a flowchart corresponding to a plurality of bytes may be used.

In step S246, an effect command (ACTION) is written in the effect serial transmission buffer. Thereby, the effect command (ACTION) is transmitted from the game control device 54 to the effect control device 53 by serial communication using the serial communication function of the CPU 111 in the game control device 54.
Next, in step S247, the effect serial transmission buffer status is read out, and in step S248, it is determined whether or not transmission is in progress (transmission of the effect command (ACTION)). To do. If the transmission is not in progress (NO in step S248), the process proceeds to step S249 to initialize the transmission circuit. Next, the process proceeds to step S250, where the effect command (ACTION) is rewritten in the effect serial transmission buffer, and then the process returns.
In this way, the effect command (MODE) and the effect command (ACTION) are transmitted from the game control device 54 to the effect control device 53 by serial communication. The production control device 53 receives these commands and performs production control on the screen of the display device 41. Since the serial communication is performed using the serial communication function of the CPU 111 in the game control device 54, there is an advantage that the configuration is simple.

[Number-of-balls command transmission process]
Next, the number-of-balls command transmission process (step S86) in the above-described timer interruption process will be described with reference to FIG.
When this routine is started, it is determined in step S261 whether or not a ball number command has been transmitted. The number-of-balls command and the number-of-balls command to be described later are transmitted from the game control device 54 to the effect control device 53, and cause the effect control device 53 to perform decoration control of the decoration ball display device 250.
If the number-of-balls command has not been transmitted in step S261, the process proceeds to step S262 to set a ball-number command corresponding to the number of balls.
Here, the number-of-balls command is set such that, for example, the upper decoration ball display device 250a of the decoration ball display device 250 performs the following decoration.
・ When the number of balls is 100 or more: All LEDs are lit or blinking when moving ・ When the number of balls is 50 or less: Decoration control so that half of all LEDs are turned off ・ The number of balls is 50 When the number is less than 100: More than half of all LEDs up to all LEDs, the number of LEDs corresponding to the number of balls is lit or blinking in stages. All LEDs included in the display device 250a.
Therefore, based on the processing in step S262, decoration control is performed such that the LED of the upper decorative ball display device 250a is turned on or moved and blinks according to the number of balls held at that time.

After step S262, a ball number command is transmitted to the effect control board (effect control device 53) in step S263, and a ball number command transmitted flag is set in subsequent step S264. Thereby, the number-of-balls command is transmitted from the game control device 54 to the effect control device 53, and the decoration control of the decorative ball display device 250 is performed by the effect control device 53. In addition, the game control device 54 can confirm the transmission of the number-of-balls command to the effect control device 53 by setting the ball-number-of-balls command transmitted flag.
Note that the clearing of the number-of-balls command transmitted flag is performed when data is set in the information setting area in the payout command reception interrupt process. There are also data sets for numbers and counting spheres.

On the other hand, if the number-of-balls command has been transmitted in step S261, the process jumps to step S265.
After step S264, the process proceeds to step S265.
In step S265, it is determined whether a counting ball number command has been transmitted. The counted ball number command is transmitted from the game control device 54 to the effect control device 53, and causes the effect control device 53 to perform decoration control of the decorative ball display device 250.
If the counting ball number command has not been transmitted in step S265, the process proceeds to step S266, and the counting ball number command corresponding to the counting ball number is set.
Here, the counting ball number command is set so that, for example, the lower decorative ball display device 250b of the decorative ball display device 250 performs the following decoration.
-When the number of counting balls = 0: All LEDs are turned off-During counting of the number of holding balls: The LED of the counting decoration unit 250c is moving and blinking. That is, the lower decoration holding ball display that images the ball box from the upper decoration holding ball display device 250a The LED (that is, the LED of the counting decoration unit 250c) moves and blinks so that the sphere moves toward the device 250b.
That is, the LED is turned on in order from the lower part of the lower decorative ball display device 250b that looks like a ball box, and the decoration control so that the player can know the approximate number of balls by the number of lighted LEDs is the lower part. All of the LEDs included in the decorative ball display device 250b.
Therefore, based on the processing in step S266, the decoration control is performed so that the LED of the lower decorative ball display device 250b is lit or moved and blinks during counting of the number of balls held or according to the size of the ball count at that time. Will be done.
In addition, the counting ball number command further includes a counting ball so as to perform a digital display of the counting ball number on the sub liquid crystal display device 33 when there is a counting ball, and an analog display of the counting ball number on the level meter right 17R. It is set to change the effects of the display device 41 and the sub liquid crystal display device 33 according to the number.

After step S266, a counting ball number command is transmitted to the effect control board (effect control device 53) in step S267, and a counting ball number command transmission completion flag is set in subsequent step S268. Thereby, the counting ball number command is transmitted from the game control device 54 to the effect control device 53, and the effect control device 53 controls the decoration ball display device 250 and the sub liquid crystal display device 33 count ball number display control. Then, analog display control of the counting ball of the level meter right 17R and effect change control according to the number of counting balls of the display device 41 and the sub liquid crystal display device 33 are performed. In addition, the game control device 54 can confirm the transmission of the counting ball number command to the effect control device 53 by setting the flag for transmitting the counting ball command.
On the other hand, if the counting ball number command has already been transmitted in step S265, the routine is terminated and the process returns.
Further, after step S268, the process returns.

H. Control system operation (dispensing control device)
Next, the control contents of the payout control device 230 will be described with reference to FIGS.
[Main processing of payout control device]
First, the main process of the payout control device 230 will be described with reference to FIGS.
Here, the flowchart of the payout control device 230 will be described using “step H” as a step number.
This main process is started based on the fact that the CPU 231 is forcibly reset. That is, when the power switch 181 of the power supply 58 that supplies power to the payout controller 230 is turned on, a reset signal is issued from the power supply 58 at a predetermined timing (in a predetermined reset period when the power is turned on). When input to the control device 230 and the reset terminal of the CPU 231 is turned on, and then the reset signal is released, the CPU 231 is activated. Similarly, when the power is restored from a power failure, the reset signal is turned on and then released and the CPU 231 is activated. Further, when the operator wants to initialize the RAM 233 and the like of the payout control device 230, it is necessary to turn on the power switch 181 while turning on the RAM clear switch 182 (initialization switch) of the power supply device 58. There is. Note that the RAM 233 is denoted as RWM in FIG.

When the CPU 231 is started, first, all interrupts (that is, all interrupts) are prohibited, the CPU peripheral circuits (including the serial port) built in the CPU 231 are initialized, and access to the RAM 233 is permitted. An off signal (a signal corresponding to a binary signal “0”) is output to all output ports (steps H1 to H4).
Since each output port is turned off (reset) by the reset signal, it is not always necessary to output the off signal to each output port in software, but step B4 is provided here just in case. .

After step H4, the other board activation waiting timer is set in step H5. This is because other control devices (for example, the game control device 54) other than the payout control device 230 (payout control board) are activated to be able to reliably capture commands from the payout control device 230. Since a predetermined period is required, the delay time is set by the other board activation wait timer.
Here, the game control device 54 is called a main control board, the payout control device 230 is called a payout control board, and the effect control device 53 is called an effect control board. The sub-board is a sub-control board, which is named according to these. For convenience of explanation, the sub-control board is abbreviated as a sub-board.
Therefore, in the specification and drawings, for convenience of explanation, the game control device 54 may be abbreviated as a main board, the payout control device 230 as a payout board, and the sub control board as a sub board.
Next, the process proceeds to step H6, where it is determined whether the power is turned on while the RAM clear switch 182 of the power supply device 58 is being pressed. If the power is not turned on while pressing the RAM clear switch 182, the process proceeds to step H7, and if the power is turned on while the RAM clear switch 182 is pressed, the process jumps to step H11.
The determination in step H6 is performed when the RAM clear switch 182 is pressed, because all data such as the RAM 233 and CPU 231 registers are cleared and initialized. This is to prevent the payout control device 230 from taking in, and for this purpose, the operation of the RAM clear switch 182 is determined in step H6.
First, if the power is not turned on while the RAM clear switch 182 is pressed, it is determined in step H7 whether all values in the power outage inspection area 1 and 2 in the RAM 233 are normal power outage inspection area check data. If the power failure is restored (when the power failure is restored), the process proceeds to step H8, and if abnormal (if not stored normally), the process proceeds to step H11. The power failure inspection area check data is set in step H46 described later. In this step H7, since it is determined whether or not the power failure has been restored based on the plurality of check data in this way, the determination as to whether or not the power failure has been restored is made with high reliability.

Next, in step H8, a checksum of data in the RAM 233 (RWM) is calculated, and in step H9, it is compared with the checksum at the time of power-off, and it is determined whether the value is normal (match). If the checksum is not normal (that is, when the data in the RAM 233 is corrupted), the process proceeds to step H11, and if the checksum is normal, the process proceeds to step H10.
In step H10, a process (initial value setting) for power failure recovery is executed. That is, all the power failure inspection areas are cleared, the checksum area is cleared, and the areas related to error and fraud monitoring are reset. Next, the process proceeds to Step H13.
The command at the time of power failure recovery (power failure recovery command) includes information notifying the state at the time of power failure (game state, rest state, settlement state). For example, when there is a power outage during a break, information indicating that it was during a break (for example, the same as a break start command in Step H414 described later) may be included in this power outage recovery command. The presentation control device 53 that has received the command via the game control measure 54 at the time of power failure recovery, for example, resumes the display on the display device 41 that informs that the break is being performed at the time of the power failure after the power failure recovery. In addition, when there is a power failure during the settlement, the information indicating that the settlement is in progress is included in the command at the time of power failure recovery, and the effect control device 53 that received this command at the time of power failure recovery via the game control measure 54. For example, the display on the display device 41 for notifying the settlement being executed at the time of a power failure is resumed after the power failure is restored. Thereby, the player can clearly recognize that the state at the time of the power failure is stored in the RAM 233 and the state is resumed at the time of the power failure recovery, and the player does not feel uneasy at the time of the power failure recovery.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step H6 that the power is turned on while the RAM clear switch 182 is being pressed, the process jumps to step H11, and the processing after step H11 is performed including step H11.
When the processing proceeds to step H11 and subsequent steps, processing such as initialization of data (excluding the access prohibited area) in the RAM 233 of the payout control device 230 is performed. That is, in step H11, all the RAM 233 areas to be used are cleared. Specifically, in RAM 233, all work areas before the access prohibited area are cleared, and all stack areas after the access prohibited area are cleared. Next, in step H12, processing for setting an initial value at the time of power-on is performed in an area to be initialized, and then the process proceeds to step H13.
Thus, since the RAM 233 is initialized before the monitoring information is taken into the payout control device 230, the monitoring information at the time of power-off is not lost, and the security is high.

Next, when the process proceeds from Step H10 to Step H13 or when the process proceeds from Step H12 to Step H13, the processes after Step H13 including Step H13 are performed.
When the processing proceeds to step H13 and subsequent steps, monitoring information is first read in step H13 and stored as state comparison data. The monitoring information indicates frame opening information indicating whether or not the opening of the front frame 4 has been detected by the night monitoring switch 126 and whether or not removal of the main board (game control device 54) has been detected by the night monitoring switch 126. It is a concept including game control device monitoring information. The detection of the opening of the front frame 4 and the detection of the removal of the main board (game control device 54) are performed during normal times when power (main power) is supplied to the gaming machine (pachinko machine 1) and power to the gaming machine. This includes both when the supply is stopped, that is, at night when the game hall is closed.
Note that the frame opening information and the game control device monitoring information from the night monitoring switch 126 are output to the payout control device 230 for a sufficiently long time. Saving of the frame opening information and game control device monitoring information may be performed by the RAM 233 or a register of the CPU 231.

Next, the number of checks of monitoring information (frame opening information and game control device monitoring information) is set in step H14. This is because if the monitoring information (frame opening information and game control device monitoring information) is read only once, the reliability may be lowered. By doing so, the reliability of the monitoring information (frame opening information and game control device monitoring information) is improved. The number of checks of the monitoring information (frame opening information and game control device monitoring information) is set to 2 times or 3 times, but may be more than that.
Next, monitoring information is read in step H15, and the read monitoring information is compared with state comparison data in step H16. This is because the first monitoring information read first is saved as the state comparison data, so that the monitoring information read in step H15 is compared with the saved state comparison data, so that there is an error in the monitoring information. This is for checking whether there is any (for example, the read monitoring information is not correct due to the influence of noise or the like).

If the read monitoring information is not equal to the state comparison data, the process returns to step H13 to repeat the loop. When the loop is repeated and it is determined that the read monitoring information is equal to the state comparison data, it is determined whether or not the process has passed from step H16 to step H17 and the same state has been continued for the number of monitoring information checks. Here, the number of checks is the number set in step H14. If the decision result in the step H17 is NO, the process returns to the step H15 to repeat the loop, and if the same state is continued for the number of monitoring information checks, the decision result in the step H17 becomes YES and the monitoring information is fixed. The process proceeds to step H18.
The monitoring information read in step H15 repeats the loop as described above until the front frame 4 is turned on (opened) or the front frame 4 is turned off (closed), and the main board (game) The loop is repeated as described above until the detection of the removal of the control device 54) or the undetection of the removal of the main board (game control device 54) is determined, so that the monitoring information is obtained accurately. The concept of on (open) or off (closed) here is simply a normal on / off (open / closed) concept. For example, the output of the frame open detecting means 322 is turned on while the front frame 5 is closed. . This is different from the form of the output level in which the output of the frame opening detection means 322 is turned off during the opening. Similarly, the output of the disconnection detection means 323 is turned on when the game control device 54 is not removed, and the output of the disconnection detection means 323 is turned off when the game control device 54 is removed. It is different from the form of the level.

In step H18, the confirmed monitoring information is saved. In step H19, the main control board reception interrupt and the card unit reception interrupt are permitted. This permits an interruption between the game control device 54 or the card unit 15 and the payout control device 230. Next, a gaming machine ID transmission request command is prepared in step H20.
The “gaming machine ID transmission request command” in step H20 requests the gaming control device 54 (main control board) to transmit the gaming machine ID of the gaming control device 54 (main control board) to the payout control device 230. It is a command to do.
Next, main control command setting processing is performed in step H21. This is processing when a command is transmitted from the payout control device 230 to the game control device 54 by serial communication. Thereby, the gaming machine ID transmission request command prepared in step H20 is transmitted to the gaming control device 54.

After step H21, the process proceeds to step H22 to determine whether a power failure has occurred. The determination here is performed using, for example, a power failure detection signal (not shown in H22, but the same determination as in H41 to H43 described later is performed). If it is determined in step H22 that no power failure has occurred, it is determined in step H23 whether or not a gaming machine ID has been received from the main control board (game control device 54). If no gaming machine ID has been received, the process returns to step H22 to repeat the loop. If a gaming machine ID has been received, the process returns to step H24. On the other hand, if it is determined in step H22 that a power failure has occurred, the process jumps to step H44.
When the process proceeds to Step H24, it is determined whether or not a power failure has occurred in Step H24. If it is determined in step H24 that no power failure has occurred, it is determined in step H25 whether or not there is a gaming machine ID transmission request from the card unit 15. If there is no gaming machine ID transmission request from the card unit 15, the process returns to step H24 to repeat the loop. On the other hand, if it is determined in step H24 that a power failure has occurred, the process jumps to step H44.

If the process proceeds to step H26, a gaming machine ID output process is performed in step H26. In this process, the game machine ID of the main control board (game control device 54) and the game machine ID of the payout control device 230 are output to the outside (card unit 15). Next, the process proceeds to step H27, and it is determined whether or not the RAM 233 has been cleared for the game data.
When the RAM 233 is cleared, a command related to the RAM clear is transmitted to the card unit 15 in step H28. This is because when the RAM 233 is cleared, the data such as the number of balls held and the number of counted balls are cleared. Therefore, in order to keep the state and the data state of the card unit 15 matched, the card unit 15 is related to the RAM clear. Send commands. When the card unit 15 receives a command related to RAM clear, the card unit 15 clears the RAM on the card unit 15 side. Note that the RAM clear here is to clear data such as the number of balls held and the number of counted balls, and the monitoring information (frame opening information and game control device monitoring information) is not cleared.

After step H28, the process proceeds to step H29. On the other hand, if the RAM 233 has not been cleared in step H27, the process jumps to step H28 and proceeds to step H29.
In step H29, a command related to monitoring information is transmitted to the card unit 15. The command corresponding to the monitoring information determines the monitoring information and detects when the front frame 4 is opened (for example, the frame is opened at night) or the removal of the game control device 54 is detected (for example, at night). If at least one of the traces (when the board is removed) is detected, it is determined that there is a possibility of fraud, and an error is notified to the card unit 15 or an error is sent to the hall computer 86. It is a command such as issuing a command to output information (and may not be allowed to lend a ball). Also, monitoring information is determined and the front frame 4 is opened or the game control device 54 is removed. If none of these are detected, it means that there is no possibility of fraud and a command is issued to the effect that there is no problem even if the card unit 15 is lended to a ball.
Next, a transmission control timer is set in step H30. The transmission control timer counts the time until receiving notification of reception of monitoring information from the card unit 15, and the transmission control timer is set to a predetermined initial value. If notification of reception of monitoring information is received from the card unit 15 within the time counted by the transmission control timer, it can be determined that the monitoring information has been normally transmitted to the card unit 15. An error is determined (see step H35 and the like described later).

Next, in step H31, it is determined whether or not a power failure has occurred. If it is determined in step H31 that a power failure has not occurred, it is determined in step H32 whether there is a monitoring information reception notification from the card unit 15. If there is a monitoring information reception notification, it is determined that the monitoring information has been normally transmitted from the payout control device 230 to the card unit 15, and the process jumps to Step H37.
On the other hand, if there is no monitoring information reception notification from the card unit 15 in step H32, the process proceeds to step H33, and the transmission control timer is updated by (-1). As a result, the transmission control timer counts down. Next, in step H34, it is determined whether or not the transmission control timer has timed up. If not, the process returns to step H31 to repeat the loop. If a monitoring information reception notification is received from the card unit 15 while the loop is repeated, the determination in step H32 is YES and the process returns to step H37. On the other hand, when the transmission control timer expires in step H34, the process proceeds to step H35, the monitoring information transmission error flag is set, and the monitoring information transmission error command is transmitted to the main control board (game control device 54) in step H36. . Thereby, a monitoring information transmission error command is transmitted from the game control device 54 to the effect control device 53, and the effect control device 53 does not transmit, for example, a command related to monitoring information to the card unit 15 based on the monitoring information transmission error command. It is also possible to notify the store clerk by performing a control such as displaying an error message indicating “” on the display device 41.

Next, the process proceeds to step H38, and a command related to the monitoring information is transmitted to the main control board (game control device 54). The command corresponding to the monitoring information determines the monitoring information and detects when the front frame 4 is opened (for example, the frame is opened at night) or the removal of the game control device 54 is detected (for example, at night). If at least one of the evidences (the substrate has been removed) is detected, it is determined that there is a possibility of fraud and is displayed by the control of the effect control device 53 via the game control device 54. It is a command such as issuing a command to notify an error in the device 41, and monitoring information is determined, and one of opening of the front frame 4 or removal of the game control device 54 is not detected. The time is a command such as issuing a command to the effect that there is no problem even if the game control device 54 determines that there is no possibility of fraud and plays a game.
After step H38, the process proceeds to step H39. On the other hand, if it is determined in step H32 that there is a monitoring information reception notification from the card unit 15 and the process jumps to step H37, a monitoring information transmission normal command is transmitted to the main control board (game control device 54) in step H37. Thereby, the game control device 54 recognizes that the monitoring information is normally transmitted from the payout control device 230 to the card unit 15.
Next, the process proceeds to step H38, and a command related to the monitoring information is transmitted to the main control board (game control device 54). Thereby, as described above, when there is a possibility of fraud from the determination of the monitoring information, the display device 41 can notify an error by the control of the effect control device 53 via the game control device 54.

After step H38, the process proceeds to step H39, where, for example, a CTC (Counter / Timer Circuit) circuit provided in the CPU 231 is activated. The CTC circuit is a circuit for timer interruption.
Next, in step H40, all interrupts (that is, all interrupts) are permitted, and when proceeding to the next step H41, the number of times of power failure monitoring signal check (for example, twice) is set in step H41, and in the next step H42 It is determined whether or not the power failure monitoring signal is on. If the power failure monitoring signal is on, the process proceeds to step H43 for final judgment of power failure, and if it is not on, the process returns to step H41. During normal operation, steps H42 to H41 are repeated.

And when it progresses to step H43, it will determine whether the ON state of a power failure monitoring signal is continued by the number of times of the check, and if this determination result is affirmative, it will finally determine that a power failure has occurred, and proceed to step H44. If negative, it is determined that a power failure has occurred and the process returns to step H42.
When the power failure monitoring signal is turned on, this power failure monitoring signal may be used as an NMI interrupt signal to interrupt the processing being executed and forcibly execute the power failure processing from step H44. However, with the configuration of this example, the power failure monitoring signal is turned on temporarily and instantaneously due to noise, etc., even though no power failure has actually occurred, since the power failure monitoring signal is checked multiple times in step H43. In this case, there is an advantage that it is not erroneously determined that a power failure has occurred.

Then, when proceeding to Step H44, all interrupts (that is, all interrupts) are prohibited, then all outputs are turned off at the next Step H45 (off data is output to all output ports), and then a power failure occurs at Step H46. Execute information setting processing. In the power failure information setting process, the power failure inspection area check data 1 is saved in the power failure inspection area 1 and the power failure inspection area check data 2 is saved in the power failure inspection area 2.
After step H46, in the next step H47, the checksum of the data in the RAM 233 is calculated and saved in a predetermined checksum area. Next, in step H48, access to the RAM 233 is prohibited, and the process waits.
In addition, the power failure process of the above steps H44-H48 is performed before a power supply voltage falls below the operating voltage of CPU231 by a power failure (a normal power supply interruption is included).
Further, as described above, when it is determined that a power failure has occurred in steps H22 and H24, the process jumps to step H44, performs the processing after step H44 described above, and finally prohibits access to the RAM 233 in step H48. Will wait.

[Main control command reception interrupt processing]
Next, the main control command reception interrupt process of the payout control device 230 will be described with reference to FIG.
In this process, an interrupt for receiving a command transmitted from the game control device 54 to the payout control device 230 is performed.
When this routine is started, the register is first saved in step H51. Next, in step H52, the main control serial reception buffer status is read, and in the next step H53, it is determined whether there is reception data. In this case, since a command (for example, a prize ball command) may be transmitted from the game control device 54 to the payout control device 230, the presence / absence of received data of the command is determined.
If it is determined in step H53 that there is received data, the process proceeds to step H54, and the command is read from the main control serial reception buffer. Next, a main control command determination table is set in step H55, and determination data corresponding to the command is acquired in step H56. Next, in step H57, it is determined whether or not the determination data is normal. If it is normal, the address of the information setting area corresponding to the command is acquired in step H58.

Here, in the information setting area, for example, for a prize ball command, various areas are set by assigning addresses such as setting the number of prize balls represented by the command in the prize ball number area. This time, the address of the information setting area corresponding to the command received from the game control device 54 is acquired.
For example, if the command received from the game control device 54 this time is a prize ball command, the address of the prize ball number area assigned to the number of prize balls represented by the prize ball command is acquired.

After step H58, the process proceeds to step H59 where the value that the command means is saved in the information setting area. This is to decode the instruction content of the command received from the game control device 54 and hold it in the information setting area. For example, if the command received from the game control device 54 is a prize ball command this time, By acquiring the address of the prize ball number area assigned to the number of prize balls represented by To save.
After step H59, the process returns to step H52 to repeat the loop. Then, all the main control serial reception buffer statuses are read, and the loop from step H52 to step H59 is repeated. If it is determined in step H53 that there is no reception data, the process branches from step H53 to step H60.
When branching to step H60, in order to resume the main routine in step H60, the main control command reception interrupt request is cleared, the register saved in step H61 is restored, all interrupts are permitted in step H62, and the interrupts are interrupted. Return to the process that was interrupted from time to time. In FIG. 26 and the like, “return = RETI” means returning to the process interrupted at the time of interrupt. On the other hand, “RET” represents a return from the subroutine to the original routine.

[Timer interrupt processing of the payout controller]
Next, the timer interruption process of the payout control device 230 will be described with reference to FIG.
This timer interrupt process is started by the processes of steps H39 and H40 in the main process described above, and is repeatedly executed at a predetermined timer interrupt cycle.
In this timer interrupt process, first, in step H71, register saving and interrupt prohibition are executed as necessary, and then the input process in step H72 is executed. In this input process, the above-described sensors (launch ball detection switch 161, foul ball detection switch 162, out ball detection switch 163, first sealed ball detection switch 164, second sealed ball detection switch 165, glass frame opening switch 125). The detection signal is read from the night monitoring switch 126 and the like.
Specifically, the output value of each sensor is determined at each timer interruption period, and when the output value of the same level continues for the specified number of times (for example, twice), the level of this output value is detected by each sensor. Read as deterministic value of signal. When it is read that any one of the sensors is on, a flag (input flag) indicating that is set.
Here, the night monitoring switch 126 detects the opening of the front frame 4 and the removal of the main board (game control device 54) at night (when the main power is not supplied to the gaming machine). Even when main power is supplied to the gaming machine), detection of opening of the front frame 4 and detection of removal of the main board (game control device 54) are performed.

Next, in step H73, output processing for setting and outputting the output data set in steps H84, H85, H86 and the like described later to the corresponding output port is executed.
Next, card unit connection confirmation processing is performed in step H74. The card unit connection confirmation process is for confirming whether the card unit 15 is turned on, whether the communication between the card unit 15 and the pachinko machine 1 can be normally performed, or the like.
For example, whether the voltage of the input (VL input) connected to the power supply line of the card unit 15 via the card unit connection terminal plate 52 is on (that is, whether the voltage is higher than a specified value). If the voltage of the VL input is turned on as a result of the determination, for example, a card unit connection confirmation flag indicating that the card unit 15 is powered on and connected to the payout control device 230 Perform processing such as setting.
Next, timer update processing is performed in step H75. Thereby, the update of various timers handled by the processing in the payout control program is performed in an integrated manner. For example, the initial value setting, value determination, and processing based on the determination result are performed by another routine, but if the initial value is set, the update may be performed by the timer update processing. Moreover, the timer used for each determination mentioned later may be updated as mentioned above, for example, may be updated by a corresponding routine.
Next, switch monitoring processing is performed in step H76. This is because the input flags (input flags such as the launch ball detection switch 161, the foul ball detection switch 162, the out ball detection switch 163, etc.) set as described above are monitored, and the number of balls held due to the launch is reduced. Processing for enclosing ball control such as increase or decrease of the number of balls is performed (details will be described later).

Next, an error monitoring process is executed in step H77. This is a process for monitoring the undetected error of each sensor described above, the open state of the glass frame 5, and the like.
For example, the types of errors monitored in this error monitoring process are as follows.
・ Glass frame open (Glass frame 5 open)
-Front frame open (front frame 4 open)
・ Removal of game control device 54 ・ Switch abnormality (connector disconnection, switch failure, etc.)
-Board ball number error (described later with reference to FIG. 37)
-Enclosed ball number error (described later with reference to FIG. 36)

The enclosing ball number error includes the following.
(A) Enclosed ball number shortage error (b) Enclosed ball number excessive error (c) Enclosed path error error There are other card unit unconnected errors in the error. This is the card unit in step S74 described above. It is monitored by connection confirmation processing (details will be described later).

Next, the process proceeds to step H78, and a firing permission signal editing process is performed. This is when the firing permission signal ON data is set when the firing is possible and the card unit 15 is not connected (for example, when a card unit connection confirmation flag (step H74) described later is not set) or the like. Is used to set firing permission signal off data (cannot be fired). This includes, for example, a forced firing process in which a ball remaining at the launch tip (the launch rod is actuated by the launch solenoid 173) at the time of a power failure is fired when the power is turned on (described later in detail).
Next, in step H79, the number of possessed balls is added. In this process, a prize ball command from the game control device 54 is received and added to the number of balls held (details will be described later).
Next, in step H80, it is determined whether or not all card unit communication line confirmations in step H74 are OK. This is because the board (card unit connection terminal plate 52) for wiring connection between the pachinko machine 1 side (payout control device 230 side) and the card unit 15 side is connected and the confirmation result of the communication line is OK. The process branches depending on whether or not. If the card unit communication line confirmation is OK, step H81, step H82, step H83, and step H84 are sequentially executed and the process proceeds to step H85. If not OK, the process jumps to step H85 without executing steps H81 to H84.
Steps H81 to H84 are processes for substantially starting and advancing the game, as will be described later. Therefore, if the determination in step H80 is negative, the game is not started and does not proceed. means. That is, in this example, if the communication line between the payout control device 230 and the card unit 15 is not normally connected, the game is not substantially advanced. As a result, it becomes difficult to illegally acquire the number of balls by an unauthorized input to the payout control device 230 using the communication line, and it is possible to increase the security.

If all card unit communication line confirmations are OK in step H80, the ball feed control process is performed in step H81. This includes setting the ON data of the ball feed solenoid 172 when the conditions for sending the ball to the launch position are complete, and processing to send the ball to the launch position, as well as powering the ball remaining at the launch pad during a power failure A process of turning off the ball feed solenoid 172 in order to cope with an empty shot at the time of charging is also included (details will be described later).
Next, in step H82, a settlement / rest control process is performed. This is to monitor the behavior of the break switch 312 and the payment instruction from the card unit 15 and perform processing related to payment and break (details will be described later). Next, card unit reception analysis processing is performed in step H83. This is to analyze the signal received from the card unit 15 by the payout control device 230 (details will be described later).

Next, the process proceeds to step H84, where a periodic command transmission process is performed. This is because, as described above, various game information from the game control device 54 and various information in the enclosed ball game (various information including the number of held balls and the number of counted balls) are given to the card unit 15 from the payout control device 230 at predetermined intervals. (For example, 400 ms), and various information (various information including the number of balls held and the number of counted balls) from the payout control device 230 to the game control device 54 at predetermined intervals (for example, 400 ms). Therefore, transmission at predetermined intervals is executed by a periodic command transmission process.
After step H84, the process proceeds to step H85. Further, as described above, when the determination result of step H80 is NO, the process jumps to step H85 without executing steps H81 to H84.
When the process proceeds to step H85 in this way, external information editing processing is executed in step H85. This edits data to be output from the payout control device 230 to an external device such as the hall computer 86 or the card unit 15.
However, information from the game control device 54 is necessary for the hall computer 86 and the ball management device 85 via the card unit 15 via the external information terminal board 51 and the card unit connection terminal board 52 via the payout control device 230. Information is output.

Next, LED editing processing is performed in step H86. This performs processing related to display of various LEDs (for example, an error display LED 67, a ball count indicator 40, an LED built in the counting switch LED 311, an LED built in the break switch 312, etc.).
Next, a polishing apparatus control process is performed in step H87. This is to send an instruction to the polishing control device 59 via the game control device 54 and the production control device 53 to control the operation of the encapsulated ball polishing device 56 (details will be described later).
After step H87, to resume the main routine, the timer interrupt request is cleared in step H88, the saved register is restored in step H89, all interrupts are permitted in step H90, and Return to the interrupted process.

[Switch monitoring processing]
Next, the switch monitoring process H76 in the timer interrupt process will be described with reference to FIG.
When this routine is started, first, the launch ball detection switch monitoring process is performed in step H101, then the foul ball detection switch monitoring process is performed in step H102, and then the out ball detection switch monitoring process is performed in step H103. Next, a count switch monitoring process is executed in step H104, and further, a count ball use switch monitoring process is executed in step H105, and then the process returns. Details of each process will be described later.

[Launching ball detection switch monitoring process]
Next, the shot ball detection switch monitoring process H101 in the switch monitoring process will be described with reference to FIG.
When this routine is started, it is first determined in step H111 whether or not there has been an input to the fired ball detection switch 161 (that is, whether or not a game ball to be fired has been detected). If there is an input, the process proceeds to step H112, and the value of the number of possessed balls is updated (decremented) by “−1”. The number of balls held here is total ball number information managed inside the payout control device 230 (payout control board). The processing in step H112 is performed because it is necessary to subtract one ball from the ball as it is launched.
Next, the process proceeds to step H113, and the number of updated balls is updated (decremented) by “−1”. The updated number of balls is information on the number of balls that has changed from the previous number of balls, and is obtained by subtracting one updated number of balls as the ball is launched.
Next, in step H114, the value of the board ball number is updated (incremented) by “+1”, and the process proceeds to step H115.

According to the routine from step H111 to step H114, each time one game ball is fired, the number of board balls is incremented by one and the number of balls held is decremented by one. The number of board balls is the number of game balls that have been fired and not collected, that is, the number of game balls that are falling mainly on the game board surface (in the game area). Here, the process of step H112 constitutes a firing subtraction process for reducing the number of possessed balls (game value) in response to the game balls being launched into the game area.
Next, in step H115, the number-of-balls display light counter is updated (incremented) by “+1”, and in step H116, “−1” is saved in the display updated number-of-balls storage area corresponding to the light counter. This is because it is necessary to display the change in the number of balls that accompanies the launch of the ball on the ball number indicator 40, so that the value of the ball number display light counter is updated (incremented) by "+1" and advanced, “−1” accompanying the launch of the ball is stored in the display updated possession ball number storage area corresponding to the advanced light counter, and the stored “−1” is subtracted from the display possession ball number to display the updated possession ball It is a number.
That is, the amount of change for displaying the number of balls to be displayed for each change event on the number-of-balls display 40 (six LEDs of 7 segments can be arranged to display a 6-digit value (number of balls)). Although it is stored in the display updated possession ball number storage area, here, the number of possession balls is reduced by one due to the launch of the ball, so “−1” is stored in the display update possession ball number storage area. .
After step H116, the process returns. As a result, the number of balls held is subtracted by “1” and the display of the ball holding number display 40 is updated.

[Foul ball detection switch monitoring process]
Next, the foul ball detection switch monitoring process H102 in the switch monitoring process will be described with reference to FIG.
When this routine is started, it is first determined in step H121 whether or not there has been an input to the foul sphere detection switch 162 (that is, a foul sphere has been detected). If there is an input, the process proceeds to step H122, where the value of the number of possessed balls is updated (incremented) by “+1”, and the updated number of retained balls is updated (incremented) by “+1” in the next step H123. Here, since it is a foul sphere, one sphere is collected, and one is added to the updated number of possessed balls. As a result, the number of updated possessed balls is incremented by “1” corresponding to the foul ball.

Next, the process proceeds to step H124, and the value of the number of board balls is updated (decremented) by “−1”.
According to the routine from step H121 to step H124, each time a foul ball (a game ball that has been launched but has not reached the game area) is collected, the number of board balls is decremented by one, and the number of balls held Is added. The reason for adding the number of balls is because it was a foul, so that there was no fire so as not to lose the player.
Next, the process proceeds to step H125, and the number-of-balls-displaying light counter is updated (incremented) by “+1”. In step H126, “+1” is saved in the display-based updated number-of-balls storage area corresponding to the light counter. This is because it is necessary to display the change in the number of balls that accompanies the foul of the ball on the ball number display 40, so that the value of the ball number display light counter is updated (incremented) by “+1” and advanced. “+1” associated with the foul of the sphere is stored in the display updated possession ball number storage area corresponding to the advanced light counter, and the stored “+1” is added to the display possession ball number to display the updated possession ball number To do.
That is, every time one foul ball is collected, it is necessary to increment the number of possessed balls. Therefore, the value of the display updated retained ball number storage area is updated (incremented) by “+1”, and the number of retained balls This is because one display 40 is added and displayed. As a result, the number of held balls is incremented by “1” corresponding to the foul ball, and the display of the held ball number display 40 is updated.

[Out ball detection switch monitoring process]
Next, the out sphere detection switch monitoring process H103 in the switch monitoring process will be described with reference to FIG.
When this routine is started, it is first determined in step H131 whether or not there is an input to the out sphere detection switch 163 (that is, whether or not an out sphere has been detected). If there is an input, the process proceeds to step H132 and the value of the number of outs is updated (incremented) by "+1". In the next step H133, it is determined whether the number of outs is 10 or more. Proceed to step H136. If the number of outs is 10 or more, the value of the out number signal output count is updated (incremented) by “+1” in step H134, and the value of the out number is set to zero (cleared to 0) in the next step H135. The process proceeds to step H136.
Proceeding to step H136, it is determined whether or not a board surface ball number error is in progress. If a board surface ball number error is in progress (specifically, if a board surface ball number error flag in FIG. 37 described later is set), step H137 is performed. If the board ball number error is not in progress (specifically, if the board ball number error flag in FIG. 37 described later is cleared), the process proceeds to step H138.
In step H137, it is determined whether or not a glass frame open error is in progress. If a glass frame open error is in progress (specifically, if a glass frame open error flag in FIG. 38 described later is set), the process returns. If the glass frame opening error is not in progress (specifically, if a glass frame opening error flag in FIG. 38 described later is cleared), the process proceeds to step H138.
In step H138, the value of the board ball number is updated (decremented) by “−1”, and the process returns.

  According to this routine, every time one out ball is collected, one board ball number is subtracted. However, if there is a board surface ball number error and a glass frame opening error, it is considered that the glass frame 5 is opened and the board surface ball number error (such as ball clogging in the game area) is being solved. The subtraction of the H138 board ball number is not executed. When the operation for eliminating the board surface ball number error (ball jam in the game area, etc.) is completed and the glass frame is closed, the board surface ball number is cleared by an error release switch monitoring process of FIG. 35 described later (step H194). ).

Note that the out balls detected in step H131 include both game balls that have been fired and have become safe (winning) and game balls that have been out (no winning). That is, the number of outs means the number of all game balls that are discharged and collected from the game area. The out number signal is one piece of external information output to the hall computer 86 (management device). As the out number signal, one pulse signal is output for ten out balls. Therefore, in the above steps H132 to H135, the number of out balls is counted as the number of outs, and every time the number of outs reaches 10, the number of out signal output is increased by 1, and the number of outs is cleared to zero. Thereby, the number of times (the number of pulses) of outputting the out number signal (signal for 10 out balls) is counted as the out number signal output number.
When editing of the out number signal is completed in an out number signal editing process (step H485), which will be described later, the out number signal output count is decremented by 1, and the edited out number signal is output in the above-described output process (step H73). Is done.
Even if a board surface ball number error occurs due to steps H136 and H137, if the glass frame 5 is not opened, step H138 is executed and the board surface ball number is updated. When the player hits the front surface of the glass frame 5 or when the game ball is resolved by the collision of the game balls, the error is released without operating the error release switch 68. Troublesome for both shoppers and shop assistants.

[Counting switch monitoring process]
Next, the count switch monitoring process H104 in the switch monitoring process will be described with reference to FIG.
When this routine is started, it is first determined in step H141 whether or not the counting switch 311 is on. If the counting switch 311 is in the on state, it is determined that the player intends to count the number of balls held by pressing the counting switch 311 and the process proceeds to step H142, and an initial value (for example, 2 seconds) is set in the shooting stop timer during counting. Set. This is to set the firing stop period in order to stop the launch of the ball while counting the number of balls.
Note that, during the launch of the ball, for example, it is assumed that the launch control by the payout control device 230 and the touch sensor 174 are turned on.

Next, in step H143, the count switch-on timer is updated (incremented) by “+1”, and in step H144, it is determined whether the count switch-on timer is greater than or equal to the upper limit value. The counting switch-on timer counts the elapsed time from when the player presses the counting switch 311.
The upper limit value in step H144 corresponds to a time during which the number of balls can be counted, and is set to 6 seconds, for example. If the count switch-on timer is not less than the upper limit value in step H144, the process proceeds to step H145 and the count switch-on timer is kept at the upper limit value. This means that if the counting switch-on timer is set to a value larger than the time value (for example, 6 seconds) at which the total number of balls can be counted, the upper limit value is kept so that the timer does not loop. It is.
After step H145, the process proceeds to step H146. On the other hand, if the count switch-on timer is less than the upper limit value in step H144, the process jumps to step H145 and proceeds to step H146.

In step H146, it is determined whether the count switch-on timer is equal to 1 second. If the count switch-on timer is equal to 1 second, the process proceeds to step H147. Step H146 is a determination for setting the number of units of counting in the processing after Step H147 when the count switch-on timer is 1 second. The time of counting switch-on timer = 1 second corresponds to the minimum time for counting the number of balls held by pressing the counting switch 311. Therefore, the operation of the counting switch 311 in a time shorter than 1 second is invalid, and the counting of the number of balls is not started. Since less than 1 second may cause the player to touch the counting switch 311 by mistake, it is invalidated to prevent malfunction.
If it is determined in step H146 that the count switch-on timer is not 1 second, this time jumps to step H150 without setting the number of units for counting. On the other hand, if the count switch-on timer is 1 second, the process proceeds to step H147 to set the number of units for counting.

In the processing after step H147, the unit number of the count is determined as follows. The unit number of counting is a numerical value (hereinafter referred to as a unit count value) indicating how many balls are counted in units of one second, for example.
In step H147, it is determined whether or not the number of balls possessed is “1000” or less. If the number of balls is “1000” or less, the process branches to step H160 to set “50” as the unit count value, and then proceeds to step H150. On the other hand, if the number of held balls exceeds “1000” in step H147, the process proceeds to step H148, where it is determined whether or not the number of held balls is “10000” or less. If the number of balls is “10000” or less, the process branches to step H161 to set “100” as the unit count value, and then proceeds to step H150.
On the other hand, if the number of held balls exceeds “10000” in step H148, “1000” is set as the unit count value in step H149, and the process proceeds to step H150.
Next, when the process proceeds to Step H150, it is determined whether or not the number of possessed balls is “0”. If the number of balls held is “0” in step H150, the process returns (no counting is performed).

When the process proceeds to step H151 and subsequent steps, it is first determined in step H151 whether or not the count switch-on timer has a timing value for performing unit counting.
The value of the timing for performing the unit counting is that the operation of the counting switch 311 is invalidated because the operation of the counting switch 311 is invalidated when the minimum time for counting the number of balls held by pressing the counting switch 311 is less than 1 second. It is a time of 1 second or more and a timing with 0.5 second as a unit break after 1 second. Specifically, the timing corresponds to a timer value indicating 1.0 seconds, 1.5 seconds, 2.0 seconds, 2.5 seconds,.
Therefore, the processing of step H151 is as described above, with timings of 0.5 seconds such as 1.0 seconds, 1.5 seconds, 2.0 seconds, 2.5 seconds,. Value of timing for performing unit counting).

Here, the number of units of counting described above will be described. Since the counting method of the number of balls in Example 1 is the same as that in FIG. 87 described later, it will be described with reference to FIG.
In FIG. 87, “pressing time” indicates the operation time (pressing time) of the counting switch 311, and FIG. 87 shows how to count the “pressing time” and the range of the number of balls. ing.
Specifically, it is as follows. The following unit count value corresponds to “count unit”.
・ Pressing time of the counting switch 311 = less than 1 second: Invalid regardless of the range of the number of balls held.
(A) Counting 50 balls when the number of balls is 1000 or less (meaning unit count value = 50, the same applies hereinafter)
(B) Counting 100 balls from 1001 to 10,000 balls. (C) Counting 1000 balls from 10001 balls. After that, every 0.5 seconds:
(B) Count 50 balls when the number of balls is 1000 or less. (B) Count 100 balls when the number of balls is between 1001 and 10,000. (C) Count 1000 when the number is 10001 or more. .0 seconds:
(B) Count all balls with 1,000 or less balls (b) Count all balls with 1001 to 10,000 balls (c) Count all balls with 10001 balls or more

  As described above, in the first embodiment, the time of unit counting is determined by dividing the pressing time of the counting switch 311 every 0.5 seconds. As described above, the operation of the counting switch 311 is invalidated for less than 1 second to prevent the counting switch 311 from malfunctioning. Regardless of how many balls are held, the count time of the count switch 311 is all counted in 6.0 seconds.

Now, returning to the flow, if the count switch-on timer is the timing value at which the unit count is performed in step H151, it is determined that the number of balls possessed by the operation of the count switch 311 is determined, and the process proceeds to the subsequent step H152. It is determined whether the number is less than the unit count value. If the number of balls is less than the unit count value, the number of balls held at that time is replaced with the unit count value in step H153. This is to simplify the counting process by replacing the remaining number of balls at that time with the unit count value when the number of balls remaining is less than the unit count value.
After step H153, the process proceeds to step H154. On the other hand, if the number of held balls is not less than the unit count value in step H152, the process jumps to step H153 and proceeds to step H154.

In step H154, “the number of counting balls + unit count value” is set as the number of counting balls, and this is stored in the RAM 233 of the payout control device 230. In this way, the counting ball number is updated when the counting switch 311 is operated.
Next, in step H <b> 135, “number of balls held−unit count value” is set as the number of balls held this time, and this is stored in the RAM 233 of the payout control device 230. In this way, the number of balls held when the counting switch 311 is operated is updated.
In this way, in this example, both the number of held balls and the number of counted balls are managed by the payout control device 230 (the card unit 17 is simply transmitted with the data of the number of held balls and the number of counted balls. Only to let you know).
Next, the process proceeds to step H156, where the number of balls held (the number of balls held in step H155) is set as the number of held balls for display, and the routine is terminated and the process returns.
By the processing of step H155 and step H156, every time the number of balls is counted, the number of balls is subtracted from the unit count value and stored as the number of balls for display in the storage area of the RAM 233 for storing the number of balls, and the memory of the RAM 233 is stored. Based on the number of balls for display (data) stored in the area, the number of balls after counting is displayed on the ball number display 40.

Next, a description will be given of a case where the determination at each step branches to a route different from that described above.
If the count switch 311 is not on in step H141, it is determined that the player has not pressed the count switch 311 or has pressed the count switch 311 but has released for a moment, and the process branches to step H157. If it is not “0”, the timer is updated (decremented) by “−1”.
This is when the player has not pressed the counting switch 311 at all. Since the process returns through steps H158 and H159 described later, counting of the number of balls is not started, but if the player intends to start counting the number of balls by pressing the count switch 311, Since a grace period (for example, 2 seconds) is provided so that the counting of the number of balls can be continued even if the counting switch 311 is turned off for a moment, the counting is performed to count the grace period. The medium firing stop timer is updated (decremented) by “−1”.
On the other hand, if the firing stop timer during counting is “0”, it is determined that the player has not pressed the counting switch 311.

After step H157, it is determined in subsequent step H158 whether or not the counting stop timer is “0”. If the firing stop timer is not “0” during counting, the process returns and the routine is repeated. As described above, when the player intends to start counting the number of balls held by pressing the counting switch 311, the counting switch 311 is held for a moment during counting even if the counting switch 311 is turned off. A grace period is provided so that counting of the number of balls can be continued, but the case where the grace period is counted is NO in step H157.
On the other hand, if the counting stop timer is “0” in step H158, the process proceeds to step H159 to clear the count switch-on timer to “0” and returns. In this case, the player has not pressed the counting switch 311 at all, and the counting of the number of balls is not started.

  Next, if it is determined in step H151 that the count switch-on timer does not have a timing value for performing unit counting, the process branches to step H162, and whether or not the count switch-on timer has a timing value for performing total counting is determined. judge. As shown in FIG. 87, the timing of total counting is that when the pressing time of the counting switch 311 is 6.0 seconds, all the balls are counted regardless of the number of balls. Therefore, the timing (that is, 6.0 seconds). Therefore, if it is not the value of the timing when the pressing time of the counting switch 311 becomes 6.0 seconds in step H162, the routine is finished and the process returns, and the timing when the pressing time of the counting switch 311 becomes 6.0 seconds. If it is a value, the process proceeds to step H163, where “counted ball number + number of held balls” is set as the counted ball number and stored in the RAM 233 of the payout control device 230.

If it is a case where the total number of balls is counted and the game is to be ended and settled, the count switch 311 is pressed to count the number of balls to be counted, and then the message / operation area section By touching the “game end” button on the screen 306 and then touching the return button 304, the game cards in which all of the number of possessed balls (here, all of the counted balls) are recorded are stored in the card unit 15. Will be discharged from. Accordingly, since this time corresponds to the time of payment, the payout control device 230 transmits data of the total number of balls (the number of balls held + the number of balls counted) to the card unit 15 at the time of payment.
Next, in step H164, the number of held balls is cleared to “0”, and in step H165, the number of held balls for display is cleared to “0”, the routine is terminated, and the process returns.
By the processing from step H162 to step H165, all of the number of possessed balls is counted and saved in the counted number of balls area, and thereafter, both the number of possessed balls and the number of possessed balls for display are cleared to “0”. .

[Counting ball use switch monitoring process]
Next, the counting ball use switch monitoring process H105 in the switch monitoring process will be described with reference to FIG.
When this routine is started, it is first determined in step H171 whether or not the counting ball use switch 314 has been pressed. The counting ball use switch 314 is operated when the player wishes to move the ball from the counting ball number to the holding ball number. When the counting ball use switch 314 is operated once, the counting ball use number is determined from the counting ball number. The configuration is such that the movement of a ball (for example, a predetermined amount = 100 balls) is started. Therefore, in step H171, the counting ball use switch 314 is pressed, and it is determined whether or not the player has requested the movement of the ball from the counting ball number to the possession ball number.
If the counting ball use switch 314 is not pressed, the routine is terminated and the process returns.
On the other hand, if the counting ball use switch 314 has been pressed, the routine proceeds to step H172, where it is determined whether the number of counting balls is not “0”. If NO in step H172, the number of counted balls is “0”, so it is determined that movement to the number of held balls cannot be made, the routine is terminated, and the process returns.

If YES in step H172, it is determined that there is a counting ball and it is possible to move to the number of holding balls, the process proceeds to step H173, and whether or not the counting ball number is “100” or more. Determine. If the number of counting balls is “100” or more, “100” (that is, 100 counting balls) out of the number of counting balls is set as the number of counting balls used in step H174. As a result, 100 balls out of the number of counted balls move to the number of possessed balls. After step H174, the process proceeds to step H175.
On the other hand, when the number of counting balls is less than “100” in step H173, the process branches to step H179, and all the counting balls are set as the number of counting balls used. As a result, all the counted balls move to the number of balls held.
This is because when a counting ball use switch 314 is operated once, a predetermined amount (for example, 100) of balls is moved from the counting ball number to the number of possessed balls. This is because the ball may be moved to the number of balls possessed.
After step H179, the process proceeds to step H175.

When the process proceeds from step H174 to step H175, or when the process proceeds from step H179 to step H175, the sum of “the number of balls held + the number of counting balls used” in step H175 is the upper limit value (for example, 250,000) in the design. It is determined whether or not it is equal to or greater than the design upper limit of the number of storages. In step H176, "250,000-number of balls held" is updated and registered as a new number of used counting balls, and then the process proceeds to step H177. This is because, in practice, the number of balls held + the number of counting balls used will not exceed 250,000, but in order to prevent the player's holding and counting balls from losing. is there.
On the other hand, if the sum of “the number of balls held + the number of counting balls used” is less than the designed upper limit value (for example, 250,000) in step H175, the process jumps to step H177.
Next, when the process proceeds to step H177, “number of held balls + counted ball use number” is updated as a new number of held balls in step H177, and “counted ball number−counted ball used number” is newly updated in step H178. Update as the correct counting ball number. This is because the counting ball use switch 314 is operated to move the ball from the counting ball number to the holding ball number, so that the values of the holding ball number and the counting ball number are updated in accordance with the situation.
After step H178, the routine is terminated and the process returns.

According to the counting ball use switch monitoring process, when the counting ball use switch 314 is operated once, a predetermined amount (for example, 100) of balls moves from the number of counting balls to the number of possessed balls. Further, if the number of counted balls is less than a predetermined amount (for example, 100), all the counted balls move to the number of possessed balls.
Therefore, the player can taste the game sensation of the concept of moving the ball from the ball box to the upper plate as well as increasing the number of balls that can be fired by returning from the counted ball number to the number of balls held. is there.

[Error monitoring processing]
Next, the error monitoring process H77 in the timer interrupt process will be described with reference to FIG.
When this routine is started, the processing is returned after sequentially executing the error release switch monitoring process in step H181, the enclosed ball number monitoring process in step H182, the board ball number error monitoring process in step H183, and the frame opening error monitoring process in step H184. To do.
The error release switch monitoring process, the enclosed ball number monitoring process, the board ball number error monitoring process, and the frame opening error monitoring process will be described in detail later.

[Error release switch monitoring process]
Next, the error release switch monitoring process H181 in the error monitoring process will be described with reference to FIG.
When this routine is started, it is first determined in step H191 whether or not the error release switch 68 has been turned on. In step H192, the operation of changing the glass frame 5 from the open state to the closed state (glass frame opening / closing operation) is detected before the error release switch 68 is turned on based on the output of the glass frame opening switch 125. It is determined whether or not it has been performed (that is, the opening / closing history of the glass frame is confirmed based on the opening / closing information set in step H252 of FIG. 38 described later, for example). And when this operation | movement (opening / closing operation | movement of a glass frame) is detected, it progresses to step H193, and when not detected, it returns.

Proceeding to step H193, the information that the opening / closing operation of the glass frame 5 has been detected is cleared (i.e., returned to a state where there is no such information), and then the number of board balls is cleared (i.e., step H194). Then, the data on the number of board balls is returned to zero), and in step H195, an error recovery command is transmitted to the game control device 54 (main control board), and then the process returns. In addition, the game control device 54 that has received the error recovery command sends the command to the effect control device 53, and that the error is being recovered by the effect control device 53 (that is, work to eliminate an error in the number of board balls, which will be described later). For example, the display device 41 is configured to execute a character display of “confirming error recovery”.
In the present embodiment, the game control device 54 and the payout control device 230 are separately configured. However, when the game control device 54 and the payout control device 230 are integrally configured with one main control board. A command (for example, a command during error recovery) is transmitted from the main board to the effect control device 53, and the effect control device 53 that receives the command receives a predetermined display (for example, as described above). The display device 41 is configured to perform control to execute “displaying error recovery confirmation”. Similarly, when the game control device 54 and the payout control device 230 are separately configured as in the present embodiment, commands from the payout control device 230 are sent via the game control device 54 to the effect control device. 53, the production control device 53 receives the same command, and controls the display of the display device 41 based on the command. That is, a command transmitted from the payout control device 230 to the game control device 54 (main control board) is transmitted to the effect control device 53 via the game control device 54, and the display control device 53 based on the command is transmitted by the effect control device 53. Display control is performed.

  Here, when the number of board balls is cleared to zero by the process of step H194, the determination result of step H201 in FIG. 36 described later becomes negative, and the enclosed ball number excess error flag is cleared in step H202. In this case, the determination result in step H231 in FIG. 37, which will be described later, also becomes negative, and the board ball number error flag is cleared in step H235. However, an encapsulated ball number excess error described later has occurred, and this encapsulated ball number excess error has not actually been resolved (for example, the glass frame 5 is opened to release the clogged ball in the game area and the glass frame 5 Is closed and the error release switch 68 is turned on, but if the number of encapsulated balls continues to be excessive as a whole), the enclosing ball number confirmation determination process executed as described later (step H209 and after in FIG. 36) ), For example, step H212 is executed, and the error flag indicating that the number of encapsulated balls is excessive is set again.

  Therefore, according to the routine of FIG. 35, the glass frame 5 is closed after being opened, and then the error release switch 68 is turned on to clear the number of board balls, and the above-mentioned board ball number error flag is set. Release etc. are executed. As a result, there is an abnormality that causes the number of board balls to exceed the specified number due to clogging of game balls (board board ball number error), or an enclosed ball number error (enclosed ball number excess error, enclosed ball number insufficient error, enclosure path error error). When this occurs, when a store clerk or the like of the amusement hall opens the glass frame 5 and manually closes the glass frame 5 after solving the clogging (or shortage of balls), and then turns on the error release switch 68, This error detection state (the state where the error flag is set) is automatically canceled. Therefore, there is an effect that the error can be canceled accurately and smoothly.

  In other words, the error detection state cannot be canceled simply by turning on the error cancel switch 68, and it is not possible to cancel unless the ball clogging is actually resolved. Further, in order to increase the accuracy, it is not necessary to perform another operation, but an additional condition is to open and close the glass frame 5 which is an operation that is absolutely necessary for releasing the ball clogging. Error cancellation can be realized. In the process of FIG. 35, the error flag (for example, the excessive number of encapsulated balls error flag or the board ball number error flag) is not cleared, but the condition for clearing the board ball number is set in step H194. The various error detection states described above related to the encapsulated sphere are canceled. For this reason, the error detection status cancellation process for a large number of error flags (enclosed ball count error, encapsulated ball count error, encapsulated path error error, board ball count error flags) is substantially realized with a small number of steps. As a result, the processing is simplified. In addition, after an error canceling operation (operation including the operations of steps H191 and H192) is performed, a process for checking the number of encapsulated spheres is executed and the number of encapsulated spheres is normal (encapsulated sphere excessive error, encapsulated sphere). The error flag is canceled after confirming that the error is not a shortage error or an enclosure path error, so that the accuracy of error cancellation can be further improved.

  In addition, if a board ball number error occurs and the glass frame 5 is opened to try to resolve it manually, the game ball that has been clogged will collide with a game nail in the game area and jump out of the game area. May end up. Thus, even if the game ball is lost without being collected from the out-ball inlet 23, the number of board balls is cleared in step H194, so that the number of board balls is determined to be greater than or equal to the specified number in step H231 described later. The game can be resumed unless it is determined that there is an insufficient number of encapsulated balls in Steps H216 and H219, which will be described later, and problems such as the player feeling dissatisfied are avoided. It should be noted that even if the glass ball 5 is opened in Steps H137 and H138, the number of board balls is not updated even if it passes through the out ball detection switch. Therefore, when the glass frame 5 is opened, the error release switch 68 is operated. And need to clear the error. Furthermore, by clearing the board ball number in step H194, the board ball number error is resolved, so the board ball number is in a positive state even though there is no game ball on the board. Therefore, it does not develop into a problem that a board ball number error occurs frequently even though it is in a normal state.

  In addition, the operation | work for eliminating the factor (ball clogging, a ball shortage, a ball excess) of a board surface ball number error or an enclosed ball number error can be performed as follows, for example. First, for example, a clogged ball (a so-called grape or the like) on the board surface (the front surface of the game board 20 including the game area 22) applies a shock by pushing, pulling or impacting the ball clogged manually by opening the glass frame 5. It can be solved by letting it flow down. If the number of encapsulated balls is excessive, the front frame 4 is opened in addition to the glass frame 5 as necessary, and the ball feeding device described above is manually operated to send the ball to the launch position. By removing the balls one by one, it can be solved by discharging the balls one by one out of the machine. Also, when the number of encapsulated balls is insufficient, the glass frame 5 is opened, and a ball from the outside of the machine (supplemented ball) is inserted into the game area 22 from the board side to flow down (for example, flow into the out ball inlet 23). Can be resolved.

[Encapsulated ball number monitoring process]
Next, the enclosed ball number monitoring process H182 in the error monitoring process will be described with reference to FIG.
When this routine is started, it is first determined in step H201 whether or not the number of board balls is less than zero. If less than zero, the process proceeds to step H203, and if not less than zero, the process proceeds to step H202. In step S202, since the number of surface balls is not less than zero, the enclosing ball number excess error flag is cleared, and the process proceeds to step H204. On the other hand, in step S203, since there is an abnormal state in which the number of balls on the board is less than zero and a ball has been illegally thrown into the board, an excessive ball number error flag is set, and the process proceeds to step H205.

  Proceeding to step H204, it is determined whether the encapsulated ball number excess error flag is the same as that at the previous processing. If it has already been cleared before being performed), the process proceeds to step H208, and if it is not the same as the previous process (that is, if it has been cleared from the state set in the immediately preceding step H202), the process proceeds to step H207. . In step H207, the encapsulated ball number excess error cancel command is transmitted to the game control device 54 (main control board), and the process proceeds to step H208. Here, Step H204 is provided in order not to execute Step H207 unnecessarily and to repeatedly transmit the encapsulated ball number excessive error cancel command.

Proceeding to step H205, it is determined whether or not the enclosed ball number excess error flag is the same as the previous processing, and if it is the same as the previous processing (that is, it has already been set in the sequence before the previous processing and is set in the previous step H203). If it has already been set before proceeding, the process proceeds to step H208, and if it is not the same as the previous process (that is, if it was set from the state cleared in the immediately preceding step H205), the process proceeds to step H206. . In Step H206, an encapsulated ball number excess error command is transmitted to the game control device 54 (main control board), and the process proceeds to Step H208. Here, step H205 is provided in order not to execute step H206 unnecessarily and duplicately transmit the enclosed ball number excess error command.
The game control device 54 that has received the enclosed ball number excess error command sends the command to the effect control device 53, and the effect control device 53 displays an error display such as “excess balls are mixed” on the display device 41. The game control device 54, which is executed at step S3 and receives the encapsulated ball number excess error cancel command, sends the same command to the effect control device 53, and the effect control device 53 performs control to erase this error display.

In step H208, it is determined whether or not there is a request for confirmation of the number of encapsulated balls (that is, whether or not the enclosing ball number confirmation request flag is set). If there is, the process proceeds to step H209. The process jumps (ie, does not execute) and returns. It should be noted that the enclosing ball number confirmation request flag needs to be cleared with the error canceling switch 68 when the power is turned on and when the glass frame 5 is opened and closed when an error that needs to be cancelled with the error canceling switch 68 has not occurred. This flag is set when the error release switch 68 is turned on by opening and closing the glass frame 5 when an error occurs.
When proceeding to step H209, the enclosing ball number confirmation request flag is cleared, and then at step H210, it is determined whether or not the minimum enclosing ball number detection switch (that is, the first enclosing ball detection switch 164) is turned on. If it is, the process proceeds to Step H211. If not, the process proceeds to Step H216.

Then, when proceeding to Step H211, it is determined whether or not the maximum encapsulated ball number detection switch (that is, the second encapsulated ball detection switch 165) is on. If it is on, the process proceeds to Step H212, and if it is not on. Proceed to step H214. If the process proceeds to step H212, both switches 164 and 165 are both on and an encapsulated ball number excess error flag is set, and an encapsulated ball number excess error flag is set. It transmits to the game control apparatus 54 (main control board), and returns after that.
When the process proceeds to step H214, the number of encapsulated spheres is in the normal range (that is, the minimum and maximum is less than or equal to the maximum). The enclosing ball number shortage error flag and the enclosing path error error flag) are cleared, and the enclosing ball number error cancel command is transmitted to the game control device 54 (main control board) in the next step H215, and then the process returns.

Setting the flag means setting the flag, and clearing the flag means setting the flag not set (not set).
Also, to cancel the state where the overfilled ball number error flag is set (error detection state of overfilled ball number error), as described in FIG. 35, the glass frame 5 is opened to eliminate the cause of the error. However, it is necessary to close the glass frame 5 and press the error release switch 68 after that (for example, removing an extra ball). The same applies to other enclosing ball number errors (encapsulated ball number shortage error and enclosing path error error). Even if the glass frame 5 is simply opened / closed and the error release switch 68 is pressed, the encapsulated ball number excess error flag is cleared by step H194 in FIG. 35 and steps H201 and H202 in this routine (FIG. 36). If the cause of the error has not been resolved (when the number of encapsulated spheres is excessive), thereafter, the processing after step H209 of this routine (FIG. 36) is executed. A flag will be set.

On the other hand, if the determination in step H210 is NO and the process proceeds to step H216, it is determined whether or not the maximum encapsulated ball number detection switch (that is, the second encapsulated ball detection switch 165) is turned on. If not, the process proceeds to step H219. When the process proceeds to step H217, the second enclosed ball detection switch 165 is turned on even though the first enclosed ball detection switch 164 is not turned on. For example, a clogged ball is generated in the sensor flow path 77 described above. Therefore, the enclosure path abnormality error flag is set, and in the next step H218, an enclosure path abnormality error command is transmitted to the game control device 54 (main control board), and then the process returns. If the process proceeds to step H219, the number of encapsulated balls is insufficient (that is, less than the minimum), so an encapsulated ball number insufficient error flag is set, and in the next step H220, an encapsulated ball insufficient error command is issued. Send to (main control board), then return.
The game control device 54 (main control board) that has received the enclosed route abnormality error command transmits the command to the effect control device 53, and the effect control device 53 displays, for example, an error message “path abnormality has occurred”. The game control device 54 (main control board) that is executed by the display device 41 and receives the encapsulated ball number shortage error command transmits the command to the effect control device 53. The game control device 54 (main control board) that has received the error indication “mass” on the display device 41 and has received the enclosed ball number error cancel command transmits the command to the effect control device 53, and the effect control device 53 In this configuration, these error indications are erased.

[Panel ball number error monitoring processing]
Next, the board surface ball number error monitoring process H183 in the error monitoring process will be described with reference to FIG.
When this routine is started, it is first determined in step H231 whether or not the number of board spheres is equal to or greater than the specified number. If it is equal to or greater than the specified number, the process proceeds to step H232. Here, the specified number is a value of 1 or more, for example, ten. This is because, if there are generally 10 or more board balls, there is a game problem, and it is considered that the flow of game balls is stagnant to some extent. The prescribed number is not limited to 10, and the optimum value varies depending on the gaming machine.

  Then, when the process proceeds to step H232, the board ball number error flag is set, and the process proceeds to step H233. In step H233, it is determined whether the board ball number error flag is the same as that in the previous processing. If it has already been set in step H233, the flow returns to step H234. If not, the flow proceeds to step H234. In Step H234, a board surface ball number error command is transmitted to the game control device 54 (main control board), and then the process returns. Here, Step H233 is provided in order not to execute Step H234 unnecessarily and to repeatedly transmit the board ball number error command.

On the other hand, when the process proceeds to step H235, the board ball number error flag is cleared, and the process proceeds to step H236. In step H236, it is determined whether the board ball number error flag is the same as in the previous process. If it is the same as in the previous process (that is, it has already been cleared in the sequence before the previous process and before it is cleared in the previous step H235). If it has already been cleared, the process returns to step H237, and if it is not the same as the previous processing (that is, if it has been cleared from the state set in the immediately preceding step H235), the process proceeds to step H237. In Step H237, a board surface ball number error cancel command is transmitted to the game control device 54 (main control board), and then the process returns. Here, Step H236 is provided in order to execute Step H237 unnecessarily and not to repeatedly transmit the board ball number error cancel command.
In addition, the game control device 54 (main control board) that has received the board surface ball number error command transmits the command to the effect control device 53, and the effect control device 53, for example, an error “a board surface ball number error has occurred”. The display is executed by the display device 41, and the game control device 54 (main control board) that has received the board ball number error cancel command transmits the command to the effect control device 53, and the effect control device 53 turns off this error display. It has a configuration.
According to this routine, when the number of board balls is abnormally increased due to ball clogging or the like in the game area or the like, the determination result of step H231 becomes affirmative, and the board ball number error flag is set in step H232, and the number of board balls An error occurs. When the ball clogging is resolved and the board ball number returns to normal, the judgment result in step H231 becomes negative, and the board ball number error flag is cleared in step H235, and the error detection state of the board ball number error is set. Canceled.

  When a board surface ball number error occurs, a security signal is output to the hall computer 86 or the like via the card unit 15; ). Thereby, it becomes impossible to fire the game ball (that is, the game) due to mere clogging of the ball in the game area (when the number of encapsulated balls is normal), and a problem such as dissatisfaction by the player is avoided. However, when another error that should not continue the game (for example, an insufficient number of encapsulated balls) occurs along with the board ball number error, the game ball cannot be fired (see FIG. 39 described later).

[Frame open error monitoring processing]
Next, the frame opening error monitoring process H184 in the error monitoring process will be described with reference to FIG.
When this routine is started, first, in step H241, it is determined whether or not the state of the glass frame opening switch 125 for detecting the opening of the glass frame 5 (front frame) is the same as in the previous process. If not the same, in step H242, the glass frame opening monitoring timer initial value (for example, a value corresponding to 100 msec) is set in the glass frame opening monitoring timer, and then the processing proceeds to step H243.
In step H243, if the glass frame open monitoring timer is not zero, an update process for reducing the value of the glass frame open monitoring timer by one cycle of the timer processing period is executed, and then the flow advances to step H244 to advance the glass frame open monitoring timer. If it is zero, the process proceeds to step H245. If it is not zero, the process jumps from step H245 to H252 and proceeds to step H253.

  In these steps H241 to H244, the open / close state of the glass frame 5 is monitored by the state of the glass frame open switch 125, and the same state continues for a predetermined time (for example, 100 msec) corresponding to the initial value of the glass frame open monitor timer. For the first time, the open / closed state of the glass frame 5 is determined by the processing after step H245. Thereby, the open / closed state of the glass frame 5 is determined with high reliability. That is, for example, even if the signal of the glass frame opening switch 125 fluctuates instantaneously due to noise or the like, it is possible to prevent erroneous determination of the open / closed state of the glass frame 5.

Proceeding to step H245, it is determined whether the state of the glass frame opening switch 125 corresponds to the opening state of the glass frame 5. If the glass frame opening switch 125 is in the open state, the glass frame opening error flag is set in step H246, and then the process proceeds to step H248. If it is not in the open state (that is, if it is in the closed state), the glass frame open error flag is cleared in step H247, and then the flow proceeds to step H248.
In step H248, it is determined whether the state of the glass frame opening error flag determined this time (whether it is set or cleared) is the same as in the previous processing. Through H252, the process jumps to step H253, and if not the same, the process proceeds to step H249.

  When proceeding to step H249, a command corresponding to the currently determined glass frame opening error state (that is, the state of the glass frame opening error flag set in step H246 or H247) is transmitted to the game control device 54 (main control board). Then, the process proceeds to Step H250. Here, for example, if the glass frame open error flag is set, a command indicating a glass frame open error state is transmitted to the game control device 54 (main control board), and the game control device 54 sends the command. In response to this command, the effect control device 53 is configured to perform error display for notifying the display device 41 that the glass frame 5 is open. If the glass frame opening error flag is cleared, a command indicating that the glass frame opening error is released is transmitted to the game control device 54 (main control board), and the game control device 54 Is transmitted to the production control device 53, and the production control device 53 is configured to receive the command and erase the error display on the display device 41, for example.

In step H250, the information that the glass frame 5 has been opened and closed (hereinafter referred to as opening / closing operation information) is cleared, and then the opened / closed state of the glass frame 5 (front frame) determined this time is determined in step H251. If it is in the closed state (that is, the state where the glass frame opening error flag is cleared), the process proceeds to Step H252, and if it is not in the closed state (that is, if it is the open state in which the glass frame opening error flag is set), Step H252 is performed. And jump to step H253.
In Step H252, the opening / closing operation information for the glass frame 5 is set, and the process proceeds to Step H253. This opening / closing operation information is used for the determination in step H192 in the error release switch monitoring process (FIG. 35) described above.

Next, when proceeding to Step H253, processing similar to Steps H241 to H249 is performed for opening the front frame 4 and detaching the game control device 54, and then returns.
That is, in step H253, it is determined whether or not the state of the night monitoring switch 126 that detects opening of the front frame 4 and removal of the game control device 54 is the same as in the previous process. If not, the initial value of the frame opening / breaking monitoring timer (for example, a value corresponding to 100 msec) is set in the frame opening / breaking monitoring timer in step H254, and then the process proceeds to step H255.

In step H255, if the frame opening / breaking monitoring timer is not zero, an update process is performed to reduce the value of the frame opening / breaking monitoring timer by one cycle of the timer processing cycle, and then the process proceeds to step H256 to open the frame opening / breaking monitoring timer. If it is zero, the process proceeds to step H257, and if it is not zero, the process returns.
In these steps H253 to H256, the open / close state of the front frame 4 and the removal state of the game control device 54 are monitored according to the state of the night monitoring switch 126, and the same state is a predetermined time ( For example, only when the operation is continued for 100 msec), the opening / closing state of the front frame 4 and the removal state of the game control device 54 are determined by the processing after step H257. Thereby, the open / closed state of the front frame 4 and the detached state of the game control device 54 are determined with high reliability.

Proceeding to Step H257, the state of the night monitoring switch 126 is determined by the state in which the front frame 4 is opened or the game control device 54 is removed (that is, the disconnection detecting means 323 detects disconnection of the loop path of the backup power source. The state in which the removal of the control device 54 is detected). If the front frame 4 is in the open state or the game control device 54 is in the detached state, the frame open disconnection error flag is set in step H258 and then the process proceeds to step H260. If it is not in the open state (that is, if it is in the closed state), and if it is not in the detached state of the game control device 54, the process proceeds to step H260 after clearing the frame open disconnection error flag in step H259.
In step H257, if at least one of the open state of the front frame 4 or the removed state of the game control device 54 is detected, a determination result of YES is obtained, and the frame open disconnection error flag is determined in step H258. Will be set.
In step H260, it is determined whether the state of the frame open / cut error flag determined this time (set state or cleared state) is the same as in the previous process, and if it is the same, the process is not necessary and the process returns. If not, the process proceeds to step H261.

When the process proceeds to step H261, a command corresponding to the frame opening / breaking error state determined this time (that is, the state of the frame opening / breaking error flag set in step H258 or H259) is transmitted to the game control device 54 (main control board). Then return.
Here, for example, if the frame open disconnection error flag is set, a command indicating that a frame open disconnection error is present is transmitted to the game control device 54 (main control board), and the game control device 54 sends the command. In response to this command, for example, the display control device 53 receives at least one of an error state in which the front frame 4 is opened on the display device 41 or an error state in which the game control device 54 is removed. An error display for notifying that there is one or more error states is performed.

[Launch permission signal editing process]
Next, the firing permission signal editing process H78 in the timer interrupt process will be described with reference to FIG.
When this routine is started, it is first determined in step H271 whether the card unit is connected. If OK, the process proceeds to step H272, and if not OK, the process proceeds to step H285. This determination is made based on the confirmation result of the card unit connection confirmation process (step H74 in FIG. 27). That is, in step H74, the voltage of the input (VL input) connected to the power line of the card unit 15 via the card unit connection terminal plate 52 is turned on (that is, the voltage is higher than the specified value). For example, if the card unit connection confirmation flag indicating that the card unit 15 is powered on and connected to the payout control device 230 is set, the card unit connection confirmation OK is determined in this step H271. Is done.

  When the process proceeds to step H272, a process for updating the power-on forced firing timer (that is, a process for reducing the value of the power-on forced firing timer by one cycle of the timer interrupt cycle) is executed, and the process proceeds to step H273. The power-on forced launch timer counts the forced launch time to force the ball remaining at the tip of the launcher 57 at the time of a power outage (automatic launch regardless of the player's operation) when the power is turned on. It is a timer to do. Note that the forced launch is a blank shot that does not affect the game result.

In step H273, if the power-on forced firing timer value is not zero, the process jumps to step H284, and if it is zero, the process proceeds to the determination process in steps H274 to H283.
In the determination process of steps H274 to H283, if the determination result is positive in each determination, the process proceeds to step H285 without executing the subsequent determination process, and the determination result is negative in each determination of steps H274 to H283. The next determination process is sequentially executed, and if the determination result of the last step H283 is negative, the process proceeds to step H284.

  In step H274, the number of balls held is zero, in step H275 it is being settled, in step H276 it is resting, in step H277, there is an insufficient number of encapsulated balls, or in step H278, there is an excessive number of encapsulated balls In step H279, an enclosure path abnormality error is occurring, in step H280, the glass frame is being opened (the glass frame 5 is being opened), or in step H281, the frame is being opened or disconnected (ie, the front frame 4 is being opened or the game control device) In step H282, whether or not fraudulent acts are being detected, or whether or not the encapsulated ball polishing flag is set is determined.

Here, the determination as to whether the account is being settled is made by a settlement control process number described later. For example, if the settlement control process number is any of 2 to 4, it is determined that settlement is in progress. If the settlement control process number is 1, it is determined that settlement is not in progress. Further, whether or not a break is occurring is determined by a break control process number described later. For example, if the break control process number is any one of 2 to 3, it is determined that a break is in progress. If the break control process number is 1, it is determined that the break is not in progress.
Next, whether or not an enclosing ball number shortage error has occurred is set in the above-described step H219, and whether or not an enclosing ball number excessive error has occurred is set in the above-described steps H203 and H212. Whether the enclosing ball number excessive error flag or the enclosing path abnormality error is occurring is determined based on the enclosing path abnormality error flag set in the above-described step H217.

Further, the determination of whether or not at least one of the determination of whether the glass frame is being opened (the glass frame 5 is being opened) and the front frame 4 being opened or the game control device 54 is being removed is made in Step H246. And based on the glass frame open error flag and the frame open break error flag set in step H258. These determinations are determined to be occurring if the flag is set, and not occurring if the flag is cleared.
In addition, for example, whether or not the illegal act is occurring is determined by the error monitoring process of the game control device 54, and it is determined that the illegal action has occurred because the magnet command is determined to be illegal, vibration is illegal, and radio wave is illegal. Determined.
Whether the enclosing ball is being polished is determined based on whether the polishing flag is set in a polishing apparatus control process described later.

In step H285, after setting the firing permission signal off data, the process returns. When the firing permission signal off data is set, the firing control circuit 236 prohibits the operation of the firing solenoid 173, and the ball cannot be fired (launch non-permitted state). In this firing disallowed state, even if there is a proper firing operation (the touch sensor 174 is turned on and the firing volume 171 is operated), the firing solenoid 173 is not activated and the ball is not fired.
On the other hand, in step H284, after setting the firing permission signal ON data, the process returns. When the firing permission signal ON data is set, the firing control circuit 236 is permitted to actuate the firing solenoid 173 to enter a state where the ball can be fired (launching permitted state).

According to the firing permission signal editing process described above, if the card unit 15 is not connected because the card unit 15 is not connected (or the power of the card unit 15 is not turned on) or the like, it is unconditionally fired. It becomes a disallowed state. After the pachinko machine 1 is powered on and the forced firing time has passed, each of the conditions in steps H274 to H283 (the number of balls held is zero, during settlement, during break, or an error in the number of encapsulated balls occurs. Any one of the following: middle, open glass frame, open front frame, or removal of game control device 54, during fraudulent activity, during polishing flag set) The ball is not allowed to fire. However, during the period from when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on until the forced firing time elapses, a ball can be fired by the processing of steps H273 and H284 even if any of the conditions of steps H274 to H283 is satisfied. Launch allowed. This is to perform the aforementioned forced firing.
In addition, during counting (while moving from the number of holding balls to the number of counting balls), it may be controlled not to permit the firing of the encapsulated ball.

[Number of balls to be added]
Next, the number-of-balls adding process H79 in the timer interrupt process will be described with reference to FIG.
When this routine is started, it is first determined in step H291 whether or not the value of the prize ball number area is “0”. This is because the prize ball number data in the prize ball number area is stored after receiving the prize ball command from the game control device 54, and the value in the prize ball number area is not “0” before clearing. And determine based on that. If the value of the prize ball number area is not “0” in step H291, the process proceeds to step H292. If the value of the ball number area is “0”, there is no prize ball to be added to the number of possessed balls, and the routine ends. And return.
In step H292, the current number of prize balls acquired in response to the prize ball command from the game control device 54 is added to the number of balls held. That is, the number of prize balls acquired this time is added to the current number of balls, and the addition result is updated and registered as a new number of balls. The process of step H292 constitutes a prize award process for increasing the number of balls (game value) according to the game result of the game balls launched into the game area.

Next, in step H293, the “updated number of balls + awarded number of balls” is updated to the current updated number of balls. This is because every time there is a prize ball associated with winning a prize, it is necessary to add the number of prize balls to the updated number of possessed balls, so the value of the updated number of possessed balls is added and updated by “the number of prize balls”.
Next, in step H294, the number-of-balls-displaying light counter is updated (incremented) by “+1”, and in step H295, “number of winning balls” is saved in the display-based updated number-of-balls storage area corresponding to the light counter. This is because the change in the number of balls needs to be displayed on the number-of-balls display 40 when there is a prize ball associated with winning, so the value of the number-of-ball display light counter is updated (incremented) by “+1”. ), And store the “number of winning balls” associated with winning a prize in the display updated number-of-balls storage area corresponding to the advanced light counter, and add the stored “number of winning balls” to the number of holding balls for display. This is the number of updated holding balls for display.
That is, the amount of change for displaying the number of balls to be displayed on the number-of-balls display 40 for each change event is stored in the display updated number of balls to be stored. For example, the number of possessed balls increases accordingly, so that the “number of award balls” is stored in the display updated possessed ball number storage area. As a result, the “number of winning balls” is added to the number of balls held, and the display on the ball holding number display 40 is updated.
The data (number of winning balls) to be added to the number of holding balls displayed on the holding ball number display 40 is stored in the ring buffer format area in the order of winning. The size of the storage area in the ring buffer format is set to a size corresponding to the maximum number of prize balls per unit time (for example, the number of prize balls per unit time in the big hit round). For example, the size is set to about 32 bytes.

  Next, in step H296, it is determined whether the number of balls updated in step H292 is equal to or greater than the upper limit value (for example, 250,000), and if it is equal to or greater than the upper limit value, it is determined in step H297. The number upper limit (250,000) is updated and registered as a new number of balls, and the process proceeds to step H298. If the number is not greater than the upper limit value, the process proceeds to step H298 without executing step H297.

Proceeding to step H298, the current number of prize balls acquired in response to the prize ball command from the game control device 54 is added to the current number of unoutput prize balls, and the result of the addition is the number of new prize balls not yet output. Are updated and registered, and the process proceeds to Step H299. The number of non-output prize balls means the number of prize balls not output to the hall computer 86 as a prize ball signal. In step H299, it is determined whether the number of unoutput prize balls updated in step H298 is equal to or larger than a predetermined number (for example, 10) corresponding to one prize ball signal. If not, the process proceeds to Step H303.
In step H300, the result of subtracting 10 from the current number of non-output prize balls is updated and registered as a new number of non-output prize balls, and the process advances to step H301. In step H301, it is determined whether the number of prize ball signals output is less than an upper limit value (for example, 255 times). If less than the upper limit value, the process proceeds to step H302, and if not less than the upper limit value, the process returns to step H299. In step H301, the number of prize ball signals output is increased by one, and the process returns to step H299.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step H299 that the number of unoutput prize balls is not equal to or greater than a predetermined number (for example, 10) corresponding to one prize ball signal and the process proceeds to step H303, a prize ball area in step H303. Clear “0” and return. This prepares for the storage of the number of next prize balls.

  According to the number-of-balls adding process, the number of balls held and the number of balls for display are increased by the number of prize balls as long as the number of balls is not equal to or greater than the upper limit value of the number of balls by the processing of steps H292 to H296. Further, according to the processing of steps H298 to H301, the number of prize ball signal outputs is 1 every time a predetermined number (for example, 10) of prize balls is acquired until the number of prize ball signals reaches the upper limit. Increase the number of times. The number of balls for display is data in a storage area of the RAM 233 for storing the number of balls to be displayed on the ball number display 40.

[Ball feed control processing]
Next, the ball feed control process H81 in the timer interrupt process will be described with reference to FIG.
When this routine is started, it is first determined in step H311 whether or not the value of the forced firing timer at power-on is not zero. If not (ie, if the forced firing time has not elapsed), step H318 is determined. If it is zero, the process proceeds to Step H312. In step H312, it is determined whether the value of the ball feed control timer is zero. If it is zero, the process proceeds to step H313, and if not, the process proceeds to step H315.

  When the process proceeds to step H313, it is determined whether or not the game ball is being launched. If it is being launched, the process proceeds to step H314, and if not, the process proceeds to step H318. Here, the determination as to whether or not the launch is in progress is as long as launch is permitted (that is, the launch permit state in which the above-described launch permit signal on data is set) and the touch sensor 174 is turned on. By determining that it is firing. That is, even if firing is permitted, if the touch sensor 174 is not turned on (if the player has not touched the firing operation handle 11), it is not determined that firing is being performed, and even if the touch sensor 174 is turned on, firing is permitted. If not, it is not determined to be firing. Thereby, it is accurately determined that the game ball is actually being fired.

In Step H314, a prescribed initial value (a value corresponding to the firing interval time) is set as the value of the ball feed control timer, and the process proceeds to Step H315. When the process proceeds to Step H315, an update process for decreasing the value of the ball feed control timer by one cycle of the timer interruption period is performed, and the process proceeds to Step H316. In step H316, it is determined whether or not the value of the ball feed control timer matches the set value set as the ball feed on timing. If they match, the ball feed solenoid 172 is judged in step H317 as the ball feed on timing. The ball feed solenoid 172 is actuated by setting the ON data for the ball feed, and if not coincident, it is determined that it is not the ball feed on timing, and the process proceeds to step H318 where the off data for the ball feed solenoid 172 is set and the ball feed solenoid 172 is stopped.
Note that the initial value of the ball feed control timer set in step H314 is set so that the ball firing frequency (number of shots per time) is a predetermined value or less.

  According to the above ball feed control process, the ball feed solenoid 172 is maintained in a stopped state during a period from when the power is turned on until the forced firing time elapses. This is because the ball remaining at the tip of the tip at the time of a power failure is processed by the above-mentioned forced launch, so that the ball is not newly sent to the tip (launch position) during the forced launch period. Then, when the forced firing period ends and launching, the ball feed control timer value is set to the initial value in step H314 every time the ball feed control timer value becomes zero as long as launching continues. Is repeated, and every time the value of the ball feed control timer reaches the set value (that is, every time the ball feed on timing is reached), the ball feed solenoid 172 is actuated by the processing of step H317 and one ball is Sent to the tip (launch position).

[Checkout / break control processing]
Next, the settlement / rest control process H82 in the timer interrupt process will be described with reference to FIG.
When this routine is started, first, a settlement control process (details will be described later) is performed in step H321, then a break control process (details will be described later) is executed in step H322, and then the process returns.

[Settlement control processing]
Next, the settlement control process in the settlement / rest control process will be described with reference to FIG.
When this routine is started, first, at step H331, branching is performed according to the adjustment control process number. In this case, if the settlement control process number is 1, the settlement start monitoring process (described in detail later) in step H332 is performed. If the settlement control process number is 2, the settlement write completion monitoring process (described in detail later) is performed in step H333. If the control process number is 3, a payment completion monitoring process (details will be described later) is executed in step H334, and then the process returns. The initial value of the settlement control process number is set to 1, for example, in step H10 of the main process.
The settlement control process number may be 1, 2, 3,..., But may be 0, 1, 2,... The process of setting 1 as the initial value can be omitted.

[Break control process]
Next, the break control process H322 in the settlement / break control process will be described with reference to FIG.
When this routine is started, first, branching by the break control process number is performed in step H341. In this case, if the break control process number is 1, the break start monitoring process (described later in detail) in step H342 is performed, and if the break control process number is 2, the break start ACK monitoring process (described in detail later) is performed in step H343. If the process number is 3, a break end monitoring process (described later in detail) is executed in step H344, and then the process returns. The initial value of the break control process number is set to 1, for example, in step H10 of the main process.
The break control process number may be 1, 2, 3,..., But may be 0, 1, 2,..., And if this is done, when the RAM 233 area is cleared The process of setting 1 as the initial value can be omitted.

[Checkout start monitoring process]
Next, the settlement start monitoring process H332 in the settlement control process will be described with reference to FIG.
When this routine is started, first, in steps H351 to H356, a process is performed to determine whether or not a condition that can be settled (settlement possible condition) is satisfied. After clearing the payable flag in H358, the process proceeds to step H359. When all the payable conditions are satisfied, the payable flag is set in step H357 and then the process proceeds to step H359. In other words, the payable flag is set when it is possible to pay.

  Here, there are the following six conditions in the accountable conditions. That is, the break process is not being performed (determined in step H351), the number of balls is not being counted (the count switch on timer is not zero: determined in step H352), no error has occurred (determined in step H353), The number of balls on the board is zero and there is no ball on the board (determined in step H354), the touch sensor 174 is not turned on (determined in step H355), and the customer waiting demonstration is being carried out (determined in step H356). is there. Here, whether or not the break process is being performed may be determined in the same manner as in step H276 described above, for example. Further, whether or not an error is occurring may be determined in the same manner as in Step H271 and Steps H277 to H282 described above, for example.

Next, proceeding to step H359, it is determined whether or not a settlement instruction command has been received. This is to determine whether or not a payment instruction command has been received from the card unit 15. In the card unit 15, when the return button 304 on the screen of the message / operation area unit 306 of the operation display device 7 is pressed when the settlement process is not being performed, a settlement instruction command is sent to the game control apparatus 54 if the settlement is possible. Will be sent (see FIG. 67). Here, the settlement instruction command is transmitted by the first communication method (communication method 1) which is communication in plain text.
If the payment instruction command is received in step H359, the process proceeds to step H360, and if the payment instruction command is not received, the process returns.
In step H360, it is determined whether or not the payable flag is on (that is, whether it is set). If it is on, the flow proceeds to step H361, and the processing after step H361 is executed. On the other hand, if the payable flag is not on, the process returns.

When the process proceeds to step H361 and subsequent steps, first, in step H361, “the number of balls held + the number of balls counted” is set as the total number of balls held. This is because the number of possessed balls and the number of counted balls acquired by the player are all counted to obtain a total number of possessed balls, and the account is automatically settled based on the settlement instruction command. In other words, when the return button 304 is pressed to request the return of the game card, it is necessary to automatically perform payment, so the player's number of balls and the number of counted balls are all counted as the total number of balls, This is because the total number of balls held is transmitted to the card unit 15.
Next, the process proceeds to step H362, and the total number-of-balls command is transmitted to the card unit 15. This is a command for informing the card unit 15 of the total number of balls from the payout control device 230 at the time of payment, and the total number of balls (number of balls held + counted balls) is sent to the card unit 15 at the time of payment. . The card unit 15 performs a settlement process based on the total number of balls.
Next, in step H363, the total number of balls is set as the number of balls for display. This is because the total number of balls is displayed on the number-of-balls display 40 until settlement is completed. The number of balls for display is stored in a storage area of the RAM 233 for storing the number of balls to be displayed on the ball number display 40.

  Next, in step H364, the number of balls held is cleared to “0”. This is sent from the gaming machine (here, the payout control device 230) to the card unit 15 as a total number of balls command obtained by adding the number of balls held and the number of balls counted, and the number of balls held as the above-mentioned total number of balls on the gaming machine side. Is stored, so there is no problem even if the number of balls held is cleared. On the card unit 15 side, the number of balls held is recorded on the game card, but on the gaming machine side, the total number of balls held and the number of counted balls is totaled in the storage area of the RAM 233 until the settlement process is completed. It will be stored as the number of balls. Even if there is a trouble on the card unit 15 side, if the data on the total number of balls is stored in the storage area of the RAM 233 as the total number of balls on the gaming machine side, This is because trouble can be dealt with.

Next, in step H365, the number of counted balls is cleared to “0”. This is because the gaming machine (here, the payout control device 230) calculates the total number of balls held by the player, including the number of counted balls, with “the number of held balls + the number of counted balls” as the total number of held balls, It is sent to the card unit 15 as a total number of balls command, and the game machine stores the number of balls as the total number of balls described above, so it is safe to clear the counted number of balls. It is.
Next, in step H366, the timer initial value (for example, 2 seconds) of the settlement writing completion monitoring timer is set. The settlement write completion monitoring timer is a timer for setting a timeout in the response from the card unit 15. Next, in step H367, the settlement write completion monitoring process number is set in the settlement control process number, and then the process returns. Therefore, in the settlement control process, the next time, the routine proceeds to the settlement write completion monitoring process routine.

  According to the checkout start monitoring process described above, a checkout possible flag is set when all the checkout possible conditions are satisfied, and when the return button 304 on the screen of the operation display device 7 is pressed in this state, the checkout is performed. Starts. On the other hand, if even one of the conditions for payment adjustment is not satisfied, the payment adjustment flag is cleared, and payment is not started even if the return button 304 is turned on in this state. Here, the message / operation area unit 306 (or the display device 41 may be included) of the operation display device 7 may be displayed to indicate that payment is not possible. It should be noted that since the allowance for payment adjustment is set as described above, it is possible to prevent problems such as the control processing not functioning properly due to an inadvertent operation for starting the adjustment.

[Checkout completion monitoring process]
Next, the settlement write completion monitoring process H333 in the settlement control process will be described with reference to FIG.
When this routine is started, first, the settlement write completion monitoring timer is updated (decremented) by “−1” in step H371, and it is determined whether or not the timer has become “0” in step H372. If the settlement write completion monitoring timer is not “0”, the process proceeds to step H373, and it is determined whether settlement settlement completion is received from the card unit 15. The receipt of the payment writing completion is determined based on whether, for example, a payment writing completion command is received from the card unit 15. If payment completion is not received from the card unit 15, the process returns and the routine is repeated. If it is determined in step H373 that the payment writing completion has been received from the card unit 15, the process goes to step H374 to clear the total number of balls held to “0”. This is because the card unit 15 side has completed the payment writing (that is, the record of all the total number of balls held in the game card) and the record is held in the game card, so the total number of balls held is cleared to “0”. This is because there is no problem.
Next, in step H375, the settlement end monitoring process number is set in the settlement control process number, and the process returns. Therefore, in the settlement control process, the next time, the routine proceeds to the settlement completion monitoring process routine.

On the other hand, if the settlement write completion monitoring timer is “0” in step H372, the settlement write completion cannot be received from the card unit 15 within the predetermined time counted by the settlement write completion monitoring timer. Therefore, the process branches to step H376 to set the settlement write failure flag. Next, in step H377, the total number of balls is made the number of balls for display. Since it is presumed that the card unit 15 has failed to record all the total number of balls on the game card, the total number of balls is temporarily returned to the number of balls for display.
However, at this time, the number of balls held is not the official number of balls, but is displayed on the number-of-balls display 40 as the number of balls held for proof of appearance. After that, the clerk confirms the settlement (inspection and confirmation of each part including the card unit 15 and the game card) and once cancels the settlement process, the total number of balls is officially returned as the number of balls held, It is made to display on the number-of-balls display 40.

Next, in step H378, the command at the time of the settlement writing failure is transmitted to the game control device 54 (main board). The game control device 54 that has received the command at the time of settlement write failure sends the same command to the effect control device 53, and the effect control device 53 receives the command at the time of account write failure and the display device 41 has failed to settle. Will be controlled.
Next, in step H379, the settlement start monitoring process number is set in the settlement control process number, and the process returns. Therefore, in the settlement control process, the next time, the routine proceeds to the settlement start monitoring process routine.

[Checkout completion monitoring process]
Next, the settlement completion monitoring process H334 in the settlement control process will be described with reference to FIG.
When this routine is started, it is first determined in step H381 whether or not a card removal command from the card unit 15 has been received. If received, the process returns after executing steps H382 to H383, and if not received, step H382. Return without executing the following. The card extraction command is a command transmitted from the card unit 15 when a game card is extracted. This payment card sampling command is transmitted by the first communication method (communication method 1) which is communication in plain text.

In step H382, an initial value is set in the number-of-balls display timer, and in step H383, a settlement start monitoring process number is set as a settlement control process number.
Here, the number-of-balls display timer has a configuration in which the blinking display of the number of balls held on the number-of-balls display 40 is terminated when the time is up (see step H534 in FIG. 59 described later). . The initial value is set in the number-of-balls display timer because the number of balls held in the LED of the number-of-balls display 40 is settled for a short time after the game card is ejected from the card unit 15 (the initial value of the timer). This is to prepare for blinking the number.

[Break start monitoring process]
Next, the break start monitoring process H342 in the break control process will be described with reference to FIG.
When this routine is started, first, in steps H391 to H396, a process is performed to determine whether a breakable condition (break permission condition) is satisfied. If even one break permission condition is not satisfied, step H398 is performed. After the break switch valid flag is cleared at step H399, the process proceeds to step H399. When all the break permission conditions are satisfied, the break switch valid flag is set at step H397, and then the process proceeds to step H399. That is, when the break is permitted, the break switch valid flag is set. When the break switch valid flag is set, a control for turning on the LED built in the break switch 312 is executed by a process not shown in the figure, and the player is notified that the break is possible. Conversely, when the break switch valid flag is cleared, the LED built in the break switch 312 is turned off, and the player is notified that the break is impossible.

  Here, the break permission conditions include the following six conditions. That is, the checkout process is not in progress (determined in step H391), no error has occurred (determined in step H392), the number of board balls is zero and there is no ball on the board (determined in step H393), and the touch sensor 174 is on. The number of balls held (one or more) (determined in step H395), and a customer waiting demonstration (determined in step H396). Here, the determination as to whether or not the settlement process is being performed may be performed, for example, in the same manner as in Step H275 described above. Further, whether or not an error is occurring may be determined in the same manner as in Step H271 and Steps H277 to H282 described above, for example.

In step H399, it is determined whether or not the break switch 312 is turned on. If the break switch 312 is turned on, the process proceeds to step H400, and if it is not turned on, the process returns. In step H400, it is determined whether or not the above-mentioned break switch valid flag is on (that is, whether or not it is set). If it is on, the process proceeds to step H401 to start a break, and if not, the process proceeds to step H404. In step H404, a break operation invalid command is transmitted to the game control device 54 (main board), and then the process returns. The game control device 54 that has received the break operation invalid command sends the command to the effect control device 53, and the effect control device 53 receives the break operation invalid command and displays, for example, the display device 41 indicating that the break is impossible. Will do.
It should be noted that the break operation invalid command includes different data for each reason why the break is impossible (which condition is not satisfied among the conditions of steps H391 to H396), and this command is included in the game control device 54 (main board). It is good also as a structure which the presentation control apparatus 53 received via via also displays on the display apparatus 41 the reason why the rest is impossible.

  On the other hand, when the process proceeds to step H401, the break switch valid flag is cleared, then a break request command is transmitted to the card unit 15 to start the break at step H402, and then the break control processing number is set to 2 (break start at step H403). ACK monitoring process number) is set, and then the process returns. Here, the break request command is transmitted by the first communication method (communication method 1) which is communication in plain text.

  According to the break start monitoring process described above, when all the break permission conditions are satisfied, the break switch valid flag is set. When the break switch 312 is turned on in this state, the process for starting the break ( Steps H402 and H403) are executed. If even one break permission condition is not satisfied, the break switch valid flag is cleared, and even if the break switch 312 is turned on in this state, the process for starting the break is not executed, and the display device 41 cannot take a break. Is displayed.

  Note that, since the break permission condition is set as described above, it is possible to prevent problems such as the control process not functioning properly due to an inadvertent operation to start a break. In particular, according to the condition of step H395, since there is no number of balls, a break cannot be started. There is. Because, even if another player inserts a game card into the resting table, it is returned and cannot be used, so this rest function ensures that the pachinko machine can not be used by others However, in this example, such a configuration is not possible when there is no number of balls. Also, in this example, if there is a malicious player who has been taking a break for a long time (or a player who has forgotten to have taken a break and returned home), use a staff card to force a break It has a configuration that can be canceled, and the use of such a malicious break can be prevented at any time by the store clerk. Further, the condition of step H395 may be based on whether or not the number of held balls is equal to or more than a specified number, and by doing so, it is possible to prevent securing a pachinko machine with a small number of held balls.

[Break start ACK monitoring process]
Next, the break start ACK monitoring process H343 in the break control process will be described with reference to FIG.
When this routine is started, it is first determined in step H411 whether an error has occurred as in steps H353 and H392 described above. If an error has occurred, the process proceeds to step H416, and if no error has occurred, the process proceeds to step H412. In step H412, it is determined whether or not a break start ACK reception timeout from the card unit 15 is reached. For example, the elapsed time from the time when the break request command is transmitted in step H402 described above is measured by a process not shown in the figure, and the break start ACK (response signal to the break request command) from the card unit 15 is not received. If this elapsed time exceeds the specified time, it is determined in step H412 that a break start ACK reception timeout has occurred.

  Proceeding to step H413, it is determined whether the break start ACK has been received from the card unit 15, and if received, the process returns after executing steps H414 and H415 in sequence, and if not received, the process returns without executing step H414 and the subsequent steps. To do. In step H414, a break start command is transmitted to the game control device 54 (main board), and in step H415, 3 (the number of the break end monitoring process) is set as the break control process number. The game control device 54 that has received the break start command sends the command to the effect control device 53, and the effect control device 53 executes control for displaying on the display device 41, for example, “It is during a break”. When receiving the break start ACK, the payout control device 230 performs control to emit light by turning on a light emitting source such as an LED in which the operation button portion of the break switch 312 is built, and the break switch 312 also emits a break. You may make it alert | report that it is in.

  On the other hand, when proceeding to Step H416, a break operation cancel command is transmitted to the card unit 15, then a break operation cancel command is transmitted to the game control device 54 (main board) in Step H417, and a break control processing number is transmitted in the next Step H418. Is set to 1 (the number of the break start monitoring process), and then the process returns. Here, the break operation cancellation command to the card unit 15 is transmitted by the first communication method (communication method 1) which is communication in plain text. Further, the card unit 15 that has received the break operation cancellation command is configured to stop the process for the break. Similarly, the game control device 54 that has received the break operation cancellation command sends the same command to the effect control device 53, and the effect control device 53 is configured to stop the processing for the break.

[Break end monitoring process]
Next, the break end monitoring process H344 in the break control process will be described with reference to FIG.
When this routine is started, first, in step S421, it is determined whether or not a break forced release command from the card unit 15 has been received. If received, the process proceeds to step H426, and if not received, the process proceeds to step H422. The break forced release command is transmitted by the communication method 1 when the staff card is inserted into the card unit 15 as described above.

  Proceeding to step H422, it is determined whether a break release command has been received from the card unit 15, and if received, the process returns after executing steps H423 to H425 in sequence, and if not received, the process returns without executing steps H423 and after. To do. The break release command is issued when the game card used before the break starts is inserted into the card unit 15, and the payout control device from the card unit 15 in the first communication method (communication method 1) that is communication in plain text. This is a command transmitted to 230.

In step H423, a break release ACK (response signal to the break release command) is transmitted to the card unit 15 by the communication method 1. In step H424, a break release command is transmitted to the game control device 54 (main board). In step H425, a break control is performed. Set 1 (the number of the break start monitoring process) as the process number, and then return. The game control device 54 (main board) that has received the break release command sends the command to the effect control device 53, and the effect control device 53 ends the processing for the break.
On the other hand, when proceeding to Step H426, a break forced release ACK (response signal to the break forced release command) is transmitted to the card unit 15 by the communication method 1, and then a forced settlement request flag is set at Step H427, and then Step H425 is performed. Returns after execution.
Although the forced settlement request flag is not shown in the figure, when the player does not return within the prescribed time for the break, the break is forcibly canceled and used in a process for performing the forced settlement.

[Card unit reception analysis processing]
Next, the card unit reception analysis process H83 in the timer interrupt process will be described with reference to FIG.
When this routine is started, the card unit reception analysis process 1 (step H431) and the card unit reception analysis process 2 (step H432) are sequentially executed, and then the process returns.
The card unit reception analysis process 1 is an analysis process of information transmitted from the card unit 15 in the communication method 1, and the card unit reception analysis process 2 is an analysis process of information transmitted from the card unit 15 in the communication method 2. is there.

[Card unit reception analysis process 1]
Next, the card unit reception analysis process 1H431 will be described with reference to FIG.
When this routine is started, it is first determined in step H441 whether there is data in the serial reception buffer (reception buffer for performing serial communication with the card unit 15), and if there is, the process proceeds to step H442, and if not, the process returns. To do. Proceeding to step H442, the data in the serial reception buffer is read as received data. Next, in step H443, it is determined whether the received data is a command for rent / number of used balls. If the command is a command, the process proceeds to step H449, and if it is not a command for the number of rented balls / number of used balls, the process proceeds to step H444.

The number of rented balls / number of used balls command is a command transmitted from the card unit 15 when the ball lending button 303 is pressed by a control process (not shown) of the card unit 15. The card unit 15 is configured to perform a process of reducing and updating the ball lending number or the number of stored balls recorded on the game card by a value corresponding to the transmitted number of rented balls / used number of stored balls command (ball lending information). It has become.
In step H449, an addition process for adding the number corresponding to the number of lent balls / number of used balls command to the number of held balls is executed, and then the process returns. The addition processing of this step H449 corresponds to the fact that the data of the ball lending number or the number of stored balls (valuable value information) recorded on the game card is reduced and updated in the card unit 15, and the pachinko machine 1 (payout control device) 230), a ball lending addition process for increasing the number of balls held (game value) (the number of balls held stored in the RAM 233) is configured. In the case of a pachinko machine that is not an enclosed ball type, this ball lending addition process corresponds to a ball lending payout process in which game balls as a lending ball are discharged to the upper plate.

If it progresses to step H444, it will be determined whether the said received data are a break start ACK, If it is a break start ACK, it will progress to step H450, and if it is not a break start ACK, it will progress to step H445. In step H450, a break start ACK received flag is set, and then the process returns. The break start ACK received flag is used in the determination in step H413 described above.
In step H445, it is determined whether the received data is a break forced release command. If the received data is a break forced release command, the flow advances to step H451, and if not, the flow advances to step H446. In step H451, a break forced release command received flag is set, and then the process returns. The break compulsory release command received flag is used in the determination in step H421 described above.

In step H446, it is determined whether the received data is a break release command. If the received data is a break release command, the flow advances to step H452, and if not, the flow advances to step H447. In step H452, a break release command received flag is set, and then the process returns. The break release command received flag is used in the determination in step H422 described above.
In step H447, it is determined whether the received data is a payment write completion ACK. If the payment data is a payment write completion ACK, the flow advances to step H453. If not, the flow advances to step H448. In step H453, the settlement writing completion ACK received flag is set, and then the process returns. The settlement write completion ACK received flag is used in the determination in step H373 described above.
In step H448, it is determined whether the received data is a payment card removal command. If it is a payment card removal command, the flow advances to step H454, and if it is not a payment card removal command, the process returns. In step H454, the payment card sampling command received flag is set, and then the process returns. The payment card removal command received flag is used in the determination in step H381 described above.

[Card unit reception analysis process 2]
Next, the card unit reception analysis process 2H432 will be described with reference to FIG.
When this routine is started, it is first determined in step H461 whether there is data in the serial reception buffer (reception buffer for performing serial communication with the card unit 15), and if there is, the process proceeds to step H462. Return.
In step H462, the data in the serial reception buffer is read as received data. In step H463, it is determined whether the received data is a member card ID. If it is a member card ID, the process proceeds to step H467. Otherwise, the process proceeds to step H464.
In step H464, it is determined whether the received data is a visitor card ID. If it is a visitor card ID, the process proceeds to step H467, and if it is not a visitor card ID, the process proceeds to step H465.
In step H465, it is determined whether the received data is a staff (break release) card ID. If the received data is a staff card ID, the process proceeds to step H467. If not, the process proceeds to step H466.

In step H467, a card IDACK is transmitted to the card unit 15, and then the process returns. The transmission of the card IDACK to the card unit 15 is performed by the second communication method (communication method 2) that can be encrypted by the payout control device 230 and decrypted by the card unit 15 side.
On the other hand, when the process proceeds to step H466, it is determined whether the received data is a gaming machine IDACK (response signal from the card unit 15 with respect to the transmission of the gaming machine ID). If the gaming machine IDACK, the process proceeds to step H468, where the gaming machine IDACK Otherwise return. In step H468, a gaming machine IDACK received flag is set, and then the process returns. Although not shown, the gaming machine IDACK is transmitted immediately after receiving the gaming machine ID, for example.

[Regular command transmission processing]
Next, the periodic command transmission process H84 in the timer interrupt process will be described with reference to FIG.
When this routine is started, it is first determined in step H471 whether the periodic transmission control timer is "0". This is because the payout control device 230 is connected to the card unit 15 via the first card unit connection terminal plate 52A, and various information (for example, holding ball) in the enclosed ball game is sent from the payout control device 230 to the card unit 15. Number, and various information including the number of counting balls) are sent at predetermined intervals (for example, 400 ms), and the card unit 15 manages the control of the operation display device 7 based on various information from the payout control device 230. Since the operation area 306 is configured to display the player's number of balls (game value) and the number of counted balls, a periodic transmission control timer is used to count the predetermined interval (for example, 400 ms). It is what you are doing.
If the periodic transmission control timer is “0”, the process proceeds to step H472 to set a timer initial value (for example, 400 ms) in the periodic transmission control timer, and in subsequent step H473, based on the number of balls held, Set and send the ball count command. Thereby, the number-of-balls command is transmitted to the card unit 15. The card unit 15 can manage the control of the operation display device 7 based on the number-of-balls command from the payout control device 230 and display the number of balls held by the player in the message / operation area 306.

Next, in step H474, based on the number of balls held, a ball number command to the game control device 54 (main board) is set and transmitted. Thereby, the number-of-balls command is transmitted to the game control device 54. The game control device 54 that has received the number-of-balls command sends the command to the effect control device 53, and the effect control device 53 controls the decoration ball display device 250 based on the number-of-balls command and uses a number of LEDs. The decoration display of the number of balls will be performed.
Next, in step H475, a counting ball number command to the card unit 15 is set and transmitted based on the counting ball number. Thereby, the counting ball number command is transmitted to the card unit 15. The card unit 15 manages the control of the operation display device 7 based on the counting ball number command from the payout control device 230 and displays the player's counting ball number in the message / operation area 306.

Next, in step H476, a counting ball number command to the game control device 54 (main board) is set and transmitted based on the counting ball number. Thereby, the counting ball number command is transmitted to the game control device 54. Receiving the counted ball number command, the game control device 54 sends the command to the effect control device 53, and the effect control device 53 performs decoration control of the decorative ball display device 250 based on the counted ball number command and uses a plurality of LEDs. The decorative display of the number of counted balls is performed.
Next, in step H477, a gaming machine information command to the card unit 15 is set based on various information and transmitted. Thereby, a gaming machine information command is transmitted to the card unit 15. The card unit 15 manages the control of the operation display device 7 based on the gaming machine information command from the payout control device 230, displays various information on the gaming machine (pachinko machine 1) in the message / operation area unit 306, Information is transmitted to the hall computer 86. After step H477, the process returns.

On the other hand, if the periodic transmission control timer is not “0” in step H471, the process branches to step H478, updates the periodic transmission control timer by (−1), and returns. Then, the routine is repeated, and if YES is determined in step H471, the processes in steps H472 to H477 are executed.
As described above, various information (for example, various information including the number of balls held and the number of counting balls) in the enclosed ball game from the payout control device 230 to the card unit 15 or the game control device 54 (main board) is a periodic transmission control timer. Is sent at predetermined intervals (for example, 400 ms), and the number of players' balls (game value) and the count are stored in the message / operation area 306 of the operation display device 7 under the control of the card unit 15 as described above. The decoration ball display device 250 is decorated under the control of the effect control device 53 based on the number of balls displayed or a command via the game control device 54.

[External information editing process (withdrawal)]
Next, the external information editing process H85 in the timer interrupt process will be described with reference to FIG.
When this routine is started, gaming machine ID signal editing processing (step H481), security signal editing processing (step H482), frame opening signal editing processing (step H483), break signal editing processing (step H484), out signal editing Processing (step H485) and prize ball number signal editing processing (step H486) are sequentially executed, and then the process returns.
Here, step H481 is a process for outputting a gaming machine ID signal to the card unit 15 (or further to the hall computer 86). Steps H482 to H486 are processes for outputting other various signals to the test apparatus via the hall computer 86 or the test firing test terminal 234. Note that the same processing is performed in the game control device 54 for steps H481 and 482.

[Game machine ID signal editing process (payout)]
Next, the gaming machine ID signal editing process H481 in the external information editing process will be described with reference to FIG.
When this routine is started, it is determined in step H491 whether the serial communication with the card unit 15 (or further, the hall computer 86) is in progress. If serial communication is in progress, the process returns. This is to check whether serial communication is being executed between the payout control device 230 and the transmission destination of the gaming machine ID (card unit 15). If serial communication is in progress, the gaming machine ID cannot be output this time, so the routine ends and the process returns.
On the other hand, if the serial communication is not in progress, the process proceeds to step H492 to check whether the output request flag of the gaming machine ID signal is set.

Here, the output request flag of the gaming machine ID signal is a signal indicating the state of the pachinko machine 1 as described below (signal output from the payout control device 230 to an external device such as the card unit 15 or the hall computer 86). Corresponding to time, they are set independently.
"Security signal when power is turned on" (Signal output when power is turned on)
“Frame open signal” (signal output when the glass frame or front frame is opened)
This is set when a frame opening (error) checked by the payout control device 230 itself occurs.
The frame opening signal here may include a detection signal when the night monitoring switch 126 detects the removal of the game control device 54.
"Big hit 1 signal" (Signal output when Special Figure 1 hits big)
This is set when the information of the jackpot state transmitted from the game control device 54 is received.
Here, the output request flag of the gaming machine ID signal is a flag that is transmitted only once at the start of the period such as the “frame open signal” or “big hit 1 signal” (that is, during the period) (There is no need to repeat the machine ID transmission all the time). Further, the flag is not limited to the start of the period, and a flag may be set when the game machine is closed so that, for example, the gaming machine ID is transmitted when the frame opening is completed.
In addition, when two or more are simultaneously established, priority is provided and it respond | corresponds one by one. In this case, all the request flags are not cleared at once.

When it is checked in step H492 whether the output request flag of the gaming machine ID signal is set, if there is an output request flag based on the check result, the process proceeds to step H493 and the output request flag of the gaming machine ID signal is cleared. To do. This is because the output request flag of the gaming machine ID signal has already been set and processing for outputting the gaming machine ID can be performed (in step H494), so the output request flag is cleared. Note that the output request flag of the gaming machine ID signal is set in each process at the timing at which the gaming machine ID is to be output to the external device (game machine ID output trigger). The game machine ID is output to the outside because, for example, the game control device 54 may be modified or exchanged and an illegal game may be performed. Therefore, it is determined whether or not the game machine ID is a legitimate game machine ID. This is for confirmation by the unit 15 or the external management device 91). Accordingly, the gaming machine ID is output at a timing such as when the power is turned on, when the frame is released (when the game control device 54 is removed), or when a big hit occurs.
Next, after performing a gaming machine ID output process (described later) in step H494, the process returns. As a result, the gaming machine ID is output and written to the serial transmission buffer. On the other hand, if there is no output request flag in step H492, steps H493 and H494 are jumped and the process returns. Therefore, in this case, the gaming machine ID is not output. The serial transmission buffer is a transmission buffer in a serial communication circuit provided in an IC chip that constitutes the CPU 231.
Further, as an output opportunity of the gaming machine ID, for example, as described above, there is a time when the power is turned on, a time when the frame is released (the time when the gaming control device 54 is removed, and so on). The data length of the signal for outputting the gaming machine ID varies depending on the time. For example, the contents of the gaming machine ID are transmitted including all codes (chip code, manufacturer code, and product code) when the power is turned on, but only the chip code is transmitted when the frame is opened and when the jackpot is hit. . Note that the game machine IDs of both the game control device 54 and the payout control device 230 may be output when the power is turned on, and only the game machine ID of the game control device 54 may be output when the frame is opened and when the big hit. This is because there is a possibility that the game control device 54 is fraudulent during business, but there is a low possibility that the payout control device 230 is fraudulent.
Further, the output destination of the gaming machine ID is basically the card unit 15, but it may be the hall computer 86 (however, different from the embodiment, it is configured to be connected to the hall computer 86).

[Game machine ID output processing]
Next, a gaming machine ID output process H494 in the gaming machine ID signal editing process will be described with reference to FIG.
When this routine is started, a start code is written in the serial transmission buffer in step H501. The start code is a code for causing the receiving card unit 15 or the like to specify that serial communication is started. Next, in step H502, the chip identification code of the main control chip is written into the serial transmission buffer.
The main control chip is the CPU 111 of the game control device 54 (main board). The “XX identification code” is a code indicating which information (code) is to be transmitted from now on, and is not unique to each object but a common code. After writing this code, the corresponding unique information is written.

Next, in step H503, the chip code (chip ID) of the main control chip is read and written in the serial transmission buffer. This reads out the gaming machine ID (main board unique ID) of the game control device 54 (main board). Specifically, the individual identification information of the IC chip constituting the CPU 111 in the game control apparatus 54 (main board). The chip code as (unique ID) is read out. Then, the read chip code (chip ID) is written into the serial transmission buffer. Thereby, the chip code (chip ID) of the CPU 111 in the game control device 54 (main board) is acquired and output to the card unit 15 or the like.
Next, in step H504, the manufacturer code identification code of the main control chip is written in the serial transmission buffer, and in step H505, the manufacturer code of the main control chip (code relating to the manufacturer name of the gaming machine) is read and written in the serial transmission buffer. Next, in step H506, the type identification code of the main control chip is written in the serial transmission buffer, and in step H507, the type code (code relating to the model name) of the main control chip is read out and written in the serial transmission buffer, and then the process proceeds to step H508. . Thereby, the manufacturer code (code relating to the manufacturer name of the gaming machine) and the model code (code relating to the model name) of the CPU 111 in the game control device 54 (main board) are acquired and output to the card unit 15 or the like. .

In step H508, the chip identification code of the payout control chip is written in the serial transmission buffer. The payout control chip is the CPU 231 of the payout control device 230 (payout board).
Next, in step H509, the chip code (chip ID) of the payout control chip is read and written in the serial transmission buffer. This reads out the gaming machine ID (payout board unique ID) of the payout control device 230 (payout board). Specifically, the individual identification information of the IC chip that constitutes the CPU 231 in the payout control apparatus 230 (payout board). The chip code as (unique ID) is read out. Then, the read chip code (chip ID) is written into the serial transmission buffer. Thereby, the chip code (chip ID) of the CPU 231 in the payout control device 230 (payout board) is acquired and output to the card unit 15 or the like.
Next, in step H510, the maker code identification code of the payout control chip is written in the serial transmission buffer, and in step H511, the maker code of the payout control chip (code relating to the manufacturer name of the gaming machine) is read and written in the serial transmission buffer. Next, in step H512, the type identification code of the payout control chip is written in the serial transmission buffer, and in step H513, the type code of the payout control chip (code for specifying the payout control device) is read and written in the serial transmission buffer. Return. As a result, the manufacturer code of the CPU 231 (code relating to the manufacturer name of the gaming machine) and the model code (code specifying the payout control device) in the payout control device 230 (payout board) are acquired and output to the card unit 15 or the like. Will be.

At least when the gaming machine ID is transmitted to the card unit 15, since it is transmitted by the second communication method (communication method 2) as described above, each code data constituting the gaming machine ID is After the encryption corresponding to the communication method 2 is performed, the data is written in the serial transmission buffer.
Further, in this embodiment, a security signal at power-on, a frame opening signal (the frame opening signal may include a detection signal when the removal of the game control device 54 is detected by the night monitoring switch 126), jackpot 1 When a signal is generated, in addition to a chip code (main board unique ID) of the game control device 54 and a chip code (paid board unique ID) of the payout control device 230, a maker code and a model code are output as a gaming machine ID. Therefore, security can be enhanced by using even detailed information including manufacturer code and model code.
When the power is turned on, serial transmission is performed in the order of, for example, a manufacturer code, a model code, and a chip code.
Each identification code includes information indicating the data type and data length of each code.
Furthermore, in the flowchart shown in FIG. 57, all the codes output at the output timing are the same. However, when the codes output differ depending on the timing, it is determined what code is output if there is no identification code. Because it is difficult, it is easy to distinguish as a configuration including an identification code in this way (for example, even if a code is suddenly output, whether the code is a main control chip or a payout control chip, Alternatively, it is difficult to determine whether it is a chip code or a manufacturer code).

[LED editing process (withdrawal)]
Next, the LED editing process H86 in the timer interrupt process will be described with reference to FIG.
When this routine is started, an error display LED editing process (step H521), a holding ball number LED editing process (step H522), a counting switch LED editing process (step H523), a counting ball number LED editing process (step H524), The break switch valid state LED editing process (step H525) is sequentially executed, and then the process returns.

Here, in the error display LED editing process, setting of display data for lighting or blinking the error display LED 67 arranged on the back side of the payout control device 230 when a predetermined error occurs is executed.
In the ball number LED editing process, setting of display data for performing various displays on the ball number indicator 40 is executed (details will be described later).

In the count switch LED editing process, setting of display data for performing various displays with the LEDs built in the count switch 311 is executed.
In the counting ball number LED editing process, setting of display data for performing various displays on the counting ball display 313 is executed.
In the break switch effective display LED editing process, setting of display data for performing various displays with the LEDs built in the break switch 312 is executed.

In the break switch effective display LED editing process, for example, the following display operation is realized.
That is, if the break permission condition described in the break start monitoring process (FIG. 48) is satisfied, the built-in LED of the break switch 312 is lit to notify that a break is possible. Further, during the break, only the LED built in the break switch 312 blinks and lights up so that a mistake in pressing the counting switch 311 and the break switch 312 can be understood.

[Number-of-balls LED editing process]
Next, the number-of-balls LED editing process in the LED editing process will be described with reference to FIG.
When this routine is started, it is first determined in step H531 whether a card unit unconnected error has occurred. If it has occurred, the process proceeds to step H538, and if not, the process proceeds to step H532. The determination of the card unit unconnected error is performed based on, for example, a card unit connection confirmation flag, as in step H271 described above.

When the process proceeds to step H532, it is determined whether an enclosure system switch abnormality error is occurring. If it is occurring, the process proceeds to step H538, and if not, the process proceeds to step H533. The enclosed system switch abnormality error is a switch abnormality of the enclosed system switch (launching ball detection switch 161, foul ball detection switch 162, out ball detection switch 163, and enclosed ball number detection switches 164 and 165).
In Step H538, display data for performing display for notifying the enclosed system switch abnormality error or the card unit unconnected error is set by the ball number indicator 40, and the process returns.

When the process proceeds to step H533, it is determined whether the payment is in progress (including payment or waiting for game card removal). If the payment is in progress, the process proceeds to step H539, and if not, the process proceeds to step H534. The determination as to whether or not the account is being settled may be performed, for example, in the same manner as in steps H391 and H275 described above.
In Step H539, it is determined whether or not the writing of data (for example, data on the number of players' balls) to the game card is completed. If the writing is completed, the process proceeds to Step H534. On the other hand, if the writing of the data to the game card is not completed, the process jumps to Step H540 and the movement blinking data for moving and blinking the number of balls held by the possession ball number display 40 (ball number display movement blinking data). ) And return. As a result, the display of the number-of-balls indicator 40 moves and blinks until the card unit 15 completes the writing of data to the game card at the time of game settlement.
When the writing of the data to the game card is completed and the process proceeds to step H534, it is determined whether the value of the number-of-balls display timer is not zero. If (time is up), the process proceeds to step H535. The number-of-balls display timer is a timer that is set at the end of the settlement in step H382 (FIG. 47) described above.

If it is determined in step H534 that the value of the number-of-balls display timer is not zero (the time has not expired) and the process proceeds to step H541, the number-of-balls display is simultaneously blinked on the ball number display 40 in step H541. The number-of-balls display simultaneous blinking data is set, and the number-of-balls display timer is updated (-1) (decremented) in the subsequent step H542. Thereby, the number-of-balls display timer is counted. Next, in step H543, it is determined whether or not the value of the number-of-balls display timer has become zero. If not, the routine returns and the routine is repeated. If the value of the number-of-balls display timer becomes zero (count up), the process proceeds to step H544 to clear the number of balls for display, and then the process proceeds to step H537 and the number-of-balls display 40 as described later. Is used to set the number-of-balls display extinction data for displaying the number of balls held off, and then the process returns.
Through the processes of Steps H533, H534, H539 and Steps H540 to H544, the number of balls held is displayed from when the return button 304 is pressed until the settlement process is started until the data writing to the game card is completed. The display of 40 moves and blinks, and thereafter, the number of balls held is displayed on the ball holding number display 40 at the same time until the game card is extracted and the ball count display timer counts up.

On the other hand, if it progresses to H535, it will be determined and determined whether it is during a break, and if it is during a break, it will progress to step H545, and if it is not during a break, it will progress to step H536. The determination as to whether or not a break is in progress may be made in the same manner as in steps H351 and H276, for example.
In step H545, break display data for displaying that the player is on the ball with the number-of-balls display 40 is set, and the process returns.

If it progresses to step H536, it will be determined whether it is a game, and if it is in a game, it will progress to step H546, and if it is not in a game, it will progress to step H537. Whether or not a game is in progress is determined by determining that a game is in progress if a game card is inserted in the card unit 15 and determining that a game is not in progress if it is not inserted. Even when cash is inserted, since a prepaid card is issued internally, it is determined that the game is being played in the same manner as the state in which the game card is inserted.
In step H546, the number-of-balls display data setting process is performed, and then the process returns. This is a process for displaying the number of balls held on the number-of-balls display 40 and will be described in detail later.
In step H537, the number-of-balls display off data for turning off the number of balls is displayed by the number-of-balls display 40, and the process returns. As a result, the number-of-balls display 40 is turned off. After that, an effect may be made in which a demonstration display is performed on the number-of-balls display 40.

  According to this routine, the number of balls held is basically displayed on the number-of-balls display 40 during the game, but when a card unit non-connection error or an encapsulated system switch error occurs, an error display is displayed. A display indicating that the payment is being performed during the checkout and a display indicating that the break is being performed during the break are respectively performed on the number-of-balls display 40. If neither of these states is present, the number-of-balls display 40 is turned off. In the present embodiment, the data setting processing for the display on the number-of-balls display 40 is collectively processed in this routine for all displays other than the number-of-balls display. For this reason, there exists an effect which can simplify a process and can reduce cost.

[Number of balls display data setting processing]
Next, the number-of-balls display data setting process in step H545 of the number-of-balls LED editing process will be described with reference to FIG.
When this routine is started, first, if the number-of-balls display update timer is not “0” in step H551, the timer is updated (decrement) by “−1”, and in step H552, the number-of-balls display update timer is “ Whether or not “0” is determined. This is because the number-of-balls display update timer is set to an initial value (for example, 300 ms) in step H557, which will be described later, and is updated (-1) from the initial value, and the timer is set to "0". It is determined whether or not.

If the decision result in the step H552 is YES, the process advances to a succeeding step H553 to determine whether or not the number-of-ball display lead counter is equal to the number-of-ball display light counter. This is to determine whether or not the current number of balls has been read from the number-of-balls display number storage area in which the number of balls is stored. If the result of the determination in step H553 is NO, it is determined that the number-of-balls display read counter is not equal to the number-of-balls display light counter, and the current number of balls has not been read from the number-of-balls display number storage area. Then, the process proceeds to Step H554.
Next, in step H554, the number-of-balls display read counter is updated (incremented) by “+1”, and then in step H555, the current number of updates is updated from the display updated ball number storage area corresponding to the number-of-balls display read counter. Load it. Next, in step H556, the number of updates loaded in step H555 is added to the number of holding balls for display, and the number of holding balls for display is updated. That is, “the number of holding balls for display + the number of updates” is updated to the number of holding balls for display this time.

Next, in step H557, the initial value (for example, 300 ms) of the number-of-balls display update timer is saved in the number-of-balls display update timer area. For example, 300 ms is set as the initial value here.
Here, the initial value = 300 m is an interval for updating the number of balls (in a predetermined period (0.3 seconds)) when the number-of-balls display 40 (game value display means) displays the number of balls held by the player. (Interval).
This is because the RAM 233 as an internal memory stores the change in the number of balls held by the player, and subtracts the fired ball, adds the number of prize balls, and repeats the addition of the foul ball. The number of balls to be held is updated and stored in real time. On the other hand, when the number of balls held in the ball holding number display 40 is updated, the RAM 233 updates and stores the number of balls in real time. This is because, unlike the process, control is performed so that the updated number of balls is displayed at intervals of a predetermined period (for example, 0.3 seconds).
That is, the payout controller 230 subtracts the number of balls fired from the number of balls held, adds the number of prize balls, and adds a foul ball by processing based on the game program, so that the RAM 233 can determine the number of balls held in real time. However, when the number-of-balls display 40 displays the number of balls held by the player, the number of balls held is updated by the RAM 233 and stored in real time. Unlike the above, control is performed so that the updated number of balls is displayed at intervals of a predetermined period (for example, 0.3 seconds).

On the other hand, returning to the step H553, when the determination result in the step H553 is YES, the number-of-balls display read counter becomes equal to the number-of-balls-displaying light counter, and the number of balls currently held from the number-of-balls-displaying number storage area. Is read, and the process branches to step H558. In step H558, the current number of held balls is updated to the number of held balls for display. Then, the process proceeds to step H557, and the processes in and after step H557 are executed.
In addition, when performing the process of step H558, in order to prevent a deviation between the display data about the number of balls and the internal data, when there is no data to be added (number of balls to be added), it is periodically performed. The process to match the number of balls held inside.

After going through Step H557 and proceeding to Step H559, it is determined whether or not the number of possessed balls = 0, and if the number of retained balls = 0, the process proceeds to Step H560 and whether or not the number of counted balls = 0. judge. If the number of counted balls = 0 in step H560, both the number of possessed balls and the number of counted balls are “0”, and there is no player's possessed ball. The number-of-ball display 0 lighting data for lighting the ball number display at 0 is set. Thereby, the number-of-balls display 40 is lit and displayed with 0.
On the other hand, if the number of counting balls is not 0 in step H560, the number of counting balls is present even if the number of holding balls is 0. Set the number of spheres to be displayed 0 blinking data. As a result, the number-of-balls display 40 blinks at 0.
After step H561 or step H562, the process proceeds to step H564.

On the other hand, if the number of possessed balls is not 0 in step H559, the process jumps to step H563 to execute the processes after step H563. In Step H563, LED display data corresponding to the number of holding balls updated in Step H556 is set. This sets data to be displayed on the LED of the ball holding number display 40 capable of displaying six digits of numbers (the number of balls held) by arranging six 7-segment LEDs. Therefore, if there are 6 LEDs to be displayed, data for 6 digits is set.
Subsequently, in step H564, the LED display data corresponding to the number of holding balls set in step H563 is saved in the holding ball number output data area, and then the process returns.
Thereby, the current number of balls (the updated number of balls) is displayed on the number-of-balls display 40.
Further, as described above, after passing through step H561 or step H562, the process proceeds to step H564. At this time, the number-of-ball display 0 lighting data set in step H561 or the number-of-ball display blinking data set in step H562 is changed. The corresponding LED display data is saved in the number-of-balls output data area in step H564, and then the process returns. Thereby, if both the number of balls held and the number of balls counted are zero, the number-of-balls indicator 40 is lit and displayed as zero. In addition, even if the number of balls is zero, if there is a count ball number, the ball number indicator 40 blinks and displays zero.
On the other hand, if the number-of-balls display update timer is not “0” in step H552, the process jumps to step H559, and the processes after step H559 are sequentially executed. Therefore, at this time, the display of the previous number of balls held by the number-of-balls display 40 is continued.

[Counting ball LED editing process]
Next, the counting ball number LED editing process in step H524 of the LED editing process (payout) will be described with reference to FIG.
When this routine is started, it is first determined in step H571 whether or not the counting ball number is “0”. If the counting ball number is not “0”, the process proceeds to step H572 and the counting ball number LED is turned on. Set the data and then return. As a result, the counting ball display 313 is turned on.
On the other hand, if the counting ball number is “0” in step H571, the process proceeds to step H573, where the off data of the counting ball number LED is set, and then the process returns. As a result, the counting ball display 313 is turned off.
In this way, the counting ball indicator 313 is turned on / off according to the presence / absence of the counting ball, informing the player of the presence / absence of the counting ball, and from the counting ball number using the counting ball use switch 314. It is notified whether or not movement to the number of balls is possible. Here, the counting ball display 313 performs simple display regarding the number of counting balls to the player by turning on and off, and details of the counting ball number are displayed on the operation display device 7 managed by the card unit 15. . Note that the counting ball display may be configured by several LEDs (for example, six) to notify the approximate counting ball number.

[Polishing device control processing (dispensing)]
Next, the polishing apparatus control process H87 in the above-described timer interruption process will be described with reference to FIG.
When this routine is started, it is determined in step H581 whether or not the polishing start flag is set. The polishing start flag is set in the initialization process at the time of starting the program in the dispensing control device 230. Therefore, it is usually set at the start of power supply of the gaming machine (pachinko machine 1). The polishing start command is a command for instructing start of polishing of the encapsulated sphere.
If the polishing start flag is set in step H581, the process proceeds to step H582. If the polishing start flag is not set, the process jumps to step H587.
In step H582, the polishing start flag is cleared. This is because when the polishing start flag is set, a polishing start command is sent from the payout control device 230 to the effect control device 53 via the game control device 54, and when the effect control device 53 receives the polishing start command, the polishing starts. Since the control device 59 is controlled and the polishing of the encapsulated sphere is started by the polishing device 56, the polishing start flag is cleared.

After step H582, a polishing flag is set in subsequent step H583. The in-polishing flag informs the game control device 54 that the enclosing sphere is being polished, in order to grasp that the enclosing sphere is also being polished in the payout control device 230.
Next, in step H584, an initial value is set in the polishing timer. The polishing timer is used to count the polishing period, and has a function as a timer indicating the polishing period. In this case, for example, a value corresponding to 10 minutes is set as the initial value of the timer during polishing. Therefore, the encapsulated sphere is polished for the period (polishing period) set by the initial value of the polishing timer (for example, 10 minutes) from the start of power supply to the pachinko machine 1.
Next, a polishing start command is prepared in step H585, and main control command setting processing is performed in step H586. This is to set a command for transmitting a command from the payout control device 230 to the game control device 54 by serial communication (details will be described later). As a result, a polishing start command is sent to the game control device 54 by serial communication.

After step H586, the process proceeds to step H587. As described above, the process jumps to step H587 also when the polishing start flag is not set in step H581.
In step H587, if the polishing timer is not “0”, (−1) is updated. As a result, the polishing timer counts down. Next, in step H588, it is determined whether the polishing timer is “0”. If it is not “0”, the process returns and the routine is repeated. When the polishing timer reaches “0”, the process goes from step H588 to step H589 to determine whether the polishing flag is set. If the polishing flag is set, the process proceeds to step H590 to clear the polishing flag. On the other hand, if it is determined in step H589 that the polishing flag is not set, the process returns.
After the polishing flag is cleared in step H590, a polishing end command is prepared in step H591, and main control command setting processing is performed in subsequent step H592. The polishing end command is a command for instructing end of polishing of the encapsulated sphere. As described above, the main control command setting process sets a command for transmitting a command from the payout control device 230 to the game control device 54 by serial communication.
As a result, a polishing end command is sent to the game control device 54 by serial communication.
In this way, a polishing start command is set at the start of power supply to the pachinko machine 1 (game machine), the start of polishing of the encapsulated sphere is instructed, and a period set by the initial value (for example, 10 minutes) of the polishing timer After the encapsulated sphere is polished for (polishing period), the end of the encapsulated sphere is instructed by a polishing end command.
In this embodiment, the polishing apparatus 56 is operated for a predetermined period by the polishing start command, and the display during polishing in the effect control apparatus 53 is ended by the polishing end command. The operation of the polishing apparatus 56 may be started by a polishing start command, and the operation of the polishing apparatus 56 may be ended by a polishing end command.

[Main control command setting processing]
Next, main control command setting processing H586 and H592 in the above-described polishing apparatus control processing will be described with reference to FIG.
When this routine is started, a main control command (MODE) is written in the main control serial transmission buffer in step H601. Thereby, the main control command (MODE) is transmitted from the payout control device 230 to the game control device 54 by serial communication using the serial communication function of the CPU 231 in the payout control device 230.
Next, in step H602, the main control serial transmission buffer status is read, and in step H603, it is determined whether transmission is in progress (main control command (MODE) transmission is in progress). To do. On the other hand, if the transmission is not in progress (NO in step H603), the process proceeds to step H604 to initialize the transmission circuit. Next, the process proceeds to step H605, where the main control command (MODE) is rewritten to the main control serial transmission buffer, and then the process proceeds to step H606.
Here, in the case of this flowchart, the main control command is transmitted in a 2-byte configuration such as “MODE” and “ACTION”, like an effect command, but it may be configured in a byte configuration beyond that. In those cases, a flowchart corresponding to a plurality of bytes may be used.

In step H606, the main control command (ACTION) is written in the main control serial transmission buffer. Thus, the main control command (ACTION) is transmitted from the payout control device 230 to the game control device 54 by serial communication using the serial communication function of the CPU 231 in the payout control device 230.
Next, in step H607, the main control serial transmission buffer status is read, and in step H608, it is determined whether transmission is in progress (transmission of the main control command (ACTION)). If transmission is in progress, the routine ends. And return. If the transmission is not in progress (NO in step H608), the process proceeds to step H609 to initialize the transmission circuit. Next, the process proceeds to step H610, where the main control command (ACTION) is rewritten in the main control serial transmission buffer, and then the process returns.
In this way, the main control command (MODE) and the main control command (ACTION) are transmitted from the payout control device 230 to the game control device 54 by serial communication. The game control device 54 receives these commands and transmits the production command (MODE) and the production command (ACTION) to the production control device 53 by the processing of the flowchart shown in FIG. In response to the command, the effect control is performed on the screen of the display device 41, and an instruction is given to the polishing control device 59. Since the serial communication is performed using the serial communication function of the CPU 231 in the payout control device 230, there is an advantage that the configuration is simple.

Next, the control contents of the effect control device 53 will be described with reference to FIG.
Here, the flowchart of the effect control device 53 will be described using “step P” as the step number.
[Polishing device control processing (production control)]
First, the polishing apparatus control processing (effect control) of the effect control device 53 will be described with reference to FIG.
The polishing apparatus control process is executed by a timer interruption process that is repeated periodically, and the content thereof is for receiving a command from the game control apparatus 54 and controlling the operation of the polishing apparatus 56.
The polishing apparatus control process is not limited to the timer interruption process, and is configured to be executed in a form that is called from within a loop process executed in a drawing frame cycle (for example, 33.3 ms) in the main process of the effect control apparatus 53, for example. May be.
When this routine is started, it is first determined in step P1 whether or not the encapsulated sphere is being polished. This is determined by a later-described polishing flag (see step P4). That is, if the polishing flag is set (see step P4), it is determined that polishing is in progress.
If it is determined in step P1 that the encapsulated sphere is not being polished, the process proceeds to step P2, and it is determined whether or not the polishing start flag is set. This is determined by analyzing a command transmitted from the game control device 54. For example, when a polishing start command is received from the game control device 54, the effect control device 53 sets a polishing start flag. Since it is, it determines based on it. Therefore, when the production control device 53 has received a polishing start command from the game control device 54, the production control device 53 sets a polishing start flag, and the determination in step P2 is YES.

If the polishing start flag is set in step P2, the process proceeds to step P3, and the polishing start flag is cleared. Since the polishing start flag is confirmed in step P2, the polishing start flag is cleared in order not to repeat the same routine. On the other hand, if the polishing start flag is not set in step P2, the process returns.
After step P3, the process proceeds to step P4 and the polishing flag is set. This is because the polishing flag indicates that the production control device 53 also knows that the encapsulated sphere is being polished.
Next, a display start setting of “in polishing” is performed in step P5. As a result, the display device 41 displays the effect “in polishing”. Next, a polishing start command is prepared in step P6, and polishing apparatus command transmission processing is performed in subsequent step P7. As a result, a polishing start command is transmitted to the polishing control device 59 and the polishing of the encapsulated sphere by the polishing device 56 is started. The process returns after step P7.
The flowchart of the polishing control device 59 will be described later (see FIG. 68).
Further, in this flowchart, only the instruction to start polishing of the encapsulated sphere is issued to the polishing control device 59, and the polishing control device 59 performs the polishing process of the encapsulated sphere for a predetermined period from the instruction to start polishing sent from the effect control device 53. .

Next, if it is determined in step P1 that the encapsulated sphere is being polished, the process branches to step P8, where it is determined whether the polishing end flag is set. This is determined by analyzing a command transmitted from the game control device 54. For example, if a polishing end command is received and analyzed from the game control device 54 and analyzed as a polishing end command, a polishing end flag is set. In this case, the determination result in step P8 is YES. On the other hand, if the polishing end command has not been received from the game control device 54, the polishing end flag is not set, and in this case, the determination result in step P8 is NO.
If the polishing end flag is not set in step P8, the routine is ended and the process returns. On the other hand, if the polishing end flag is set in step P8, the process proceeds to step P9, and the polishing end flag is cleared. Since the polishing end flag is confirmed in step P8, the polishing end flag is cleared in order not to repeat the same routine.
After step P9, the process proceeds to step P10, and the polishing flag is cleared. The polishing flag is used for the effect control device 53 to grasp that the encapsulated sphere is being polished. However, since the polishing end flag is set, it is unnecessary to recognize that the encapsulated sphere is being polished. Therefore, the polishing flag is cleared.
Next, the display end setting of “polishing” is performed in step P11. As a result, the display of the effect “in polishing” on the display device 41 ends. The process returns after step P11.

As described above, in the flowchart shown in FIG. 64, when a polishing start command is received from the game control device 54, the production control device 53 sets the polishing start flag and transmits the polishing start command to the polishing control device 59. Polishing of the encapsulated sphere is started. In this case, the polishing control device 59 starts polishing the encapsulated sphere based on the polishing start command sent from the effect control device 53, and controls the polishing device 56 so as to polish the encapsulated sphere only for a predetermined period from the instruction to start polishing. To do.
During polishing of the encapsulated sphere, an effect “polishing” is displayed on the display device 41 under the control of the effect control device 53, and is notified to the store clerk and the like.
When a predetermined period has elapsed from the start of polishing, the polishing of the encapsulated sphere by the polishing device 56 is finished according to an instruction from the polishing control device 59.
At this time, when the polishing end command is received from the game control device 54, the effect control device 53 sets the polishing end flag, and the effect “in polishing” is displayed on the display device 41 based on the polishing end command. End. In this example, the polishing end command from the game control device 54 is used to end the display device 41 displaying the effect “in polishing”. The polishing of the encapsulated sphere is completed based on the judgment of the polishing control device 59. The polishing control device 59 instructs the polishing device 56 to end the polishing when a predetermined period has elapsed from the start of polishing. For this reason, the polishing of the encapsulated sphere is completed even if there is no polishing end command from the game control device 54. Therefore, the polishing end command from the game control device 54 may not be provided with respect to the control of the polishing end of the encapsulated sphere.
The configuration may be such that polishing of the encapsulated sphere is started by a polishing start command from the game control device 54 and polishing of the encapsulated sphere is ended by a polishing end command.

[LCD data setting process]
Next, the liquid crystal data setting process of the effect control device 53 will be described with reference to FIG.
When this routine is started, main liquid crystal data setting processing is performed in step P21. This is for setting liquid crystal display data in the display device 41 as a main liquid crystal display device. For example, display data setting for the following image is performed.
・ Background ・ Left design ・ Right design ・ Medium design ・ Character 1
・ Character 2
・ 4th pattern ・ Special figure 1 and special figure 2 hold display Each of the above data has a layer structure, and a plurality of layers are synthesized 1 by sequentially overlaying the display device 41 with the background layer as the last part. The frame screen will be drawn.
Next, sub liquid crystal data setting processing is performed in step P22. This is for setting liquid crystal display data in the sub liquid crystal display device 33, and details will be described later in a subroutine. After step P22, the process returns.

[Sub LCD data setting process]
Next, a sub liquid crystal data setting process subroutine will be described with reference to FIG.
When this routine is started, background display data is set in step P31. This is to set the background image of the screen of the sub liquid crystal display device 33. Next, model name display data is set in step P32. This sets data for displaying the model name of the pachinko machine 1 on the sub liquid crystal display device 33. Next, the special figure 1 hold number display data is set in step P33, and the special figure 2 hold number display data is set in step P34. These set data for displaying the special figure 1 hold number and the special figure 2 hold number on the sub liquid crystal display device 33, respectively.

Next, in step P35, it is determined whether or not a special effect is being performed. The special production is in the production of raising the sense of expectation to the player, such as when a special drawing (decoration special drawing) is being executed on the display device 41 as the main liquid crystal display device. is there. During the special effect, the game is not limited to the reach effect, and may be, for example, a game game that determines whether or not to enter the probability variation, or may be during another game different from the normal game.
If the special effect is being performed in step P35, the process branches to step P36, the special effect display data is set, and the process returns. As the display data for special effects, for example, display data for executing effects such that a new character appears on the sub liquid crystal display device 33 and moves to the display device 41 as the main liquid crystal display device at a certain timing is set (specifically). An example is given later). This makes it possible to enjoy a new production during the special production.
On the other hand, if the special effect is not being performed in step P35, the process proceeds to step P37 to determine whether there is a counting ball. If there is no counting ball, return. Therefore, if the special effect is not being performed and there is no counting ball, the special effect and the counting ball number display on the sub liquid crystal display device 33 are not performed. If it is determined in step P37 that there is a counting ball, the counting ball number display data is set in step P38, and character display data corresponding to the counting ball number is set in subsequent step P39, and the process returns. As a result, when there is a counting ball instead of a special effect, an effect of displaying a character corresponding to the counting ball number on the sub liquid crystal display device 33 is performed. If there is a counting ball, the display of the counting ball is prioritized and the display of the model name is stopped, but the model name may be displayed. In principle, the background is always displayed, but when a character appears, it may be a plain background, or the background display may be temporarily stopped.
Details of the process of setting the character display data corresponding to the number of counted balls will be described as an appearance character selection process with reference to FIG.
Since the special figure 1 and special figure 2 hold display layers always exist in principle, the special figure 1 and special figure 2 hold numbers are always displayed on the sub liquid crystal display device 33 in principle.

[Appearance character selection processing]
Next, the appearance character selection process will be described with reference to FIG. This routine is a subroutine of processing for setting character display data corresponding to the number of counted balls in step P39 described above.
When this routine is started, it is determined whether or not there is a counting ball in step P51. If there is a counting ball, the range of the number of counting balls is determined as follows in the processing after step P52.
That is, in Step P52, it is determined whether the number of counting balls is 2000 or more, in Step P53, whether it is 5000 or more, or in Step P54, whether it is 10,000 or more.
Then, the determination result of the range of the number of counting balls branches as follows, and a character is selected from a predetermined character table.

Here, an example of the predetermined character table is set as follows, for example.
・ Character table 1: 2D child character ・ Character table 2: 2D adult character (e.g. Giro character)
Character table 3: 2D monster character (for example, dragon character, etc.)
Character table 4: 3D adult character (eg, 3D Giraud character)
Character table 5: 3D monster character (for example, 3D dragon character, etc.)
If it is determined in step P51 that there is no counting ball, a character is selected from the character table 1 in step P55, and the process returns.
If it is determined in step P52 that the number of counting balls is less than 2000, a character is selected from the character table 2 in step P56, and the process returns. If the number of counting balls is 2000 or more, the process proceeds to Step P53.
If it is determined in step P53 that the number of counting balls is less than 5000, a character is selected from the character table 3 in step P57, and the process returns. Therefore, if the number of counting balls is 2000 or more and less than 5000, a character is selected from the character table 3. If the number of counting balls is 5000 or more, the process proceeds to Step P54.
If it is determined in step P54 that the number of counting balls is less than 10,000, a character is selected from the character table 4 in step P58, and the process returns. Therefore, if the number of counting balls is 5000 or more and less than 10,000, a character is selected from the character table 4.
On the other hand, if the number of counting balls is 10,000 or more, the process proceeds to Step P59, a character is selected from the character table 5, and the process returns.
As described above, the effect of selecting each character from the predetermined character table and displaying it on the sub liquid crystal display device 33 is performed on the determination result of the range of the number of counting balls.

[Polishing control processing]
Next, the control contents of the polishing control device 59 will be described with reference to FIG.
Here, regarding the flowchart of the polishing control device 59, which will be described using “step P” as a step number, when this routine is started, it is determined whether or not there is a polishing start instruction in step P71. This is determined by whether or not a polishing start command has been transmitted from the production control device 53 to the polishing control device 59. That is, if a polishing start command is transmitted from the effect control device 53 to the polishing control device 59, the determination in step P71 is YES, and the processing after step P72 is executed. On the other hand, if no polishing start command is transmitted from the production control device 53 to the polishing control device 59, the process stays at step P71 and waits for reception of the polishing start command.
If a polishing start command is transmitted from the effect control device 53 to the polishing control device 59, the process proceeds from step P71 to step P72.

When proceeding to Step P72, a weight of a predetermined time T0 is set. The weight of the predetermined time T0 is set in consideration of the preparation period until the polishing of the encapsulated sphere is started. Therefore, the polishing of the encapsulated sphere starts after the predetermined time T0 has elapsed.
Therefore, after step P72, the process proceeds to the next step P73, and the switching solenoid 79S of the switching valve 79 is switched to “polishing side”. As a result, the switching solenoid 79S of the switching valve 79 slides a part of the ball feed channel 78 to open the polishing guide port 80a, and the encapsulated sphere present in the sensor channel 77 and the ball feed channel 78 is polished by gravity. It moves to the lower polishing inflow guide path 80 through the guide port 80 a and is guided to the polishing device 56 through the polishing inflow guide path 80, and the filled ball starts to flow into the polishing apparatus 56. In this case, by executing Step P75 described later, the encapsulated sphere is circulated through the route where it passes through the polishing device 56 and is polished.

Next, in step P74, a T1 timer that counts the predetermined time T1 is started. Here, the predetermined time T1 corresponds to a period in which the switching solenoid 79S of the switching valve 79 is switched to the “polishing side” and the encapsulated sphere is caused to flow into the polishing device 56 and the sphere is polished. . The predetermined time T1 corresponds to a degree of polishing that can sufficiently polish all of the encapsulated spheres enclosed in the pachinko machine 1 and that is sufficient for operation on the day (for example, operation for one day on the day). .
Next, the process proceeds to Step P75, and the polishing motor 70 is activated. As a result, the ball that has flowed into the polishing device 56 is polished by the polishing member 74 disposed inside while being lifted by the lifting screw 73 by the power of the polishing motor 70, and is passed from the upper outlet 75 via the polishing outlet switch 76. The encapsulated spheres are polished sequentially.
Next, in step P76, it is determined whether or not a predetermined time T1 has elapsed. This is determined by whether the T1 timer counting the predetermined time T1 has counted up to the predetermined time T1. If the predetermined time T1 has not elapsed, the process jumps to Step P79 and the input from the polishing outlet switch 76 (that is, the signal that the polishing outlet switch 76 detects the sphere discharged from the upper outlet 75) is sent to the polishing control device 59. It is determined whether or not there is. This is to determine whether or not the polishing outlet switch 76 detects a sphere discharged from the upper outlet 75 to the sensor flow path 77. Here, if the polishing outlet switch 76 does not detect the discharge of the sphere from the upper outlet 75 for a predetermined time or more, it is determined that the polishing device 56 is abnormal such as a clogged ball, and the polishing motor 70 of the polishing device 56 is prevented from continuing to rotate. Therefore, the determination in step P79 is performed. If the polishing outlet switch 76 does not detect the discharge of the sphere from the upper outlet 75 for a predetermined time or longer, the T3 timer determines that the time is up in step P82, which will be described later. The polishing motor 70 is stopped and the routine is terminated. Accordingly, the polishing motor 70 can be stopped when the polishing apparatus 56 is abnormal, such as a clogged ball, and abnormal heating of the polishing motor 70 is prevented.

If there is an input from the polishing outlet switch 76 in step P79, it is determined that there is no abnormality such as clogging in the polishing apparatus 56, and the process proceeds to step P80. In Step P80, the T3 timer that counts the predetermined time T3 is reset and activated. The predetermined time T3 here corresponds to a period from when the polishing outlet switch 76 is last turned on while the polishing motor 70 is started to when the polishing motor 70 is stopped. For a predetermined time T3, after the switching solenoid 79S of the switching valve 79 is switched from the “polishing side” to the “normal side”, one sphere in the polishing inflow guide path 80 is polished and passed through the polishing outlet switch 76. Corresponds to a sufficient period of time. Therefore, by providing the predetermined time T3, the polishing motor 70 is stopped after all the balls being polished inside the polishing apparatus 56 are discharged. Therefore, in step P80, the T3 timer is returned to the initial value = 0 and then started.
In step P80, every time there is an input from the polishing outlet switch 76, the T3 timer is reset to the initial value every time, resetting is started, and counting is started.

After step P80, it is then determined in step P81 whether or not the T2 timer has been started. The predetermined time T2 here corresponds to a period until the polishing motor 70 is stopped after the switching solenoid 79S of the switching valve 79 is switched from the “polishing side” to the “normal side”. Therefore, after the switching solenoid 79S of the switching valve 79 is switched from the “polishing side” to the “normal side” by providing the predetermined time T2, all the balls being polished inside the polishing apparatus 56 are discharged. Then, the polishing motor 70 is stopped. Therefore, in step P31, it is determined whether the T2 timer has been started.
If the T2 timer has not been started in step P81, the process returns to step P76 to repeat the loop. Therefore, as described above, while the switching solenoid 79S of the switching valve 79 is switched to the “polishing side” and the encapsulated sphere is caused to flow into the polishing device 56 to perform the polishing of the sphere, Step P76, Step P79, Step The loop of P80 and Step P81 is repeated, and the polishing of the sphere is continued by the polishing device 56. When the predetermined time T1 elapses, it is determined that the encapsulated sphere has been sufficiently polished, and the determination result in step P76 is YES, and the flow proceeds to step P77.

In step P77, the switching solenoid 79S of the switching valve 79 is switched from the “polishing side” to the “normal side”. Thereby, the switching solenoid 79S of the switching valve 79 is turned off, and the switching valve 59 biases the valve body by the spring and displaces it to a position where the polishing guide port 80a is closed. Accordingly, the encapsulated sphere present in the ball feed channel 78 is not moved to the lower polishing inflow guiding path 80 because the polishing guiding port 80 a is closed, and the encapsulated sphere does not flow into the polishing device 56.
Next, the process proceeds to step P78, and the T2 timer is started. As described above, the T2 timer counts the predetermined period T2. In this period T2, the switching solenoid 79S of the switching valve 79 is switched from the “polishing side” to the “normal side”, and then the polishing inflow guide path 80 and the polishing are switched. The period until all balls being polished inside the device 56 are discharged is taken into consideration. Next, the process proceeds to Step P79, where it is determined whether or not there is an input from the polishing outlet switch 76. For a while after starting the T2 timer, the ball being polished inside the polishing apparatus 56 is discharged. Therefore, while the ball is discharged, the determination result of step P79 becomes YES, and the process proceeds to step P80. Become. In step P80, after resetting and starting the T3 timer, the process proceeds to step P81, and it is determined whether or not the T2 timer has been started. In this case, since the T2 timer has already been started, the process proceeds to step P82 to determine whether both the T2 timer and the T3 timer are up. If both the T2 timer and the T3 timer have not timed up, the process returns to step P76 to repeat the loop. In step P82, if the T3 timer is not started, it is considered that the time is up. If the polishing apparatus 56 is operating normally (that is, without abnormality), there is an input from the polishing outlet switch 76, so the T3 timer is always started in step P80. On the other hand, if there is an abnormality such as a clogged ball in the polishing apparatus 56, there is no input from the polishing outlet switch 76. In this case, the polishing motor 70 is stopped in step P83 as described later.

If both the T2 timer and the T3 timer are up in step P82 due to repetition of the loop, the determination result in step P82 is YES, and the flow proceeds to step P83. In this case, when the loop is repeated, if there is no input from the polishing outlet switch 76 in the determination in step P79, the determination result in step P79 is NO, jumping to step P80 and proceeding to step P81. .
When the process proceeds from step P82 to step P83, the polishing motor 70 is stopped and the routine is ended in step P83. Thereby, the operation of the polishing apparatus 56 is stopped.
In step P79, it is determined that there is no input from the polishing outlet switch 76. If this state continues for a certain period of time, it is determined in step P82 that the T3 timer has timed up, and if time is up, the process returns to step P83 to polish. The motor 70 is stopped and the routine is terminated. As a result, the polishing motor 70 is stopped when the polishing device 56 is in an abnormal state such as a clogged ball to prevent abnormal heating or the like of the polishing motor 70.

Thus, when a polishing start command is transmitted from the production control device 53 to the polishing control device 59, the switching solenoid 79S of the switching valve 79 is switched to the “polishing side” after waiting for a predetermined time T0, The polishing motor 70 is started and the polishing of the encapsulated sphere is started by the polishing device 56. Thereafter, when the predetermined time T1 has elapsed, it is determined that the encapsulated sphere has been sufficiently polished, the switching solenoid 79S of the switching valve 79 is switched from the “polishing side” to the “normal side”, and then the polishing outlet switch 76. When it is confirmed that the predetermined period T3 has elapsed since turning on and the predetermined period T2 has elapsed, the polishing motor 70 stops.
Therefore, when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the path of the encapsulated sphere is switched to the “polishing side” for a predetermined time T1, and the encapsulated sphere is polished by the polishing device 56. Next, when the polishing of the encapsulated sphere is completed, the game is ready, and the encapsulated sphere is circulated without going through the polishing device 56 during the game.
In addition, the game control device 54 (main board) and the payout control device 230 simply issue a polishing start command and a polishing stop command to the effect control device 53, and under the control of the effect control device 53, the polishing control device 59 (polishing device). Therefore, the control burden on the game control device 54 (main board) and the payout control device 230 can be reduced, and the efficiency is improved.

Next, the control contents of the card unit 15 will be described with reference to FIGS.
Here, the flowchart of the card unit 15 will be described using “step A” as the step number.
[Operation display editing process]
First, the operation display device editing process of the card unit 15 will be described with reference to FIG.
FIG. 69 is a flowchart showing card unit operation display device control processing of the card unit 15. This routine is a process for performing various controls of the operation display device 7 under the management of the card unit 15, and is repeatedly executed at predetermined intervals.
When this routine is started, first, basic display data of the common display area is set in step A1. This is because the buttons on the common display area, the size of the buttons, the message size, the message / operation area unit 306, and the various buttons (ball lending button 303, return button 304, etc.) on the operation display device 7 are displayed. Display data common to the entire screen of the operation area unit 306 is set in advance.

In step A2, sphere unit price display data corresponding to the sphere unit price information is set. This sets data for displaying the ball lending rate (that is, the ball unit price) when lending game balls from the card unit 15, and in this embodiment, either 4 yen per ball or 1 yen per ball is set. Since it is possible to lend a ball at a rate, for example, when lending a ball at 4 yen, data for displaying “ball lending: 4 yen per ball” is set.
Next, in step A3, it is determined whether or not a game card (including a prepaid card (for example, a visitor card)) is inserted into the card unit 15 (specifically, inserted into the card slot 201). If a game card has been inserted, display data when the “pick / replay” button is valid is set in step A4. This is to set data for enabling and displaying the storage / replay button 305 arranged on the operation display device 7. As a result, the player inserts a game card into the card slot 201 of the card unit 15 and enters the member's personal identification number on the screen of the message / operation area 306, and then the store / replay button If 305 is pressed, it becomes possible to store the balls acquired by the player using the membership card or to replay using the balls stored in the membership card.

Next, in step A5, display data when the “return” button is valid is set. This is to set data for enabling and displaying the return button 304 arranged on the operation display device 7. Thus, if the player desires to return the game card before starting the game, the game card is returned by pressing the return button 304. The return button 304 is used when the player wants to settle the number of balls.
Next, in step A6, amount display data corresponding to the remaining amount information is set. This is to set data for displaying an amount corresponding to the remaining frequency (remaining amount information) of the inserted game card. For example, if the remaining frequency of the game card is 10, data for displaying 1000 yen as the amount of money is set by calculating 1 frequency = 100 yen.

Next, the process proceeds to step A7, where it is determined whether or not the remaining amount information (remaining frequency) of the gaming card is equal to or greater than the lenttable amount. Set the display data when the "rent" button is enabled. This is to set data for enabling and displaying the ball lending button 303 arranged on the operation display device 7. Thus, when the player presses the ball lending button 303, the ball lending is performed within the range of the remaining frequency (remaining amount information) of the game card.
Next, in step A9, it is determined whether or not the display mode is the number of balls possessed. This is a mode for displaying the details of the number of balls held and the number of counted balls (including explanation of the number of balls held and the number of counted balls, analog display of the number of balls held, etc.) on the message / operation area unit 306 of the operation display device 7. Whether or not. When there is a counting ball or when the player selects analog display of the number of balls held (display imitating a ball box), the determination result of step A9 is YES, and when there is no balls, there is no counting balls NO if the player has not selected the analog display of the number of balls.

If the display mode is not the number-of-balls display in step A9, the determination result is NO, the process proceeds to step A11, and display data for the demonstration display during game is set. This is because the display mode is not selected to display the number of possessed balls or the number of counted balls, so a message (for example, an explanation message of an appearing character or Data for displaying a game game progress message) or the like is set.
Next, the process proceeds to step A12, and a liquid crystal display control process is performed. This is because various display data is set in each of the above steps, and various screens (including button screens) are actually displayed on the operation display device 7 constituted by a liquid crystal display corresponding to these display data. Control processing when various buttons are pressed is performed. After step A12, the process returns.

Next, a description will be given of a case where the determination at each step branches to a route different from that described above.
First, when it is determined in step A3 that a game card is not inserted into the card unit 15, the process branches to step A13, and display data when the “pick / replay” button is disabled is set in step A13. Thereby, the storage / replay button 305 arranged on the operation display device 7 is not displayed.
After step A13, display data when the “return” button is invalid is set in step A14. As a result, the return button 304 arranged on the operation display device 7 is not displayed. Next, display data when the “ball lending” button is disabled is set in step A15. Thereby, the ball lending button 303 arranged on the operation display device 7 is not displayed. Next, display data of a customer waiting message is set in step A16. This is because the ball lending button 303 and the like are set to be invalid and the game is not in a starting state, so a message such as “Welcome” is displayed as a message waiting in the message / operation area 306 of the operation display device 7. The data for displaying is set.
After step A16, the process returns.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step A7 that the remaining amount information (remaining frequency) of the game card is less than the ball lending possible amount, the process branches to step A17 to set display data when the “ball lending” button is invalid. Thereby, the ball lending button 303 arranged on the operation display device 7 is not displayed, and ball lending to the player is not performed. At this time, a message indicating that the remaining amount (remaining frequency) is insufficient may be displayed on the message / operation area unit 306 of the operation display device 7. After step A17, the process proceeds to step A9.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step A9 that the display mode is the display of the number of balls, for example, when there is a counting ball or when the player selects the analog display of the number of balls (display imitating the ball box), The determination result of step A9 is YES. At this time, the process branches to step A18, and the process of step A18 is performed. In step A18, display data corresponding to the number of balls is set. This is data for displaying the number of balls held in the message / operation area 306 of the operation display device 7 (for example, including an analog display that looks like a ball box, a number representing the number of balls, an explanation of the number of balls held, etc.) Is set. After step A18, the process proceeds to step A19, where display data corresponding to the number of counted balls is set. This is data for displaying the counting ball number in the message / operation area unit 306 of the operation display device 7 (for example, including an analog display in which a ball box is worn, a number representing the ball number, a description of the counting ball, etc.). It is to set. After step A19, the process returns after executing step A12.
In this way, processing for performing various controls of the operation display device 7 under the management of the card unit 15 is executed.

[Return button monitoring process]
FIG. 70 is a flowchart showing the return button monitoring process of the card unit 15. When this routine is started, it is first determined in step A31 whether or not the settlement process is being performed. On the other hand, if the settlement process is not in progress, the process proceeds to step A32 to determine whether or not the return button 304 has been pressed. If the return button 304 has not been pressed in step A32, the process returns. If the return button 304 has been pressed, the process proceeds to step A33, where it is determined whether or not the payment is possible. This is determined using the gaming machine information command transmitted from the payout control device 230 described above.
If the payment is not possible in step A33, the process returns. If the payment is possible, the process proceeds to step A34, and the payment instruction flag to the payout control device 230 is set. Since the return button 304 is pressed and payment is possible, the payment instruction flag for starting the payment is set as an instruction to the payout control device 230.
That is, step A34 is for setting a command to the payout control device 230, and this settlement instruction flag is checked, and the card unit 15 sets an instruction command.
After step S34, the process proceeds to step A35, and the settlement process flag is set. The settlement process in progress flag is a flag indicating that the settlement process is in progress, and is used in the above-described step A31, a settlement process routine described later, or the like. After step A35, the process returns.

[Checkout]
FIG. 71 is a flowchart showing the settlement process of the card unit 15. When this routine is started, it is first determined in step A41 whether the settlement process is in progress. This is determined based on the checkout process flag. If the checkout process flag is set, it is determined that the checkout process is in progress, and the process proceeds to step A42. On the other hand, if the settlement process flag is not set, it is determined that the settlement process is not being performed, and the process returns.
In step A42, it is determined whether or not the information on the total number of balls has been received from the payout control device 230. This is to determine whether or not the total number of balls (number of balls held + number of balls counted) information has been received from the payout control device 230.

If reception of the total number of balls has not been completed from the payout control device 230 in step A42, the routine returns and the routine is repeated, and it is determined that reception of the information on the total number of balls has been completed from the payout control device 230. Then, the process proceeds from step A42 to step A43, and the total number of balls (number of balls held + number of balls counted) is written to the game card (recorded on the game card).
After step A43, the process proceeds to step A44, where a settlement writing completion notification flag to the payout control device 230 is set. The payment writing completion notification flag notifies the payout control device 230 of the completion of the payment writing, and the payout control device 230 that receives this clears the total number of balls (the number of held balls + the number of counted balls) to “0”. The processing corresponding to the completion of the settlement is performed.

Next, proceeding to step A45, the game card is discharged from the card slot 201. Next, in step A46, it is determined whether or not the game card has been removed. This is to determine whether or not the game card discharged from the card slot 201 has been extracted by the player. If the game card has not been extracted, the game card stays at step A46, and the game card is extracted by the player. Wait for. When it is determined that the game card has been removed by the player, the process proceeds to step A47, where a card removal completion notification flag to the payout control device 230 is set. The card removal completion notification flag notifies the payout control device 230 that the game card has been removed from the card unit 15, and the payout control device 230 that has received the card draws the holding number indicator 40 for a short time. Processing corresponding to the end of the settlement, such as flashing the number of balls, is performed.
Next, the process proceeds to Step A48, the settlement process in progress flag is cleared, and then the process returns. As a result, the settlement process in progress flag set in the previous step A35 is cleared and prepared for the next settlement.
In this way, the total number of balls held (number of balls held + number of balls counted) is recorded on the game card and discharged from the card insertion slot 201, the game card is extracted by the player, and the settlement ends.

[Machine ID verification process]
FIG. 72 is a flowchart showing the gaming machine ID collation process of the card unit 15. When this routine is started, it is first determined whether or not a gaming machine ID is received in step A61. Here, it is determined whether or not the card unit 15 has received the gaming machine ID output from the payout control device 230 when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on.
The gaming machine ID here is both a gaming machine ID (main board unique ID) of the game control device 54 (main board) and a gaming machine ID (payout board unique ID) of the payout control apparatus 230 (payout board). This is a concept including the unique identification information (the same applies to the flowchart below).
If the card unit 15 has received the gaming machine ID output from the payout control device 230, the process proceeds to step A62, and the gaming machine ID is transmitted from the card unit 15 to the external management device 91. This is because the gaming machine ID (the gaming machine ID (main board unique ID) of the gaming control device 54 (main board)) and the payout control device 230 (payout board) when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on (for example, when the game shop is opened). ) Is sent to the external management device 91 managed by an external third-party organization via the card unit 15, and the external management device 91 stores the authorized game machine ID (paid board unique ID)). The game machine ID is collated (collation for determining the legitimacy of the game machine ID), and the collation result (ID collation result) is returned to the pachinko machine 1 via the card unit 15. Therefore, in step A62, the gaming machine ID is transmitted via the card unit 15 to the external management device 91 managed by an external third party organization.
The external management device 91 collates with the regular gaming machine ID to be stored (collation for determining the legitimacy of the gaming machine ID), and returns the collation result (ID collation result) to the card unit 15. Since the external management device 91 is managed by an independent third-party organization separate from the amusement store, the accuracy and fairness of ID verification is ensured.
After step A62, the process returns.

On the other hand, when the gaming machine ID is not received at step A61, the process goes to NO and branches to step A63, and whether or not the card unit 15 has received the result of checking the gaming machine ID from the external management device 91. Determine. When the game machine ID has not been received in step A61, the game machine ID has already been received, and the waiting state of the game machine ID verification result from the external management device 91 is also included.
If the game machine ID collation result is not received in step A63, the process returns and the routine is repeated. If the game machine ID collation result is received, the process proceeds to step A64 to determine whether or not the game machine ID collation result is OK. If the matching result of the gaming machine ID is OK, unique identification information (main board ID: gaming machine ID) of the gaming control device 54 and unique identification information (paying board ID: gaming machine ID) of the payout control device 230 Is determined to be legitimate, and in step A65, information that the result of checking the gaming machine ID is OK is transmitted to the gaming machine (here, the payout control device 230). When the payout control device 230 receives information from the card unit 15 that the result of matching the gaming machine ID is OK, the payout control device 230 performs processing corresponding to the result of matching the gaming machine ID. Specifically, as described above, when the ID collation result OK is received from the card unit 15, a command for illegally closing the night frame opening is sent to the effect control board (effect control device 53) via the game control device 54. When the information indicating that the front frame 4 is opened at night is displayed on the display device 41 under the control of the effect control device 53, this is ended. As a result, although the opening of the frame is notified to prompt the store clerk to check, it is determined that the possibility of fraud is low, and the opening of the frame is ended. If the night frame opening fraud notification is not in progress, reception of the ID verification result OK is unnecessary, and the display device 41 does not display that the front frame 4 is opened at night.
After step A65, the process returns.

On the other hand, if the check result of the gaming machine ID is not OK in step A64 (that is, if the check result is NG), the process branches to step A66, and card unit error processing is performed in step A66. The state in which the matching result of the gaming machine ID is not OK is that either or both of the unique identification information (main board ID) of the game control device 54 and the unique identification information (payout board ID) of the payout control device 230 are valid. Since it is judged that it is not a thing, the possibility of fraud is high. For example, there is a high possibility that the front frame 4 is illegally opened at night and the board of the game control device 54 (or the payout control device 230) is replaced with an illegal board. For this reason, in the card unit error processing in step A66, error notification is performed on the card unit error notification LED 203 and the screen of the operation display device 7, and processing for stopping functions such as ball rental, payment, and game card acceptance is performed. A store clerk who sees the error notification displayed on the card unit error notification LED 203 or the screen of the operation display device 7 can take measures such as inspecting the pachinko machine 1 to deal with it illegally.
Further, the card unit 15 performs processing for stopping functions such as ball lending, payment, and game card reception, so that the pachinko machine 1 is not required to be operated, and damage to the game store can be prevented.
After step S66, the process returns.
Note that the card unit error process in step A66 is not limited to the process described above, and other effective processes may be used in combination or independently to prevent fraud.

Next, the operation of the first embodiment will be described.
First, the operation of the display mode of the number of balls will be described.
FIG. 73 is a view for explaining a display mode of the number of balls in the number-of-balls display 40.
In FIG. 73, timing t11 indicates the start of the game. Now, before the game start timing t11 (before the game starts), the number-of-balls display 40 is turned off, and the number of balls is not displayed (the number of balls is “0”). In addition, you may make it perform a demonstration display with the number-of-balls display 40 before the game start.
In FIG. 73, the number-of-balls memory is realized by the storage area of the RAM 233 of the payout control device 230. Similarly, the counting ball number memory is also realized by the storage area of the RAM 233 of the payout control device 230. ) Side controlled. On the other hand, the card unit 15 is controlled on the card unit 15 side separately from the gaming machine.
Next, when the player inserts a game card into the card insertion slot 201 of the card unit 15 or inserts a banknote into the cash insertion slot 202 at timing t11 (FIG. 73 shows the operation of the game card or cash insertion in H level). At the timing of the game start, the pachinko machine 1 side also determines that the game is started based on the signal from the card unit 15, and the number-of-balls display 40 lights up. At this time, since the number of held balls is 0 immediately after the game card or cash is inserted, the data in the held ball number memory and the counted ball number memory are both “0”, and the held ball number display 40 has a plurality of LEDs. “0” is turned on.

Next, after the game is started, the number of balls held is generated at timing t12. For example, when the number of balls held is 1000, the data in the ball holding memory becomes 1000, and the number of balls held display 40 is “1000”. Turn on the number of balls. Further, when the number of balls held increases or decreases as a result of the game, the data in the ball holding memory changes accordingly, and the ball holding number display 40 lights and displays the changed number of balls. In other words, during the game, the number of balls possessed is displayed by the number-of-balls display 40. Therefore, for example, when the number of balls held in the game is zero, the number of balls held display 40 displays “0” in a lit state. When the number of held balls 40 becomes 0 (the number of counted balls is also 0), “0” is lit up, but the number of held balls = 0 (the number of counted balls is also 0) after a predetermined time has elapsed. If there is no game card to return (the ball lending amount is also 0, that is, the game is over), the light is turned off.
Thereafter, the game continues and the number of balls held becomes “0” at timing t13. At this time, if there are counting balls, for example, when counting balls = 1000, the data in the holding ball number memory becomes 0, The data in the counting ball number memory is “1000”. In this case, the number of held balls = 0, but since there are counting balls, the display mode of the held ball number display device 40 changes compared to the case where the number of held balls = 0, The number of balls held “0” is displayed blinking.
Note that since the RAM 233 of the payout control device 230 is backed up by a backup power source, even if a power failure occurs, the data in the holding ball number memory and the counting ball number memory are retained during the power failure.

Thus, in this embodiment, the number of balls held is 0 before the game (before the game card or the cash is inserted), the number of balls held is 0 during the game and there is no counting ball, and the number of balls held during the game. Is changed to 0 and there is a counting ball, and the control to change the display mode of the number of balls held by the ball number display 40 is performed.
Specifically, when the number of balls held is 0 before the game (before the game card or cash is inserted), the display of the ball number display 40 is turned off, the number of balls held is 0 during the game, and there is no counting ball. In this case, the number-of-balls display 40 lights up 0, and when the number of balls held is 0 and there is a counting ball during the game, the number-of-balls display 40 performs an operation of blinking 0.
Therefore, since the difference in the state of the number of held balls 0 can be expressed only by the difference in the display mode of the held ball number display 40, there is an effect that the control efficiency is good.

The inventive concept of the above configuration is expressed as follows.
A game control device capable of enclosing a predetermined number of game balls in a gaming machine main body, launching the enclosed game balls into a gaming area and playing a game, and managing the progress of the gaming machine With
The game control device determines whether the game result is in a predetermined profit state or any other state, and in the case of a predetermined profit state, the player's profit is increased in correspondence with a predetermined number of prize balls. Let
In the enclosed ball type gaming machine that plays the game by circulating the enclosed game ball by collecting the game ball that has passed through the game area and guiding it to the launch position,
A ball number display device capable of displaying the number of balls of the player;
Display control means for controlling the display of the number-of-balls display device,
The display control means includes
An enclosed ball type gaming machine characterized in that a display mode of a ball holding number display device is changed according to the number of balls held.
Here, the payout control device 230 constitutes display control means, and the number-of-balls display 40 constitutes a number-of-balls display device.

The specific inventive concept of the above configuration is expressed as follows.
The display control means
Before the game, if the player has 0 balls,
When the player has 0 balls and no counting balls,
An encapsulated ball type gaming machine characterized in that the display mode of the number-of-balls display device is changed when the number of balls held by the player is 0 and there is a counting ball during the game.

Furthermore, the specific inventive concept of the above configuration is expressed as follows.
The display control means
If the number of balls held by the player is 0 before the game, the display on the number-of-balls display is turned off,
If the player's number of balls is 0 and there is no counting ball during the game, 0 is lit on the number-of-balls display.
An encapsulated ball type gaming machine characterized in that when a player has a ball count of 0 during a game and there is a counting ball, 0 is flashed on the ball count display device.

This background will be described.
In a conventional gaming machine, for example, one disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2006-325929, the number of balls that can be fired (stored in a gaming machine) and the number of balls held (stored in a card unit) are stored separately. Is displayed.
However, in the enclosed ball type gaming machine, when managing the number of balls held (number of balls that can be fired) and the number of balls (stored balls that cannot be temporarily fired), even if the number of balls held is zero, There is a case where there is no ball and a case where there is a counting ball.
Moreover, the above differences were not easily controlled only by the number-of-balls display. In order to inform the player of the above differences, complicated controls and devices are required.
Therefore, in this embodiment, by performing control such that the difference in the number of balls held is expressed only by the difference in the display mode of the ball number indicator 40, the control efficiency is high and the player has the control. Since the display mode of the ball number display device 40 is different, it is possible to display the number of held balls in an easy-to-understand manner.

Further, the present embodiment has the following effects.
Even if the number of balls is the same as 0, the display mode of the number of balls held in the number-of-balls display 40 is changed between before the game (before the game card or cash is inserted) and during the game. Specifically, before the game (game card or cash) If the number of balls held is zero before the start), the number of balls held display 40 is turned off. If the number of balls held is zero and there are no counting balls in the game, the number of balls held indicator 40 lights up. Since it is displayed, for example, if 0 is lit on the number-of-balls display 40, it is possible to recognize the possibility that a game card to be returned to the player is in the card unit 15. In particular, it is convenient because the presence or absence of a game card to be returned at the time of power failure recovery can be confirmed.
In addition, since the display mode of the number-of-balls display 40 is changed depending on whether the number of balls is zero or not, the number of balls held is zero in the game. The number-of-balls display 40 lights up 0, and if the number of balls held is 0 and there is a counting ball during the game, the number-of-balls display 40 flashes 0, so for example, the number-of-balls display 40 If 0 is blinking on the display, the player can recognize that there is a counting ball.
Furthermore, since the payout control device 230 backs up the display data on the number-of-balls display 40 even during a power failure, the reliability of the display on the number-of-balls display 40 can be improved.

Next, as a modification, the following configuration may be used.
(1) During the game, the number of balls possessed is lit and displayed by the number-of-balls display 40. For example, when the number of balls in the game is zero, the number of balls possessed 40 is lit and displayed as “0”. At this time, when the game card has a balance (valuable data), 0 lighting may be continued, and when there is no gaming card, 0 lighting may be stopped and extinguished for a predetermined period.
This makes it possible for the player to recognize that there is a balance on the game card even if the number of possessed balls becomes 0, and to easily recognize that the game will continue using the game card. It is possible and convenient. Further, it can be easily known that the game card has no balance by turning off 0 of the number-of-balls display 40.

Next, the operation at the time of payment with a game card will be described.
FIG. 74 is a diagram illustrating a display mode of the number-of-balls display 40 at the time of payment.
In FIG. 74, timing t21 indicates the start of the game. Now, before the game start timing t21 (before the game starts), the number-of-balls display 40 is turned off, and the number of balls is not displayed (the number of balls is “0”). In addition, before the game starts, the value of the number of balls held in the number of balls held memory (RAM 233) is also “0”.
Next, when the player inserts a game card into the card insertion slot 201 of the card unit 15 or inserts a banknote into the cash insertion slot 202 at timing t21 (FIG. 74 shows the operation of the game card or cash insertion in H level). At the timing of the game start, the pachinko machine 1 side also determines that the game is started based on the signal from the card unit 15, and the number-of-balls display 40 lights up. At this time, since the number of held balls is 0 immediately after the game card or cash is inserted, the data in the held ball number memory and the counted ball number memory are both “0”, and the held ball number display 40 has a plurality of LEDs. “0” is turned on.

Next, after the game is started, the number of balls held is generated. For example, when the number of balls held is 125, the data in the ball holding memory becomes 125, and the ball holding number display 40 displays the number of balls held “125”. Lights up. Further, when the number of balls held increases or decreases as a result of the game, the data in the ball holding memory changes accordingly, and the ball holding number display 40 lights and displays the changed number of balls. For example, when the number of held balls becomes 5000, the data in the held ball number memory becomes 5000, and the held ball number display unit 40 lights the number of held balls of “5000”.
Next, when the player starts the checkout at the timing t22, specifically, when the return button 304 of the operation display device 7 is touched for the end of the game, the checkout process is started and the total number of balls (here, the number of held balls = 5000) is recorded on the game card. Specifically, when the player presses the return button 304, the card unit 15 transmits a payment instruction to the payout control device 230 so as to start the payment. When the payout control device 230 receives the payment instruction, the total number of balls held The (number of balls held + number of balls counted) data is transmitted to the card unit 15, and the card unit 15 starts processing to record the total number of balls data on the game card.

When such a settlement is started, the number-of-balls display 40 changes the display mode from the lighting display to the movement blinking. The moving blink display of the number of balls is continued until the writing (recording) of the total number of balls on the game card is completed.
Next, when the writing of the total number of balls to the game card is completed at the timing t23, the number-of-balls display 40 changes the display mode from moving blinking to simultaneous blinking, and at the same time the number of balls is cleared. “0” and “0” display blinks simultaneously.
Thereafter, the game card is ejected from the card unit 15 when a predetermined period T11 elapses from the timing t23 at which the writing of the total number of balls to the game card is completed and at a timing t24.
Specifically, when the card unit 15 finishes recording the total number-of-balls data for the game card, the card unit 15 notifies the payout control device 230 to that effect, and the payout control device 230 stores it (for example, stores it in a predetermined area of the RAM 233). ) Clears the data such as the number of possessed balls, the number of counted balls, etc., and the settlement ends, and the game card is returned at timing t24. At this time, the number-of-balls display 40 simultaneously blinks “0” display.
Next, when the predetermined period T12 elapses from the timing t24 when the game card is discharged and the timing t25 is reached, the number-of-ball display 40 turns off the “0” display that was flashing simultaneously.
Note that since the RAM 233 of the payout control device 230 is backed up by a backup power source, even if a power failure occurs, the data in the holding ball number memory and the counting ball number memory are retained during the power failure.

In this way, when the adjustment of the number of balls is started at the time of payment with the game card, the display of the number of balls on the number-of-ball display 40 is changed from lighting display to moving blinking display, When the recording of the number is completed, the number-of-balls data is cleared and the display of the number-of-balls display 40 is changed to flashing simultaneously. In addition, the simultaneous blinking continues until the predetermined period T12 elapses after the game card is discharged, and thereafter, the number-of-balls display 40 is turned off.
Therefore, when recording of the number of balls held on the game card is completed, the display mode of the ball number indicator 40 is changed (change from moving blinking to simultaneous blinking), so the number of balls held is recorded on the game card even from the outside. It is convenient for the player because it can recognize that the game has been performed.
In addition, since the number of balls held in the changed mode (simultaneously flashing) is continued for a predetermined period (T12) after the game card is discharged, the player can check the number of balls settled during that time, which is convenient.
Since the difference in the processing state at the time of payment as described above can be expressed only by changing the display mode of the number-of-balls display 40. Control efficiency is good.
Furthermore, since the number-of-balls data of the gaming machine (pachinko machine 1) is cleared when recording of the number of balls on the gaming card is completed, the number-of-balls data is not duplicated and the security is high.

The inventive concept of the above configuration is expressed as follows.
In an enclosed ball type gaming machine that performs a game by circulating the enclosed game ball,
A ball number display device capable of displaying the number of balls of the player;
Display control means for controlling the display of the number-of-balls display device,
The display control means includes
When the game card is recorded and discharged to settle the number of balls held,
When the recording of the number of balls held on the game card is completed, the display mode of the number of balls held in the ball number display device is changed,
An encapsulated ball type gaming machine characterized by continuing display of a changed mode until a predetermined period after the gaming card is discharged.

The specific inventive concept of the above configuration is expressed as follows.
The display control means
When the settlement of the number of balls is started, the display of the number of balls on the ball number display device is changed from lighting display to moving blinking display,
When recording of the number of balls on the game card is completed, the display on the ball number display device is changed to flashing simultaneously,
The enclosed ball type gaming machine characterized in that the simultaneous flashing is continued until a predetermined period elapses after the gaming card is discharged.

This background will be described.
In the enclosed ball type gaming machine, the number of balls held is settled by operating a return button or the like, and the number of balls held is recorded on the game card.
However, when the game is ended in the enclosed ball type gaming machine, it may be difficult for the player to adjust the number of balls held.
In addition, the number of balls possessed is recorded on the game card, but the player may be anxious about whether or not the number of balls possessed is recorded on the game card.
In order to notify the player of the record on the game card as described above, complicated controls and devices are required.
Therefore, in this embodiment, by performing control such that the completion of recording of the number of balls held on the game card is expressed only by the difference in the display mode of the ball number display 40, the control efficiency is high and the player Can make it easy to understand how to adjust the number of balls.

Next, operations of the level meter left 17L and the level meter right 17R (variable display device) will be described.
FIG. 75 is a diagram for explaining the operation of the level meter left 17L and the level meter right 17R.
75A, FIG. 75A shows initial states of the display device 41, the level meter left 17L, the level meter right 17R, the display units 17a and 17b, and the sub liquid crystal display device 33 arranged on the game board 20 in the pachinko machine 1. For example, a state before the game is started. At this time, the display device 41 displays a special figure “7, 5, 3” (here, a special decoration figure), a level meter left 17L disposed on the left and right sides of the game board 20, and a level meter. In each of the right 17R, the display portions 17a and 17b are at the lowermost positions, respectively, and the reference numerals of the respective constituent members are shown in Fig. 75 (a), and complicated in Fig. 75 (b) and Fig. 75 (c). Therefore, make it the minimum necessary.
Next, when the game is started, the process shifts to FIG. 75 (b), and there is no counting ball, but during the production of the variable display game, the display device 41 reaches, for example, the symbol "7", and the middle symbol fluctuates. It is in a state. At this time, both the level meter left 17L and the level meter right 17R are used as effects, and the display units 17a and 17b operate as a reliability meter indicating the reliability of the big hit, for example. In this example, the display units 17a and 17b move up and down as indicated by arrows while operating simultaneously and moving to a relatively high position to indicate that the reliability of the big hit is high due to the occurrence of reach. Thereby, the player can know that the reliability of the jackpot is high because the positions of the display units 17a and 17b are relatively high.

  Next, when a counting ball is generated, as shown in FIG. 75C, the level meter left 17L is used for production, while the level meter right 17R is operated so as to be used for counting ball display. In the example shown in FIG. 75 (c), the level meter left 17L is used for production, and the display unit 17a is not a big hit by the end of reach, and the special drawing of the display device 41 stops at “7, 8, 7”. Thus, the vehicle stops at the lowest position where the big hit reliability is low. On the other hand, since the level meter right 17R is used for counting ball display, the display unit 17b stops at a position slightly below the center and displays the approximate number of counting balls in an analog manner. Even if a power failure occurs, the display unit 17b of the level meter right 17R maintains the position before the power failure.

As described above, the level meter left 17L and the level meter right 17R normally perform presentation display as a reliability meter for jackpots, but when there is a counting ball, the level meter right 17R switches to the counting display device and the counting ball Since analog display is performed, control is simple and efficient.
Further, the level meter left 17L and the level meter right 17R are configured such that the display units 17a and 17b can move up and down, and the one display unit 17b maintains the display position even if a power failure occurs. Since the part 17b rises, it is easy to grasp the number of counted balls sensuously.
Furthermore, even if a power failure occurs, the display unit 17b of the level meter right 17R maintains the position before the power failure, so that the display unit 17b remains in that position at the time of the power failure. It is possible to give a sense of security that the acquired game ball is held.

The inventive concept of the above configuration is expressed as follows.
Performing a game by circulating the enclosed game ball and controlling the game control device for managing the progress of the game and the display device based on the command from the game control device to perform the game In a sealed ball game machine equipped with a production control device capable of
The display unit is movable up and down, and the display unit includes a variable display device configured to maintain a display position even if a power failure occurs,
The production control device
During normal times, the effect display is performed as a reliability meter for jackpots,
When there is a counting ball, the encapsulated ball game machine is characterized in that the variable display device is controlled so as to switch to a counting display device and perform an analog display effect of the counting ball.
The level meter left 17L and the level meter right 17R constitute a variable display device.

This background will be described.
In conventional gaming machines such as those disclosed in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2006-325929, the number of balls that can be fired and the number of balls that can be fired (corresponding to the number of balls counted in this publication) Display on a liquid crystal display).
However, when the counting ball is displayed on the liquid crystal display in the enclosed ball type gaming machine, since it is a flat display, there is no real feeling that the real balls are put in a ball box and stacked. Further, in the event of a power failure, the display of the counting sphere displayed on the liquid crystal display disappears, so there is a sense of anxiety for the player.
Therefore, in this embodiment, a level meter left 17L and a level meter right 17R are provided as variable display devices, and in the normal state, the level meter left 17L and the level meter right 17R are used as a reliability meter for the big hit, and there is a counting ball. When the level meter right 17R produces an effect of displaying the counted number of balls, the control efficiency is high, and even if a power failure occurs, the level meter right 17R maintains the display position of the display unit 17b. It can give a sense of security that the ball is held.

Next, the operation of the sub liquid crystal display device 33 will be described.
FIG. 76 is a diagram for explaining the operation of the display device 41 (main liquid crystal display device) and the sub liquid crystal display device 33.
Here, the display device 41 (main liquid crystal display device) and the sub liquid crystal display device 33 constitute an effect display device, but the main liquid crystal display device (display device 41) and the sub liquid crystal display device 33 as the effect display device are used. Liquid crystal devices capable of displaying images not only in 2D (2D) display but also in 3D (3D) display are used.
As a configuration capable of 3D display, for example, a naked-eye 3D display is used. The autostereoscopic 3D display is designed to display different images on the right and left eyes on a single screen by superimposing a plate-shaped lens called lenticular lens and a vertical stripe filter (aperture grill) called parallax barrier on a normal display. It is.
The main liquid crystal display device (display device 41) and the sub liquid crystal display device 33 as the display device for presentation use a liquid crystal device that displays only 2D (two-dimensional) display and does not display 3D (three-dimensional). It may be. In this case, the 3D display character appears on the liquid crystal screen as a normal 2D display. Further, stereoscopic display (3D computer graphics) may be performed on a 2D display. A three-dimensional display in this case, for example, a three-dimensional character is also expressed as a 3D character.

In FIG. 76, FIG. 76 (a) shows a state in which there is no counting ball. For example, a game is being played, but no counting ball is generated, and the display device 41 has a special figure of “7, 5, 3” (here, A special decoration) is displayed. In addition, the fourth symbol Z is displayed on the display device 41, but the number of holdings HR is not displayed.
On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 76 (a), the sub liquid crystal display device 33 arranged on the side of the display device 41 displays the model name “CRXXX” and also displays “special” as the hold number display. “FIG. 1: 0” and “Special Figure 2: 0” are displayed. “Special figure 1: 0” means that the number of holdings of special figure 1 is 0, and “Special figure 2: 0” means that the number of holdings of special figure 2 is 0.
When there is no counting ball, not only the display of the model name but also an effect display linked with, for example, the display device 41 (main liquid crystal display device) is performed. As such an effect display, for example, as described in the flowchart of FIG. 67, “2D child character” is displayed on the display device 41 and the sub liquid crystal display device 33 when there is no counting ball.

Next, when the game progresses and a counting ball is generated as shown in FIG. 76 (b), and the number of holdings is generated, a special figure (decoration) is displayed on the display device 41 with a symbol of “1, 2, 3”, for example. Special figure) is displayed in a stopped state, and the display device 41 displays the fourth symbol Z and the four holding numbers HR. In this case, since there is a counting ball, the model name disappears on the sub liquid crystal display device 33, information on the counting ball is displayed such as “2000 counting balls”, and “special” “FIG. 1: 4” and “Special Figure 2: 0” are displayed. “Special figure 1: 4” indicates that the number of reserved figures in special figure 1 is four.
Next, when the game progresses and a reach occurs with a counting ball as shown in FIG. 76C (during special production), the display device 41 displays, for example, “7, 6 (during fluctuation), 7”. A special figure (decorative special figure) is variably displayed as a design. The display device 41 displays the fourth symbol Z and displays the number of holdings HR four.
At the time of the reach, the counting ball number display displayed on the sub liquid crystal display device 33 disappears, and the dragon K1 appears, the sub liquid crystal display device 33 moves toward the center, and the decorative pattern “6” being changed is displayed. An attacking performance is performed. The dotted line indicates the sub liquid crystal display device 33 before movement, and the solid line indicates the sub liquid crystal display device 33 after movement.
In FIG. 76 (c), the dragon K1 also appears at the top of the display device 41, and the state of attacking the decorative pattern “6” that is changing is depicted. When the reach effect is completed, the sub liquid crystal display device 33 returns to the original position, and information related to the counting sphere such as “the number of counting spheres” is continuously displayed on the sub liquid crystal display device 33.
Therefore, the sub liquid crystal display device 33 displays the counting sphere when there is a counting sphere, but even if there is a counting sphere, control is given to give priority to the use for the production.

As described above, when there is no counting ball, the sub liquid crystal display device 33 performs an effect display (an effect linked with the model name display or the main liquid crystal display device), and when there is a counting ball, displays the counting ball number. Then, control for giving priority to the effect display is performed over the counted ball number display. Further, in the display device 41 as the effect display device, an effect linked to the sub liquid crystal display device 33 is performed during a special effect such as when a reach occurs.
Therefore, the number of counted balls can be displayed on the sub-liquid crystal display device 33 for effect display controlled by the gaming machine (pachinko machine 1), which is efficient. Further, since the display is made on the sub liquid crystal display device 33 in the vicinity of the center of the board surface of the game board 20, it is easy for the player to see, and the effect of production can be enhanced in conjunction with the display device 41.
Also, in the display device 41, an effect linked to the sub liquid crystal display device 33 is performed during the special effect, so that the interest of the game can be further enhanced.

The inventive concept of the above configuration is expressed as follows.
It is possible to play the game by circulating the enclosed game balls and to control the game control device for managing the progress of the game and the display device for the effect based on the command from the game control device. In a sealed ball game machine equipped with a production control device,
A main liquid crystal display device and a sub liquid crystal display device as the display device for presentation,
The production control device
Control the effect of the main liquid crystal display device so that a variable display game including the occurrence of a special game state can be executed by variably displaying decorative symbols for effects set in multiple types and stopping.
For the sub liquid crystal display device, when there is no counting ball, a predetermined effect display is performed,
Enclosed ball type characterized in that when there is a counting ball, the effect is controlled so that the effect display related to the effect of the main liquid crystal display device is prioritized over the counting ball number display while allowing the counting ball number to be displayed. Gaming machine.
Here, the display device 41 constitutes a main liquid crystal display device, and the display device 41 and the sub liquid crystal display device 33 constitute an effect display device.

This background will be described.
In conventional gaming machines such as those disclosed in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2006-325929, the number of balls that can be fired and the number of balls that can be fired (corresponding to the number of balls counted in this publication) Display on a liquid crystal display).
However, when displaying the number of counted balls on a card unit management operation display device (touch panel) that has functions such as displaying the remaining amount of a prepaid card, a ball lending switch, and a card return switch in an enclosed ball type gaming machine, from the gaming machine side It is necessary to transmit the ball number data periodically, and there is a risk of malfunctions and fraud in communication between the gaming machine / card unit.
Therefore, it is more efficient to manage the counting ball with the gaming machine, and fraud is also reduced.
Therefore, in this embodiment, by enabling the display of the counted number of balls on the sub-liquid crystal display device 33 for effect display controlled by the gaming machine (pachinko machine 1), the security is higher than that displayed by the control of the card unit, It also improves efficiency.

Further, the present embodiment has the following effects.
Since the sub liquid crystal display device 33 is arranged in the game board 20, it is easy for the player to watch, the eyes are less tired, and the burden is small.
Since the effect display linked to the display device 41 (main liquid crystal display device) is prioritized over the counting ball number display, the effect linked to the display device 41 (main liquid crystal display device) is not disturbed, and the interest of the game is enhanced. be able to.
Next, as a modification, the sub liquid crystal display device 33 may not only display the number of counted balls, but also may display the number of balls, for example. This is convenient because the player knows the number of balls held in addition to the number of counted balls.

Next, of the operations of the sub liquid crystal display device 33, the control operation for changing the effect according to the number of counted balls will be described.
FIG. 77 is a diagram for explaining the operation of the display device 41 (main liquid crystal display device) and the sub liquid crystal display device 33.
In FIG. 77, FIG. 77 (a) shows a state in which there is no counting ball. For example, a game is being played, but no counting ball is generated. A special decoration) is displayed. In addition, the fourth symbol Z is displayed on the display device 41, but the number of holdings HR is not displayed.
The display device 41 displays a 2D child giraffe character K11. This indicates that when there is no counting ball, a 2D child character (for example, a 2D child Giraud character K11 shown in the figure) appears to produce an effect. The sub liquid crystal display device 33 may also display a 2D child's giraffe character for presentation. However, for convenience of explanation, the display of the 2D child's giraffe character on the sub liquid crystal display device 33 is omitted. When there is no counting ball in this way, an effect of causing a 2D child character to appear on the display device 41 or the sub liquid crystal display device 33 is performed.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 77 (a), the sub liquid crystal display device 33 displays the model name "CROOXX" and displays the number of reservations as "Special Figure 1: 0" and "Special Figure 2: “0” is displayed. “Special figure 1: 0” means that the number of holdings of special figure 1 is 0, and “Special figure 2: 0” means that the number of holdings of special figure 2 is 0.
When there is no counting ball, not only the display of the model name but also an effect display linked with, for example, the display device 41 (main liquid crystal display device) is performed. As such an effect display, for example, when there is no counting ball, a 2D child's giraffe character is displayed on the sub liquid crystal display device 33. In this case, since the display device 41 (main liquid crystal display device) also displays the 2D child's Giraud character K11, it is related to the 2D child's Giraud character displayed on the sub liquid crystal display device 33. Linked to the production.

Next, when the game progresses and 1000 counting balls are generated as shown in FIG. 77 (b), and the number of reserves is generated, the display device 41 has a special symbol “1, 2, 3”. The figure (decorative special figure) is stopped and displayed, and further, the display device 41 displays the fourth symbol Z and the four hold numbers HR.
Further, when 1000 counting balls are generated, the model name disappears on the sub liquid crystal display device 33, information on the counting balls such as “1000 counting balls” is displayed, and the holding number display is “ “Special figure 1: 4” and “Special figure 2: 0” are displayed. “Special figure 1: 4” indicates that the number of reserved figures in special figure 1 is four. In addition, a 2D adult Giraud character K12 appears on the sub liquid crystal display device 33. This shows the effect that the counting ball has increased by performing the effect that the character has grown and become an adult rather than the 2D child's Jiro character displayed without the counting ball.

Next, the 2D adult jiro character K12 that appears on the sub liquid crystal display device 33 pops out at a certain timing and moves toward the display device 41 as indicated by an arrow, and the 2D adult jirow character K12 is displayed on the display device. A large number are displayed on the screen 41, and an effect such as a group notice of the so-called Giro character K12 is performed. In FIG. 77 (b), for convenience of explanation, the sub liquid crystal display device 33 also draws a 2D adult jiro character K12 immediately before popping out.
Thereby, the player can enjoy the effect (here, the group notice) related to the new character (2D adult Giraud character K12) on the display device 41. That is, from the performance of the 2D child's Giraud character K11 displayed in the absence of the counting ball, a new character (2D adult Giraud character that has grown into an adult with the increase of the counting ball as the counting ball increases) By performing the group notice effect in which a large number of K12) appear, the effect that the counting ball has increased is shown, and the player will be able to enjoy the game by increasing the counting ball and enjoy the game. improves.

Next, when the game progresses and a reach occurs with a counting ball as shown in FIG. 77C (during special production), the display device 41 displays, for example, “7, 6 (during change), 7”. A special figure (decorative special figure) is variably displayed as a design. The display device 41 displays the fourth symbol Z and displays the number of holdings HR four.
In this scene, since there are 2000 counting balls, another new 2D monster character K13 appears on the sub liquid crystal display device 33, and the 2D monster character K13 pops out. As indicated by the arrow, the display device 41 moves and the 2D monster character K13 is displayed on the display device 41.
In FIG. 77 (c), the character K13 of the 2D monster (dragon) is initially displayed on the sub liquid crystal display device 33, but after that it moves to the display device 41 and disappears, and then disappears. ) Is displayed on the display device 41. Then, an effect is produced in which the 2D monster (dragon) character K13 crosses the screen of the display device 41 and collides with the changing symbol “6” and moves upward.
Therefore, when the number of counting balls increases from 1000, for example, to 2000, another new 2D monster character K13 appears on the sub liquid crystal display device 33 in place of the 2D adult Jiro character K12. As a result, the player can enjoy a new performance as the number of counting balls increases.
The sub liquid crystal display device 33 continues to display information relating to the counting sphere such as “the number of counting spheres is 2,000”.

Thus, in the sub liquid crystal display device 33, when there is no counting ball, the effect display (the model name display and the effect linked with the main liquid crystal display device) is performed, and the display device 41 as the effect display device and the sub display. In the liquid crystal display device 33, the presence of the counting ball or the effect of changing the effect content (the appearance of the character and the growth of the character) is controlled according to the number of counting balls.
Further, in the display device 41 as the effect display device, an effect linked to the sub liquid crystal display device 33 is performed during a special effect such as when a reach occurs.
Therefore, since the sub liquid crystal display device 33 has a counting ball or changes the effect contents depending on the number of counting balls, the player tries to increase the number of counting balls, leading to an improvement in the operation of the gaming machine.
Also, there is a sub liquid crystal display device 33 in the vicinity of the display device 41 as the main liquid crystal display device, and the number of counting balls is displayed on the sub liquid crystal display device 33 and the contents of the effect are changed depending on the number of counting balls. Is easy to recognize the increase or decrease of the counting ball.

The inventive concept of the above configuration is expressed as follows.
It is possible to play the game by circulating the enclosed game balls and to control the game control device for managing the progress of the game and the display device for the effect based on the command from the game control device. In a sealed ball game machine equipped with a production control device,
A main liquid crystal display device and a sub liquid crystal display device as the display device for presentation,
The sub liquid crystal display device is disposed in the vicinity of the main liquid crystal display device,
The production control device
The effect is controlled so that the sub liquid crystal display device displays the counting ball number, and the main liquid crystal display device or the sub liquid crystal display device is controlled based on the presence of the counting ball number or at least one of the counting ball number. An enclosed ball type gaming machine characterized by performing control to change at least one effect among them.

This background will be described.
In a conventional gaming machine, for example, one disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 9-182848, the jackpot reliability is notified by displaying the character so as to change according to the reach variation period.
However, it seems that it is necessary to differentiate the enclosed ball type gaming machine from the actual ball type gaming machine in order to popularize it. In addition, since there is no real feeling that the actual ball comes out on the upper plate in the enclosed ball type gaming machine, it is necessary to enhance the effect on the game, and the number of balls held (number of balls that can be fired) and counting balls (temporarily launched) It is necessary to devise ways to make it easier to understand the number of storage balls that cannot be stored) and to link with production, and to improve the operation of gaming machines.
Therefore, in this embodiment, the display device 41 as the display device for display and the sub liquid crystal display device 33 have a counting ball, or by controlling the effect of changing the effect content according to the number of counting balls, it is possible for the player. This makes it easier to recognize the increase or decrease of the counting ball, which leads to improved operation of the gaming machine.

Next, as a modification, the following configuration may be used.
(1) Using the display device 41 and the sub liquid crystal display device 33 as an effect display device, when the number of counting balls is reduced, an effect that creates a special reach and creates an atmosphere to continue the game. You may make it the structure to perform. If it does so, a player will continue a game and will try to increase the number of count balls, and it will also lead to the improvement of operation of a game machine.
(2) The display device 41 and the sub liquid crystal display device 33 as the display device for effects may be used to display the number of balls, for example. This is convenient because the number of balls held is also known.
Further, the control may be made to change the contents of the effects of the display device 41 and the sub liquid crystal display device 33 as the effect display devices depending on the number of balls.
(3) Depending on the number of firings (or the number of outs), control of changing the effect contents of the display device 41 as the effect display device and the sub liquid crystal display device 33 may be performed.
(4) The sub liquid crystal display device 33 may be omitted, and the display control may be performed using the display device 41 as the display device for effect.

Next, the operation of controlling the polishing of the encapsulated sphere will be described.
FIG. 78 shows a timing chart of the operation of polishing control of the encapsulated sphere when the pachinko machine 1 is activated.
Normally, at game stores around 11:00 pm (or even before), the business is stopped due to the operation of the gaming machines, the power supply of each gaming machine is shut off and the store is closed, and then the inside of the store and the table are cleaned and cleaned up. Prepare for the next business day.
Now, when the pachinko machine 1 is started and the power supply 58 starts to supply power when the game store is opened, the payout control device 230 (payout substrate) transmits a polishing start command to the game control device 54 when the power is turned on. When the game control device 54 (main board) receives the polishing start command from the payout control device 230, it transmits a polishing start command (shown as a single pulse in FIG. 78) to the effect control device 53 at timing t1. When the production control device 53 receives the polishing start command from the game control device 54, the production control device 53 instructs the polishing control device 59 to start polishing, and displays on the screen of the display device 41 from reception of the polishing start command to reception of the polishing stop command. Control to do.
On the other hand, the dispensing control device 230 stops the firing of the encapsulated sphere when the polishing start command is transmitted when the power is turned on, and the sphere cannot be fired as shown in FIG. The ball cannot be fired until the polishing control command is transmitted from the game control device 54 to the effect control device 53.

When the polishing control device 59 receives a polishing instruction from the effect control device 53, the determination result in step P71 (whether there is a polishing start instruction) in the flowchart shown in FIG. 68 becomes YES, and the processing after step P72 is executed.
Next, when a predetermined time T0 has elapsed from timing t1 and timing t2 is reached, as shown in FIG. 78, the switching solenoid 79S of the switching valve 79 changes the circulation path of the enclosed sphere from the “normal side” to the “polishing side”. Switch to. As a result, the switching solenoid 79S of the switching valve 79 slides a part of the ball feed channel 78 to open the polishing guide port 80a, and the encapsulated sphere present in the sensor channel 77 and the ball feed channel 78 is polished by gravity. It moves to the lower polishing inflow guide path 80 through the guide port 80 a and is guided to the polishing device 56 through the polishing inflow guide path 80, and the filled ball starts to flow into the polishing apparatus 56.
In addition, the polishing motor 70 is started (turned from OFF to ON) at the same timing t2. As a result, the ball that has flowed into the polishing device 56 is polished by the polishing member 74 disposed inside while being lifted by the lifting screw 73 by the power of the polishing motor 70, and is passed from the upper outlet 75 via the polishing outlet switch 76. The encapsulated spheres are sequentially polished.

On the other hand, as described above, when the production control device 53 receives the polishing start command from the game control device 54, it instructs the polishing control device 59 to start polishing, and also displays from the polishing start command reception to the polishing stop command reception. Control is performed so that the screen 41 is displayed during polishing. As a result, as shown in FIG. 79 (a), the display device 41 displays a message “While the encapsulated sphere is being polished. Further, as shown in FIG. 79 (a), a progress display SJ indicating the progress of polishing of the encapsulated sphere (the hatched portion indicates completion of polishing and the rest indicates the state of polishing) is shown below the message. Done. Therefore, the store clerk can easily grasp the progress of polishing of the encapsulated sphere.
Note that the notification of the progress of the encapsulated sphere or the progress of the polishing is not limited to the display effect by the display device 41, but may be configured to be notified by, for example, a decorative lamp other than the display device 41. Or the structure which alert | reports with an audio | voice or a sound effect may be sufficient.

In response to a polishing instruction from the effect control device 53, the polishing control device 59 performs processing necessary for polishing the encapsulated sphere, such as driving the polishing motor 70 and operating the switching solenoid 79S, for a predetermined time period T1, thereby playing the game ball Polishing is performed.
That is, the polishing of the encapsulated sphere is executed until a predetermined time T1 elapses from the timing t2. Meanwhile, the sphere discharged from the upper outlet 75 of the polishing apparatus 56 to the sensor flow path 77 is detected by the polishing outlet switch 76. Since the polishing outlet switch 76 is turned from OFF to ON every time one sphere discharged from the upper outlet 75 to the sensor flow path 77 is detected, it is input to the polishing controller 59 in the form of a pulse signal as shown in FIG. Is done.
If the polishing outlet switch 76 does not detect the discharge of the sphere from the upper outlet 75 for a certain time or more, it is abnormal such as a clogging of the balls in the polishing device 56, so the polishing motor 70 is stopped. To prevent abnormal heating of FIG. 78 shows a case where the polishing outlet switch 76 has detected a sphere normally discharged from the upper outlet 75.
Next, when a predetermined time T1 elapses from timing t2, and timing t3 is reached, it is determined that the encapsulated sphere has been sufficiently polished, and the switching solenoid 79S of the switching valve 79 changes the circulation path of the encapsulated sphere from the “polishing side”. Switch to “Normal”. As a result, the switching solenoid 79S of the switching valve 79 is turned off, and the switching valve 59 is displaced to a position where the valve body is urged by the spring to close the polishing guide port 80a. Since the polishing guide port 80 a is closed, the encapsulated sphere does not flow into the polishing device 56 without moving to the lower polishing inflow guide path 80. During this time, the polishing motor 70 is operating.

In other words, the polishing motor 70 is operating even after the timing t3 has elapsed, so that the switching solenoid 79S of the switching valve 79 is switched to the “normal side” from the “polishing side” and thus remains inside the polishing apparatus 56. A period is secured until all balls being polished are discharged.
When all of the balls being polished inside the polishing apparatus 56 are discharged, the detection signal of the polishing outlet switch 76 is turned off, and thereafter the detection signal remains off.
Next, when the predetermined time T2 elapses from the timing t3 and reaches the timing t4, the polishing motor 70 stops operating (OFF). At a timing t4, a predetermined period T2 has elapsed since the switching solenoid 79S of the switching valve 79 was switched from the “polishing side” to the “normal side”, and a predetermined period after the detection signal of the polishing outlet switch 76 was finally turned off. It is the time when T3 has elapsed. As described above, when the predetermined period T3 has elapsed since the detection signal of the polishing outlet switch 76 was last turned off (timing t4), the operation of the polishing motor 70 is stopped, whereby the ball inside the polishing apparatus 56 is stopped. After confirming that all the balls being polished have been discharged, the polishing motor 70 is stopped, so that the enclosing balls are not left in the polishing device 56.

On the other hand, the payout control device 230 transmits a polishing end command to the game control device 54 at a timing when the predetermined period T1 + T2 elapses, and when the game control device 54 receives the polishing end command from the payout control device 230, it polishes to the effect control device 53. An end command (indicated by a single pulse in FIG. 78) is transmitted. When the production control device 53 receives the polishing end command from the game control device 54, the production control device 53 controls the display device 41 to display the completion of polishing. This timing is t4.
That is, at timing t4, as shown in FIG. 79 (b), a message “polishing of the encapsulated sphere has been completed” is displayed on the display device 41 and notified to a store clerk or the like. Further, as shown in FIG. 79 (b), the state where the polishing is completed is displayed below the message by the progress display SJ indicating the progress of the polishing of the encapsulated sphere. Here, as the progress state, the progress display SJ is all hatched so that the hatched portion indicates the completion of polishing, and the state where the polishing is completed is displayed. Therefore, the store clerk can easily grasp that the polishing of the encapsulated sphere has been completed.

Thus, when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the path of the encapsulated sphere is switched to the “polishing side” for a predetermined time T1, and the encapsulating sphere is polished by the polishing device 56. While the game ball is being polished, the ball is stopped from firing and the game cannot be played. Next, when the polishing of the encapsulated sphere is completed, the game is ready, and the encapsulated sphere is circulated without going through the polishing device 56 during the game.
The game control device 54 (main substrate) and the payout control device 230 simply issue a polishing start command and a polishing stop command to the effect control device 53, and the polishing control device 59 (the polishing device 56 is also controlled under the control of the effect control device 53. Control) is performed to polish the encapsulated sphere, so that the control burden on the game control device 54 (main board) and the payout control device 230 can be reduced, and the efficiency is improved.
Further, the polishing control device 59 (including the polishing device 56) inputs information to the game control device 54 (main board) and the payout control device 230 (for example, information such as signal input, data input, command input). The polishing control device 59 (including the polishing device 56) is “sub-configured”. Therefore, by substituting it, there is a merit that the limitation of ROM capacity and the limitation of parts are relaxed.
As a modification, the polishing control device 59 may be configured to perform polishing control of the encapsulated sphere based solely on the information of the internal RTC.
This is because there is no instruction input from the outside to the polishing control device 59, and there is no input to the game control device 54 (main board) or the payout control device 230 from the effect control device 53 or the polishing control device 59. The polishing control device 59 controls the operation of the polishing device 56 based on the internal RTC information to polish the encapsulated sphere. A configuration in which no input from the effect control device 53 or the polishing control device 59 to the game control device 54 (main board) or the payout control device 230 corresponds to sub-configuration.
In the above, polishing of the encapsulated sphere can be realized by supplying power to the polishing control device 59 and the polishing device 56 with a battery or the like after the store is closed.
In this way, the control burden on the game control device 54 (main board) and the payout control device 230 can be reduced, and the efficiency is improved and the effect of “sub-setting” is also obtained.

Next, FIG. 80 is a diagram showing an operation example of the operation display device 7 regarding the display of the number of balls held and the number of counted balls.
In the description of FIG. 80, the concept of scene is used in the progress of the game, and scenes J1 to J4 shown in FIG. 80 are the number of balls displayed on the operation display device 7 and the number of balls displayed during the game, and the effect screen. This is a concept representing a scene of the entire production operation including a button screen and the like.
First, a scene J1 in FIG. 80 shows the operations of the operation display device 7 and the number-of-balls display 40 at the normal time. That is, in the scene J1, the operation display device 7 includes a ball lending rate display 301, a remaining amount display 302, a ball lending button 303, a return button 304, a storage / replay button 305, a message / operation area unit 306, and a switching button. A state in which 307 is arranged is shown, and a ball count indicator 40 is arranged below the operation display device 7.
80 shows a state in which a counting switch 311, a break switch 312, a counting ball use switch 314, and a counting ball display 313 are arranged on the side of the ball holding number display 40.
In addition, in the description after the scene J2, since the above-described encoding becomes complicated, it is omitted.

In the scene J1, as an example of the normal time, the remaining amount display unit 302 displays the remaining amount “5000 yen”, so that the player knows that the balance of the gaming card is “5000 yen”. . In addition, the number of balls possessed 40 disposed below the operation display device 7 is digitally displayed with the number “6500” as the number of balls possessed. Thereby, the player knows that the current number of balls is 6500.
On the other hand, in the message / operation area section 306, a message “Please press the count button to count” is displayed, and a message “Number of balls ↓ Can be fired” is displayed below this message. Thus, the player is informed that a game based on the number of balls possessed is possible. Thereby, it is understood that the player has 6500 own balls and can play a pachinko game by firing the number of balls held.
In the state of scene J1, there is no counting ball number, and no counting ball number is displayed. Therefore, the counting ball display 313 is not lit.

Next, when the player presses the counting switch 311 and counts the number of balls, the process proceeds to the scene J2. Scene J2 shows a case where the player has pushed the counting switch 311 and counted 6000 out of 6500 balls. Accordingly, 500 balls remain and the number of counting balls is 6000, and the state is displayed as 500 on the holding ball number display 40, and digitally displays “counting ball 6000” in the message / operation area 306. The player is notified by the display of “pieces”. Further, the same number of counting balls as the digitally displayed counting spheres (6000) displayed in the message / operation area 306 is displayed in an analog form in the form of the message box 306 of the operation display device 7 in the shape of the ball box T. Is done. In addition, since the code | symbol T attached | subjected to a ball box becomes complicated, it is attached | subjected when it thinks that it is required on account of description.
In the scene J2, four ball boxes T are displayed, and are displayed in an analog form with a figure deceiving that 6000 counting balls exist in the four ball boxes T. Since there are 6000 counting balls, the figure is such that counting balls are collected in all four ball boxes T.
Thereby, the player can easily count the number of balls and move it to the counting ball by a simple operation of pressing the counting switch 311, which is convenient. In addition, the counting sphere moved from the number of possessed balls is displayed in an analog form in the form of a ball box in the message / operation area 306, so that intuitive counting of the counting sphere can be performed smoothly. In particular, since the message / operation area 306 is larger than the number-of-balls indicator 40, the number of counted balls can be grasped more easily.
In addition, when the scene J2 is entered, the counting ball indicator 313 is lit (LED lighting) because the counting ball number is generated. Thereby, the player can easily confirm that the counting ball number exists by looking at the counting ball display 313.

In addition, when displaying the number of spheres in an analogy with a figure in which the ball box T is displayed on the message / operation area 306, the following display mode is used in this embodiment.
・ Tama box full display: Number of balls = 1500 ・ Twin box half display: Number of balls = 750 to less than 1500 Therefore, the ball rental rate display 301 always displays a rate of “ball rental: 4 yen per ball”. Further, the remaining amount (for example, “5000 yen”) is always displayed on the remaining amount display 302.

Next, when the player starts the game by firing the number of balls, the process moves to the scene J3.
The scene J3 shows a state where the player has fired the number of balls and the remaining number of balls has reached 30. At this time, since the remaining number of balls is 30 and the number of counted balls is 6000, the number of balls held in the scene J2 is fired from 500 to 470, and the remaining number of balls is 30. State. This state is displayed as 30 on the number-of-balls display 40, and the message / operation area 306 is digitally displayed with "6000 counting balls" to notify the player.
Since there are only 30 remaining balls, the message / operation area 306 displays “If you want to use a counting ball, please press the counting ball number button → it will move to 100 balls at a time. Is displayed. This is to notify that the movement from the counted number of balls to the number of held balls is possible because the remaining number of held balls has decreased.

Next, as shown in the scene J4, when the player presses the counting ball use switch 314 and selects the movement from the counting ball number to the holding ball number, 100 counting balls move to the holding ball number by one operation. . At this time, the counting ball use switch 314 notifies that the built-in LED is lit and that the counting ball use switch 314 is usable (that is, the movement from the counting ball number to the holding ball number is possible).
When the player operates the counting ball use switch 314 once, as shown in the scene J4, as a result of the movement of 100 counting balls to the number of holding balls, the number of holding balls becomes 130, and the number of counting balls is 5900. Therefore, this state is displayed as 130 on the number-of-balls display 40, and the message “operational ball 100 has moved to the number of balls” is digitally displayed on the message / operation area 306, so that the player To be notified.

As described above, when the number of balls held during the game of the pachinko machine 1 is generated, the number of balls held by the player is displayed on the ball number display 40. At this time, the lower panel 6 of the pachinko machine 1 is displayed. When the counting switch 311 arranged on the button is pressed, the number of balls held is counted and becomes the number of counted balls, which is displayed on the message / operation area 306 of the operation display device 7 (for example, digital display (numbers) of the number of counted balls) ) And an analog display (analog display with a figure that looks like a ball box) is displayed. When the counting ball number is present, the counting ball display 313 is lit to notify.
In this state, if the player wants to return from the counting ball to the number of balls held, the counting ball use switch 314 is operated once by pressing the counting ball use switch 314, so that 100 counting balls have the number of balls held. Move to. When the number of counting balls is present, the counting ball indicator 313 is lit, so that the player can know. In addition, the counting ball use switch LED built in the counting ball use switch 314 is turned on when the ball can move from the counting ball number to the holding ball number, so that the player also has the counting ball number. I understand that. The case of returning from the counting ball to the number of balls held corresponds to the concept of moving the ball from the so-called ball box to the upper plate.
Thereby, the player can play again using the number of balls moved. Further, the movement from the counting ball to the number of possessed balls is displayed in the message / operation area 306 of the operation display device 7.
Therefore, the player can move the counting ball from the counting ball to the number of holding balls by a simple operation of pressing the counting ball use switch 314, which is convenient. Further, since the explanation of the number of balls held, the display of the number of counted balls, and the usage explanation are performed by the operation display device 7 managed by the card unit 15, the burden on the game control device 54 and the payout control device 230 of the pachinko machine 1 is reduced, Efficiency is good.

Next, the operation of the decorative ball display device 250 will be described with reference to FIG.
When the number of balls is generated during the game of the pachinko machine 1, the decoration with the many LEDs of the upper decoration ball display device 250a and the lower decoration ball display device 250b in the decoration ball display device 250 is performed.
Specifically, as shown in FIG. 81, the decorative ball display device 250 is divided into an upper decorative ball display device 250a, a lower decorative ball display device 250b, and a counting decoration unit 250c. Is performed as follows.
<Upper decorative ball display device 250a>
The upper decorative ball display device 250a is designed to create an image of a so-called upper plate and is arranged on the upper side of the operation display device 7, and is composed of a large number of LEDs. In the upper decorative ball display device 250a, for example, when the number of balls held by the player is zero, all LEDs are turned off. All the LEDs move and blink during the ball launch game. When the number of balls held by the player is 100 or more, as shown by the arrows in FIG. 81, all the LEDs are lit or blinking, and when the number of held balls is 50 or less, half of all the LEDs are The decoration is controlled so that it is turned off.
The example in FIG. 81 shows that the number of balls held by the player is 100 or more and all LEDs of the upper decorative ball display device 250a are lit. As a result, the player can instantly and easily know the approximate number of balls by simply looking at the lighting state of all the LEDs in the upper decorative ball display device 250a.
In particular, since the upper decorative ball display device 250a is an image of an upper plate and is arranged on the upper side of the operation display device 7, it matches the sense of the number of balls that can be fired and enhances the interest of the player's game. be able to.

<Lower decorative ball display device 250b>
The lower decorative ball display device 250b is designed to create an image of a so-called ball box, and is disposed on the lower side of the operation display device 7 (below the ball number display 40). The LED is turned on according to the number of counting balls.
That is, in the lower decorative ball display device 250b, for example, when the number of counted balls = 0, all the LEDs are turned off. In the lower decorative ball display device 250b, the LEDs are lit in order from the lower part of the lower decorative ball display device 250b which is an image of a ball box according to the number of counted balls. Decoration control that is understood by the person is performed.
For example, as shown in FIG. 81, the lower decorative ball display device 250b is configured such that all the LEDs are stacked in six stages, and the ball counting the number of balls is turned on in order from the bottom while turning on the LEDs. The image that accumulates in is coming out.
In the example of FIG. 81, the number of counted balls accumulates from the lower side of the lower decorative ball display device 250b to the position of the second stage LED, and as shown by the arrows in FIG. It shows how they are doing. Thereby, the player can see the approximate count ball number instantly only by seeing to which part all the LEDs of the lower decorative ball display device 250b are lit (that is, depending on the number of LEDs lit). is there.

<Counting decoration part 250c>
The counting decoration unit 250c is disposed at a portion that connects the upper decorative ball display device 250a and the lower decorative ball display device 250b, and is held from the upper decorative ball display device 250a toward the lower decorative ball display device 250b. Designed to create an image of flowing spheres counting the number of balls. At this time, when the player operates the counting switch 311, the ball having counted the number of balls is directed from the upper decorative ball display device 250 a toward the lower decorative ball display device 250 b that looks like a ball box. The decoration control is performed so that the LED of the counting decoration unit 250c is moved and blinked so as to move. Therefore, the player feels as if the number of balls is counted and the counting ball moves from the upper decorative ball display device 250a, which is an image of an upper plate, to the lower decorative ball display device 250b, which is an image of a ball box. Can have fun and play games.
In this way, since the decoration of the number of balls held and the number of counted balls is performed using a large number of LEDs in the decorative ball display device 250, the expression of the number of balls held and the number of counted balls close to the real ball is given to the player. can do. Therefore, the player can easily understand the number of balls held and the number of balls counted.
The decorative ball display device 250 is not limited to the decorative control as described above. For example, the decorative control that changes the color of the LED to be lit or changes from lighting to blinking according to the number of counting balls. May be performed. Further, since the decorative ball display device 250 is controlled by the effect control device 53, the burden on the game control device 54 and the payout control device 230 is reduced (simply transmitting the number of balls and counting balls) and efficiency. Is good.

Next, among the operations of the first embodiment, an operation for countermeasures against fraud of the pachinko machine 1 will be described.
In the first embodiment, the nighttime monitoring switch 126 is provided in the pachinko machine 1, and the nighttime monitoring switch 126 is a sensor that can detect that the front frame 4 is opened and the game control device 54 is removed. The monitoring information (frame opening information) and the removal monitoring information of the game control device 54 are retained even when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is shut off.
Therefore, especially when the game hall is closed and the front frame 4 of the pachinko machine 1 is opened at night, the night monitoring switch 126 displays the frame opening information detected when the front frame 4 is opened at night. Will also hold.
When the game control device 54 of the pachinko machine 1 is removed at night when the game hall is closed, the night monitoring switch 126 detects the removal of the game control device 54 (the backup power source 321 by the disconnection detection means 323). When the disconnection of the current loop is detected, the removal monitoring information of the game control device 54 that has detected the removal of the game control device 54 is retained even at night.
It should be noted that the night monitoring switch 126 stores only information on the opening of the front frame 4 or disconnection of the current loop (removal of the game control device 54).
Here, the night monitoring switch 126 detects the opening of the front frame 4 and the removal of the game control device 54 by the backup power source 321 even when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off (for example, at night), and retains the data. It is possible.
In addition, the frame opening information and the removal monitoring information of the game control device 54 that has detected the removal of the game control device 54 are combined and expressed as “night monitoring information” in the sense of information stored when the main power is off (nighttime) (see FIG. 8 and FIG. 82), however, since the explanation includes detection information of the daytime state in which the game hall is opened, it is divided into the frame opening information and the game monitoring device 54 removal monitoring information. Explains.
The night monitoring switch 126 has two types of output lines: normal frame opening information output and night monitoring information (night frame opening information and gaming control device 54 removal monitoring information) output.

Next, when the pachinko machine 1 is activated by turning on the power (turning on the main power) the next morning, the monitoring information (frame opening information) of the front frame 5 that monitors the opening of the front frame 4 at night, and the game control device 54 The removal monitoring information of the game control device 54 that has monitored the removal is read into the payout control device 230 when the payout control device 230 reads the output signal from the night monitoring switch 126. A certain amount of time is required for start-up preparation (for example, prohibition of all interrupts, initial setting of CPU peripheral circuits (including serial ports), etc.) from the time the power is turned on. Then, when the frame opening information and the removal monitoring information of the game control device 54 are input to the payout control device 230 from the night monitoring switch 126 during the start-up preparation period, there is a possibility that the information cannot be taken in.
Therefore, the night monitoring switch 126 is provided with output delay means 325, and the frame opening information and the removal monitoring information of the game control device 54 stored when the main power supply is cut off after the main power supply is started. The data is output to the external payout control device 230 after being delayed by a predetermined period from the main power-on timing.
Therefore, after the start-up preparation period of the payout control device 230 elapses, the frame opening information of the night monitoring switch 126 and the removal monitoring information of the game control device 54 are taken into the payout control device 230, and each piece of information is taken in. There is no fear that there will be no frame, and the frame opening information and the removal monitoring information of the game control device 54 can be surely captured.

FIG. 82 shows a timing chart of an operation for dealing with an illegal use using such a night monitoring switch 126.
In FIG. 82, the operation will be described using timings t31 to t34.
In FIG. 82, the main power source is a power source supplied from the power source device 58 (see FIG. 6) in the pachinko machine 1 at a normal time (when power is supplied to the pachinko machine 1). 230 indicates a power source that supplies power to each device, electronic device, sensor, and the like. In addition to the main power supply, the power supply device 58 also includes a backup power supply that is supplied to the RAM 113 of the game control device 54 and the RAM 233 of the payout control device 230 when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off. The night monitoring switch 126 includes a backup power source 321 inside.
When the main power supply is turned on, the pachinko machine 1 is activated.
FIG. 82 shows the flow of time from a state before the main power source is turned on, for example, when the game store before the main power source is turned on is also at night.

Normally, at game stores around 11:00 pm (or even before), the business is stopped due to the operation of the gaming machines, the power supply of each gaming machine is shut off and the store is closed, and then the inside of the store and the table are cleaned and cleaned up. Prepare for the next business day.
However, a suspicious person enters at night when the game store is closed, and for example, the fraud such as opening the front frame 4 of the pachinko machine 1 and attaching an illegal board or the like, or removing the game control device 54. Sometimes done. If the game control device 54 is removed, there is a risk of unauthorized modification.
As shown in FIG. 82, at the timing t31 at night before the timing t32 at which the main power is turned on (for example, at the start of preparation for opening the amusement store), a suspicious person enters, for example, the front frame of the pachinko machine 1 When the act of opening 4 and attaching an illegal board or the like is performed, the night monitoring switch 126 detects the opening of the front frame 4 (the frame opening information becomes OFF data when the opening is detected). The opening information of the front frame 4 is held by the night monitoring switch 126 (held by the frame opening and disconnection storage means 324) even when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is shut off.
In the example of FIG. 82, the front frame 4 is opened by a suspicious person, but is thereafter closed.
On the other hand, even at night, the disconnection detecting means 323 of the nighttime monitoring switch 126 does not detect the disconnection state (the disconnection monitoring result maintains the ON level), and therefore the removal of the game control device 54 is not detected.

Next, when the main power supply is turned on at timing t32 to prepare for the opening of the game store, the power supply device 58 supplies the payout control device 230, the game control device 54, the effect control device 53, and power supplies necessary for each electronic component shown in FIG. Supply is started (Note that the power supply to each part of the circuit has a slight time difference between the devices, but the description is complicated, so the details are omitted).
The night monitoring switch 126 is provided with an output delay means 325. After the main power supply is started, the frame opening information stored when the main power supply is cut off and the removal monitoring information of the game control device 54 are output delayed. The means 325 delays the main power-on timing t32 by a predetermined time Ta (for example, 5 seconds) and outputs it to the external payout control device 230 at timing t33.
On the other hand, when the supply of power to the payout control device 230 is started, as shown in FIG. 82, the program of the payout control device 230 is activated to perform initial setting and the like, and each component starts operation and ready for operation. The operation is gradually turned on, and after a while, a timing t33 (after the start-up preparation period ends) is reached.
In addition, after the processing such as initial setting is performed in the payout control device 230, the gaming machine ID is acquired, and the gaming machine ID is managed by the external management device 91 managed by an external third party organization via the card unit 15. It transmits and waits for the collation result of gaming machine ID via the card unit 15 (step H29, step H32, etc.).
At time t33, the output from the night monitoring switch 126 is finally taken into the payout control device 230 at time t33.

The timing t33 is a period that is exactly delayed by a predetermined time Ta (for example, 5 seconds) from the timing t32 at which the main power supply to the dispensing control device 230 is started. As shown in FIG. 8, the night monitoring switch 126 is provided with an output delay means 325, and the night monitoring switch 126 is provided after a predetermined time Ta has elapsed from the turning on of the main power to the payout control device 230 by the output delay means 325. This is because the output signal is output to the external payout control device 230.
That is, the output delay means 325 delays the output signal corresponding to the frame opening information stored when the main power supply is shut off and the removal monitoring information of the game control device 54 by a predetermined time Ta and outputs the delayed output signal to the payout control device 230. Here, the predetermined time Ta is set to a period longer than the time when the main power-on process of the payout control device 230 ends (that is, the time when the start-up preparation period of the payout control device 230 ends).
Here, at the timing t33, the night monitoring switch 126 outputs an output signal corresponding to the frame opening information and the removal monitoring information of the game control device 54 to the payout control device 230 for a predetermined time Tb from that time. The predetermined time Tb is set to a predetermined period (for example, a period sufficient for the payout control device 230 to capture the output signal of the night monitoring switch 126).

In the night monitoring switch 126, as shown in FIG. 82, when the front frame 4 is opened, the output of the frame opening detection means 322 is OFF level, and when the front frame 4 is closed, the output is ON level. The output of the disconnection detecting means 323 is OFF level when the removal of 54 is detected, and is ON level when the removal of the game control device 54 is not detected, but the output signal output from the night monitoring switch 126 to the outside Among them, as shown in FIGS. 82 and 83, the output signal corresponding to the night monitoring information is ON level when the opening time of the front frame 4 is detected and ON when the removal of the game control device 54 is detected. This signal is an OFF level when neither level is detected.
On the other hand, if it is detected not at night but when the front frame 4 is opened in the daytime, the output signal output from the night monitoring switch 126 is an OFF level signal.
As described above, the night monitoring switch 126 has two types of output: normal frame opening information output and night monitoring information (night frame opening information and gaming control device 54 removal monitoring information) output. This is because there is an output line.

In FIG. 82, as described above, the case where the opening of the front frame 4 is detected by the nighttime monitoring switch 126 at timing t31 and the opening information is held is described as an example. This information is used as the frame opening information. However, the frame opening information itself is a concept including both when the opening of the front frame 4 is detected and when the opening of the front frame 4 is not detected.
Even if the payout control device 230 determines the output signal of the night monitoring switch 126, the opening of the front frame 4 may not be detected. Even at that time, the payout control device 230 outputs the output from the night monitoring switch 126. Read the signal.
If the night monitoring switch 126 holds the information that the opening of the front frame 4 is detected at the timing t32 when the main power is turned on, the night monitoring information is not displayed until the predetermined time Tb elapses from the timing t33 as described above. The state of outputting to is continued.
Next, the night monitoring information output to the payout control device 230 (for convenience of explanation, the information fetched from the night monitoring switch 126 in the flowchart of the payout control device 230 is referred to as “monitoring information”. The same applies hereinafter). 230 is input to the CPU 231 via the input port 546 and stored in the RAM 233.
Therefore, after the start-up preparation period of the payout control device 230 elapses, the night monitoring information from the night monitoring switch 126 is taken into the payout control device 230, and there is no possibility that the night monitoring information cannot be taken in. Night monitoring information is taken in.

Next, the payout control device 230 performs processing (for example, step H13 to step H17 in FIG. 24) for determining the nighttime monitoring information fetched by the CPU 231 to determine the nighttime monitoring information, and saves the determined nighttime monitoring information in the RAM 233 ( Remember. Next, the night monitoring information stored in the RAM 233 is transmitted to the card unit 15. Specifically, a command corresponding to nighttime monitoring information (a command related to monitoring information in the flowchart of the payout control device 230) is transmitted to the card unit 15. The command corresponding to the night monitoring information determines the night monitoring information, and if there is evidence that the front frame 4 is opened (for example, the frame is opened at night), it is determined that there is a possibility of fraud. 15 is a command for issuing an error notification or issuing a command to output error information to the hall computer 86 (and not to lend a ball). When the front frame 4 is not opened, it is a command for determining that there is no possibility of fraud and issuing a command to the effect that there is no problem even if the ball lending to the card unit 15 is performed.
Further, in the payout control device 230, when the frame opening information due to the unauthorized opening of the front frame 4 is generated, the error state is transmitted to the effect control device 53 via the game control device 54, and is displayed by the control of the effect control device 53. Displayed on the device 41 and prompts the store clerk to check the pachinko machine 1. This is because if the frame opening information has detected the opening of the front frame 4, there is only a possibility that the frame has been fraudulent. First, an error notification is given by the pachinko machine 1 or the card unit 15, or the card unit. This is because the error information is output to the hall computer 86 via 15 to prompt the store clerk to check.
In addition, when the frame opening information due to the unauthorized opening of the front frame 4 is generated, the dispensing control device 230 may be in a launch non-permitted state in which a ball cannot be launched. If it does in that way, even if the front frame 4 is opened illegally, the pachinko machine 1 can be prevented from operating and damage to the amusement store can be prevented.
In addition to displaying the error status on the display device 41, an error notification may be given by an LED other than the display device 41, or a voice notification or the like may be given.
The clerk looks at such an error status display with the display device 41 or the like, and inspects the pachinko machine 1, and takes appropriate measures for the attachment of, for example, an illegal substrate (for example, removal and normal inspection of the illegal substrate). Can be taken.

In addition, when there is evidence that the front frame 4 is opened as described above (for example, the frame is opened at night), an error notification is given to the card unit 15 or error information is output to the hall computer 86 (further, A command such as issuing a command is transmitted, but at this time, “information that the front frame 4 is illegally opened” is displayed on the screen of the operation display device 7 under the control of the card unit 15. It may be configured to display, or this configuration may be added. Further, the error notification in the card unit 15 may be displayed as an LED, or may be a notification such as a voice.
Next, the payout control device 230 determines whether or not the command related to the night monitoring information is normally transmitted to the card unit 15.

  If the command related to the night monitoring information is not normally transmitted, the payout control device 230 sets a monitoring information transmission error flag, and sends the monitoring information transmission error command to the effect control device 53 via the game control device 54. Send. As a result, the production control device 53 performs control such as displaying an error message on the display device 41 indicating that a command related to the monitoring information is not transmitted to the card unit 15 based on the monitoring information transmission error command. Inform. In addition to displaying an error message on the display device 41, an error notification may be provided by an LED or the like other than the display device 41, or an audio notification may be provided.

Now, returning to the description of FIG. 82 again, for normal gaming machines whose front frame 4 is not opened illegally, normal monitoring processing is performed after a predetermined time Ta has elapsed since the main power supply was turned on. Provided.
Further, when the front frame 4 is opened at normal time, for example, at timing t34, the opening of the front frame 4 is detected by the night monitoring switch 126, and the frame release information ( The frame opening information at normal time, not the frame opening information at night, is output from the night monitoring switch 126 (a signal that is OFF level during the normal frame opening period) and input to the dispensing control device 230 for error monitoring. Monitoring is performed as a front frame open (front frame 4 open error) in the routine for processing frame open error monitoring processing.
As described above, as shown in FIG. 82, the night monitoring switch 126 detects the opening of the front frame 4 at night (specifically, when the main power is off), while the removal of the game control device 54 is not detected at night. In addition to the operation of the night monitoring information, the operation when the opening of the front frame 4 is detected by the night monitoring switch 126 during the daytime (specifically when the main power is turned on) is described.

Next, an operation when the removal of the game control device 54 is detected when the main power is turned off (off) will be described with reference to FIG.
FIG. 83 shows an operation timing chart when the removal of the game control device 54 is detected when the main power is turned off.
As shown in FIG. 83, at a timing t41 at night before the timing t42 when the main power supply is turned on (for example, at the start of preparation for opening a game shop), a suspicious person enters, for example, game control of the pachinko machine 1 When the act of removing the device 54 is performed, the disconnection detecting means 323 in the nighttime monitoring switch 126 detects the disconnection state (the disconnection monitoring result becomes OFF level), and the information is held by the frame opening and disconnection storage means 324. Is done. Since the front frame 4 is not opened, there is no change in the frame opening information by the night monitoring switch 126, and the frame opening information is in a state where the opening of the front frame 4 is not detected.
This is a case where a suspicious person does not open the front frame 4 at night and only performs an action of removing the game control device 54.

Next, when the main power supply is turned on at timing t42 in preparation for opening the amusement store, supply of the main power supply to the payout control device 230 is started. As a result, the program of the payout control device 230 is activated to perform initial setting, etc., and each component starts to operate and is ready for operation to gradually turn on. After that, a little time passes. The timing t43 is reached.
On the other hand, the night monitoring switch 126 is provided with an output delay means 325, and the frame opening information stored when the main power supply is turned off and the removal monitoring information of the game control device 54 are stored after the main power supply is started. The output delay means 325 delays the main power-on timing t42 by a predetermined time Ta (for example, 5 seconds), and outputs it to the external payout control device 230 at timing t43.
At time t43, the output from the night monitoring switch 126 is finally taken into the payout control device 230 at time t43.
At time t43, the night monitoring switch 126 outputs an output signal corresponding to the frame opening information and the removal monitoring information of the game control device 54 to the payout control device 230 for a predetermined time Tb from that time.

Next, the nighttime monitoring information (nighttime frame opening information and game control device 54 removal monitoring information) output to the payout control device 230 is input to the payout control device 230 and taken into the CPU 231 via the input port 546. It is stored in the RAM 233.
Therefore, after the start-up preparation period of the payout control device 230 elapses, the night monitoring information from the night monitoring switch 126 is taken into the payout control device 230, and there is no possibility that the night monitoring information cannot be taken in. Night monitoring information is taken in.
The night monitoring information here is information in which the front frame 4 is not opened at night and only the removal of the game control device 54 is detected. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 83, even when only the removal of the game control device 54 is detected when the main power is turned off, the night monitoring information is reliably taken into the payout control device 230 as in the case of FIG. be able to.
Note that the operations and effects of the payout control device 230 and the card unit 15 after the nighttime monitoring information is taken into the payout control device 230 are the same as in the description of FIG.

Next, an operation when the RAM clear switch 182 is turned on will be described.
A store clerk may turn on the RAM clear switch 182 to return the pachinko machine 1 to the initial state in preparation for opening the store (so-called RAM clear is performed).
The stand that performs RAM clearing is, for example, a case in which a gaming machine that has been in a gaming state such as a big hit or a probability variation state when the gaming store is closed is initialized the next day to prepare for normal business. This is because if such a stand is not initialized by clearing the RAM, it will be recovered in the gaming state such as the big hit of the previous day or the probability variation state, and will not match the business form.
In order to clear the RAM, the power is turned on by turning on the power switch 181 of the power supply 58 while pressing the RAM clear switch 182 of the power supply 58. As a result, the RAM 113 inside the game control device 54, the RAM 233 inside the payout control device 230, and the like are initialized.

Here, in the first embodiment, when the power is turned on by turning on the RAM clear switch 182 as described above, the payout control device 230 performs the RAM clear (initialization of the RAM 233, etc.) The frame opening information of the front frame 4 and the removal monitoring information of the game control device 54 (the output signal of the night monitoring switch 126: that is, the night monitoring information) are read. Then, after the RAM is cleared, the payout control device 230 reads the frame opening information of the front frame 4 and the removal monitoring information of the game control device 54 and transmits these information to the card unit 15.
Therefore, even if the RAM clear switch 182 is turned on, the frame release information of the front frame 4 and the removal monitoring information of the game control device 54 are not missed, and the frame release information and game of the front frame 4 are surely stored in the card unit 15. The removal monitoring information of the control device 54 can be transmitted.
The above configuration may be modified as follows.
(Modification of RAM clear)
That is, when the RAM clear switch 182 is turned on and the power is turned on, the payout control device 230 transmits the frame opening information of the front frame 4 and the removal monitoring information of the game control device 54 to the card unit 15. Until this is confirmed, the RAM 233 may not be cleared even if the RAM clear switch 182 is turned on.
In this case, the payout control device 230 clears (initializes) the RAM 233 after confirming that the frame opening information of the front frame 4 and the removal monitoring information of the game control device 54 have been transmitted to the card unit 15. At this time, the frame opening information of the front frame 4 and the removal monitoring information of the game control device 54 stored in the RAM 233 are also cleared.
The payout control device 230 transmits the frame opening information of the front frame 4 and the removal monitoring information of the game control device 54 to the card unit 15, and then the card unit 15 releases the frame opening information and the game control device 54 of the front frame 4. Even if the RAM clear switch 182 is turned on until the reception ACK indicating that the removal monitoring information is received is confirmed, the RAM 233 is not cleared. In addition, the RAM 233 including the removal monitoring information of the game control device 54 may be cleared (initialized).

On the other hand, in the payout control device 230, when the night monitoring information (the frame opening information of the front frame 4 and the removal monitoring information of the game control device 54) is not transmitted to the card unit 15, the RAM clear switch 182 is pressed. Even so, the error information is output without clearing the RAM 233. As output of error information, for example, a monitoring information transmission error flag is set, and a monitoring information transmission error command is transmitted to the effect control device 53 via the game control device 54. As a result, the production control device 53 performs control such as displaying an error message on the display device 41 indicating that a command related to the monitoring information is not transmitted to the card unit 15 based on the monitoring information transmission error command. Inform.
The output of the error information is not limited to the above example. For example, an error signal may be output from the payout control device 230 to the error display LED 67, and the error display LED 67 may be turned on (or blinked). Alternatively, this configuration may be added.
The above is the description of the modification.

Further, when the RAM clear switch 182 is turned on and the power is turned on, the payout control device 230 performs the RAM clear (initialization of the RAM 233, etc.) and then outputs the output signal from the night monitoring switch 126. Since the night monitoring information (the frame opening information of the front frame 4 and the removal monitoring information of the game control device 54) is transmitted to the card unit 15, the night monitoring information (of the front frame 4) can be transmitted even if the RAM clear switch 182 is turned on. The frame opening information and the gaming control device 54 removal monitoring information) are not missed, and the night monitoring information (the frame opening information of the front frame 4 and the gaming control device 54 removal monitoring information) is reliably transmitted to the card unit 15. can do.
Accordingly, even if the RAM clear switch 182 is turned on before the card unit 15 receives the night monitoring information (the frame opening information of the front frame 4 and the removal monitoring information of the game control device 54), for example, the payout control device 230 Then, after the RAM is cleared, the night monitoring information (the frame opening information of the front frame 4 and the removal monitoring information of the game control device 54) is read, so that the frame opening information and the game control device 54 that the front frame 4 has been opened illegally are removed. Since the stored information is reliably held in the RAM 233, it is possible to avoid a decrease in security against fraud. Thereafter, since the nighttime monitoring information (the frame opening information of the front frame 4 and the removal monitoring information of the game control device 54) is reliably transmitted from the payout control device 230 to the card unit 15, it is possible to reliably cope with fraud. it can.
The payout control device 230 transmits the night monitoring information (the frame opening information of the front frame 4 and the removal monitoring information of the game control device 54) to the card unit 15, and then the card unit 15 has received the night monitoring information. Even if the RAM clear switch 182 is turned on until the reception ACK indicating that it is confirmed, the RAM 233 is not cleared. When the reception ACK is confirmed, the RAM 233 including the night monitoring information is cleared (initialized) thereafter. May be. In this way, it is possible to more reliably cope with fraud.

Here, the following configuration may be added to the first embodiment as a configuration that further increases security against fraud using the gaming machine ID.
Accordingly, a configuration using the gaming machine ID will be described below as a modified example.
(Modified example of using game machine ID)
That is, as a modification of the first embodiment, when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on (for example, when the game shop is opened), the gaming machine ID (unique identification information of the gaming control device 54: main board ID and the payout control device 230) (Unique identification information: payout board ID) is transmitted to the external management device 91 managed by an external third-party organization via the card unit 15, and if it is determined that the nighttime frame opening fraud is being reported, external management is performed. A configuration may be adopted in which it is determined whether information indicating that the ID collation result is OK from the device 91 is received via the card unit 15.
In the case of this configuration, if the ID collation result OK is received from the card unit 15, the effect control device 53 controls the display device 41 to end the display of the information that the front frame 4 is opened at night. . This is intended to be fraudulent when the frame opening information is ON data, so the pachinko machine 1 notifies the frame opening and prompts the store clerk to check the ID collation result OK. This is because even if the front frame 4 is opened, it is determined that the possibility of fraud is low and the notification of frame opening is terminated.
On the other hand, if it is not during the nighttime frame opening fraud notification, the possibility of fraud is low, and it is not performed until it is determined that the ID verification result OK has been received.
If the ID verification result OK is not received from the card unit 15, the information indicating that the front frame 4 is opened at night is continuously displayed on the display device 41 or the like. Accordingly, the store clerk inspects the game control device 54 and the like, and takes necessary measures including the presence or absence of fraud.
Therefore, in this modified example, the possibility of fraud is judged by using two pieces of information, that is, the frame opening information from the night monitoring switch 126 and the matching result of the gaming machine ID, compared with the case where fraud is determined only by the frame opening information. Thus, the accuracy of determining the possibility of fraud can be further increased, and a gaming machine with high security can be provided.

When the card unit 15 receives the ID verification result from the external management device 91 (including the case where the ID verification result OK is not received), the card unit 15 transmits the information to the hall computer 86, and the hall computer 86 displays the ID verification result. Information indicating that it has been received or not received is managed and stored for each of a large number of gaming machines. The hall computer 86 also stores the frame opening information transmitted via the card unit 15. Therefore, since the ID verification result information and the frame opening information are stored in the hall computer 86, it is easy to check the ID verification result information and the frame opening information even when the error notification is finished.
The inventive concept of the above configuration is expressed as follows.
When the main power is turned on by the power supply,
Providing transmission means for transmitting main unique identification information that can identify and identify a gaming machine to an external management device managed by a third party organization via a card unit;
External management device
A gaming machine configured to collate the transmitted main unique identification information with the main unique identification information of the gaming machine managed in advance, and to return the collation result to the card unit.
As another aspect of the above configuration, not only the frame opening information from the night monitoring switch 126 but also the fraud monitoring including the removal monitoring information of the game control device 54 from the night monitoring switch 126, for example, If the removal of 54 is detected, it may be determined that the night frame opening fraud notification is being made including the information that the removal of the game control device 54 is detected, and the above processing may be performed. In this way, since the removal monitoring information of the game control device 54 is also added to the fraud determination, the security measures can be further improved.
The above is the description of the modification.

Next, the operation of the game game of the pachinko machine 1 in the first embodiment will be described.
In the game game of the pachinko machine 1, by executing each program described above, a command is transmitted from the game control device 54 to the effect control device 53, and the effect control device 53 that receives the command uses the display device 41 based on the program. A variable display game is executed.
Specifically, when the player operates the firing operation handle 11 to throw a game ball into the game area 22 and the game ball that has been placed wins the start winning opening 25 or 26 of the special figure (see the special figure). When there is a start winning prize), a command for instructing the variable display of the decoration special drawing is transmitted from the game control device 54 to the effect control device 53, and display (so-called variable display) is performed on the display unit 41a. Then, a decorative display variation display game is performed. On the other hand, the sphere that has been removed without winning the prize flows into the out sphere inlet 23. The ball that has fallen on the game area 22 becomes out or safe, passes through the game area 22, flows down to the game ball inlet 71 of the circulation device 55, is collected and circulated by the circulation device 55, and is again guided to the launch position. It will be. In this way, the enclosed game ball is circulated and used to perform a pachinko game with the enclosed ball.
In addition, the game control device 54 controls the collective display device 35 such as a variable display of the special figure, the ordinary figure, and the like.

Here, when it is determined that the game ball is safe and the number of balls held by the player is increased, the ball enters the winning port (including the general winning ports 28 to 31 and the starting winning ports 25, 26, etc.). In addition, when a big hit occurs and shifts to the big win state, the bonus winning hole 27a of the variable winning device 27 is temporarily within a range not exceeding a specified time (for example, 30 seconds), for example, for a period up to ten winnings. The jackpot round to be released is repeated for a predetermined number of rounds, and the player wins a large number of winnings.
In this case, the number of winning balls associated with winning is all displayed by the winning display LED 355 in the collective display device 35.

FIG. 84 is a timing chart of display control of the winning display LED 355 in the collective display device 35.
In FIG. 84, the number of winning balls accompanying winning is as follows.
・ Large winning opening 27a = 13 ・ Starting winning opening 25 = 3 ・ Starting winning opening 26 (Fuden) = 1 ・ General winning openings 28 to 31 = 10 In FIG. 84, when these winnings are made Is shown as, for example, “winning (prize ball 13)”, and the same applies to other winning modes.

Now, in the normal mode (displayed as normal in FIG. 84), if there is a winning at the start winning opening 25, the number of winning balls is 3, so the game control device 54 displays the winning display LED 355 of the collective display device 35. On the other hand, a drive signal is output (hereinafter, the control is the same), and the winning ball display LED 355 displays the winning ball 3 (meaning the number of winning balls = 3). As a result, the winning display LED 355 displays “3” in one digit.
At this time, the winning display of “3” is controlled at a timing of turning on (lit) for 1 second and then turning off (turned off) for 0.5 seconds.
Similarly, in the normal mode, if there is a winning in any of the general winning openings 28 to 31, the number of winning balls is 10, so that the winning display LED 355 receives 10 winning balls (the number of winning balls = 10). Meaning) is displayed. As a result, the winning display LED 355 displays “10” in two digits.
At this time, the winning display of “10” is controlled at a timing of turning on (lit) for 1 second and then turning off (turned off) for 0.5 seconds.

Next, when a big hit was generated from the normal mode and a transition was made to the special mode (during the big hit), winning (number of winning balls = 13) to the big winning opening 27a occurred four times in succession. At this time, if there is a prize at the big prize opening 27a, since the number of prize balls is 13, the game control device 54 outputs a drive signal to the prize display LED 355 of the collective display device 35, and the prize display LED 355 is displayed. The prize ball 13 (the number of prize balls = 13 meanings) is displayed. As a result, the winning display LED 355 displays “13” in two digits. In this case, the winning display of “13” is controlled for 0.5 seconds ON (lights on) and then 0.1 seconds OFF (lights off), and the winning prize opening 27a is continuously generated four times. This is done four times in succession.
In addition, during the special mode, a winning (number of winning balls = 3) to the start winning opening 25 occurred once.
At this time, if there is a winning at the start winning opening 25, the number of winning balls is 3, so that the winning display LED 355 displays the winning ball 3 (meaning the number of winning balls = 3). As a result, the winning display LED 355 displays “3” in one digit. In this case, the winning display of “3” is controlled at a timing of turning on (lit) for 0.5 seconds and then turning off (turned off) for 0.1 seconds.

Then, the big hit round ends, and the transition is made to the probability fluctuation. Since the probability variation is also in the special mode, the control in the special mode is continued for the winning display by the winning display LED 355. Then, during the probability fluctuation, the winning (the number of winning balls = 1) to the start winning opening 26 (Fuden) occurred three times in succession. At this time, if there is a winning at the start winning opening 26 (Fuden), the number of winning balls is 1, so that the winning ball 1 (the number of winning balls = 1) is displayed on the winning display LED 355. Is called. As a result, the winning display LED 355 displays “1” in one digit. In this case, the winning display of “1” is controlled for 0.5 seconds ON (lights on) and then off for 0.1 seconds (lights off), and the winning winning opening 26 (Fuden) continues to win. This occurs three times in succession.
In this way, the number of winning balls associated with winning is all displayed by the winning display LED 355 in the collective display device 35. Even if a game ball wins in any winning opening, a predetermined time is displayed by a winning display LED 355 consisting of two 7-segment LEDs (the normal mode is 1 second and the special mode is 0.5 second). Therefore, the player can easily know where on the board (game board 20) the prize is won and how many prize balls are obtained.

Next, the display update control of the number of balls will be described.
FIG. 85 is a timing chart showing display update control of the number of balls.
In FIG. 85, the change in the number of balls held occurs in the following cases.
(A) The number of possessed balls decreases by 1 when the game ball is launched. (B) When the foul ball is reached, the number of possessed balls is incremented by 1 (that is, when the foul ball is decremented by 1 but when it becomes a foul ball, 1 is added, After all, return to the original)
(C) If there is a number of winning balls associated with winning a prize, it is added to the number of balls held. The number of winning balls associated with winning a prize is as follows.
・ Large prize opening 27a = 13 ・ Starting prize opening 25 = 3 ・ Starting prize opening 26 (Fuden) = 1 piece ・ General prize opening 28-31 = 10 pieces

Now, when a game ball is being fired into the game area 22 at a rate of approximately 100 shots per minute, this situation is shown in FIG. 85 by firing pulses.
Now, when one game ball is fired when the number of held balls = 11 and the display of the held ball number display 40 is “11” under the control of the payout control device 230, Although the number of balls held is reduced by one when the game ball is launched, the number of balls held in the internal memory (RAM 233 of the payout controller 230) is updated (more precisely, the memory of the number of balls held is updated, but here In this case, the number of held balls is immediately updated (in real time), and the stored number of balls is immediately “10” (in FIG. 85, the internal memory (RAM 233) is almost simultaneously with the launch of the ball. Since the number of possessed balls has been updated, the memory number “10” is displayed).
On the other hand, display update of the number-of-balls display 40 (the update control of the number of balls when the player's number of balls is displayed on the number-of-balls display 40 by the payout controller 230. Hereinafter, the number of balls held is simply This is called display update of the display 40). Is not performed immediately, but at intervals of a predetermined period (for example, 0.3 seconds). Therefore, as shown in FIG. 85, the display on the number-of-balls display 40 is updated to “10” 0.3 seconds after the game ball is launched.

The time of 0.3 seconds corresponds to half of the time required for launching a game ball into the game area 22 at a rate of 100 shots per minute. As described above, since the number of game balls fired by operating the firing operation handle 11 is defined as 100 shots per minute according to a predetermined rule, the firing control device 57 controls the ball feed solenoid 172. Therefore, it is derived from the fact that it is within the range of 100 shots / minute (approximately one ball fired in 0.6 seconds (s)).
Here, for example, when a big hit has occurred, with the launch of one game ball as described above, one wins the big winning opening 27a and the number of winning balls = 13 occurs, and more continuously. When one game ball is fired and one wins continuously to the big prize opening 27a and the number of winning balls = 13 occurs, the number of balls held in the internal memory (RAM 233) is immediately updated. The stored number of balls is immediately “9” (in FIG. 85, “subtract one shot” is displayed).
Then, when the above-mentioned two fired balls continuously win the big prize opening 27a and the number of winning balls = 13 occurs twice, the number of balls having 13 winning balls is stored in the internal memory (RAM 233). Immediately add to the stored number “9” and immediately update the number of possessed balls as “22”. Immediately thereafter, the number of 13 winning balls is immediately added to the retained number of stored balls “22” to obtain “35”. ”Immediately update the number of balls.

On the other hand, the display update of the number-of-balls display 40 is not immediately performed even when two shot balls continuously win the big winning opening 27a and the number of winning balls = 13 occurs twice. The update timing is an interval of a predetermined period (for example, 0.3 seconds). Therefore, as shown in FIG. 85, the display on the number-of-balls display 40 is updated to “9” 0.3 seconds after the second game ball is fired.
Thereafter, the number of winning balls = 13 accompanying the winning at the first big winning opening 27a is added to the number of balls held, the display of the number of balls held display 40 is updated, and the display of the number of balls held display 40 Is updated to “22” (9 + 13).
Next, 0.3 seconds later, the number of winning balls = 13 accompanying the winning at the second big winning opening 27a is added to the number of holding balls, and the display of the holding ball number display 40 is updated. The display on the ball number display 40 is updated to “35” (22 + 13).

Next, when one game ball is fired, the number of balls held is reduced by one when the game ball is fired, so the number of balls held in the internal memory (RAM 233) is updated immediately, and the number of balls held Is immediately stored as “34” (35-1). On the other hand, the display update of the number-of-balls indicator 40 is not performed immediately, but is performed at intervals of a predetermined period (for example, 0.3 seconds). The display on the display 40 is updated to “34”.
Next, when one more game ball is fired, the number of balls held is reduced by one when the game ball is fired, so the number of balls held in the internal memory (RAM 233) is updated immediately, The number is immediately stored as “33” (34-1). On the other hand, the display update of the number-of-balls indicator 40 is not performed immediately, but is performed at intervals of a predetermined period (for example, 0.3 seconds). The display on the display 40 is updated to “33”.

By the way, when the above-mentioned launch ball has become a foul ball, it is necessary to return to the number of balls held, but one is added to the number of balls held, since one has been subtracted by firing, After all, it will return to the original number of balls. Therefore, the number of balls held in the internal memory (RAM 233) for dealing with the foul ball is immediately updated when it is determined that the ball is a foul ball, and the number of held balls is immediately stored as “34” (33 + 1). . On the other hand, the display update of the number-of-balls indicator 40 is performed at intervals of a predetermined period (for example, 0.3 seconds), but the time point at which it is determined that the ball is a foul ball has already increased by 0.3 from the previous update interval. Since the second has passed, only in this case, the display of the number of possessed balls is immediately performed, so that the display of the number of possessed balls display 40 is updated to “34” (33 + 1).
Next, when the number of balls held becomes 34 by fouling, when the next game ball is fired, it is necessary to subtract one by the number of balls held, so the number of balls held in the internal memory (RAM 233) The number is updated immediately, and the number of balls held is immediately “33” (34-1). On the other hand, the display update of the number-of-balls indicator 40 is 0.3 seconds after the number of balls held becomes 34 due to the foul, so it is held corresponding to one subtraction (“−1”) by firing. The display on the ball number display 40 is updated to “33”. Note that the next display of “33” on the number-of-balls display 40 has no change in the number of balls held, so there is no need to update after 0.3 seconds, so the display of “33” is maintained as it is. It shows the state of being.

Thus, during the progress of the game game, the RAM 233 as the internal memory of the payout control device 230 stores the change in the number of balls of the player, and subtracts the fired ball, adds the number of prize balls, In the case where the number of balls held by the player is updated and stored in real time by repeatedly adding the foul balls, while the number-of-balls display 40 displays the number of balls held by the player The update of the number of balls is different from the case where the RAM 233 updates and stores the number of balls in real time, and the updated number of balls is displayed at intervals of a predetermined period (for example, 0.3 seconds). To be controlled. This predetermined period (for example, 0.3 seconds) is approximately half the time of the continuous launch interval (0.6 seconds) of game balls.
Therefore, even if there are consecutive wins, the updated number of balls on the number-of-balls display 40 is updated at intervals of a predetermined period (for example, 0.3 seconds). A margin for sufficiently recognizing the display content of the ball number display 40 is created, and the player can easily recognize that the number of balls held has been updated in response to winning.

Next, an operation for introducing a character on the operation display device 7 will be described with reference to FIG.
In FIG. 86, a scene K1 shows the operation of the operation display device 7 at the normal time. That is, the scene K1 shows an example of a normal screen, and the operation display device 7 controls the card unit 15 to display details of the number of balls held and the number of counted balls. It is displayed on the display device 7. Specifically, the operation display device 7 includes a ball lending rate display 301, a remaining amount display 302, a ball lending button 303, a return button 304, a storage / replay button 305, a message / operation area unit 306, and a switching button. A state in which 307 is arranged is shown.

In the scene K1, as an example of the normal time, the remaining amount display unit 302 displays the remaining amount as “10000 yen”, so that the player knows that the balance of the gaming card is “10000 yen”. . Also, a message “I welcome you” is displayed in the message / operation area 306.
Furthermore, information from the card unit 15 is displayed on the operation display device 7 as normal information, for example, ball rental, storage, count ball number, etc. (however, omitted on the screen K1).
In addition, a switching button 307 is arranged on the operation display device 7. When the player touches the switching button 307, presentation assist information such as character introduction is transmitted from the card unit 15 to the operation display device 7, and the operation display device is displayed. 7 is displayed.
Even when the special figure game is being produced, touching the switching button 307 introduces characters appearing in the special figure game.

Specifically, when the player touches the switching button 307, the screen switches to a scene K2 in which characters appearing in the game on the display device 41 are introduced based on information from the card unit 15.
In particular, in the first embodiment, the switch button 307 is displayed when an effect screen appears in which a character appears in the special game in conjunction with the special game (specifically, the special game). When touched, it is configured to switch to the scene K2 where the characters appearing in the special figure game are introduced.
In the scene K2, presentation assistance information such as character introduction is transmitted from the card unit 15 to the operation display device 7 to introduce characters appearing in the game on the display device 41. The message / operation area of the operation display device 7 The part 306 displays a description for introducing the character. For example, the characters are introduced by the display of “character introduction 1”, “name: tallow”, “favorite food: cake”, and “special skill: bow”.

Next, when a predetermined time elapses, the process moves to the scene K3, and another character is introduced in the scene K3. Here, in the message / operation area 306 of the operation display device 7, for example, the characters are introduced by displaying “character introduction 2”, “name: Giraud”, “favorite: meat”, “special skill: punch”. Is done.
Next, when a predetermined time elapses, the process moves to a scene K4, and another character is introduced in the scene K4. Here, in the message / operation area 306 of the operation display device 7, for example, the characters “introduction 3”, “name: dragon”, “favorite: whiskey”, “special skill: flame” are displayed. Is done.

In this way, the player can see explanations for introducing characters appearing in the game game by a simple operation of touching the switching button 307, which is convenient.
In addition, when the switch button 307 is touched in conjunction with the special figure game production, the characters appearing in the special figure game are introduced, which makes the production easier to understand and enhances the interest of the game.
Further, while the presentation of the game is continued on the display device 41 controlled by the gaming machine side, the explanation about the introduction of the character is displayed on the operation display device 7 which is a device different from the display device 41, so that the game progresses There is no inconvenience such as disturbing the display of the effect of the game or reducing the display space, and it is possible to make the effect of the progress of the game compatible with the explanation of the introduction of the character.

Next, since the display mode of the number of balls and the effects of the sub liquid crystal display device 33 and the like have been described above, the effects relating to the polishing control of the encapsulated sphere and the sub-configuration will be described.
(1) In the first embodiment, the polishing control device 59 (including the polishing device 56) is not limited to the game control device 54 (including the polishing device 56) even when the pachinko machine 1 is in operation and the power is turned off. Information is not input to the main board) or the payout control device 230 (payout board) (for example, information input such as signal input, data input, command input, etc.) is not performed at all.
That is, the polishing control device 59 (including the polishing device 56) is “sub-configured” (the details of sub-configuration are as described above).
In this way, by substituting the polishing control device 59 (including the polishing device 56), the control burden on the game control device 54 and the payout control device 230 can be reduced.
Specifically, it is only necessary to send a polishing start command from the game control device 54 or the payout control device 230 to the effect control device 53, and when the effect control device 53 receives the polishing start command, the polishing control device 59 starts polishing. In response to the polishing instruction from the effect control device 53, the polishing control device 59 executes processing necessary for polishing the encapsulated sphere, such as driving the polishing motor 70 and operating the switching solenoid 79S, for a predetermined period. The game ball is polished.

In addition, the game control device 54 and the payout control device 230 can operate the “sub-substituted” polishing control device 59 (including the polishing device 56) simply by sending a polishing start command to the effect control device 53. Since the control device 54 and the payout control device 230 only need a simple process of command transmission to polish the encapsulated sphere, the control burden on the game control device 54 and the payout control device 230 can be remarkably reduced. .
Furthermore, since there is no direct influence on the game for the sub-device, there are few restrictions on the components to be mounted. In other words, the sub-device has an advantage that the ROM capacity limitation and the component limitation are alleviated.
Accordingly, the sub-device can be designed without worrying about the ROM capacity, and for example, the choice of parts can be expanded, and an RTC (real-time clock) can be mounted. In addition, sub-devices have a wider range of options for components such as sensors, leading to lower costs. Furthermore, “sub-substituting” has an advantage that the inspection is simplified because there is no direct influence on the game.
In addition, by substituting the polishing control device 59 (including the polishing device 56), there is an advantage that the time of the type test relating to the device (including the control device) for polishing the game ball is shortened.

This background will be described.
Generally, when a polishing device is installed in an encapsulated ball type gaming machine, the testing apparatus inspects the polishing device. However, since the polishing device is a device that is not found in conventional gaming machines, the test may take a long time. There is.
Conventionally, a game ball polishing apparatus falls within the category of replenishment facilities, and is installed as a replenishment facility. Since the replenishment facility does not directly affect the game result of the gaming machine, the test is omitted from the viewpoint of the gaming machine inspection.
Therefore, in this embodiment, the polishing apparatus is incorporated in the gaming machine, but by substituting it, the advantage of eliminating the direct influence on the game and simplifying the inspection is obtained.

The inventive concept of the above configuration is expressed as follows.
A polishing apparatus for polishing a sphere;
In a gaming machine comprising a polishing control device for controlling a polishing device,
A configuration in which a signal cannot be input to at least the game control device and the payout control device from equipment necessary for polishing the game ball including the polishing device and the polishing control device,
A gaming machine characterized in that the polishing control device controls the polishing device according to an instruction from the game control device or the payout control device to polish the sphere.

The inventive concept of the above configuration when applied to an enclosed ball type gaming machine is expressed as follows.
A game control device capable of enclosing a predetermined number of game balls in a gaming machine main body, launching the enclosed game balls into a gaming area and playing a game, and managing the progress of the gaming machine With
The game control device determines whether the game result is in a predetermined profit state or any other state, and in the case of a predetermined profit state, the player's profit is increased in correspondence with a predetermined number of prize balls. Let
In the enclosed ball type gaming machine that plays the game by circulating the enclosed game ball by collecting the game ball that has passed through the game area and guiding it to the launch position,
A polishing apparatus for polishing the encapsulated sphere;
A polishing control device for controlling the polishing device,
A configuration in which a signal cannot be input to at least the game control device and the payout control device from equipment necessary for polishing the game ball including the polishing device and the polishing control device,
The polishing control device controls the polishing device according to an instruction from the game control device or the payout control device to cause the ball to be polished.

(2) When the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, the payout control device 230 transmits a polishing start command to the game control device 54. When the game control device 54 receives the polishing start command from the payout control device 230, the effect control device 53 When the polishing control command is transmitted to the production control device 53 and the game control device 54 receives the polishing start command from the game control device 54, the polishing control device 59 instructs the polishing control device 59 to start polishing. According to the polishing instruction, the encapsulated sphere is polished for a predetermined period.
For this reason, the payout control device 230 simply issues a polishing start command to the effect control device 53 via the game control device 54, and the polishing control device 59 (including the polishing device 56) is managed under the control of the effect control device 53. Since the encapsulated sphere is further polished, the control burden of the payout control device 230 (payout substrate) and the game control device 54 (main substrate) can be reduced, and the efficiency is improved.
The control burden can be reduced both on the hardware side and the software side.
Further, since the polishing control device 59 is equipped with the RTC 60, there is an advantage that the RTC 60 can be used for the production of the production control device 53. In such a case, since it is not necessary to mount an RTC in the production control device in particular, the cost when changing the model of the gaming machine is reduced.
Further, since the polishing control device 59 is sub-configured, it is possible to share parts as so-called frame elements.

The inventive concept of the above configuration is expressed as follows.
The polishing control device comprises:
A gaming machine, wherein when a polishing start instruction is given, the polishing apparatus is controlled so as to polish a sphere only for a predetermined period.
Here, the predetermined period is, for example, a certain period when the gaming machine is turned on.

Also, the payout control device 230 transmits a polishing start command to the game control device 54 at the start of polishing when the power is turned on, and when the game control device 54 receives the polishing start command from the payout control device 230, the polishing control device 53 polishes to the effect control device 53. When the start command is transmitted and the production control device 53 receives the polishing start command from the game control device 54, the control is performed so that the display of the display device 41 is displayed on the screen of the display device 41 after receiving the polishing start command. This is convenient because it is possible to easily know that the encapsulated sphere is being polished only by looking at the screen of the display device 41.
On the other hand, the payout control device 230 transmits a polishing stop command to the effect control device 53 via the game control device 54 after the elapse of a predetermined period from the start of polishing, and when the effect control device 53 receives the polishing stop command, the display is performed. Since the display during the polishing in the apparatus 41 is controlled to be stopped, the store clerk can easily know that the polishing of the encapsulated sphere has been completed simply by looking at the screen of the display apparatus 41, which is convenient.
The inventive concept of the above configuration is expressed as follows.
The payout control device
A gaming machine characterized by instructing the display control device to perform control to display on the display device while the polishing device is polishing a sphere.
When the game control device controls the effect control device, the payout control device may be changed to the game control device in the above configuration.
In addition, when the game control device and the payout control device are integrated into a single game control device, the configuration requirement of the payout control device in the above inventive concept is changed to the game control device. Good (this also applies to the following inventive concept).

(3) While the encapsulated sphere is being polished, that is, until the dispensing control device 230 transmits a polishing start command to the game control device 54 and then transmits a polishing stop command after a predetermined period of time, the encapsulated sphere is being polished. Therefore, since the control for stopping the launch of the game ball is performed, it is possible to eliminate the obstacle to the game. In other words, since the polishing apparatus 56 is not operated during the game, it is possible to prevent the game from being affected by the operation of the polishing apparatus 56.
The inventive concept of the above configuration is expressed as follows.
The payout control device
A game machine characterized by performing control to stop the game while the polishing apparatus is polishing the ball.
In the case where the game control device controls the launch of the ball, the payout control device in the above configuration may be changed to the game control device.

(4) When the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the polishing apparatus 56 switches the path of the encapsulated sphere to “polishing side” for a predetermined time T 1 according to an instruction from the polishing control apparatus 59 and the encapsulated sphere is polished by the polishing apparatus 56. Next, when the polishing of the encapsulated sphere is completed, the game is ready, and the encapsulated sphere is circulated without going through the polishing device 56 during the game.
Therefore, the encapsulated sphere can be polished by a simple control of switching the path.
The inventive concept of the above configuration is expressed as follows.
A gaming machine comprising path switching means capable of switching between a ball polishing state in which a game ball is guided to a polishing apparatus for polishing and a normal state in which the game ball is circulated without passing through the polishing apparatus.

(5) During the game (when the table is in operation, including a big hit), the encapsulated ball is controlled to circulate without passing through the polishing device 56 under the control of the polishing control device 59. Therefore, the game does not pass through the polishing device 56, so that the game can be prevented from being influenced by the operation of the polishing device 56.
The inventive concept of the above configuration is expressed as follows.
A gaming machine configured to be in a normal state in which a game ball is circulated by the path switching means without passing through a polishing device during a game.

(6) In the first embodiment, the number of balls held and the number of counted balls are decorated and displayed by the decorative ball display device 250 under the control of the effect control device 53 (sub-board). The number and the number of counting balls can be expressed. In other words, the decorative ball display device 250 can express the holding ball close to a real ball type by decorative control with a large number of LEDs, and is easy to understand sensuously. Therefore, the player can easily understand the number of balls held and the number of balls counted.
In particular, the number of balls held is controlled by a large number of LEDs so as to be controlled by the upper decorative ball display device 250a of the decorative ball display device 250. The effect is that the approximate number of balls is easy to understand.
On the other hand, the number of counted balls is designed to create an image of a so-called ball box by the lower decorative ball display device 250c of the decorative ball display device 250, and is decorated and controlled by a large number of LEDs. There is an effect that the approximate number of counting balls is easy to understand.
Furthermore, since the decorative ball display device 250 is controlled by the effect control device 53 which is a sub-board, the control burden on the payout control device 230 and the game control device 54 can be reduced.
The inventive concept of the above configuration is expressed as follows.
A decorative ball display device that displays the number of balls held is provided.
The game machine characterized in that the decorative ball display device is controlled by an effect control device as a sub-board.

Further, during counting of the number of balls, the LED of the counting decoration unit 250c is moved and blinked so that the ball moves from the upper decorative ball display device 250a to the lower decorative ball display device 250b which is an image of a ball box. Since the decoration is controlled, there is an effect that it is easy for the player to understand that the counting is in progress.
The inventive concept of the above configuration is expressed as follows.
A decorative ball display device that displays the number of balls held is provided.
The production control device
A game in which decoration control is performed on the decorative ball display device so that when the number of balls held is counted, the decoration ball display device displays an effect of moving the number of balls held to the counting ball. Machine.

(7) In the first embodiment, the gaming machine (pachinko machine 1) is a ball number display 40 as a first display device capable of displaying the number of balls held, and a second display device capable of simply displaying the counting balls. Since the card unit 15 includes the operation display device 7 as a third display device that can manage the card unit 15, the card unit 15 can display the number of balls and details of the counting ball. The number of balls and counting balls can be simply displayed on the machine (pachinko machine 1) side, and the details of the number of balls and counting balls can be displayed on the card unit 14 side. In doing so, the control burden on the game control device 54 and the payout control device 230 is reduced, and efficiency is improved.
Further, the player can grasp the number of balls possessed and the number of counted balls with the first to third devices, which is convenient and easy to understand.
The inventive concept of the above configuration is expressed as follows.
A first display device capable of displaying the number of balls held;
A second display device capable of simply displaying a counting ball;
A third display device capable of displaying details of the number of balls and counting balls;
With
The first display device can digitally display the number of balls held,
The second display device can display at least the presence or absence of a counting ball,
The third display device is under the management of the card unit, and displays information sent from the gaming machine under the control of the card unit.

(8) In the first embodiment, the player has a counting switch 311 for moving the number of balls to the counting ball and a counting ball use switch 314 for moving the counting ball to the number of balls. The number of balls that can be fired can be counted and moved to a storage ball. Conversely, it can be moved (returned) from the storage ball to the number of balls that can be launched by a simple operation.
In particular, in the case of gaming machines using real balls, the number of balls held is equivalent to the image of the number of balls that can be fired on the upper and lower plates, and the counting ball moves counting from the number of balls held. Since it is a storage ball and corresponds to the image of the ball moved from the upper plate or the lower plate to the ball box, the number of balls can be easily moved to the counting ball simply by operating the counting switch 311. Similarly, by simply operating the counting ball use switch 314, the counting ball can be easily moved to the number of possessed balls, and the enclosed ball type game can be performed with a feeling close to that of a gaming machine using a real ball.
The inventive concept of the above configuration is expressed as follows.
A counting switch for moving the number of balls to the counting ball;
A counting ball use switch for moving the counting ball to the number of balls held,
The payout control device
When the counting switch is operated, control is performed to move the number of balls to the counting ball,
A gaming machine characterized in that when a counting ball use switch is operated, control is performed to move the counting ball to the number of possessed balls.
Further, in the first embodiment, the counting ball indicator 313 that is turned on when there is a counting ball is arranged, so that the player can easily know the presence of the counting ball.
The inventive concept of the above configuration is expressed as follows.
Provide a counting ball indicator to notify the presence of the counting ball,
The payout control device
A gaming machine characterized in that when a counting ball is present, control is performed to notify (for example, turn on) the presence of the counting ball using a counting ball display.

(9) In the first embodiment, both the number of balls held and the counting balls are managed by the payout control device 230 to store data, and the number of balls held and the number are counted periodically (for example, 400 ms) for the card unit 15. Since the ball information is transmitted and displayed on the operation display device 7 as the third display device under the control of the card unit 15, the gaming machine manages the number of balls held, and the counting ball is stored in the card unit. The security can be increased as compared with the method managed by 15.
That is, according to the configuration of the first embodiment, the data of both the number of balls and the counting balls are managed only by the payout control device 230. There is no loss or inconsistency of each data of the counting ball number. Further, since the counting ball number data is not managed on the card unit side, there is no possibility that the counting ball number data is illegally input from the outside to the card unit.
The inventive concept of the above configuration is expressed as follows.
A control device is provided to manage both the number of balls and counting balls,
A gaming machine configured to transmit information on the number of balls and counting balls to a card unit and display the information on a third display device under the control of the card unit.

(10) In the first embodiment, the gaming machine (pachinko machine 1) has a number-of-balls display 40 as a first display device that can display the number of balls, and a second that can display the number of balls and counting balls in a decorative manner. Since the decorative ball display device 250 is provided as the display device, the number of balls held is digitally displayed on the ball holding number display 40, and the number of balls held and the number of counted balls are displayed in analog on the decorative ball display device 250. Thus, the player can know the number of balls held in detail, and the number of balls held and the number of counted balls can be grasped instantaneously by analog display, which is convenient.
In this case, the payout control device 230 performs control so that the number of balls held is digitally displayed on the ball number display 40 serving as the first display device, and the effect control device 53 performs decoration holding as the second display device. Since the ball display device 250 is controlled to display the number of balls held and the number of counted balls in an analog manner, a part of the display control is shared by the effect control device 53 which is a sub-board, and the control load of the payout control device 230 is increased. It is reduced.
The inventive concept of the above configuration is expressed as follows.
The payout control device (or game control device)
Control the digital display of the number of balls held by the first display device,
The production control device
A game machine characterized by controlling an ornamental ball display device for effect display of the number of balls held, and causing the ornamental ball display device to perform analog display of the number of balls held and a counting ball.

(11) In the first embodiment, when the RAM clear switch 182 is turned on, the payout control device 230 initializes and clears the RAM 233 inside the payout control device 230 and then sets the night monitoring switch 126 at night. The monitoring information is taken into the payout control device 230 and stored in the RAM 233. Thereafter, the night monitoring information stored in the RAM 233 is transmitted from the payout control device 230 to the card unit 15.
Therefore, there is an effect that the trouble that the night monitoring information in the RAM 233 is erased by the turning-on operation of the RAM clear switch 182 does not occur.
The inventive concept of the above configuration is expressed as follows.
The payout control device
When the RAM clear switch is pushed, after clearing the RAM of the payout control device, the night monitoring information from the night monitoring means is fetched and stored in the RAM,
Thereafter, the gaming machine is configured to transmit the night monitoring information stored in the RAM to the card unit.

(12) In the first embodiment, various types of game information such as the number of balls held and the number of balls counted are periodically transmitted from the payout control device 230 to the card unit 15 (for example, every 400 ms). With regard to the number and the number of counting balls, since the actual number at that time is transmitted instead of the change, it is not necessary to take measures against data loss, and the number of holding balls and the number of counting balls are accurately transmitted to the card unit 15. Can increase the reliability of data.
By the way, with respect to the number of possessed balls and the number of counted balls, when these changes (that is, the updated number of possessed balls and the updated counted number of balls) are transmitted from the payout control device 230 to the card unit 15, the data is lost. In this case, the number of balls held and the number of balls counted on the card unit 15 side are not accurately updated, and the reliability of data is lowered. Therefore, it is necessary to take measures against data loss, and the control becomes complicated.
On the other hand, the first embodiment has an advantage that it is not necessary to take measures against data loss because the number of balls held and the number of counted balls are configured to transmit the real numbers at that time.

Next, according to the first embodiment, there are the following effects in dealing with fraud.
(1) Even when the main power is shut off, it is possible to detect that the front frame 4 has been opened and the game control device 54 has been removed. A night-time monitoring switch 126 that retains monitoring information even when the main power is shut off is provided. When the main power supplied from the power supply 58 is turned on, the main power is immediately supplied to the payout control device 230. Is provided with an output delay means 325, and after the main power supply is started, the frame opening information stored when the main power supply is shut off and the removal monitoring information of the game control device 54 are stored from the timing of the main power on. The data is output to the external payout control device 230 after being delayed by a predetermined period.
Therefore, after the start-up preparation period of the payout control device 230 elapses, the frame opening information of the night monitoring switch 126 and the removal monitoring information of the game control device 54 are taken into the payout control device 230, and each piece of information is taken in. There is no fear that there is not, and the frame opening information and the removal monitoring information of the game control device 54 can be surely captured. As a result, the function of the night monitoring switch 126 can be fully exerted to improve the security.

This background will be described.
One of the illegal acts against gaming machines is to enter the game store at night when the gaming machine is turned off and remodel the gaming machine control device or replace it with an unauthorized device (for example, board). May be.
Corresponding to this, for example, when a gaming machine is turned off, it is detected and memorized by a sensor (for example, night monitoring SW) that the gaming machine has been opened (especially the front frame is opened), and the game at the next day's opening There is an example in which the opening information of the front frame detected by the sensor when the machine is turned on is output to the game control device.
However, the game control device that captures the frame opening information stored by the nighttime monitoring SW takes some time for start-up preparation from the time the main power is turned on. When the frame opening information from the night monitoring SW is input during the start-up preparation period, there is a possibility that the information cannot be taken in, and the function of the night monitoring switch cannot be sufficiently exhibited.
If the frame opening information cannot be captured well, even if the sensor detects that the front frame has been opened at the time of turning off the power of the gaming machine (for example, the night monitoring SW), it causes a decrease in security and measures Is required.
In addition, it is necessary to take an illegal measure that the game control device is removed at night.
The above example is a case where the game control device captures the opening information of the front frame, but there is a similar problem even when the payout control device captures the opening information of the front frame.

The present embodiment can solve the above problems.
That is, the night monitoring switch 126 is provided with output delay means 325, and the output delay means 325 outputs the frame opening information and the removal monitoring information of the game control device 54 to the payout control device 230 after being delayed by a predetermined period from the main power-on timing. Thus, after the start-up preparation period of the payout control device 230 elapses, the frame opening information of the night monitoring switch 126 and the removal monitoring information of the game control device 54 are taken into the payout control device 230, and each of the information There is no possibility that it will not be possible to capture, and it is possible to reliably capture the frame opening information and the removal monitoring information of the game control device 54, thereby avoiding a decrease in security against fraud.
In the description of the configuration of the first embodiment, it is described that the night monitoring switch 126 may be configured to detect that the glass frame 5 is opened in addition to detecting that the front frame 4 is opened. In that case, similarly, the output delay means 325 outputs the information on the opening of the glass frame 5 by the night monitoring switch 126 to the payout control device 230 after being delayed by a predetermined time Ta from the start of the main power supply. After the start-up preparation period of the control device 230 elapses, the opening information of the glass frame 5 by the night monitoring switch 126 is taken into the payout control device 230, and the front frame 4 is based on the taken-in information on the opening of the glass frame 5. Performs the same processing as in the case of open information. If it does so, there is no possibility that the open information of the glass frame 5 cannot be taken in, the open information of the glass frame 5 can be taken in reliably, and the deterioration of security against fraud can be avoided.

The inventive concept of the above configuration is expressed as follows.
A game control device for managing the progress of the game;
In a gaming machine comprising a power supply device for supplying power,
Even when the main power is shut off, it is possible to monitor the opening of the front frame and the removal of the game control device, and the information monitoring the opening of the front frame and the removal of the game control device is retained even when the main power is shut off. A gaming machine comprising night monitoring means for outputting information monitoring the release of the game and the removal of the game control device to the outside after being delayed by a predetermined period from the start of supply of the main power supply.
Here, the night monitoring switch 126 constitutes a night monitoring means.

The inventive concept of the above configuration when applied to an enclosed ball type gaming machine is expressed as follows.
A game control device that can enclose a predetermined number of game balls in a gaming machine main body and launch the enclosed game balls into a gaming area to perform a game and manage the progress of the gaming machine And a power supply device for supplying power,
The game control device determines whether the game result is in a predetermined profit state or any other state, and in the case of a predetermined profit state, the player's profit is increased in correspondence with a predetermined number of prize balls. Let
In the enclosed ball type gaming machine that plays the game by circulating the enclosed game ball by collecting the game ball that has passed through the game area and guiding it to the launch position,
Even when the main power is shut off, it is possible to monitor the opening of the front frame and the removal of the game control device, and the information monitoring the opening of the front frame and the removal of the game control device is retained even when the main power is shut off. An enclosing ball type gaming machine comprising night monitoring means for outputting information monitoring the release of the game and the removal of the game control device to the outside after being delayed by a predetermined period from the start of supply of the main power supply.

The inventive concept of a configuration in which the function of delaying the output of the night monitoring switch 126 is divided is expressed as follows.
A game control device for managing the progress of the game;
In a gaming machine comprising a power supply device for supplying power,
Even if the main power is shut off, it is possible to monitor the opening of the front frame and the removal of the game control device, and the night abnormality detection means that retains information monitoring the opening of the front frame and the removal of the game control device even when the main power is shut off. When,
When the main power supplied from the power supply device is turned on, the information monitoring the opening of the front frame and the removal of the game control device detected by the nighttime abnormality detecting means is delayed for a predetermined period from the start of the supply of the main power supply to the outside. An output delay means for outputting, and a gaming machine characterized by comprising:
Here, in the nighttime monitoring switch 126, the frame opening detection means 322 and the disconnection detection means 323 constitute a nighttime abnormality detection means, and the output delay means 325 constitutes an output delay means.
Further, the inventive concept of a configuration in which the frame opening detection unit 322, the disconnection detection unit 323, and the output delay unit 325 are combined into one night monitoring switch 126 is expressed as follows.
A gaming machine, wherein the nighttime abnormality detecting means and the output delay means are integrated into a single sensor.
Here, the night monitoring switch 126 constitutes the one sensor.

(2) In particular, the night monitoring switch 126 does not monitor fraud only with the frame opening information of the front frame 4, but in addition to the monitoring information (frame opening information) of the front frame 4, the removal monitoring information of the game control device 54 Since it is used together, it becomes possible to monitor a trace of possible fraud with much higher accuracy.

This background will be described.
For example, there is frame opening information by the front frame opening switch when the main power is cut off, and even if it is the opening of the front frame 4, it may not be illegal. For example, when the store clerk opens the front frame 4 for inspection after closing, the opening is necessary for inspection and is not illegal. Therefore, the reliability may not be sufficient only by the frame opening information by the front frame opening switch.
In contrast, if there is information that the main board (game control device 54) has been removed, there is a high possibility that the main board (game control device 54) has been illegally replaced or modified.
Therefore, security is enhanced by capturing both pieces of information.
In the first embodiment, paying attention to the above viewpoint, not only the frame opening information of the front frame 4 but also the removal of the game control device 54 that detects and monitors the removal of the main board (game control device 54) by the night monitoring switch 126. Since the fraud is monitored by adding monitoring information, if there is information that the front frame 4 is opened and the main board (game control device 54) is removed, the main board (game control device 54) is illegal. As a result of the monitoring, it is possible to monitor a trace of a possibility of fraud with extremely high accuracy and to improve security against fraud.
In particular, the store clerk may work with the front frame open after the game machine is turned off even when the store is open. If it is performed by the control device of the machine, the work at the time of starting up the power becomes very complicated. This is because even when the frame is opened when the power is turned off as a normal work process, when the power of the gaming machine is turned on, fraud notification processing or the like may be performed for the opening of the frame.
Therefore, in the detection of only the opening of the front frame, the operation of turning off the power and opening the front frame is performed even in the normal work process, so even if fraud is performed, it is determined that the normal frame is open, It is possible to neglect fraud confirmation (because only the notification of opening the frame).
On the other hand, in Example 1, since not only the frame opening information but also the removal monitoring information of the game control device 54 is added to monitor the fraud, the game is started only by the conventional frame opening notification. It is possible to prevent a situation in which a disadvantage is incurred without noticing that the substrate has been illegally exchanged.
In addition, when the store clerk opens the front frame and works after the power supply of the gaming machine is turned off during the opening of the store, the possibility of fraud is low. By monitoring fraud, the possibility of fraud is low, and by itself, processing such as game start regulation is not performed by the control device of the gaming machine, and the processing load on the control device at power-on can be reduced.
Note that means (for example, a switch or the like) for restricting (for example, canceling) the process of performing error notification only by opening the front frame 4 may be provided.
During the operation of the amusement store, it may be possible to turn off the power of the gaming machine once due to some trouble, open the front frame 4, and then turn on the power. If a means for regulating (for example, canceling) the processing to be performed is provided, the processing load on the control device at the time of power-on can be further reduced by operating the means so as not to perform error notification.

In the configuration of (2) above, a difference may be made in the correspondence between the two pieces of information (the frame opening information of the front frame 4 and the removal monitoring information of the game control device 54).
Specifically, error information is output preferentially from a gaming machine having information that the main board (game control device 54) has been removed by the night monitoring switch 126 for a large number of gaming machines in the gaming store, and the error information is also displayed. You may make it the structure which can distinguish that. For example, it is as follows when distinguished from normal error information.
First priority error information: main board removal information + front frame 4 release information second priority error information: main board removal information third priority error information: front frame 4 release information Error notification based on error information Is performed on the display device 41 under the control of the card unit 15 and the effect control device 53, and the inspection is started with priority from the gaming machine of the first priority error information.
If the error information is differentiated in this way, the inspection can be started from a gaming machine having a higher urgency and a higher possibility of fraud, and the fraud can be dealt with quickly and efficiently.

(3) Since the payout control device 230 is provided separately from the game control device 54, and the night monitoring switch 126 is managed by the payout control device 230, even if the game control device 54 is illegally modified and does not function normally, the payout The controller 230 can reliably monitor the removal of the main board (game controller 54). For example, the gaming control device 54 can be illegally removed and an illegally modified main board can be attached.
(4) Although the night monitoring switch 126 is arranged, since the payout control device 230 is provided separately from the game control device 54, the control relating to the game progress, the monitoring of the number of encapsulated balls and the addition / Controls such as subtraction processing and ball count processing can be separated, and the program is simple.
In addition, the processing load on the CPUs 231 and 111 of the payout control device 230 and the game control device 54 can be reduced.

(4) Distributing frame opening information regarding whether or not the opening of the front frame 4 has been detected at night and removal monitoring information of the game control device 54 regarding whether or not the main board (game control device 54) has been removed at night The card is read by the control device 230, the abnormality is monitored by the payout control device 230, and in the case of an abnormality, error information is output to the card unit 15 and error processing is performed by the card unit 15. Error processing is performed by the unit 15 and security against fraud can be improved with high reliability.
This background will be described.
As a result of determining the detection signal of the night monitoring switch 126, if there is a possibility that the main board (game control device 54) has been removed at night, there is a high possibility that it has been replaced with an illegal board. Then, even if the main board exists, it is an illegal board and the main board cannot be trusted.
Therefore, even if the presentation control device 53 displays an indication such as no error on the display device 41 (or even in a display state where there is no error notification) in response to an instruction from the main board (game control device), there is a possibility that it cannot be trusted. Further, since the main board (game control device) 54 and the payout control device 230 are connected, the error notification output from the illegal main board (game control device) to the payout control device 230 is also stopped. There is a risk of fraud.
Then, the payout control device 230 may not be trusted.
Therefore, in the first embodiment, the payout control device 230 issues an interrupt from the main board (game control device) 54 in view of an untrustworthy state in which the main board (game control device 54) or the payout control device 230 has been cheated. Before the permission, the night monitoring information from the night monitoring switch 126 is transmitted to the card unit 15, and the card unit 15 performs error processing.
For this reason, since error processing is performed by the device called the card unit 15 that is remote from the pachinko machine 1, security against fraud can be improved with high reliability.
The inventive concept of the above configuration is expressed as follows.
Separated from the game control device, a payout control device for controlling the payout of the ball is arranged,
Detection information of the night monitoring means is input to the payout control device,
The payout control device
Monitor the abnormality based on the detection information of the night monitoring means, and output error information to the card unit in the case of abnormality,
A gaming machine, wherein the card unit is configured to perform predetermined error processing upon receiving error information.

(5) When the RAM clear switch 182 is turned on and the power is turned on, the payout control device 230 performs the RAM clear (initialization of the RAM 233, etc.) and then the output signal from the night monitoring switch 126 And the night monitoring information (the frame opening information of the front frame 4 and the removal monitoring information of the game control device 54) is transmitted to the card unit 15, so that the night monitoring information (front frame 4) even if the RAM clear switch 182 is turned on. The frame opening information and the game control device 54 removal monitoring information) are not missed, and the night monitoring information (the frame opening information of the front frame 4 and the removal monitoring information of the game control device 54) is reliably transmitted to the card unit 15. can do.
Further, when the card unit 15 receives the night monitoring information (the frame opening information of the front frame 4 and the removal monitoring information of the game control device 54), for example, the card unit 15 outputs an error information to the hall computer 86 that reports an error. It is possible to prevent fraudulent games in advance by taking measures such as performing a ball lending (which may not be lent to a ball).

(6) In addition, when the front frame 4 is illegally opened to generate frame opening information or the removal of the game control device 54 is detected, the error state is displayed on the display device 41. The store clerk can check the pachinko machine 1 and take appropriate measures (for example, removal and normal inspection of the illegal substrate etc.) for attachment of the illegal substrate, for example.
Even when the store clerk does not look at the display device 41, the card unit 15 receives the unauthorized frame opening information of the front frame 4 and the removal monitoring information of the game control device 54 as described above. 15, an error notification or error information is output to the hall computer 86 is taken, so that the store clerk can easily notice and security against fraud is improved. Further, if measures such as not lending the ball in the card unit 15 are taken, even if the player performs a ball lending operation on the card unit 15, the ball lending is not performed, and the player tells this to the store clerk. Thus, while the clerk notices the malfunction of the card unit 15 and inspects it, the clerk notices that the front frame 4 has been illegally opened or the game control device 54 has been removed. It is possible to take appropriate measures such as, and security against fraud is improved.

(7) With regard to the configuration using the gaming machine ID, the following effects are obtained when the following modifications are made.
That is, as a modification, for example, in the pachinko machine 1, when the power is turned on, the gaming machine ID (unique identification information of the game control device 54: main board ID and unique identification information of the payout control device 230: payout unique ID) is stored in the card unit 15. When it is determined that the night frame opening fraud is being informed by sending it to the external management device 91 via the external device and collating it with a pre-managed regular gaming machine ID (authentic collation of the ID). Determines whether or not the information indicating that the ID collation result is OK is received from the external management device 91 via the card unit 15.
If the ID collation result OK is not received from the card unit 15, the display device 41 continues to display information that the front frame 4 has been opened at night, and the store clerk displays the payout control device 230 and the game control device. 54 etc. are inspected, and necessary measures are taken including the presence or absence of fraud.
Therefore, when such a modified example is adopted, the possibility of fraud is determined based on two types of information: the frame opening information from the night monitoring switch 126 and the matching result of the gaming machine ID. Compared with the case of determining fraud, the accuracy of the possibility of fraud can be further increased, and a gaming machine with high security can be provided.

In particular, since the authenticity of the gaming machine ID is collated by the external management device 91 managed by a third party outside the gaming store, it is possible to more accurately confirm the illegal modification of the gaming machine.
Further, in the modified example, when the night frame opening fraud notification is being performed, the night frame opening fraud error notification is continued until the ID collation result becomes OK, thereby obtaining the following effects.
First, in a situation where an error notification is made, the amusement store is busy preparing for opening a store, so if the error notification is only for a predetermined time, the store clerk may miss it, but in the modification, the ID verification result is OK. Since the error notification of the fraudulent opening of the night frame is continued until it becomes, the store clerk is less likely to miss it, and it is possible to reliably deal with fraud (for example, fraud inspection).
Secondly, the frame opening information when the opening of the front frame 4 is detected may be a case where the game store simply opened the front frame for inspection or the like, in which case a lot of gaming machines will give an error notification. There is a fear. In the modified example, if the front frame of the gaming machine is simply opened, the error notification is terminated when the ID verification result OK is received, so the error notification is merely displayed on the display device 41, There is no risk that many gaming machines will report errors for a long time.
The inventive concept of the above configuration is expressed as follows.
When the main power is turned on by the power supply,
Providing transmission means for transmitting main unique identification information that can identify and identify a gaming machine to an external management device managed by a third party organization via a card unit;
External management device
A gaming machine configured to collate the transmitted main unique identification information with the main unique identification information of the gaming machine managed in advance, and to return the collation result to the card unit.

  In addition, in the configuration of matching the gaming machine ID as described above, fraud is monitored including not only the frame opening information from the night monitoring switch 126 but also the removal monitoring information of the game control device 54 from the night monitoring switch 126, for example. When the removal of the game control device 54 is detected, it is determined that the night frame opening fraud notification is being made including the information detecting the removal of the game control device 54, and the above processing is performed. Since the removal monitoring information of the game control device 54 is also added to the fraud determination, security measures can be significantly improved.

(8) In the payout control device 230, when the main power supply of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the frame opening information from the night monitoring switch 126 outputted after being delayed by a predetermined period from the main power on timing and the removal control of the game control device 54 When the information is taken in and it is determined based on the output signal of the night monitoring switch 126 that the front frame 4 has been opened or the game control device 54 has been removed at night, the error state information is output, so that the error notification is promptly performed. Can be done.
Of the above configurations, the inventive concept for outputting an error state is expressed as follows.
The payout control device
A gaming machine that outputs error information of an abnormality when there is opening information of the front frame by the night monitoring means or removal information of the gaming control device 54 when the gaming machine is turned on.
Also, in the above, the error state information from the payout control device 230 is output to the effect control device 53 via the game control device 54, and the error is notified on the display device 41 under the control of the effect control device 53. Can be efficiently confirmed.
Of the above-described configurations, the inventive concept of performing error notification on the display device 41 is expressed as follows.
The payout control device
When there is information on opening of the front frame by the night monitoring means or information on removing the game control device 54 when the gaming machine is turned on, abnormal error information is output to the effect control device via the game control device,
The effect control device controls the display device to display error information of the front frame abnormality on the display device.

(9) With regard to the configuration using the gaming machine ID, the following effects are obtained when the following modifications are made.
That is, as a modification, for example, the payout control device 230 determines that there is a possibility of fraud if it is determined that frame opening information has been generated due to unauthorized opening of the front frame 4 at night when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on. Then, the information on the error state is output from the payout control device 230 to the effect control device 53 via the game control device 54, the error is notified on the display device 41 under the control of the effect control device 53, and further the gaming machine ID If the configuration in which the error notification is continued until the verification result OK is received from the external management device 91 via the card unit 15, the unauthorized opening of the front frame 4 can be reliably notified, and the payout control device 230 or Whether the game control device 54 is true or false can be reliably inspected.
In particular, since the authenticity of the gaming machine ID is collated by the external management device 91 managed by a third party outside the gaming store, it is possible to more accurately confirm the illegal modification of the gaming machine.
The inventive concept of the above configuration is expressed as follows.
When the main power is turned on by the power supply,
Providing transmission means for transmitting main unique identification information that can identify and identify a gaming machine to an external management device managed by a third party organization via a card unit;
The payout control device
When there is opening information of the front frame by the night monitoring output means at the time of turning on the gaming machine, output error information of the front frame abnormality,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the output of the error information is continued until the result of collation of the main unique identification information of the gaming machine is sent from the external management device.

  In addition, in the configuration of matching the gaming machine ID as described above, fraud is monitored including not only the frame opening information from the night monitoring switch 126 but also the removal monitoring information of the game control device 54 from the night monitoring switch 126, for example. When the removal of the game control device 54 is detected, an error notification including information on the detection of the removal of the game control device 54 is performed, and the match result OK of the gaming machine ID is externally managed via the card unit 15. The error notification may be continued until it is received from the device 91. In this way, since the removal monitoring information of the game control device 54 is also added to the fraud determination, the security measures can be significantly improved.

(10) Regarding the RAM clear, when the following modification is used, the following effects are obtained.
That is, as a modification, for example, when a store clerk performs a RAM clear operation, for example, the RAM clear switch 182 is turned on before the night monitoring information of the night monitoring switch 126 is transmitted from the payout control device 230 to the card unit 15. Even if the RAM is not cleared and the night monitoring information of the night monitoring switch 126 is held in the RAM 233, it is possible to avoid a decrease in security against fraud.
That is, even if the front frame 4 of the gaming machine is opened at night to mount an illegal board or the like, and then the gaming machine is turned on and the RAM clear switch 182 is pressed to clear the RAM to erase the illegal traces. If the night monitoring information of the night monitoring switch 126 (including the frame opening information of the front frame 4) is not transmitted to the card unit 15, the RAM 233 is not cleared, and the night monitoring information of the night monitoring switch 126 is still stored in the RAM 233. Security against fraud.
Then, according to the configuration of the modified example, after the night monitoring information of the night monitoring switch 126 is reliably transmitted from the payout control device 230 to the card unit 15, the RAM 233 is cleared (initialized). Since the stored night monitoring information of the night monitoring switch 126 is also cleared, it is possible to reliably cope with fraud.
The payout control device 230 transmits the night monitoring information of the night monitoring switch 126 to the card unit 15 and then until the card unit 15 confirms the reception ACK indicating that the night monitoring information has been received, the RAM clear switch 182. If the reception ACK is confirmed without clearing the RAM 233 even if is turned on, the RAM 233 including the night monitoring information may be cleared (initialized) thereafter. In this way, it is possible to more reliably cope with fraud.
From the above, a gaming machine with higher security can be provided.

This background will be described.
One of the illegal acts against gaming machines is to enter the game store at night when the gaming machine is turned off and remodel the gaming machine control device or replace it with an unauthorized device (for example, board). May be.
Corresponding to this, for example, when a gaming machine is turned off, it is detected and memorized by a sensor (for example, night monitoring SW) that the gaming machine has been opened (especially the front frame is opened), and the game at the next day's opening There is an example in which the opening information of the front frame detected by the sensor when the machine is turned on is output to the game control device.
However, even if the frame opening information detected and stored by the sensor (night monitoring SW) is taken in and stored in the game control device, the frame opening information stored in the game control device by the operation of the RAM clear switch by the store clerk. May be deleted.
In other words, when the main power of the gaming machine is cut off, a front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) that detects and holds the opening of the front frame is provided, and if it is read into the gaming machine to monitor fraud, the security is high, If the RAM clear switch is pressed when the game machine is turned on, the information on opening the front frame obtained by monitoring may be lost. Then, the function of the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) is demonstrated. Can not.
If the frame opening information is deleted, even if a sensor (for example, the night monitoring SW) detects and stores that the front frame has been opened when the gaming machine is turned off, the security will be reduced and countermeasures will be taken. It has been demanded.
In particular, when the frame opening information is erased, the abnormality detection information is lost, and it is impossible to reliably detect fraud.

The present embodiment can solve the above problems.
That is, even when the store clerk performs the RAM clearing operation, it is paid that the night monitoring information of the night monitoring switch 126 (including the frame opening information of the front frame 4) is transmitted to the card unit 15. Until the control device 230 confirms, the RAM is not cleared, and the frame opening information in which the front frame 4 is illegally opened is held in the RAM 233 as night monitoring information, so that it is possible to avoid a reduction in security against fraud.
Further, after the night monitoring information of the night monitoring switch 126 is reliably transmitted from the payout control device 230 to the card unit 15, the RAM 233 is cleared, and at the same time, the night monitoring information of the night monitoring switch 126 stored in the RAM 233 is also cleared. Is done. Therefore, it is possible to reliably cope with fraud.
The payout control device 230 transmits the night monitoring information of the night monitoring switch 126 to the card unit 15 and then until the card unit 15 confirms the reception ACK indicating that the night monitoring information has been received, the RAM clear switch 182. If the reception ACK is confirmed without clearing the RAM 233 even if is turned on, the RAM 233 including the night monitoring information may be cleared (initialized) thereafter. In this way, it is possible to more reliably cope with fraud.
As described above, a gaming machine resistant to fraud can be provided.

The inventive concept of the above configuration is expressed as follows.
However, the following inventive concept is a concept when the payout control device is integrated and integrated with the game control device. When the payout control device is configured separately from the game control device, the payout control device is divided, the RAM of the payout control device is cleared, and the payout control device transmits night monitoring information to the card unit. do it.
A game control device for managing the progress of the game;
In a gaming machine comprising a RAM clear switch for clearing the RAM of the game control device,
Even when the power is shut off, it is possible to monitor the opening of the front frame and the removal of the game control device.
Clear control means for controlling the operation of the RAM clear switch,
The game control device includes:
When turning on the power of the gaming machine, the information monitoring the opening of the front frame and the removal of the game control device by the night monitoring means is transmitted to the card unit,
When the RAM clear switch is pressed, the RAM is cleared by the clear control means after confirming that the information monitoring the opening of the front frame and the removal of the game control device is transmitted to the card unit. A gaming machine characterized by that.

The inventive concept of the above configuration when applied to an enclosed ball type gaming machine is expressed as follows.
A game control device that can enclose a predetermined number of game balls in a gaming machine main body and launch the enclosed game balls into a gaming area to perform a game and manage the progress of the gaming machine And a RAM clear switch for clearing the RAM of the game control device,
The game control device determines whether the game result is in a predetermined profit state or any other state, and in the case of a predetermined profit state, the player's profit is increased in correspondence with a predetermined number of prize balls. Let
In the enclosed ball type gaming machine that plays the game by circulating the enclosed game ball by collecting the game ball that has passed through the game area and guiding it to the launch position,
Even when the power is shut off, it is possible to monitor the opening of the front frame and the removal of the game control device.
Clear control means for controlling the operation of the RAM clear switch,
The game control device includes:
When turning on the power of the gaming machine, the information monitoring the opening of the front frame and the removal of the game control device by the night monitoring means is transmitted to the card unit,
When the RAM clear switch is pressed, the RAM is cleared by the clear control means after confirming that the information monitoring the opening of the front frame and the removal of the game control device is transmitted to the card unit. Enclosed ball game machine characterized by that.

(11) Regarding the RAM clear, when the following modification is used, the following effects are obtained.
That is, as a modification, for example, when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the payout control device 230 takes in the detection signal from the night monitoring switch 126 delayed by a predetermined time from turning on the main power, but the front frame from the night monitoring switch 126 If the open state of the front frame 4 is detected by the information monitoring the release of the game controller and the removal of the game control device, if the night monitor information of the night monitor switch 126 is not transmitted to the card unit 15, the RAM clear switch Even when 182 is pressed, if the configuration is adopted in which error information is output to the effect control device 53 via the game control device 54 without clearing the RAM 233, the effect control device 53 causes the night. An error message indicating that a command related to monitoring information has not been transmitted to the card unit 15 is displayed. Performs a control such as displaying to 1, it will be to inform the clerk.
Therefore, according to this modified example, the store clerk looks at the display device 41 to inspect the pachinko machine 1 and, for example, take appropriate measures for attachment of, for example, an unauthorized substrate (for example, removal of an unauthorized substrate and normal inspection) ). That is, it is possible to reliably cope with fraud.

The inventive concept of the above configuration is expressed as follows.
The game control device includes:
When the information monitoring the opening of the front frame and the removal of the game control device by the night monitoring means is not transmitted to the card unit when the gaming machine is turned on,
Even if the RAM clear switch is pushed, error information is output without clearing the RAM by the clear control means.

(12) With regard to the RAM clear, the following effects can be obtained when the following modification is adopted.
That is, as a modification, for example, when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the payout control device 230 takes in the detection signal from the night monitoring switch 126 delayed by a predetermined time from turning on the main power, but the front frame from the night monitoring switch 126 When the open state of the front frame 4 is detected based on the information monitoring the release of the game controller and the removal of the game control device, the night monitor information of the night monitor switch 126 is stored in the RAM 233 and transmitted to the card unit 15. When the reception ACK from 15 is confirmed, the night monitoring information stored in the RAM 233 is cleared. If the card unit 15 does not receive the night monitoring information from the payout control device 230, the RAM is cleared. The night monitoring information including the frame opening information indicating that the front frame 4 is illegally opened is not stored in the RAM 233. Since it is held, it is possible to avoid the deterioration of security against unauthorized.
That is, as long as the nighttime monitoring information including the frame opening information with the front frame 4 opened is held in the RAM 233, the store clerk can take measures to remove the fraud while searching for the possibility of fraud.
In particular, when the main power supply is cut off, a reception ACK indicating that the card unit 15 has received night monitoring information including frame opening information indicating that the front frame 4 has been opened by the night monitoring switch 126 is confirmed and stored in the RAM 233. Because the night monitoring information is cleared, valuable night monitoring information (night monitoring information including the frame opening information when the front frame 4 is opened) detected when the main power supply is shut off can be used effectively without losing security. Can be increased.
Moreover, if the night monitoring information including the frame opening information with the front frame 4 opened is transmitted from the payout control device 230 to the card unit 15, the card unit 15 displays the night monitoring information when the night monitoring information is cleared. If it is not received, the night monitoring information disappears. However, in the modified example, after confirming the reception ACK indicating that the card unit 15 has received the night monitoring information, the night monitoring information stored in the RAM 233 is displayed. Since it is cleared, security can be greatly enhanced from this point.
The inventive concept of the above configuration is expressed as follows.
The game control device includes:
When turning on the power of the gaming machine, the information monitoring the opening of the front frame and the removal of the game control device by the night monitoring means is transmitted to the card unit,
When a reception ACK from a card unit is confirmed, information monitoring the opening of the front frame and the removal of the game control device is cleared.

(13) The night monitoring switch 126 monitors the opening of the front frame 4 and the removal of the game control device 54 when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off (for example, at night when the game store is closed). 4 and monitoring of the removal of the game control device 54), and when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, the night power monitoring information is delayed by a predetermined time Ta (for example, 5 seconds) from the start of the main power supply. Since the payout control device 230 reads out the night monitoring release information and stores it in the RAM 233 and transmits the night monitoring release information stored in the RAM 233 to the card unit 15, the card unit 15 When opening or removal of the game control device 54 is detected, for example, the possibility that the front frame 4 has been opened illegally at night or the game control device 54 is not The card unit 15 determines that there is a possibility that the card has been removed, outputs error information to the hall computer 86, and further prevents ball lending, so as to deal appropriately and improperly. be able to. As a result, the clerk can inspect the pachinko machine 1 by error notification, and it is also possible not to lend the ball, so even if there is a fraud, it is possible to find a fraudulent board etc. Further, it is possible not to operate the pachinko machine 1, and it is possible to prevent damage to the amusement store.
The inventive concept of the above configuration is expressed as follows.
The night monitoring means includes:
It is possible to monitor the opening of the front frame and the removal of the game control device at the time of power-off of the gaming machine, hold information monitoring the opening of the front frame and the removal of the gaming control device as night monitoring information, and when turning on the gaming machine , Keep and output the night monitoring information to the outside,
The game control device
A gaming machine characterized in that when power is turned on, night monitoring information detected and held by a front night monitoring means is stored in a RAM, and the night monitoring information stored in the RAM is transmitted to a card unit.

Moreover, according to Example 1, there exists the following effect regarding a game game.
(1) The pachinko machine 1 (enclosed ball game machine) of the present embodiment includes a display device 41 (first display device) managed by the production control device 53 (game machine: pachinko machine 1), and a card unit 15 And an operation display device 7 (second display device) that controls at least a part thereof, and the operation display device 7 is configured to be able to display other information in addition to displaying information related to the ball rental controlled by the card unit 15. Therefore, while the special device game is produced on the display device 41, other information (for example, production auxiliary information such as introduction of characters appearing in the special game) can be displayed on the operation display device 7. This makes it possible to display various effects that are easy for the player to understand and enhance the fun of the game.

This background will be described.
For gaming machines that display with a display device such as a liquid crystal display, for example, display symbol variation and display game descriptions, display various characters, and select effects for the player using push buttons. The screen to be displayed is displayed.
However, when various displays as described above are performed on one display device, symbol variation display, game description, character appearance, and the like are mixed and the display is difficult for the player to understand.

A specific example is as follows.
For example, there is a gaming machine in which a plurality of operation buttons for performance are provided to change the performance.
However, in such a case, if the roles and operation methods of the plurality of operation buttons are difficult to understand, there is a risk that the interest of the game may be reduced.
In another gaming machine, for example, there are a plurality of push buttons for production, or a combination with a cross key is used for production to cope with various productions.
However, in such a case, the operation is complicated and difficult to understand for the player. Therefore, countermeasures are necessary.

In addition, there is a gaming machine in which a touch panel (a configuration in which a touch sensor is arranged) is provided in an area corresponding to the central portion of the gaming board (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2004-16292).
However, in the case of such a gaming machine, the player touches the glass part with a finger, so that there is a problem that the glass part is conspicuous. On the amusement hall side, the conspicuous part of the gaming machine is dirty, so it is necessary to clean the glass part frequently and is troublesome.
The present embodiment can solve the above problems.

The inventive concept of the above configuration is expressed as follows.
A first display device managed by the gaming machine;
A second display device in which the card unit controls at least a part thereof, and a gaming machine comprising:
The second display device is configured to be capable of displaying production assistance information in addition to displaying information related to ball rental controlled by the card unit.

The inventive concept of the above configuration when applied to an enclosed ball type gaming machine is expressed as follows.
A game control device capable of enclosing a predetermined number of game balls in a gaming machine main body, launching the enclosed game balls into a gaming area and playing a game, and managing the progress of the gaming machine With
The game control device determines whether the game result is in a predetermined profit state or any other state, and in the case of a predetermined profit state, the player's profit is increased in correspondence with a predetermined number of prize balls. Let
In the enclosed ball type gaming machine that plays the game by circulating the enclosed game ball by collecting the game ball that has passed through the game area and guiding it to the launch position,
A first display device managed by the gaming machine;
A second display device that controls at least a part of the card unit,
The second display device is configured to be capable of displaying production assistance information in addition to displaying information related to ball rental controlled by the card unit.

(2) Since the push button type production operation switch 9 operated by the player and the touch type operation display device (touch panel) are provided, and the switching button 307 is arranged on the operation display device 7, the production of the effect for the player is provided. The width can be increased.
For example, the effect operation switch 9 displays on the display device 41 a display that prompts the player to make repeated hits in accordance with the contents of the effect screen of the display device 41, so that the player repeatedly presses the effect operation switch 9 to play the game. On the other hand, the switch button 307 arranged on the operation display device 7 is used when selecting the display of the model name, the game description, etc., so that it can be switched with the production operation switch 9 for continuous hitting and selection. The buttons 307 can be used separately, and the range of production is expanded.
Further, the use of the effect operation switch 9, the switching button 307, and the various buttons for effect on the operation display device 7 are differently used for continuous hitting and selection, thereby expanding the degree of freedom of the effect.

The inventive concept of the above configuration is expressed as follows.
A first production operation unit and a second production operation unit operated by a player;
The gaming machine, wherein the second performance operation unit is arranged on the second display device.
Here, the production operation switch 9 constitutes a first production operation unit, and the operation display device 7 (including various touch panel buttons) constitutes a second production operation unit.
Further, focusing on the structure, the inventive concept of the above configuration is expressed as follows.
The first performance operation unit is composed of a mechanical push button that can be pressed by the player,
The gaming machine characterized in that the second performance operation unit is configured by a liquid crystal display with a touch panel that can be operated by a player touching with a finger.

(3) The operation display device 7 that can be operated by the player and also used as a production operation unit (touch panel) is disposed on the lower panel 6 below the glass frame 5. That is, if it is a normal gaming machine other than the enclosed ball type gaming machine, the operation display device 7 is arranged on the same member as the member provided with the upper plate of the front frame, and the operation display device 7 is not arranged on the glass frame. It is a configuration. Therefore, there are the following effects.
Since the operation display device 7 that is also used as a production operation unit (touch panel) is not provided in the vicinity of the display device 41 (this corresponds to the department of the glass frame 5), it is usually in a prominent place like the glass frame 5. Is not touched by the player, so that the glass frame 5 is not soiled and the cleaning work on the game hall side can be reduced.

The inventive concept of the above configuration is expressed as follows.
A gaming machine characterized in that the second performance operating section operated by the player is provided on a lower panel below the glass frame.
Here, the operation display device 7 constitutes a second effect operation unit.

Moreover, according to Example 1, there exist the following incidental effects.
(1) The pachinko machine 1 (enclosed ball game machine) of this embodiment stores the number of balls held in the RAM 233 as an internal memory when the number of balls held by the player (game value) changes continuously. Is updated immediately, but when the number-of-balls display 40 displays the number of balls of the player, the number of balls is updated at intervals of a predetermined period (for example, 0.3 seconds). .
Therefore, even when there are consecutive winnings, the player can easily recognize that the number of balls held has been updated in response to winnings.

This background will be described.
During the game, the display of the number-of-balls indicator needs to be updated because there is an increase in the number of winning balls due to winning and a subtraction due to firing.
However, if there are consecutive wins and the number display on the ball indicator is displayed immediately, the player knows if the number of balls actually updated in response to the win. Difficult to do.
That is, when there is a change in the player's number of balls (game value), the storage of the number of balls in the RAM 233 as an internal memory is immediately updated, and at the same time, the number of balls held in the number-of-balls display 40. The display of the number-of-balls display 40 is updated instantaneously, especially when winning continuously, so that the player can recognize whether the winning has been reliably reflected in the number of balls held. There is a problem that it is difficult.

Therefore, in this embodiment, paying attention to how to update the number of balls possessed, a solution was made by providing a time difference between the storage update of the internal memory and the display update of the ball count indicator 40.
Specifically, even if there are consecutive wins and the number of balls (game value) changes continuously, the memory of the number of balls in the internal memory (RAM 233) is immediately updated, The number of balls held in the number display 40 is updated at intervals (time difference) of a predetermined period (for example, 0.3 seconds), so that the display content of the number of balls holding display 40 can be sufficiently recognized. And the player can easily recognize that the number of balls has been updated in response to winning.
Therefore, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that does not lower the interest of the game.

The inventive concept of the above configuration is expressed as follows.
A game control device capable of enclosing a predetermined number of game balls in a gaming machine main body, launching the enclosed game balls into a gaming area and playing a game, and managing the progress of the gaming machine With
The game control device determines whether the game result is in a predetermined profit state or any other state, and in the case of a predetermined profit state, the player's profit is increased in correspondence with a predetermined number of prize balls. Let
In the enclosed ball type gaming machine that plays the game by circulating the enclosed game ball by collecting the game ball that has passed through the game area and guiding it to the launch position,
The game control device includes:
A game value storage means for storing changes in the player's game value;
A game value display control means for controlling a game value display means for displaying a player's game value, and
The game value display control means includes
If there is a continuous change in the game value of the player, control of updating the game value in the game value storage means is performed immediately,
The gaming machine is controlled so that the gaming value is updated at intervals of a predetermined period when the gaming value display means displays the gaming value of the player.

(2) If the player's number of balls (game value) changes continuously, the number of balls held in the internal memory (RAM 233) is immediately updated, but the number of balls held in the ball number indicator 40 The number is updated at intervals of a predetermined period (for example, 0.3 seconds). In this case, the time of 0.3 seconds corresponds to half of the time required for launching a game ball to the game area 22 at a rate of 100 shots per minute. The display of the ball number display 40 can be updated, and the recognition of the number of balls held by the player and the launch of the ball can be adjusted well.
That is, since a game ball cannot be launched into the game area 22 at a pace of 100 or more per minute, if the display of the number-of-balls display 40 is updated at a maximum interval of 0.3 seconds from the launch, the player However, it is possible to secure a sufficient time for sufficiently recognizing the display contents of the ball number indicator 40.
The inventive concept of the above configuration is expressed as follows.
The game value display control means
The gaming machine is characterized in that when the gaming value display means displays the player's gaming value, the updating interval of the gaming value is set to a time shorter than at least half of the continuous firing interval of gaming balls.

(3) The display of the number of winning balls by the winning display LED 355 is controlled at a timing of turning on (lit) for 1 second in the normal mode and then turning off (turned off) for 0.5 seconds, and on for 0.5 seconds in the special mode ( Is controlled) at a timing of turning off (turning off) and then turning off (turning off) for 0.1 second.
Therefore, even if the winning is continuous in the special mode such as the big hit and the winning balls are continuously generated, the winning display time by the winning display LED 355 is shorter than that in the normal mode, and the number of winning balls is increased. The display is not delayed and the player can easily know how many prize balls have been obtained.

The inventive concept of the above configuration is expressed as follows.
A prize display device that displays a corresponding number of prize balls for a predetermined time when there is a prize at the prize opening;
The game control device includes:
In the normal mode, the number of winning balls corresponding to each winning is displayed on the winning display device for a predetermined time, and when the special mode is entered, the display time control means for shortening the display time of the winning ball number on the winning display device from the normal mode. A gaming machine characterized by having

(4) In the case of winning continuously in a special mode such as a big hit, the display time of the number of winning balls by the winning display LED 355 is set to the game ball firing interval (0.6 seconds) (100 shots / minute (0.6 1 shot per second) is shortened to 0.5 seconds, so that the display of the number of prize balls by the prize display LED 355 is not delayed, and how many prize balls the player has obtained Can be easily known.
The inventive concept of the above configuration is expressed as follows.
The display time control means is
A gaming machine, wherein a display time of the number of prize balls in a special mode on a winning display device is set to be shorter than a continuous launch interval of game balls.

(5) Since the winning display LED 355 is configured integrally with the collective display device 35 that collectively performs various displays including special drawings and ordinary drawings, it is easy to control the game control device 54 regarding the display of the number of prize balls. In addition, the arrangement space is small.
The inventive concept of the above configuration is expressed as follows.
The winning display device
A gaming machine characterized by being configured integrally with a collective display device that collectively displays various displays including special drawings and ordinary drawings.

(6) Since the game control device 54 controls the winning display LED 355, the control efficiency is good. Further, a special control device for controlling the winning display LED 355 is unnecessary, control is easy, and the cost is reduced.
The inventive concept of the above configuration is expressed as follows.
It has a game control device that manages the progress of the gaming machine,
The game control device includes:
A gaming machine comprising winning display control means for controlling a winning display device for displaying a number of winning balls for a predetermined time.

Next, various modifications of the first embodiment will be described.
<Modification 1 of Example 1>
In the first embodiment, when starting the polishing of the encapsulated sphere, the start of polishing is in the order of the payout control device 230 → the game control device 54 → the effect control device 53 → the polishing control device 59. It may be as follows.
(1) Polishing instruction: An instruction to start polishing may be given in the order of the game control device 54 → the effect control device 53 → the polishing control device 59.
(2) Launch stop instruction: You may instruct to stop the launch of the game ball in the order of the game control device 54 → the payout control device 230.
If it carries out like said (1) and (2), the burden of the payout control apparatus 230 can be reduced.

<Modification 2 of Example 1>
Unlike the first modification, for example, the following may be performed.
(1) A configuration without an effect control device may be used when polishing the encapsulated sphere is started.
That is, a configuration may be used in which a polishing start instruction is given in the order of the payout control device 230 → the game control device 54 → the polishing control device 59. In this way, the burden on the production control device 53 can be reduced.

<Modification 3 of Example 1>
The RTC 60 of the polishing control device 59 may be used so that the polishing device 56 is not operated during a predetermined period during business.
In the first embodiment, when the power of the gaming machine (pachinko machine 1) is turned on, an instruction to start polishing is given in the order of the payout control device 230 → the game control device 54 → the effect control device 53 → the polishing control device 59. With the configuration, for example, when the gaming machine is turned off for inspection during business hours and turned on again, an instruction to start polishing is issued to the polishing controller 59.
If it does so, the operating time of a gaming machine will become short and the profit of a game store will also be affected.
In the fourth modification, therefore, the RTC 60 of the polishing control device 59 is used so that the polishing device 56 is not operated for a predetermined period during business. The predetermined period here is a business style that considers closing of the amusement store from the opening of the amusement store and turning on the power of the gaming machine (pachinko machine 1) before opening the store to polish the encapsulated ball. The predetermined period may be, for example, from opening (9 am) to closing (11:00 pm). For this reason, the RTC 60 of the polishing control device 59 is used, and for example, from 9 am to 11 pm is set as a predetermined period during business, and the actual time (including the calendar function) output by the RTC 60 is used. The polishing controller 59 is controlled so that the polishing apparatus 56 is not operated during a predetermined period (from 9 am to 11 pm) during which the program of the polishing controller 59 is in operation.
Specifically, from 9 am to 11 pm, even if the gaming machine is turned off for inspection during business, and the power is turned on again, the program of the polishing control device 59 is loaded into the RTC 60. The polishing apparatus 56 is not instructed to start polishing while referring to the real-time output of.

In addition, since the business style is such that the gaming machine (pachinko machine 1) is normally turned on before the store is opened and the encapsulated sphere is polished, for example, the store is opened so that the polishing of the encapsulated sphere is completed. The power of the gaming machine is turned on 30 minutes before the polishing of the encapsulated sphere by the polishing device 56.
As described above, according to the fourth modification, it is possible to prevent the polishing apparatus 56 from being operated during a predetermined period during business by simply setting a program using the RTC 60 of the polishing control apparatus 59. Even if the gaming machine is turned off and then turned on again for reasons such as the polishing machine 56 does not operate, the gaming machine does not fall in operation and the efficiency (operating efficiency of the stand) is good.

<Modification 4 of Example 1>
In the first embodiment, the number of held balls and the number of counted balls are periodically transmitted in the order of the payout control device 230 → the game control device 54 → the effect control device 53, and the decoration control or the like by the decorative ball display device 250 is performed. Not limited to this, for example, a display instruction command (for example, an instruction command for decoration control) is directly transmitted from the payout control device (payout board) 230 to the effect control device 53 to the decoration ball number display device 250. Also good.
Specifically, the following command is sent.
(1) Launch start, stop firing, winning (prize ball), no number of balls, number of balls, etc. (2) number of balls A (100 to 500), number of balls B ( (3) Commands related to counting such as counting start, counting stop, etc. In this way, the payout control device 230 changes to the effect control device 53. By directly sending a command, the burden on the game control device 54 can be reduced.
In addition, the payout control device 230 does not send a command to the game control device 54, thereby facilitating the control, and accordingly, the display instruction command to the decorative ball number display device 250 can be made fine, and the decoration control instruction As for commands, as described above, firing start, firing stop, winning (prize ball), no ball holding, ball holding, ball holding A (100 to 500), ball holding B (500) It is also possible to finely control the decorative ball number display device 250 based on information such as the number of balls held, counting start, counting stop, and the like.

Next, a modified example of the first embodiment will be described with reference to FIG.
<Variation 1 of counting method>
In the first modification, the player can smoothly grasp the number of balls held.
A method for counting the number of balls in the first modification will be described with reference to FIG.
In FIG. 87, “pressing time” indicates the operation time (pressing time) of the counting switch 311, and FIG. 87 shows how to count the “pressing time” and the range of the number of balls. ing.

Specifically, it is as follows. The following unit count value corresponds to “count unit”.
・ Pressing time of the counting switch 311 = less than 1 second: Invalid regardless of the range of the number of balls held.
(A) Counting 50 balls when the number of balls is 1000 or less (meaning unit count value = 50, the same applies hereinafter)
(B) Counting 100 balls from 1001 to 10,000 balls. (C) Counting 1000 balls from 10001 balls. After that, every 0.5 seconds:
(B) Count 50 balls when the number of balls is 1000 or less. (B) Count 100 balls when the number of balls is between 1001 and 10,000. (C) Count 1000 when the number is 10001 or more. .0 seconds:
(B) Count all balls with 1,000 or less balls (b) Count all balls with 1001 to 10,000 balls (c) Count all balls with 10001 balls or more

  As described above, in the first modification, the time for performing unit counting is set by dividing the pressing time of the counting switch 311 every 0.5 seconds. As described above, the operation of the counting switch 311 is invalidated for less than 1 second to prevent the counting switch 311 from malfunctioning. Regardless of how many balls are held, the count time of the count switch 311 is all counted in 6.0 seconds.

  As described above, in Modification 1, the count switch 311 is pressed every 0.5 seconds to set a timing value for performing unit counting, and less than 1 second is used to prevent the count switch 311 from malfunctioning. The operation of is invalidated. Further, no matter how many balls are held, the counting time of the counting switch 311 is all counted in 6.0 seconds.

Next, the effect of the method for counting the number of balls in the first modification will be described as follows. In the first embodiment, it is described that the counting method shown in FIG. 87 is used. However, since the effect is not specifically described, the common effect will be described here.
(1) In Modification 1, for example, when the number of balls held is 1000 or less, 50 are counted in 1.0 second depending on the operation time (pressing time) of the counting switch 311, and thereafter 50 every 0.5 seconds. Counting the pieces and counting all in 6.0 seconds, so the count amount of the number of balls will be changed according to the operation time of the counting switch 311, the counting time of the number of balls will be an appropriate time, The counting switch 311 has a good feeling of use, is not slow, and does not cause a sense of incongruity such as troublesomeness, so that the number of balls can be counted. Therefore, it is possible to realize an enclosed ball type gaming machine that allows the player to count the number of balls possessed without a sense of incongruity.
The inventive concept of the above configuration is expressed as follows.
A counting operation means capable of operating the counting means by a player's operation is provided,
The counting means includes
A gaming machine, wherein a counting unit (counting amount) of a player's gaming value is changed according to an operation time of the counting operation means.
Here, the counting switch 311 corresponds to a counting operation means capable of operating the counting means by a player's operation.

(2) In the first modification, the number of balls to be held is changed according to the number of balls to be held. That is, when the number of balls is large, the number is counted in a large unit, and when the number of balls is small. Since counting is performed in small units, it is possible to count the number of balls in an appropriate time regardless of whether the number of balls is large or small, and the usability of the counting switch 311 is good, not slow, and troublesome. There is no risk of discomfort, and the number of balls can be counted. Therefore, it is possible to realize an enclosed ball type gaming machine that allows the player to count the number of balls possessed without a sense of incongruity.
The inventive concept of the above configuration is expressed as follows.
A counting operation means capable of operating the counting means by a player's operation is provided,
The counting means includes
A gaming machine characterized by changing a counting unit (counting amount) of a player's gaming value in accordance with the player's gaming value.

(3) In the first modification, the counting amount of the number of held balls is changed according to the operation time (pressing time) of the counting switch 311 and the number of held balls. As shown, for example, when the number of balls is 1000 or less, 50 is counted in 1.0 second, and then 50 is counted every 0.5 seconds, depending on the operation time of the counting switch 311, and then 6.0 seconds. However, if the number of balls is 1001 to 10,000, 100 is counted every 0.5 seconds, and if the number of balls is 10001 or more, 1000 is counted every 0.5 seconds. The counting time of the number of held balls becomes an appropriate time, the feeling of use of the counting switch 311 is good, it is not slow, and there is no possibility of causing a sense of incongruity such as troublesomeness, and the number of held balls can be counted. Therefore, it is possible to realize an enclosed ball type gaming machine that allows the player to count the number of balls possessed without a sense of incongruity.
The inventive concept of the above configuration is expressed as follows.
A counting operation means capable of operating the counting means by a player's operation is provided,
The counting means includes
A gaming machine, wherein a counting unit (counting amount) of a player's game value is changed in accordance with an operation time of the counting operation means and a game value of the player.

(4) In the first modification, the timing of performing unit counting by dividing the pressing time of the counting switch 311 every 0.5 seconds is set as a timing value. Since it is invalid, it is possible to prevent malfunction of the counting switch 311 such as when the counting switch 311 is touched by mistake.
The inventive concept of the above configuration is expressed as follows.
Providing a counting operation control means for controlling the operation of the counting means;
The counting operation control means is
The gaming machine is controlled so as to invalidate the operation of the counting operation means for a predetermined period from the start of operation of the counting operation means.

(5) While the number of balls held is counted by the counting switch 311, the game balls are stopped from being fired. Can be done.
The inventive concept of the above configuration is expressed as follows.
Providing a counting operation control means for controlling the operation of the counting means;
The counting operation control means includes
A gaming machine that controls to stop the firing of a game ball while the counting operation means is operated and the game value of the player is counted by the counting means.

(6) In addition, no matter how many balls are held, counting of the number of balls is completed when the pressing time of the counting switch 311 reaches 6.0 seconds. However, the counting time of the number of held balls does not become long, and the player can count the number of held balls without feeling uncomfortable.

Next, other various modifications will be described with respect to the method for counting the number of balls.
<Modification 2 of the counting method>
In the counting method of the number of balls shown in FIG. 87, the timing value for performing unit counting by dividing the pressing time of the counting switch 311 every 0.5 seconds is used, but the present invention is not limited to this.
Therefore, as a second modification, for example, a configuration may be adopted in which half of the number of balls is counted 3.0 seconds after the start of the operation of the counting switch 311 and all the numbers of balls are counted after 6.0 seconds.
In this way, the overall balance when counting the number of balls possessed is improved compared to the case of Modification 1, and the player can easily understand the counting.

FIG. 88 (a) is a diagram showing a second modification of the counting method, and particularly shows a counting method of the number of balls.
In FIG. 88A, in the second modification, the number of balls held is counted as follows according to the “pressing time” of the count switch 311 and the number of balls held.
・ Pressing time of the counting switch 311 = less than 1 second: Invalid regardless of the range of the number of balls held.
(B) Count less than 1,000 balls, count half of the number of balls (b) Count between 1001 and 10,000, count half of the number of balls (c) Number of balls Above, count half of the number of balls held, then every 0.5 seconds:
(B) Counting 3/4 of the number of balls when the number of balls is 1000 or less (b) Counting 3/4 of the number of balls when the number of balls is 1001 to 10,000 (c) If the number is 10001 or more, 3/4 of the number of balls is counted. 6.0 seconds:
(B) Count all balls with 1,000 or less balls (b) Count all balls with 1001 to 10,000 balls (c) Count all balls with 10001 balls or more

As described above, in the second modification, when the operation of the counting switch 311 is started, the counting method is such that the number of held balls is first counted more and the last is easier to leave the number of held balls. However, in order to leave the number of balls held, it is necessary to stop counting the number of balls held 6.0 seconds before.
Modification 2 has the following effects.
(1) In the modified example 2, the number of balls held is counted first, and the last is counted so that the number of balls can be easily left. Therefore, if the counting of balls held is stopped 6.0 seconds before. The game can be played with a small number of balls, which is convenient for the player.
(2) Regardless of whether the number of balls is large or small, the counting method of the number of balls is the same, so the player can easily understand the counting progress.

The inventive concept of the above configuration is expressed as follows.
Providing a counting operation control means for controlling the operation of the counting means;
The counting operation control means includes
A gaming machine, wherein a predetermined period of operation start of the counting operation means is controlled to count a player's gaming value in a large amount.

<Modification 3 of the counting method>
FIG. 88 (b) is a diagram showing a third modification of the counting method, and particularly shows a counting method for the number of balls.
In FIG. 88 (b), in the third modification, the number of balls held is counted as follows according to the “pressing time” of the count switch 311 and the number of balls held.
・ Pressing time of the counting switch 311 = less than 1 second: invalid regardless of the range of the number of balls possessed.
(B) Counting in units of 100 when the number of balls held is 1,000 or less (b) Counting in units of 1/10 of the number of balls held from 1001 to 10,000 (c) Number of balls held is 10001 The number of balls is counted in units of 1/10 of the number of balls. 6.0 seconds:
(B) Count all balls with 1,000 or less balls (b) Count all balls with 1001 to 10,000 balls (c) Count all balls with 10001 balls or more

As described above, in the third modification, when the operation of the counting switch 311 is started, 1.0 seconds is included, and thereafter, a fixed number of balls corresponding to the number of balls held is counted every 1.0 second as a counting unit. The counting method is such that everything is counted after 6.0 seconds.
Modification 3 has the following effects.
(1) In the modified example 3, since a certain number of balls according to the number of balls is counted as a unit of counting, the flow of counting the number of balls is started little by little. Proceeding at the same rate, the player has the advantage of easy counting.
(2) Since the number of balls is counted little by little, when it is desired to keep the number of balls, a count switch 311 for leaving the number of balls regardless of the number of balls Can be operated easily.

The inventive concept of the above configuration is expressed as follows.
Providing a counting operation control means for controlling the operation of the counting means;
The counting operation control means includes
A gaming machine, wherein a predetermined period of the operation start of the counting operation means is controlled to count a player's gaming value with a small amount.
"Example 2"

Next, a second embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS.
Example 2 is an example in which the polishing period of the encapsulated sphere can be set according to the circumstances of the amusement hall. In the second embodiment, the content of the firing permission signal editing process of the payout control device 230D (in the second embodiment, the payout control device is not shown but will be described with the number of the payout control device 230D for convenience of explanation). In addition to the difference from the first embodiment, the operation of the polishing device 56 and the content of the display effect of the display device 41 are different from the first embodiment.
First, the contents of the firing permission signal editing process will be described.
FIG. 89 is a flowchart showing the launch permission signal editing process of the payout control device 230D in the second embodiment.
When this routine is started, each process from step H271 to step H285 is the same as that in the first embodiment, and the same step numbers are given. The processing different from the first embodiment is the processing from Step H701 to Step H710.

That is, when the firing permission signal ON data is set in step H284, the firing control circuit 236 is permitted to actuate the firing solenoid 173, and the ball can be fired (launching permitted state). If it will be in this state, it will progress to step H701 next and it will be determined whether the polishing impossible command has been transmitted.
The non-polishing command is a command for informing the game control device 54 from the payout control device 230D that the enclosing ball type polishing is impossible during the game, and corresponds to non-polishing information. The non-polishing command (non-polishing information) is sent from the payout control device 230D to the effect control device 53 via the game control device 54. When the non-polishing command is received by the effect control device 53, the polishing control device 59 In addition to sending a non-polishing command, display is not performed on the display device 41, and other information (for example, a setting screen for polishing as shown in FIG. 90) is displayed. In addition, when the polishing control device 59 receives a non-polishing command, it recognizes that the enclosed sphere type polishing is impossible, and when receiving this non-polishing command, the encapsulating sphere is not polished.
If the polishing impossibility command has not been transmitted in step H701, a polishing impossibility command is prepared in step H702, and main control command setting processing is performed in the subsequent step H703. As a result, the non-polishing command is transmitted from the payout control device 230D to the game control device 54 by serial communication.
Next, in step H704, the polishing impossible command transmission flag is set, and in step H705, the polishing impossible command transmission flag is cleared. This is because a non-polishing command is prepared in step H702, and the non-polishing command is transmitted to the game control device 54 in the main control command setting process in step H703, so the non-polishing command is cleared in order not to repeat the same routine. Is. The process returns after step H705.
On the other hand, if the polishing impossibility command has already been transmitted in step H701, the routine is terminated and the process returns.

Next, when the firing permission signal off data is set in step H285, the firing control circuit 236 prohibits the operation of the firing solenoid 173, and the ball cannot be fired (launch non-permitted state). Even if a proper firing operation (touch sensor 174 is turned on and firing volume 171 is operated), firing solenoid 173 does not operate and the ball is not fired. If it will be in this state, it will progress to step H706 next and it will be determined whether the polishable command has been transmitted.
The grindable command is a command for notifying the game control device 54 from the payout control device 230D that the encapsulated ball type can be grinded when the game control device 54 is not in a game-ready state. Equivalent to. The polishable command (polishing possible information) is sent from the payout control device 230D to the effect control device 53 via the game control device 54. When the effect control device 53 receives the polishable command, the polish control device 59 receives it. In addition to sending a polishable command, the display device 41 is controlled to display that it is being polished when a polishing signal from the polishing control device 59 is received. In addition, when the polishing control device 59 receives a polishable command, the polishing control device 59 recognizes that the enclosed sphere type polishing is possible, receives the polishable command, and only when the set polishing period is satisfied, Polishing will be performed. At this time, the polishing control device 59 transmits a polishing signal to the effect control device 53.
If the polishable command has not been transmitted, a polishable command is prepared in step H707, and main control command setting processing is performed in subsequent step H708. Thereby, a polishable command is transmitted from the payout control device 230D to the game control device 54 by serial communication.
Next, in step H709, the polishable command transmission completion flag is set, and in step H710, the polishable command transmission completion flag is cleared. This is because a non-polishing command is prepared in step H707, and the polishable command is transmitted to the game control device 54 in the main control command setting process in step H708, so the polishable command is cleared in order not to repeat the same routine. Is. The process returns after step H710.
On the other hand, if the polishable command has been transmitted in step H706, the routine is terminated and the process returns.

According to the launch permission signal editing process described above, during the game (the ball can be fired), a non-polishing command (non-polishing information) is transmitted from the payout control device 230D to the game control device 54, and the game control device 54 performs payout control. An unpolished command (unpolished information) from the device 230D is transmitted to the effect control device 53, an unpolished command (unpolished information) is transmitted to the polishing control device 59 in the effect control device 53, and unpolished in the polishing control device 59 When the command is received, the polishing apparatus 56 is not operated, and the enclosed sphere type polishing is not performed.
On the other hand, when the game is not in progress (cannot be fired), a polishable command (polishing permission information) is transmitted from the payout control device 230D to the game control device 54. Information) is transmitted to the production control device 53, the production control device 53 transmits a polishable command (polishing permission information) to the polishing control device 59, and the polishing control device 59 receives the grindable command (polishing permission information). Only when the polishing period is set, the polishing apparatus 56 is controlled to polish the encapsulated sphere for a predetermined period (for example, 10 minutes).
That is, if the polishing control device 59 is in a set polishing period (for example, a specified period between the closing of the store and the opening of the next day), and a polishing enable command (polishing permission information) is received. The polishing apparatus 56 is controlled so as to perform polishing only for a predetermined period (for example, 10 minutes).
In addition, the production control device 53 controls the display device 41 to display that the polishing is in progress when the polishing signal from the polishing control device 59 is received.

Next, FIG. 90 is a diagram showing an example of setting the polishing period in the display device 41. FIG. The setting screen for the polishing period on the display device 41 is controlled by the effect control device 53, and the result of the setting operation for the polishing period by the operator (for example, a store clerk) is transmitted from the effect control device 53 to the polishing control device 59. In 59, if a polishable command (polishing permission information) is received from the effect control device 53 based on the set polishing period, the polishing apparatus performs polishing for a predetermined period (for example, 10 minutes). 56 is controlled.
FIG. 90A is a setting screen for the polishing period in the display device 41, and is a screen for setting a password in particular. In the example of FIG. 90 (a), a message “Amusement hall setting screen” and “Please set password” are displayed on the screen of the display device 41, and numbers from 0 to 9 are displayed. ing.

Here, the setting of the polishing period is set by, for example, a game hall (for example, a store clerk) using the display device 41 and the effect operation switch 9 when the gaming machine is turned on. In addition, it may be set using the number-of-balls display 40 instead of the display device 41.
Next, the operator (store clerk) presses four switches arranged on the top, bottom, left and right of the production operation switch 9 to select, for example, the message “Please set password” on the screen of the display device 41. When the push button type switch at the center of the production operation switch 9 is pressed, a password input screen shown in FIG. 90 (b) appears. For example, when the input of a four-digit password is completed, the production control device 53 receives a password setting. A password is provided to prevent a player or the like from setting the polishing period without permission.
Next, when the screen shown in FIG. 90C is displayed, a screen for setting the polishing period is displayed. Here, the polishing period is set according to the circumstances of the amusement hall. For example, in the example of FIG. 90C, “10:30 pm to 11:30 pm (that is, a specific one hour) is set as the polishing period.
Since the polishing control device 59 is equipped with the RTC 60, the real time information is obtained from the RTC 60 and the calendar function is performed every day, while “10:30 to 11:30” is set as the polishing period. It is possible to control the polishing of the encapsulated sphere.
The polishing period is a period in which the game hall determines that the encapsulated sphere can be polished during this period, and corresponds to a “set polishing period”. If the polishing apparatus 56 is not in play during the set polishing period, the polishing apparatus 56 can operate. However, the polishing is actually performed only for a predetermined period (for example, 10 minutes). The predetermined period (for example, 10 minutes) is set to a period in which a ball enclosed in one gaming machine is sufficiently polished so that it is not necessary to polish the ball during the business day of the next day. The predetermined period (for example, 10 minutes) is set in advance by a program of the polishing control device 59.

Next, FIG. 91 shows a timing chart of the operation of polishing control of the encapsulated sphere in the second embodiment.
Normally, at game shops around 10:30 pm (or even before), the business is stopped due to the operation of the game machines, the power of each game machine is shut off and the store is closed, and then the inside of the store and the table are cleaned, cleaned, etc. To prepare for the next business day.
Now, when opening a game shop, assuming that the business due to the operation of the pachinko machine 1 is stopped at timing t1 (for example, 10:30 pm), the polishing period (that is, the “set polishing period”) starts from this point. enter.
Next, the payout control device 230D controls the firing control circuit 236 so that the ball cannot be fired. This timing is assumed to be t2. As a result, the operation of the firing solenoid 173 by the launch control circuit 236 is prohibited, and a state where the ball cannot be launched (launch not permitted state) is entered.

Also, at this timing t2, a payable control device (polishing permission information) is transmitted from the payout control device 230D to the game control device 54. When the game control device 54 receives the polishable command (polishing permission information), the command is effect-controlled. Transmit to device 53. When the production control device 53 receives a polishable command (polishing permission information), it transmits this command to the polishing control device 59, and when the polishing control device 59 receives a polishable command (polishing permission information), the set polishing period. Only in this case, the polishing apparatus 56 is controlled so as to polish the encapsulated sphere only for a predetermined period. Therefore, when the weight of the predetermined time T0 has elapsed from the timing t2, and the timing t3 is reached, the switching solenoid 79S of the switching valve 79 changes the circulation path of the enclosed sphere from the “normal side” to the “polishing side” as shown in FIG. By switching, the encapsulated sphere starts to flow into the polishing device 56, and the polishing motor 70 is activated to start polishing of the encapsulated sphere. In addition, a polishing signal is transmitted from the polishing control device 59 to the effect control device 53 when the encapsulated sphere is polished.
On the other hand, when the effect control device 53 receives the in-polishing signal from the polishing control device 59, the effect control device 53 controls the display device 41 to display that the polishing is in progress. Therefore, display during polishing on the display device 41 is started from the timing t3.

The polishing control device 59 performs processing necessary for polishing the encapsulated sphere, such as driving the polishing motor 70 and operating the switching solenoid 79S, for a predetermined time period T1 + T2, thereby polishing the game ball.
That is, the encapsulated sphere is polished until a predetermined time T1 elapses from the timing t3. Meanwhile, the sphere discharged from the upper outlet 75 of the polishing apparatus 56 to the sensor flow path 77 is detected by the polishing outlet switch 76. Since the polishing outlet switch 76 is turned from OFF to ON every time one sphere discharged from the upper outlet 75 to the sensor channel 77 is detected, it is input to the polishing controller 59 in the form of a pulse signal as shown in FIG. Is done.
Next, when the predetermined time T1 elapses from the timing t3 and reaches the timing t4, it is determined that the encapsulated sphere has been sufficiently polished, and the switching solenoid 79S of the switching valve 79 sets the circulation path of the encapsulated sphere from the “polishing side”. Switch to “Normal”. As a result, the switching solenoid 79S of the switching valve 79 is turned off, and the enclosing ball does not flow into the polishing device 56. During this time, the polishing motor 70 is operating.
In other words, the polishing motor 70 is operating even after the timing t4 has elapsed, so that the switching solenoid 79S of the switching valve 79 is switched to the “normal side” from the “polishing side” and thus remains inside the polishing apparatus 56. A period is secured until all balls being polished are discharged.
When all of the balls being polished inside the polishing apparatus 56 are discharged, the detection signal of the polishing outlet switch 76 is turned off, and thereafter the detection signal remains off.
Next, when the predetermined time T2 elapses from the timing t4 and reaches the timing t5, the polishing motor 70 stops operating (OFF). At a timing t4, a predetermined period T2 has elapsed since the switching solenoid 79S of the switching valve 79 was switched from the “polishing side” to the “normal side”, and a predetermined period after the detection signal of the polishing outlet switch 76 was finally turned off. It is the time when T3 has elapsed. As described above, when the predetermined period T3 has elapsed since the detection signal of the polishing outlet switch 76 was last turned off (timing t5), the operation of the polishing motor 70 is stopped, whereby the ball inside the polishing apparatus 56 is stopped. After confirming that all the balls being polished have been discharged, the polishing motor 70 is stopped, so that the enclosing balls are not left in the polishing device 56.

On the other hand, the production control device 53 stops sending the polishing signal from the polishing control device 59 at the timing t5 when the polishing motor 70 stops, so the production control device 53 displays the display device 41 during the polishing. finish. Therefore, the display during polishing on the display device 41 ends at the timing t5.
Thereafter, at timing t6, the “set polishing period” ends. Next, the timing t7 represents the timing at which the payout control device 230D changes from the state where polishing is possible to the state where polishing is not possible. At this time, the payout control device 230D permits the firing solenoid 173 to be actuated by the launch control circuit 236 so that the ball can be launched (launch permitted state). At time t7, the payout control device 230D transmits a non-polishing command (non-polishing information) to the game control device 54. When the game control device 54 receives a non-polishing command (non-polishing information), it transmits a non-polishing command (non-polishing information) to the effect control device 53. When the production control device 53 receives a non-polishing command (non-polishing information), it sends a non-polishing command (non-polishing information) to the polishing control device 59.

  As described above, the encapsulated sphere is polished only for a predetermined period (for example, 10 minutes) only during the set polishing period when the game is not in progress (cannot be fired). In other words, if the polishing period is a set period (for example, a specified period between the closing of the store and the opening of the next day), and the polishing control device 59 receives a polishable command (polishing permission information). The encapsulated sphere is polished for a predetermined period (for example, 10 minutes).

The second embodiment has the following effects.
(1) Since the setting of the polishing period is performed by the production control device 53 and the polishing control device 59 by the operation of the store clerk in the game hall, the game control device 54 (main control board) and the payout control device 230D (payout control board) The burden is reduced and the efficiency is improved.
The inventive concept of the above configuration is expressed as follows.
A polishing apparatus for polishing a sphere;
In a gaming machine comprising a polishing control device for controlling a polishing device,
A configuration in which a signal cannot be input to at least the game control device and the payout control device from equipment necessary for polishing the game ball including the polishing device and the polishing control device,
A gaming machine characterized in that the polishing control device controls the polishing device to perform polishing of the sphere within a set polishing period.
Further, the inventive concept of setting the polishing period on the screen of the display device 41 is expressed as follows.
A polishing period setting means for setting a polishing period in which the sphere can be polished is provided,
The polishing control device
A gaming machine characterized in that a polishing apparatus is controlled to polish a sphere within a polishing period set by a polishing period setting means.
Here, the effect control device 53 and the polishing control device 59 of the second embodiment constitute a polishing period setting means.

(2) Even if the RTC 60 for setting the polishing period is mounted on the polishing control device 59 or information regarding polishing of the encapsulated sphere is input, the game control device 54 (main control board) and the payout control device 230D (payout) Since there is no input to the control board), fraud is not easily made and security is high.
That is, the polishing control device 59 (including the polishing device 56) inputs information (for example, signal input, data input, etc.) to the game control device 54 (main control board) and the payout control device 230D (payout control board). (Input of information such as command input) is not performed at all, and since it is “sub-configured”, it is difficult to be fraudulent and security is high.

(3) Also, since the enclosing ball polishing period can be set in accordance with the circumstances of the amusement hall, the polishing period can be set flexibly in accordance with different business hours for each amusement hall, which is convenient.
This background will be described.
When an encapsulated ball polishing device is installed in an encapsulated ball game machine, it may be desired that the amusement hall requests polishing of the encapsulated ball before or after the start of business so as not to affect the game. .
In this case, since the business hours of the game hall are different for each region and game hall, it is convenient if the polishing period can be set according to the actual situation of the game hall.
However, in the configuration in which the polishing apparatus is controlled by the main control board or the payout control board, information for setting the mounting of the RTC that counts the real time and the business hours of the game hall (for example, time information from the outside, etc.) There is a security problem. That is, there is a risk of unauthorized use.
Therefore, in the present invention, a countermeasure has been devised, and the problem can be solved by "substituting" the polishing apparatus.

In particular, by substituting the polishing control device 59 (including the polishing device 56), the RTC 60 is mounted and information is input to the polishing control device 59 (including the polishing device 56) (for example, signal input and data). (Input of information such as input of command, input of command, etc.), there is no security problem, the period during which the polishing apparatus 56 is operated can be freely set, and the actual situation of the amusement hall can be met. Therefore, for example, when it is desired to polish the encapsulated sphere after the end of business, it is possible to cope with a difference in business hours for each game hall.
Other effects of “substituting” are the same as in the first embodiment.
(4) Since the polishing control device 59 is equipped with the RTC 60, the RTC 60 can obtain real-time information and set the polishing period while demonstrating the calendar function every day. You can specify the date and time.

Next, modifications of the first and second embodiments will be described.
<Modification of Example 1 and Example 2>
As a modification, for example, a configuration in which the encapsulated sphere is constantly circulated through the polishing device (a configuration different from that in FIG. 4), and the polishing control device 59 receives instructions from the game control device 54 and the payout control device 230 (or 230D). Instead of this, the polishing apparatus 56 may be controlled (that is, the encapsulated sphere is polished).
In this way, the game control device 54 and the payout control device 230 (or 230D) do nothing (no control) with respect to the polishing of the encapsulated sphere, which further reduces the burden.
"Example 3"

Next, Embodiment 3 of the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS.
The third embodiment is an example in which the number of possessed balls and the number of counted balls are simply displayed by control on the gaming machine side.
FIG. 92 is a front view of a pachinko machine 801 (enclosed ball game machine) according to the third embodiment. In FIG. 92, a pachinko machine 801 is provided with a ball count indicator 802 and a counting ball indicator 803 below the operation display device 7. The ball count indicator 802 and the counting ball indicator 803 are smaller than the ball count indicator 40 of the first embodiment, and each includes six LEDs.
Each LED of the holding ball number display 802 and the counting ball display 803 is, for example, a small rectangle, and six LEDs are arranged in a row in the horizontal direction. Each LED can be turned off, turned on, and blinked. The lighting control of the number-of-balls indicator 802 and the counting ball indicator 803 is managed by the payout controller 230. Therefore, the control of the number-of-balls display 802 and the counting ball display 803 is performed on the gaming machine (payout control device 230) side.
The number-of-balls indicator 802 has a configuration that can roughly display the number of balls held by a player up to a maximum of six digits by lighting up six LEDs. For example, when the number of balls is in the range of 100 to 999, the three LEDs from the right side to the third LED are turned on, indicating that the number of balls is about three digits. Displayed as approximate number of balls. Similarly, when the number of balls held is in the range of 1000 to 9999 balls, the four LEDs from the right side to the fourth LED are turned on, indicating that the number of balls held is about four digits. Displayed as approximate number of balls.

On the other hand, the counting ball display 803 has a configuration capable of roughly displaying the number of counting balls counted from the number of balls held up to a maximum of six digits by turning on six LEDs. For example, when the number of counting balls = 10 to the number of counting balls = 99, the two LEDs from the right side to the second are turned on, so that the number of counting balls is approximately two digits. Displayed as approximate number of balls. Similarly, when the number of counting balls = 10000 to the number of counting balls = 999,999, the five LEDs from the right to the fifth are turned on, indicating that the number of counting balls is approximately five digits. It is displayed as an approximate count ball number.
The number-of-balls display 802 constitutes a first display that simply displays the number of balls, and the counting ball display 803 constitutes a second display that simply displays the number of counting balls.
On the other hand, the operation display device 7 (configured by a liquid crystal display) is managed by the card unit 15 in the same manner as in the first embodiment, and the operation display device 7 digitally displays the number of held balls and the number of counted balls in detail ( For example, it is displayed with numbers) and is displayed in analog form with a figure imitating a ball box.
The operation display device 7 constitutes a third display that is managed by the card unit 15 that displays the details of the number of balls held and the number of counted balls.

Here, the number-of-balls display 802 as the first display can display at least the presence / absence of the number of balls, and the counting-ball display 803 as the second display displays at least the presence / absence of the number of counting balls. It shall be possible. In particular, in the third embodiment, the number-of-balls display 802 as the first display can display the approximate number of balls, and the counting-ball display 803 as the second display has the counting-ball number. Approximate quantity can be displayed.
Further, among other configurations of the pachinko machine 801, although the counting ball display 313 is not arranged in the third embodiment, the other configurations are the same as those in FIG. 1 of the first embodiment. The same number is attached | subjected to the same member. This is because the counting ball display 803 is disposed instead of the counting ball display 313 in the third embodiment.
The pachinko machine 801 is provided with a card unit 15, and the configuration of each part of the card unit 15 is the same as that of the first embodiment, and is given the same number.

Next, FIG. 93 is a diagram showing an operation example of the number-of-balls display 802, the number-of-balls display 803, and the operation display device 7 regarding the display of the number of balls and the number of balls counted.
In the description of FIG. 93, the concept of a scene is used in the progress of the game, and the scenes R1 to R4 shown in FIG. 93 are held in the number-of-balls display 802, the counting ball display 803 and the operation display device 7 during the game. This is a concept representing a scene of the entire rendering operation including a ball number display, a counting ball display, a rendering screen, a button screen, and the like.
First, a scene R1 in FIG. 93 shows operations of the number-of-balls display 802, the counting ball display 803, and the operation display device 7 in a normal state. That is, in the scene R1, the operation display device 7 includes a ball lending rate display 301, a remaining amount display 302, a ball lending button 303, a return button 304, a storage / replay button 305, a message / operation area unit 306, and a switching button. A state in which 307 is arranged is shown, and a ball count display 802 and a counting ball display 803 are arranged below the operation display device 7.
93 shows a state in which a counting switch 311, a break switch 312, and a counting ball use switch 314 are arranged on the sides of the holding ball number display 802 and the counting ball display 803.
In addition, in the description after the scene R2, the above signing is complicated and therefore omitted.

In the scene R1, as an example of the normal time, the remaining amount display unit 302 displays the remaining amount as “5000 yen”, so that the player knows that the balance of the gaming card is “5000 yen”. . In addition, the ball number indicator 802 disposed below the operation display device 7 has the fourth LED from the right side lit. Thereby, the player knows that the current number of balls is about four digits.
On the other hand, a message “Number of balls: 6500 can be fired” is displayed in the message / operation area 306, and a message “Please press the count button to count” is displayed. Thereby, the player knows in detail that his / her current number of balls is 6500 and knows that he / she can play a pachinko game by firing the number of balls he / she has.
That is, the approximate number of balls can be found by simple display of the number of balls held by the ball number indicator 802, and the details of the number of balls can be known by the digital (numeral) ball number display by the operation display device 7. Can do.
In the state of the scene R1, there is no counting ball number, and there is no display of the counting ball number in the message / operation area unit 306. Further, no LED of the counting ball display 803 is lit.

Next, when the player presses the counting switch 311 and counts the number of balls, the process proceeds to the scene R2. The scene R2 shows a case where the player has pushed the counting switch 311 and counted 6000 out of 6500 balls. Therefore, 500 balls remain and the number of counted balls is 6000. In this case, the number of balls held is displayed by the ball number indicator 802 by turning on the third LED from the right side. As a result, the player knows that the current number of balls is about three digits. The state of the counting sphere is displayed by the counting sphere display 803 by lighting up to the fourth LED from the right side. Thereby, the player knows that the current counting ball has a quantity of about four digits.
On the other hand, the message / operation area 306 displays “Number of balls: 500 can be launched” and “Counting balls: 6000”. As a result, the digital display of “counting ball: 6000” allows the player to know in detail that the current counting ball is 6000.

Further, the same number of counting balls as the digitally displayed counting spheres (6000) displayed in the message / operation area 306 is displayed in an analog form in the form of the message box 306 of the operation display device 7 in the shape of the ball box T. Is done. In addition, since the code | symbol T attached | subjected to a ball box becomes complicated, it is attached | subjected when it thinks that it is required on account of description.
In the scene R2, four ball boxes T are displayed, and are displayed in an analog form with a graphic deceiving that 6000 counting balls exist in the four ball boxes T. Since there are 6000 counting balls, the figure is such that counting balls are collected in all four ball boxes T.
Thereby, the player can know the approximate number of balls by the simple display of the number of balls held by the number-of-balls display 802 and the number of balls held by the digital (number) display of the number of balls by the operation display device 7. You can know the details. In addition, the counting sphere moved from the number of possessed balls is displayed in an analog form in the form of a ball box in the message / operation area 306, so that intuitive counting of the counting sphere can be performed smoothly. In particular, since the message / operation area 306 is larger than the counting ball display 803, the number of counting balls can be grasped more easily.

In the case where the number of balls held is displayed in an analog form in the form of a ball box T in the message / operation area 306, the following display mode is used in the third embodiment as in the first embodiment.
・ Tama box full display: Number of balls = 1500 ・ Twin box half display: Number of balls = 750 to less than 1500 Therefore, the ball rental rate display 301 always displays a rate of “ball rental: 4 yen per ball”. Further, the remaining amount (for example, “5000 yen”) is always displayed on the remaining amount display 302.

Next, when the player starts the game by firing the number of balls, the process moves to the scene R3.
In the scene R3, the player has released the number of balls and the remaining number of balls has reached 30. At this time, since the remaining number of balls is 30 and the number of counted balls is 6000, the number of balls held in scene R2 is fired from 500 to 470, and the remaining number of balls is 30. State. This state is displayed by the ball number indicator 802 when the second LED from the right side lights up. As a result, the player knows that the current number of balls is about two digits. The state of the counting ball is displayed by the counting ball display 803 when the fourth LED from the right side lights up. The Thereby, the player knows that the current counting ball has a quantity of about four digits.
On the other hand, in the message / operation area 306, the message “Number of holding balls: 30 can be fired” is displayed and “Counting sphere: 6000 pcs. “Go to 100 balls at a time” is displayed. As a result, the digital display of “counting ball: 6000” allows the player to know in detail that the current counting ball is 6000.
Also, since the remaining number of balls is as small as 30, the message / operation area 306 will display “If you want to use counting balls, please press the button to use counting balls → move to 100 balls at a time. By displaying the message “I will do”, the player knows that the remaining number of balls has decreased, and can easily understand that the number of balls can be moved from the number of balls to be held.

Next, as shown in the scene R4, when the player presses the counting ball use switch 314 and selects the movement from the counting ball number to the holding ball number, 100 counting balls move to the holding ball number by one operation. . At this time, the counting ball use switch 314 notifies that the built-in LED is lit and that the counting ball use switch 314 is usable (that is, the movement from the counting ball number to the holding ball number is possible).
When the player operates the counting ball use switch 314 once, as shown in the scene R4, as a result of the movement of 100 counting balls to the number of holding balls, the number of holding balls becomes 130, and the number of counting balls is 5900. Therefore, this state is displayed by the number-of-ball indicator 802 by turning on the third LED from the right side. As a result, the player knows that the current number of balls is about three digits.
The state of the counting sphere is displayed by the counting sphere display 803 by lighting up to the fourth LED from the right side. Thereby, the player knows that the current counting ball has a quantity of about four digits.
On the other hand, the message / operation area 306 displays “Number of balls held: 130 can be fired” and “Counting balls: 5900 pieces Counting balls have moved to the number of balls held” are displayed. Is done. As a result, the digital display of “counting ball: 5900” allows the player to know in detail that the current counting ball is 5900. Further, the player can easily know that 100 counting balls have moved to the number of possessed balls by looking at the message / operation area unit 306.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 801 according to the third embodiment, the number of balls held is simply displayed by the number-of-balls display 802, and the number of counted balls is simply displayed by the counting ball display 803. Further, the operation display device 7 displays the number of balls and counting balls in detail in a digital display (for example, numbers) and displays them in an analog form with a figure imitating a ball box.

The third embodiment has the following effects.
(1) The number-of-balls display 802 and the number-of-balls display 803 are smaller than the number-of-balls display 40 of the first embodiment, and each has six LEDs, The display is simply displayed by turning on the LED to inform the approximate quantity, and the number of balls and counting balls are digitally displayed in detail by the operation display device 7 under the management of the card unit 15, so that the game control device 54 ( The burden on the main control board) and the payout control device 230 (payout control board) is reduced.

This background will be described.
In enclosed ball game machines, the number of balls and counting balls obtained as a result of the game (stored balls that cannot be temporarily fired) should be managed by the gaming machine. If an easy-to-understand display is made on a machine, there is a problem that the burden of controlling the gaming machine is large.
For example, in order to display the number of balls in an easy-to-understand manner, it is conceivable that six rows of 7-segment LEDs are arranged on the display to display the number of balls held up to 6 digits in digital numbers. If the LED is finely controlled to display numbers, the control burden is large. Display control of this using both the number of balls and the counting ball is a burden whether executed by either the game control device (main control board) or the payout control device (payout control board). In particular, since the number of balls to be held changes with the progress of the game, it is particularly a burden of control.
In the third embodiment, therefore, the 7-segment LED is not adopted on the gaming machine side, and the number of balls held and the counting ball are informed simply by turning on / off the plurality of LEDs. The above problem was solved by leaving it to management.
Specifically, on the gaming machine side, by controlling the number-of-balls display 802 and the counting ball display 803 by the payout control device 230, the number of balls held and the number of counting balls can be simply displayed by simply turning on / off a plurality of LEDs. Since the approximate quantity is reported and the number of balls and counting balls are digitally displayed in detail by the operation display device 7 under the management of the card unit 15, the burden on the payout control device 230 (payout control board) can be reduced. In addition, if it is the structure which controls the number-of-balls display 802 and the count ball display 803 by the game control apparatus 54 (main control board), the burden of the game control apparatus 54 (main control board) can be reduced.
That is, when managing the number of balls and counting balls with a gaming machine, the gaming machine (for example, the payout control device 230) simply displays the number of balls and counting balls, so the gaming machine (for example, the payout control device 230). And the details of the number of possessed balls and the counting balls are displayed by the control of the card unit 15, so that it is possible for the player to display easily.

The inventive concept of the above configuration is expressed as follows.
A first display device capable of simply displaying the number of balls held;
A second display device capable of simply displaying a counting ball;
A third display device capable of displaying details of the number of balls and counting balls;
With
The first display device can display at least the presence or absence of the number of balls,
The second display device can display at least the presence or absence of a counting ball,
The third display device displays the number of balls and counting balls under the control of the card unit.
Here, the number-of-balls indicator 802 constitutes a first indicator, the counting ball indicator 803 constitutes a second indicator, and the operation display device 7 constitutes a third indicator.
Example 4

Next, a fourth embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIG.
The fourth embodiment is an example in which the number of balls is defined such that the number of balls held = the number of balls that can be fired + the number of balls to be counted, and the number of balls held is displayed by control on the gaming machine side.
That is, in Example 4, the number of balls is defined as follows.
“Number of balls held = Number of balls that can be fired + Counting balls”
Here, the number of balls that can be fired is the number of balls that can be fired. The ball that has not moved to the ball box.
The number of counted balls is the number of stored balls that have been counted and moved from the number of balls that can be fired. For example, in the case of a gaming machine that uses real balls, Equivalent to the image of the number, it is the ball in the ball box. By operating the counting switch 311, the number of balls that can be fired can be moved to the number of counting balls.
Therefore, the number of balls held in the fourth embodiment refers to the total number of balls held by the player. In the example of the first embodiment, the number of held balls + the number of counted balls = the total number of held balls. is there.

In the fourth embodiment, the display of the number of balls held is controlled by the payout control device 230, and the number of balls held is displayed by the number-of-balls display 40A. The number-of-balls display 40A displays the number of balls acquired by the player (that is, “number of balls held = number of balls that can be fired + counting balls”), and six 7-segment LEDs are arranged. 6 digits (number of balls) can be displayed, and the display is controlled by the payout controller 230.
In the fourth embodiment, a counting ball display 313 composed of LEDs is arranged, and the counting ball display 313 is configured to light up if there is a counting ball. The lighting of the counting ball display 313 is controlled by the payout control device 230. Here, the number-of-balls display 40A as the first display can display the number of balls including the counting ball, and the second display The counting ball display 313 as a device is configured to be able to display the counting ball simply.
On the other hand, the operation display device 7 (configured by a liquid crystal display) is managed by the card unit 15 as in the first embodiment. In addition to being displayed as a display (for example, numbers), it is displayed in analog form with a figure imitating a ball box.

Next, FIG. 94 is a diagram showing an operation example of the holding ball number display 40A, the counting ball display 313, and the operation display device 7 regarding the display of the holding ball number and the counting ball number.
In the description of FIG. 94, the concept of a scene is used in the progress of the game. The scenes S1 to S4 shown in FIG. This is a concept representing a scene of the entire rendering operation including a ball number display, a counting ball display, a rendering screen, a button screen, and the like.
First, a scene S1 in FIG. 94 shows the operations of the number-of-balls display 40A, the counting ball display 313, and the operation display device 7 in a normal state. That is, in the scene S1, the operation display device 7 includes a ball lending rate display 301, a remaining amount display 302, a ball lending button 303, a return button 304, a storage / replay button 305, a message / operation area unit 306, and a switching button. A state in which 307 is arranged is shown, and a holding ball number display 40A and a counting ball display 313 are arranged below the operation display device 7.
94 shows a state in which a counting switch 311, a break switch 312, and a counting ball use switch 314 are arranged in the vicinity of the holding ball number display 40 </ b> A and the counting ball display 313.
In addition, in the description after the scene S2, the above signing is complicated and thus omitted.

In the scene S1, as an example of the normal time, the remaining amount display unit 302 displays the remaining amount as “5000 yen”, so that the player knows that the balance of the gaming card is “5000 yen”. . The number 6500 is digitally displayed on the number-of-balls display 40A arranged below the operation display device 7. Thereby, the player knows that the current number of balls is 6500.
On the other hand, in the message / operation area 306, a message “The breakdown of the number of balls held is as follows” and a message “Number of possible launches: 6500 Counting balls: 0” are displayed. The message “Please press the count button to count” is displayed. As a result, the player can see that the number of balls that can be fired is 6500 and the number of counting balls is 0 as a breakdown of the current number of balls, and as a result, the total number of balls can be counted as 6500 that can be fired. It can be seen that it is 6500 with the addition of 0 balls. In addition, it is clear from the fact that 6500 numbers are digitally displayed on the number-of-balls display 40A. Therefore, the player has “number of balls held = number of balls that can be fired + counting balls”. It can be easily understood that the total number of balls is 6500.
That is, the total number of balls can be found by the number of balls held display 40A, and the breakdown of the number of balls can be found by digital (numeric) display by the operation display device 7.
In addition, since the number of counting balls is zero in the state of the scene S1, the counting ball display 313 is not lit.

Next, when the player presses the counting switch 311 to count the number of balls, the process proceeds to the scene S2. The scene S2 shows a case where the player has pressed the counting switch 311 and counted 6000 out of 6500 balls. Therefore, the number of possible launches remains 500, and the number of counting balls is 6000. In this case, since a number of 6500 is digitally displayed on the number-of-balls display 40A, the player knows that the total number of balls is 6500.
On the other hand, in the message / operation area 306, a message “The breakdown of the number of balls held is as follows” and a message “Number of fireable balls: 500 Counting balls: 6000” are displayed. As a result, the player can understand that the number of balls that can be fired is 500 and the number of counting balls is 6000 as a breakdown of the current number of balls. It can be seen that it is 6500, which is the sum of 6000 balls. In addition, it is clear from the fact that 6500 numbers are digitally displayed on the number-of-balls display 40A. Therefore, the player has “number of balls held = number of balls that can be fired + counting balls”. It can be easily understood that the total number of balls is 6500.
That is, the total number of balls can be found by the number of balls held display 40A, and the breakdown of the number of balls can be found by digital (numeric) display by the operation display device 7.
Further, since there are 6000 counting balls in the state of the scene S1, the counting ball display 313 is turned on to notify that there is a counting ball.

Further, the same number of counting balls as the digitally displayed counting spheres (6000) displayed in the message / operation area 306 is displayed in an analog form in the form of a message box T in the message / operation area 306 of the operation display device 7. Is done. In addition, since the code | symbol T attached | subjected to a ball box becomes complicated, it is attached | subjected when it thinks that it is required on account of description.
In the scene S2, four ball boxes T are displayed, and are displayed in an analog form with a figure deceiving that 6000 counting balls exist in the four ball boxes T. Since there are 6000 counting balls, the figure is such that counting balls are collected in all four ball boxes T.

Next, when the player starts the game by firing the number of balls, the process proceeds to scene S3.
In the scene S3, the player has released the number of balls and the remaining number of balls is 30. At this time, since the number of possible launches is 30 and the number of balls is 6030, the number of possible launches of scene S2 is fired from 500 to 470, and the remaining number of possible launches is 30 State.
At this time, in the message / operation area 306, a message “The breakdown of the number of balls held is as follows” and a message “Number of possible launches: 30 Count balls: 6000” are displayed. Since 6030 and a digital number are displayed on the number-of-balls display 40A, the player has a total number of balls of 6030, and the breakdown of the number of balls can be viewed in the message / operation area 306. It ’s easy to understand.
Also, the message / operation area 306 displays “If you want to use a counting ball, please press the counting ball use button → It will move to 100 balls at a time”. Thereby, the player knows that the remaining number of balls has decreased, and can easily understand that the player can move from the counted number of balls to the number of held balls.

Next, as shown in the scene S4, when the player presses the counting ball use switch 314 and selects the movement from the number of counting balls to the number that can be fired, 100 counting balls move to the number that can be fired in one operation. . When the player operates the counting ball use switch 314 once, as shown in the scene S4, as a result of the movement of 100 counting balls to the number that can be fired, the number that can be fired is 130, and the number of counting balls is 5900. Therefore, this state is displayed as 6030 and a digital number on the number-of-balls display 40A as the total number of balls.
The message / operation area 306 displays a message “The breakdown of the number of balls held is as follows”, “Number of balls held: 130 Counting balls: 5900”, and “ “Counting ball 100 has moved to the number of balls possessed” is displayed. As a result, the digital display of “counting ball: 5900” allows the player to know in detail that the current counting ball is 5900. Further, the player can easily know that 100 counting balls have moved to the number of possessed balls by looking at the message / operation area unit 306.

Thus, in Example 4, after defining “number of balls held = number of balls available for firing + counting spheres”,
The number of balls held is displayed by the number-of-balls display 40A. Further, the number of balls that can be fired and the counting ball are displayed in detail digitally (for example, numbers) as a breakdown of the number of balls possessed by the operation display device 7, and are also displayed in analog form with a figure imitating a ball box.

The fourth embodiment has the following effects.
(1) After defining “number of balls held = number of balls held = number of balls available for firing + counting balls”, the number of balls held is displayed by the number-of-balls display 40A under the control of the payout controller 230, Since the details of the number of balls that can be fired and the counting ball are displayed as a breakdown of the number of balls possessed by the management of the card unit 15, the burden of the game control device 54 (main control board) and the payout control device 230 (payout control board) is reduced. It is reduced.
Specifically, the gaming machine side displays the total number of balls by controlling the number-of-balls display 40 </ b> A with the payout control device 230, and the operation display unit 7 manages the breakdown of the number of balls with the management of the card unit 15. By displaying in detail, the burden on the payout control device 230 (payout control board) can be reduced. In addition, if it is the structure which controls the number-of-balls display 40A by the game control apparatus 54 (main control board), the burden of the game control apparatus 54 (main control board) can be reduced.
(2) Since the number-of-balls indicator 40A displays the number of balls including the counting balls, there is an effect that it is easy to grasp the total number of balls possessed by the player.

The inventive concept of the above configuration is expressed as follows.
A first display device capable of displaying the number of balls possessed including a counting ball;
A second display device capable of simply displaying a counting ball;
A third display device capable of displaying details of the number of balls and counting balls;
With
The first display device can digitally display the number of balls including counting balls,
The second display device can display at least the presence or absence of a counting ball,
The third display device displays the number of balls and counting balls under the control of the card unit.
Here, the number-of-balls display 40A constitutes a first indicator, the counting ball indicator 313 constitutes a second indicator, and the operation display device 7 constitutes a third indicator.
"Example 5"

Next, Embodiment 5 of the present invention will be described with reference to FIG.
The fifth embodiment is an example in which an error notification is given to the opening of the front frame 4 and the removal of the main board (game control device 54), particularly in the card unit.
In the fifth embodiment, the night monitoring switch 126 shown in FIG. 6 is arranged, and the payout control device 230 detects the opening of the front frame 4 and the night monitoring switch 126 detects the removal of the main board (game control device 54). Based on the detected information (that is, night monitoring information), it is determined whether the front frame 4 is opened or the main board (game control device 54) is removed, and the determination result is transmitted to the card unit 15, and the card unit 15 detects an error. It has come to inform.
Although the flowchart of the card unit 15 is different from that of the first embodiment, the block diagram of the fifth embodiment is the same as that of FIG. To do.

Next, monitoring switch information reception processing of the card unit 15 in the fifth embodiment will be described.
In the monitoring switch information reception processing of the card unit 15 in the fifth embodiment, the processing content will be described using F as the step number.
FIG. 95 is a flowchart showing monitoring switch information reception processing of the card unit 15.
When the routine starts, it is determined in step F1 whether or not the frame opening information has been received. This is to determine whether or not a command related to the frame opening information has been received from the payout control device 230, and is briefly shown in the drawing for convenience of explanation. If a command related to frame opening information has been received, frame opening error processing is performed in step F2. In the frame opening error process, the red LED of the card unit error notification LED 203 (see FIG. 1) arranged in the card unit 15 is caused to blink, whereby the card unit 15 performs error notification.
Since there is a sign that the front frame 4 was opened at night, the error notification here is an error notification indicating that the front frame 4 was opened at night in the card unit 15 by judging that there is a possibility of fraud. This is performed using the card unit error notification LED 203.
When the store clerk sees that the red LED of the card unit error notification LED 203 is flashing, there is evidence that the front frame 4 has been opened at night, and there is a possibility of fraud, and the pachinko machine 1 Necessary measures such as inspection can be taken.
Not only the blinking of the red LED but also, for example, a frame opening error display is displayed on the operation display device 7, error information is output from the card unit 15 to the hall computer 86, and no ball lending is performed. Good.

After step F2, the process proceeds to step F3. On the other hand, if the command related to the frame opening information is not received in step F2, the process jumps to step F2 and proceeds to step F3.
In step F3, it is determined whether or not the game control device monitoring information (that is, the removal control information of the game control device 54, hereinafter the same) is received. This is to determine whether or not a command related to game control device monitoring information has been received from the payout control device 230, and is briefly shown in the drawing for the sake of explanation. If a command related to game control device monitoring information has been received, game control device monitoring error processing is performed in step F4. In the game control device monitoring error process, the blue LED of the card unit error notification LED 203 (see FIG. 1) arranged in the card unit 15 is caused to blink, whereby the card unit 15 performs error notification.
In this error notification, since there is a sign that the main board (game control device 54) has been removed at night, it is determined that there is a possibility of fraud and the main board (game control device 54) at night in the card unit 15. An error notification indicating that the card has been removed is performed using the card unit error notification LED 203.
When the store clerk sees that the blue LED of the card unit error notification LED 203 is blinking, there is evidence that the main board (game control device 54) has been removed at night, and there is a possibility of fraud. Necessary measures such as checking the pachinko machine 1 can be taken.
In addition to the blinking of the blue LED, for example, a display indicating that the main board (game control device 54) has been removed is displayed on the operation display device 7, or error information is output from the card unit 15 to the hall computer 86. Or, you may not rent a ball.

If there is both an error in opening the front frame 4 and an error in removing the main board (game control device 54), both the red LED and the blue LED of the card unit error notification LED 203 will blink.
In addition, when the red LED of the card unit error notification LED 203 or the blue LED flashes, or when both LEDs flash, the clerk checks the pachinko machine 1 and there is no abnormality such as fraud. For example, the card unit 15 is reset (power is turned on again) to stop the blinking of the LED, and the pachinko machine 1 can be operated.
On the other hand, if a clerk inspects the pachinko machine 1 and finds an abnormality such as fraud, the card unit 15 is turned off to stop the blinking of the LED, and the pachinko machine 1 is not operated. , And inform the player by raising a tag such as “under maintenance”.
In this way, when the card unit 15 receives a command related to the frame opening information or a command related to the game control device monitoring information from the payout control device 230, the card unit 15 performs an error notification to cope with fraud. Can be taken.
After step F4, the routine ends. On the other hand, if a command related to the game control device monitoring information is not received in step F3, the process jumps to step F4 and ends the routine.
In addition, in the error processing of Step F2 and Step F4, in addition to notifying the error by blinking the LED as described above, the card unit 15 does not perform ball lending, but for example, settlement, acceptance of a game card, etc. Processing for stopping the function may be performed.

According to the fifth embodiment, the process of notifying the card unit 15 of an error based on the frame opening information and the game control device monitoring information from the payout control device 230 can be realized by the flowchart of FIG. Therefore, according to the flowchart of FIG. 95, the following effects are obtained.
Error processing is performed by a device called a card unit 15 that is remote from the pachinko machine 1, and security against fraud can be improved with high reliability.
In the card unit 15, the content of error processing (for example, blinking of the red LED or blue LED of the card unit error notification LED 203) is changed based on the frame opening information and the game control device monitoring information from the payout control device 230. The store clerk can quickly grasp the status of the error and can efficiently deal with fraud.
In addition to notifying the error as described above, the card unit 15 performs functions such as not lending a ball, checking out, accepting a game card, etc. in addition to notifying the error by blinking the LED as described above, for example. If the system is configured to stop the game, the gaming machine can be substantially automatically shut down against fraud, and it is possible to prevent damage to the game store in the event of fraud. Become.
"Example 6"

Next, Embodiment 6 of the present invention will be described with reference to FIG.
Example 6 is an example in which the arrangement of the winning display LEDs (winning display device) is changed.
In FIG. 96, reference numeral 401 denotes a pachinko machine, which is configured as an enclosed ball type gaming machine as in the first embodiment. The difference between the pachinko machine 401 and the first embodiment is that the winning display LEDs 402 arranged in the collective display device in the first embodiment are separated and arranged in the frame portion of the pachinko machine 401. 1 and the same number is attached.
Specifically, the winning display LED 402 (winning display device) is arranged at the lower part of the front frame 4 (game frame) and slightly to the left of the center. The function of the winning display LED 402 is the same as that of the first embodiment, and displays the number of winning balls corresponding to winning in the winning opening. The winning display LED 402 includes two 7-segment LEDs, and can display a 2-digit number as the number of winning balls.

The inventive concept of the above configuration is expressed as follows.
The winning display device
A gaming machine that is separated from a collective display device that collectively performs various displays including special drawings and general drawings, and is arranged on a frame member.

In the above configuration, the sixth embodiment has the following effects.
(1) Since the winning display LED 402 is arranged at the lower part of the front frame 4, the display of the number of winning balls associated with winning is performed near the game board 20, so that it is easy to understand and easy to see.
In general, a player often looks at the game board 20 and follows the behavior of the ball with his eyes. If there is a prize display LED 402 in the lower part of the game board 20, the line of sight does not move so much and the prize is accompanied. The number of prize balls can be easily recognized.
(2) Since the number-of-balls indicator 403 is also arranged in the vicinity of the winning indication LED 402, it is easy to recognize that the winning ball due to winning is added to the number of held balls.
(3) Furthermore, since the winning display LED 402 is arranged on the front frame 4 (that is, the frame portion), there is an effect that leads to cost reduction of the game board 20.

(4) When the area where the game ball is launched into the game area is at the upper left of the game board 20, the front frame 4 (game frame) is the lower left place of the game board 20, that is, the front frame 4 (game frame). It is possible to secure a place slightly on the left side (close to the lower left place of the game board 20) at the lower part of the center. Further, since the lower left area of the front frame is close to the place where the game control device 54 is the main board, the winning display LED 402 controlled by the main board (game control apparatus 54) is arranged at this place. In addition, there is an advantage that the wiring process between them is not complicated and can be shortened.
This advantage can also be obtained when the winning display device is integrated with the collective display device 35. This is because the location of the collective display device 35 controlled by the main board (game control device 54) may be any place near the main board.
"Example 7"

Next, Embodiment 7 of the present invention will be described with reference to FIG.
Example 7 is an example in which the configuration of the winning display LED (winning display device) is changed.
In FIG. 97, reference numeral 501 denotes a pachinko machine, which is configured as an enclosed ball type gaming machine as in the sixth embodiment. The pachinko machine 501 is provided with a winning display LED 502 (winning display device), and the winning display LED 502 is different in configuration from the sixth embodiment.
That is, an opening 503 is formed in the lower part of the front frame 4 (game frame) of the pachinko machine 501 slightly to the left of the center, and a prize display LED 502 is arranged at a position facing the opening 503. It is fixed to the game board 20 (that is, arranged on the game board 20). Accordingly, the prize display LED 502 is in a state of being installed on the game board 20 and the front side of the prize display LED 502 is configured to be visible from the front side of the pachinko machine 1 through the opening 503.

The winning display LED 502 is composed of four small dot-type LEDs, and a sticker indicating “1, 3, 10, 15” is pasted on the top of the four LEDs. The numbers “1, 3, 10, 15” displayed on the sticker indicate the number of prize balls. When the number of winning balls associated with winning is equal to 1, the LED corresponding to “1” on the sticker is lit. Similarly, when the number of winning balls associated with winning is 3, the LED corresponding to “3” is displayed on the sticker. When the number of winning balls associated with winning is 10, the display of the sticker is “10”. LED corresponding to “15” is lit, and when the number of prize balls associated with winning is = 15, the LED corresponding to “15” on the sticker is lit. Example 7 is an example in which the number of prize balls associated with winning in the big winning opening 27a = 15. In the seventh embodiment, when the number of prize balls is different depending on the model, the number of the stickers is changed.
The pachinko machine 501 according to the seventh embodiment is the same as the sixth embodiment except that the configuration of the winning display LED 502 is different from that of the sixth embodiment. Is abbreviated.

Example 7 has the following effects.
(1) Since the winning display LED 502 is disposed below the front frame 4, the display of the number of winning balls accompanying winning is easy to see.
(2) Since the winning display LED 502 is composed of four LEDs, the cost is lower than that of the 7-segment type.
(3) Since the number of winning balls can be notified only by sticking a sticker indicating “1, 3, 10, 15” on top of the four LEDs of the winning display LED 502, the cost is low.
(4) The winning display LED 502 is composed of four small dot-type LEDs, and has a structure in which a sticker indicating “1, 3, 10, 15” is pasted on the top of the four LEDs. When the number of balls is changed, it is only necessary to change the sticker for displaying the number of winning balls, so that a highly versatile winning display device can be realized.
"Example 8"

Next, an eighth embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIG.
Example 8 is an example in which the placement location of the winning display LED (winning display device) is changed.
FIG. 98 is a diagram showing a game board 511 of the eighth embodiment, and a pachinko machine equipped with this game board 511 is also configured as an encapsulated ball type game machine as in the first embodiment. The game board 511 is provided with a collective display device 512, and a winning display LED 513 (winning display device) is independently arranged near the right side of the collective display device 512.
The collective display device 512 according to the eighth embodiment has a configuration in which only the winning display LED 513 is removed from the configuration according to the first embodiment and is moved to the outside. The function of the winning display LED 513 is the same as that of the first embodiment, and is composed of two 7-segment LEDs, and can display a 2-digit number as the number of winning balls.
Other configurations are the same as those in the first embodiment, and the same reference numerals are given, and duplicate descriptions are omitted.
The inventive concept of the above configuration is expressed as follows.
The winning display device
A gaming machine characterized in that it is separated from a collective display device that collectively performs various displays including special drawings and general drawings, and is arranged on a game board.

Example 8 has the following effects.
(1) Since only the prize display LED 513 is removed from the collective display device 512, no other changes are made, so that the control of the collective display device 512 is simple despite the change and can be used without greatly changing the configuration. .
(2) Since the winning display LED 513 is separately provided outside, it is separated from the collective display device 512 and the number of winning balls can be easily recognized.
(3) Since the prize display LED 513 is separated from the collective display device 512, the degree of freedom of the installation space for the prize display LED 513 is increased. For example, the winning display LED 513 may be arranged on the lower left side of the game board 511.
"Example 9"

Next, a ninth embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIG.
Example 9 is an example in which the placement location of the winning display LED (winning display device) is changed.
FIG. 99 is a diagram showing a game board 521 of the ninth embodiment, and a pachinko machine equipped with this game board 521 is also configured as an encapsulated ball type game machine as in the first embodiment. The game board 521 is provided with a collective display device 522, and unlike the eighth embodiment, a prize display LED 523 (a prize display device) is independently arranged on the surface of the game board 521 away from the collective display device 522. Yes.
In other words, the winning indication LED 523 is arranged independently in the center case 524 of the game board 521, and the winning indication LED 523 is provided inside the band 532 surrounding the gaming area 531 (particularly, on the lower right side).
Also in the ninth embodiment, as in the eighth embodiment, the collective display device 522 is configured to be moved and arranged outside the configuration of the first embodiment except for only the winning display LED 523. The function of the winning display LED 523 is the same as that of the first embodiment, and is composed of two 7-segment LEDs, and can display a 2-digit number as the number of winning balls.
Other configurations are the same as those in the first embodiment, and the same reference numerals are given, and duplicate descriptions are omitted.

Example 9 has the following effects.
(1) Since the prize display LED 523 is installed inside the band 532 surrounding the game area 524, when there is no installation space outside the band 532, the degree of freedom of the installation space for the prize display LED 523 is increased.
Note that the prize display LED 523 is not limited to the example of being installed on the lower right side inside the band 532 surrounding the game area 531, but may be installed on the lower left side inside the band 532, for example.
"Example 10"

Next, a tenth embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIG.
The tenth embodiment is an example in which the configuration of the collective display device is changed.
FIG. 100A illustrates a collective display device 601 according to the tenth embodiment. The collective display device 601 includes the same components as in the first embodiment, such as a special figure 1 display 351, a special figure 2 display 352, a special figure 1 hold LED 353, a special figure 2 hold LED 354, a general figure LED 356, a general figure hold LED 357, Round display LEDs 358 are provided, which are numbered identically.
On the other hand, the configuration of the winning display LED 602 (winning indicator) is different from the first embodiment. The winning display LED 602 includes two 7-segment LEDs, and can display a 2-digit number as the number of winning balls. Two 7-segment LEDs are denoted by reference numerals 602A and 602B.

In order to explain the details, an enlarged view of the winning display LED 602 is shown in FIG.
As shown in FIG. 100 (b), the LED 602B that displays a one-digit number in the configuration of the winning display LED 602 has the same configuration as that of the first embodiment, but the LED 602A that displays a ten-digit number is the first embodiment. However, the segments a and b of the seven segments are used as segments for displaying 10-digit numbers, while the other segments c to f are used for status display and the like.
That is, the status display LED shown in the first embodiment is unnecessary in the tenth embodiment (shown as “unnecessary” in FIG. 100A), and instead of the segment of the LED 602A that displays a 10-digit number. A segment other than segments a and b is used so as to have a function of a status display LED. For example, it is as follows.
-Segment a: Illuminates to display one piece of 10-digit numbers-Segment b: Illuminates to display one piece of 10-digit numbers-Segment c: Illuminates to display "probability change state"-Segment d: Illuminates “Time-short state” is displayed. ・ Segment e: For example, normal probability fluctuation is displayed. ・ Segment f: For example, accuracy is displayed.

Note that the two segments e and f need not be used. However, when they are used, they may be used, for example, to display a normal probability fluctuation or a sudden (abrupt probability fluctuation) display.
In order to explain these displays, for example, a sticker may be pasted on the collective display device 601 for easy understanding.
Moreover, about LED602A which displays the number of 10 digits, the center segment g and the dot h may be used for a certain display. For example, it can be used for “right-handed display” in addition to status display. The “right-handed display” is a display that prompts the player to launch a ball in the right direction of the game board 20 as the game progresses depending on the model, and is displayed under the control of the effect control device 53 on the game board 20, for example. When displaying the message “Please make a right turn” on the device 41 (liquid crystal display), it is necessary to display it under the control of the game control device 54 (main board). Therefore, it is preferable to display somewhere on the collective display device 35 or the like controlled by the game control device 54. Therefore, a configuration in which “right-handed display” is performed in the segment g may be adopted.

The tenth embodiment has the following effects.
(1) All the segments can be effectively used for the winning display LED 602 in the collective display device 601.
(2) Since the status display LED is not required from the collective display device 601, the cost is reduced accordingly.
"Example 11"

Next, an eleventh embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIG.
Example 11 is an example in which the configuration of the collective display device is changed.
FIG. 101 is a diagram illustrating the collective display device 611 according to the eleventh embodiment. The collective display device 611 includes a special figure 1 display 351, a special figure 2 display 352, a special figure 1 hold LED 353, a special figure 2 hold LED 354, a universal figure LED 356, and a universal figure hold LED 357 as components similar to the first embodiment. These are provided with the same number.

On the other hand, the configuration of the winning display LED 612 (winning indicator) is different from the first embodiment. The winning display LED 612 is not a 7-segment type LED, but is composed of four small dot type LEDs. A sticker for displaying “1, 3, 10, 15” is pasted on top of the four small dot-type LEDs in the winning display LED 612. The numbers “1, 3, 10, 15” displayed on the sticker indicate the number of prize balls. When the number of winning balls associated with winning is equal to 1, the LED corresponding to “1” on the sticker is lit. Similarly, when the number of winning balls associated with winning is 3, the LED corresponding to “3” is displayed on the sticker. When the number of winning balls associated with winning is 10, the display of the sticker is “10”. LED corresponding to “15” is lit, and when the number of prize balls associated with winning is = 15, the LED corresponding to “15” on the sticker is lit. Example 11 is an example in which the number of winning balls associated with winning in the big winning opening 27a = 15. In the eleventh embodiment, when the number of award balls is different depending on the model, the number of the stickers is changed.
Further, as shown in FIG. 101, the round display LED 613 and the status display LED 614 are slightly different from each other as shown in FIG. However, the configurations and functions of the round display LED 613 and the status display LED 614 are the same as those in the first embodiment.

Example 11 has the following effects.
(1) Since the prize display LED 612 is composed of four small dot type LEDs, the cost can be reduced as compared with the 7 segment type LED.
"Example 12"

Next, a twelfth embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIG.
Example 12 is an example in which the configuration of the collective display device is changed.
FIG. 102 is a diagram illustrating the collective display device 650 according to the twelfth embodiment. The collective display device 650 includes a special figure 1 indicator 651, a special figure 2 indicator 652, a special figure 1 hold LED 653, a special figure 2 hold LED 654, a general figure LED 655, a universal figure hold LED 656, a round display LED 657, a status display LED 658, and a winning indication. An LED 659 is provided.

Among the indicators and LEDs in the collective display device 650, the special figure 1 hold LED 653, the special figure 2 hold LED 654, the universal figure LED 655, the universal figure hold LED 656, and the status display LED 658 have the same functions and configurations as in the first embodiment. However, as shown in FIG. 99, the arrangement location is slightly different from that of the first embodiment (the same components are not described repeatedly).
On the other hand, there are a special figure 1 display 651, a special figure 2 display 652, a winning display LED 659, and a round display LED 657 as configurations different from the first embodiment. The round display LED 657 displays the number of rounds when a big hit with the start winning in FIG. 1 or FIG. 2 occurs and executes the big hit game. As shown in FIG. It is configured to display four types of rounds. And the number of rounds (2), (4), (11), (16) is represented on the surface of the main body of the collective display device 650 on the front side of each LED of the round display LED 657 (for example, the number (2) is 2 A sticker depicting numbers is attached and a display corresponding to the number of rounds is performed by four LEDs. For example, a sheet may be used instead of the seal.

The special figure 1 display 651 is not a 7 segment type LED, but is composed of 7 small dot type single LEDs. The special figure 1 indicator 651 performs the display of the special figure 1 (including fluctuation display, stop state display, etc.), and depending on which of the seven dot type LEDs is lit (or flashes). Various display modes are taken. For various types of display, refer to Special Figure 1, for example, “Out of” stop, “Big hit” stop, “During change”, etc. One or two or more lighting (or blinking) of 7 LEDs Can be displayed.
Similarly, the special figure 2 display 652 is not a 7-segment type LED, but is composed of 7 small dot-type single LEDs. The special figure 2 indicator 652 performs the display of the special figure 2 (including change display, stop state display, etc.), and depending on which of the seven dot type LEDs is lit (or flashes). Various display modes are taken. For various types of display, refer to special figure 2, for example, “out of” stop, “big hit” stop, “during change”, etc., combination of one or more of 7 LEDs (or flashing) Can be displayed.

  The winning display LED 659 (winning display device) is configured integrally with the collective display device 650. The winning display LED 659 is not a 7-segment type LED but a single small dot type LED. A sticker for displaying “1, 3, 10, 15” is pasted on top of the four small dot-type LEDs in the winning display LED 659. The numbers “1, 3, 10, 15” displayed on the sticker indicate the number of prize balls. When the number of winning balls associated with winning is equal to 1, the LED corresponding to “1” on the sticker is lit. Similarly, when the number of winning balls associated with winning a prize is 3, the LED corresponding to “3” is displayed on the sticker. When the number of winning balls associated with winning is 10, the display of the sticker is “10 LED corresponding to “15” is lit, and when the number of prize balls associated with winning is = 15, the LED corresponding to “15” on the sticker is lit. The twelfth embodiment is an example in which the number of winning balls associated with winning in the big winning opening 27a = 15. In the twelfth embodiment, when the number of prize balls is different depending on the model, the number of the stickers is changed.

In the twelfth embodiment, the winning display LED 659 and the special figure 1 indicator 651 are arranged close to each other, and the configuration is like an LED group in which both perform a decorative effect integrally. In other words, the four dot-type single LEDs of the prize display LED 659 and the seven dots of the dot type single-piece of the special figure 1 display 651 are closely integrated to form a group of eleven dot LEDs. Arranged and each LED is turned on (or flashes), making it difficult to understand the special figure 1 and the like, so that the game can be diversified.
Similarly, the round display LED 657 and the special figure 2 indicator 652 are arranged close to each other, and the configuration is such that the LED group is in the form of an LED group that integrally performs a decorative effect. That is, the four dot type single LEDs of the round display LED 657 and the seven dot type single LEDs of the special figure 2 display 653 are closely integrated to form a group of eleven dot LEDs. Arranged and each LED is turned on (or blinks), making it difficult to understand the special figure 2 and the like, so that the game can be diversified.
The inventive concept of the above configuration is expressed as follows.
The winning display device
It is constructed integrally with a collective display device that collectively displays various displays including special drawings and general drawings, and is arranged close to the special display device that displays special drawings, and the special view display device and the winning display device are integrated. A gaming machine that is configured to take an aspect similar to a group of LEDs that perform decorative effects.

Example 12 has the following effects.
(1) Since the prize display LED 659 is integrally arranged close to the special figure 1 display 651, a decorative effect can be created.
(2) Since the winning display LED 659 is integrally arranged close to the special figure 1 indicator 651, the special figure 1 is discriminated by lighting (or blinking) as a group of eleven dot LEDs. It is possible to diversify the game.
Here, the background will be described.
Recently, with the diversification of game characteristics in gaming machines, special figure result modes tend to be as difficult as possible for players to discriminate. This is because it will feel boring if the figure result form is easily understood at a glance.
Therefore, in the twelfth embodiment, a winning display LED 659 with a high lighting frequency is integrally disposed in the vicinity of the special figure 1 indicator 651, and the winning display LED 659 is lit as a group of eleven dot LEDs. Thus, in addition to notifying the number of acquired game balls set for each winning opening, it is possible to make it difficult to discriminate the derived special figure result mode, and it is possible to diversify the game characteristics. It is what I did.
In addition, even if it is difficult to discriminate the special figure result mode, a player who has some knowledge can determine whether or not the round display LED 657 is turned on. By making the winning display LED 659 with a sticker indicating "1, 3, 10, 15" close to the round display LED 657 and almost integrated, it becomes more difficult to distinguish the special figure result mode. This makes it possible to contribute to the diversification of game characteristics.

(3) Since the round display LED 657 is integrally disposed in the vicinity of the special figure 2 indicator 652, a decorative effect can be produced.
(4) Further, since the round display LEDs 657 are integrally arranged in the vicinity of the special figure 2 indicator 652, by turning on (or flashing) as a group of 11 dot LEDs, it is possible to determine round display, etc. It is possible to diversify the game.
(5) The prize display LED 659 is integrally arranged close to the special figure 1 indicator 651, and the prize display LED 659 is configured as a group of four dot LEDs, so it is a large 7 segment type LED. Space saving can be achieved compared with the case where a winning display device is realized. Therefore, the winning display device can be installed without securing a new arrangement space for installing the winning display device.
"Example 13"

Next, a thirteenth embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIG.
Example 13 is an example in which the configuration of the collective display device is changed.
FIG. 103 is a diagram illustrating the collective display device 680 according to the thirteenth embodiment. The collective display device 680 is a special figure 1 display 681, a special figure 2 display 682, a special figure 1 hold LED 683, a special figure 2 hold LED 684, a universal figure LED 685, a universal figure hold LED 686, a round display LED 687, a status display LED 688, a winning display. An LED 689 is provided.

Among the indicators and LEDs in the collective display device 680, the special figure 1 hold LED 683, the special figure 2 hold LED 684, the universal figure LED 685, and the status display LED 688 have the same functions and configurations as those of the twelfth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 103, is slightly different from that of the twelfth embodiment (the same components are not described repeatedly).
The special figure 1 display 681 and the special figure 2 display 682 are each composed of 7-segment LEDs as in the first embodiment, and display the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, respectively. It takes a display mode. The various display modes are, for example, “out of position” stop, “big hit” stop, “during change”, etc. for Special Figure 1 and Special Figure 2, respectively.

On the other hand, among the indicators and LEDs in the collective display device 680, the winning display LED 689 (winning display device) has the same configuration as that of the twelfth embodiment and is configured integrally with the collective display device 680. The winning display LED 689 is composed of four small dot type LEDs, and a sticker indicating “1, 3, 10, 15” is provided above the four small dot type LEDs in the winning display LED 689. It is pasted.
Further, the round display LED 687 displays the number of rounds when a big hit with the start winning in FIG. 1 or FIG. 2 occurs and executes the big hit game. As shown in FIG. The LED can display four types of rounds. Then, a sticker depicting numbers representing the number of rounds (2), (4), (11), and (16) is pasted on the surface of the main body of the collective display device 680 on the front side of each LED of the round display LEDs 687. The display corresponding to the number of rounds is performed by one LED. For example, a sheet may be used instead of the seal.

Furthermore, the universal map LED 686 has the same function and configuration as in the first embodiment, but the arrangement location is slightly different from that in the first embodiment as shown in FIG. 103 (the same components are not described repeatedly). ).
Then, the above-mentioned general-purpose hold LED 686, round display LED 687, and winning display LED 689 are arranged close to each other, as if they were a group of LEDs in which all persons integrally perform decorative effects. It is configured. That is, a total of 11 dot-type single LEDs of the general-purpose hold LED 686, four dot-type single LEDs of the round display LED 687, and four dot-type single LEDs of the prize display LED 689 are 11 in total. The LEDs are almost integrated in close proximity to each other, arranged as a group of 11 dot LEDs, and each LED lights up (or flashes) to make it difficult to determine the number of rounds and the decision to hold a normal map. Thus, the game can be diversified.

Example 13 has the following effects.
(1) Since the winning display LED 689 is integrally disposed close to the ordinary figure holding LED 686 and the round display LED 687, a decorative effect can be brought about.
(2) Also, since the round display LED 687, the general-purpose hold LED 686, and the winning display LED 689 are integrally arranged close to each other, they are lit (or blinked) as a group of 11 dot LEDs. This makes it difficult to understand the number of rounds, whether to hold the usual map, etc., and can diversify the game.
"Example 14"

Next, a fourteenth embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIG.
Example 14 is an example of another aspect of the display update control of the number of balls (the configuration of the control system is the same as that of Example 1).
FIG. 104 is a timing chart showing display update control of the number of balls in the fourteenth embodiment.
In FIG. 104, the number of balls held changes in the following cases.
(A) The number of possessed balls decreases by 1 when the game ball is launched. (B) When the foul ball is reached, the number of possessed balls is incremented by 1 (that is, when the foul ball is decremented by 1 but when it becomes a foul ball, 1 is added, After all, return to the original)
(C) If there is a number of winning balls associated with winning a prize, it is added to the number of balls held. The number of winning balls associated with winning a prize is as follows.
・ Large prize opening 27a = 13 ・ Starting prize opening 25 = 3 ・ Starting prize opening 26 (Fuden) = 1 piece ・ General prize opening 28-31 = 10 pieces

Now, when a game ball is being fired to the game area 22 at a rate of approximately 100 shots per minute, this state is shown in FIG. 104 by firing pulses. Below the firing pulse, numbers 1 to 5 are drawn for convenience of explanation, and these represent the first to fifth firing balls, respectively.
Now, if the number of balls held is 11 and the display of the ball number indicator 40 is “11”, if the first game ball is fired, Although the number of balls will decrease by one, the number of balls held in the internal memory (RAM 233) is updated (accurately, the number of balls held is updated, but here it is referred to as updating the number of balls held. The same is performed immediately (in real time), and the number of balls is immediately stored as “10” (in FIG. 104, the number of balls is updated in the internal memory (RAM 233) almost simultaneously with the launch of the first ball. (There is a memory number of “10”).
On the other hand, display update of the number-of-balls display 40 (the update control of the number of balls when the player's number of balls is displayed on the number-of-balls display 40 by the payout controller 230. Hereinafter, the number of balls held is simply This is called display update of the display 40). Is not performed immediately, but at intervals of a predetermined period (for example, 0.6 seconds). Therefore, as shown in FIG. 104, the display on the number-of-balls display 40 is updated to “10” 0.6 seconds after the first game ball is fired.

The time of 0.6 seconds corresponds to the time when a game ball is launched into the game area 22 at a rate of 100 shots per minute. As described above, since the number of game balls fired by operating the firing operation handle 11 is defined as 100 shots per minute according to a predetermined rule, the firing control circuit 236 controls the ball feed solenoid 172. Therefore, it is derived from the fact that it is within the range of 100 shots / minute (approximately one ball fired in 0.6 seconds (s)).
Here, for example, when a big hit has occurred, with the launch of the first game ball described above, one wins the big winning opening 27a and the number of winning balls = 13 occurs. Furthermore, when one of the game balls is fired in succession and one wins consecutively into the big prize opening 27a and the number of winning balls = 13 occurs, the ball held in the internal memory (RAM 233) The number is updated immediately, and the number of balls possessed immediately becomes “9” (in FIG. 104, “subtract one shot” is displayed).
When the above-mentioned two fired balls (first and second balls) continuously win the winning prize opening 27a and the number of winning balls = 13 occurs twice, the internal memory (RAM 233) The number of 13 winning balls is immediately added to the number of stored ball numbers “9” to immediately update the number of held balls to “22”, and immediately after that, the number of 13 winning balls is also stored. Immediately add the number “22” to “35” to immediately update the number of balls.
Then, the sequential update of the number of balls held by the internal memory (RAM 233) is all performed during the predetermined period (for example, 0.6 seconds). In the above example, all three updates, one subtraction for the second shot, 1 addition for the 13th prize ball for the first time, and 2 for the 13th prize ball for the second time, are all performed for a predetermined period ( For example, it is executed within 0.6 seconds (see FIG. 104).

  On the other hand, the display update of the number-of-balls display 40 is performed when two fired balls (first and second balls) continuously win the big winning opening 27a and the number of winning balls = 13 occurs twice However, it is not performed immediately, and the display update timing is an interval of a predetermined period (for example, 0.6 seconds). Therefore, as shown in FIG. 104, the calculation is performed to subtract the second shot ball within the next predetermined period after 0.6 seconds have passed since the second game ball was shot. In Example 14, when there is an addition (for example, addition by a winning ball), the addition is performed first at an interval of a predetermined period (for example, 0.6 seconds). The number of winning balls and the number of 13 winning balls for the second time are added, and the display on the holding ball number display 40 is updated to “36” (10 + 26). The display of the number-of-balls display 40 is updated by “35” (36-1) and displayed.

That is, in Example 14, in the case of a change to be added to the number of balls held (for example, addition of the number of winning balls accompanying winning a prize), when updating at the timing for each predetermined period, first, it is added to the number of balls held (twice And display the result of the addition operation as an update of the number of balls, and also perform an operation of subtraction by firing within the same predetermined period to update the number of balls as an update of the number of balls 40 is displayed.
Specifically, the addition of the number of prize balls (prize ball addition) and the firing subtraction are performed in the same predetermined period, and the display on the number-of-balls display 40 is updated. That is, it is as follows.
・ First half of the specified period: Addition of 13 prize balls for the first time and 13 prize balls for the second time (26 in total)
・ Second half of the period: Subtraction of one shot

  Therefore, as shown in FIG. 104, the number-of-balls display 40 has generated the number of winning balls = 13 twice for the previous number-of-balls display = 10 in a predetermined period (0.6 seconds). In this case, the total number of award balls = 26 is added to update the number of possessed balls = 36, the display of the number of possessed balls display 40 is set to “36”, and then one shot from 36 (immediately before 1 ball) fired in a predetermined period (0.6 seconds), and the display of the number-of-balls indicator 40 is set to “35” within the same predetermined period (0.6 seconds). Done.

  In this way, the number of winning balls associated with winning the first big winning opening 27a = 13 and the number of winning balls accompanying winning of the second large winning opening 27a = 13 are 10 balls. As a result of the addition, the display of the number-of-balls indicator 40 is updated to “36” (10 + 26), and thereafter, one ball launched in the immediately preceding predetermined period (0.6 seconds) is held. An operation of subtracting from the number is performed, and the display of the number-of-balls display 40 is updated to “35” (36-1) within the same predetermined period (0.6 seconds).

Next, when the third game ball is fired, the number of balls held is reduced by one when the game ball is fired, so the number of balls held in the internal memory (RAM 233) is updated immediately, The number is immediately stored as “34” (35-1). On the other hand, the display update of the number-of-balls indicator 40 is not performed immediately, but is performed at intervals of a predetermined period (for example, 0.6 seconds). The display on the display 40 is updated to “34”.
Next, when the next fourth game ball is fired, the number of possessed balls is decreased by one due to the launch of the game ball, so the number of possessed balls in the internal memory (RAM 233) is immediately updated. The stored number of balls immediately becomes “33” (34-1) (however, this fired ball becomes a foul ball as described later. This process will be described later).
On the other hand, the display update of the number-of-balls display 40 is not performed immediately, but is performed at intervals of a predetermined period (for example, 0.6 seconds). As will be described later, the display of the number-of-balls display 40 is updated so as to correspond to foul ball addition and firing subtraction.

  By the way, if the fourth shot ball is a foul ball, one shot is subtracted and the foul ball needs to be returned to the number of balls, so add one to the number of balls held. After all, it will return to the original number of balls. Therefore, the number of balls held in the internal memory (RAM 233) for dealing with the foul ball is immediately updated when it is determined that the ball is a foul ball, and the number of held balls is immediately stored as “34” (33 + 1). . On the other hand, regarding the display update of the number-of-balls indicator 40, both the addition to the number of balls having “34” (33 + 1) within the predetermined period in which the foul ball is generated and the subtraction associated with the fourth shot are performed. Although the calculation is performed, what is actually displayed on the number-of-balls display 40 is a predetermined period next to the predetermined period in which the foul ball is generated. Therefore, in this case, the display of the number of balls held with the foul ball will be updated within a predetermined period after the predetermined period that has become a foul ball, and therefore the number of balls held will be displayed in the next predetermined period. The display of the device 40 is updated to “35” (34 + 1: that is, a foul ball addition). In addition, since the display of addition and subtraction can be updated in the same predetermined period, the subtraction associated with the fourth shot is also performed, and the display on the ball count indicator 40 is “34” (35-1: That is, (Subtraction).

  Next, in terms of the update timing of the number of balls in the internal memory (RAM 233), when the number of balls held becomes 34 by fouling and the next game ball is fired, the number of balls held is Therefore, the number of balls held in the internal memory (RAM 233) is immediately updated, and the stored number of balls immediately becomes “33” (34-1). On the other hand, with respect to the display update of the number-of-balls display 40 for the fifth game ball launch, one subtraction (“−1”) is performed after 0.6 seconds have elapsed from the launch timing of the fifth game ball. ]), The display on the number-of-balls display 40 is updated to “33”. For this reason, when 0.6 seconds have elapsed since the fifth game ball is fired, the number of balls held in the internal memory (RAM 233) and the number of balls held on the ball number display 40 are the same value ( 33).

In this way, while the game game is in progress, the RAM 233 as an internal memory stores changes in the number of balls held by the player, and subtracts the fired ball, adds the number of prize balls, and adds the foul ball. By repeating this process, the player's number of balls will be updated and stored in real time, while the number of balls possessed when the player's number display device 40 displays the number of players' balls is updated. Unlike the RAM 233 that updates and stores the number of balls held in real time, it is controlled to update and display the number of balls held at intervals of a predetermined period (for example, 0.6 seconds). . This predetermined period (for example, 0.6 seconds) is a time corresponding to a continuous firing interval (0.6 seconds) of game balls.
In addition, regarding the updated display of the number of balls by the number-of-balls display 40, in the case of a change other than addition to the number of balls (for example, subtraction of the number of balls by firing, etc.), a predetermined period (for example, 0. The display of the number of balls held is updated every 6 seconds), but in the case of a change to be added to the number of balls held (for example, the addition of the number of prize balls accompanying winning or the addition accompanying foul balls) When the updated display is performed, the update to be added to the number of balls is first performed, and then the subtraction is updated.

Furthermore, when updating the number of balls in the predetermined period, an update display of the number of balls to be updated is performed at most two times, one addition to the number of balls and one subtraction from the number of balls. Control is performed.
Therefore, even if the prize ball addition due to continuous winning and the subtraction due to the launch of the game ball overlap, the addition to the number of balls held within the predetermined period (for example, 0.6 seconds) The subtraction from the number is distinguished from the number displayed on the ball count display 40.
Therefore, the player grasps the updated number of balls properly (individual fact of adding a prize ball and subtracting by launching a game ball) and easily recognizes the updated number of balls. be able to.

The fourteenth embodiment has the following effects.
(1) In the pachinko machine 1 (enclosed ball game machine) according to the fourteenth embodiment, when the player's number of balls held (game value) changes continuously, the number of balls held display 40 is held by the player. When the number of balls is displayed, the number of balls held is updated at an interval of a predetermined period (for example, 0.6 seconds), and the number of balls held is updated with respect to the display of the number of balls held by the ball number indicator 40. In the case of a change other than adding to the number (for example, subtraction of the number of balls held by launching, etc.), the display of the number of balls held is updated at intervals of a predetermined period (for example, 0.6 seconds). In the case of a change to be added to the number (for example, the addition of the number of prize balls accompanying the winning or the addition with the foul ball), when updating display within the predetermined period, the update is first added to the number of balls held, Thereafter, the subtraction is updated.
Therefore, even if the prize ball addition due to continuous winning and the subtraction due to the launch of the game ball overlap, the addition to the number of balls held within the predetermined period (for example, 0.6 seconds) The subtraction from the number is distinguished from the number displayed on the ball count display 40.
In particular, even when the addition by winning and the subtraction by firing are at the same timing, the number of balls held display 40 is distinguished from the addition to the number of balls held and the number subtracted from the number of balls held. Is updated and displayed.
As a result, the player grasps that the number of possessed balls has been updated properly (individual fact of adding a prize ball and subtracting by launching a game ball), and the player easily recognizes the update of the number of possessed balls. can do.

This background will be described.
During the game, the display of the number-of-balls indicator needs to be updated because there is an increase in the number of winning balls due to winning and a subtraction due to firing.
However, if there are consecutive wins and the number display on the ball indicator is displayed immediately, the player knows if the number of balls actually updated in response to the win. Difficult to do.
That is, when there is a change in the player's number of balls (game value), the storage of the number of balls in the RAM 233 as an internal memory is immediately updated, and at the same time, the number of balls held in the number-of-balls display 40. The display of the number-of-balls display 40 is updated instantaneously at the same time, especially when winning continuously, so whether the winning is reliably reflected in the number of balls held for the player. It is difficult to recognize.
In particular, when the prize ball addition due to consecutive winnings overlaps with the subtraction due to the launch of the game ball, it is difficult for the player to grasp whether the number of possessed balls (game value) has been updated properly. Therefore, there is a risk of reducing the interest of the game.

Therefore, in the present invention, focusing on how to display the updated number of balls, focusing on the addition of prize balls and subtraction due to the launch of game balls, the display of the number of balls held display 40 is updated to achieve a solution. .
Specifically, when the prize ball addition due to consecutive winnings overlaps with the subtraction due to the launch of the game ball, at the update timing of the predetermined period, an update is first added to the number of balls held, and then the update of the subtraction is performed. By performing an update display of the number of balls held by the number-of-balls display 40, addition to the number of balls and subtraction from the number of balls held within the predetermined period (for example, 0.6 seconds) Will be displayed on the number-of-balls display 40 as a result, and as a result, the player will individually update that the number of balls has been updated (individual fact of award ball addition and subtraction by game ball launch) ) So that the player can easily recognize the updated number of balls.
Therefore, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that does not lower the interest of the game.

The inventive concept of the above configuration is expressed as follows.
A display device in which a predetermined number of game balls are encapsulated in a gaming machine main body, the enclosed game balls can be launched into a game area and played, and a plurality of identification information is displayed in a variable manner And a game control device for managing the progress of the gaming machine, and a game value display means for displaying the game value of the player,
A game ball is inserted into the start opening to display the identification information of the display device in a variable manner, and when the identification information of the display device is in a special gaming state in a predetermined mode, a special gaming state is generated,
The game control device determines whether the game result is a predetermined profit state including the special game state or a state other than the special game state, and in the case of the predetermined profit state, it corresponds to a predetermined number of prize balls. Increase the profits of the players,
In the enclosed ball type gaming machine that plays the game by circulating the enclosed game ball by collecting the game ball that has passed through the game area and guiding it to the launch position,
The game control device includes:
Game value display control means for controlling the game value display means,
The game value display control means includes
When the game value display means displays the player's game value, the update of the game value is a game every predetermined period in the case of a change other than adding to the game value among the changes in the player's game value. Update value,
In the case of a change to be added to the game value, when updating within the predetermined period, the game value is controlled to be updated to be added to the game value and to be updated after the addition is updated. .

In addition, when applied to two types of gaming machines called so-called feather devices, the inventive concept of the above configuration is expressed as follows.
A game control device capable of enclosing a predetermined number of game balls in a gaming machine main body, launching the enclosed game balls into a gaming area and playing a game, and managing the progress of the gaming machine With
The game control device determines whether the game result is in a predetermined profit state or any other state, and in the case of a predetermined profit state, the player's profit is increased in correspondence with a predetermined number of prize balls. Let
In the enclosed ball type gaming machine that plays the game by circulating the enclosed game ball by collecting the game ball that has passed through the game area and guiding it to the launch position,
The game control device includes:
Game value display control means for controlling the game value display means,
The game value display control means includes
When the game value display means displays the player's game value, the update of the game value is a game every predetermined period in the case of a change other than adding to the game value among the changes in the player's game value. Update value,
In the case of a change to be added to the game value, when updating within the predetermined period, the game value is controlled to be updated to be added to the game value and to be updated after the addition is updated. .

(2) In addition, when updating the number of balls held in the number-of-balls display 40 within the predetermined period, a maximum of two times, one addition to the number of balls and one subtraction from the number of balls held The update display of the number of balls to be updated is controlled.
Accordingly, the display update by the addition to the number of balls held and the subtraction from the number of balls held within the predetermined period (for example, 0.6 seconds) is suppressed to a maximum of two times, and the number of balls held is displayed. Since it is displayed on the device 40, the player can clearly grasp the change in the number of balls at an appropriate speed (the distinction between prize ball addition and firing subtraction), and update the number of balls The player can easily recognize it.
The inventive concept of the above configuration is expressed as follows.
The game value display control means
When the game value is updated within the predetermined period, the game value is updated a maximum of two times: one addition to the game value and one subtraction from the game value.

(3) The number of balls held in the number-of-balls display 40 is updated at intervals of a predetermined period (for example, 0.6 seconds). In this case, since the time of 0.6 seconds is substantially the same as the time when the game balls are fired to the game area 22 at a pace of 100 shots per minute (game ball continuous firing interval), The display of the number-of-balls display 40 can be updated while maintaining a balance with the above, and the recognition of the number of balls to the player and the launch of the ball can be adjusted well.
In other words, since a game ball cannot be launched into the game area 22 at a pace of 100 or more per minute, if the display of the number-of-balls display 40 is updated at a maximum interval of 0.6 seconds from the launch, the player However, it is possible to secure a sufficient time for sufficiently recognizing the display contents of the ball number indicator 40.
The inventive concept of the above configuration is expressed as follows.
A gaming machine, wherein the predetermined period when the game value display means displays a player's game value is set to be substantially the same as a continuous launch interval of game balls.
"Example 15"

Next, as a fifteenth embodiment of the present invention, a configuration example when the present invention is applied to a pachinko machine that is an enclosed ball type gaming machine will be described with reference to the drawings.
A. Front Configuration of Pachinko Machine First, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine of this example will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 105 is a front view of the pachinko machine 1001 (enclosed ball game machine) of this example.

  This pachinko machine 1001 is a so-called enclosed ball game machine, and includes a game control device (see FIG. 109) for managing and controlling the progress of the game, and a predetermined number (for example, 30) in the game machine body. ) Game balls are encapsulated, and based on the number of possessed balls (game value) based on valuable value information (ball rental number) input from a card unit (CR unit) 1015 as a game medium lending device, The enclosed game ball is fired into the game area to play a game, and it is determined whether the game result is in a predetermined profit state or other state. Circulating this enclosed game ball by increasing the number of possessed balls (game value) that is the player's profit according to the number of prize balls and collecting the game balls that have passed through the game area and guiding them to the launch position A machine that uses pachinko games It has become. Here, the card unit 1015 corresponds to a medium control unit that reads and writes information recorded in a game storage medium (game card or the like).

Here, the material of the game ball enclosed in the pachinko machine 1001 will be described.
As the material of the game ball, a non-magnetic material is used, and specifically, for example, austenitic stainless steel SUS316 is used. This is because a non-magnetic sphere is used as a countermeasure against improper magnets, and it does not rust even without plating.
Typical austenitic stainless steels include SUS304 (18Cr-8Ni) and SUS316 (18Cr-12Ni-2.5Mo). By adding Ni (nickel), it becomes austenite at room temperature and becomes a non-magnetic material. SUS316 is particularly excellent in corrosion resistance.
As the number of game balls to be encapsulated, for example, 30 are encapsulated. Note that the number of enclosing balls is not limited to the predetermined number 30 as described above, and for example, 20 enclosing balls may be encapsulated.

The pachinko machine 1001 has a machine frame 1002 fixed to an island where the pachinko machine 1001 is installed, and is pivotally supported by the machine frame 1002 at a hinge portion 1003 so that the machine frame 1002 can be rotated. And a front frame 1004 that can be freely opened and closed. A game board 1020 (shown in FIG. 106) is attached to the front frame 1004.
A glass frame 1005 is attached to the front frame 1004 so as to be openable and closable so as to cover the upper front side. Note that a game area 1022 (to be described later) of the game board 1020 is visible from the front through a glass plate (a transparent plastic board may be omitted) held by the glass frame 1005. The glass frame 1005 is pivotally supported by the front frame 1004 at the hinge portion 1003 so as to be opened and closed. That is, the glass frame 1005 including the glass plate opens the front surface of the game board 1020 from a normal use state (closed state) in which the front surface of the game board 1020 (a front surface including a game area 1022 described later) is covered with a slight gap. It is possible to operate in a state (open state). In the open state of the glass frame 1005, for example, an operator inserts a hand into the front surface of the game board 1020 to release a clogged ball in the game area 1022 or to insert an insufficient game ball. Is possible.
In addition, although the front frame 1004 is called by the name of a game frame and the glass frame 1005 may be called by the name of the front frame, in this embodiment, the front frame 1004 and the glass frame 1005 are described.

Here, the upper concepts of the machine frame 1002, the front frame 1004, and the glass frame 1005 will be described.
From the large classification of frames, the machine frame 1002, the front frame 1004, and the glass frame 1005 are included in the concept of frames. When the frame is divided into an outer frame and an inner frame, the outer frame is referred to as a “support” in the superordinate concept, and the inner frame is referred to as a “main body frame” in the superordinate concept. In this case, the machine frame 1002 corresponds to the outer frame, and the front frame 1004 corresponds to the inner frame.
However, the concept of “support” may include the concept of outer frame + inner frame, and may also be expressed as a concept including a casing whose rear surface is closed.
On the other hand, the concept of “main body frame” includes the concept of an inner frame + glass frame.
Further, the glass frame 1005 is referred to as a “transparent plate holding frame” in a superordinate concept. In this case, the “transparent plate holding frame” may be expressed by a concept including an upper plate and an upper plate + lower plate.
Therefore, the concept of the machine frame 1002, the front frame 1004, and the glass frame 1005 is as follows.
Machine frame 1002: Outer frame: “support”
Front frame 1004: Inner frame: “Body frame”
Glass frame 1005: “transparent plate holding frame”

As other detailed names, the concept of the machine frame 1002, the front frame 1004, and the glass frame 1005 may be referred to as follows.
Machine frame 1002: Second machine frame, support frame body Front frame 1004: First machine frame, front frame, frame base, game frame,
Glass frame 1005: decorative frame, transparent plate assembly Further, Example 15 is an example of an enclosed ball type gaming machine, and the upper plate and the lower plate are not installed. The lower plate is sometimes referred to by the concept of “receiving tray”.

Now, returning to the description of FIG. 105, a lower panel 1006 is provided on the lower side of the glass frame 1005, and the lower panel 1006 has a ball count display 1040 and a decorative ball holding display device for displaying the number of balls held. 1250 is arranged. The decorative ball display device 1250 includes an upper decorative ball display device 1250a and a lower decorative ball display device 1250b. The upper decorative ball display device 1250a is designed to create an image of a so-called upper plate, and is arranged on the upper side of the ball holding number display 1040, and includes a large number of LEDs. In the upper decorative ball display device 1250a, for example, when the number of balls held by the player is 100 or more, all the LEDs are turned on or moved and blinked, and when the number of held balls is 50 or less, half of all the LEDs are turned off. Control of the decoration is performed.
On the other hand, the lower decorative ball display device 1250b is designed to create an image of a so-called ball box, and is disposed on the lower side of the ball number display 1040 (lower than the operation display device 1007 described later). It consists of many LEDs. In the lower decorative ball display device 1250b, for example, when the number of balls to be counted is 0, all the LEDs are turned off, and while counting the number of balls, the lower decorative ball display device is an image of a ball box from the upper decorative ball display device 1250a. The decoration is controlled so that the LED (this part corresponds to the counting decoration unit 1250c) is moved and blinked so that the sphere moves toward 1250b. Then, the LED is turned on in order from the lower part of the lower decorative ball display device 1250b, which is an image of a ball box according to the number of counted balls, and the decoration control is performed so that the player can know the approximate number of counted balls by the number of LEDs turned on. (Details will be described later in the operation). A portion where the LED of the lower decorative ball display device 1250b moves and blinks during counting of the number of balls is called a counting decoration unit 1250c.
The number-of-balls display 1040 (number-of-balls display device) displays the number of balls possessed by the player (that is, the game value as a player's profit), and six 7-segment LEDs are arranged. 6 digits (number of balls) can be displayed.
Here, the number-of-balls display 1040 constitutes first game value display means for displaying the player's game value under the management of the gaming machine (specifically, the payout control device 1230).

Further, the lower panel 1006 is provided with a counting switch 1311, a counting ball display 1313, and an effect operation switch 1009.
Note that the break switch and the counting ball use switch are not disposed on the lower panel 1006 but are disposed on the operation display device 1007 as will be described in detail later.
The counting switch 1311 is turned on (or alternately turned on and off) when the player presses the operation unit (button) on the surface of the switch. Further, the counting ball display 1313 is configured to light up if there is a counting ball.
The counting switch 1311 is operated when the player desires to count the number of balls, and when the counting switch 1311 is pressed, the counting of the number of balls is started. A count switch LED is provided inside the count switch 1311, and the count switch LED is lit when urging to press the count switch 1311. As described above, the counting switch 1311 has a configuration in which the counting switch LED is incorporated.

The production operation switch 1009 (first production operation unit) can be involved in production within a certain range and is operated by the player, and has a push button switch (denoted as button P in FIG. 105) in the center. It has four switches arranged vertically and horizontally corresponding to a so-called cross key. The push button type switch (button P) at the center can be involved in the production within a certain range when pressed by the player, and appears on the screen of the display device 1041, for example, by pressing four switches arranged vertically and horizontally. You can select numbers and symbols.
On the other hand, the pachinko machine 1001 is provided with the card unit 1015 (card type medium control unit). The card unit 1015 inserts a game card (storage medium: game value storage medium) into the card slot 1201, and the player operates the ball lending button (same configuration as in the first embodiment) of the operation display device 1007. As a result, a predetermined number of balls can be lent (increased number of balls) within the range of valuable value information (for example, the number of balls lent) recorded on the game card.

In addition, the card unit 1015 is provided with a cash slot 1202. The cash input port 1202 can input cash, and by inserting a predetermined banknote (for example, 1000 yen, 5000 yen, 10,000 yen), it can be within the range of the ball lending degree corresponding to the amount of the inserted banknote. A game ball is rented (ie, lending a ball; increasing the number of balls held). At this time, a prepaid card (a visitor card described later) corresponding to the inserted cash is issued inside the card unit 1015.
As game cards that can be used in the card unit 1015, in addition to prepaid cards (hereinafter referred to as visitor cards) that can be used by non-member general players, it is also possible to use a unique membership card called a house card. Yes, in that case, a membership card as a game card is inserted into the card slot 1201. When this member card is inserted, the ball can be used on condition that the member's PIN is input on the screen of the message / operation area (not shown: same as in the first embodiment) of the operation display device 1007. It is good also as a structure. Note that an LCD touch panel type screen is employed for the operation display device 1007, and the player can input a personal identification number by touching the touch panel with a finger.
Further, a card unit error notification LED 1203 is disposed in the card unit 1015, and the card unit error notification LED 1203 notifies an error that has occurred in the card unit 1015.
Further, the card unit 1015 has an operation display device 1007 as a part of the constituent members of the card unit 1015 as described later. The operation display device 1007 is for displaying the ball lending degree or the like and performing operations such as ball lending.

  As shown in FIG. 106, the game board 1020 has game nails planted on the front surface of a plate-like base material (so-called veneer), and a game area is obtained by surrounding a substantially circular area on the front surface with a guide rail 1021. 1022 is formed. The game area 1022 is an area in which a game ball that has been thrown in is dropped from above and is judged to be out or safe (determination of whether or not a prize has been won), and when the game ball enters the winning opening and becomes effectively safe Is configured such that data of a predetermined number of game balls set in accordance with the type of winning opening is added to the number of balls held by the player as a prize ball.

Returning to FIG. 105, a key insertion portion 1008 of a locking device (not shown) for the front frame 1004 and the glass frame 1005 is formed at the opening / closing side (right side in FIG. 105) of the front frame 1004.
Further, the lower panel 1006 is provided with a lower speaker 1010 that outputs sound effects and the like, a firing operation handle 1011 that performs a launching operation of a game ball, and an ashtray 1012.
The launch operation handle 1011 is used to perform a launch operation of the game ball, and has a configuration capable of fixing the launch volume 1171 (see FIG. 109). This enables the player to adjust the launch intensity of the game ball by touching the launch operation handle 1011 and fixing the launch volume 1171 at a desired position. Although not shown, the firing volume 1171 is fixed at the position when the player operates the handle lock portion. In addition, it is structured to return to the initial position by releasing the handle lock portion.
Further, in FIG. 105, a reference numeral 1013 indicates a decorative lamp having an LED (light emitting diode) provided on the front surface of the glass frame 1005 as a light source, and reference numerals 1014a and 1014b indicate the glass frame 1005. It is a plurality of moving lights provided on the lower front surface. Although not shown, the moving lights 1014a and 1014b include an LED as a light emission source and a motor as a drive source. Here, the decoration lamp 1013 and the moving lights 1014a and 1014b constitute a decoration display LED (frame) 1141 shown in FIG.
In FIG. 105, reference numerals 1016a and 1016b denote upper speakers that output sound effects and the like provided on the upper left and right sides of the glass frame 1005.

The operation display device 1007 is not arranged on the lower panel 1006 of the pachinko machine 1001 before being installed in the amusement hall, and the operation display device 1007 belonging to the configuration on the card unit 1015 side is placed on the installed pachinko machine 1001 on the lower panel 1006. It is structured to be attached to the front side of the.
In other words, the operation display device 1007 is a part of the configuration of the card unit 1015, is under the control of the card unit 1015, and is controlled by the card unit 1015. Connected. Then, when the pachinko machine 1001 is installed, the operation display device 1007 connected to the card unit 1015 via the connecting portion 1007C is attached to the lower side of the number-of-balls display 40 with the lower panel 1006 of the pachinko machine 1001 from the front. It has become.
Therefore, when installing the pachinko machine 1001 in the amusement store, the pachinko machine 1001 is installed first, then the card unit 1015 is installed, and then the operation display device on the card unit 1015 side is installed in the installed pachinko machine 1001 1007 is attached to the front side of the lower panel 1006 by tilting the connecting portion 1007C. Note that the pachinko machine 1001 may be installed after the card unit 1015 is installed. Also in this case, the operation display device 1007 is attached after the pachinko machine 1001 is installed. The connecting portion 1007C may have a flexible structure or a hinge structure.

The operation display device 1007 is composed of a liquid crystal display with a touch panel that can be operated by a player touching the touch panel with a finger. As in the first embodiment, a ball lending rate display 301, a remaining amount display 302, a ball A lending button 303, a return button 304, a storage / replay button 305, a message / operation area unit 306, and a switching button 307 are arranged (the various buttons and the like of the operation display device 1007 are the same as in the first embodiment for convenience of explanation. The members are denoted by the same reference numerals, and a break switch (not shown) and a counting ball use switch (not shown) are arranged as different from the first embodiment.
The functions of the break switch and the counting ball use switch are the same as those in the first embodiment. That is, the break switch is operated when the player wants to take a break. When the break switch is pressed, the gaming machine shifts to the break mode. The break switch is lit on the screen of the liquid crystal display when the break is possible.
On the other hand, the counting ball use switch is operated when the player desires to move the ball from the counting ball number to the holding ball number. When the counting ball use switch is operated once, the counting ball use number is calculated from the counting ball number. The movement of the ball (for example, a predetermined amount = 100 balls) is started. In other words, the counting ball use switch corresponds to the concept of a switch used to start an operation of transferring a ball from a ball box to an upper plate. The counting ball use switch is lit on the screen of the liquid crystal display when it is possible to move the ball from the counting ball number to the holding ball number.
The message / operation area unit 306 is used to display the number of stored balls, the number of balls held and the number of balls counted, in addition to the member having a membership card inputting a password or displaying a business message at the time of storing / replaying. In addition to displaying the details of the ball, the ball lending number is also displayed. Further, in the message / operation area unit 306, as in the first embodiment, the number of balls held and the number of balls counted can be displayed in an analog manner (analog display using a figure that looks like a ball box).

Further, in the fifteenth embodiment, a level meter left 1017L and a level meter right 1017R are provided as variable display devices on the left and right sides of the game board 1020, respectively. These level meter left 1017L and level meter right 1017R have display units 1017a and 1017b that are mechanically movable up and down, respectively, and the display units 1017a and 1017b are reliability meters related to jackpots in normal times. As shown in the figure, the effect of moving up and down to indicate the reliability of the big hit (for example, the higher the expectation for the big hit is, the higher the output), and if there is a counting ball, one level meter, for example, the level meter right 1017R The function of the counting display device is exhibited to produce an effect of displaying the counting ball number in an analog manner.
Here, the analog display of the number of counting balls means that the display unit 1017b moves up and down according to the number of counting balls, stops at a low position when the number of counting balls is small, and moves to a high position when the number of counting balls increases. It is an effect that informs the player about the number of counted balls in analog. That is, the display unit 1017b is configured to rise as the number of counting balls increases, so that the player can grasp the approximate number of counting balls sensuously.
In addition, when the operation of the pachinko machine 1001 is stopped due to a power failure, the display unit 1017b is configured to stop at the position of the number of counting balls at the time of the power failure and stay at that position (because of a mechanically movable mechanism), It is possible to notify the player that the acquired game ball is held.

B. In FIG. 106, reference numeral 1021 denotes a guide rail of the game board 1020. As described above, a game area 1022 is formed by surrounding a substantially circular area on the front surface of the game board with the guide rail 1021. ing.
As shown in FIG. 106, the game area 1022 includes an out-ball inlet 1023, a center case 1024, a first starting winning port 1025, a second starting winning port 1026 as a normal electric accessory (general power), a first variation. A winning device 1027, general winning ports 1028 to 1031, a general start gate 1032, a sub liquid crystal display device 1033, a second variable winning device 1034, a directing device 1036, a number of game nails (not shown) and the like are provided. . In addition, a collective display device 1035 is provided outside the game area 1022 of the game board 1020. Note that the launching device 1037 indicated by a broken line in FIG. 106 is provided in the frame portion. In addition, the game nails that flow into the upper part of the game area 1022 flow down while hitting the game nails, and a plurality of game nails are planted in the game area 1022 except for an attachment portion such as the center case 1024.
In the above description, the first variable winning device 1027 may be referred to as a big winning opening 1 and the second variable winning device 1034 may be referred to as a big winning opening 2 (for example, a large winning opening 1SOL in FIG. 109 to be described later). Are referred to as a first grand prize opening 1027a and a second big prize opening 1034a.

Here, the out-ball inlet 1023 is a portion through which a ball that has passed through the game area and the game result is out (out) flows in, and is a concept different from the number of outs described later.
That is, all the balls fired to the game area 1022 by the operation of the launch solenoid 1173 described later will play the game in the process of flowing down the game area 1022, and the ball won in any winning opening is safe (winning), A ball that does not win any winning opening results in a game result of out. In that case, the safe ball generates a prize ball, but in the case of an enclosed ball game machine, the prize ball number is only electronically added to the number of possessed balls, and no real ball is discharged. Then, as shown in FIG. 108, the safe ball flows into the out passage 1331 for taking in the collected balls from the board surface (game board 1022).
On the other hand, an out ball that does not win any winning opening becomes a game result of out (out), and after passing through the out ball inflow port 1023, it flows into an out passage 1331 for taking in a collected ball from the board surface (game board 1022). .
In the fifteenth embodiment, since the game ball launching device 1037 is arranged on the upper side of the game board 1020, the ball is launched directly from the launching device 1037 toward the game area 1022, and all the balls are played. There is no foul ball that generates a machine result (safe or out) and becomes a foul without being fired on the game board 22.
The number of outs to be described later is a concept including a safe (winning) ball and an out (out) ball. In short, a game result is generated by passing through the game area 1022 and externally (in this case) This is a ball that is collected outside the board (not outside the gaming machine) and does not include a foul ball. Therefore, after the game is over, the number of balls that go out of the game board 1020 is called the out number. The safe sphere is detected by a first safe sphere detection switch 1162 and a second safe sphere detection switch 1163 shown in FIG. 109 described later, and the out sphere is detected by an out sphere detection switch 1161 shown in FIG. 109 described later. It has become.

The center case 1024 is a member surrounding the front periphery of the display unit 1041a (shown in FIG. 106) of the display device 1041 (shown in FIG. 109) attached to the back side of the game board 1020. Although not shown in the figure, the center case 1024 includes lamps that use LEDs for production or decoration as light sources, and, for example, electric accessories that enhance production effects in cooperation with production display on the display device 1041 ( An accessory having a movable part that is operated by a driving source such as a motor or a solenoid).
Here, the center case 1024 is classified into “game board structure” from a large classification, and is represented by a superordinate concept “game effect component”. The “game production component” includes the concept of “center front frame + center back frame”.
Note that lamps for performance or decoration are also provided in portions other than the center case 1024 of the game board 1020 (may be outside the game area 1022). Lamps for effect or decoration provided on the game board 1020 (including the center case 1024) correspond to the effect mechanism on the board side and constitute a decoration display LED (board) 1144 (shown in FIG. 109).
Further, the decoration lamp 1013 and the moving lights 1014a and 1014b as lamps for the production or decoration provided on the frame side such as the machine frame 1002 and the front frame 1004 correspond to the production mechanism on the frame side, as described above. In addition, a decoration display LED (frame) 1142 (shown in FIG. 109) is configured.

The stage effect device 1036 has a mechanically movable structure, and enhances the stage effect by performing an operation such as dropping downward from the illustrated rest position or returning to the original rest position again. . In addition, you may add the structure which produces the effect actor apparatus 1036 by vibrating. Moreover, you may make it the structure which includes a small-sized liquid crystal display device in some production | presentation actor apparatuses 1036. FIG.
The launching device 1037 is installed in a frame (for example, the machine casing 1002), and is a device capable of launching a game ball from the upper part of the game board 1020 toward the game area 1022, and has a so-called upper launch type launching mechanism. is there.

The display device 1041 (production means) includes, for example, a liquid crystal display device, and is usually referred to as a variable display device. In addition, as a name of the display device 1041, there are various names such as a special figure display device, a symbol variation device, a variable symbol display device, an identification information variation device, and an identification information variation display device as names of members having similar functions. Items with the same function are in the same category.
The display device 1041 has a display unit 1041a (screen) capable of displaying identification information (referred to as a special figure) such as numbers and characters, and can display a plurality of special figures. For example, special charts are displayed in three vertical columns on the left, center, and right, and special figures consisting of numbers, letters, etc. in each column are displayed in a stopped state (stop display), or in a fluctuating state (for example, vertically) Display in a scrolling state) (that is, a variable display).
Here, the display device 1041 constitutes a first display device managed by the gaming machine.
The display unit 1041a can display an image for presentation or information notification such as a background image or a character image, or an image corresponding to a so-called common figure, separately from the above special figure.
Note that the display device 1041 may display an image corresponding to a so-called general map. However, when an ordinary map is displayed on the display device 1041, it is a decorative map. When the display device 1041 is configured to display a common figure, the display device 1041 corresponds to a normal symbol variable display device.
Here, the special figure is identification information that is variably displayed in the variable display game related to the big hit, and the common figure is identification information that is variably displayed in the variable display game related to the common figure (not the big hit). is there.
The usual figure is not actually displayed on the display device 1041, but is displayed on the collective display device 1035. The common map displayed on the collective display device 1035 is referred to as a regular map as described later.

The start winning ports 1025 and 1026 are winning ports functioning as special drawing start winning ports as will be described later. In this example, they are arranged side by side as shown in FIG. The upper first start winning opening 1025 is always open. The lower second start winning opening 1026 has opening / closing members 1026a on both the left and right sides, and when these opening / closing members 1026a are opened in a reverse C shape, the winning can be made. As shown in FIG. It is impossible to win if it is closed. These start winning ports 1025 and 1026 are arranged below the center portion of the center case 1024.
The second start winning opening is also referred to as an ordinary electric accessory (general power), and corresponds to an ordinary variable winning device.
The first variable winning device 1027 is a device (so-called attacker) having a first big winning opening 1027a opened and closed by an opening / closing member 1027b. The first big winning opening 1027a is opened on condition that a big hit, which will be described later, is made, and a game ball can be won.

Further, the second variable winning device 1034 has a single opening / closing member 1034b. When the opening / closing member 1034b is opened upward, the game ball can be won, and as shown in FIG. 106, the opening / closing member 1034b is closed. It is impossible to win. The second variable winning device 1034 is opened on condition that a special winning state is reached even in a big hit described later, and a game ball can be won. In this case, when a big hit occurs, one of the first variable winning device 1027 or the second variable winning device 1034 is released. Which one is released depends on the result mode (special result) of the special figure variable display game. It is determined.
In the second variable prize winning device 1034, the opening where the opening / closing member 1034b is opened to enable winning is referred to as a second big prize opening 1034a.
Here, in this embodiment, since the two attackers of the first variable winning device 1027 and the second variable winning device 1034 are arranged, the first variable winning device 1027 is the first attacker and the second variable winning device 1034. May be referred to as a second attacker, and the winning opening of each attacker may be referred to as a first large winning opening (or lower large winning opening) 1027a and a second large winning opening (or upper large winning opening) 1034a. . As will be described later, the first big prize opening is opened and closed by a first big prize opening solenoid 1132, and the second big prize opening is opened and closed by a second big prize opening solenoid 1133.
Further, the first start winning opening 1025, the second start winning opening 1026, and the ordinary start gate 1032 are referred to by the concept of a game board structure from a broad classification, and these correspond to the concept of the division of the start area. Here, the concept of the starting area is a concept including a special drawing starting port and a universal gate.

The general display is displayed on the collective display device 1035 separately from the special drawing. The general game will be described as follows.
When the game ball passes through the general map start gate 1032, a general display variable display game (hereinafter referred to as a general map variable display game) is performed by the collective display device 1035, and the stopped general map is predetermined. If it is an aspect (specific display aspect), the privilege called per map is provided.
In the case where the display device 1041 is configured to display an ordinary figure, the ordinary figure (decorative figure) is displayed in a variable manner on the screen of the display device 1041. However, an independent universal display may be arranged separately from the display device 1041.
When it is normal, a game is held in which the pair of opening and closing members 1026a of the second start winning opening 1026 are opened in a reverse C shape and are temporarily held for a predetermined opening time, and the game ball is started. It becomes easier to win, and accordingly, the number of executions of the special figure variable display game increases and the possibility of winning a big game increases.
Further, during the above-mentioned variable display game, when a game ball is further won in the general chart start gate 1032, the display unit 1041 a or the like (even if a unique general map start memory display is arranged separately from the display device 1041). (Preferably), the pending display of the usual figure start memory is executed, for example, up to four are stored, and after the usual variable display game is completed, the above-mentioned usual figure variable display game is repeated based on the memory. In addition, if the probability of a normal map is set to a high probability, it becomes easier to hit a normal map.
In addition, the hold display of the common figure start memory displayed by the indicator of the collective display device 1035 is the normal figure start memory. In addition to the collective display device 1035, a unique general diagram start memory display for displaying the decorative general diagram start memory may be arranged in the game area 1022.

Here, the short time will be described as follows.
Abbreviation of time is an abbreviation of “time reduction”. After the big hit, the special figure and the usual figure change time is shortened more than usual, the time efficiency is increased, and the probability per ordinary figure is increased. The number of implementations of a variable display game of a predetermined special figure by supporting winning at the starting opening by opening (second opening winning opening 1026) (including extending the opening time of the public train longer than usual) It is a function to change the special figure efficiently without reducing the number of balls (number of balls). Hereinafter, such a state in which the time reduction is being executed is referred to as a normal power support state or a time reduction state.

Next, the collective display device 1035 displays a so-called ordinary figure display or special figure display, and also a special figure or general figure start-up memory hold display (sometimes referred to as a special figure hold display or a general figure hold display) Display of status, for example, a plurality of indicators using LED as a light source (for example, a display composed of one small lamp, or a 7-segment display capable of displaying numbers as a special figure) Instrument). For example, among the LED segments in the collective display device 1035, those displaying the special figure 1 are arranged as a special figure 1 display, and those displaying the special figure 2 are arranged as a special figure 2 display.
Note that the start memory hold display (in some cases, simply referred to as the start memory display) is a display for informing the number of start memories that are held in a state in which the variable display game is not executed, and generally Is displayed by lighting a lamp or the like for each start memory. In other words, if there are three start memories, the three lamps are turned on or three figures are displayed.
The detailed configuration of the collective display device 1035 is the same as that of the first embodiment, and redundant description is omitted.

Note that what is displayed by the display of the collective display device 1035 is the special figure or the ordinary figure (formal special figure or ordinary figure), whereas the display unit or the like of the variable display device 1041 described above. A special figure or a general figure to be performed (however, when the variable display device 1041 adopts a configuration for displaying a common figure) is a dummy display for a player's effect. For this reason, the special display and the general figure as viewed from the player indicate the dummy display. In the following, when emphasizing this dummy display, for example, “decorative map” and “decorative map” are described.
As described above, the collective display device 1035 may be difficult to recognize by the player, but is directly controlled by a game control device 1054 described later, and is used for inspection of the game board 1020 and the like. For example, a special chart start memory display (special figure hold display) for a player that is easier for the player to recognize is displayed by, for example, a display unit of the display device 1041 or a plurality of lamps provided on the game board 1020 as described above. (Light emitting unit).
In this embodiment, as described above, the sub liquid crystal display device 1033 is provided, and the sub liquid crystal display device 1033 is on one side of the game area 1022 and on the side of the display unit 1041a in the display device 1041 (almost). Near the center of the board). Note that the display device 1041 is referred to as a main liquid crystal display device as necessary for convenience of description in comparison with the sub liquid crystal display device 1033.
The sub liquid crystal display device 1033 is smaller than the display device 1041 and can display various types of information on a liquid crystal screen, and is controlled by an effect control device 1053 on the gaming machine side. Specifically, the sub liquid crystal display device 1033 displays the number of counting balls, and when there is no counting ball, performs an effect display (for example, a model name display or an effect linked with the main liquid crystal display device). However, although the sub liquid crystal display device 1033 displays the number of counted balls, there are cases where the effect display is prioritized over the displayed number of counted balls (for example, when a reach with a high degree of expectation for big hits occurs).

C. Next, FIG. 107 is a view showing the back mechanism of the pachinko machine 1001 according to the fifteenth embodiment.
Here, the back mechanism is called by the concept of a back surface structure from a large classification. The back surface structure corresponds to the concept of the center back frame, and the back surface structure may be represented by the concept of a back partition plate, a back decoration unit, a back structure, and a rear unit.
In FIG. 107, the main components of the back mechanism in the pachinko machine 1001 include a card unit connection terminal board 1052, an effect control device 1053, a game control device 1054, a payout control device 1230, a power supply device 1058, a security plate 1060, and a drawer connector portion. 1071 and the like.
Note that a polishing device, a lifting device, a launching device, and the like for polishing the game ball are not shown in FIG. 107 and will be described later with reference to FIG.
In addition, there is no component equivalent to a conventional storage tank (upper tank) or a safe unit (non-enclosed ball type).

The card unit connection terminal board 1052 is a substrate for wiring connection between the pachinko machine 1001 side and the card unit 1015 side, and not only transmits information from the payout control device 1230 on the pachinko machine 1100 side to the card unit 1015 side, This is a circuit board for wiring connection that allows input from the card unit 1015 side to the payout control device 1230 on the pachinko machine 1 side. That is, it is a wiring connection board that can transmit information from both the pachinko machine 1001 and the card unit 1015.
As described above, since the operation display device 1007 is under the control of the card unit 1015 and is controlled by the card unit 1015, the operation display device 1007 is directly connected to the card unit 1015 by, for example, a harness. ing. Therefore, the card unit 1015 can input and output information, signals, and the like with the operation display device 1007 via a directly connected harness.
The production control device 1053 is based on the control command output from the game control device 1054, the display device 1041, the sub liquid crystal display device 1033, the decoration display LED (board) 1141, the production effect device 1036, the decoration display LED (frame) 1142, A decorative ball display device 1250, a level meter left 1017L, a level meter right 1017R, a lower speaker 1010, upper speakers 1016a, 1016b, and the like are driven and controlled. A circuit board for realizing this control function is housed in a predetermined case. Configured.

The game control device 1054 is a main control device (main board) that manages a game such as a special drawing, and various switches, solenoids, and the like disposed on the game board 1020 in relation to the progress of the game such as the special drawing. Electric components such as lamps (electrical accessories) are electrically controlled, and control information is sent to other control devices to comprehensively manage and control the progress of the game, including a microcomputer that performs these controls A circuit board on which a circuit is formed is housed in a predetermined case 1061.
The case 1061 has a security structure that prevents easy opening by the two crimping portions 1062a and 1062b. In other words, in a state where the crimped portion is sealed, the structure cannot be opened unless the crimped portion is destroyed. Further, only the number of times corresponding to the number of crimped portions can be sealed. Note that the number of crimping portions for sealing the case 1061 is not limited to two, and for example, four may be provided.
On the back side of the game control device 1054, an inspection device connection terminal 1063 to which a cable for the authorities to inspect the pachinko machine 1001 is connected.

The payout control device 1230 is a device that controls the number of encapsulated balls and the number of balls held (payout control board), and a circuit board on which a circuit including a microcomputer that performs the control is formed is housed in a predetermined case 1064. It becomes the composition. The case 1064 has a security structure that prevents easy opening by two caulking portions 1065a and 1065b. In other words, in a state where the crimped portion is sealed, the structure cannot be opened unless the crimped portion is destroyed. Further, only the number of times corresponding to the number of crimped portions can be sealed. Note that the number of crimping portions for sealing the case 1064 is not limited to two, and for example, four may be provided.
On the back side of the payout control device 1230, an inspection device connection terminal 1066 to which a cable for the authorities to inspect the pachinko machine 1001 is connected, an error display LED 1067 that lights (or flashes) when a predetermined abnormality occurs, and an error is released There are arranged an error canceling switch 1068, a RAM 1233 of the payout control device 1230 and a RAM clear switch 1182 for clearing the RAM 1113 of the game control device 1054, and a ball removal switch 1183 for extracting the enclosed ball to the outside.

The power supply apparatus 1058 uses a commercial AC power supply (for example, AC 100 V) as an input power supply, and supplies necessary power to each control device and each electronic component of the pachinko machine 1001 from the input power supply. Note that the commercial AC power supply is not limited to AC 100 V, and for example, an AC 24 V may be supplied to each gaming machine in units of islands and the AC 24 V may be used as an input power source.
The security plate 1060 is a plate-shaped metal plate that is disposed on the back side of the machine frame 1002 in the pachinko machine 1001 to prevent fraud. In this embodiment, a pair (that is, two plates) is provided on the left and right sides. Has been placed. As a security measure, a function such as filling a gap between the card unit 1015 and the pachinko machine 1001 with a security plate 1060 is exhibited.
The drawer connector 1071 is a department in which a main connection board 1075 and a payout connection board 1076 having a drawer connector structure, an effect connection board (board) 1077 and an effect connection board (frame) 1078 having a drawer connector structure are accommodated. Details of the drawer connector will be described later. For example, the main connection board 1075 and the payout connection board 1076 having a drawer connector structure connect the game control device 1054 on the board side (game board 1020 side) and the payout control device 1230 on the frame side (side of the machine frame 1002, etc.). Is to do. An effect connection board (board) 1077 and an effect connection board (frame) 1078 having a drawer connector structure are an effect control device 1053 that is a frame side member, a decoration display LED (frame) 1141 that is a frame side member, and a decoration. This is for connecting a ball holding display 1250, a level meter left 1017L, a level meter right 1017R, and the like.

Next, FIG. 108 is a cross-sectional view showing a circulation path of game balls and the like in a state where the effect control device 1053 and the like are removed from the back mechanism of the pachinko machine 1001.
In FIG. 108, a lower passage 1301, a feeding device 1302, an upper passage 1303, and a bypass passage 1304 are provided to constitute a circulation path of game balls, and a ball removal passage 1305 is provided on the lower side of the bypass passage 1304. Is provided.
The lower passage 1301 has a structure inclined by a predetermined angle so that the sphere flows gently through the lower passage 1301 by its own weight. A polishing device 1306 is disposed below the lower passage 1301. The polishing apparatus 1306 polishes the encapsulated sphere. When the lower switching valve 1310 in the middle of the lower passage 1301 is open, the polishing inlet passage is shown from the lower passage 1301 through the lower switching valve 1310 as indicated by an arrow. While the ball flowing in from 1319 is conveyed by the conveying screw 1320 by the power of the polishing motor 1312, the ball is polished by a polishing member 1314 (for example, a polishing cloth) disposed inside and discharged from the lower outlet 1315. . The sphere discharged from the lower outlet 1315 passes through the lower passage 1301 toward the inlet of the feeding device 1302.

The lower switching valve 1310 includes a lower switching solenoid 1310S. When the lower switching solenoid 1310S is off, the valve body of the lower switching valve 1310 does not slide, and the valve body is urged by a spring to close the polishing inlet passage 1319. Thus, the sphere is prevented from flowing into the polishing apparatus 1306. At this time, the sphere flows from the out passage 1331 or the bypass passage 1304 described later to the lower passage 1301, passes through the lower passage 1301 as it is, goes to the inlet of the feeding device 1302, and does not flow into the polishing device 1306.
In FIG. 108, the symbol “◯” indicates the movement of the game ball (encapsulated ball) together with the arrow.
On the other hand, when the lower switching solenoid 1310S is turned on, the valve body of the lower switching valve 1310 is sucked and slid by the lower switching solenoid 1310S, the polishing inlet passage 1319 is opened, and the ball in the lower passage 1301 is moved to the polishing apparatus 1306 by gravity. Operates to flow in. As a result, the sphere that has flowed into the lower passage 1301 from the out passage 1331 or the bypass passage 1304 is guided to the polishing inlet passage 1319 by gravity and flows into the polishing apparatus 1306, where the sphere polishing is performed.

In the polishing apparatus 1306, a polishing inlet switch 1321, a polishing motor switch 1322, a polishing cloth motor 1323, and a polishing cloth unit switch 1324 are arranged.
The polishing inlet switch 1321 detects a sphere flowing into the polishing apparatus 1306, and the polishing motor switch 1322 detects the operation of the polishing motor 1312. The polishing cloth motor 1323 is a motor for winding up the polishing member 1314 (for example, polishing cloth). When the polishing cloth motor 1323 is operated, the polishing member 1314 is wound around the polishing cloth unit and the polishing cloth unit is replaced. Thus, the polishing member 1314 can be replaced. Note that the polishing member 1314 becomes dirty due to the polishing of the encapsulated sphere, and is therefore replaced after a certain period.
The polishing pad unit switch 1324 detects attachment of the polishing pad unit.

The lower switching valve 1310 described above is arranged in the middle of the lower passage 1301, and an out passage 1331 through which the out ball and the safe ball pass is opened at a position facing the lower switching valve 1310.
A polishing inlet passage 1319 is disposed at a position facing the out passage 1331, and the lower switching valve 1310 is disposed at a position where the polishing inlet passage 1319 desires the lower passage 1301. Further, the upstream side of the lower passage 1301 (the right side in FIG. 108) communicates with the bypass passage 1304.
Therefore, a ball from the out passage 1331 (a ball that goes out of the game board 1020 after the game is finished) and a ball from the bypass passage 1304 can flow into the lower passage 1301.
The sphere passing through the out passage 1331 is a sphere having an out number which is a concept including a safe (winning) sphere and an out (out) sphere, and the sphere having the out number passes through the game area 1022 and is a game result. Is generated from the gaming board 1020 (here, outside the board (out): not outside the gaming machine). Therefore, a safe ball and an out ball that have been played on the game board 1022 are taken into the out passage 1331 as a collection ball.
In the fifteenth embodiment, the game ball launching device 1037 is arranged on the upper side of the game board 1020. Since the ball is launched directly from the launching device 1037 toward the game area 1022, the game board 22 is placed on the game board 22. There is no foul ball that does not fire and becomes a foul, and the foul ball does not pass through the out passage 1331 as a collection ball.

Either the sphere that has passed through the lower passage 1301 without flowing into the polishing apparatus 1306 or the sphere that has flowed into the polishing apparatus 1306 and finished polishing and discharged from the lower outlet 1315 is directed toward the inlet of the feeding apparatus 1302 and fed. The sphere flowing into the device 1302 is detected by the feed inlet switch 1332.
The feeding device 1302 operates the feeding motor 1333 to feed the ball that has passed through the feeding inlet switch 1332 upward as indicated by an arrow, and discharges it to the upper passage 1303 via the feeding outlet switch 1334. The feed outlet switch 1334 detects a ball discharged from the feed device 1302.
Further, the feeding device 1302 includes a feeding motor switch 1335, and the feeding motor switch 1335 detects the operation of the feeding motor 1333.

The ball discharged to the upper passage 1303 via the feed outlet switch 1334 flows through the upper passage 1303 and is blocked by the upper switching valve 1336 when the upper switching valve 1336 is in a closed state, and stays in the launching device 1037. It is configured to supply spheres. The launching device 1037 launches a game ball from the upper part of the game board 1020 toward the game area 1022.
The upper passage 1303 has a structure inclined by a predetermined angle so that the sphere gently flows through the upper passage 1303 by its own weight. In the upper passage 1303, an electromagnet 1341, a second encapsulated sphere detection switch 1165 (encapsulated sphere detection 2SW), a first encapsulated sphere detection switch 1164 (encapsulated sphere detection 1SW), and a small ball sensor 1342 are arranged.
The electromagnet 1341 is used when detecting that the sphere flowing through the upper passage 1303 is a magnetic body. If the sphere is a magnetic body, the electromagnet 1341 is attracted when the electromagnet 1341 is turned on. On the other hand, if the sphere is not a magnetic body, it is not attracted when the electromagnet 1341 is turned on and flows down the upper passage 1303 without being affected by the electromagnet 1341. Therefore, when the feed outlet switch 1334 detects the passage of the ball, the time until the ball passes through the second sealed ball detection switch 1165 without being affected by the electromagnet 1341 by turning on the electromagnet 1341 for a predetermined time. The former is influenced by the electromagnet 1341 by comparing the time until the electromagnet 1341 is turned on for a predetermined time and the ball is attracted to the electromagnet 1341 and then passes through the second enclosed ball detection switch 1165. Therefore, it is determined that the sphere is a normal non-magnetic sphere, and the latter is an illegal sphere due to the influence of the electromagnet 1341.

It is during a predetermined period when the pachinko machine 1001 is turned on (for example, when the store is opened) that the electromagnet 1341 determines whether or not the game ball is a regular non-magnetic ball. During this predetermined period, the upper switching solenoid 1336S is turned on, the valve body of the upper switching valve 1336 is sucked, the end of the upper passage 1303 is opened, and the ball of the upper passage 1303 flows into the bypass passage 1304. Yes. At this time, the ball removal solenoid 1344S does not operate, and the inlet of the ball removal passage 1305 is closed by the ball removal valve 1344 (the detailed configuration of the ball removal valve 1344 will be described later). Further, when the pachinko machine 1001 is powered on, the polishing apparatus 1306 is also operated to polish the encapsulated sphere.
Accordingly, the encapsulated sphere of the upper passage 1303 circulates along a path that returns to the upper passage 1303 again via the bypass passage 1304, the lower passage 1301, the polishing device 1306, and the feeding device 1302. In the process of the ball circulating in such a circulation path, the electromagnet 1341 is turned on for a predetermined time TD to determine whether or not the game ball is a normal non-magnetic ball.

In this case, if the game ball is a regular non-magnetic ball, it is not attracted when the electromagnet 1341 is turned on for a predetermined time TD, so that the ball discharged through the feed outlet switch 1334 and discharged into the upper passage 1303 Since the time until it passes through the second enclosed ball detection switch 1165 is shorter than the predetermined time TD, it can be determined that the ball is a regular non-magnetic sphere. Here, the predetermined time TD is set to be slightly longer than the time from when the normal non-magnetic sphere passes through the lifting outlet switch 1334 until it passes through the second enclosed ball detection switch 1165.
On the other hand, if the game ball is an illegal magnetic ball, it is attracted when the electromagnet 1341 is turned on for a predetermined time TD, so that the ball discharged through the feed outlet switch 1334 and discharged into the upper passage 1303 Since the time until it passes through the 2-enclosed ball detection switch 1165 is longer than the predetermined time TD, it can be determined that the ball is an illegal magnetic body.
Therefore, when the electromagnet 1341 is turned on for a predetermined time TD, the time until the ball passing through the feed outlet switch 1334 and discharged to the upper passage 1303 passes through the second enclosed ball detection switch 1165 is reduced to the predetermined time TD. If exceeded, the payout control device 1230 determines that the ball is an illegal magnetic body, turns on the ball removal solenoid 1344S, opens the end of the bypass passage 1304 with the ball removal valve 1344, and is in the bypass passage 1304. The sphere is caused to flow into the ball removal passage 1305 and collected in the collection box 1345.

A replenishment box portion 1343 is connected to the upper passage 1303 between the feed outlet switch 1334 and the second enclosed ball detection switch 1165, and the replenishment box portion 1343 replenishes the upper passage 1303 with a new game ball. Is possible.
It should be noted that, when the polishing apparatus 1306 is in operation, if the feeding inlet switch 1332 does not detect a ball passing through the feeding inlet switch 1332 for a certain time or more, it is determined that there is an abnormality such as a clogged ball in the polishing apparatus 1306. You may make it avoid that the grinding motor 1312 of 1306 continues rotating.

Here, the balls fed by the feeding device 1302 and discharged to the upper passage 1303 through the feeding outlet switch 1334 (or the balls supplied from the supply box 1343 and discharged to the upper passage 1303) Since the passage 1303 has a structure that is inclined by a predetermined angle, the momentum of the sphere flowing down is reduced, and the passage 1303 flows gently. Then, the first enclosing ball detection switch 1164 (encapsulation ball detection 1SW), the second enclosing ball detection switch 1165 (enclosure ball detection 2SW), and the small ball sensor 1342 are sequentially arranged by the dead weight of the sphere flowing into the upper passage 1303. Is blocked by an upper switching valve 1336 that is normally closed (except when the ball is removed) and passes through the upper passage 1303, and is guided toward the launching device 1037 from the launching device 1037 to the upper part of the game board 1020. Fired towards.
The upper switching valve 1336 includes an upper switching solenoid 1336S. When the upper switching solenoid 1336S is off, the valve body of the upper switching valve 1336 does not slide, and the valve body is urged by a spring so that the upper passage 1303 The end (the communication portion with the bypass passage 1304) is closed so that the sphere does not flow into the bypass passage 1304. At this time, the sphere is guided from the upper passage 1303 toward the launching device 1037, and is prevented from flowing into the bypass passage 1304.
On the other hand, when the upper switching solenoid 1336S is turned on, the valve body of the upper switching valve 1336 is sucked and slid by the upper switching solenoid 1336S, and the end of the upper passage 1303 (the communication portion with the bypass passage 1304) is opened to open the upper passage. The sphere at 1303 is operated to flow into the bypass passage 1304 by gravity. Thereby, the sphere of the upper passage 1303 is guided to the bypass passage 1304 by gravity and is not supplied to the launching device 1037.
The operation of the upper switching solenoid 1336S is performed by operating the ball removal switch 1183 of the payout control device 1230. When the ball removal switch 1183 is turned on, the upper switching solenoid 1336S is turned on and the upper passage 1303 is operated. The sphere of the upper passage 1303 is made to flow into the bypass passage 1304 by opening the end of the first passage.

A ball removal valve 1344 is provided below the bypass passage 1304. The ball removal valve 1344 includes a ball removal solenoid 1344S. When the ball removal solenoid 1344S is off, the valve body of the ball removal valve 1344 does not slide, and the valve body is urged by a spring so that the end of the bypass passage 1304 is provided. The (communication portion with the ball passage 1305) is closed so that the ball does not flow into the ball passage 1305. At this time, the sphere is guided from the bypass passage 1304 toward the lower passage 1301 and is prevented from flowing into the ball removal passage 1305.
On the other hand, when the ball removal solenoid 1344S is turned on, the valve body of the ball removal valve 1344 is sucked and slid by the ball removal solenoid 1344S, and the end of the bypass passage 1304 (the communication portion with the ball removal passage 1305) is opened and bypassed. The sphere in the passage 1304 is operated to flow into the sphere removal passage 1305 by gravity. As a result, the sphere of the bypass passage 1304 is guided to the ball removal passage 1305 by gravity and does not flow into the lower passage 1301.
Then, the sphere guided from the bypass passage 1304 to the sphere removal passage 1305 is collected in the collection box 1345.
The bypass passage 1304 is formed in a spiral shape in order to relieve the falling pressure of the game ball.

The operation of the ball removal solenoid 1344S is performed by operating the ball removal switch 1183 of the payout control device 1230. When the ball removal switch 1183 is turned on, the ball removal solenoid 1344S is turned on and the bypass passage 1304 is operated. The end portion of the bypass passage 1304 is opened, and the ball of the bypass passage 1304 is caused to flow into the ball removal passage 1305 to be recovered in the recovery box 1345.
As described above, when the ball removal switch 1183 is turned on, the upper switching solenoid 1336S is also turned on. Therefore, both the upper switching solenoid 1336S and the ball removal solenoid 1344S are turned on by turning on the ball removal switch 1183.
In this case, when the clerk performs the ball removal of the encapsulated ball, when the store clerk operates to turn on the ball removal switch 1183, both the upper switching solenoid 1336S and the ball removal solenoid 1344S are turned on, and the upper switching solenoid 1336S is turned on. This means that the ball 1303 flows into the bypass passage 1304 and the ball removal solenoid 1344S is turned on, whereby the ball in the bypass passage 1304 flows into the ball removal passage 1305 and is collected in the collection box 1345 via the ball removal passage 1305. doing.
For example, in the case of replacing the enclosed ball that has been used for a long time, the store clerk operates the ball removal switch 1183 so that the enclosed ball passes from the upper passage 1303 through the bypass passage 1304 and passes through the ball removal passage 1305 as described above. 1345 will be collected. Further, when an irregular sphere (a non-magnetic sphere or a small sphere smaller than a regular sphere) is detected, the ball is automatically removed and the encapsulated sphere is collected in the collection box 1345.

Now, returning to the description of the small ball sensor 1342 disposed in the upper passage 1303, the small ball sensor 1342 is provided to determine whether or not the size of the game ball is smaller than a regular one. The sphere sensor 1342 detects a regular sphere (eg, diameter = 11 mm) (detection signal is on), but does not detect a small sphere smaller than the regular one (eg, diameter = 10.5 mm or less) (the detection signal is off). As it is). In addition, the small ball sensor 1342 is disposed side by side immediately after the first enclosed ball detection switch 1164.
The small ball sensor 1342 determines whether or not the game ball is a regular ball during a predetermined period when the pachinko machine 1001 is turned on (for example, when it is opened). Further, when the pachinko machine 1001 is turned on, the polishing apparatus 1306 is also operated to polish the encapsulated sphere.
During the predetermined period, the upper switching solenoid 1336S is turned on, the valve body of the upper switching valve 1336 is sucked, the end of the upper passage 1303 is opened, and the ball of the upper passage 1303 flows into the bypass passage 1304. Yes. At this time, the ball removal solenoid 1344S does not operate, and the ball removal passage 1305 is closed by the ball removal valve 1344.
Therefore, the enclosing ball of the upper passage 1303 circulates along a path in which the upper passage 1303 returns again through the bypass passage 1304, the lower passage 1301, and the feeding device 1302. In the process of the ball circulating in such a circulation path, the small ball sensor 1342 determines whether or not the game ball is a regular ball.

In this case, if the game ball is a regular ball, the small ball sensor 1342 is turned on within a predetermined period (for example, T2) after the first enclosed ball detection switch 1164 is turned on. This is because the time from when the ball passed through the feed outlet switch 1334 and discharged to the upper passage 1303 passes through the first enclosed ball detection switch 1164 to pass through the small ball sensor 1342 is substantially constant. This is because the predetermined time T2 is reached.
On the other hand, when the game ball is an abnormal ball (small ball), the small ball sensor 1342 is not turned on within a predetermined period (for example, T2) after the first enclosed ball detection switch 1164 is turned on. This is because the small ball sensor 1342 is an abnormal ball even if the ball passed through the feed outlet switch 1334 and discharged to the upper passage 1303 passes through the first enclosed ball detection switch 1164 and then passes through the small ball sensor 1342. This is because the (small sphere) is not detected and the detection signal is not turned on. Therefore, when the game ball is flowing in the upper passage 1303, the payout control device 1230 is not turned on if the small ball sensor 1342 is not turned on within a predetermined period (eg, T2) after the first enclosed ball detection switch 1164 is turned on. Is determined to be an illegal sphere (small sphere), and if it is determined to be an illegal sphere (small sphere), the ball removal solenoid 1344S is turned on, and the end of the bypass passage 1304 is opened by the ball removal valve 1344, and the ball in the bypass passage 1304 Is introduced into the ball removal passage 1305 and collected in the collection box 1345.
The operation of turning on the ball removal solenoid 1344S and opening the end of the bypass passage 1304 with the ball removal valve 1344 to cause the ball in the bypass passage 1304 to flow into the ball removal passage 1305 is referred to as “ball removal”. It may be said that the ball removal solenoid 1344S of the valve 1344 is switched to the ball removal side to remove the enclosed ball.

Next, the collection of the balls that have been played on the game board 1020 will be described. In the launching device 1037, the balls supplied from the upper passage 1303 are sent one by one to the firing position by the ball feed solenoid 1172 (see FIG. 109). It fires from the upper part of the board 1020 toward the game area 1022 by a firing solenoid 1173 (see FIG. 109). Since the launching device 1037 launches a ball directly from the upper part of the game board 1020 toward the game area 1022, there is no occurrence of a far ball.
The ball launched toward the game area 1022 passes through the game area 1022 to generate a game result, and is collected from the game board 1020 to the outside (here, outboard).
At this time, the ball that won the first start winning opening is detected by the first start opening switch 1120, and the ball that won the first starting winning opening is detected by the second start opening switch 1121, and the first variable winning apparatus 1027 The ball that won the first big prize opening 1027a is detected by the lower count switch 1124, the ball that won the second big prize opening 1034a of the second variable prize winning device 1034 is detected by the upper count switch 1125, and the general prize opening 1028 is further detected. -1031 winning balls are detected by the winning opening switches 1123a to 1123d. The switches 1120 to 1123a to 1123d, 1124, and 1125 are disposed on the back side of the game board 1020.
In addition, a first safe ball detection switch 1162 and a second safe ball detection switch 1163 are arranged on the left and right of the back side of the game board 1020 in the frame part on the back side of the game board 1020. These switches 1162, 1163 are Only safe balls of the game board 1020 are detected (out balls are not detected). However, the safe ball of which winning opening is detected depends on the behavior of the sphere because the first safe sphere detection switch 1162 and the second safe sphere detection switch 1163 are arranged on the left and right, but the first safe sphere detection The sum of the spheres detected by the switch 1162 and the second safe sphere detection switch 1163 matches the total sum of the safe spheres.

On the other hand, the game result is not safe and the ball that is out (out ball) is detected by the out ball detection switch 1161 and flows into the out path 1331. Similarly, the out ball detection switch 1161 is arranged on the back side of the game board 1020. Then, the safe balls and the out balls that have ended the game on the game board 1022 are collected in the out passage 1331 as the collected balls and discharged to the lower passage 1301.
Therefore, the spheres collected in the out passage 1331 are spheres having an out number which is a concept including a safe (winning) sphere and an out (out) sphere, and the sphere having the out number passes through the game area 1022. It is a ball (collected ball) that generates a game result and is collected from the game board 1020 to the outside (here, outside (out): not outside the gaming machine). That is, the number of outs is calculated by the total number (recovered spheres) obtained by the three sensors “out sphere detection switch 1161 + first safe sphere detection switch 1162 + second safe sphere detection switch 1163”.
Then, the above-mentioned recovered balls normally flow into the polishing device 1306 from the lower passage 1301 and are polished, and are then fed upward by the feeding device 1302 and pass through the upper passage 1303 to the launching device 1037. Return. Further, when the polishing apparatus 1306 is abnormal, the lower switching solenoid 1310S of the lower switching valve 1310 does not operate, and the lower switching valve 1310 closes the polishing inlet passage 1319 so that the balls do not flow into the polishing apparatus 1306. As it passes through the lower passage 1301, it goes to the inlet of the feeding device 1302 and does not flow into the polishing device 1306.

Next, an appropriate range of the number of encapsulated balls will be described.
The first enclosed sphere detection switch 1164 is provided to detect a sphere located at a position lower than the second enclosed sphere detection switch 1165 on the relatively downstream side of the upper passage 1303. On the other hand, the second encapsulated ball detection switch 1165 has a sphere located at a position higher than the first encapsulated ball detection switch 1164 on the relatively upstream side of the upper passage 1303 (upstream side of the first encapsulated ball detection switch 1164). It is provided to detect. The first enclosed ball detection switch 1164 is a sensor that detects the lower limit of the number of balls enclosed as a game ball, and the second enclosed ball detection switch 1165 detects the upper limit of the number of balls enclosed as a game ball. It is a sensor. This is because the encapsulated spheres need to be encapsulated in the pachinko machine 1 without excess or deficiency. It is provided to confirm that there are encapsulated balls.
Further, the upper passage 1303 is formed in a bent structure just before the first enclosed ball detection switch 1164, and the upper passage 1303 on the downstream side of the bent structure, that is, the downstream side of the first enclosed ball detection switch 1164 is a ball feed. It has a function as a flow path, and the enclosing balls are arranged one by one.
The upper passage 1303 may be provided as an integral flow path including the ball feed flow path, or may not be so.

Of the circulation path through which the enclosing ball circulates, the upper passage 1303 is inclined downward or downward toward the vicinity of the launch position as shown in FIG. 108 with the vicinity of the launch position of the launcher 1037 as the lowest position. The first enclosed ball detection switch 1164 is arranged to detect the game ball in the first position in the upper passage 1303, and the second enclosed ball detection switch 1165 is more than the first position in the upper passage 1303. It arrange | positions so that the game ball in the 2nd position of an upstream may be detected.
Here, the first position indicates that the most upstream game ball is stored in the upper passage 1303 when the minimum number of balls within the appropriate range of the number of encapsulated balls (the number of encapsulated game balls) is stored in the upper passage 1303. The position is detected by the 1 enclosing ball detection switch 1164. In addition, the second position is such that when the number of game balls exceeding the appropriate range of the number of encapsulated balls is accumulated in the upper passage 1303, the second encapsulated ball detection switch 1165 detects the game ball and falls within the proper range of the number of encapsulated balls. When a maximum number of game balls are stored in the upper passage 1303, the second enclosing ball detection switch 1165 is set to a position where no game ball is detected.

In addition, at least a part (preferably the whole) of the above-described upper passage 1303 among the circulation flow path of the encapsulated ball can be viewed from the outside (at least from the back side of the pachinko machine 1001). It has become. Thereby, the state of the flow of the sphere in the upper passage 1303, the presence or absence of the occurrence of clogging, and the state of the number of encapsulated spheres can be visually confirmed. For example, the flow path of the encapsulated sphere (upper passage 1303) is made of a transparent or translucent member, or an internal viewing opening (a thin slit, a plurality of minute holes, etc.) having a size that prevents the sphere from flowing out. ) Is formed of a predetermined number of members, so that an internal ball can be visually recognized from the back side of the pachinko machine 1001.
Although detailed illustration is omitted, for example, the entire back wall of the upper passage 1303 may be formed of a transparent member so that the entire interior of the upper passage 1303 can be visually recognized as shown in FIG. Preferably, at least in the upper passage 1303, the internal sphere can be visually recognized from the outside, whereby the number of enclosed spheres can be visually confirmed. In addition, a mark may be formed near the upper passage 1303 so that an accurate determination as to whether or not the number of encapsulated balls is appropriate can be made by this visual check. For example, marks (indicating indicators: for example, inverted triangle marks in FIG. 108) 1346 may be formed near the upper passage 1303 at a predetermined number of 30 positions of the enclosing sphere. In this way, when a sphere is added when the encapsulated sphere is insufficient, it is easy to understand because it is sufficient to add up to this mark 1346. Further, when the number of encapsulated spheres is excessive, it is easy to understand because it is sufficient to pass through the sphere to the mark 1346.

In the configuration shown in FIG. 108, the state in which the encapsulated ball is dropped into the game area 1022 and does not flow into the polishing apparatus 1306 is the upper passage 1303, the launching device 1037, the game area 1022, the out passage 1331, the lower passage 1301, and the feeding device. The enclosed ball circulates through the path 1302 and the upper passage 1303 to play a game. The state in which the encapsulated ball falls while playing a game game and circulates through the above path without polishing the encapsulated ball is called “in encapsulated ball game circulation”.
On the other hand, when the encapsulated sphere is polished during the game with the encapsulated sphere, the encapsulated sphere is dropped into the game area 1022 and flows into the polishing device 56 to polish the ball. 1303, launching device 1037, gaming area 1022, out passage 1331, lower passage 1301, the enclosed sphere flows from the lower passage 1301 through the lower switching valve 1310 to the polishing device 1306, and the sphere is polished, The route passes through the lower passage 1301 and is fed by the feeding device 1302 to the upper passage 1303, and the game is played while circulating the encapsulated ball. A state in which the encapsulated ball falls while playing a game game and circulates through the path while polishing the encapsulated ball is referred to as “encapsulated ball polishing game circulation”.
In the fifteenth embodiment, unlike the first embodiment, polishing of the encapsulated sphere is based on polishing not only during power-on but also during normal games. This is to polish the encapsulated sphere well, and the encapsulated sphere is polished while being circulated during the game.
The reason for polishing the encapsulated sphere even when the power is turned on is to polish the encapsulated sphere once a day even on a stand that is not in operation. That is, in the fifteenth embodiment, when the encapsulated sphere is caused to flow into the polishing device 56 without passing through the game area 1022 and the sphere is circulated without turning on the power of the pachinko machine 1001, the upper passage 1303, the bypass passage 1304, The encapsulated sphere flows into the polishing device 1306 from the lower passage 1301 through the lower switching valve 1310 through the lower passage 1301, and the sphere is polished, and then fed by the feeding device 1302 through the lower passage 1301. Then, the encapsulated sphere circulates along the path leading to the upper passage 1303. The state where the encapsulated sphere does not play a game game and circulates the above path while polishing the encapsulated sphere is called “encapsulated sphere polishing / circulating”.

D. Next, since “D. System configuration of game hall” in the fifteenth embodiment is the same as that in the first embodiment, description thereof is omitted.
E. Configuration of Control System Next, a control system of the pachinko machine 1001 according to the fifteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the drawings and the following description, “SW” means a switch, and “SOL” means a solenoid. Further, in the drawings, when the name of the member is long, it is difficult to show the illustration, and therefore, the drawing may be appropriately shortened (illustrated).
The pachinko machine 1001 includes a game control device 1054, an effect control device 1053, a payout control device 1230, and a power supply device 1058 as main components of the control system. Necessary power is supplied from the power supply device 1058 to each of these devices and each electronic component shown in FIG.
In the fifteenth embodiment, a device for controlling the progress of a game (a conventional game) is controlled by a device (payout control device) that performs encapsulated ball control (control of the number of encapsulated balls and control of addition / subtraction of the number of balls held). The control device is separated from the control device. By separating in this way, the program of each control device is simplified, and the control burden is reduced. Note that, not limited to the above, for example, a device in which such a payout control device and a game control device are integrated may be provided as the game control device 1054. In this case, signals and commands sent from the game control device to the payout control device become unnecessary, and the control burden is reduced, and space and power can be saved.

(Game control device related)
First, a configuration of the game control device 1054 of the pachinko machine 1001 and devices connected to the game control device 1054 will be described.
The game control device 1054 is a main control device (main board) that manages games such as special drawings, and includes a CPU 1111, a ROM 1112, a RAM 1113, a test firing test terminal 1115 for an inspection device, and an inspection device connection terminal 1063. Yes.
The game control device 1054 constitutes a control device, game control means, and display control means.

The CPU 1111 executes a game program for managing a game such as a special figure and performs arithmetic processing necessary for game control. The ROM 1112 stores a game program, and the RAM 1113 is used as a work area (work area) when executing processing based on the game program.
The RAM 1113 is provided with backup power supply means (not shown, for example, comprising a large-capacitance capacitor) that supplies power even in the event of a power failure. If the power is restored from the power failure within the continued time, the data in the RAM 1113 is retained.
Note that the CPU 1111, the ROM 1112, and the RAM 1113 correspond to a game microcomputer as a game arithmetic processing device, and are manufactured as an IC for an amusement chip, for example.
The amusement chip IC stores a manufacturer code and a product code in addition to a chip code as individual identification information for individually identifying the IC chip, and can output these codes as a gaming machine ID. is there.

The test firing test terminal 1115 is a terminal to which a cable for transmitting various game information obtained from the CPU 1111 to the inspection device is connected. Note that the test firing test terminal 1115 and related parts are used in the test institution and are removed at the time of shipment, and are not mounted on the game control device 1054 used in the game hall.
The inspection device connection terminal 1163 is a terminal to which a cable for the authorities to inspect the pachinko machine 1001 is connected after the pachinko machine 1001 is installed in the game hall.

The game control device 1054 includes a first start port switch 1120 (start port 1SW in FIG. 109), a second start port switch 1121 (start port 2SW in FIG. 109), a gate switch 1122, a winning port switch 1123, and a lower count switch 1124. Detection signals from the upper count switch 1125, the magnet sensor 1142, the radio wave sensor (panel) 1143, and the vibration sensor 1144 are input.
The first start port switch 1120 is a sensor for detecting winning balls one by one for detecting the game balls won in the first start winning port 1025, and the second start port switch 1121 wins the second start winning port 1026. This is a sensor for detecting a winning ball that detects the gaming balls one by one.
The lower count switch 1124 is a similar sensor that detects a game ball won in the first big prize opening 1027a of the first variable prize winning device 1027. The upper count switch 1125 is a similar sensor that detects a game ball won in the second big prize opening 1034a of the second variable prize winning device 1034.
In the fifteenth embodiment, two lower count switches 1124 are provided, and a game ball that has flowed into the big winning opening of the variable winning device 1027 is detected by one of the lower count switches 1124. By providing a plurality of lower count switches 1124 in this way, it is possible to quickly detect game balls that have flowed into the big winning opening.

The prize opening switch 1123 is a similar sensor provided for the general prize openings 1028 to 1031. When there are n general prize openings, one is provided for each and n is provided as a whole.
Therefore, as shown in FIG. 108 described above, in the fifteenth embodiment, since there are four general winning ports (general winning ports 1028 to 1031), four sensors are provided and the general winning ports 1028 to 1031 are won. The balls are detected by the prize opening switches 1123a to 1123d. These prize winning opening switches 1123a to 1123d are collectively referred to as winning prize opening switches 1123 in FIG.
Instead of providing one sensor for each general winning opening, one sensor may be provided for a plurality of general winning openings. The gate switch 1122 is a sensor that detects the game balls passing through the usual start gate 1032 one by one.
The sensors 1120, 1121, 1122, 1123, and 1124 for detecting these game balls are proximity switches in this example, and are configured to output a negative logic detection signal such as a high level of 11V and a low level of 7V. It is configured.

The game control device 1054 sends a winning ball number command corresponding to the winning to the payout control device 1230 when there is a winning at the winning opening. The payout control device 1230 performs a process of adding the number of winning balls corresponding to the winning to the number of balls based on the winning ball number command corresponding to the winning sent from the game control device 1054.
The game control device 1054 performs a process of displaying the number of winning balls corresponding to the winning on the winning display LED of the collective display device 1035 when there is a winning at the winning opening.

More specifically, when the game control device 1054 has won a winning opening, the game control device 1054 determines the number of winning balls corresponding to the winning, and adds a winning ball number command for adding the number of winning balls to the number of held balls. Processing to transmit to 1230 is performed. The winning awards are all winning awards with winning ball discharge (actually paying out balls or adding to the number of balls in the case of an enclosed ball type). There are a first big prize opening 1027a of the first variable prize winning device 1027, a second big prize winning opening 1034a of the second variable prize winning device 1034, and general prize winning holes 1028 to 1031.
In the game control device 1054, the number of winning balls associated with winning is set as follows.
・ First big prize opening 1027a = 13 ・ Second big prize opening 1034a = 10 ・ Starting prize opening 1025 = 3 ・ Starting prize opening 1026 (general power) = 1 piece ・ General winning prize openings 1028 to 1031 = 10 pieces

The magnet sensor 1142 is a sensor that detects that a magnet has approached the pachinko machine 1001 and detects fraud by the magnet. The radio wave sensor (board) 1143 is a sensor that detects transmission of radio waves particularly related to the game board 1020, and for example, detects radio waves transmitted to the pachinko machine 1001 using a radio wave oscillator or the like. It is. The vibration sensor 1144 is a sensor that detects that vibration has been applied to the pachinko machine 1001, and is particularly for detecting unauthorized vibration such as shaking the table (or hitting it abnormally).
The game control device 1054 determines fraud based on detection signals from the magnet sensor 1142, the radio wave sensor 1143, and the vibration sensor 1144, and transmits a fraud occurrence command or the like to the effect control device 1053 when it is determined to be fraudulent. Then, processing such as causing the display device 1041 to display an error under the control of the effect control device 1053 is performed. Further, the game control device 1054 transmits the unauthorized information to the payout control device 1230, and the payout control device 1230 transmits the incorrect information to the hall computer 1086 via the card unit 1015.

Next, the game control device 1054 includes a production control device 1053, a general electric solenoid 1131, a first grand prize opening solenoid (a big prize opening 1SOL in FIG. A winning opening solenoid 1133 (a large winning opening 2SOL in FIG. 109) and a collective display device 1035 are connected.
A general electric solenoid 1131 is a solenoid for opening / closing the opening / closing member 1026b of the second start winning prize port 1026, a first big prize winning solenoid 1132 is a solenoid for opening / closing the opening / closing member 1027b of the first variable prize winning device 1027, and a second big prize winning port solenoid 1133. Is a solenoid that opens and closes the opening / closing member 1034b of the second variable winning device 1034. The game control device 1054 outputs necessary control signals to the ordinary electric solenoid 1131, the first big prize opening solenoid 1132, the second big prize opening solenoid 1133, and the collective display device 1035.
Further, the game control device 1054 transmits data (for example, an effect command) to the effect control device 1053 by serial communication.
Further, the game control device 1054 sends data to the payout control device 1230 sequentially via the main connection board 1075 and the payout connection board 1076 (for example, commands necessary for managing encapsulated balls (eg prize ball number commands)). Etc.) is transmitted.
The main connection board 1075 is a board connected to the game control device 1054 on the board side (game board 1020 side), and is constituted by a drawer connector. The payout connection board 1076 is a board connected to the payout control device 1230 on the frame side (machine frame 1002 side), and is constituted by a drawer connector. The main connection board 1075 and the payout connection board 1076 are paired with a concave drawer connector and a convex drawer connector, and these drawer connectors can move to some extent in the surface direction of the boards 1075 and 1076. Therefore, the positional deviation at the time of the connection work and the positional deviation after the connection work are absorbed, the connection work can be easily performed, and the connection state is maintained well after the connection (detailed structure will be described later).

(Discharge control device related)
Next, a configuration of the payout control device 1230 and devices connected to the payout control device 1230 will be described.
The payout control device 1230 manages the number of encapsulated balls and the number of balls held (payout control board), and includes a CPU 1231, a ROM 1232, a RAM 1233, a test firing test terminal 1234 for an inspection device, an inspection device connection terminal 1235, A launch control circuit 1236, an error release switch (error release SW) 1068, an error display LED 1067, a RAM clear switch 1182, and a ball removal switch 1183 are provided.
The payout control device 1230 performs control for paying out a prize ball in accordance with a signal (payout control command) from the game control device 1054 (the payout of the prize ball is added to the number of balls held). On the other hand, from the payout control device 1230, the frame opening information (information indicating whether or not the opening of the front frame 1004 is detected by the night monitoring switch 1126) and the game control device monitoring information (the night monitoring switch 1126 are used for the main board (game control device). Information indicating whether or not removal of 1054) is detected) to the card unit 1015 (details will be described later).
The payout control device 1230 comprises a control device, an enclosing ball control means, a counting means, a counting operation control means, an input period limiting means, a game value storage means, a game value display control means, a polishing control means, a clear control means, and a display control means. To do.

The CPU 1231 executes a predetermined program to perform necessary arithmetic processing for enclosing ball control, game ball payout (prize ball payout or ball payout), management of the number of balls, frame opening information, and game control device monitoring information. . The ROM 1232 stores the program, and the RAM 1233 is used as a work area (work area) when executing processing based on the program.
Here, the RAM 1233 constitutes a game value storage means and stores the number of possessed balls as the game value. Specifically, the RAM 1233 stores a change in the game value of the player, and subtracts the fired ball to win the prize ball. By repeating the addition of the number, the player's number of balls will be updated and stored in real time. Since the subtraction of the fired ball and the addition of the number of prize balls are performed by processing based on the program, the RAM 1233 (game value storage means) stores real-time changes in the number of balls held.
The RAM 1233 is provided with backup power supply means (not shown, for example, comprising a large-capacitance capacitor) that supplies power even in the event of a power failure. If the power is restored from the power failure within a period during which the power can be continuously supplied, the data in the RAM 233 is retained. Note that a nonvolatile memory may be used as the RAM 1233 instead of the backup power supply means.

In addition, the payout control device 1230 performs processing from launching and collection of the encapsulated ball mainly as control necessary for the encapsulated ball game, and the number of balls held according to the award ball number command from the game control device 1054 In addition, in the fifteenth embodiment, the ball lending control (ball lending addition processing), the number of balls possessed, and the like are performed.
Further, when the payout control device 1230 receives a prize at the winning opening, a prize ball number command corresponding to the prize is sent from the game control device 1054, so that a prize corresponding to the winning is based on the prize ball number command. The process of adding the number of balls to the number of balls held is performed (as described above). For example, when there is a continuous change in the number of balls held (game value) by the player, the number of balls held in the RAM 1233 (game value storage means) The memory of the number is immediately updated. However, when the number-of-balls display 1040 (game value display means) displays the number of balls of the player, the number of balls is updated for a predetermined period (for example, 0.3 seconds). ) Is controlled at intervals.
Specifically, the RAM 1233 as an internal memory stores changes in the number of balls held by the player, and by subtracting the fired balls and adding the number of prize balls, the number of balls held by the player is determined. It will be updated and memorized in real time. On the other hand, the payout control device 1230 subtracts the number of balls fired from the number of balls held and adds the number of prize balls by processing based on the game program, so that the RAM 1233 stores real-time changes in the number of balls held. Go. On the other hand, the payout control device 1230 updates the number of balls in the case where the number-of-balls display 1040 displays the number of balls of the player, and the RAM 1233 updates and stores the number of balls in real time. Unlike the above, control is performed so that the updated number of balls is displayed at intervals of a predetermined period (for example, 0.3 seconds).
The test firing test terminal 1234 is a terminal to which a cable for transmitting various kinds of information in the enclosed ball control and game ball payout control obtained from the CPU 1231 to the inspection device is connected. Note that the test firing test terminal 1234 and related parts are used in the test institution and are removed at the time of shipment, and are not mounted on the payout control device 1230 used in the game hall.
The inspection apparatus connection terminal 1235 is a terminal to which a cable for the authorities to inspect the pachinko machine 1 is connected after the pachinko machine 1001 is installed in the game hall.

  The firing control circuit 1236 is built in the payout control device 1230, and receives a necessary power supply from the payout control device 1230 and also receives a fire permission signal. On condition that the firing control circuit 1236 has received the ON data of the firing permission signal, the game ball at the firing position is selected according to the operation of the firing volume 1171 (FIG. 105) (that is, the rotational operation of the firing operation handle 1011). A firing solenoid 1173 that fires is controlled. Further, signals from the touch sensor 1174 and the firing stop switch 1175 are input to the payout control device 1230. The touch sensor 1174 detects whether or not the player has touched the firing operation handle 1011 for operating the firing volume 1171. The firing stop switch 1175 temporarily stops the launch of the game ball. It is operated by a player.

Note that the ball feed solenoid 1172 that sends the game ball to the launch position is directly controlled by the payout control device 1230. For the control process, a signal from the touch sensor 1174 is input to the payout control device 1230.
An apparatus that includes the above-described launch solenoid 1173 and launches a game ball at a launch position (not shown) into a game area is referred to as a launch device 1037 (FIG. 108). This launching device 1037 is controlled by a payout control device 1230 including a firing control circuit 1236, and a state where launching of a game ball is permitted by a control process of these control devices (a state where on data of a launch permission signal is set) ) Can only launch game balls. In the state where the launch of the game ball is prohibited (the state where the off data of the launch permission signal is set), even if there is a game ball at the launch position and the player operates the launch operation handle 1011, the game ball is launched. Not. In addition, the launching device 1037 has a member called a kite for hitting a game ball to launch, and the tip of the kite (tip) has a launch position.
Note that the number of game balls fired by the operation of the firing operation handle 1011 is defined as 100 shots per minute according to a predetermined rule, so the payout control device 1230 and the launch control circuit 1236 control the ball feed solenoid 1172. , Within a range of 100 shots / minute (approximately one shot in 0.6 seconds (s)).

The error cancel switch (error cancel SW) 1068 outputs a signal for canceling the error when operated when there is an error in the payout control process and the process is stopped.
When there is an error in the payout control process, the error display LED 1067 lights a specific number according to the content of the error.
The RAM clear switch 1182 initializes the RAM 1113 in the game control device 1054, the RAM 1233 of the payout control device 1230, and the like.
The ball removal switch 1183 is a switch operated when the ball enclosed in the pachinko machine 1001 is extracted to the outside. When the ball removal switch 1183 is turned on, both the upper switching solenoid 1336S and the ball removal solenoid 1344S are turned on, and as shown in FIG. 108, the upper switching valve 1336 opens the upper portion of the bypass passage 1304 and the ball in the upper passage 1303. Is introduced into the bypass passage 1304, and the ball removal valve 1344 opens the upper portion of the ball removal passage 1305 to cause the ball in the bypass passage 1304 to flow into the ball removal passage 1305. 1345 will be collected.

Next, the payout control device 1230 is connected to the number-of-balls display 1040, the count switch 1311, and the count-ball display 1313 in relation to the devices arranged on the lower panel 1006. The operation display device 1007 is directly connected to the card unit 1015 through a harness and is managed and controlled by the card unit 1015. Therefore, the operation display device 1007 is not under the control of the payout control device 1230. Further, the break switch and the counting ball use switch are not disposed on the lower panel 1006 but are disposed on the operation display device 1007.
A detection signal from the counting switch 1311 is input to the payout control device 1230, and necessary control signals are output to the holding ball number display 1040 and the counting ball display 1313, and an LED built in the counting switch 1311 is provided. Necessary control signals are also output.
For example, in order to display the number of balls held, the driving signal capable of driving the six LEDs of the seven segments of the number of balls holding display 1040 is output to the ball holding number display 1040. When there is a counting ball, the counting ball display 1313 is configured to output a signal for lighting it. Further, for the LED built in the counting switch 1311, when a condition for lighting the LED is satisfied, a drive signal capable of lighting the LED is output.

Here, the concepts such as the number of possessed balls and the number of counted balls are organized and described as follows.
・ Number of balls: Number of balls that can be fired ・ Number of balls to be counted: Number of stored balls moved from the number of balls held (stored balls that cannot be temporarily fired)
Specifically, the number of balls possessed is the number of balls that the player has acquired and can be fired. In the example of a gaming machine using real balls, the ball that can be fired on the upper plate or the lower plate It corresponds to a number of images, and it is a ball that has not moved to the ball box.
On the other hand, the number of counted balls is the number of stored balls moved by counting from the number of balls held by the player. In the example of a gaming machine using real balls, It corresponds to the image of the number of balls moved out of the ball box, and it is the ball in the ball box. By operating the counting switch 1311, the number of balls can be moved to the number of counting balls.
Total number of balls: The total number of balls held by the player, which is represented by the number of balls held + the number of balls counted = the total number of balls held.
・ Number of updated balls: Changed number of balls from previous number of balls ・ Number of updated balls: Number of changed balls from previous number of counted balls ・ Use of counting balls: Move the ball from the number of counting balls to the number of balls In detail, “Using counting balls” is an example of a game machine that uses real balls. In the example of a game machine that uses real balls, the balls (counting balls) that have moved from the upper plate or lower plate to the ball box are moved again to the upper plate. This corresponds to the concept of moving (back) and using. In order to use the counting ball, a counting ball use switch disposed on the operation display device 1007 may be operated, and a predetermined amount (for example, 100) of balls from the counting ball number can be held by one operation. To move to.
・ Number of stored balls: Number of balls that can be replayed after the game on the gaming machine has been completed and the player has stored the total number of balls stored on the membership card. It is possible to play again using the or to exchange prizes. If you move the table, you will play again using the current day's storage, but if you are a guest member, you will not be able to store the ball but simply use the stored ball data recorded on the game card to replay it on another table. Will play.
In the case of payment, the total number of balls is written in the game card. At this time, the total number of balls held is sent to the card unit 1015, and the card unit 1015 performs a settlement process.

In the fifteenth embodiment, the number of held balls and the number of counted balls are configured to be managed by the payout control device 1230, and these data are stored and held in a predetermined storage area of the RAM 1233 of the payout control device 1230.
The data on the number of possessed balls and the number of counted balls is also sent to the card unit 1015 and can be displayed on the message / operation area (not shown) of the operation display device 1007 under the control of the card unit 1015. It is configured. However, the number of held balls and the number of counted balls are displayed on the operation display device 1007. However, the increase / decrease of the number of held balls and the management of the number of counted balls stored by counting from the number of held balls are only used for the payout control device 1230. Has come to control. The card unit 1015 periodically receives data from the payout control device 1230, and displays details of the number of balls held and the number of counted balls on the operation display device 1007 based on the received data.
Further, the data on the number of balls held and the number of balls counted are also sent from the payout control device 1230 to the effect control device 1053 via the game control device 1054, and the upper part of the decorative ball display device 1250 is controlled by the effect control device 1053. The decoration of the number of balls held or the number of counted balls is performed using a number of LEDs of the decorative ball display device 1250a and the lower decorative ball display device 1250b. Furthermore, the number of counted balls can be displayed on the sub liquid crystal display device 1033 by the control of the effect control device 1053, and the number of counted balls can be analogly displayed on the level meter right 17R. .

Specifically, the number of balls held and the number of counting balls are displayed by the following devices.
-Number of balls held display 1040: The number of balls held is displayed digitally (managed by the payout controller 1230)
Counting ball display 1313: Displays the presence or absence of a counting ball (lights up when there is a counting ball) (managed by the payout control device 1230)
-Decoration ball display device 1250: Analog decoration display of the number of balls held and the number of counting balls by a large number of LEDs (managed by the production control device 1053)
Sub liquid crystal display device 1033: When there are counting balls, the number of counting balls is displayed digitally (managed by the effect control device 1053)
Level meter right 1017R: When there is a counting ball, the counting ball number is displayed in analog (managed by the effect control device 1053)
Operation display device 1007: Displays details of the number of balls held and the number of counted balls in digital or analog (managed by the card unit 1015)

Here, in the fifteenth embodiment, the number of balls held display 1040 is displayed as described below under the control of the payout control device 1230.
That is, the number-of-balls display 1040 can display 6-digit numbers (number of balls) by arranging six 7-segment LEDs and displays the number of balls acquired by the player. (Details will be described later in the flowchart and explanation of operation).
When the number of balls held is 0 before the game (before the game card or cash is inserted), the ball number display 1040 is turned off.
Further, when the number of balls possessed during the game is generated, the number of balls possessed is digitally lit and displayed.
The display data of the number-of-balls display 1040 is backed up by the RAM 1233 of the payout control device 1230 even during a power failure.
When the player starts the checkout (touching the return button 304 of the operation display device 1007 for the end of the game), the checkout process is started and the process of recording the total number of balls in the game card is started. The display on the ball number display 1040 moves and blinks. When the recording to the game card (writing of the total number of balls) is completed, the display of the number of balls held display 1040 blinks at the same time, and when the game card is ejected from the card unit 1015, a predetermined time has passed after that. Thus, the number-of-balls display 1040 goes off.

On the other hand, in the event of a power failure while writing the total number of balls to the game card, the display data on the number-of-balls display 1040 is backed up by the RAM 1233 of the payout controller 1230 even during a power failure, and is backed up when the power is restored from the power failure. Based on the data that has been recorded, the display on the number-of-balls display 1040 moves and blinks to inform the player that the game card is being written. When the writing to the game card is completed, the display on the number-of-balls display 1040 blinks simultaneously, and the game card is discharged.
In addition, when the power failure occurs when the total number of balls to be written on the game card is completed and the number-of-balls display 1040 is flashing simultaneously, the recording on the game card has already been completed. Even after recovery from a power failure, the number of balls held display 1040 is not displayed and the number of balls held display 1040 is turned off.

In the fifteenth embodiment, the display device 1041 and the sub liquid crystal display device 1033 are rendered as described below under the control of the performance control device 1053.
In other words, during the normal game, the display device 1041 produces a decoration special-figure display game, and the sub liquid crystal display device 1033 displays an auxiliary effect (model name, number of hold display, etc.).
In the event of a power failure during the game, the number-of-balls data, counting ball data, etc. are backed up by the RAM 1233 of the payout controller 1230 even during the power outage, and the effect data by the display device 1041 is also backed up by the RAM 1233. ing. In the process of recovering from the power failure, an effect “currently recovering from power failure” is displayed on the display device 1041 and the sub liquid crystal display device 1033 displays a counting ball at the time of power failure recovery (if there is no counting ball) Counting ball number “0” is displayed). Thereafter, when the power failure recovery is completed, both the display device 1041 and the sub liquid crystal display device 1033 return to the gaming state before the power failure based on the backup data.

The payout control device 1230 is connected to the card unit 1015 via the card unit connection terminal plate 1052 so that bidirectional information can be transmitted to the card unit 1015. Accordingly, the card unit connection terminal plate 1052 is mainly used for input / output of information, signals, and the like between the card unit 1015 and the payout control device 1230 on the pachinko machine 1001 side.
Then, the payout control device 1230 displays the number of balls held on the ball number display 1040, or counts the number of balls held by the operation of the counting switch 1311 and transfers it to the number of counted balls (concept of moving to a so-called ball box). It is possible to do. Further, when the number of balls held is counted and moved to the number of counted balls, the payout control device 1230 performs control to turn on the counting ball display 1313 by determining that the number of counted balls is present.
Here, the control concept of “counting the number of balls and transferring them to the ball box of the number of balls” is an example of a game machine that pays out with real balls. This is the same as the work of physically transferring to an external ball box (details will be described later).
In addition, when the counting ball use switch arranged on the screen of the operation display device 1007 is operated, the payout control device 1230 can perform the operation based on the counting ball use command from the card unit 1015 by one operation. Control is also performed to move a predetermined amount (for example, 100 balls) of balls.
On the other hand, the payout control device 1230 transmits data on the number of balls held and the number of counted balls to the effect control device 1053 via the game control device 1054, and the effect control device 1053 controls the lighting / flashing of the decorative ball display device 1250. The sub-liquid crystal display device 1033 is configured to perform display control of the number of counting spheres and analog display control of the number of counting spheres at the level meter right 1017R.

Here, the transmission of information will be described. As described above, the payout control device 1230 is connected to the card unit 1015 via the card unit connection terminal plate 1052, and is enclosed from the payout control device 1230 to the card unit 1015. Various information in the ball game (for example, various information including the number of possessed balls and the number of counted balls) is sent at predetermined intervals (for example, 200 ms). The number of balls held and the number of counting balls are configured to transmit the change, and measures against data loss are also taken.
The card unit 1015 manages the control of the operation display device 1007 based on various information from the payout control device 1230, and the number of players' balls (game value) and counting balls are stored in the message / operation area (not shown). Or display numbers.
In the fifteenth embodiment, as described above, various game information from the game control device 1054 to the card unit 1015 from the payout control device 1230 and various information in the enclosed ball game (various information including the number of balls held and the number of counted balls). Are transmitted at predetermined intervals (for example, 200 ms). Specifically, there is a request from the card unit 1015 at predetermined intervals (for example, 200 ms), and the payout control device 1230 transmits necessary information as a response.
Further, the various types of information may be transmitted from the game control device 1054 to the card unit 1015 instead of from the payout control device 1230.

Further, as described above, the payout control device 1230 is connected to the card unit 1015 via the card unit connection terminal plate 1052, and can transmit bidirectional information to and from the card unit 1015. Apart from the various information in the enclosed ball game described above via the route, the payout control device 1230 can transmit game information to the card unit 1015.
In addition to the hall computer 1086, the card unit 1015 is connected to the card management device 1081, the ball holding management device 85, the card issuing machine 82, the card settlement machine 83, and the gift exchange 84 shown in FIG. Is also connected to the external management device 91. In FIG. 109, the ball management device 85, the card issuing machine 82, the card settlement machine 83, the gift exchange machine 84, and the external management apparatus 91 are not shown, so they are described as “card management apparatus 1081 and others”. Accordingly, the card unit connection terminal board 1052 is also used to transmit game information from the payout control device 1230 on the pachinko machine 1001 side to the hall computer 1086, the card management device 1081, etc. via the card unit 1015.
Therefore, specifically, from the payout control device 1230 via the card unit connection terminal board 1052, via the card unit 1015 to the hall computer 1086, various game information from the game control device 1054 and control of the enclosed ball and game ball Various information in the payout control is output. The game information includes, for example, a signal that informs the signal input to the game control device 1054 to the outside, a jackpot signal that informs the jackpot that occurs in the course of the game, and a winning at the starting point that is a condition for changing the symbol Start signal to notify, symbol change start signal to trigger symbol variation start or symbol variation stop signal to trigger symbol variation, indicating that the game state is advantageous to the player (so-called probability variation state, time-short state) There are privilege status signals.
Further, the payout control device 1230 outputs information on the number of balls (game value information) and the like to the card unit 1015 via the card unit connection terminal board 1052, and the card unit 1015 and the card management device 1081 and the hall computer 1086. Information on the number of balls held (game value information) is output.
As for the card unit 1015, as described with reference to FIG. 7B of the first embodiment, the presentation assistance information such as the character introduction stored in the image input personal computer is transmitted to the card unit 15, and the character introduction etc. When the production assistance information is read and the switching button 307 is operated (touched), production assistance information such as character introduction is transmitted from the card unit 15 to the operation display device 7 and displayed on the operation display device 7 is the same. Therefore, duplicate explanation is omitted.

Next, as signals from various switches necessary for encapsulated sphere control and the like, the payout control device 1230 includes a launch sphere detection switch 1160, an out sphere detection switch 1161, a first safe sphere detection switch (safe sphere detection in FIG. 109). 1SW) 1162, a second safe sphere detection switch (safe sphere detection 2SW in FIG. 109) 1163, a first enclosed sphere detection switch 1164 (enclosed sphere detection 1SW in FIG. 109), and a second enclosed sphere detection switch 1165 (in FIG. 109). A detection signal from the enclosed sphere detection 2SW) is input. Note that there is no foul ball detection switch.
A launch ball detection switch 1160 is a sensor that detects each of the balls that are launched into the game area 1022 by operating a launch volume 1171 (details will be described later). The out-ball detection switch 1161 detects an out-ball (out) that does not win any winning opening as a result of the game in the game area 1022.
As a result of the game in the game area 1022, the collected balls include both out balls and safe balls.
As described above, the first enclosed sphere detection switch 1164 and the second enclosed sphere detection switch 1165 are arranged in the upper passage 1303 (see FIG. 108), and are for checking the number of enclosed spheres.
The payout control device 1230 receives detection signals from the switches 1160 to 1165 and performs processing such as monitoring of the behavior of the sphere from launching to collection of the encapsulated sphere and checking the maximum and minimum encapsulated sphere numbers. At the same time, control is performed such as processing to add to the number of balls held based on the ball lending information (ball lending number command) sent from the card unit 1015. There is no monitoring of foul balls.

Furthermore, a glass frame opening switch (glass frame opening SW in FIG. 109) 1125, a night monitoring switch 1126 (night monitoring SW in FIG. 109), and a radio wave sensor (frame) 1127 are connected to the payout control device 1230.
The glass frame opening switch 1125 is a sensor that detects that the glass frame 1005 is opened.
The night monitoring switch 1126 monitors opening of the front frame 1004 and monitoring removal of the game control device 1054. Further, the night monitoring switch 1126 is configured to hold the information that the opening of the front frame 1004 is detected even when the power of the pachinko machine 1001 is cut off, and at night when requested by the payout controller 1230 when the main power is on. This is a configuration for outputting monitoring information (game control device monitoring information) to the outside, and a detailed configuration will be described later with reference to FIG.
Note that the night monitoring switch 1126 may detect that the glass frame 1005 has been opened, in addition to detecting that the front frame 1004 has been opened or removal of the game control device 1054. In this way, it is possible to cope with fraud by opening the glass frame while omitting the glass frame opening switch 1125 and reducing the cost.
Here, the night monitoring switch 1126 constitutes a front frame opening detection means and a main board monitoring means.
The radio wave sensor (frame) 1127 is a sensor that detects transmission of radio waves particularly on the frame side of the pachinko machine 1001, for example, a sensor that detects unauthorized radio waves to the payout control device 1230 and various sensors installed in the frame. is there. The radio wave sensor (frame) 1127 may detect other unauthorized radio waves.

Next, in relation to the circulation / polishing of the enclosed sphere and the ball removal control, the payout control device 1230 has a ball removal solenoid 1344S, an electromagnet 1341, a small ball sensor 1342, an upper switching solenoid 1336S, a lower switching solenoid 1310S, and a polishing inlet switch 1321. The polishing apparatus 1306, the feed inlet switch 1332, the feed apparatus 1302, and the feed outlet switch 1334 are connected.
The ball removal solenoid 1344S drives the valve body of the ball removal valve 1344 to open and close the ball removal passage 1305. The electromagnet 1341 is used when detecting that the sphere flowing through the upper passage 1303 is a magnetic body. If the sphere is a magnetic body, the electromagnet 1341 is attracted when the electromagnet 1341 is turned on.
The small ball sensor 1342 is for determining whether or not the size of the game ball flowing through the upper passage 1303 is smaller than a normal one, and detects a normal ball (for example, a diameter = 11 mm). Smaller spheres (for example, diameter = 10.5 mm or less) are not detected.
The upper switching solenoid 1336S drives the valve body of the upper switching valve 1336 to open and close the bypass passage 1304. The lower switching solenoid 1310S drives the valve body of the lower switching valve 1310 to perform the opening / closing operation of the polishing inlet passage 1319 (that is, the switching operation of allowing the sphere to flow into the polishing apparatus 1306 or not).
The polishing inlet switch 1321 detects a sphere flowing into the polishing apparatus 1306. The polishing apparatus 1306 polishes the encapsulated sphere, and the detailed configuration is as described with reference to FIG. The lift inlet switch 1332 detects a sphere flowing into the lift device 1302. The feeding device 1302 feeds the ball in the lower passage 1301 upward and discharges it to the upper passage 1303 via the feeding outlet switch 1334. The feed outlet switch 1334 is disposed on the outlet side of the feed device 1302 and detects a ball discharged from the feed device 1302.

(Production control device related)
Next, the configuration of the effect control device 1053 and devices connected to the effect control device 1053 will be described.
The effect control device 1053 performs image processing for video display on the main control microcomputer, a video control microcomputer that performs video control exclusively under the control of the main control microcomputer, and the display device 1041 and the sub liquid crystal display device 1033. It has a VDP as a graphic processor, a sound source LSI that controls the output of various melody and sound effects, etc., but its detailed configuration is omitted.

For the control on the board side (game board 1020 side), the production control device 1053 analyzes the control command from the CPU 1111 of the game control device 1054, determines the production content, and controls the content of the output video of the display device 1041. The sub liquid crystal display device 1033 (denoted as the sub display device in FIG. 109) controls the display of the number of counting spheres and the effect display when there are no counting spheres. (Board) Processing such as drive control of 1144 is executed, and the rendering operation of the rendering accessory device 1036 is controlled.
On the other hand, the production control device 1053 controls the frame side (the front frame 1004 and the like) via the production connector board (panel) 1077 and the production connection board (frame) 1078 having a drawer connector structure, as will be described later. Etc.
In other words, the production connection board (board) 1077 is a board connected to the board side (game board 1020 side) production control device 1053, and is constituted by a drawer connector. Further, the effect connection board (frame) 1078 is a board connected to various devices on the frame side (side of the front frame 1004 and the like), and is constituted by a drawer connector. The effect connection board (board) 1077 and the effect connection board (frame) 1078 are paired with a concave drawer connector and a convex drawer connector, and these drawer connectors are in the surface direction of at least one of the boards 1077 or 1078. Therefore, the position shift at the time of the connection work and the position shift after the connection work are absorbed, the connection work can be easily performed, and the connection state is maintained well after the connection. (Detailed structure will be described later).

The various devices connected to the effect connection board (frame) 1078 will be described. The effect connection board (frame) 1078 includes an effect operation switch 1009, speakers 1010, 1016a, and 1016b, decoration display LEDs (frames) 1141, and a decoration ball display device. 1250, level meter left 1017L, and level meter right 1017R are connected.
The effect control device 1053 analyzes the control command from the CPU 1111 of the game control device 1054, determines the contents of the effect, instructs the sound source LSI to play the reproduced sound, and produces the effect connection board (board) 1077 and the effect connection board (frame). ) The lower speaker 1010 and the upper speakers 1016a and 1016b are driven via 1078 to produce sound effects, and the above-described decoration display LED (frame) 1141 drive control and level meter left 1017L and level meter right 1017R drive control. In addition to performing such processing, the content of the effect is determined according to the signal from the effect operation switch 1009 to control the effect.
In this case, the effect control apparatus 1053 causes the level meter left 1017L and the level meter right 1017R to perform an effect indicating the big hit reliability by moving the display units 1017a and 1017b up and down as a reliability meter related to the big hit at normal times. When there is a counting ball, the display unit 1017b is moved up and down as a counting display device, and control is performed to produce an effect of displaying the approximate number of counting balls in analog. On the other hand, when the operation of the pachinko machine 1001 is stopped due to a power failure, the effect control device 1053 is configured to stop the display unit 1017b at the position of the number of counting balls at the time of the power failure and stay at that position. Control is performed to notify the player that the approximate game ball acquired by the stop position of the unit 1017b is held.
Further, the production control device 1053 is configured to transmit the number of balls held and the number of counted balls from the payout control device 1230 via the game control device 1054, and the production control device 1053 is a production connection board ( Board) 1077 and the production decoration board (frame) 1078, the upper decorative ball display device 1250a and the lower decorative ball according to the increase or decrease of the number of balls or the number of counting balls with respect to the decorative ball display device 1250 Lighting / flashing control of a large number of LEDs in the display device 1250b is performed.

(Power supply)
Next, the configuration of the power supply device 1058 will be described.
The power supply device 1058 generates DC voltage such as DC32V, DC12V, and DC5V from the AC power supply, and supplies necessary power to the game control device 1054, the effect control device 1053, the payout control device 1230, and each electronic component shown in FIG. , A power switch 1181 is provided.
Here, as described above, the power supplied from the power supply device 1058 in the pachinko machine 1001 at the normal time (when power is supplied to the pachinko machine 1001) is referred to as a main power supply, and the main power supply includes the game control device 1054. It indicates the power supplied to each device, electronic device, sensor, etc. of the machine 1001.
In the fifteenth embodiment, each control device 1054, 1230, etc. has a backup power supply, and details will be described later with reference to FIG.
The power switch 1181 turns on / off the AC power supplied to the power supply device 1058 and is used to start and stop the power supply device 1058.

Next, block configurations of the polishing apparatus 1306 and the feeding apparatus 1302 will be described with reference to FIG.
110A shows a block configuration of the polishing apparatus 1306. In the figure, the polishing apparatus 1306 includes a polishing motor 1312, a polishing motor switch 1322, a polishing cloth motor 1323, and a polishing cloth unit switch 1324. FIG. The polishing motor 1312 drives the conveying screw 1320 based on a control signal from the payout control device 1230 to convey the sphere flowing in from the polishing inlet passage 1319 of the polishing device 1306, while the polishing member 1314 disposed inside (for example, Polish the sphere with a polishing cloth.
The polishing motor switch 1322 monitors the operation of the polishing motor 1312 and outputs the monitoring result to the dispensing control device 1230. The polishing cloth motor 1323 moves (winds up) the polishing member 1314 (for example, polishing cloth) based on a control signal from the dispensing control device 1230. The polishing pad unit switch 1324 monitors the attachment of the polishing pad unit and outputs the monitoring result to the payout control device 1230.

  FIG. 110B is a diagram showing a block configuration of the feeding device 1302, in which the feeding device 1302 includes a feeding motor 1333 and a feeding motor switch 1335. The feed motor 1333 feeds the encapsulated ball flowing in from the lower passage 1301 to the upper upper passage 1303 based on a control signal from the dispensing control device 1230. The feed motor switch 1335 monitors the operation of the feed motor 1333 and outputs the monitoring result to the payout control device 1230.

Next, the detailed configuration of the night monitoring switch 1126 (indicated as night monitoring SW in FIG. 111) will be described with reference to FIG.
As shown in FIG. 111, the nighttime monitoring switch 1126 includes a backup power source 1351, a frame opening detection unit 1352, a disconnection detection unit 1353, a frame opening number storage unit 1354, a disconnection number storage unit 1355, and an output unit 1356.
Main power to the night monitoring switch 1126 is supplied from the dispensing control device 1230, and the night monitoring switch 1126 is normally operated by the main power. On the other hand, the night monitoring switch 1126 is provided with a backup power supply 1351 and operates when the main power supply is cut off. As the backup power source 1351, for example, a primary battery is used. The primary battery is a battery (chemical battery) that can only discharge DC power, and is a battery other than the secondary battery. For example, a dry battery is used.
The backup power supply 1351 supplies power to the frame opening detection unit 1352, the disconnection detection unit 1353, the frame opening number storage unit 1354, and the disconnection number storage unit 1355 when the main power is off.
Further, the backup power supply 1351 allows a current to flow through a loop-connected route such as the payout control device 1230 → the game control device 1054 → the payout control device 1230 → the night monitoring switch 1126. When the disconnection is detected by the disconnection detection means 1353, it is possible to detect that the game control device 1054 has been removed.

The monitoring function of the night monitoring switch 1126 is as follows.
(A) Monitoring of opening of front frame 1004 (main body frame) This is realized by the frame opening detection means 1352. That is, the frame opening detection unit 1352 is a sensor that detects the opening of the front frame 1004 and outputs information (frame opening information) indicating whether or not the opening of the front frame 1004 has been detected.
(B) Monitoring of removal of game control device 1054 This is realized by disconnection detecting means 1353. That is, as described above, the disconnection detecting means 1353 is used when the current of the backup power source 1351 flows through a loop-connected route such as the payout control device 1230 → the game control device 1054 → the payout control device 1230 → the night monitoring switch 1126. Detects that the route is not broken and the game control device 1054 is not removed. On the other hand, when the current of the backup power supply 1351 does not flow through this route, it is detected that the game control device 1054 is removed because the route is disconnected.
Note that the disconnection state detected by the disconnection detection means 1353 includes the above-described case where the route is disconnected (when disconnection occurs even when the game control device 1054 is not removed) and when the game control device 1054 is removed. There are two cases in which the route is disconnected, and the disconnection detecting means 1353 can detect both of these two states, but does not distinguish between them. Therefore, the disconnection information detected by the disconnection detection means 1353 includes the removal state of the game control device 1054.
Thus, the disconnection detecting means 1353 detects whether or not the route is disconnected, thereby determining that the game control device 1054 has been disconnected as a disconnection, and monitoring the removal of the game control device 1054. The detection information of the disconnection detecting means 1353 is the game control device monitoring information as described above, and this is information on whether or not the night monitoring switch 1126 has detected the removal of the main board (game control device 1054). The disconnection detecting means 1353 can monitor the removal of the game control device 1054 when the main power is supplied or when the main power is off.
In FIG. 111, “open information” means the frame open information when the main power is on (normal time), and means that the information is stored when the main power is off (night). The information is collectively referred to as “night monitoring information”.

The frame opening number storage unit 1354 stores and holds monitoring information (frame opening information) of the front frame 1005 by the frame opening detection unit 1352. As stored information of the frame opening number storage means 1354, opening information of the front frame 1005 and the number of times the front frame 1005 is opened are stored. In particular, the frame opening number storage means 1354 receives backup power from the backup power supply 1351 when the main power is off, so that the stored information can be held when the main power is off.
Also, the disconnection count storage unit 1355 stores and holds the disconnection information (including the removal state of the game control device 1054) by the disconnection detection unit 1353. As storage information of the disconnection count storage means 1355, disconnection information (including the removal state of the game control device 1054) and disconnection count (including the removal count of the game control device 1054) are stored. In particular, the disconnection count storage means 1355 is supplied with backup power from the backup power supply 1351 when the main power is off, so that the stored information can be held when the main power is off.

The monitoring information (frame opening information) of the front frame 1004 and the removal monitoring information of the game control device 1054 by the disconnection detection means 1353 are not delayed in normal time (when main power is supplied), and each monitoring information is immediately output to the output means 1356. Is output to the payout control device 1230. On the other hand, when the main power is turned off at night or the like, each monitoring information is stored and held by the frame opening number storage means 1354 and the disconnection number storage means 1355, and each monitoring information stored when the main power is turned on such as when a game shop is opened is When there is a request for night monitoring information from the payout control device 1230, the output means 1356 outputs it to the payout control device 1230.
Note that the monitoring information (frame opening information) of the front frame 1004 and the removal monitoring information of the game control device 1054 in the above are detailed. The monitoring information (frame opening information) of the front frame 1004 is the presence / absence of opening of the front frame 1004. The game monitoring device 1054 removal monitoring information is connected in a loop such that the current of the backup power supply 1351 is the payout control device 1230 → the game control device 1054 → the payout control device 1230 → the night monitoring switch 1126. The concept includes the presence / absence of disconnection of the route and the number of disconnections when the route (hereinafter referred to as disconnection monitoring route) is flowing. For convenience of explanation, information including these details is displayed on the front frame 1004. Monitoring information (frame opening information) and removal monitoring information of the game control device 1054.

The output form of each monitoring information is as follows.
While the front frame 1004 is closed, the output of the frame opening detection means 1352 is on. On the other hand, while the front frame 1004 is open, the output of the frame open detection means 1352 is off. For example, “on” means an H level signal, and “off” means an L level signal.
When the disconnection monitoring route is not disconnected (including a state where the game control device 1054 is not removed), the output of the disconnection detecting means 1353 is turned on. On the other hand, when the disconnection monitoring route is disconnected (including the state where the game control device 1054 is removed), the output of the disconnection detecting means 1353 is turned off. For example, “on” means an H level signal, and “off” means an L level signal.
Note that the frame opening detection means 1352 not only detects the opening of the front frame 1004 but also detects the opening of the glass frame 1005, for example, and detects opening information of the glass frame 1005 (information including opening and non-opening). You may make it memorize | store in the frame open frequency memory | storage means 1354. FIG.

The output means 1326 outputs the information monitored by the frame opening detection means 1352 and the disconnection detection means 1353 in the nighttime monitoring switch 1126 to the payout control device 1230 without delay during normal times (when main power is supplied).
On the other hand, the output unit 1326 monitors the frame opening information and disconnection information monitored by the night monitoring switch 1126 at night when the main power of the pachinko machine 1001 is turned off. Only when there is a request for night monitoring information to the switch 1126, the night monitoring information stored in the frame opening number storage means 1354 and the disconnection number storage means 1355 is output to the payout control device 1230 in response to this request. To do.

The payout control device 1230 determines an unauthorized level from the nighttime monitoring information, and outputs the determined unauthorized level to the card unit 1015. Here, the contents of the fraud level are as follows.
Unauthorized level 0: no frame open, no disconnection Frame open means that the front frame 1004 is open, and therefore no frame open means that the front frame 1004 is not open. Also, no disconnection means that the current of the backup power supply 1351 flows through a route (that is, disconnection monitoring route) that is loop-connected such as the payout control device 1230 → the game control device 1054 → the payout control device 1230 → the nighttime monitoring switch 1126. If there is no disconnection of the route, this includes a state where there is no disconnection due to the removal of the game control device 1054 (that is, a state where the game control device 1054 is not removed). The concept of frame opening and disconnection is the same hereinafter.
Unauthorized level 1: Opening the frame once, no disconnection This is a state where the front frame 1004 is opened once and the disconnection monitoring route is not disconnected (including a state where the game control device 1054 is not removed).
・ Unauthorized level 2: Frame open 2 times or more, no disconnection This is a state in which the front frame 1004 is open 2 times or more and the disconnection monitoring route is not disconnected (including a state in which the game control device 1054 is not removed). .
-Unauthorized level 3: One or more disconnections This is a state in which disconnection of the disconnection monitoring route (including the removal state of the game control device 1054) is one or more times.

The output timing of night monitoring information is as follows.
That is, when the main power supply is turned on (on), the payout control device 1230 outputs a night monitoring information request to the night monitoring switch 1126, and receives night monitoring information from the night monitoring switch 1126 in response to this request. The unauthorized level is determined from the received information, the determined unauthorized level is stored in the RAM 1233, and then transmitted to the card unit 15.
On the other hand, when the payout control device 1230 receives the opening information (monitoring information on the front frame 1004: frame opening information) from the nighttime monitoring switch 1126 at the normal time (main power supply), the opening information is stored in the RAM 1233, and then It transmits to the card unit 15.

As described above, since the night monitoring switch 1126 includes the output unit 1326, the night monitoring information stored when the main power supply is turned off after the main power supply is started is stored in the night monitoring information from the payout control device 1230. To the external payout control device 1230 in response to the request, the payout control device 230 receives the night monitoring information at the internal input port and outputs it to the CPU 1231, and the CPU 1231 stores the night monitoring information in the RAM 1233, and then It transmits to the card unit 1015.
The payout control device 1230 determines the fraud level from the nighttime monitoring information and outputs it to the card unit 1015. Instead of the fraud level, the number of times the front frame 1004 is opened and the disconnection monitoring route of the nighttime monitoring information are displayed. The number of disconnections may be output from the payout control device 1230 to the card unit 1015 as it is.
Further, both the unauthorized level and the nighttime monitoring information (the number of times the front frame 1004 is opened and the number of times the disconnection monitoring route is disconnected) may be output from the payout control device 1230 to the card unit 1015.

Next, a configuration related to the matching of the gaming machine ID will be described with reference to FIG.
FIG. 112 is a diagram showing a block configuration in the case of collating game machine IDs. In FIG. 112, (a) to (j) show the flow of checking the gaming machine ID.
In FIG. 112, a CPU 1111, ROM 1112, and RAM 1113 in the game control device 1054 correspond to a game microcomputer as a game processing unit, and are manufactured as an IC for an amusement chip, for example. In addition to a chip code as individual identification information that can individually identify the IC chip, a manufacturer code and a product code are stored, and these codes can be output as a gaming machine ID. In this case, the gaming machine ID stored in the gaming processing unit of the gaming control device 1054 is referred to as a main control ID (or main board ID).
The CPU 1231, ROM 1232, and RAM 1233 in the payout control device 1230 are also equivalent to a gaming microcomputer as a gaming arithmetic processing device, and individual identification information that can individually identify this IC chip is stored. The gaming machine ID stored in the payout control device 1230 is referred to as a payout ID (or payout board ID, payout unique ID).
The contents of the main control ID are composed of a chip code, a manufacturer code, a product code, and the like. Similarly, the contents of the payout ID are composed of a chip code, a manufacturer code, a product code, and the like.

The game control device 1054 transmits a main control ID to the payout control device 1230 when the pachinko machine 1001 is turned on, and the payout control device 1230 transmits its payout ID to the card unit 1015 in addition to the main control ID. The card unit 1015 stores the main control ID and the payout ID sent from the payout control device 1230 and transmits the stored main control ID and the payout ID to the card management device 1081. The card management device 1081 stores the main control ID and the payout ID sent from the card unit 1015, and transmits the stored main control ID and the payout ID to the external management device 1091.
The external management device 1091 is managed by an external third-party organization, and collates the main control ID and the payout ID transmitted to the external management device 1091 with a predetermined collation list (for example, authenticity verification of ID). The verification result (for example, information that the ID verification result is OK) is transmitted to the card management apparatus 1081. It should be noted that main control IDs and payout IDs in a large number of gaming machines (for example, gaming machines installed in gaming stores nationwide) are created in advance as regular information for each gaming machine in a predetermined collation list that the external management device 1091 has. Have been stored. Therefore, in the external management device 1091, the transmitted main control ID and payout ID are collated with a predetermined collation list, so that the transmitted main control ID and payout ID are normal or fake. Can be determined.

When the card management device 1081 receives the verification result of the main control ID and the payout ID from the external management device 1091, the card management device 1081 stores the verification result and transmits the verification result to the card unit 1015. When the card unit 1015 receives the verification result of the main control ID and the payout ID from the card management device 1081, the card unit 1015 stores the verification result and transmits the verification result to the payout control device 1230. When the power of the pachinko machine 1001 is turned on, the payout control device 1230 waits for the result of checking the main control ID and the payout ID via the card unit 1015. If the result of checking the main control ID and the payout ID is normal, The game is allowed to start, but if either the main control ID or the payout ID verification result is a fake, processing such as disallowing the launch of the game ball is performed, or an error notification is given to the card unit 1015. .
Also, the payout control device 1230 transmits the result of checking the main control ID and the payout ID to the game control device 1054. If the match result of the main control ID and the payout ID is a fake (for example, information indicating that the ID check result is NG) from the main control ID and payout ID check result, the game control device 1054 sends the effect control device 1053 A command is sent to display an error on the display device 1041. On the other hand, if the comparison result between the main control ID and the payout ID is normal, the game is started as usual.

Note that the matching of the gaming machine ID (main control ID and payout ID) is not limited to when the pachinko machine 1001 is turned on, but is also performed as described above, for example, when the front frame 1004 is opened or when a big hit occurs.
Further, during the game of the pachinko machine 1001, the external control device 1091 does not collate the main control ID and the payout ID, but for example, the card unit 1015 collates the main control ID and the payout ID. Good.
Further, during the game of the pachinko machine 1001, the main control ID may be collated with a regular one using only the chip code. By doing so, it is possible to quickly and easily check the gaming machine ID during the game so that there is no trouble in the game.

Next, the configuration of encrypted communication and backup power supply between the payout control device 1230 and the game control device 1054 and the card unit 1015 will be described with reference to FIG. The configuration shown in FIG. 113 does not represent all the circuits as shown in FIG. 109 described above, but only the components related to the encrypted communication and the backup power supply.
In FIG. 113, the power supply device 1058 includes a main power generation circuit 1361, a power failure monitoring circuit 1362, and the power switch 1181 described above. The main power supply generation circuit 1361 generates a main power supply. A commercial AC power supply (for example, AC100V) is used as an input power supply, and a DC voltage such as DC32V, DC12V, and DC5V is generated from the input power supply. At the same time, the main power is supplied to the game control device 1054 via the payout control device 1230. On the other hand, a power supply (main power supply here) required for the effect control apparatus 1053 other than the game control apparatus 1054 and each electronic component is supplied from the power supply apparatus 1058. Note that the commercial AC power supply is not limited to AC 100 V, and for example, an AC 24 V may be supplied to each gaming machine in units of islands and the AC 24 V may be used as an input power source.
The power failure monitoring circuit 1362 monitors whether or not a commercial AC power supply (for example, AC 100 V) has dropped below a predetermined voltage. Output to. The power switch 1181 is as described above.

The payout control device 1230 includes a backup power source 1241 and a RAM clear switch 1182. The backup power source 1241 is configured by a large-capacity capacitor such as an electrolytic capacitor. The backup power supply 1241 is supplied to the RAM 11233 of the payout control device 1230 so that the data stored in the RAM 1233 is retained even during a power failure or after the power is shut off. In the payout control device 1230, for example, a nonvolatile memory may be used as the RAM 1233 instead of the backup power supply 1241.
In the payout control device 1230, when the RAM clear switch 1182 is turned on (in the actual operation, the power switch 1181 is turned on while pressing the RAM clear switch 1182), the RAM 1233 in the payout control device 1230 and the like are initialized. The RAM clear signal is output to the game control device 1054.
The payout control device 1230 is supplied with main power from the power supply device 1058. This main power supply is used for each circuit portion of the payout control device 1230 and also supplied to the game control device 1054.
Furthermore, when a power failure detection signal is input from the power supply device 1058, the payout control device 1230 determines that a power failure has occurred and performs processing necessary for the power failure (for example, data storage). Also, the payout control device 1230 outputs the input power failure monitoring signal to the game control device 1054.

In addition, the payout control device 1230 outputs a game stop signal to the game control device 1054, which is output when there is a communication error with the game control device 1054 or with the card unit 1015. is there. The communication abnormality is, for example, a case where communication between the payout control device 1230 and the game control device 1054 is disconnected. When the game control device 1054 receives an input of a game stop signal from the payout control device 1230, the game control device 1054 performs a process of stopping the game. On the other hand, when the communication is restored, the payout control device 1230 recovers data that could not be communicated by the recovery process.
The payout control device 1230 is supplied with disconnection monitoring power from the backup power supply 1351 of the night monitoring switch 1126, and this disconnection monitoring power is supplied to the game control device 1054 via the payout control device 1230. . Then, a route in which the current from the disconnection monitoring power source supplied from the backup power source 1351 is connected in a loop such as the payout control device 1230 → the game control device 1054 → the payout control device 1230 → the night monitoring switch 1126 (that is, the disconnection monitoring route) If the route is flowing, it is determined that there is no disconnection of the route, the night monitoring switch 1126 does not count the number of disconnections (including the removal of the game control device 1054), and the disconnection count storage means 1355 stores the number of disconnections. Not done.
On the other hand, when the current from the disconnection monitoring power source supplied from the backup power source 1351 does not flow through the disconnection monitoring route, it is determined that the route is disconnected, and the night monitoring switch 1126 disconnects (removes the game control device 1054). The number of disconnections is stored by the disconnection count storage means 1355.

The game control device 1054 includes a backup power source 1116, and the backup power source 1116 is configured by a large-capacity capacitor such as an electrolytic capacitor. The backup power source 1116 is supplied to the RAM 1113 of the game control device 1054, and the data stored in the RAM 1133 is held even during a power failure or after the power is shut off. The backup power supply may be mounted on another board (backup power supply board) separated from the game control apparatus 1054 and connected to the game control apparatus 1054. In this case, it is desirable that the game control device 1054 and the backup power supply board are housed in the same case.
When the RAM clear signal is input from the payout control device 1230, the game control device 1054 performs processing for initializing the RAM 1113 and the like.
In addition, when a power failure detection signal is input from the payout control device 1230, the game control device 1054 determines that a power failure has occurred and performs processing necessary for the power failure (for example, data storage).

The card unit 1015 includes a backup power source 1371 and an RTC (real-time clock) 1372, and the backup power source 1371 is constituted by a large-capacity capacitor such as an electrolytic capacitor. The backup power source 1371 is supplied to a RAM or the like inside the card unit 1015, and the data stored in the RAM or the like is held even during a power failure or after the power is shut off.
The RTC 1372 counts real time and provides information such as date and time. The card unit 1015 records real time such as ball lending by a gaming card and storage processing of the number of balls held based on information from the RTC 1372. Process such as.

Next, encrypted communication will be described.
Encrypted communication is performed between the payout control device 1230 and the game control device 1054, and between the payout control device 1230 and the card unit 1015.
Here, in the encrypted communication of the present embodiment, encrypted communication using an encryption key of a common key method (method using the same encryption key at the time of encryption and decryption) is performed. In addition, although the encryption key used at the time of game machine installation is previously provided in each apparatus, what is normally used is obtained from an external management apparatus (for example, external management apparatus 91), and the structure which can be updated.
Bidirectional communication is performed periodically (for example, every 200 ms) between the payout control device 1230 and the card unit 1015 and between the payout control device 1230 and the game control device 1054. The interval for bidirectional communication is not limited to every 200 ms, but may be other time intervals. In the bidirectional communication, each of the devices 1230 and 1054 and the card unit 1015 has a dedicated register for each piece of information.

In the encrypted communication of information transmitted from the game control device 1054 to the payout control device 1230, the following information is transmitted.
Authentication completion information This is information indicating a matching result of the gaming machine ID (main control ID and payout ID). For example, when all the predetermined bits of the authentication completion information are “1”, it is determined that the authentication is complete (verification is OK).
-Game information The game information includes type information and prize ball information. The type information is, for example, 1 byte and includes a data type and a data number. The data type is distinguished from, for example, types such as no information, start opening, big winning opening, winning opening, number of symbol stops, and the like. The data number is a data number designated by, for example, no information and a number from 1 to 15.
The prize ball information is, for example, 1 byte, and is composed of the number of prize balls (no information and prize ball number data of 1 to 15) and the number of winning prizes (including no information).

-Game state information As the game state information, eight registers from the game state information register 0 to the game state information register 7 are prepared. In the gaming state information register 0, jackpot information from jackpot 1 to jackpot 9 is divided and stored in bit units. For example, bit D0 = big hit 1, bit D1 = big hit 2,... Bit D7 = big hit 8 and so on.
Further, the game status information register 1 stores the game status information such as big hit + short time, probable change, short time, and change in bit units. For example, bit D0 = big hit + short time, bit D1 = probable change, bit D2 = short time, bit D3 = during change, bits D4 to D7 = reserved.
The gaming status information register 2 stores gaming status information such as radio wave detection, magnet detection, fraudulent winning detection, and vibration detection in units of bits. For example, bit D0 = radio wave detection, bit D1 = magnet detection, bit D2 = illegal prize detection, bit D3 = vibration detection, bits D4 to D7 = reserved.
The game state information register 3 stores the game state information indicating that the firing has been stopped in units of bits. For example, it is classified as bit D0 = fire stop, bits D1-D7 = reserve.
The game state information register 4 stores the game state information that the game state information setting is completed in units of bits. For example, bit D0 = gaming state information setting completion, bits D1-D7 = reserved.
The game state information registers 5 to 7 are used as spare registers.

In the encrypted communication of information transmitted from the payout control device 1230 to the game control device 1054, the following information is transmitted.
Authentication completion information This is information indicating a matching result of the gaming machine ID (main control ID and payout ID). For example, when all the predetermined bits of the authentication completion information are “1”, it is determined that the authentication is complete (verification is OK).
-Gaming Machine Frame Information As the gaming machine frame information, eight registers from the gaming machine frame information register 0 to the gaming machine frame information register 7 are prepared. In the gaming machine frame information register 0, gaming machine frame information such as frame opening, winning number abnormality, fraudulent addition, radio wave detection, proximity SW abnormality, and night opening is divided and stored in bit units. For example, bit D0 = frame open, bit D1 = abnormal number of winnings, bit D2 = illegal addition, bit D3 = radio wave detection, bit D4 = proximity SW abnormal, bit D5 = short time during night opening, bits D4 to D7 = reserved It is divided into.
In the gaming machine frame information register 1, the gaming machine frame information indicating that the count notification request and the card are waiting to be removed is stored in units of bits. For example, bit D0 = count notification request, bit D1 = waiting to remove card, bits D2-D7 = reserved.
The gaming machine frame information register 2 stores and stores gaming machine frame information called a power saving transition request in units of bits. For example, it is classified as bit D0 = power saving transition request and bits D1 to D7 = reserved.
The game machine frame information registers 3 and 4 store the number of balls held.
The gaming machine frame information registers 5 and 6 store count ball number information.
The gaming machine frame information register 7 is used as a spare.
Recovery information This is information that indicates that recovery is completed when the payout control device 1230 recovers data that could not be communicated by recovery processing when communication is restored.
In the recovery completion, it is determined that the recovery is completed when the bit D0 = 1 of the recovery communication completion flag is set. When communication is normal, recovery is complete.

Next, in communication (encrypted communication) between the card unit 1015 and the payout control device 1230, the following information is transmitted.
First, the frame structure in communication is as follows.
(A) Data length: The following (b) to (d) Data size (b) Serial number: Message sequence number (+1 at the time of transmission)
(C) Command: Message command code (d) Data: Message data (encryption)
(E) CRC: for error detection of message (error correction code)

The commands transmitted from the card unit 1015 to the payout control device 1230 are as follows, and indicate the command name and the content of the command.
・ Communication start request: Request communication start ・ Communication end request: Request communication end ・ Status information request: Request game machine status information ・ Card insertion notification: Card insertion notification ・ Card return notification: Card return notification ・ Recovery Request: Request recovery information ・ Request detailed recovery: Request detailed recovery information ・ Check break: Request break confirmation (whether break is possible) ・ Request break start: Request break start ・ Request break end: Request break end Settlement confirmation: Request settlement check (whether settlement is possible) Request for settlement start: Request settlement start Request for settlement termination: Notify settlement completion Request for use of count: Request use of counting ball

Here, among the commands transmitted from the card unit 1015 to the payout control device 1230, the above “status information request” requests the status information of the gaming machine. It is as follows.
Detailed contents of "status information request", serial number, command code, CU (card unit) status (detailed contents are as follows)
Completion of counting ball reception Request for addition of number of balls CU (card unit) preparation status Card insertion / addition balls (number of balls to be added to the number of balls)
-CU (card unit) error status

The commands transmitted from the payout control device 1230 to the card unit 1015 are as follows, and indicate the command name and the content of the command.
・ Communication start response: Notifying the start of communication of the payout control device ・ Communication end notification: Notifying the end of communication of the payout control device ・ Status information response: Notifying the game machine status information ・ Card insertion response: Receiving card insertion notification Notification / Card return response: Notification of receipt of card return notification / Recovery response: Notification of recovery information / Detailed recovery response: Notification of detailed recovery information Start response: Notify break start / Receive end response: Notify break end / Checkout confirmation response: Notify settlement check result (whether settlement is possible) / Checkout start response: Notify settlement start / Settlement end response: Notify settlement end・ Counting use response: Notification of the use of counting balls (addition to the number of balls held)

Here, among the commands transmitted from the payout control device 1230 to the card unit 1015, the above-mentioned “status information response” notifies the gaming machine status information. It is as follows.
Detailed contents of "status information response", serial number, command code, game status information (details are as follows)
Number of balls held Number of balls launched Number of balls counted Number of fired fires Stopped / gamed Counting state Big hit 1, 2, 3, ...
During probability change, short time, ...
Error information Fraud detection information

The contents of communication between the payout control device 1230 and the card unit 1015 when the game card is inserted and when it is returned are configured as follows.
The insertion of a game card is to insert a game card into the card insertion slot 1201 of the card unit 1015.
(A) When a game card is inserted The contents of communication when a game card is inserted (the same applies because a game card is issued inside the card unit 1015 when cash is inserted) are as follows.
First, in the processing on the card unit 1015 side, the card ID and insertion time (date and time) of the inserted game card are transmitted to the payout control device 1230.
The card insertion response process of the payout control device 1230 for the above is as follows.
The payout control device 1230 stores the card ID received from the card unit 1015 and the insertion time (date and time) (for example, stored in the RAM 1233). Further, the payout control device 1230 transmits a “card insertion response” to the card unit 1015.

(B) When the game card is returned Next, the communication contents when the game card is returned are as follows.
The game card return is to discharge the game card from the card slot 1201 of the card unit 1015 (for return to the player).
First, in the processing on the card unit 1015 side, a card return notification (to confirm the card ID and insertion time before returning the card) is transmitted to the payout control device 1230.
The card return response process of the payout control device 1230 for the above is as follows.
The payout control device 1230 transmits the card ID stored at the time of card insertion and the insertion time to the card unit 1015.
The subsequent processing of the card unit 1015 is as follows.
The card unit 1015 collates the card ID and insertion time transmitted from the payout control device 1230 with those inside the card unit 1015. And if the result of collation is NG, processing, such as deferring card return and reporting an error, is performed. On the other hand, if the collation result is OK, the card is allowed to be returned and discharged.

Next, the content of the recovery response between the card unit 1015 and the payout control device 1230 has the following configuration.
The recovery is to match data between the card unit 1015 and the payout control device 1230 when communication is not possible.
Recovery is performed in the following two stages.
(A) First Stage The first stage is for confirming the conditions for data recovery, which includes a recovery request and a recovery response.
First, in the processing on the card unit 1015 side, a recovery request is transmitted to the payout control device 1230.
The response process of the payout control device 1230 with respect to the above is as follows.
The payout control device 1230 transmits a recovery response to the card unit 1015. Here, the recovery response includes the previous last transmission serial number to the card unit 1015, the stored card ID, and the insertion time.
(B) Second Stage In the second stage, if the condition for data recovery is OK, data recovery is performed, and there are a recovery detail request and a recovery detail response.
First, in the processing on the card unit 1015 side, a recovery detail request is transmitted to the payout control device 1230. Here, the detailed recovery request includes the previous last transmission serial number to the payout control device 1230 and the added ball number data to the number of held balls. The number of added balls is data to be added to the number of held balls by using a ball lending or using a counting ball, and corresponds to the amount that the payout control device cannot receive.
The response process of the payout control device 1230 with respect to the above is as follows.
The payout control device 1230 adds the number of added balls received from the card unit 1015 to the number of held balls. Then, the payout control device 1230 transmits the previously transmitted various data and the latest various data to the card unit 1015.

  Thus, since encrypted communication is performed between the payout control device 1230 and the game control device 1054, and between the payout control device 1230 and the card unit 1015, game value information (for example, counting ball information) ), Etc., can be prevented from being illegally read or rewritten from a communication line or a communication terminal.

Next, the detailed structure of the drawer connector will be described with reference to FIGS. 114 and 115. FIG.
As described above, the main connection board 1075 and the payout connection board 1076, the effect connection board (board) 1077, and the effect connection board (frame) 1078 are all electrically connected by the drawer connector structure.
Since the two sets of drawer connectors have the same structure, as a representative example, one set of drawer connector structures of the main connection board 1075 and the payout connection board 1076 will be described in detail. A detailed description of a pair of drawer connector structures of 1077 and the effect connection board (frame) 1078 will be omitted.
114 and 115 show a specific example of a drawer connector that realizes electrical connection with the main connection board 1075 and the payout connection board 1076.
Here, reference numeral 1075 in the figure indicates a main connection board 1075 as a game board side board, and reference numeral 1076 indicates a payout connection board 1076 as a frame side board. FIG. 114 shows the front of the concave drawer connector 1401 attached to the main connection board 1075 as the game board side board and the front of the convex drawer connector 1411 attached to the payout connection board 1076 as the frame side board. It is a figure mainly shown. FIG. 115 is a top view showing a state in which the concave drawer connector 1401 and the convex drawer connector 1411 are attached to the substrates 1075 and 1076 and face each other. (Internal structures that are not actually visible and should be illustrated by half lines) are also all indicated by solid lines.

  A main connection board 1075 as a game board side board is a board attached to the game board 1020. As shown in FIG. 114, the main connection board 1075 is attached to the game board 1020 at both ends of the main connection board 1075. A mounting hole 1075a (for example, a hole through which a shaft portion of a fastener such as a screw is inserted) is formed. On the other hand, the payout connection board 1076 as the frame side board is a board attached to the game frame. As shown in FIG. 114, the payout connection board 1076 is also attached to the game frame at both ends of the payout connection board 1076. A mounting hole 1076a (for example, a hole through which a shaft portion of a fastener such as a screw is inserted) is formed.

  As shown in FIGS. 114 and 115, a concave drawer connector 1401 is provided at a position inside the main connection board 1075 (position inside the two mounting holes 1075a) in the thickness direction of the main connection board 1075 (see FIG. 114 is a direction perpendicular to the paper surface, and in FIG. 115 is provided in a state of penetrating the main connection substrate 1075 in the vertical direction parallel to the paper surface. The concave-side drawer connector 1401 includes a concave-side substrate portion 1402 and a concave-side fitting portion 1403 that protrudes forward (downward in FIG. 115) from the front surface of the concave-side substrate portion 1402 (with a connection electrode on the inner surface). And a concave rear end portion 1404 protruding rearward (upward in FIG. 115) from the rear surface of the concave substrate portion 1402. In this concave side drawer connector 1401, the concave side board part 1402 is joined to the front surface of the main connection board 1075, the concave side fitting part 1403 protrudes from the main connection board 1075 to the payout connection board 1076 side, and the concave side rear end part 1404 is attached to the main connection board 1075 so as to protrude rearward. The main connection board 1075 has an opening (not shown) through which the concave rear end portion 1404 passes, and there is play between the inner peripheral surface of this opening and the outer peripheral surface of the concave rear end portion 1404. (Gap) is provided.

  In this case, the concave drawer connector 1401 is attached to the main connection board 1075 by two fasteners 1405. That is, as shown in FIG. 115, the both ends of the concave side substrate part 1402 (positions on the outer side in the left-right direction with respect to the concave side fitting part 1403) are inserted in the front-rear direction through the shaft part (not shown) of the fastener 1405. A fastening hole 1402a is formed, and a mounting hole 1075b in the front-rear direction for inserting the distal end side of the shaft portion of the fastener 1405 is formed at a position corresponding to the fastening hole 1402a of the main connection board 1075. Then, the shaft portion of the fastener 1405 is inserted into the retaining hole 1402a from the front surface of the concave substrate portion 1402, and further inserted into the attachment hole 1075b, whereby the concave drawer connector 1401 is attached to the main connection substrate 1075. Yes. However, a predetermined play (gap) is provided between the shaft portion of the fastener 1405 and the fastening hole 1402a. For this reason, even in the attached state, this play allows the concave drawer connector 1401 to move to some extent in the surface direction of the main connection board 1075 (vertical and horizontal directions in FIG. 114) with respect to the main connection board 1075. Further, guide holes 1406 in the front-rear direction are formed at positions on the left and right ends of the concave-side fitting portion 1403 in the concave-side drawer connector 1401, respectively. In addition, as shown in FIG. 115, a plurality of wirings 1407 extend backward from the concave rear end 1404 of the concave drawer connector 1401. Each wiring 1407 is a wiring for connecting a predetermined terminal (not shown) of a circuit board (main board) constituting the game control device 1054 and a predetermined terminal (not shown) in the concave drawer connector 1401.

  On the other hand, at a position inside the payout connection board 1076 (position inside the two mounting holes 1076a), the convex drawer connector 1411 is in a thickness direction of the payout connection board 1076 (in a direction orthogonal to the paper surface in FIG. 114). Yes, in FIG. 115, it is provided in a state of penetrating the dispensing connection substrate 1076 in the vertical direction parallel to the paper surface. The convex-side drawer connector 1411 includes a convex-side substrate portion 1412 and a convex-side fitting portion 1413 that protrudes forward (upward in FIG. 115) from the front surface of the convex-side substrate portion 1412 (with a connection electrode on the surface). And a convex rear end portion 1414 protruding rearward (downward in FIG. 115) from the rear surface of the convex substrate portion 1412. In the convex drawer connector 1411, the convex substrate portion 1412 is joined to the front surface of the payout connection substrate 1076, the convex fitting portion 1413 protrudes from the payout connection substrate 1076 toward the main connection substrate 1075, and the convex rear end portion. 1414 is attached in a state of penetrating through the pay-out connection board 1076 and protruding backward. Note that an opening (not shown) through which the convex rear end portion 1414 passes is formed in the payout connection substrate 1076, and there is play between the inner peripheral surface of this opening and the outer peripheral surface of the convex rear end portion 1414. (Gap) is provided.

  In this case, the convex drawer connector 1411 is attached to the payout connection board 1076 by two fasteners 1415. That is, as shown in FIG. 115, the both ends of the convex substrate portion 1412 (positions on the outer side in the left-right direction with respect to the convex fitting portion 1413) are inserted in the front-rear direction through the shaft portion (not shown) of the fastener 1415. A fastening hole 1412a is formed, and a mounting hole 1076b in the front-rear direction for inserting the distal end side of the shaft portion of the fastener 1415 is formed at a position corresponding to the fastening hole 1412a of the payout connection board 1076. The shaft portion of the fastener 1415 is inserted into the retaining hole 1412a from the front surface of the convex substrate portion 1412 and further inserted into the attachment hole 1076b, whereby the convex drawer connector 1411 is attached to the payout connection substrate 1076. Yes. However, a predetermined play (gap) is provided between the shaft portion of the fastener 1415 and the fastening hole 1412a. For this reason, even in the attached state, this play allows the convex drawer connector 1411 to move to some extent in the surface direction of the payout connection board 1076 (the vertical and horizontal directions in FIG. 114) with respect to the payout connection board 1076. Further, guide pins 1416 (tips) that protrude forward from the front surface of the convex substrate portion 1412 are positioned at the left and right sides of the convex fitting portion 1413 in the convex drawer connector 1411 (positions corresponding to the guide holes 1406, respectively). Are each formed with a tapered pin. Each guide pin 1416 can be inserted and fitted into each guide hole 1406. In addition, as shown in FIG. 115, a plurality of wirings 1417 extend rearward from the convex rear end portion 1414 of the convex drawer connector 1411. Each wiring 1417 is a wiring that connects a predetermined terminal of the circuit board constituting the payout control device 1230 and a predetermined terminal (not shown) in the convex drawer connector 1411.

The concave drawer connector 1401 and the convex drawer connector 1411 described above form a pair, and these constitute a so-called drawer connector. In such a drawer connector, connection work (convex-side fitting portion 1413 and concave-side fitting portion 1403 can be performed even from one side to be connected, for example, in a slightly inclined state (or in a slightly misaligned state) with respect to the other. Can be easily performed). In this case, for example, when the game board 1020 is attached to the game frame (front frame 1004), the main connection board 1075 and the payout connection board 1076 are arranged to face each other as shown in FIG. The side fitting portion 1413 fits into the concave side fitting portion 1403 of the concave side drawer connector 1401, and each electrode on the inner surface of the concave side fitting portion 1403 (each electrode to which the above-described wirings 1407 are electrically connected). And the electrodes on the surface of the convex fitting portion 21413 (each electrode to which the above-described wiring 1417 is electrically connected) are in contact with each other, whereby the game control device 1054 and the payout control device 1230 The electrical connection is easily and accurately realized. At this time, since the tip of the guide pin 1416 has a tapered shape, the guide pin 1416 easily fits into the guide hole 1406 even if there is a slight inclination or misalignment. And the fitting of the convex side fitting part 1413 is guided smoothly. The contact structure between the electrodes on the inner surface of the concave fitting portion 1403 and the electrodes on the surface of the convex fitting portion 1413 is a sandwiched two-point contact structure in which contact is made on both the upper and lower surfaces of the convex fitting portion 1413. And secure contact is ensured.
Further, as described above, by providing play in the fastening holes 1402a, the fastening holes 1412a, and the like, the concave drawer connector 1401 and the convex drawer connector 1411 can move to some extent in the surface direction of each board. Therefore, the positional deviation at the time of the connection work and the positional deviation after the connection work are absorbed, and the connection work can be easily performed, and the connection state is favorably maintained after the connection. In addition, an operation of detaching the connection (operation of separating the convex side fitting portion 1413 and the concave side fitting portion 1403 from each other) can be easily performed by an operation opposite to the above-described connection operation.

That is, with the configuration of the connection portion described above, the concave side fitting portion 1403 of the concave side drawer connector 1401 and the convex side fitting portion 1413 of the convex side drawer connector 1411 are straightly opposed to each other without inclination. Even if it is not, and it is not in a state of being opposed to each other accurately without any positional deviation, it can be connected even from a state where there is a slight inclination and positional deviation, so that the connection work is facilitated. Further, even after the connection work, even if the relative position between the boards (that is, the relative position between the game board side and the frame side) moves slightly in the above-described plane direction, this movement is absorbed by the above-mentioned play, so The contact state of the electrodes in the side fitting portion 1403 and the convex side fitting portion 1413 is favorably maintained. In addition, it is possible to easily remove the connection.
Moreover, the following effects are also acquired by the structure of the connection part demonstrated above. That is, by providing the concave drawer connector 1401 on the main connection board 1075, the exposed fitting portion becomes the concave fitting portion 1403 having an electrode on the inner surface, for example, when an inspection is performed only with a game board. Therefore, there is also an effect that troubles such as electrical short-circuit due to contact with electrodes such as conductive foreign matter hardly occur.

  The above is a configuration example in which the main connection board 1075 and the payout connection board 1076, the effect connection board (board) 1077, and the effect connection board (frame) 1078 are electrically connected by the drawer connector structure, but not limited to the drawer connector. For example, a configuration in which electrical connection is made by a floating connector structure may be adopted.

Note that the configuration of the connection unit described above is not limited to the electrical connection between the game control device 1054 and the payout control device 1230, and a device on the frame side other than the payout control device 1230 and the game control device 1054 (or game control). The present invention may be applied to electrical connection with a game board side device other than the device 1054.
In the above description, the electrical connection between the game board 1020 and the game frame (front frame 1004) has been described. However, the same effect can be obtained by applying a configuration including the same drawer connector to other electrical connection portions. It can also be obtained. For example, an electrical connection between an electrical element (such as an electrical component or a control device) provided in the machine casing 1002 and an electrical element provided in the front frame 1004 or the glass frame 1005 that is opened and closed with respect to the machine casing 1002, or The electrical connection between the electrical element provided on the front frame 1004 and the electrical element provided on the glass frame 1005 opened and closed with respect to the front frame 1004 is performed by a connection portion having a configuration similar to that in FIGS. In this case, it is also possible to automatically connect and disconnect the concave and convex sides of the drawer connector with relative movement during opening and closing.

F. Operation of Control System Next, the control contents of the game control apparatus 1054 according to the fifteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 116 to 199.
First, it is as follows when the concept of the main structure used for description of the following flowcharts is clarified.
As described above, the special display and the normal map are displayed on the collective display device 1035. The special figure in the following description of the control processing means this special figure (this special figure), and will be described in detail on the basis of the above. The special drawing controlled by the production control device 1053 based on the command from the game control device 1054 is a special drawing for production displayed on the display device 1041.
(A) Special figure display device In the following flowchart, the special figure refers to the “main special figure” displayed on the collective display device 1035. Further, when referring to the dummy display for the effect displayed for the player displayed on the display device 1041, it is referred to as “decorative drawing”.
The device for displaying the special figure in this way is the collective display device 1035, but the names of the areas for displaying the special figure in the collective display device 1035 include, for example, a special symbol display device and a special figure display device. In order to distinguish it from a general-purpose display device, it may be called a special symbol display device.
(B) General-purpose display device In the following flowchart, the general-purpose display refers to the “general-purpose map” displayed on the collective display device 1035. Further, when the display device 1041 is configured to display a common figure, the dummy display for directing for the player displayed on the display device 1041 is referred to as “decorative figure”, for example.
In this way, the device for displaying the universal map is the collective display device 1035, but the names of the areas for displaying the regular map in the collective display device 1035 include, for example, a normal symbol display device and a universal map display device. In order to distinguish from a special figure display device, it may be called a normal symbol display device.
However, in the fifteenth embodiment, such a general display is not displayed on the display device 1041. In addition, you may provide the indicator which displays a common figure (here a decoration common figure) display. In describing a gaming machine, a device that displays a “decorative map” may be described if necessary.
(C) Fudenden A device corresponding to Fudenden is a second start prize opening 1026 as an ordinary electric accessory (Fudenden).
However, ordinary electric power may be called a normal variable winning device. For example, in the description of the flowchart, it may be called a normal electric accessory (ordinary variable winning device 1026).
In addition, for example, at the time of high probability or when the time is short, the start winning is supported by the opening / closing member 1026a of the second start winning port 1026 serving as a normal electric accessory (general power). There is simply a “Fujiden Support”.
(D) Special figure storage In the following flowchart, in the case of special figure hold (sometimes simply referred to as “hold”), special figure storage, or special figure start-up storage, the “main special” displayed on the collective display device 1035 is displayed. It points towards “Figure Memory”. In addition, when referring to the dummy display for the effect displayed for the player displayed on the display device 1041, it is referred to as "decoration special figure hold" or "decoration special figure storage".
The winning ports that function as the starting winning ports for special drawings are the starting winning ports 1025 and 1026.
(E) Universal map memory In the following flowchart, the general map hold, the universal map memory, or the general chart start memory refers to the “general map memory” displayed on the collective display device 1035. In addition, when referring to the dummy display for the effect displayed for the player displayed on the display device 1041, it is referred to as "decoration map hold" or "decoration map storage".
However, in this embodiment, such a usual start-up storage display is not displayed on the display device 1041. In addition, you may provide the indicator which performs the starting memory | storage (in this case, the decoration common memory) display. In the description of the gaming machine, if necessary, it may be described including a device that displays “decorative map memory”.
(F) Fluctuating prize apparatus The first variable prize apparatus 1027 is an apparatus (so-called attacker) having a first big prize opening 1027a opened and closed by an opening / closing member 1027b. The first variable winning device 1027 is sometimes referred to as a special variable winning device in order to be distinguished from the normal variable winning device.
In the fifteenth embodiment, in addition to the first variable winning device 1027, a second variable winning device 1034 is provided, and so-called two attackers are arranged.

[Main processing of game control device]
First, the main process of the game control device 1054 will be described with reference to FIG.
This main process starts based on the fact that the CPU 1111 is forcibly reset. That is, when the power switch 1181 of the power supply device 1058 supplying power to the game control device 1054 is turned on, a reset signal is sent from the power supply device 1058 at a predetermined timing (during a predetermined reset period when the power is turned on). When the reset terminal of the CPU 1111 is input by being input to the control device 1054 and this reset signal is released, the CPU 1111 is activated. Similarly, when the power is restored from the power failure, the reset signal is turned on and then released, and the CPU 1111 is activated. Further, when the worker wants to initialize the RAM 1113 and the like of the game control device 1054, the power switch 1181 is turned on while turning on the RAM clear switch 1182 (initialization switch) of the payout control device 1230. There is a need. Note that the RAM 1113 is expressed as RAM in the flowchart without the part number.
Here, in this embodiment, the RAM refers to the RAM 1113. However, the RAM is not limited to the RAM, and a read / write storage element such as an EEPROM may be used as the RAM.

When the CPU 1111 starts up, interrupts are first prohibited, the CPU peripheral circuits (including the serial port) built in the CPU 1111 are initialized, and all the output ports are turned off (corresponding to the binary signal “0”). Signal), and thereafter, access to the RAM 1113 is permitted (steps B1 to B4).
Here, the serial port is set to be used because the serial port is used when the gaming machine ID is output to the outside (for example, the external management device 1091). Is. In addition, since it is necessary to perform serial communication with the effect control device 1053, the serial port is set to be used.
Since each output port is turned off (reset) by the reset signal, it is not always necessary to output the off signal to each output port in software, but step B3 is provided here just in case. .
Next, in step B5, it is determined whether the RAM clear switch 1182 in the payout control device 1230 is operated and the RAM clear signal is on. This is to determine whether or not the RAM clear switch 1182 is turned on according to the state of the RAM clear signal. If the RAM clear switch 1182 is turned on, the process proceeds to step B13. If not, the process proceeds to step B6. move on.
It should be noted that the process proceeds to step B13 when the RAM clear switch 1182 is turned on and the CPU 1111 is activated. In step B6, which will be described later, it is determined that the power failure inspection area 1 and the power failure inspection area 2 of the RAM are not all normal. Or when it is determined in step B8 described later that the checksum is not normal.

If the RAM clear signal is not turned on, the process proceeds to step B6, where it is checked whether or not all the values in the RAM power outage inspection areas 1 and 2 are normal power outage inspection area check data. If it judges, it will jump to Step B13. On the other hand, if the check result in step B6 is normal, the process proceeds to step B7.
Thus, if the values of the power failure inspection areas 1 and 2 in the RAM are all normal, it is determined that the power failure has been restored, and the process proceeds to step B7. On the other hand, if the values of the power failure inspection areas 1 and 2 in the RAM are abnormal (if not stored normally), the process jumps to step B13.
The power failure inspection area check data 1 and 2 are set in step B34 described later. In this step B34, it is determined whether or not the power failure has been restored by using the plurality of check data 1 and 2 as described above. Therefore, it is highly reliable to determine whether or not the power failure has been restored.

In step B7, a checksum of data in the RAM 1113 is calculated, and in step B8, it is compared with the checksum at the time of power-off, and it is determined whether or not the value is normal (match). If the checksum is not normal (that is, when the data in the RAM 1113 is corrupted), the process proceeds to step B13, and if the checksum is normal, the process proceeds to step B9.
In step B9, processing for power failure recovery (initial value setting for power failure recovery) is executed. In this process, for example, the initial value at the time of power failure recovery is saved in the area to be initialized.
The area to be initialized here includes the following areas.
・ External information area door ・ Frame open signal, security signal ・ Power failure recovery inspection area 1, 2
-Game machine error status signal in the test signal area-Checksum area at power-off-Error scan counter (game frame status monitoring scan counter)
・ Front frame opening monitoring area ・ Game frame opening monitoring area ・ Shooting ball break monitoring area ・ Overflow monitoring area ・ Payout abnormality monitoring area ・ Switch 1 and 2 abnormality monitoring area ・ Small University prize entry illegal prize monitoring area ・ Upper university prize opening illegal Prize-winning monitoring area, public power fraud winning monitoring area, magnetic fraud monitoring area, radio wave fraud monitoring area, large prize opening fraud monitoring information 1, 2
・ Fujiden fraud monitoring information

After step B9, in step B10, an area for storing the gaming state in the RAM is checked to determine whether or not the gaming state is a high probability state. If the probability is not high (step B10; NO), the process jumps to step B17. When the probability is high (step B10; YES), a high probability notification flag is set in step B11, and on (lighting) data of a high probability notification LED (not shown) provided in the collective display device 1035 in step B12. Is saved in the segment area. As a result, a treatment corresponding to the current high probability state is performed. For example, the high probability notification LED provided in the collective display device 1035 is turned on to display the high probability state.
After step B12, the process proceeds to step B17, and the processes after step B17 are executed.

On the other hand, when the process jumps from step B5, step B6, or step B8 to step B13, a process for canceling the protection of the access prohibited area is performed in step B13. This cancels the protection of the area where access to the RAM 1113 is prohibited, thereby enabling access to the same area. In step B14, all RAM areas are cleared to zero. As a result, the entire area of the RAM 1113 (accessible area including the area where the protection is released) is once cleared (initialized).
Next, in step B15, protection of the access prohibited area is set. This sets protection for an area where access to the RAM 1113 is prohibited, thereby prohibiting access to the area. Next, in step B16, an initial value is set in an area where initial value setting is necessary.
The area where the initial value needs to be set (area to be initialized) is an area having an initial value that is not the value (0) written in step B14. This corresponds to the area related to the setting of the demonstration area and the production mode. Specific information on these areas is as follows.
<Area to be initialized>
Customer waiting demo area Customer waiting demo flag ・ Direction mode command area Production mode command ・ Security signal control timer ・ Next mode transition information area Next mode transition information ・ Special game mode information command Also, in this step B16, an initial value is set. Set the main control ID transmission request flag as one of

After step B16, the process proceeds to step B17. In other cases, the process proceeds to step B17, as described above, in the case of NO in step B10, the process of step B12 may have been performed.
In step B17, it is determined whether authentication is completed. This is because the gaming machine ID (both main control ID and payout ID here) is sent to the external management device 1091 which is a third party organization via the card control unit 1015 via the payout control device 1230, where it is checked against the authentication list. Then, it is determined whether the verification result is found and the authentication is completed.
If the authentication is not completed, the process waits in step B17. If the authentication is completed, the process proceeds to step B18. In step B18, it is determined whether recovery is completed. This is to determine whether or not the recovery communication is completed when the communication is interrupted due to a communication error or the like. If the recovery is not completed, the process returns to step B17 to repeat the loop. When the recovery is completed, the process proceeds to step B19.
In step B19, game state information transmission processing is performed. This is to transmit game state information from the game control device 1054 to the payout control device 1230 by encrypted communication. As described above, as the gaming state information, eight registers from the gaming state information register 0 to the gaming state information register 7 are prepared as dedicated registers, and the big hit information from the big hit 1 to the big hit 9 and the big hit + In addition to gaming state information such as short time, probability change, short time, and fluctuation, information such as radio wave detection, magnet detection, illegal winning detection, vibration detection is also stored, so these information will be transmitted .

Next, the process proceeds to step B20, and main control ID transmission processing is performed. This is to transmit the main control ID when there is a main control ID transmission request (for example, the main control ID transmission request flag is set in step B16 described above).
Next, in step B21, it is determined whether the power failure has been recovered. This is to determine whether or not the power failure is restored in the route when the RAM clear signal branched in step B5 is not on.
If it is not this power failure recovery route (that is, if the route is RAM cleared), the process proceeds to step B22, and the command at the time of RAM clear is transmitted to the effect control device 1053 (effect control board). This is to transmit a command when the RAM 1113 of the game control device 1054 is cleared to the effect control device 1053, and in this way, the effect control device 1053 can cause the display device 1041 to perform an effect like a customer waiting demo. It becomes possible. After step B22, the process proceeds to step B24.

On the other hand, if the power failure recovery route is determined in step B21, the process branches to step B23, and a power failure recovery command (power failure recovery command) corresponding to the state of the gaming machine is transmitted to the effect control device 1053 (effect control board). After step B23, the process proceeds to step B24.
The following commands are included in the command at the time of power failure recovery.
-Model designation command indicating the type of gaming machine-Decoration special figure 1 hold number command and decoration special figure 2 hold number command indicating the number of hold of special figures 1 and 2-Probability information command indicating the status of probability If the special figure variation display game is being executed when the power is turned off according to the state when the power is turned on, the following commands are included.
・ Restoration screen command ・ Customer waiting demo command when waiting for customer at power-off ・ Power-on command when initialized at power-on ・ Direction mode information command indicating the state of rendering mode depending on the model ・ Time-saving state When the command for power failure recovery is transmitted, for example, the effect control device 1053 sets the operation position of the motor of the frame effect device to the initial position. The display device 1041 displays that the power failure is being restored.

The command at the time of power failure recovery (power failure recovery command) includes information notifying the state at the time of power failure (game state, rest state, settlement state). For example, if there is a power outage during a break, information indicating that it was during a break (for example, the same command as the break start command) may be included in this power outage recovery command. The received effect control device 1053 resumes the display on the display device 1041 for notifying the break during the power failure, for example, after the power failure is restored. In addition, when there is a power failure during settlement, information indicating that settlement is in progress is included in this power failure recovery command, and the presentation control device 1053 that received this command at the time of power recovery recovers, for example, at the time of power failure The display on the display device 1041 for informing the settlement being performed is resumed as it is after the power failure is restored. Thereby, the player can clearly recognize that the state at the time of the power failure is stored in the RAM 1113 and the state is resumed at the time of the power failure recovery, and the player does not feel uneasy at the time of the power failure recovery.
Further, the command at the time of power failure recovery (power failure recovery command) includes error information in the case of a frame opening error state, and the rendering control device 1053 that received this command at the time of power failure recovery, for example, at the time of power failure The display on the display device 1041 that notifies that the frame open error state that has been executed is resumed after the power failure is restored.

When the process proceeds to step B24 via step B22 or step B23, in step B24, for example, a CTC (Counter / Timer Circuit) circuit that is provided in the CPU 1111 and generates a timer interrupt signal and a random number update trigger signal is activated. The CTC circuit is a circuit for timer interruption. Note that the CTC circuit is provided in a clock generator in the CPU 1111. The clock generator divides an oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the crystal oscillator, a timer interrupt signal having a predetermined period (for example, 4 milliseconds) and a CPU 1111 based on the divided signal, And a CTC circuit that generates a signal CTC that gives a trigger for updating a random number supplied to the random number generation circuit.
After the CTC activation process of step B24, a process of starting and setting the random number generation circuit is performed in step B25. Specifically, the CPU 1111 performs setting of a code (specified value) for starting the random number generation circuit in a predetermined register (CTC update permission register) in the random number generation circuit.
A random number generation circuit generates a part of each random number of special maps and ordinary maps in hardware. However, the initial values of some of these random numbers are set in software by the process of step B28 described later.
Note that the random numbers related to the special figure include jackpot random numbers (random numbers for determining whether to win or not), jackpot symbol random numbers 1, 2 (random numbers for determining jackpot stop symbols), fluctuation pattern random numbers (reach of reach) Random number for determining a variation pattern including presence / absence), stop symbol random number (random number for determining outlier stop symbol), and the like. In addition, examples of random numbers related to ordinary maps include random numbers per ordinary figure (random numbers for determining whether or not per ordinary figure). Among these, the random numbers targeted in steps B25 and B are, for example, jackpot random numbers, random numbers per common figure, jackpot symbol random numbers 1,2. Note that the random numbers related to the special figure may be common to the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 when there are two types of special figures, or may be provided separately.

In the process of step B25, a bit transposition pattern of a hard random number (here, a big hit random number) generated by the hardware of the random number generation circuit is also set. That is, in the process of step B25, a hard random number bit transposition pattern is set, and a big hit random number bit transposition is also performed.
Here, the bit transposition pattern refers to, for example, replacing the bit arrangement of the extracted random numbers (the arrangement before the upper bit transposition) in a predetermined order and storing it as a different bit arrangement (the arrangement after the lower bit transposition). It is a pattern that determines how to replace the case. By replacing the bits of the random number according to this bit transposition pattern, the regularity of the random number can be broken and the confidentiality of the random number can be improved. The bit transposition pattern may be a fixed single pattern or may be selected from a plurality of patterns prepared in advance. Further, the user may arbitrarily set it.

After step B25, the value of a predetermined register (soft random number registers 1 to n) in the random number generation circuit at the time of power-on is extracted in the subsequent step B26, and various initial value random numbers (random numbers (determining jackpot symbols) are determined. The jackpot symbol random number 1, the jackpot symbol random number 2), and the initial value (start value) of the random number (hit random number) that determines the hit of the usual symbol is saved in a predetermined area of the RAM.
Here, the types of random numbers include the following.
-Hit initial value random number-Jackpot symbol initial value random number 1
-Big hit symbol initial value random number 2
(These use different soft random number register values.)

The random number generation circuit generates a part of each random number of special figures and ordinary figures in hardware. However, the initial values of these random numbers are set in software by the process of step B28 described later. The random number generation circuit in the CPU 1111 used in this embodiment is configured so that the initial value of the soft random number register changes every time the power is turned on. ), It is possible to break the regularity of random numbers generated by software, making it difficult for a player to obtain illegal random numbers.
Note that the random numbers related to the special figure include jackpot random numbers (random numbers for determining whether to win or not), jackpot symbol random numbers 1, 2 (random numbers for determining jackpot stop symbols), fluctuation pattern random numbers (reach of reach) Random number for determining a variation pattern including presence / absence), stop symbol random number (random number for determining outlier stop symbol), and the like. In addition, examples of random numbers related to ordinary maps include random numbers per ordinary figure (random numbers for determining whether or not per ordinary figure). Among these, the random numbers (hard random numbers) targeted in steps B25 and B are, for example, jackpot random numbers, random numbers per common figure, and jackpot symbol random numbers 1 and 2. Note that the random numbers related to the special figure may be common to the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 when there are two types of special figures, or may be provided separately.

Next, an interruption is permitted in step B27, and an initial value random number update process is performed in the next step B28. The initial value random number update process is a process for updating the initial value of the random number so that it is difficult to deliberately aim for a big hit or the like by measuring the timing of launching the game ball. This is for breaking the regularity of random numbers by updating the values of various initial value random numbers.
Note that the initial value random number update process in step B28 includes a method of performing an initial value random number update process in the timer interrupt process in addition to the main process. In order to avoid execution of value random number update processing, when performing initial value random number update processing in the main processing, it is necessary to disable interrupt and then update to cancel the interrupt. In the timer interrupt process, the initial value random number update process is not performed. If it is only in the main process, there is no problem even if the interrupt is canceled before the initial value random number update process, thereby simplifying the main process. There is an advantage that

  Further, although not particularly limited, in the present embodiment, the big hit random number, the big hit symbol random number, and the hit random number are configured to be generated using random numbers generated in a random number generation circuit. However, the big hit random number is a so-called “high-speed counter” that is updated based on a clock with a speed equal to or higher than the CPU operating clock. The big hit symbol random number and the hit random number have the same period as the timer interrupt processing that is the processing unit of the program. Is a “low-speed counter” that is updated based on the CTC output (CTC (CTC2) different from CTC (CTC0) for timer interrupt processing). In the big hit symbol random number and the hit symbol random number, a so-called “initial value changing method” is adopted in which each initial value random number (generated by software) is used to change the start value every time the random number makes a round. Each random number may be a counter update by +1 or −1, or may be a random update in which all values within the range appear without overlapping until one round is reached. That is, the big hit random number is a random number that is updated only by hardware, and the big hit symbol random number is a random number that is updated by hardware and software.

Next, the process proceeds to step B29, where the power-off detection signal (power failure detection signal) input from the power supply device 1058 is read via the port and the data bus, the number of checks of the power-off detection signal (for example, twice) is set, and the next In step B30, it is determined whether or not the power interruption detection signal is turned on. If it is turned on, the process proceeds to step B31 for final determination of power failure, and if not turned on, the process returns to step B28. During normal operation, steps B28 to B30 are repeated.
That is, when the power-off detection signal is not on (step B30; NO), the process returns to the initial value random number update process in step B28. That is, when a power failure has not occurred, the initial value random number update process and the power-off detection signal check (loop process) are repeated. By permitting an interrupt before the initial value random number update process (step B28) (step B27), if a timer interrupt occurs during the initial value random number update process, the interrupt process is executed preferentially. Can be avoided by waiting for the initial value random number update process.

Then, when proceeding to Step B31, it is determined whether or not the power-off detection signal is kept on for the number of times of the check. If the result is negative, it is determined that a power failure has occurred and the process returns to step B30.
Note that when the power-off detection signal is turned on, the power-off detection signal may be used as an NMI interrupt signal to interrupt the current process and forcibly execute the power failure process after step B32. However, in the configuration of this example, since the power-off detection signal is turned on multiple times in step B31, the power failure monitoring signal is temporarily and instantaneously caused by noise or the like even though no power failure has actually occurred. When it is turned on, there is an advantage that it is not erroneously determined that a power failure has occurred.

In step B32, interrupts are prohibited, and then all outputs are turned off in the next step B33 (off data is output to all output ports), and then a power failure information setting process is executed in step B34. In the power failure information setting process, the power failure inspection area check data 1 is saved in the power failure inspection area 1 and the power failure inspection area check data 2 is saved in the power failure inspection area 2.
After step B34, after the process of calculating the checksum when the RAM power is shut off in the next step B35, the calculated checksum is saved in a predetermined checksum area in step B36.
Next, after prohibiting access to the RAM in step B37, the process waits (reset wait state).
In this way, the check data is saved in the power failure recovery inspection area and the checksum at power-off is calculated to determine whether the information stored in the RAM before the power-off is correctly backed up. This can be determined when the power is turned on again.
Note that the power failure process in steps B32 to B37 described above is performed before the power supply voltage drops below the operating voltage of the CPU 1111 due to the power failure.

[Game state information transmission processing]
Next, the gaming state information transmission process (step B19) in the main process will be described with reference to FIG.
When this routine is started, a payout jackpot signal command is first loaded at step B51. The payout jackpot signal command is for informing the game control device 1054 to the payout control device 1230 of jackpot information (for example, information divided into jackpot 1. jackpot 2 etc.) as game state information. Next, the process proceeds to step B52, and the command loaded in step B51 (payout jackpot signal command) is written in the gaming state transmission buffer. The command written in the game state transmission buffer is encrypted by serial communication at a predetermined timing and transmitted to the payout control device 1230 (the same applies to the following transmission buffers).
Next, after the payout probability information command is loaded in step B53, the process proceeds to step B54, and the command loaded in step B53 (payout probability information command) is written in the gaming state transmission buffer. The payout probability information command is a game state information from the game control device 1054 to the payout control device 1230 as information on the big hit probability and time reduction (for example, information classified as big hit + short time, probable change, short time change, changing etc.) It is for informing.

Next, in step B55, clear data is set as an unauthorized information command. This is because the illegal information command is first cleared to the initial state (the state where no fraud has occurred: clear data), and then when the fraud occurs, the fraud information command is set according to the fraud content.
Next, in step B56, it is determined whether or not a radio wave fraud has occurred. If a radio wave fraud has occurred, a radio wave fraud detection bit of a fraud information command is set in step B57. For example, the gaming status information register 2 stores gaming status information such as radio wave detection, magnet detection, illegal prize detection, and vibration detection in units of bits, so the bit D0 = radio wave detection bit therein Set as detection bit.
The radio wave fraud is detected by a radio wave sensor (board) 1143.
After step B57, the process proceeds to step B58. On the other hand, if radio wave fraud is not occurring in step B56, the process jumps to step B57 and proceeds to step B58.

In step B58, it is determined whether or not a magnet fraud has occurred. If a magnet fraud has occurred, a magnet fraud detection bit of a fraud information command is set in step B59. For example, the game status information register 2 stores the game status information such as radio wave detection, magnet detection, illegal prize detection, and vibration detection in units of bits. Set as detection bit.
Magnet fraud is detected by the magnet sensor 1142.
After step B59, the process proceeds to step B60. On the other hand, if the magnet fraud is not occurring in step B58, the process jumps to step B59 and proceeds to step B60.

In step B60, it is determined whether or not an illegal winning is occurring. If an illegal winning is occurring, an unauthorized winning detection bit of the unauthorized information command is set in step B61. For example, the gaming status information register 2 stores the gaming status information such as radio wave detection, magnet detection, illegal prize detection, and vibration detection in units of bits, so that the bit D2 = illegal prize detection is illegal. Set as a winning detection bit.
It is to be noted that the illegal winning is detected by an error / illegal winning monitoring process, for example, a process for monitoring an illegal winning other than when the first big winning opening 1027a, the second big winning opening 1034a, and the ordinary power 1026 are not opened. Is done.
Next, the process proceeds to step B62, and a firing command for stopping firing is set. As a result, when the illegal winning is occurring, a firing command for stopping the firing is transmitted from the game control device 1054 to the payout control device 1230, the operation of the launching device 1037 is stopped, and the launch of the game ball is stopped. It will be. After step B62, the process proceeds to step B64.
On the other hand, if an illegal winning is not occurring at step B60, the process branches to step B63, and a discharge permission payout firing command is set. As a result, when an illegal winning is not occurring, a firing command for permitting the launch is transmitted from the game control device 1054 to the payout control device 1230, the operation of the launch device 1037 is permitted, and the game ball is fired. Become. After step B63, the process proceeds to step B64.

In step B64, the illegal information command is written in the gaming state transmission buffer, and in the subsequent step B65, the payout firing command is written in the gaming state transmission buffer. As a result, an unauthorized information command and a payout firing command are transmitted to the payout control device 1230. Further, a game state information setting completion command is set in step B66, and the process proceeds to step B67. The command set in step B66 is written in the game state transmission buffer. Thereby, a game state information setting completion command is transmitted to the payout control device 1230. After step B67, the process returns.
In the gaming state information transmission process of FIG. 117, the gaming state information called vibration detection detected by the vibration sensor 1144 is not sent to the payout control device 1230, but the bit D3 in the gaming state information register 2 = the bit called vibration detection May be set as a vibration detection bit and transmitted to the payout control device 1230.

[Main control ID transmission process]
Next, the main control ID transmission process (step B20) in the main process will be described with reference to FIG.
When this routine starts, it is first determined in step B71 whether or not there is a request for transmission of the main control ID. For example, when the power is turned on, the main control ID transmission request flag is set in the initial setting in step B16 in FIG. 116. Based on this flag, it is determined whether there is a main control ID transmission request.
If there is no request for transmission of the main control ID, the process returns. On the other hand, if there is a transmission request for the main control ID, the process proceeds to step B72 to clear the main control ID transmission request flag. This is because the main control ID transmission request flag is once cleared, so that the main control ID transmission request flag is once cleared.
In step B73, the start code is written in the payout serial transmission buffer. The start code is a code for causing the payout control device 1230 on the receiving side to specify that serial communication is started. Next, in step B74, it is determined whether or not only the chip code (chip ID) is transmitted. The chip code (chip ID) is the chip code of the main control chip, and the main control chip is the CPU 1111 of the game control device 1054 (main board).
Therefore, the chip code (chip ID) is a part of the gaming machine ID (main control ID) of the game control device 1054 (main board). Specifically, the CPU 1111 in the game control apparatus 1054 (main board) is designated. This corresponds to individual identification information (unique ID) of the IC chip to be configured.

If the chip code is transmitted only in step B74, the process jumps to step B79 to write the chip identification code into the payout serial transmission buffer.
Here, the “XX identification code” is a code indicating which information (code) is to be transmitted from now on, and is not unique to a solid but a common code. After writing this code, the corresponding unique information is written.
Therefore, the chip identification code is a code indicating that a chip code is to be transmitted from now on, and after the chip identification code is written, the chip code is written in the payout serial transmission buffer.
Therefore, in the subsequent step B80, the chip code of the IC chip constituting the CPU 1111 in the game control device 1054 (main board) is read and written into the payout serial transmission buffer. Thereby, the chip code (chip ID) of the CPU 1111 in the game control device 1054 (main board) is acquired and transmitted to the payout control device 1230.
At least when the main control ID is transmitted to the payout control device 1230, since it is transmitted by encrypted communication as described above, each code data constituting the main control ID is stored in the payout serial transmission buffer. After being written, it is encrypted and transmitted to the payout control device 1230 (the same applies to each code described later).

  On the other hand, if the chip code is not transmitted in step B74, the process proceeds to step B75 to write the maker code identification code of the main control chip into the payout serial transmission buffer, and in step B76 the maker code of the main control chip (of the gaming machine). Read the manufacturer name code) and write it into the payout serial transmission buffer. Next, in step B77, the product code identification code of the main control chip is written in the dispensing serial transmission buffer, and in step B78, the product code (model name code) of the main control chip is read and written in the dispensing serial transmission buffer. The process proceeds to step B79. As a result, the manufacturer code (code relating to the manufacturer name of the gaming machine) and the product code (code relating to the model name) of the CPU 1111 in the game control device 1054 (main board) are acquired and transmitted to the payout control device 1230. .

When the process proceeds from step B78 to step B79 or when the process proceeds from step B74 to step B79, the chip identification code is written in the payout serial transmission buffer in step B79 and the chip code is read in step B80, as described above. Writes data to the payout serial transmission buffer.
After step B80, the process returns.
In this way, when there is a request for transmission of the main control ID (for example, when the power is turned on, when the frame is opened, when a big hit occurs, etc.), in addition to the chip code of the game control device 1054 as the main control ID, Since the product code is also transmitted to the payout control device 1230, it is possible to improve security by using even detailed information including the manufacturer code and the product code.
When the power is turned on, serial transmission is performed in the order of manufacturer code, product code, and chip code, for example.
Each identification code includes information indicating the data type and data length of each code.
Further, in the flowchart shown in FIG. 118, all the codes output at the output timing are the same. However, when the codes output differ depending on the timing, it is determined what code is output if there is no identification code. Because it is difficult, it is easy to distinguish as a configuration including an identification code in this way (for example, even if a code is suddenly output, whether the code is a main control chip or a payout control chip, Alternatively, it is difficult to determine whether it is a chip code or a manufacturer code).
Basically, in addition to the chip code of the game control device 1054, all of the manufacturer code and product code are transmitted to the payout control device 1230, and further from the payout control device 1230 via the card unit 1015 to the external management device 1091. In this configuration, the main control ID and the payout ID are collated to authenticate the gaming machine ID, but during the game of the pachinko machine 1001 (when the frame is opened, when a big hit occurs, etc.), only the chip code is authenticated. It may be. By doing so, it is not time-consuming to continue the game, and the user does not have to wait.

[Checksum calculation processing]
Next, the checksum calculation process (step B35) in the main process will be described with reference to FIG.
When this routine is started, first, the start address of the RAM is set as the start value of the calculated address in step B91, and the number of repetitions is set in step B92. The number of repetitions is set corresponding to the number of bytes of the RAM being used. Next, after setting “0” as the calculated value in step B93, the content of the calculated value + the calculated address is calculated as a new calculated value in step B94. In this way, the contents of each address are added as a calculated value. Next, the calculation address is updated by “+1” in step B95, the number of repetitions is updated by “−1” in step B96, it is checked whether the calculation is completed, and it is determined in step B97 whether the calculation is completed. If the decision result in the step B97 is NO, the process returns to the step B94 to repeat the routine. When the number of repeated times is equal to the number of bytes in the RAM, it is determined that the calculation is completed, the process returns to YES from step B97, and the routine is terminated.
In this way, the checksum is calculated when the RAM is powered off.

[Initial value random number update processing]
Next, the initial value random number update process (step B28) in the main process will be described with reference to FIG.
When this routine is started, a process for incrementing (updating (+1)) the hit initial value random number (step B101), a process for incrementing (updating (+1)) the big hit symbol initial value random number 1 (step B102), and the big hit symbol A process (step B103) for incrementing (update (+1)) the initial value random number 2 is sequentially performed.
Here, the “big hit symbol initial value random number 1” is a random number that is an initial value of the random number that determines the big hit stop symbol of the special figure 1 and is updated in the range of 0 to 99. The “big hit symbol initial value random number 2” is an initial value random number of a random number that determines the big hit stop symbol of the special figure 2 and is updated in the range of 0 to 99. is there. The “hit initial value random number” is a random number that is an initial value of a random number that determines the hit of the usual game, and is updated in the range of 0 to 250. is there. In this way, the randomness of the random number can be increased by continuing to increment the random number as long as time permits in the main process.

[Timer interrupt processing]
Next, the timer interrupt process of the game control device 1054 will be described with reference to FIG.
This timer interrupt process is started by the processes of steps B24 and B27 in the main process described above, and is repeatedly executed at a predetermined timer interrupt period.
In this timer interrupt process, first, in step B111, register saving and interrupt prohibition are executed as necessary. In register saving, for example, register saving processing is performed in which a value held in a predetermined register is transferred to the RAM. In the Z80 microcomputer used as the gaming microcomputer in this embodiment, the processing can be replaced by saving the value held in the front register to the back register.
Next, input processing is executed in step B112. In this input process, the detection signals of the above-described sensors (start port switches 1120 and 1121, gate switch 1122, winning port switch 1123, lower count switch 1124, upper count switch 1125, etc.) are read. Specifically, the output value of each sensor is determined at each timer interruption period, and when the output value of the same level continues for the specified number of times (for example, twice), the level of this output value is detected by each sensor. Read as deterministic value of signal. When it is read that any one of the sensors is on, a flag (input flag) indicating that is set.

Next, in step B113, output processing for setting and outputting the output data set in each step to be described later to the corresponding output port is executed. This is a process for performing drive control of actuators such as solenoids (first big prize opening solenoid 1132, second big prize opening solenoid 1133, general electric solenoid 1131) based on output data set in various processes. is there.
Next, random number update processes 1 and 2 are executed in steps B114 and B115, respectively. Here, the soft random number related to the special drawing and the soft random number related to the general drawing are updated. As soft random numbers related to special figures, for example, jackpot symbol random numbers 1, 2 (random numbers for determining jackpot stop symbols), variation pattern random numbers (random numbers for determining variation patterns including presence / absence of reach action), stop symbol random numbers ( Random numbers for determining outage stop symbols). Here, the update of the random number is executed by increasing the random number by, for example, “1”. Therefore, each time this timer interrupt processing routine is repeated, the random number changes, and the extracted value of the soft random number maintains at randomness.

  In this example, there are three types of variation pattern random numbers: variation pattern random numbers 1-3. Among these, the fluctuation pattern random number 1 is a random number for selecting the reach system of the second half fluctuation (the fluctuation after the start of reach), and the fluctuation pattern random number 2 is a detailed presentation distribution (for example, plus one frame) from the reach system. The special pattern stops or the special figure stops at minus one frame), and the variation pattern random number 3 is a random number for selecting the first half variation (variation before the start of reach). is there. In addition, the variation pattern random number may directly determine all of the variation modes, but in this example, the effect control device 1053 determines a specific mode. For example, only the variation time and reach system (rough type of reach) are determined by the variation pattern random number 1, and the effect control device 1053 determines a specific variation mode based on the determined variation time and reach system.

  Next, in step B116, an error / injustice monitoring process is executed. The error / illegal monitoring process includes the above-mentioned undetected errors of the sensors, excessive errors in the winning ball discharge, the open state of the glass frame 1005, the grand prize opening 1027a (first big prize opening), and the second variable prize. This is a process for monitoring an illegal winning or the like other than when the opening of the device 1034 (the second grand prize opening 1034a) and the utility power 1026 are not open.

Next, in step B117, it is determined whether or not the game is stopped. This is because if the game stop signal (not a command) output from the payout control device 1230 is on, the game is stopped (the game is not advanced), so whether or not the game stop signal is on. judge.
If the game is stopped in step B117, the process jumps to step B122, and the process related to the game or the like (the process from step B118 to step B121) is not performed. On the other hand, if the game is not stopped in step B117, the process proceeds to step B108 to determine whether or not a communication abnormality has occurred. This is determined based on the communication abnormality flag because the communication abnormality flag is set (monitored on the game control device 1054 (main board) side) when there is a communication abnormality in the communication abnormality monitoring process described later.
If a communication abnormality is occurring in step B108, the process jumps to step B122, and the process related to the game (the process from step B119 to step B121) is not performed. On the other hand, if no communication abnormality has occurred in step B118, the process proceeds to step B119.

In step B119, a winning opening switch monitoring process is performed. The winning opening switch monitoring process monitors input flags (start opening switches 1120 and 1121, winning opening switches 1123, lower count switch 1124 and upper count switch 1125) set as described above, for example, a lower count switch. When the input flag 1124 is set, processing such as preparation for requesting the payout control device 1230 to pay out 15 prize balls is executed.
Next, special figure game processing is performed in step B120. In the special figure game process, overall control of the special figure variable display game is performed. That is, when the change start condition (start condition of the change display game) is satisfied, the determination of the big hit random number, the process of setting the combination of the special symbol stop pattern (result mode), and the process of setting the special figure change mode (Details will be described later).
Here, when the change start condition is satisfied, when the start-up prize is received in the waiting state and the change display game is started, the change display game ends and the start display is stored and the change display game is executed again. When the game is played, there are three types when the jackpot is over, the start-up memory is stored, and the variable display game is executed again.
In this special figure game process, a process of setting various output data related to the special figure variable display game is also performed. That is, the content (command data) of a command to be transmitted to, for example, the effect control device 1053 is set according to the game state of the special display variable display game.

Next, in step B121, processing for the usual variable display game is performed. That is, processing for setting the content of a command to be transmitted to the effect control device 1053 or the like in accordance with the usual variable display game state is performed.
Next, an LED editing process is executed in step B122. This is the display of the special figure of the collective display device 1035, the special figure decided in the special figure game process in step B120, the special figure decided in the general figure game process in step B121, and other information. Display (LED, 7-segment display) display processing, winning display LED editing processing (details will be described later), and the like.
Next, if the communication control timer is not “0” in step B123, the timer is updated (−1) (decremented). Next, in step B124, it is determined whether or not the communication control timer is "0". If the communication control timer is "0", the process jumps to step B129, and processing related to command determination, editing, transmission, etc. (step B125 Through step B128). On the other hand, if the communication control timer is not “0” in step B124, the process proceeds to step B125.

In step B125, a received command determination process is performed. This is to determine a command received from another control device or the like and perform necessary processing or the like (details will be described later). Next, in step B126, a payout command editing process is performed. This edits a command sent to the payout control device 1230 (details will be described later). Next, in step B127, payout command transmission processing is performed. This is to transmit a command to be sent to the payout control device 1230 (details will be described later).
Next, in step B128, an initial value is set in the communication control timer. The communication control timer controls a communication period between the game control device 1054 and another control device, and is set to, for example, 200 ms as an initial value.
Next, communication abnormality monitoring processing is performed in step B129. This is to monitor an abnormality such as the communication between the game control device 1054 and the payout control device 1230 being disconnected (details will be described later). Next, in order to resume the main routine in step B130, the register saved in step B111 is restored, timer interruption is permitted in step B131, and the process is interrupted (returned).

[Input processing]
Next, the input process (step B112) in the timer interrupt process will be described with reference to FIG.
In the input process, first, the state of the switch detection signal taken into the input port 1 is read (step B141). If there is an unused bit in the 8-bit port, the bit state is cleared (step B142).
Here, the switches monitored at the input port 1 are, for example, a magnet sensor 1142, a radio wave sensor (panel) 1143, a vibration sensor 1144, and the like.
Subsequently, the state of the input port 1 read in step B143 is saved (stored) in the switch control area 1 in the RAM, and unused bit data is prepared.
Here, “preparation” in this embodiment means setting a value in a register, but is not limited to this, and a value may be set in a RAM or other memory.
For those that require inversion of the detection signal, bit data to be inverted is prepared. For example, since the radio wave sensor (panel) 1143 needs to invert the detection signal, bit data such as such a sensor / switch is prepared.

Next, in step B144, the address of the input port 2 is prepared.
Here, the switches monitored at the input port 2 are, for example, a first start port switch 1120, a second start port switch 1121, a gate switch 1122, a winning port switch 1123, a lower count switch 1124, an upper count switch 1125, and the like.
Although not shown in FIG. 109, for example, when a plurality of winning port switches are arranged as corresponding to the winning port switch 1123, the plurality of winning port switches are monitored by the input port 2. The same applies to the lower grand prize opening switch 1124. A plurality of the magnet sensors 1142 may be arranged and monitored by the input port 1.

In step B145, the address of the switch control area 2 in the RAM is prepared. In step B146, unused bit data is prepared. In step B147, bit data to be inverted is prepared. Thereafter, a switch reading process is performed in step B148. The switch read process performs the switch read process twice in one interrupt process with a predetermined time difference, increasing the processable amount in the interrupt by extending the timer interrupt period, and the structural design etc. It balances ease.
After step B148, the input process is terminated.

[Output processing]
Next, the output process (step B113) in the above-described timer interrupt process will be described with reference to FIG.
In the output process, first, all output data of the port that outputs the segment data of the collective display device (LED) 1035 is turned off (step B151). Subsequently, the data output to the solenoid output port having the function of outputting the data of the first big prize winning solenoid 1132, the second big prize winning solenoid 1133, and the general electric solenoid 1131 is synthesized and outputted (step B152).
Next, the value of the digit counter for sequentially scanning the digit lines of the collective display device (LED) 1035 is updated (updated (+1) in the range of 0 to 3) (step B153), and the LED corresponding to the value of the digit counter The output data of the digit line is loaded (obtained) (step B154). Next, the acquired data is output to a digit output port (for example, the fifth port) (step B155). The fifth port is an output port for outputting ON / OFF data of the digit line to which the cathode terminal of the LED of the collective display device 1035 is connected.
Next, the segment line output data is loaded (acquired) from the segment data area in the RAM corresponding to the value of the digit counter (step B156), and the acquired segment output data is used as a segment output port (for example, the fourth port). (Step B157). The fourth port is an output port for outputting ON / OFF data of the segment line to which the anode terminal of the LED is connected according to the contents displayed on the collective display device 1035.
Here, the LEDs that are dynamically lit in the collective display device 1035 are, for example, as follows.
・ Special symbol display device ・ Normal symbol display device ・ Special symbol hold ・ Common figure hold ・ Round display ・ Game status display (high probability display, short time display)
・ Winning display

Subsequently, the output data 1 to 3 of the test signal to be output to the test firing test apparatus are loaded and combined, and the combined data is output to the test terminal output port 1 provided on the relay board (not shown) (step) B158). Thereafter, the test signal output data 4 to 6 to be output to the test firing test apparatus are loaded and synthesized, and the synthesized data is outputted to the test terminal output port 2 provided on the relay board (step B159).
Next, the test signal output data 7 to 8 to be output to the test firing test apparatus are loaded and combined, and the combined data is output to the test terminal output port 3 provided on the relay board (step B160). Also, the test signal output data 9 to 10 to be output to the test firing test apparatus are loaded and synthesized, and the synthesized data is outputted to the test terminal output port 4 provided on the relay board (step B161). Further, the output data 11 of the test signal to be output to the test firing test apparatus is loaded and synthesized, and the synthesized data is outputted to the test terminal output port 5 provided on the relay board (step B162). End the output process.

[Random number update process 1]
Next, the random number update process 1 (step B114) in the above-described timer interrupt process will be described with reference to FIG.
The random number update process 1 is a process for updating the initial values (start values) of the jackpot symbol random number 1, the hit random number, and the jackpot symbol random number 2 that are the targets of the initial value random number update process of FIG.
In the random number update process 1, it is first determined whether or not the normal random number is waiting for the next initial value (start value) setting (step B171).

  If the normal hit random number is not waiting for the initial value setting (step B171; NO), it is determined whether the big hit symbol random number 1 is waiting for the next initial value (start value) setting (step B174). Further, when the normal hit random number is waiting for the initial value setting (step B171; YES), the hit random number initial value random number is loaded as the next initial value (step B172), and the next normal random hit number loaded next time is loaded. The initial value is set in a register (start value setting register) that holds the start value of the corresponding random number counter (random number area) (step B173). Thereafter, it is determined whether the jackpot symbol random number 1 is waiting for the next initial value (start value) setting (step B174).

  If the jackpot symbol random number 1 is not waiting for the initial value setting (step B174; NO), it is determined whether the jackpot symbol random number 2 is waiting for the next initial value (start value) setting (step B177). If the jackpot symbol random number 1 is waiting for the initial value setting (step B174; YES), the jackpot symbol initial value random number 1 is loaded as the next initial value (step B175), and the next initial value of the loaded jackpot symbol random number 1 is loaded. The value is set in a register (start value setting register) that holds the start value of the corresponding random number counter (random number area) (step B176). Thereafter, it is determined whether the jackpot symbol random number 2 is waiting for the next initial value (start value) setting (step B177).

  If the jackpot symbol random number 2 is not waiting for the initial value setting (step B177; NO), the random number update processing 1 is terminated. If the big hit symbol random number 2 is waiting for the initial value setting (step B177; YES), the big hit symbol initial value random number 2 is loaded as the next initial value (step B178), and the next initial value of the loaded big hit symbol random number 2 is set. The value is set in the register (start value setting register) that holds the start value of the corresponding random number counter (random number area) (step B179), and the random number update process 1 is terminated.

[Random number update process 2]
Next, the random number update process 2 (step B115) in the above-described timer interrupt process will be described with reference to FIG.
The random number update process 2 is a process for updating the fluctuation pattern random number for determining the fluctuation pattern in the fluctuation display game of the special figures 1 and 2.
In the present embodiment, there are a 1-byte random number (variable pattern random numbers 2 and 3) and a 2-byte random number (variable pattern random number 1) as the fluctuation pattern random numbers, and the random number update process 2 in FIG. 125 updates both. Target and update every time an interrupt occurs. In addition, when the random number to be updated is 2 bytes, the update process is performed for different interrupts for the upper byte and the lower byte. That is, the update of the 2-byte variation pattern random number 1 (reach variation mode determination random number) by the random number update processing 2 executed in one interrupt processing for the main processing is executed for either the upper 1 byte or the lower 1 byte. It is comprised so that.

In the random number update process 2, first, a random number update scan counter for sequentially specifying which of the plurality of random numbers to be updated is targeted for the current update process is updated (step B181). Here, it is updated in the range of 0 to 3.
The types of random numbers to be updated are as follows.
-When 0: Fluctuating pattern random number 1 (high order)
・ When 1: Variable pattern random number 1 (low order)
・ 2: Fluctuating pattern random number 2
・ 3: Fluctuating pattern random number 3
Next, the address of the effect random number update table corresponding to the value of the random number update scan counter is calculated (step B182). Then, the random number upper limit determination value is acquired from the table referred to based on the calculated address (step B183). The table to be referred to at this time stores an upper limit value for each type of random number, that is, a value for determining whether or not the random number has made a round.
Here, the effect random number update table has data for the types of random numbers to be updated (4 blocks), and details are as follows.
・ Upper limit judgment value ・ R register mask value ・ Random number area type information to be updated (details below)
1 byte random number 2 byte random number (upper)
2-byte random number (low order)
・ Address of update area

Subsequently, for example, a random value such as a refresh register (hereinafter referred to as an R register) used for refreshing a DRAM provided in a Z80 microcomputer used as a gaming microcomputer in this embodiment. The value of the register in which is set is read (step B184). By using the value of the R register, randomness can be given to the random number. After step B184, a mask value for masking the value of the R register is acquired, and the value of the R register is masked (step B185). Note that the mask value is a bit number that varies depending on the random number to be updated. For example, when the lower 1 byte of the fluctuation pattern random number 1 is updated, the lower 3 bits of the R register and the upper 1 byte of the fluctuation pattern random number 1 Is updated in the lower 4 bits of the R register. This is because the upper limit varies depending on the type of random number.
As a mask value, when the lower 1 byte of the fluctuation pattern random number 1 is updated, the lower 3 bits of the R register are updated. When the upper byte of the fluctuation pattern random number 1 is updated, the lower byte of the R register is updated. Although 4 bits have been exemplified, the numerical value is an example and the present invention is not limited to this.

Next, it is checked whether the random number area to be updated is higher in the 2-byte random number (step B186). If it is higher than the 2-byte random number (step B186; YES), the process proceeds to step B187, and the value remaining by masking the value of the R register with the mask value (hereinafter referred to as the masked value) is “1”. Is added value (higher order), and “0” is added value (lower order), and the process proceeds to step B188.
The reason why “1” is added to the masked value is that the masked value may be “0”, and if “0” is added later, it does not change from the value before the addition, so that it is avoided.
On the other hand, if the random number area to be updated is the lower order of the 2-byte random number or the 1-byte random number (step B186; NO), the process branches to step B189 to set “0” as the addition value (upper order) and set the mask value to “1”. The added value is regarded as an added value (lower order) and the process proceeds to step B188.

In the next step B188, it is checked whether or not the random number area (random number counter) to be updated is a 2-byte random number. If it is not a 2-byte random number, the process jumps to step B190 (step B188; NO). On the other hand, when the random number area is a 2-byte random number, the process proceeds to Step B191 (Step B188; YES). In step B190, “0” is set as a random value (higher order), and the value obtained by adding “1” to the mask value is set as the value (lower order) of the random number area to be updated, and the process proceeds to step B192.
When the random number area is a 2-byte random number, the value of the random number area (2 bytes) updated in step B191 is set as a random number value, and the process proceeds to step B192.

Next, in step B192, a value obtained by adding the addition value determined in steps B187 and B189 to the random value is calculated to obtain a new random value, and whether or not this random value exceeds the upper limit determination value acquired in step B183. Determine (step B193).
If the newly calculated random number value exceeds the upper limit determination value, the upper limit determination value is subtracted from the calculated random number value to obtain the current random number value (step B194), and then the process proceeds to step B195. On the other hand, if the newly calculated random number value does not exceed the upper limit determination value, the calculated random number value is set as the current random number value, and the process jumps to step B194 and proceeds to step B195.
In step B195, the lower order of the random number value is saved in the corresponding random number area. Here, the data is saved in either the 1-byte random number area or the lower-order area of the 2-byte random number. Subsequently, it is checked whether the updated random number is a 2-byte random number (step B196). If the updated random number is a 2-byte random number (step B196; YES), the higher order of the random number value is higher in the random number area (2-byte random number (upper)) side. (Step B197). Here, the data is saved in the upper area of the 2-byte random number. After step B197, the random number update process 2 ends.
On the other hand, if the updated random number is not a 2-byte random number (step B196; NO), the process jumps to step B197, does not perform the process, and ends the random number update process 2.

In this way, the CPU 1111 updates the fluctuation pattern random number for determining the fluctuation pattern in the fluctuation display game of the special figures 1 and 2. As the variation pattern, as will be described later, a variation pattern of “no reach”, “normal reach”, “special (SP) 1-A reach”, “special (SP) 1-B reach”, “special ( Fluctuation patterns (reach) in various reach states such as “SP) 2-A reach”, “Special (SP) 2-B reach”, “Special (SP) 3-A reach”, “Special (SP) 3-B reach”, etc. Variation mode).
Therefore, the CPU 1111 determines the reach variation mode for determining the reach variation mode in the reach state among various random numbers extracted based on the inflow of game balls into the start area of the start winning opening 1025 and the normal variation winning device 1026. It serves as a random number update means for updating random numbers for use (variation pattern random numbers).

[Error / Unauthorization monitoring processing]
Next, the error / injustice monitoring process (step B116) in the above-described timer interrupt process will be described with reference to FIG.
The error / injustice monitoring process is a process for monitoring whether or not there is a signal input (signal change) from a switch provided in various winning awards and for monitoring an error.

In the error / illegal monitoring process, first, the illegal prize monitoring table 1 (for example, one of the lower prize winning tables (for example, the lower prize winning table 1027a of the first variable prize winning device 1027) corresponding to one lower count switch 1124 is selected. Prepare the port number to which the detection signal from the count switch 1124 is input and the data indicating the bit position in the port of the signal, etc. (Data indicating the number of the port to which the detection signal from the count switch 1124 is input and the bit position in the port of the signal are stored) (step B201).
In the present embodiment, two lower count switches 1124 are provided, and any of the game balls that have flowed into the first big prize opening 1027a of the first variable winning device 1027 are detected by any of the lower count switches 1124. Therefore, here, the illegal prize monitoring table 1 corresponding to one lower count switch 1124 and the illegal prize monitoring table 2 corresponding to the other lower count switch 1124 are prepared.
If only one lower count switch 1124 is provided, one unauthorized winning monitoring table is prepared.
Next, an illegal winning monitoring process (step B202) for monitoring whether there is an illegal winning in the first big winning opening 1027a even though the first big winning opening 1027a is not open is executed.

Next, an illegal prize monitoring table corresponding to the upper count switch 1125 in the upper prize winning opening (the second big prize winning opening 1034a of the second variable prize winning device 1034) is prepared (step B203), and it is monitored whether there is an illegal winning prize. An illegal winning monitoring process (step B204) is executed.
Thus, there are three count switches, two lower count switches 1124 arranged at the lower major prize opening (first major prize opening 1027a), and two upper count switches 1124 arranged at the second major prize winning opening 1034a. The upper count switch 1125 is one.
Next, a fraudulent winning monitoring table of the winning switch in the ordinary electric power system is prepared (step B205). There is a second start port switch 1121 for detecting a winning to the second start winning port 1026 as an ordinary electric accessory (general power).
Next, an illegal winning monitoring process (step B206) for monitoring whether there is an illegal winning is performed.

Next, radio wave fraud monitoring processing is performed (step B207). This monitors radio fraud based on the output of the radio wave sensor (panel) 1143 (details will be described later). Next, a magnet fraud monitoring process is performed (step B208). This is to monitor magnet fraud based on the output of the magnet sensor 1142 (details will be described later).
Next, an error scan counter for sequentially specifying which switch or signal of the plurality of switches and signals to be monitored for errors is to be monitored this time is updated ("+1" in the range of 0 to 1). Update) and prepare (step B209). Subsequently, the gaming machine error monitoring table 1 is prepared (step B210).
The types of errors monitored by the gaming machine error monitoring table 1 are as follows.
(B) When 0: Switch error error (connector disconnection, switch failure, etc.)
(B) When 1: Game stop error (communication failure, etc.)
Next, an error check process of the type defined in the gaming machine error monitoring table 1 is performed (step B211), the error / illegal monitoring process is terminated, and the process returns to the timer interrupt process.

[Unauthorized winnings monitoring process]
Next, the illegal prize monitoring process (step B202, step B204, step B206) in the above-described error / injustice monitoring process will be described with reference to FIG.
The illegal prize monitoring process is performed by each of the two lower count switches 1124 of the lower major prize opening (first major prize winning opening 1027a of the first variable prize winning apparatus 1027), This is a process performed for the upper count switch 1125 and the second start port switch 1121 in the public power system. For the big prize opening (first variable prize winning device 1027, 1034) and the ordinary electric power (ordinary variable prize winning device 1026), it is easy to perform fraud in which the opening and closing member is forcibly opened and the game ball is inserted and the prize ball is paid out. In addition to detecting winnings, fraud is monitored.
Here, the information defined in the fraud monitoring table to be prepared for explaining the fraud winning monitoring process in the error / fraud monitoring process is as follows.
・ Data for judging whether there is an input (monitor switch bit)
・ Lower address of fraud monitoring information ・ Lower address of illegal prize amount area ・ Illegal prize error notification command ・ Unauthorized prize number upper limit (number of fraud occurrence determination)
-Winning mouth switch table address-Notification timer update information (permission / update)
In the fraud winning monitoring process, first, the fraud monitoring period flag of the winning port switch subject to error monitoring is checked to determine whether it is during the fraud monitoring period (step B211). The fraud monitoring period is a period other than during the special gaming state in which the first variable prize winning device 1027 is opened when the prize monitor switch for error monitoring is the lower count switch 1124. In the case of the count switch 1125, it is a period other than during the special gaming state in which the second variable winning device 1034 is opened. Further, when the winning opening switch to be monitored for error is the second start opening switch 1121, it is a period other than the state in which the opening control of the normal variation winning apparatus 1026 is being executed based on the usual hit.

If it is the fraud monitoring period (step B211; YES), it is determined whether or not there is an input to the target prize-winning switch (step B212). If there is no input to the target winning opening switch (step B212; NO), the process branches to step B219, and if the target notification timer is not "0", -1 is updated, and then the processing after step B220 is executed. . Note that the minimum value of the notification timer is set to zero.
On the other hand, if there is an input to the target winning opening switch (step B212; YES), the target illegal winning number is updated by 1 (step B213), and the number of illegal winnings after addition is the number of fraud occurrence determinations to be monitored (for example, 5) is determined (step B214).
The number of determinations is set to five. For example, when a large winning opening in an open state is converted to a closed state, a game ball is sandwiched between door members of the large winning opening, and the gaming ball is counted by a count switch (lower count switch 1124). In order to prevent the situation from being judged as illegal when a prize has been passed past the effective period of time or when noise has occurred in the signal, it is not illegal. This is because an error is not easily determined.
If it is determined that the number of determinations has not been exceeded (step B214; NO), the process jumps to step B219, and if the target notification timer is not "0", -1 is updated, and then the processing after step B220 is executed. .
If the determined number is exceeded (step B214; YES), the number of fraudulent winnings is limited to the fraud occurrence determining number (step B215), and the initial value is saved in the target fraudulent winning notification timer area (step B216). Next, a target fraud occurrence command is prepared (step B217), an illegal winning flag is prepared as a fraud flag (step B218), and the prepared fraud flag is compared with the value of the target fraud flag area (step B225). ).

On the other hand, if it is not the fraud monitoring period (step B211; NO), the process jumps to step B219, and if the target notification timer is not "0", -1 is updated, and then the processing after step B220 is executed.
The update of the notification timer is allowed when the error-monitoring prize-winning switch is one of the lower count switches 1124, and is not allowed when the error-monitoring prize-winning switch is the other lower count switch 1124. As a result, it is possible to prevent the notification timer from being updated twice as much as the unauthorized notification about the first variable winning device 1027 and to be up in half of the specified time (for example, 60000 ms).
That is, since the error monitoring is performed with the two lower count switches 1124 for the lower major prize opening (the first variable prize winning device 1027), when the timer is updated with both switches, the timer is doubled. As a result, the illegal timer times out in half of the specified time, so that the timer is updated only at the timing of the lower count switch 1124 that performs monitoring processing later.
Note that when the winning port switch subject to error monitoring is the upper count switch 1125 or the second start port switch 1121 in the ordinary power system, the update of the notification timer is always permitted.

  After step B219, it is determined whether or not the value of the notification timer is 0 (step B220). If the value is not 0 (step B220; NO), that is, if the time is not up, the illegal winning monitoring process Exit. If the value is 0 (step B220; YES), that is, if the time has expired or has already expired, a target fraud cancel command is prepared (step B221), and an illegal win cancel flag is set as the fraud flag. Prepare (step B222). And it is determined whether it is the moment when the value of the notification timer becomes 0 (step B223).

  When it is the moment when the value of the notification timer becomes 0 (step B223; YES), that is, when the value of the notification timer becomes 0 in the current illegal winning monitoring process, the target illegal winning number is cleared (step B224), the prepared illegal flag is compared with the value of the target illegal flag area (step B225). Further, when it is not the moment when the value of the notification timer becomes 0 (step B223; NO), that is, when the value of the notification timer becomes 0 in the previous illegal winning monitoring process, The value in the flag area is compared (step B225).

When proceeding from step B218 to step B225 or proceeding from step B223 or step B224 to step B225, as described above, in step B225, the prepared fraud flag is compared with the value of the target fraud flag area, and prepared. If the illegal flag matches the value of the target illegal flag area (step B225; YES), the illegal winning monitoring process is terminated. When the prepared illegal flag and the value of the target illegal flag area do not match (step B225; NO), the prepared illegal flag is saved in the target illegal flag area (step B226), and the production command setting process is performed. (Step B227), the illegal winning monitoring process is terminated.
Through the above processing, an error notification command is transmitted to the effect control device 1053 when an error occurs, and an illegal prize error cancel command is transmitted to the effect control device 1053 when the error is canceled, so that error notification start and end are set. Will be.

[Radio fraud monitoring processing]
Next, the radio wave fraud monitoring process (step B207) in the above-described error / fraud monitoring process will be described with reference to FIG.
The radio wave fraud monitoring process determines the presence / absence of an abnormality based on a detection signal from the radio wave sensor (panel) 1143, and sets the start and end of fraud notification.
In the radio wave fraud monitoring process, first, from the state of the detection signal output from the radio wave sensor (board) 1143 and taken into the input port 1 in step B213, the radio wave sensor (board) 1143 is turned on, that is, in the state of detecting abnormal radio waves. Determine if there is. When the radio wave sensor (panel) 1143 is on (step B231; YES), that is, when an abnormal radio wave is detected, the radio wave fraud notification timer initial value is saved in the radio wave fraud notification timer area (step B232).

  Then, a radio fraud notification command is prepared (step B232), a radio fraud occurrence flag is prepared as a radio fraud flag (step B234), and it is determined whether the prepared radio fraud flag matches the value of the radio fraud flag area. (Step B239). That is, in the case of radio wave fraud, unlike the case of magnetic fraud, it is determined that an abnormality has occurred when an abnormal radio wave is detected.

On the other hand, when the radio wave sensor (panel) 1143 is not on (step B231; NO), that is, when an abnormal radio wave is not detected, −1 unless the radio wave fraud notification timer that defines the radio wave fraud notification time is 0. Update (step B235). Note that the minimum value of the radio wave fraud notification timer is set to zero. Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the radio wave unauthorized notification timer is 0 (step B236).
If the value of the radio wave fraud notification timer is not 0 (step B236; NO), that is, if the time is not up, the radio wave fraud monitoring process is terminated. In addition, when the value of the radio wave unauthorized notification timer is 0 (step B236; YES), that is, when the time has expired or when the time has already expired, and when the unauthorized notification period ends, If not, a command for terminating radio fraud notification is prepared (step B237), a radio fraud cancel flag is prepared as a radio fraud flag (step B238), and the prepared radio fraud flag is a value in the radio fraud flag area. (Step B239).

If the prepared radio fraud flag matches the value of the radio fraud flag area (step B239; YES), the radio fraud monitoring process is terminated. If the values do not match (step B239; NO), the prepared radio fraud flag is saved in the radio fraud flag area (step B240), a production command setting process is performed (step B251), and the radio fraud monitoring process is terminated. To do.
Here, the arrows in FIG. 128 indicate the processing route (normal route) when there is no radio wave fraud and is normal. That is, in the normal case, the process route of Step B231, Step B235, Step B236, Step B237, Step B238, Step B239, and RET is passed. Normally, this normal route is repeated.

[Magnetic fraud monitoring processing]
Next, the magnet fraud monitoring process (step B208) in the above-described error / fraud monitoring process will be described with reference to FIG.
In the magnet fraud monitoring process, the detection signal from the magnet sensor 1142 is checked to determine whether there is any abnormality, and fraud notification is set to start or end.
In the magnet fraud monitoring process, first, from the state of the detection signal output from the magnet sensor 1142 and taken into the input port 1, it is determined whether the magnet sensor 1142 is on, that is, an abnormal magnetism is detected (step B251). ). Note that in step B251 of FIG. 129, the process is for detecting magnet fraud, so the notation “magnet sensor is on?” Is used.
When the magnet sensor 1142 is on (step B251; YES), that is, when abnormal magnetism is detected, the magnet fraud monitoring timer for measuring the abnormal magnetism detection period is updated by +1 (step B252), and the timer Determines whether the time has expired (step B253).

When the magnet fraud monitoring timer expires (step B253; YES), that is, when abnormal magnetism is continuously detected for a certain period, the magnet fraud monitoring timer is cleared (step B254), and the magnet fraud notification timer initial value ( For example, 60000 ms) is saved in the magnet fraud notification timer area (step B255). Then, a magnet fraud notification command is prepared (step B256), a magnet fraud occurrence flag is prepared as a magnet fraud flag (step B257), and it is determined whether the prepared magnet fraud flag matches the value of the magnet fraud flag area. (Step B258). That is, when the magnet sensor 1142 is continuously turned on for a certain period (for example, 8 interruptions), it is determined that an abnormality has occurred.
That is, it is determined that an abnormality has occurred by continuously inputting the magnet sensor detection signal 8 times. This is because the sensing of the magnet sensor 1142 is 4 ms, and it is determined that the fraud has occurred in 32 ms. Therefore, if the magnet sensor detection signal is turned ON and interrupted 8 times, it can be determined to be fraudulent.

  On the other hand, when the magnet sensor 1142 is not on (step B251; NO), that is, when no abnormal magnetism is detected, the magnet fraud monitoring timer is cleared (step B259), and the magnet fraud that defines the magnet fraud notification time is specified. If the notification timer is not 0, -1 is updated (step B260). The minimum value of the magnet fraud notification timer is set to zero. Next, it is determined whether the value of the magnet fraud notification timer is 0 (step B261). In addition, also when the magnet fraud monitoring timer has not expired (step B253; NO), the process proceeds to step B260.

If the value of the magnet fraud notification timer is not 0 (step B261; NO), that is, if the time is not up, the magnet fraud monitoring process is terminated.
Further, when the value of the magnet fraud notification timer is 0 (step B261; YES), that is, when the time is up or when the time has already expired, and when the time of the fraud notification ends, or the fraud notification is received from the beginning. If not, a command for terminating the magnet fraud notification is prepared (step B262). Further, a magnet fraud release flag is prepared as a magnet fraud flag (step B263), and it is determined whether the prepared magnet fraud flag matches the value of the magnet fraud flag region (step B258).

If the prepared magnet fraud flag matches the value of the magnet fraud flag area (step B258; YES), the magnet fraud monitoring process is terminated. If the values do not match (step B258; NO), the prepared magnet fraud flag is saved in the magnet fraud flag area (step B264), a production command setting process is performed (step B265), and the magnet fraud monitoring process is terminated. To do.
Here, in FIG. 129, the arrow indicates the processing route (normal route) when there is no magnet fraud and is normal. That is, in the normal case, the process route of step B251, step B259, step B260, step B261, step B262, step B263, step B258, and RET is passed. Normally, this normal route is repeated.

[Error check processing]
Next, the error check process (step B211) in the error / injustice monitoring process described above will be described with reference to FIG.
In the error check process, first, an error monitoring table corresponding to an error scan counter for sequentially specifying which switch or signal among the plurality of switches and signals to be monitored for errors is to be monitored this time. Is acquired (step B271).
The information defined on the prepared gaming machine error monitoring table includes the following.
(A) Data for determining switch status (b) Error notification command (c) Error notification end command (d) Error occurrence monitoring timer comparison value (e) Error release monitoring timer comparison value (f) Address of switch status area ( G) Error monitoring timer area address (H) Error flag area address

Next, the state of the target switch acquired this time is checked, and it is determined whether the switch (including the signal) to be monitored is on, that is, a state indicating an error (step B272).
If the switch to be monitored is not on (step B272: NO), an error release flag is prepared as an error flag (step B273), and a target error notification end command is prepared (step B274). Thereafter, the target error cancellation monitoring timer comparison value is acquired (step B275), and the value of the target switch control area is compared with the current switch state (step B279).
On the other hand, if the switch to be monitored is ON (step B272: YES), an error occurrence flag may be prepared as an error flag because there is a possibility of an error occurrence (step B276). For example, as one of the errors defined in the gaming machine error monitoring table, if the game stop signal is turned on when communication between the payout control device 1230 and the card unit 1015 is cut off, step B272 becomes YES. If YES, an error occurrence flag is prepared in step B276.
Next, a target error notification command is prepared (step B277). Thereafter, the target error occurrence monitoring timer comparison value is acquired (step B278), and the value of the target switch control area is compared with the current switch state (step B279).

  When the process proceeds from step B275 or step B279 to step B279 and the value of the target switch control area matches the current switch state (step B279; YES), that is, if the switch state has not changed, an error The target error monitoring timer is updated by +1 in order to determine a timer for determining whether or not an action is necessary (step B282), and the value of the target error monitoring timer is a monitoring timer comparison value (a criterion for determining that an action for an error is required Value) is reached (step B283). Also, if the value of the target switch control area does not match the current switch state (step B279; NO), that is, if the switch state has changed, it is determined that no error handling is necessary and the target switch The current switch state is saved in the control area (step B280), the target error monitoring timer is cleared (step B281), the target error monitoring timer is updated by one (step B282), and the target error monitoring timer is updated. It is determined whether the value of has reached the monitoring timer comparison value (step B283).

If the value of the target error monitoring timer has not reached the monitoring timer comparison value (step B283; NO), the error check process is terminated. When the value of the target error monitoring timer reaches the monitoring timer comparison value (step B283: YES), the error monitoring timer is updated by -1 and kept at the value of the comparison value -1 (step B284). The error flag is compared with the value of the target error flag area (step B285).
Here, when it is determined in step B283 that the target error monitoring timer has reached the monitoring timer comparison value, it is considered that the error occurrence or cancellation state has been determined. However, there may be a situation in which the occurrence of an error is confirmed when an error has already occurred, or the error cancellation is confirmed when the error is not occurring, so that the process of step B284 is followed by step B285. Then, by comparing the prepared error flag with the value of the target error flag area, it is checked whether the currently determined error state is the same as the current error flag state.

If the prepared error flag matches the value of the target error flag area (step B285; YES), the error status has not changed, and it is determined that no action is required. End the check process. If the set error flag and the value of the target error flag area do not match (if the error flag is not the same) (step B285; NO), it means that the error state has changed to a new error state. The error flag is saved in the target error flag area (step B286), and the process proceeds to step B287. That is, the value of the target error flag area is changed to that in the currently determined error state, and the process proceeds to step B287. In step B287, effect command setting processing is performed, and a command corresponding to the error state determined this time is set. As a result, a measure corresponding to the current error state is performed. For example, when communication between the payout control device 1230 and the card unit 1015 is interrupted (game stop signal is on), an error display is informed. Or canceling the notification. After step B287, the error check process is terminated.
In this way, if an error occurs, a corresponding error flag is set to prepare a treatment command, and if the error is resolved, the corresponding error flag is cleared and a resolution command is set. In particular, in this error check process, not only the occurrence of an error is monitored, but also the cancellation is monitored and the process is shared.
Note that such error check processing is the same for errors such as glass frame opening and front frame opening.

[Prize mouth switch monitoring process]
Next, the winning opening switch monitoring process (step B119) in the above-described timer interrupt process will be described with reference to FIG.
The winning opening switch monitoring process is a process for monitoring whether or not there is an input of a signal (a change in signal) from a switch provided at each of the various winning openings.
In the winning opening switch monitoring process, first, in step B291, a winning opening monitoring table for the winning opening switch is set. As the winning opening monitoring table, for example, the following plurality of tables are set. However, a plurality of tables may be combined into one.
・ Winning mouth monitoring table 1
A table corresponding to one lower count switch 1124 in the lower major prize opening (first variable winning device 1027), for example, the number of the port to which a detection signal from one lower count switch 1124 is input and the signal The data indicating the bit position and the like in the port is stored.
・ Winning mouth monitoring table 2
It is a table corresponding to the other lower count switch 1124 in the lower major prize opening (first variable winning device 1027). For example, the number of the port to which the detection signal from the other lower count switch 1124 is input and the signal The data indicating the bit position and the like in the port is stored.
・ Winning mouth monitoring table 3
A table corresponding to the upper count switch 1125 in the upper prize winning opening (second variable winning device 1034). For example, in the port number to which the detection signal from the upper count switch 1125 is input or in the port of the signal The data indicating the bit position and the like are stored.
A power train winning opening monitoring table is a table corresponding to the second start opening switch 1121 for detecting a winning at the second start winning opening 26 as a power transmission, for example, a detection from the second start opening switch 1121 Data indicating the number of a port to which a signal is input, the bit position within the port of the signal, and the like are stored.
Other hole winning port monitoring table As the winning port switches that do not require fraud monitoring, there are, for example, the first starting port switch 1120 and the winning port switches 1123 provided for the general winning ports 1028 to 1031. It is a table corresponding to a switch for detecting winning in the mouth.

Next, the number of winning opening switches monitored in step B292 is acquired. This is to obtain the number of all winning opening switches. In step B293, it is determined whether the target switch is valid. Some prize opening switches become invalid when an illegal prize is generated. For example, a large prize opening switch (a plurality of lower count switches 1124 and an upper count switch 1125) or a starter switch (second starter switch in the public power system). 1121) becomes invalid when an illegal winning occurs. On the other hand, as the prize opening switch that does not require fraud monitoring, for example, there are a prize opening switch 1123 provided for the first start opening switch 1120 and the general prize opening 1028 to 1031 (so-called other holes). Each prize opening switch is always enabled.
If the target switch is not valid in step B293, the process jumps to step B297. Some prize opening switches become invalid when an illegal prize is generated. For example, the above-mentioned large prize opening switch and the starter switch in the electric train are invalidated when an illegal prize occurs. If is not valid, the process jumps to step B297. On the other hand, there are a first start port switch 1120 and a winning port switch 1123 provided for other holes as winning port switches that do not require fraud monitoring. Since these winning port switches are always valid, NO is determined in step B293. And the process does not jump to step B297.

If the target switch is valid in step B293, the process proceeds to step B294, and it is determined whether or not there is an input to the target switch. If there is an input to the target switch, the winning number counter corresponding to the target switch is updated (incremented) by 1 in step B295. On the other hand, if there is no input to the target switch in step B294, the process jumps to step B297.
Here, the winning number counter includes the following, which are used in the payout command editing process.
・ Starting Port 1 Winning Counter: Counts the winnings to the 1st starting Winning Port 1025 ・ Starting Port 2 Winning Counter: counts the winnings to Fuden (2nd Starting Winning Port 1026) ・ Large Winning Port 1 Winning Counter: Shimodai Counts winning prizes (first variable winning device 1027) / Large winning port 2 winning counter: Counts top winning award (second variable winning device 1034) / Other hole winning counter: General winning port 1028 In step B296, the winning display counter corresponding to the target switch is updated by 1 (incremented). Thereby, the winning display LED of the collective display device 1035 is lit for a predetermined period according to the winning. After step B296, the process proceeds to step B297.
The winning number counter and the winning display counter do not return to “0” after one round, but remain at the upper limit value.

  As described above, when the process proceeds from Step B293 or Step B294 to Step B297, or when the process proceeds from Step B296 to Step B297, the table address is updated to the data address of the next switch in Step B297. As a result, the winning opening switch corresponding to the data address of the next switch becomes the switch to be monitored, and the processing of this routine is performed. Next, in step B298, it is determined whether or not the monitoring of all the switches has been completed. If the monitoring has not been completed, the process returns to step B293 to repeat the loop. When all the switches have been monitored, the process exits from step B298 to YES, finishes the winning opening switch monitoring process, and returns.

[LED editing process]
Next, the LED editing process (step B122) in the above-described timer interrupt process will be described with reference to FIG.
The LED editing process is a process related to the segment LED provided in the collective display device 1035, and the collective display device 1035, as described above, displays a normal figure, a special figure, and also a special figure and a common figure. The start memory hold display (special figure hold display, general figure hold display) and the game state display are performed.
These displays are configured by, for example, a plurality of indicators (for example, one lamp or a seven-segment indicator) using LEDs as light emission sources. More specifically, for example, special figure 1 display, special figure 2 display, special figure 1 hold LED, special figure 2 hold LED, winning display LED, general figure LED, general figure hold LED, round display LED, status display The LED editing process includes the LEDs and performs settings related to their driving.

In the LED editing process, first, a general map hold number display table in which the display mode of the general map hold LED is defined is set (step B301), display data corresponding to the general map hold number is acquired, and the general map hold LED is displayed. Are saved in the segment area (for example, the segment area of the usual hold LED) (step B302). Next, a special figure 1 hold number display table in which the display form of the special figure 1 hold LED is defined is set (step B303), display data corresponding to the special figure 1 hold number is acquired, and the special figure 1 hold LED is obtained. Are saved in the segment area (for example, the segment area of the special figure 1 hold LED) (step B304).
Thereafter, a special figure 2 hold number display table in which the display mode of the special figure 2 hold LED is defined is set (step B305), display data corresponding to the special figure 2 hold number is acquired, and the special figure 2 hold LED is displayed. Save to the segment area (for example, the segment area of the special figure 2 reserved LED) (B306). Further, a round display table in which the display mode of the round display LED is defined is set (B307), the display data corresponding to the round display LED output pointer is acquired, and the segment area of the round display LED (for example, the round display LED Save to segment area (step B308).

Next, a game state display table in which the display mode of the state display LED in the collective display device 1035 is defined (step B309), display data corresponding to the game state display number is acquired, and the segment area of the state display LED (For example, the segment area of the status display LED) is saved (step B310). Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the high probability notification flag related to notification that the probability state of jackpot is a high probability state at the time of power failure recovery (step B311). If the high-probability notification flag is on (step B311; YES), that is, if the high-probability state is being notified, the process jumps to step B313. In step B313, a winning display LED editing process is performed. This is a process of displaying the number of winning balls corresponding to winning in the winning opening by the winning display LED in the collective display device 1035 (details will be described later). After step B313, the LED editing process is terminated.
If the high probability notification flag is not on (step B311; NO), the off data of the high probability notification LED is saved in the segment area of the status display LED (for example, the segment area of the status display LED) (step B312). Then, the process proceeds to step B313, where the winning display LED editing process as described above is performed, and then the LED editing process is terminated.

[Winning display LED editing process]
Next, the winning display LED editing process in step B313 of the LED editing process will be described with reference to FIG.
When this routine is started, first, if the winning display output control timer is not “0” in step B321, the timer is updated (decremented) by “−1”, and the winning display output control timer is “0” in step B322. It is determined whether or not. This is because the winning display output control timer is set to an initial value (for example, 600 ms) in step B330 described later, and "-1" is updated (decremented) from the initial value, and the timer is set to "0". It is to determine whether it has become.

If the decision result in the step B322 is YES, the process advances to the following step B323 to determine whether or not there is a count in the prize display counter area (that is, whether or not there is count data for lighting the prize display LED). If there is no count in the display counter area, the address of the winning number display counter area checked in step B324 is updated. This is to determine whether or not the count data for turning on the winning display LED corresponding to the current number of winning balls has been read out from the winning display number storing area storing the winning numbers. If there is no count, it is determined that the current number of winning balls has been read from the winning display number storage area, and the process proceeds to step B324.
After step B324, it is determined in the subsequent step B325 whether or not all areas have been checked. If all areas have not been checked, the process returns to step B323 to repeat the loop. Then, the address of the winning number display counter area is updated by repeating the loop, and when the check of all areas is completed, the process goes from step B325 to step B331.
In step B331, the unlit data is saved in the segment area. As a result of the processing in step B331, the winning ball display of the winning display LED disappears. After step B331, the process returns.

On the other hand, if there is a count in the winning display counter area in step B323, it is determined that the current winning ball number has not been read from the winning display number storage area, and the process proceeds to step B327. In step B327, the target winning number display counter is updated (decremented) by “−1”, and then LED output pattern data corresponding to the address of the winning display counter area is acquired in step B328. The LED output pattern data is data for determining which of the 7 segments is to be lit (or blinked) because the winning display LED of the collective display device 1035 is composed of two 7-segment LEDs. is there. For example, when displaying the number of winning balls = 10, the lighting data of each segment is acquired so that two digits “10” are displayed by two LEDs.
Subsequently, in step B329, after the LED output pattern data acquired in step B328 is saved in the segment area of the winning display LED, the process proceeds to step B330. Thereby, the winning ball display of the winning display LED is turned on.

In step B330, the timer initial value is saved in the winning display output control timer, and the process returns.
In this case, the winning display output control timer is set to “150” as an initial value. This is because the repetition timing of this routine is every 4 ms, so “150” × 4 ms = 600 ms. From 600 ms to 500 ms (0.5 seconds) is ON, and the subsequent 100 ms (“25” × 4 ms = 100 ms) is This is because by turning OFF, the winning display can be controlled at the timing of 0.5 seconds ON (lights on) and 0.1 seconds OFF (lights off).
Therefore, while the routine is repeated “125” times from one lighting cycle 600 ms, the winning display is ON (lit) for 0.5 seconds, and thereafter, the winning display is displayed while the routine is repeated “25” times. Is controlled at a timing of 0.1 second OFF (light-off).

On the other hand, if the winning display output control timer is not “0” in step B322, the process branches to step B326 to determine whether the winning display control timer is in the lighting section. This is to determine whether or not the winning display is an ON (lighted) section (period), and the determination value of step B326 differs depending on the value of the winning display output control timer. That is, as described above, when the lighting cycle of the winning display LED is 600 ms, the winning display output control timer is turned on for 500 ms (0.5 seconds) and then turned off for 100 ms. It is determined from the value of whether or not it is in the lighting section.
If the determination result in step B326 is the ON section, the current routine is terminated and the process returns. On the other hand, if the winning display control timer is not in the lighting period in step B326, the process proceeds to step B331, the extinction data is saved in the segment area of the winning display LED, and the process returns. Thereby, the winning ball display of the winning display LED disappears.

As described above, the winning display control timer is set to the initial value and this routine is repeated, and the determination result of step B321 becomes NO until the value of the winning display control timer becomes a predetermined value (for example, “0”). From B321, the process returns to Step B326, and during that time, the processing after Step B323 is executed, and the value of the output pattern data of the winning display LED is held in the segment area while following the count in the winning display counter area (lighting data of the winning display LED). Thus, the number of winning balls is displayed on the winning display LED. When the value of the winning display control timer reaches a predetermined value (for example, “25”), the turn-off data of the winning display LED is set, and after the number of winning balls is displayed on the winning display LED, the light is turned off for a predetermined time. Further, even when winning continuously, since the off time is entered in the winning indication LED, the break becomes clear.
Here, in step B326, the winning display control timer determines whether or not it is in the lighting section. This is to check whether it is in the lighting section (500 ms section), so the turn-off period in step B331 ( The “off period” is 100 ms from the calculation result of (initial value 600 ms−500 ms = 100 ms), and the off time is entered in the winning display LED even when winning continuously.
In the fifteenth embodiment, the lighting and extinguishing time of the prize display LED is the same in the normal mode and in the special mode (such as during a big hit). However, the present invention is not limited thereto. The display LED may be turned on and off differently (for example, it is turned on for 1 second in the normal state and turned on for 0.5 second in the special mode).

[Received command judgment processing]
Next, the received command determination process (step B125) in the above-described timer interrupt process will be described with reference to FIG.
The received command determination process is an interrupt for receiving a command transmitted from the payout control device 1230 to the game control device 1054.
When this routine is started, it is first determined in step B341 whether or not gaming machine frame information has been received. The gaming machine frame information is determined by reading from the gaming machine frame information receiving buffer for receiving a command transmitted from the payout control device 1230 to the gaming control device 1054.
This is because a command (for example, an error / unauthorized information command) may be transmitted from the payout control device 1230 to the game control device 1054, so that the gaming machine frame information is received and temporarily held. This is to determine the presence or absence of data in the buffer.

If it is determined in step B341 that the gaming machine frame information has been received, the process proceeds to step B342, an error / unauthorized information command is read from the gaming machine frame information reception buffer, and the process proceeds to step B343. In step B343, an effect error / incorrect information command is prepared based on the read command, and in step B344, effect command setting processing is performed. The effect command setting process is a process of writing a command to be transmitted from the game control device 1054 to the effect control device 1053 by serial communication in the effect serial command buffer. As a result, the production error / unauthorized information command prepared based on the command read from the gaming machine frame information reception buffer is transmitted to the production control device 1053 this time.
Next, in step B345, it is determined whether or not the frame opening information (opening information on the front frame 1004) has changed. The frame opening information is determined by reading from the gaming machine frame information receiving buffer. If the frame opening information has changed, the process proceeds to step B346 to save the frame opening information, and it is determined in step B347 whether or not the front frame 1004 has changed to opening. If the front frame 1004 has changed to open (that is, if the front frame 1004 has changed to open this time since the previous closure), the main control ID transmission request flag is set in step B348. Thus, when the front frame 1004 changes to open, the main control ID is transmitted to the payout control device 1230 according to the main control ID transmission request flag. After that, the main control ID is sent to the card unit 1015 via the payout control device 1230 and verified. After step B348, the process proceeds to step B349.

On the other hand, if the frame opening information has not changed in step B345, the process jumps to step B349. Also, if the front frame 1004 has not changed to open in step B347, the process jumps to step B349.
When the process proceeds from step B348, step B345, or step B347 to step B349, the card unit information command is read from the gaming machine frame information reception buffer in step B349. This is because the command from the card unit 1015 may be transmitted to the game control device 1054 via the payout control device 1230, and the command is read from the gaming machine frame information reception buffer. Next, the process proceeds to step B350, where an effect card unit information command is prepared based on the read command, and an effect command setting process is performed in subsequent step B351. As a result, the effect card unit information command prepared based on the card unit information read from the gaming machine frame information reception buffer is transmitted to the effect control device 1053 this time. When the effect control device 1053 receives the effect card unit information command, the effect control device 1053 performs an effect such as, for example, displaying the unauthorized state of the card unit 1015 on the display device 1041.

  Next, in step B352, the power saving information command is read from the gaming machine frame information reception buffer. This is because a power saving information command for requesting power saving may be transmitted from the payout control device 1230 to the game control device 1054, and the command is read from the gaming machine frame information reception buffer. Next, the process proceeds to step B353, where an effect power-saving information command is prepared based on the read command, and an effect command setting process is performed in the subsequent step B354. Thereby, the power-saving information command for performance prepared based on the power-saving information command read from the gaming machine frame information reception buffer is transmitted to the performance control device 1053 this time. When the production control device 1053 receives the production power-saving information command, the production control device 1053 performs control such as setting the customer waiting screen of the display device 1041 in an energy saving mode to darken it to save power.

  Next, in step B355, the number-of-balls command is read from the gaming machine frame information reception buffer. In this case, since a number-of-balls command for notifying the number of balls is sometimes transmitted from the payout control device 1230 to the game control device 1054, the command is read from the gaming machine frame information reception buffer. Next, the process proceeds to step B356, where an effect holding ball number command is prepared based on the read command, and an effect command setting process is performed in the subsequent step B357. As a result, the effect holding ball number command prepared based on the holding ball number command read from the gaming machine frame information reception buffer is transmitted to the effect control device 1053 this time. When the effect control device 1053 receives the effect ball number command, the effect control device 1053 controls the decorative ball display device 1250 to light up an amount of LEDs corresponding to the number of balls.

  Next, in step B358, the counting ball number command is read from the gaming machine frame information reception buffer. This is because a counting ball number command that informs the number of counting balls may be transmitted from the payout control device 1230 to the game control device 1054, so that the command is read from the gaming machine frame information reception buffer. Next, the process proceeds to step B359, where an effect counting ball number command is prepared based on the read command, and effect command setting processing is performed in the subsequent step B360. As a result, an effect-use count ball number command prepared based on the count-ball-number command read from the gaming machine frame information reception buffer is transmitted to the effect control device 1053 this time. When the production control device 1053 receives the production use count ball number command, the production control device 1053 performs control such as displaying the count ball on the sub liquid crystal display device 1033. After step B360, the received command determination process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step B341 that no gaming machine frame information has been received, the process branches to step B361 to determine whether communication is being retried. The communication retry is different from the communication recovery, and is judged because the command reception from the payout control device 1230 may be repeated a predetermined number of times even in the normal state.
If communication retry is not in progress at step B361 (for example, if a command is received smoothly), the process proceeds to step B362 to set a communication retry flag, and the retry count is cleared to “0” at step B363. This prepares for the next communication. After step B363, the received command determination process is terminated.
On the other hand, if communication retry is being performed in step B361, the process branches to step B364 to update (increment) the number of retries by “+1”, and whether or not the number of retries exceeds a specified number (for example, 2) in step B365. Determine whether. If the number of retries does not exceed the specified number, return and repeat the routine.
If the number of retries exceeds the specified number, the process proceeds to step B366, and the communication retry flag is cleared. As a result, the communication retry flag is cleared, so that the communication retry flag is set in the process of the next communication retry, and the communication retry is performed a specified number of times. After step B366, the received command determination process is terminated.

[Discard command editing process]
Next, the payout command editing process (step B126) in the above-described timer interrupt process will be described with reference to FIGS. 135 and 136. FIG.
The payout command editing process is a process of editing a payout command to be sent to the payout control device 1230 such as adding the number of winning balls to the number of possessed balls corresponding to winning.
When this routine is started, it is first determined in step B371 whether communication is being retried. If communication is being retried, the payout command editing process is terminated and the process returns. Therefore, the payout command is edited when the communication is not being retried. Since the same command is transmitted during communication retry, there is no need to edit the command.
On the other hand, if the communication retry is not being performed in step B371, the process proceeds to step B372 to clear all the game information command areas and prepare for the payout command editing. Next, in step B373, the command setting counter is cleared, and in step B374, it is determined whether or not the start port 1 winning counter is “0”.
The command setting counter is updated by “+1” every time a command is set and saved in the game information command area. Further, the start port 1 winning counter counts the winning detection signal of the first start port switch 1120 that has detected the winning to the first starting winning port 1025 (that is, counts the winning to the first starting winning port 1025). To do.

If the starting port 1 winning counter is “0” in step B374, it is determined that there is no winning in the first starting port 1025, and the process jumps to step B380.
On the other hand, if the starting port 1 winning counter is not “0”, the process proceeds to step B375, and the type information command corresponding to the starting port 1 winning counter is set.
Here, the “type information” includes a data type and a data number. The data type is, for example, a type such as no information, start port, big winning port, winning port, symbol stop count, and the like. Further, the data number is a data number designated by, for example, no information and a number from 1 to 15. Therefore, the type information command is a command having contents related to the type as described above.
Next, in step B376, a winning ball information command corresponding to the starting port 1 winning counter is set.
Here, “prize ball information” is composed of the number of winning balls (no information and 1 to 15 winning ball data) and the number of winning balls (including no information), and information on the number of winning balls and the number of winning balls. It is. Accordingly, the prize ball information command is a command having the contents relating to the number of prize balls and the number of prizes as described above.
Next, in step B377, the type information command and the prize ball information command (indicated as type information / prize ball information command in FIG. 135; the same applies hereinafter) corresponding to the start port 1 winning counter are saved in the game information command area, and step B378. Then, the command setting counter is updated (incremented) by “+1”, and the starting port 1 winning counter is cleared to “0” in step B379. This is because the type information command and the prize ball information command corresponding to the starting opening 1 winning counter are set, so the starting opening 1 winning counter is once cleared to “0”, and the next first starting winning opening 1025 is set. Prepare for winning.
After step B379, the process proceeds to step B380.

When the process jumps from step B374 to step B380 or proceeds to step B380 via step B379, the process from step B380 to step B385 performs the same process as the start port 1 winning counter described above. Run about.
That is, it is determined in step B380 whether or not the start port 2 winning counter is “0”. The starting port 2 winning counter counts a winning detection signal of the second starting port switch 1121 that detects a winning at the second starting winning port 1026 (that is, counts a winning at the second starting winning port 1026). It is.

If the starting port 2 winning counter is “0” in step B380, it is determined that there is no winning in the second starting port 1026, and the process jumps to step B386.
On the other hand, if the starting port 2 winning counter is not “0”, the process proceeds to step B381, and a type information command corresponding to the starting port 2 winning counter is set. Next, in step B382, a winning ball information command corresponding to the start port 2 winning counter is set.
Next, in step B383, the type information command and the prize ball information command corresponding to the start port 2 winning counter are saved in the game information command area, the command setting counter is updated (incremented) by 1 in step B384, and further in step B385. Clear the start port 2 winning counter to “0”. This is because the type information command and the prize ball information command corresponding to the starting port 2 winning counter are set, so the starting port 2 winning counter is once cleared to “0” and the next second starting winning port 1026 is set. Prepare for winning.
After step B385, the process proceeds to step B386.

When the process jumps from step B380 to step B386 or when the process proceeds to step B386 via step B385, the process from step B386 to step B391 performs the same process as the above-mentioned start opening 1 winning counter. Execute on the counter.
That is, in step B386, it is determined whether or not the grand prize winning 1 winning counter is “0”. The big winning opening 1 winning counter counts the winning detection signal of the lower count switch 1124 detecting the winning to the first big winning opening 1027a of the first variable winning apparatus 1027 (that is, to the first big winning opening 1027a). To win a prize).

If the grand prize winning 1 winning counter is “0” in step B386, it is determined that there is no winning in the first big winning opening 1027a, and the process jumps to step B392.
On the other hand, if the winning prize opening 1 winning counter is not “0”, the process proceeds to step B387, and a type information command corresponding to the winning prize opening 1 winning counter is set. Next, in step B388, a winning ball information command corresponding to the big winning mouth 1 winning counter is set.
Next, in step B389, the type information command and the prize ball information command corresponding to the big winning mouth 1 winning counter are saved in the game information command area, the command setting counter is updated (incremented) by 1 in step B390, and step B391 is further performed. Then clear the winning prize counter 1 winning counter “0”. In this case, since the type information command and the prize ball information command corresponding to the winning prize opening 1 winning counter are set, the winning prize opening 1 winning counter is once cleared to “0”, and the next first winning prize opening 1027a is set. To prepare for winning a prize.
After step B391, the process proceeds to step B392.

When the process jumps from step B386 to step B392 or when the process proceeds to step B392 via step B391, the process from step B392 to step B397 is performed in the same manner as the start opening 1 winning counter described above. Execute on the counter.
That is, in step B392, it is determined whether or not the special winning opening 2 winning counter is “0”. The big prize opening 2 winning counter counts the winning detection signal of the upper count switch 1125 that detects the winning to the second big winning opening 1034a of the second variable winning apparatus 1034 (that is, to the second big winning opening 1034a). To win a prize).
If the big prize opening 2 winning counter is “0” in step B392, it is determined that there is no winning in the second big winning opening 1034a, and the process jumps to step B398.
On the other hand, if the big winning opening 2 winning counter is not “0”, the process proceeds to step B393, and the type information command corresponding to the big winning opening 2 winning counter is set. Next, in step B394, a winning ball information command corresponding to the big winning opening 2 winning counter is set.
Next, in step B395, the type information command and the prize ball information command corresponding to the big winning opening 2 winning counter are saved in the game information command area, the command setting counter is updated (incremented) by 1 in step B396, and further, in step B397. Then, clear the “0” in the grand prize opening 2 winning counter. This is because the type information command and the prize ball information command corresponding to the winning prize opening 2 winning counter are set, so that the winning prize opening 2 winning counter is once cleared to “0” and the next second winning prize opening 1034a is set. To prepare for winning a prize.
After step B397, the process proceeds to step B398 in FIG.

When the process jumps from step B392 to step B398 or when the process proceeds to step B398 via step B397, the process from step B398 to step B403 shown in FIG. Execute for hole winning counter.
That is, in step B398, it is determined whether or not the other hole winning counter is “0”. The other hole winning counter counts the winning detection signal of the winning opening switch 1123 that detects the winning to the general winning openings 1028 to 1031 (that is, counts the winning to the general winning openings 1028 to 1031).
If the other hole winning counter is “0” in step B398, it is determined that there is no winning in the general winning ports 1028 to 1031, and the process jumps to step B404.
On the other hand, if the other hole winning counter is not “0”, the process proceeds to step B399 to set a type information command corresponding to the other hole winning counter. Next, in step B400, a winning ball information command corresponding to the other hole winning counter is set.
Next, in step B401, the type information command and the prize ball information command corresponding to the other hole winning counter are saved in the game information command area. Clear the hole winning counter “0”. This is because the type information command and the prize ball information command corresponding to the other hole winning counter are set, so the other hole winning counter is once cleared to “0” and used for the next general winning opening 1028 to 1031. It is to be prepared.
After step B403, the process proceeds to step B404.

When the process jumps from step B398 to step B404, or when the process proceeds to step B404 via step B403, the process related to the symbol stop count counter is executed in the processes from step B404 to step B409.
That is, in step B404, it is determined whether or not the symbol stop number counter is “0”. The symbol stop count counter counts the number of times the special figure (and the decorative special figure) starts to fluctuate and stops.
If the symbol stop count counter is “0” in step B404, it is determined that the number of times that the special figure (and the decorative special figure) starts and stops is “0”, that is, the payout command is edited. End processing and return.
On the other hand, if the symbol stop number counter is not “0”, the process proceeds to step B405, and a type information command corresponding to the symbol stop number counter is set. Here, for example, information that the number of symbol stops is 1 is set. In step B406, “no information” is set as a prize ball information command corresponding to the symbol stop count counter. This is because the symbol stop count counter counts the number of times the special figure (and the decorative special figure) starts to fluctuate and stops, and does not generate a prize ball.
Next, in step B407, the type information command and the prize ball information command corresponding to the symbol stop count counter are saved in the game information command area. Clear the stop count counter to “0”. This is because the type information command and the prize ball information command corresponding to the symbol stop count counter are set, so once the symbol stop count counter is cleared to “0”, the next special symbol (and the decorative special symbol is the same) Is prepared for counting the number of times the change starts and stops.
After step B409, the payout command editing process is terminated and the process returns.

[Payout command transmission processing]
Next, the payout command transmission process (step B127) in the above-described timer interrupt process will be described with reference to FIG.
The payout command transmission process is a process of sending a payout command or the like from the game control device 1054 to the payout control device 1230.
When this routine is started, it is first determined in step B421 whether or not the command setting counter is "0". As described above, since the command setting counter is updated by “+1” every time the command is set and saved in the game information command area, if the command setting counter is “0”, There is no command setting. Therefore, at this time, the process branches to step B429 to set “no information” as a game information command, and proceeds to step B430, where the command set in step B429 (that is, the game information command set to “no information”) is set. Write to the game information transmission buffer, and then proceed to step B431.

On the other hand, if the command setting counter is not “0” in step B421, the process proceeds to step B422, and the value of the command setting counter is copied as the command transmission count. As described above, since the command setting counter is updated by “+1” every time a command is set and saved in the game information command area, the value of the command setting counter is set to the number of commands set. It corresponds.
Next, in step B423, the start address of the game information command area is set. This is because, when a plurality of commands are set and saved in the game information command area, the command saved at the head of the area is used in order to read (load) the commands from the head. Address is set.
Next, in step B424, a command is loaded from the game information command area. At this time, the command at the address set in step B423 is loaded from the game information command area. Next, the process proceeds to step B425, and the loaded command is written in the game information transmission buffer. As a result, the command written in the game information transmission buffer is transmitted from the game control device 1054 to the payout control device 1230.

Next, in step B426, the address of the game information command area is updated to the address of the next command (next command). This is because when a plurality of commands are saved in the game information command area, the command at the head address is loaded, so the command at the next address is loaded.
Next, in step B427, the command transmission count is updated (decremented) by “−1”. This is because the command transmission count is known by copying the value of the command setting counter as the command transmission count in step B422, and therefore the command transmission count is reduced by one.
Next, in step B428, it is determined whether or not the command transmission number has become “0”. If not, the process returns to step B424, and the loop from step B424 to step B428 is repeated. Then, when all of the plurality of commands saved in the game information command area are loaded and written into the game information transmission buffer, the determination result in step B428 becomes YES. If the number of command transmissions becomes “0” in the determination in step B428, the process proceeds to step B431.

When the process proceeds from step B428 to step B431 or when the process proceeds from step B430 to step B431 as described above, a gaming state information transmission process is performed at step B431. The game state information transmission process is to transmit the game state information from the game control device 1054 to the payout control device 1230 by encrypted communication, and the details are as described in FIG. Next, a main control ID transmission process is performed in step B432. The main control ID transmission process transmits the main control ID when there is a request for transmission of the main control ID (for example, when the power is turned on, when the frame is opened, or when the jackpot is hit). The details are as described with reference to FIG. It is.
The reason why the processing of step B431 and step B432 is performed is to transmit the game state information and the main control ID to the payout control device 1230 at the same time as the transmission of the command.
After step B432, the payout command transmission process is terminated and the process returns.

[Communication error monitoring processing]
Next, communication abnormality monitoring processing (step B129) in the above-described timer interrupt processing will be described with reference to FIG.
The communication abnormality monitoring process is for monitoring an abnormality such that communication between the game control device 1054 and the payout control device 1230 is cut off.
When this routine is started, it is first determined in step B451 whether a communication abnormality has occurred. Whether or not a communication abnormality has occurred is determined based on the state of a communication abnormality flag (set in step B461 described later).
In the following, description will be made in five cases.
<Normal route (a)>
If communication abnormality has not occurred in step B451, the process proceeds to step B452, and it is determined whether or not the winning protection wait timer is “0”. The winning protection weight timer is provided to wait for a specified time, for example, to protect the winning of a ball that has already been fired when a communication timeout occurs. Is stopped.

If the winning protection wait timer is “0” in step B452, the process branches to step B453 to determine whether or not a communication timeout has occurred. The occurrence of a communication timeout is determined as a communication timeout when communication between the game control device 1054 and the payout control device 1230 is interrupted for a predetermined time, for example. If it is not determined in step B453 that a communication timeout has occurred, the communication abnormality monitoring process is terminated and the process returns. Therefore, in this case, no communication abnormality or communication timeout has occurred, and the winning protection wait timer is “0”, so communication is normal.
This state is called a normal processing route, and is represented by a route (a) in FIG.
That is, the normal route (a) is routed through steps B451, B452, B453, and RET.

<Route (b) when it is recognized that a communication error has occurred (first)>
If the winning protection wait timer is “0” in step B452 and the process branches to step B453 to determine whether or not a communication timeout has occurred, if a communication timeout has occurred, the process proceeds from step B453 to step B454.
In step B454, an initial value (for example, 15 seconds) is set in the winning protection weight timer. This is because, when a communication timeout occurs, the firing of the encapsulated sphere is stopped and waited for a specified time set as an initial value in order to protect the winning of the launched ball. After step B454, the communication abnormality monitoring process is terminated and the process returns.
Therefore, in this case, a communication timeout occurs first and an initial value is set in the winning protection wait timer.
This state is called a processing route (initial) when it is recognized that a communication abnormality has occurred, and is represented by a route (b) in FIG.
That is, the route (b) at the time of recognizing that a communication abnormality has occurred (route) (b) follows the route of step B451, step B452, step B453, step B454, and RET.

<Route during winning protection weight (c)>
When the communication abnormality is not occurring in step B451 and the process proceeds to step B452, if the winning protection wait timer is not "0" in step B452, the process proceeds to step B455, and the winning protection wait timer is updated by "-1" and continued. In step B456, it is determined whether or not the winning protection weight timer has become "0". If the winning protection weight timer is not “0” in step B456, the process proceeds to step B457 to determine whether authentication is completed. This is because the gaming machine ID (both the main control ID and the payout ID here) is an external management device 91 (see FIG. 6 of the first embodiment) that is a third party organization via the payout control device 1230 and the card unit 1015. ), And is collated with the authentication list, and it is determined whether or not the verification result OK is found and the authentication is completed.

If authentication is not completed in step B457, the process returns and the routine is repeated. On the other hand, if authentication is completed in step B457, it is determined in step B458 whether recovery is completed. This is to determine whether or not the recovery communication is completed when the communication is interrupted due to a communication error or the like. If recovery is not complete, return and repeat the routine. On the other hand, if the recovery is completed in step B458, the communication abnormality flag is cleared in step B459, the winning protection wait timer is cleared to "0" in step B460, the communication abnormality monitoring process is terminated, and the process returns.
Whether a communication timeout has occurred or authentication has been completed is determined based on the state of the internal status register of the CPU 1111, for example. Further, the completion of recovery is determined using, for example, a recovery communication completion notification flag stored in an internal register of the CPU 1111.
Therefore, in this case, the winning protection weight is in effect. This state is referred to as a processing route during the winning protection weight, and is indicated by a route (c) in FIG.
That is, the route (c) in the winning protection weight is the route of step B451, step B452, step B455, step B456, step B457, step B458, step B459, step B460, RET.
If the communication state returns to normal while the route (c) in the winning protection weight is being executed, the communication will return from the communication abnormality. When returning from a communication error, the communication error flag remains clear. Also, the winning protection weight timer becomes “0”.

<Route when the winning protection weight period ends (d)>
When the communication abnormality is not occurring in step B451 and the process proceeds to step B452, if the winning protection wait timer is not "0" in step B452, the process proceeds to step B455, and the winning protection wait timer is updated by "-1" and continued. In step B456, it is determined whether or not the winning protection weight timer has become "0". At this time, if the winning protection weight timer is “0” in step B456, it is determined that the winning protection weight period has ended, and the process proceeds to step B461. In step B461, a communication abnormality flag is set. The game is stopped by setting the communication abnormality flag. After step B461, the communication abnormality monitoring process is terminated and the process is turned.
Therefore, in this case, the winning protection weight period is over. This state is referred to as a processing route when the winning protection weight period ends, and is represented by a route (d) in FIG. The winning protection weight timer remains “0” and does not change.
That is, the route (d) when the winning protection weight period ends is the route of step B451, step B452, step B455, step B456, step B461, and RET.

<Return confirmation route during communication error (e)>
If communication abnormality is occurring in step B451, the process jumps from step B451 to step B457, and in step B457, it is determined whether or not authentication is completed. If authentication is not completed in step B457, the process returns and the routine is repeated. When authentication is completed in step B457, it is determined in step B458 whether recovery is complete. If recovery is not complete, the process returns and the routine is repeated. If the recovery is completed in step B458, the communication abnormality flag is cleared in step B459, and the prize protection wait timer is cleared to "0" in step B460, and the communication abnormality monitoring process is terminated and turned.
Therefore, in this case, the determination process during the occurrence of communication abnormality in step B451 is repeated, and the return of the communication abnormality is confirmed. This state is called a return confirmation processing route during communication abnormality, and is indicated by a route (e) in FIG.

That is, the return confirmation route (e) during communication abnormality is the route of step B451, step B457, step B458, step B459, step B460, RET. The route (e) includes a case where the process returns from step B457 or step B458 to NO and returns.
When it is determined in step B451 that the communication abnormality has not occurred while executing the return confirmation route (e) during the communication abnormality, the communication abnormality is recovered. The process of the same route as the normal route (a) is executed.

[Special Figure Game Processing]
Next, the special game process (step B120) in the timer interrupt process will be described with reference to FIG.
In the special figure game process, the input of the first start opening switch 1120 and the second start opening switch 1121 is monitored, the entire process related to the special figure change display game is controlled, and the special figure display is set.
In the special game process, first, in step B501, a start port switch monitoring process for monitoring the winnings of the first start port switch 1120 and the second start port switch 1121 is performed.
In the start port switch monitoring process, when a game ball wins in the normal variable winning device 1026 that forms the start winning port 1025 and the second start winning port, various random numbers (such as jackpot random numbers) are extracted and Prior to the start of the figure variation display game, a game result preliminary determination is performed in which a game result based on a prize is determined in advance. The details of the start port switch monitoring process (step B501) will be described later.
Next, in step B502, a special winning opening switch monitoring process is performed. This is a process for monitoring the detection of a game ball by the lower count switch 1124 provided in the first variable winning device 1027 and the upper count switch 1125 provided in the second variable winning device 1034.

Next, in step B503, if the special figure game processing timer is not 0, -1 is updated. The minimum value of the special figure game processing timer is set to zero. Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the special figure game processing timer is 0 (step B504). When the value of the special figure game process timer is 0 (step B504; YES), that is, when the time is up or has already expired, the special figure referred to branch to the process corresponding to the special figure game process number. The figure game sequence branch table is set in the register (step B505), and the branch destination address of the process corresponding to the special figure game process number is obtained using the table (step B506). Then, the return address after the end of the branch process is saved in the stack area (step B507), and the game branch process (step B508) is performed according to the game process number.
The special figure game process timer is a timer value set to a predetermined value in each process after branching by a process number described later (steps B509 to B515: corresponding to process number = 0 to process number = 6). Yes, this special figure game processing timer is set to have a timing to execute step B509 and subsequent steps when the time is up. As a result, when it is time to execute step B505 and subsequent steps when step B503 is executed, the determination result of step B504 becomes affirmative, and step B505 and subsequent steps (including steps SB516 to B519) are executed. . And when step B503 is performed, when it is not a timing which should perform step B505-B515, the determination result of step B504 becomes negative and only step B516-B519 is performed.

  In the branch at the process number in step B508, the process number 0 goes to step B509 (special figure normal process), the process number 1 goes to step B510 (special figure changing process), the process number 2 goes to step B511 (special figure display process) ), Process number 3 goes to step B512 (fanfare / interval processing), process number 4 goes to step B513 (grand prize opening open process), process number 5 goes to step B514 (grand prize opening remaining ball process), Processing number 6 advances to step B515 (big hit end processing). The customer waiting state (during demonstration) is process number 0.

The specific contents of the branch in the process number are as follows.
In step B509 (special figure normal processing), when the special figure holding number (the number of special figure starting memory that has been put on hold because the special figure fluctuation display game has not been executed) is zero and the special figure fluctuation display game is not being executed, Processing for displaying the waiting state on the display device 1041 is performed. Further, in the special figure routine process, a process for starting the next special figure change display game (special figure change start process) is performed. In this special figure fluctuation start process, the start memory of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is monitored, and if there is any special figure start memory, the corresponding fluctuation display (first or second fluctuation display) is started. Is set (such as setting of a variation pattern command to be transmitted to the effect control device 1054), the process number is set to 1, and the process returns. If the special figure hold number is zero and the next special figure variation display game is not executed, the process returns as it is (the process number remains 0).

Next, in step B510 (special-figure changing process), a process for variably displaying the special figure is performed until the fluctuation time set in the special-figure fluctuation start process has elapsed. And if the said fluctuation | variation time passes, after performing the process which transmits the command (symbol stop command) which stops the symbol of a special figure to the production | presentation control apparatus 1053, it returns as the process number 2.
In step B511 (processing during special figure display), a process for displaying the fluctuation display result of the special figure for a certain time (1 second to 2 seconds) is performed. Also, if the game result of the special figure fluctuation display game is a big hit, fanfare command setting according to the type of jackpot, fanfare time setting according to the big win opening pattern of each jackpot, processing during fanfare / interval Set the information necessary to do If it is a big hit, the process number is set to 3, and if not, the process number is set to 0 and the process returns.

Next, in step B512 (fanfare / interval processing), fanfare processing for outputting a fanfare sound or the like from the speaker 1012a or the like is executed immediately after the big hit, and an interval period display or the like is realized in the big hit interval period. The interval process is executed, and the process number is set to 4 at the timing when the first prize winning device 1027 starts to open the big prize opening. In addition, here, setting of the opening time, updating of the number of times of opening, the number of times of winning, including the first winning prize opening 1027a and the second winning prize opening 1034a (same as the winning prize opening). Set the information necessary to perform processing while the mouth is open.
Next, in step B513 (processing during opening of the big prize opening), processing while the first big prize opening 1027a of the first variable prize winning device 1027 and the second big prize opening 1034a of the second variable prize winning device 1034 are opened. It is. Also, here, if the big hit round is not the final round, the interval command is set, while if it is the final round, the ending command is set, and the information necessary for performing the winning ball remaining ball processing is set. . When the grand prize opening is finished, the processing number is set to 5.

Next, in step B514 (big winning opening remaining ball processing), in order to perform processing for setting the time for discharging the remaining balls in the big winning opening, and for big hit end processing if the big winning round is the final round Set necessary information. Specifically, for example, a game ball that has entered the big prize opening 27a of the first variable prize winning device 1027 (the same applies to the second big prize opening 1034a of the second variable prize winning device 1034) just before the end of the big prize opening is surely made. When the big hit round is left after this fixed time has elapsed, the processing number is set to 3, and when the big hit round is not left, the processing number is set to 6. .
Next, in step B515 (a big hit end process), after the big hit ends, a process for executing the special figure usual process B509 is performed, the process number is returned to 0, and the process returns.

Next, when one of the above processes corresponding to the process number is completed, the process proceeds to step B516, and a table (special chart) for controlling the display on the collective display device 1035 in FIG. 1 fluctuation control table) is prepared, and in the next step B517, the control process (design fluctuation control process) for the fluctuation display of this special figure 1 is performed.
Next, the process proceeds to step B518 to prepare a table (special figure 2 fluctuation control table) for controlling display on the collective display device 1035 of special figure 2 (display of special figure 2). The control process (symbol fluctuation control process) for the fluctuation display of this special figure 2 is performed, and then the process returns.

[Starter switch monitoring process]
Next, the start port switch monitoring process (step B501) in the special figure game process described above will be described with reference to FIG.
In the start port switch monitoring process, first, after preparing a table for setting information on hold by the start winning port 1025 (first start port) (step B521), the special start port switch common process (step B522) is performed. The details of the special figure start port switch common process in step B522 will be described later together with the special figure start port switch common process in step B526.

Next, it is checked whether or not the ordinary electric accessory (ordinary variation winning device 1026) is in operation, that is, whether or not the ordinary variation winning device 1026 is activated and the game ball can be won. (Step B523) When it is determined that the ordinary electric accessory is operating (Step B523; YES), the process proceeds to Step B525, and the subsequent processes are performed. On the other hand, if it is determined in step B523 that the ordinary electric accessory is not in operation (step B523; NO), it is determined whether or not a normal electric power fraud has occurred (step B524). In the determination of whether or not the normal power fraud is occurring, it is determined that the fraud is occurring when the number of fraudulent winnings to the normal variation winning device 1026 is equal to or greater than the fraud determination number (for example, 5).
The normally variable winning device 1026 cannot win game balls in the closed state, and can win game balls only in the open state. Therefore, when the game ball wins in the closed state, it is a case where some abnormality or fraud has occurred. When there is a game ball won in such a closed state, the number is counted as the number of illegal wins. Then, when the number of illegal winnings counted in this way is equal to or larger than a predetermined fraud occurrence determination number (upper limit value), it is determined that fraud has occurred.

If it is determined in step B524 that there is no fraud in ordinary power transmission (step B524; NO), after preparing a table for setting information on hold by the second starting port (ordinary variable winning device 1026) (step B525), The start port switch common process (step B526) is performed, and the start port switch monitoring process is terminated.
If it is determined in step B524 that a normal electric power fraud has occurred (step B524; YES), the start port switch monitoring process is terminated. That is, the second start memory is not generated any more.

[Special figure start port switch common processing]
Next, the special start port switch common process (steps B522 and B526) in the start port switch monitoring process described above will be described with reference to FIG.
The special figure start port switch common process is a process that is commonly performed for each input when there is an input from the first start port switch 1120 or the second start port switch 1121.
In the special figure start port switch common processing, first, of the first start port switch 1120 and the second start port switch 1121, whether or not there is an input to the monitored start port switch (for example, the first start port switch 1120). If it is checked (step B531) and it is determined that there is no input to the starter switch to be monitored (step B531; NO), the special figure starter switch common process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step B531 that there is an input to the monitored start port switch (step B531; YES), it is determined whether there is latch data in the target random number latch register (step B532).

  If there is no latch data in the target random number latch register (step B532; NO), that is, if no random number has been extracted, the special figure start port switch common process is terminated. If there is latch data in the target random number latch register (step B532; YES), after saving the start port winning flag of the start port switch to be monitored (step B533), the target random number latch register is monitored. The extracted jackpot random number is loaded and prepared (step B534).

Subsequently, information on the number of winnings to the monitored start port switch (for example, the first start port switch 1120) out of the first start port switch 1120 and the second start port switch 1121 is displayed outside the pachinko machine 1001. The number of times to be output to the card management device 1081 and the hall computer 1086 (the number of times the start port signal is output) (the number of times that another output must be output) is loaded (step B535). Then, the loaded value (start port signal output count) is updated (+1) (step B536), and it is determined whether the output count overflows (step B537). If the output count does not overflow (step B537; NO), the updated value is saved in the start port signal output count area of the RAM (step B538), and the process proceeds to step B539. On the other hand, when the number of outputs overflows (step B537; YES), the process jumps to step B538 and proceeds to step B539.
Then, in step B539, of the first start port switch 1120 and the second start port switch 1121, the update target special figure holding corresponding to the monitored start port switch (for example, the first start port switch 1120) is suspended ( A process for determining whether or not the number of (starting memory) is less than the upper limit value is performed.

If it is determined in step B539 that the number of special figure hold is less than the upper limit (step B539; YES), a process of updating (+1) the number of special figure hold (for example, special figure 1 hold number) to be updated ( After performing Step B542), a decoration special figure hold number command corresponding to the monitoring target start switch and the special figure hold number is prepared (Step B543), and an effect command setting process (Step B544) is performed.
Subsequently, the address of the random number storage area corresponding to the number of reserved special figure corresponding to the start port switch to be monitored is calculated (step B545), and the big hit random number is saved in the big hit random number storage area of the RAM (step B546). Next, the jackpot symbol random number of the starter switch to be monitored is extracted and prepared (step B547), and saved in the jackpot symbol random number storage area of the RAM (step B548). Further, the fluctuation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 are extracted and saved in the fluctuation pattern random number storage area of the RAM corresponding to each random number (step B549). Then, the special figure hold information determination process (step B550) is performed, and the special figure start port switch common process is terminated.

  Here, the game control device 1054 (RAM 1113) extracts a predetermined random number based on the inflow of game balls to the start winning area of the start winning opening 1025 or the normal variable winning device 1026, and becomes the right to execute the variable display game. A start winning storage means for storing a predetermined number as an upper limit as a start memory is provided. Further, the start winning storage means (game control device 1054) stores various random numbers extracted based on the winning of the game ball to the first start winning opening (start winning opening 1025) with the predetermined number as an upper limit. And various random numbers extracted based on the winning of the game ball to the second start winning opening (ordinary variable winning device 1026) are stored as a second start storage up to a predetermined number.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step B539 that the special figure hold number is not less than the upper limit value (step B539; NO), a decorative special figure hold number command (pending overflow command) is prepared (step B540), and an effect command setting process ( Step B541) is performed, and the special figure start port switch common process is terminated.

[Special figure hold information judgment processing]
Next, the special figure hold information determination process (step B550) in the above-described start port switch common process will be described with reference to FIG.
The special figure hold information determination process is a look-ahead process for determining the result related information corresponding to the start memory before the start timing of the special figure variation display game based on the corresponding start memory.
In the special figure hold information determination process, first, it is determined whether or not the conditions for executing the prefetch effect are satisfied (step B561). If not satisfied (step B561; NO), the special figure hold information determination process is terminated. To do. Moreover, when satisfy | filling (step B561; YES), the process regarding the following prefetch effect is performed.
Here, the conditions for executing the prefetching effect are as follows.
・ Special figure 1: Normal variable prize winning device 1026 is not supported (normal power support is supported), and other than big hit ・ Special figure 2: No condition (can be executed all the time)
When such a condition is satisfied, a prefetch process for determining the result related information corresponding to the start-up storage is performed.

In the process related to the prefetch effect performed when the conditions for executing the prefetch effect are satisfied (step B561; YES), first, whether or not the big hit random number value matches the big hit determination value or not is a big hit. A big hit determination process (step B562) is performed to determine. The big hit determination process determines a big hit based on whether or not the random number extracted at the timing of the start winning prize is within the big hit range. When the big hit is determined, the big hit information is saved in the big hit flag area.
If the determination result is a big hit (step B563; YES), a big hit symbol random number check table corresponding to the target starter switch is set (step B564).
Here, the information defined on the jackpot symbol random number check table includes the following.
・ Random number judgment value (represents distribution rate)
Stop symbol pattern corresponding to the determination value Next, the big hit symbol random number is checked to obtain the corresponding big hit symbol pattern (step B565), and the stop symbol pattern is saved in the pre-read stop symbol pattern area (step B567). On the other hand, if the determination result is not a big hit (step B563; NO), a stop symbol pattern is set (step B566), and the stop symbol pattern is saved in the pre-read stop symbol pattern area (step B567).

  Thereafter, a pre-read symbol command corresponding to the target start port switch and stop symbol pattern is prepared (step B568), and an effect command setting process is performed (step B569). Next, special figure information setting processing (step B570) for setting special figure information, which is a parameter for setting a fluctuation pattern, is performed to prepare a latter half fluctuation pattern setting information table corresponding to the target start-up switch (step B570). B571), a variation pattern setting process for setting a variation mode of the special figure variation display game is performed (step B572).

  Then, a prefetch variation pattern command corresponding to the first half variation number indicating the first half variation pattern and the second half variation number representing the second half variation pattern in the variation mode of the special figure variation display game is prepared (step B573), and an effect command setting process is performed. (Step B574), the special figure hold information determination process is terminated. The special figure information setting process in step B570 and the fluctuation pattern setting process in step B572 are the same as the processes executed at the start of the special figure fluctuation display game in the special figure ordinary process.

  Through the above processing, a prefetch symbol command including the result of the special figure variation display game based on the start memory to be prefetched and a prefetch variation pattern command including information on the variation pattern in the special figure variation display game based on the start memory are prepared. And transmitted to the effect control device 1053. As a result, the determination result (prefetch result) of the result related information corresponding to the start memory (whether it is a big hit or the type of the fluctuation pattern) is controlled before the start timing of the special figure change display game based on the corresponding start memory. The device 1053 can be notified, and in particular, by changing the decorative special figure start memory display displayed on the display device 1041, the result related information is given to the player before the start timing of the special figure variable display game. It is possible to notify.

  That is, the game control device 1053 determines a random number stored as the start memory in the start winning storage means (game control device 1054) before the execution of the variable display game based on the start memory (for example, whether or not a special result is obtained). It is a pre-determination means. Note that the time when the random number value stored in correspondence with the start memory is determined in advance is not only at the start winning time when the start memory is generated, but any time before the variable display game based on the start memory is performed. Good.

[Big prize opening switch monitoring process]
Next, the special winning opening switch monitoring process (step B502) in the special figure game process described above will be described with reference to FIG.
In the big prize opening switch monitoring process, first, it is determined whether or not the big prize opening (the first big prize opening 1027a of the first variable prize winning device 1027 or the second big prize winning port 1034a of the second variable prize winning device 1034) is in operation. Determine. The fact that the big prize opening is in operation includes the period during which the big prize opening is open and the remaining balls are being processed after the big prize opening is closed. If the big prize opening is not in operation (step B581; NO), the big prize opening switch monitoring process is terminated.
On the other hand, if the big prize opening is in operation (step B581; YES), the process proceeds to step B582 to determine whether or not the big prize opening 1 (the first big prize opening 1027a; hereinafter the same) is open. To do. If the big winning opening 1 is open, it is determined in step B583 whether or not the big winning opening remaining ball processing is being performed at the end of one round. This is to determine whether or not the winning ball remaining ball processing is being performed in order not to monitor the winning in the winning ball 1 during the remaining ball processing. If the winning prize remaining ball processing is in progress, the winning prize switch monitoring process is terminated.

On the other hand, if the winning ball remaining ball processing is not being processed in step B583, the process proceeds to step B584, and it is determined whether or not there is an input to the big winning port 1 switch (the lower count switch 1124; hereinafter the same). If there is no input to the big winning opening 1 switch, the big winning opening switch monitoring process is terminated.
If there is an input to the big prize opening 1 switch, the number of big prize mouth counts is updated by "+1" in step B585. Here, since there is an input to the grand prize winning 1 switch, the number of big prize winning counts counts the number of winning prizes to the big winning prize 1. The number of winning prizes is for counting the number of balls entered in the opening of one round of the winning prize.
Next, in step B586, a winning prize 1 count command is prepared, and in step B587, an effect command setting process is performed. This is because when the prize winning opening 1 is opened and there is a prize, an effect by the prize winning 1 winning is performed. As a result, the grand prize opening 1 count command is transmitted to the effect control device 1053, and the effect of winning the big prize opening 1 is performed on the screen of the display device 1041.
After step B587, the process proceeds to step B593.

On the other hand, if the big prize opening 1 is not opened in step B582, the process branches to step B588, and it is determined whether or not there is an input to the big prize opening 2 switch (the upper count switch 1125; hereinafter the same). If there is no input to the big prize opening 2 switch, the big prize opening switch monitoring process is terminated. If there is an input to the big winning opening 2 switch, the process proceeds to step B589 to determine whether or not the big winning opening remaining ball processing is in progress.
If the winning prize remaining ball processing is in progress, the process jumps to Step B591. On the other hand, if the winning ball remaining ball processing is not being processed in step B589, the process proceeds to step B590, and the number of the winning winning mouth count is updated by “+1”. Here, since there is an input to the big winning opening 2 switch, the number of big winning openings counts the number of winning in the big winning opening 2. Next, in step B591, a special winning opening 2 count command is prepared, and in step B592, effect command setting processing is performed. This is because when the prize winning opening 2 is opened and there is a prize, an effect by the prize winning slot 2 winning is performed. As a result, a special winning opening 2 count command is transmitted to the effect control device 1053, and a special winning opening 2 winning effect is performed on the screen of the display device 1041.
Note that when there is an input to the special winning opening 2 switch, the special winning opening switch monitoring process is not terminated even during the remaining ball processing, and the route proceeds to step B590, which is different from the case where there is an input to the special winning opening 1 switch. Yes. In other words, in the case of the special winning opening 2, in order to perform the effect by winning, the special winning opening 2 count command is transmitted even during the large winning opening remaining ball processing. However, the number of winning prizes will not be updated.
After step B592, the process proceeds to step B593.

When the process proceeds to step B593 through step B587 or step B592, it is determined in step B593 whether or not the number of big winning mouth counts has reached an upper limit (the number of game balls that can be won in one round: for example, 10) or more.
When the number of the big prize winning count is not equal to or greater than the upper limit (step B593; NO), the special winning prize mouth switch monitoring process is terminated. Further, when the number of the winning prize count exceeds the upper limit (step B593; YES), the winning prize count is kept at the upper limit (step B594), and the special figure game processing timer area is cleared to 0 (step B594). B595). Then, a pointer is loaded from the big hit control pointer upper limit value area (step B596), the loaded pointer is saved in the big hit midpoint control pointer area (step B597), and the big winning opening switch monitoring process is terminated. The processing of Step B596 and Step B597 is to perform processing for closing the big prize opening based on the fact that the number of big prize winning counts exceeds the upper limit. As a result, the special winning opening is closed and one round is completed.

[Special figure routine processing]
Next, details of the special figure routine process (step B509) in the special figure game process described above will be described with reference to FIG.
In the special figure routine processing, first, it is checked whether or not the second special figure holding number (second starting memory number) is 0 (step B601).
If it is determined that the special figure 2 hold number is 0 (step B601; YES), it is determined whether the special figure 1 hold number (first start memory number) is 0 (step B606). Then, if it is determined that the special figure 1 holding number is 0 (step B606; YES), it is determined whether the customer waiting demonstration has been started (step B611), and if the customer waiting demonstration has not been started (step B611; NO) saves the customer waiting demo flag in the customer waiting demo flag area (step B612).

Subsequently, a customer waiting demonstration command is prepared (step B613), an effect command setting process (step B614) is performed, a special figure normal process transition setting process 1 (step B615) is performed, and the special figure normal process is terminated. .
On the other hand, if the customer waiting demonstration has already started in step B611 (step B611; YES), the special figure normal process transition setting process 1 (step B615) is performed, and the special figure normal process is terminated. Details of the special figure normal process transition setting process 1 (step B615) will be described later with reference to FIG.
On the other hand, when the special figure 2 hold number is not 0 in step B601 (step B601; NO), a special special figure hold number command corresponding to the special figure 2 hold number is prepared (step B602), and an effect command setting process is performed. (Step B603) is performed. Next, a special figure 2 fluctuation start process (step B604) is performed, a special figure fluctuation mid-process transition setting process (step B605) of special figure 2 is performed, and the special figure ordinary process is terminated.
In step B606, when the special figure 1 hold number is not 0 (step B606; NO), a special special figure hold number command corresponding to the special figure 1 hold number is prepared (step B607), and an effect command setting process is performed. (Step B608) is performed. Next, the special figure 1 fluctuation start process (step B609) is performed, the special figure fluctuation mid-process transition setting process (step B610) of special figure 1 is performed, and the special figure normal process is terminated.
At the time of performing the process for preparing the decoration special figure hold number command (steps B607 and B602), the subtraction number is not subtracted based on the start of the special figure variation display game, and the current special figure 1 hold number or A hold number command corresponding to the special figure 1 hold number or the special figure 2 hold number minus -1 from the special figure 2 hold number is prepared. The process of actually updating the special figure 1 hold number or the special figure 2 hold number by -1 is the fluctuation start information setting process (FIG. 154) in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process (step B609) or the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (step B604). Step B751).

In this way, the special figure 2 hold count is checked before the special figure 1 hold count check, and if the special figure 2 hold count is not 0, the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (step B604) is executed. Will be. That is, the second special figure variation display game is executed with priority over the first special figure variation display game. That is, when the game control device 1054 has the second start memory in the second start memory means (game control device 1054), the variable display game based on the second start memory is displayed as the variable display based on the first start memory. Priority control means for executing with priority over the game.
In the fifteenth embodiment, the order of transmission when the command is transmitted from the game control device 1054 to the effect control device 1053 at the start of symbol variation is the order of the number of holdings, stop symbol, and variation pattern.

[Special figure transition setting process 1]
Next, details of the special figure normal process transition setting process 1 (step B615) in the special figure normal process described above will be described with reference to FIG.
When this routine is started, first, “0” is set as the process number in step B621 (for example, a table for shifting to the special figure normal process is prepared and the process number “0” related to the special figure normal process is set in the table. "" Is set), and in step B622, the process number is saved in the special figure game process number area.
Next, in step B623, the fluctuating symbol discrimination flag area is cleared, in step B624, the fraud monitoring period flag is saved in the big prize opening 1 fraud monitoring period flag area, and in step B625, fraudulent in the big prize opening 2 fraud monitoring period flag area. Save the flag during the monitoring period. In this case, since there are big winning mouths (first variable winning device 1027, second variable winning device 1034) at the top and bottom, the fraud monitoring period flag is saved in the fraud monitoring period flag area corresponding to each big winning mouth. Is. After step B625, the special figure normal process transition setting process 1 ends.
As a result, various data for shifting to the special figure normal processing, for example, the process number “0” related to the special figure normal processing is set, and the respective flags (each big prize illegal (Monitoring information) is set.

[Special Figure 1 Change Start Processing 1]
Next, the details of the special figure 1 fluctuation start process 1 (step B609) in the above special figure ordinary process will be described with reference to FIG.
The special figure 1 fluctuation start process is a process that is performed at the start of the first special figure fluctuation display game. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 1) is saved in the fluctuation symbol discrimination flag area (step B631), and the big hit flag 1 for judging whether or not the first special figure fluctuation display game is a big hit is shifted information or A jackpot flag 1 setting process (step B632) for setting jackpot information is performed. Details of the big hit flag 1 setting process in step B632 will be described later.

Next, after the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process (step B633) relating to the setting of the special figure 1 stop symbol (symbol information) is performed, the special symbol which is a parameter for setting the variation pattern is set. An information setting process (step B634) is performed to prepare a special figure 1 fluctuation pattern setting information table, which is a table in which information for referring to various information regarding the setting of the fluctuation pattern of the first special figure fluctuation display game is set. (Step B635). Thereafter, a variation pattern setting process (step B636) for setting a variation pattern which is a variation mode in the first special figure variation display game is performed, and a variation start information setting process for setting variation start information of the first special figure variation display game. (Step B637) is performed, and the changing information of the payout gaming state command area is set (Step B638), and the special figure 1 change start process is terminated. As a result of the processing in step B638, the game state information indicating that the special figure 1 is changing is sent to the payout control device 1230.
Details of the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process in step B633, the special figure information setting process in step B634, the fluctuation pattern setting process in step B636, and the fluctuation start information setting process in step B637 will be described later.

[Big hit flag 1 setting process]
Next, details of the big hit flag 1 setting process (step B632) in the above-described special figure 1 fluctuation start process 1 will be described with reference to FIG.
When the routine is started, the deviation information is saved in the big hit flag 1 area in step B641. This is because information on the deviation is set in advance before the big hit determination. Next, in step B642, a big hit random number is loaded from the special figure 1 big hit random number storage area (for holding number 1) in the RAM and prepared. Note that for the number of holdings 1 is an area for storing information (random numbers or the like) about the special figure starting storage whose digestion order is the earliest (here, the earliest in the special figure 1). Thereafter, a jackpot determination process (step B643) is performed to determine whether or not the jackpot random number value matches the jackpot determination value. This is to check whether the jackpot random number corresponding to the special figure 1 extracted this time is in the jackpot range (a value between the jackpot lower limit judgment value and the upper limit judgment value: matching the jackpot judgment value). If it is within the range of the big hit, it can be judged as a big hit (detailed routine will be described later).

The check result of step B643 is determined in step B644, and if the determination result is a big hit (YES), the process proceeds to step B645, and the big hit information is overwritten in the big hit flag 1 area where the lost information is saved in step B641 and saved. Then, the big hit flag 1 setting process is terminated.
On the other hand, when NO in step B644 (when there is a loss), the big hit flag 1 setting process is terminated. Therefore, at this time, the processing ends in a state in which the shift information is saved in the jackpot flag 1, and the jackpot flag 1 is not set.

[Big hit judgment processing]
Next, the details of the jackpot determination process (step B643) in the jackpot flag 1 setting process described above will be described with reference to FIG.
When the routine starts, processing for setting a lower limit judgment value for jackpot judgment is performed in step B651. Thereafter, in step B652, it is checked whether or not the value of the target big hit random number is less than the lower limit judgment value, that is, the big hit random number value read in step B642 in FIG. 147 is the lower limit value of the big hit random number hit judgment value. Check if it is less than
The big hit means that the big hit random number matches the big hit determination value. The big hit judgment value is a plurality of consecutive values, and the big hit random number is greater than or equal to the lower limit judgment value that is the lower limit value of the big hit judgment value and less than or equal to the upper limit judgment value that is the upper limit value of the big hit judgment value It is determined that it is a big hit.
If it is determined in step B652 that the value of the big hit random number is less than the lower limit determination value, the process branches to step B657, sets a deviation as the determination result, and returns.

On the other hand, if the value of the big hit random number is not less than the lower limit determination value in step B652, the process proceeds to step B653 to determine whether or not the probability is high. This is to determine whether or not the jackpot probability is high due to the probability variation, that is, whether or not the probability of the hit result in the special figure variation display game is a high probability state (probability variation state). Judgment. If the probability is high, in step B654, processing for setting the upper limit determination value for jackpot determination in the high probability is performed, and then the process proceeds to step B656.
If it is determined in step B653 that the probability is not high, the process branches to step B655 to perform processing for setting an upper limit determination value for jackpot determination in the low probability, and then proceeds to step B656.
In this way, when the upper limit judgment value during the high probability and the low probability is set, if the value of the target big hit random number is between the lower limit judgment value and the upper limit judgment value (zone), You will be able to judge.
Therefore, in step B656, it is checked whether or not the value of the target big hit random number is larger than the upper limit determination value (exceeded the upper limit determination value), and in step B656 it is determined that the big hit random number value is larger than the upper limit determination value (step B656). YES), since it can be determined that it is not a big hit, the process proceeds to step B657 to set a deviation as the determination result and return.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step B656 that the value of the target big hit random number is equal to or less than the upper limit determination value (not exceeding the upper limit determination value) (step B656; NO), the target big hit random number value becomes the lower limit determination value and the upper limit determination. From the time between the values (zone), it is determined that the game is a big hit, and a big win is set as the determination result in step B658, and the process returns.

[Special figure 1 stop symbol setting process]
Next, details of the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process (step B633) in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process 1 described above will be described with reference to FIG.
When the routine starts, it is checked in step B661 whether the big hit flag 1 is a big hit (whether the big hit information is saved). The jackpot symbol random number is loaded from (for formula 1) (step B662). Next, a special figure 1 big hit symbol table is set (step B663).
Here, the information defined on the special figure 1 big hit symbol table includes the following.
・ Random number judgment value (indicating distribution rate)
Stop symbol number corresponding to the judgment value Subsequently, the process proceeds to step B664 where a stop symbol number corresponding to the loaded jackpot symbol random number is acquired and saved in the special symbol 1 stop symbol number area. By this process, the type of special result is selected. The stop symbol number is used to set a stop symbol on a special symbol display (here, the seven-segment special symbol 1 display in the collective display device 1035).

  Thereafter, the big hit stop symbol information table is set (step B665), the stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the stop symbol pattern area (step B666). The stop symbol pattern is used to set a stop symbol type (disconnected, 16R probability variation, 11R probability variation, 2R probability variation, 11R normal variation, etc.) on the display device 1041. Next, a probability variation determination flag corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the probability variation determination flag area (step B667). The probability variation determination flag is for setting a probability state after the end of the special gaming state.

  Further, the round number upper limit value information corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the round number upper limit information area (step B668), and the big prize opening information corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and the big prize opening is released. The information is saved in the information area (step B669). These pieces of information are for setting the execution mode of the special gaming state. Then, a special decoration figure command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is prepared (step B672).

On the other hand, if the big hit flag 1 is not big hit in step B661 (step B661; NO), the stop symbol number at the time of loss is saved in the special symbol 1 stop symbol number area (step B670), and the loss stop symbol pattern is set as the stop symbol pattern. The area is saved (step B671), and a decorative special figure command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is prepared (step B672).
There are 11 types of decoration special figure commands, for example, and the special figure type in the effect control apparatus 1053 can be determined by the difference in these types.
Through the above processing, a stop symbol corresponding to the result of the special figure variation display game is set.

  Thereafter, the decoration special figure command is saved in the decoration special figure command area (step B673), and an effect command setting process (step B674) is performed. This decoration special figure command is transmitted to the effect control apparatus 1053 later. Then, the symbol data corresponding to the stopped symbol number is saved in the test signal output data area (step B675), and the special figure 1 big hit symbol random number storage area (for holding number 1) is cleared to 0 (step B676). The stop symbol setting process in FIG.

[Special figure information setting process]
Next, details of the special figure information setting process (step B634) in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process described above will be described with reference to FIG.
In the special figure information setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the special figure is in a short time (short time state) (step B681).
Here, for example, after the jackpot is over, the time for the special figure and the usual figure is shortened from the normal time, the time efficiency is increased, and the probability per ordinary figure is increased to increase the ordinary electric utility (general power) (No. 2). The opening of the winning prize opening 1026) includes support for the winning prize at the starting gate (that is, the extension of the opening time of ordinary electric trains). This is related to the special figure, which is a state in which the fluctuation time of the special figure is shortened and the public power support is provided.
If it is not in the special drawing time (step B681; NO), a normal variation pattern selection group information table is set (step B682). If the special drawing time is short (step B681; YES), the time variation variable pattern selection group information table is set (step B683). After step B682, the process proceeds to step B684. Also, after step B683, the process proceeds to step B684.

Then, when proceeding to Step B684, the special figure holding number corresponding to the fluctuation symbol discrimination flag is loaded, and thereafter, the fluctuation pattern selection group information corresponding to the special figure holding number is acquired and saved in the fluctuation distribution information 1 area. (Step B685). Thereby, in the fluctuation distribution information 1 area, the type of special figure (special figure 1 or special figure 2) for starting the fluctuation, and the number-of-holds information that is information on the number of starting memories for the type of special figure, The variable distribution information 1 obtained from the game state information including information on whether or not the time is short is saved. This fluctuation distribution information 1 is used to select a fluctuation group later.
A variation group includes a plurality of variation patterns. When determining a variation pattern, the variation group is first selected, and then one variation pattern is selected from the variation group. ing.

Next, a distribution base pointer table is set (step B686), and a distribution base pointer corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is acquired (step B687). Further, the effect mode number is added to the acquired pointer (step B688), the value after the addition is saved in the variable distribution information 2 area (step B689), and the special figure information setting process is terminated.
Thereby, the variable distribution information 2 obtained from the stop symbol pattern information and the effect mode information is saved in the variable distribution information 2 area. This fluctuation distribution information 2 is used to select a fluctuation group later. In addition, as for the production mode, one production mode is set from a plurality of production modes according to the probability state, the presence / absence of the short-time state, the progress status of the special figure variation display game, and the like.

[Variation pattern setting process]
Next, details of the fluctuation pattern setting process (step B636) in the above-described special figure 1 fluctuation start process will be described with reference to FIG.
Note that the fluctuation patterns are the first half fluctuation pattern that is a fluctuation mode from the start of the special figure fluctuation display game to the reach state, and the second half fluctuation that is a fluctuation aspect from the reach state to the end of the special figure fluctuation display game. First, the second half variation pattern is set first, and then the first half variation pattern is set.

In the variation pattern setting process, first, a variation group selection address table is set (step B701), and the address of the latter half variation group table corresponding to the variation distribution information 2 is acquired and prepared (step B702). Then, it is determined whether the effect mode number is less than 2 (either 0 or 1) (step B703).
When the production mode number is not less than 2 (step B703; NO), it is determined whether the stop symbol pattern is a discontinuation stop symbol pattern (step B704). This is to determine whether or not the distribution (pattern) is different depending on the number of holds.
Next, when the stop symbol pattern is not an outlier stop symbol pattern (step B704; NO), the variable pattern random number 1 is loaded and prepared from the target variable pattern random number 1 storage area (for holding number 1) (step B707).

On the other hand, when the production mode number is less than 2 (step B703; YES), or when the stop symbol pattern is an outlier stop symbol pattern (step B704; YES), the variable distribution information 1 from the table prepared in step B702. The address of the table corresponding to is acquired (step B705). The process of step B705 is performed when the distribution (pattern) differs according to the number of holds.
Next, the acquired address is prepared as the address of the latter-half variation group (step B706), and the variation pattern random number 1 is loaded from the target variation pattern random number 1 storage area (for holding number 1) and prepared (step B707).
When the production mode number is less than 2 or when the stop symbol pattern is an outlier stop symbol pattern, the address is obtained by taking into account the variable distribution information 1 obtained from the hold number information that is information related to the start memory number. Thus, the variation pattern selection mode is made different depending on the number of starting memories.

  Thereafter, 2-byte distribution processing (step B708) is performed, the address of the latter half variation selection table obtained as a result of the distribution is acquired and prepared (step B709), and the target variation pattern random number 2 storage area (holding number 1) The fluctuation pattern random number 2 is loaded and prepared (Step B710). Then, a sorting process (step B711) is performed, the latter half variation number obtained as a result of the sorting is acquired and saved in the latter half variation number area (step B712). By this process, the latter half fluctuation pattern is set.

  Next, a first half variation group table is set (step B713), and a table selection pointer is calculated based on the variation distribution information 1 and 2 (including the determined second half variation number) (step B714). Then, the address of the first half variation selection table corresponding to the calculated pointer is acquired and prepared (step B715), and a random number is loaded from the target variation pattern random number 3 storage area (for holding number 1) and prepared (step B716). ). Thereafter, a sorting process (step B717) is performed, the first half variation number obtained as a result of the sorting is acquired and saved in the first half variation number area (step B718), and the variation pattern setting process is terminated. By this processing, the first half variation pattern is set, and the variation pattern of the special figure variation display game is set.

[2-byte sort processing]
Next, the details of the 2-byte sorting process (step B708) in the above-described variation pattern setting process will be described with reference to FIG.
The 2-byte distribution process is a process for selecting the latter half variation selection table of the special figure variation display game from the latter half variation group table based on the variation pattern random number 1.

  In this 2-byte distribution process, first, it is checked whether or not the leading data of the latter half variation group table (selection table) prepared in the variation pattern setting process is a code without distribution (ie, “0”) (step B721). ). Here, the latter half fluctuation group table stores a predetermined distribution value in association with at least one latter half fluctuation pattern group, but defines only the latter half fluctuation pattern group in which the latter half fluctuation pattern is “no reach”. In the case of a variation group table (for example, a part of the variation group table when the result is out of order), since there is no need for distribution, a distribution value “0”, that is, a code without distribution is defined at the top. ing.

  If the first data of the latter-half variation group table is a code without distribution (step B722; YES), the data is updated to the address of the data corresponding to the distribution result (step B727), and the 2-byte distribution process is completed. To do. On the other hand, if the first data in the latter-half variation group table is not a code without distribution (step B722; NO), the first distribution value specified in the latter-half variation group table is acquired (step B723).

  Subsequently, a new random value is calculated by subtracting the distribution value acquired in Step B723 from the random value (the value of the fluctuation pattern random number 1) loaded in B707 of the fluctuation pattern setting process (Step B724). It is determined whether or not the calculated new random value is smaller than “0” (step B725). If the new random value is not smaller than “0” (step B725; NO), after updating to the address of the next distribution value (step B726), the process proceeds to step B723, and the subsequent processes are performed. Do. That is, in step B723, after the distribution value specified next in the variation group selection table is acquired, the distribution value is subtracted with the random number determined in step B725 as a new random value, and a new random value is further subtracted. A numerical value is calculated (step B724). Then, it is determined whether or not the calculated new random value is smaller than “0” (step B725).

  The above processing is executed until it is determined in step B725 that the new random value is smaller than “0” (step B72; YES). As a result, any one of the latter-half variation selection tables is selected from at least one latter-half variation selection table defined in the latter-half variation group table. If it is determined in step B725 that the new random number value is smaller than “0” (step B725; YES), the data address corresponding to the result of distribution is updated (step B727), and the 2-byte distribution process is performed. Exit.

[Distribution processing]
Next, details of the sorting process (steps B711 and B717) in the above-described variation pattern setting process will be described with reference to FIG.
The sorting process is based on the fluctuation pattern random number 2 to select the latter half fluctuation pattern of the special figure fluctuation display game from the latter half fluctuation selection table (second half fluctuation pattern group), or based on the fluctuation pattern random number 3, the first half fluctuation selection table ( This is a process for selecting the first half variation pattern of the special figure variation display game from the first half variation pattern group).

  In this distribution process, first, it is checked whether or not the top data of the prepared latter half variation selection table (selection table) and first half variation selection table (selection table) is a code without distribution (ie, “0”). (Step B731). Here, like the latter half fluctuation group table, the latter half fluctuation selection table and the first half fluctuation selection table store a predetermined distribution value in association with at least one latter half fluctuation pattern or first half fluctuation pattern. In the case of a selection table having no distribution, a distribution value “0”, that is, a code without distribution is defined at the top.

  If the first data in the latter half variation selection table or the first half variation selection table is a code without sorting (step B732; YES), the data is updated to the address of the data corresponding to the sorting result (step B737), and the sorting is performed. The process ends. On the other hand, if the first data of the second half variation selection table or the first half variation selection table is not a code without distribution (step B732; NO), one distribution value first defined in the second half variation selection table or the first half variation selection table. Is acquired (step B733).

  Subsequently, a new random value is obtained by subtracting the distribution value acquired in step B733 from the random value (the value of the fluctuation pattern random number 2 or the fluctuation pattern random number 3) loaded in step B710 or B716 of the fluctuation pattern setting process. (Step B734), it is determined whether the calculated new random number value is smaller than “0” (step B735). If the new random value is not smaller than “0” (step B735; NO), after updating to the address of the next distribution value (step B736), the process proceeds to step B733, and thereafter Process.

  That is, in step B733, after the distribution value specified next in the latter half variation selection table or the first half variation selection table is acquired, the distribution value is subtracted using the determined random number value as a new random number value in step B735. Further, a new random value is calculated (step B734). Then, it is determined whether or not the calculated new random value is smaller than “0” (step B735). The above processing is executed until it is determined in step B735 that the new random value is smaller than “0” (step B735; YES). As a result, any one of the latter-half variation number or the first-half variation number is selected from at least one latter-half variation pattern or first-half variation pattern defined in the latter-half variation selection table or the first-half variation selection table. If it is determined in step B735 that the new random number value is smaller than “0” (step B735; YES), it is updated to the address of the data corresponding to the result of distribution (step B737), and the distribution process is terminated. To do.

[Variation start information setting process]
Next, details of the variation start information setting process (step B637) in the above-described special figure 1 variation start process will be described with reference to FIG.
In the variation start information setting process, first, after clearing the random number storage area of the target variation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 (step B741), the first half variation corresponding to the first variation number acquired in the variation pattern setting process. A process of acquiring the value of the time value table (step B742) is performed, and subsequently, a process of acquiring the first half fluctuation time value corresponding to the first half fluctuation number (step B743) is performed, and further obtained by the second half fluctuation pattern setting process. The process (step B744) of setting the latter half fluctuation time value table corresponding to the latter half fluctuation number is performed.

Next, a process of obtaining the latter half fluctuation time value corresponding to the latter half fluctuation number (step B745) is performed, and then a process of adding the acquired first half fluctuation time value and the latter half fluctuation time value (step B746) is performed. After that, the added value is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step B747).
Subsequently, after the fluctuation command (MODE) corresponding to the first half fluctuation number is calculated and prepared (step B748), the value of the second half fluctuation number is prepared as a fluctuation command (ACTION) (step B749), and the production command setting process (Step B750) is performed.

Next, the special symbol hold number corresponding to the variation symbol determination flag is updated by −1 (step B751), the address of the random number storage area corresponding to the variation symbol determination flag is set (step B752), and the random number storage region is shifted. (Step B753), and clear the vacant area after the shift to 0 (Step B754).
Thereafter, as a process related to the extension of the stop time for displaying the result of the special figure variation display game, first, the stop extension information area is cleared (step B755). Then, the stop symbol pattern is a discontinuation stop symbol pattern (step B756; YES), the effect mode number is 3 (step B757; YES), and the remaining number of rotations (game number) in the effect mode is 1. (Step B758; YES) determines whether or not a special figure high probability (high probability state) is in progress (Step B759).

If the special figure is not in high probability (step B759; NO), the stop extension information 1 is saved in the stop extension information area (step B760), and a stop information command corresponding to the stop extension information is prepared (step B762). An effect command setting process (step B763) is performed, and the variation start information setting process is terminated. Thereby, the stop time is set to the special figure extension display time 1 (first extension stop time) that is longer than the normal special figure display time (normal stop time).
If the special figure high probability is present (step B759; YES), the stop extension information 2 is saved in the stop extension information area (step B761), and a stop information command corresponding to the stop extension information is prepared (step B761). B76), an effect command setting process (step B763) is performed, and the variation start information setting process is terminated. Thereby, the special time extension display time 2 (second extended stop time) in which the stop time is longer than the normal special figure display time is set.

On the other hand, when the stop symbol pattern is not an outlier stop symbol pattern (step B756; NO), when the effect mode number is not 3 (step B757; NO), or when the remaining number of rotations (game number) in effect mode 3 is not 1. (Step B758; NO) ends the variation start information setting process. In this case, the extension of the stop time is not set, and the normal stop time is set.
In this way, the stop time of the special figure fluctuation display game is set at the start of the special figure fluctuation display game based on the result of the special figure fluctuation display game, the specific rotation speed, and the state of the production mode. To be done. Thereby, for example, it is possible to set an effect that is continuous between the variation time and the stop time, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  Through the above processing, information related to the start of the special figure variation display game is set. That is, the game control device 1054 serves as a determination unit that determines various random values stored in the start storage unit (game control device 1054). Further, the game control device 1054 serves as a variation pattern determining means capable of determining the variation pattern of the identification information executed in the variation display game based on the determination information of the start memory.

  Information regarding the start of the special figure variation display game is transmitted to the effect control device 1053 later, and the effect control device 1053 responds to the variation pattern determined based on the reception of the information regarding the start of the special figure variation display game. To set the detailed contents of the decoration special map change display game. The information related to the start of the special figure variation display game includes a decoration special figure hold number command including information related to the start memory number (holding number), a decoration special figure command including information related to the stop symbol, and a fluctuation of the special figure variation display game. A variation command including information related to the pattern and a stop information command including information related to the extension of the stop time are listed, and the commands are transmitted to the effect control device 1053 in this order. In particular, by transmitting the decoration special figure command before the variation command, the processing in the effect control device 1053 can be efficiently advanced.

[Special Figure 2 Variation Start Processing]
Next, the details of the special figure 2 variation start process (step B604) in the special figure ordinary process described above will be described with reference to FIG.
The special figure 2 fluctuation start process is a process performed at the start of the second special figure fluctuation display game, and the same process as the special figure 1 fluctuation start process shown in FIG. Is what you do.
When the routine starts, a special figure 2 fluctuation flag indicating the type of special figure fluctuation display game to be executed (here, special figure 2) is saved in the fluctuation symbol discrimination flag area (step B771), and the second special figure fluctuation display is performed. A jackpot flag 2 setting process (step B772) is performed for setting the shift information and jackpot information to the jackpot flag 2 for determining whether or not the game is a jackpot. Details of the big hit flag 2 setting process in step B772 will be described later.

  Next, after performing the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process (step B773) related to the setting of the special figure 2 stop symbol (symbol information), the special figure which sets the special symbol information which is a parameter for setting the variation pattern Special figure 2 fluctuation pattern setting information which is a table in which information is set for performing various information setting processes (see step B774, see FIG. 150) and referring to various information regarding the fluctuation pattern setting of the second special figure fluctuation display game. A table is prepared (step B775). Thereafter, a variation pattern setting process (see step B776, see FIG. 151) for setting a variation pattern for the second special figure variation display game is performed, and a variation start information setting process for setting variation start information for the second special figure variation display game. (Refer to Step B777, FIG. 154), and the changing information of the gaming state command area for payout is set (Step B778), and the special figure 2 change start process is terminated. As a result of the process in step B778, game state information indicating that the special figure 2 is changing is sent to the payout control device 1230.

[Big hit flag 2 setting process]
Next, details of the big hit flag 2 setting process (step B772) in the special figure 2 fluctuation start process described above will be described with reference to FIG.
In this process, the same process as that in the big hit flag 1 setting process shown in FIG. 147 is performed on the second start-up memory. In this big hit flag 2 setting process, first, shift information is saved in the big hit flag 2 area (step B781). This is because information on the deviation is set in advance before the big hit determination. Next, a big hit random number is loaded from the special figure 2 big hit random number storage area (for holding number 1) in the RAM and prepared (step B782). Note that for the number of reservations 1 is an area for storing information (random number or the like) about the special figure starting storage whose digestion order is the earliest (here, the earliest in the special figure 2). Thereafter, a jackpot determination process (see step B783, see FIG. 148) is performed to determine whether or not the jackpot random number value matches the jackpot determination value. This is to check whether the jackpot random number corresponding to the special figure 2 extracted this time is in the jackpot range (a value between the jackpot lower limit judgment value and the upper limit judgment value: matching the jackpot judgment value) If it is within the range of the big hit, it can be judged as a big hit.

  If the determination result of the big hit determination process (step B783) is a big hit (step B784; YES), the big hit information is overwritten and saved in the big hit flag 2 area where the loss information is saved in step B781 (step B785). ), The big hit flag 2 setting process is terminated. On the other hand, if the determination result of the big hit determination process (step B783) is not a big hit (step B784; NO), the big hit flag 2 setting process is terminated while the deviation information is saved in the big hit flag 2. Therefore, at this time, the processing ends in a state where the shift information is saved in the jackpot flag 2, and the jackpot flag 2 is not set.

[Special figure 2 stop symbol setting process]
Next, details of the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process (step B773) in the special figure 2 fluctuation start process described above will be described with reference to FIG.
In this process, the same process as the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process shown in FIG. 149 is performed on the second start memory.
When the routine starts, it is checked in step B801 whether the big hit flag 2 is a big hit (whether the big hit information is saved). The jackpot symbol random number is loaded from (for formula 1) (step B802). Next, a special figure 2 big hit symbol table is set (step B803).
Here, the information defined on the special figure 2 jackpot symbol table includes the following.
・ Random number judgment value (indicating distribution rate)
Stop symbol number corresponding to determination value Subsequently, the process proceeds to step B804, where a stop symbol number corresponding to the loaded jackpot symbol random number is acquired and saved in the special symbol 2 stop symbol number area. By this process, the type of special result is selected. The stop symbol number is used to set a stop symbol in a special symbol display (here, a seven-segment special symbol 2 display in the collective display device 1035).

  Thereafter, the big hit stop symbol information table is set (step B805), the stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the stop symbol pattern area (step B806). The stop symbol pattern is used to set a stop symbol type (disconnected, 16R probability variation, 11R probability variation, 2R probability variation, 11R normal variation, etc.) on the display device 1041. Next, a probability variation determination flag corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the probability variation determination flag area (step B807). The probability variation determination flag is for setting a probability state after the end of the special gaming state.

  Further, the round number upper limit information corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the round number upper limit information area (step B808), and the big winning opening release information corresponding to the stopped symbol number is acquired and the big winning opening is released. Save in the information area (step B809). These pieces of information are for setting the execution mode of the special gaming state. Then, a special decoration figure command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is prepared (step B812).

On the other hand, if the big hit flag 2 is not big hit in step B801 (step B801; NO), the stop symbol number at the time of loss is saved in the special symbol 2 stop symbol number area (step B810), and the loss stop symbol pattern is set as the stop symbol pattern. Save in the area (step B811), and prepare a decoration special figure command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern (step B812).
There are 11 types of decoration special figure commands, for example, and the special figure type in the effect control apparatus 1053 can be determined by the difference in these types.
Through the above processing, a stop symbol corresponding to the result of the special figure variation display game is set.

  Thereafter, the decoration special figure command is saved in the decoration special figure command area (step B813), and an effect command setting process (step B814) is performed. This decoration special figure command is transmitted to the effect control apparatus 1053 later. Then, the symbol data corresponding to the stop symbol number is saved in the test signal output data area (step B815), and the special figure 2 big hit symbol random number storage area (for holding number 1) is cleared to 0 (step B816). The stop symbol setting process in FIG.

  By the above-described special figure 1 stop symbol setting process and special figure 2 stop symbol setting process, the game control device 1054 becomes the first variable display game based on the detection of the game ball at the first start winning opening (start winning opening 1025). One variation display game is executed, and variation display game execution means for executing the second variation display game as the variation display game based on the detection of the game ball at the second start winning opening (ordinary variation winning device 1026). Further, the game control device 1054 serves as a variable display game execution control unit that controls execution of the variable display game based on the determination result by the determination unit (game control device 1054).

[Special figure changing process transition setting process (Special figure 1)]
Next, the details of the special-fluctuation changing process transition setting process (special figure 1) (step B610) in the special-figure normal process described above will be described with reference to FIG.
When the routine starts, “1” (corresponding to the process number related to the special figure changing process) is set in step B821, and the process number (here, “1”) is set in the special figure game process number area in step B822. Save. Next, in step B823, the customer waiting demo flag area is cleared, and in step B824, a signal related to the start of fluctuation in FIG. 1 is saved in the test signal output data area.
Next, in step B825, the changing flag is saved in the special figure 1 fluctuation control flag area, and in step B826, the blinking control timer (the special figure 1 display which is an LED segment in the collective display 1035) is displayed in the special figure 1 blinking control timer area. The initial value (for example, 200 ms) of the flashing cycle timer) is saved and the routine is terminated.
In this way, the process for shifting to the special figure changing process for the special figure 1 is performed.

[Special figure changing process transition setting process (Special figure 2)]
Next, the details of the special-fluctuation changing process transition setting process (special figure 2) (step B605) in the special-figure normal process will be described with reference to FIG.
When the routine is started, “1” (corresponding to the process number related to the special figure changing process) is set in step B831, and the process number (here, “1”) is set in the special figure game process number area in step B832. Save. Next, in step B833, the customer waiting demo flag area is cleared, and in step B834, a signal related to the start of special figure 2 fluctuation is saved in the test signal output data area.
Next, in step B835, the changing flag is saved in the special figure 2 fluctuation control flag area, and in step B836, the blinking control timer (the special figure 2 display which is an LED segment in the collective display 1035) is displayed in the special figure 2 blinking control timer area. The initial value (for example, 200 ms) of the flashing cycle timer) is saved and the routine is terminated.
In this way, the process for shifting to the special figure changing process with respect to the special figure 2 is performed.

[Special figure changing process]
Next, details of the special figure changing process (step B510) in the special figure game process described above will be described with reference to FIG.
In the special figure changing process, first, a symbol stop command corresponding to the changing symbol discrimination flag is prepared (step B841), and an effect command setting process (step B842) is performed. As a result, a symbol stop command is sent to the effect control device 1053.
Next, it is determined whether there is stop extension information (stop extension information 1 or 2) (step B843). When there is no stop extension information (step B843; NO), the normal special figure display time (for example, 600 ms) is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step B844), and the symbol stop number counter is updated by "+1" (step B847). The symbol stop count counter does not return to “0” even if it makes a round, but remains at the upper limit. Subsequently, the special figure display process transition setting process (step B848) is performed, and the special figure display process is terminated.

If there is stop extension information (step B843; YES), it is determined whether the stop extension information is 1 (step B845). If it is the stop extension information 1 (step B845; YES), the special figure extension display time 1 (for example, 3500 ms) is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step B846), and the symbol stop number counter is updated by “+1” ( After step B847), the special figure display processing transition setting process (step B848) is performed, and the special figure display processing is terminated.
On the other hand, if it is not stop extension information 1 (step B845; NO), that is, if it is stop extension information 2, special figure extension display time 2 (for example, 14300 ms) is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step B849). After updating the symbol stop count counter by “+1” (step B847), the special figure display process transition setting process (step B848) is performed, and the special figure display process is terminated. That is, the game control device 1054 serves as stop time setting means for setting a stop time for displaying the stop result mode of the variable display game.
As described above, the special figure display time is controlled as follows, for example.
・ Normal special drawing display time: 600 ms
・ Special figure extension display time 1: 3500ms
・ Special figure extension display time 2: 14300ms
In this way, in the special figure fluctuation processing, it is not based on whether or not the jackpot is won or the latter half fluctuation number, but is set based on the stop extension information set at the start of the fluctuation of the special figure (whether the game is true, the specific rotation speed, the production mode state, etc. ) To determine the display time after stopping.
160 shows a method of sending a symbol stop command to the effect control device 1053, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a method of not sending a symbol stop command to the effect control device 1053 may be used. This is because the symbol variation time is determined by the variation pattern, so that the symbol can be controlled to stop when the time determined by the effect control device 1053 has elapsed.

[Special map display process transition setting process]
Next, the details of the special figure display mid-process transition setting process (step B847) in the special figure changing process described above will be described with reference to FIG.
When the routine starts, “2” (corresponding to the process number related to the special figure display process) is set in step B851, and the process number (here “2”) is set in the special figure game process number area in step B852. Save. Next, in step B853, a signal related to the special figure 1 variation end process is saved in the test signal output data area, and in step B854, a signal related to the special figure 2 fluctuation end process is saved in the test signal output data area.
Next, in step B 855, special information as control information for the special figure 1 fluctuation display game in the special figure 1 display (the special figure 1 display which is an LED segment in the collective display device 1035) is displayed in the special figure 1 fluctuation control flag area. The stop flag related to the change stop on the display in FIG. 1 is saved, the stop flag is saved in the special view 2 change control flag area in step B856, and the routine is terminated.
In this way, a process for shifting to the special figure display process is performed.

[Special figure display processing]
Next, the details of the special figure display process (step B511) in the special figure game process described above will be described with reference to FIG.
In the special figure display process, first, the big hit flag 2 set in the big hit flag 2 setting process in the special figure 2 fluctuation start process 1 is loaded (step B861), and the big hit flag 2 area of the RAM is cleared (step B861). Step B862) is performed.
Next, it is checked whether or not the loaded big hit flag 2 is a big hit (step B863). Then, in step B869, a signal related to the start of the special figure 2 big hit is saved in the test signal output data area, and the process proceeds to step B870.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step B863 that the big hit flag 2 is not a big hit (step B863; NO), the big hit flag 1 set in the big hit flag 1 setting process in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process is loaded. (Step B864), a process of clearing the RAM big hit flag 1 area (Step B865) is performed.
Subsequently, it is checked whether the loaded big hit flag 1 is a big hit (step B866), and if it is determined that the big hit is hit (step B866; YES), a signal relating to the start of special figure 1 big hit is saved in the test signal output data area. (Step B867), and the process proceeds to Step B870.
If it is determined in step B866 that there is no big hit (NO), the process proceeds to step B887. At this time, the processing is advanced after determining whether there is a short time.

Now, after saving the test signal related to the special figure 1 big hit in step B867 or saving the test signal related to the special figure 2 big hit in step B869, the processing for setting the round number upper limit value table (step B870) is performed.
Next, the round number upper limit value corresponding to the round number upper limit information is acquired, and the round number upper limit value is saved in the round number upper limit area (step B871). Subsequently, a round LED pointer corresponding to the round number upper limit value information is acquired, and the round LED pointer is saved in the round LED pointer area (step B872).
Next, a decoration special figure command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is loaded and prepared from the decoration special figure command area of the RAM (step B873), and an effect command setting process (step B874) is performed. After that, a probability information command at the time of low probability related to information that sets the probability of the hit result in the normal map variation display game and the special map variation display game as the normal probability state (low probability state) is prepared (step B875), An effect command setting process (step B876) is performed. Subsequently, a fanfare command corresponding to the symbol information (stop symbol number or stop symbol pattern) set in the special symbol 1 or special symbol 2 stop symbol setting process is prepared (step B877), and an effect command setting process (step B878).

Next, the command corresponding to the special winning opening information is saved in the payout gaming state command area (step B879). As a result, the game state information that the special winning opening is opened is transmitted to the payout control device 1230. Subsequently, a command related to the big hit start is saved in the game state command area for payout (step B880). As a result, game state information indicating that the big hit has started is transmitted to the payout control device 1230.
At this time, with regard to the game state information, information regarding probability change, time reduction, information regarding symbol variation disappears, and information indicating that it is a big hit is turned on.
Next, the big hit fanfare time (for example, 6000 ms or 48 ms) corresponding to the special winning opening information is saved in the special game process timer area (step B881). Then, the big prize mouth illegal prize number area of the big prize mouth (the first variable prize apparatus 1027 or the second variable prize apparatus 1034) corresponding to the big prize opening information is cleared (step B882), and the big prize opening information is obtained. The fraud monitoring period outside flag is saved in the special prize opening fraud monitoring period flag area of the corresponding special winning opening (step B883).
Next, the special figure game mode flag is loaded (step B884), and the loaded flag is saved in the special figure game mode flag saving area (step B885). Thereby, information on the probability state when the special result occurs is stored. Then, the effect mode after the end of the special gaming state is determined based on the information stored later.

Thereafter, a transition setting process 1 (fanfare / interval process transition setting process 1) (step B886) for setting various data for transition to the fanfare / interval process is performed, and the special figure display process is terminated.
Specifically, the process number “3” relating to the fanfare / interval process, the process of setting information relating to switching of various states, and the like are performed, and the special-fluctuating process is terminated.
Here, as information for switching various states, for example, a signal indicating that the gaming state is a special gaming state (a big hit state), a probability that a hit result is obtained in a normal variation display game and a special variation display game Test signal indicating that the game is in a normal probability state (low probability state), information related to clearing the number of winnings in the big winning mouth during the illegal winning port fraud monitoring period, information related to clearing the number of rounds in the special gaming state, high Information to turn off the game state display LED related to the display of the probability state, information to set the probability of hitting results in the normal fluctuation display game as a normal probability state (low probability state), display of the high probability state that is turned on when the power failure is restored Information for turning off the gaming state display LED (high probability notification LED), information for controlling the special figure variation display game (for example, the probability of a hit result in the special figure variation display game is normally confirmed) Information indicating the state (low probability state) and the probability that the hit result is the normal probability state (low probability state) output to the effect control device 1053 when the power failure is restored For example, information on clearing the number of remaining time reduction fluctuations after a big hit), and the like.

  On the other hand, if the big hit flag 1 is not big hit at step B866 (step B866; NO), the process jumps to the production mode information check process (step B887) regarding the production mode setting. Next, a time-reduced variation number update process (step B888) for managing the number of times of execution of the special figure variation display game to be in a short time state is performed. Thereafter, the changing information in the game state command area for payout is cleared (step B889). At this time, with regard to the game state information, the information related to the symbol variation disappears, and the information corresponding to the current probability state is retained as the information regarding the probability variation and the short time. Next, special figure normal process transfer setting process 1 (see step B890, see FIG. 32) for setting various data for transferring to the special figure normal process. Specifically, the process number “ The process of setting “0” or the like is performed, and the special figure displaying process is terminated.

[Fanfare / interval process transition setting process 1]
Next, details of the fanfare / interval process transition setting process 1 (step B886) in the above-described special figure display process will be described with reference to FIG.
When the routine starts, “3” (corresponding to the processing number related to fanfare / interval processing) is set in step B901, and the processing number (here, “3”) is set in the special figure game processing number area in step B902. Save. Next, in step B903, a signal relating to the end of high probability & short time is saved in the test signal output data area.

Next, the process proceeds to step B904, where the number of rounds area for managing the number of rounds executed in the special game state is cleared, and in the subsequent step B905, the number at the low probability is saved in the game state display number area. Save the usual figure low probability & no ordinary power support flag in the figure game mode flag area.
Next, in step B907, the variable symbol determination flag area is cleared, in step B908, the high probability notification flag area is cleared to turn off the gaming state display LED related to the display of the high probability state, and in step B909, the special figure game mode flag is cleared. A special figure low probability & no short time flag is saved in the area, and a probability information command (low probability) is saved in the power command restoration transmission command area which saves the command output to the effect control device 1054 at the time of power failure restoration in step B910. Next, in step B911, the time variation count area for managing the number of special figure variation display games that can be executed in the time shortened state is cleared. As a result, the high-probability state and the short-time state are terminated, and a normal probability state and a normal operation state are obtained.

Next, a main control ID transmission request flag is set in step B912. This sets a main control ID transmission request flag in response to a request from the payout control device 1230 during a big hit.
Thereafter, the number of effect mode 1 is saved in the effect mode number area (step B913), and the effect remaining rotation speed area is cleared (step B914). This is once cleared because the game control device 1054 (main board) manages the production mode.
Next, the non-updated code is saved in the next mode transition information area (step B915), the effect mode 1 command is saved in the effect mode command area (step B916), and the fanfare / interval process transition setting process 1 ends. . As a result, the information on the effect mode is once cleared (that is, the initial value in the default state) with the occurrence of the special gaming state.

[Direction mode information check processing]
Next, the details of the effect mode information check process (step B887) in the above special figure display process will be described with reference to FIG.
In the effect mode information check process, first, it is determined whether the next mode transition information is a no-update code (step B921). If the next mode transition information is a no-update code (step B921; YES), the effect mode information check process is terminated. In this case, the effect mode is not changed according to the number of executed special figure variation display games, and for example, in the high probability state, the effect mode that continues until the next big hit is selected. is there.

  If the next mode transition information is not a no-update code (step B921; NO), the effect remaining number of revolutions, which is the number of executions of the special figure variable display game until the change of the effect mode, is updated by -1 (step B922). Then, it is determined whether or not the remaining rotational speed of the effect is 0 (step B923). When the effect remaining rotation number becomes 0 (step B923; YES), that is, when the effect mode is changed from the next special figure variation display game, the effect mode information address table is set (step B924), and the next mode transition is made. The address of the table corresponding to the information is acquired (step B925).

  Then, the effect mode number of the effect mode to be transferred is acquired and saved in the effect mode number area (step B926), the remaining effect rotation speed of the effect mode to be transferred is acquired and saved in the effect remaining speed area (step S926). B927), the next mode transition information of the effect mode to be transitioned is acquired and saved in the next mode transition information area (step B928). Thereafter, a command corresponding to the new effect mode number is prepared (step B929), the command is saved in the effect mode command area (step B930), an effect command setting process (step B931) is performed, and an effect mode information check process is performed. Exit.

On the other hand, when the remaining effect rotation speed is not 0 (step B923; NO), that is, when the current effect mode continues even in the next special figure variation display game, the remaining effect rotation speed is the specified rotation speed (for example, 8 times). It is determined whether or not there is (step B932). If the remaining effect rotation speed is not the specified rotation speed (step B932; NO), the effect mode information check process is terminated.
If the remaining effect rotation speed is the specified rotation speed (step B932; YES), an effect mode switching preparation command is prepared (step B933), an effect command setting process (step B934) is performed, and an effect mode information check process is performed. Exit. As a result, it is possible to perform an effect of notifying the switching before the specified rotational speed for switching the effect mode.
Thus, by managing the production mode with the game control device 1054, for example, control such as generating a specific reach only in a specific production mode is possible, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Time shortening fluctuation count update processing]
Next, the details of the time shortening variation number update process (step B888) in the above special figure display process will be described with reference to FIG.
In the time shortening fluctuation number update process, first, it is determined whether or not the special figure has a high probability (high probability state) (step B941). If it is during the special figure high probability (step B941; YES), the time shortening variation frequency update process is terminated. If it is not in the special figure high probability (step B941; NO), it is determined whether the special figure is short (short time state) (step B942).

If it is not during the special drawing time reduction (step B942; NO), the time shortening variation number update process is terminated. If the special figure time is short (step B942; YES), the time shortening fluctuation number for managing the number of executions of the special figure variation display game to be in the short time state is updated by -1 (step B943), and the time shortening fluctuation number is updated. Is determined to be 0 (step B944). If the time shortening variation count is not 0 (step B944; NO), that is, if the time-short state continues in the next special figure variation display game, the time shortening variation count updating process is terminated.
When the time shortening variation count is 0 (step B944; YES), that is, when the time-short state is terminated in the current special figure variation display game, a probability information command (time-short end) is prepared (step B945). As the probability information command (short time end), the same command as that at the low probability is used.
Next, an effect command setting process (step B946) is performed, and in a subsequent step B947, the time and medium information in the game state command area for payout is cleared. As a result, the game state information indicating that the time is over is transmitted to the payout control device 1230. Thereafter, a time reduction end setting process is performed (step B948), and the time shortening variation number update process is ended.

[Time-saving end setting processing]
Next, details of the time reduction end setting process (step B948) in the above-described time reduction variation number update process will be described with reference to FIG.
In the time-short end setting process, first, a signal related to the time-short end is saved in the test signal output data area (step B951), and a low probability number is saved in the game state display number area (step B952).
Next, the ordinary-game low-probability & ordinary-telephone-support-less flag is saved in the ordinary game mode flag area (step B953). Further, a special figure low probability & no short time flag is saved in the special figure game mode flag area (step B954), a probability information command (low probability) is saved in the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery (step B955), and the short time ends. The setting process ends.
In this way, the number of time reductions is managed by the game control device 1054, and necessary information (state) is set when the time reduction ends.

[Fanfare / In-interval processing]
Next, the details of the fanfare / interval process (step B512) in the above-described special figure game process will be described with reference to FIGS. 167 and 168. FIG.
In the fanfare / interval process, first, after performing the process of updating (+1) the number of rounds in the special game state (step B961), the special prize opening information is opened / closed by the special prize opening 2 (second variable prize winning device 1034). It is determined whether the pattern is 1-3 (step B962).
Here, there are five types of opening / closing patterns from the big winning opening 2 opening / closing pattern 1 to the big winning opening 2 opening / closing pattern 5 as the opening / closing patterns of the big winning opening 2 (second variable winning apparatus 1034). It is determined whether the open / close patterns 1 to 3 are present.

When the winning prize opening information is the winning prize opening 2 opening / closing patterns 1 to 3 (step B962; YES), control pointers (S (start value), E (end) corresponding to the winning prize opening 2 opening / closing patterns 1 to 3 are determined. Value)) is set (step B969), and the process proceeds to step B980 in FIG. By setting the start value and the end value of the control pointer, it is possible to set the opening / closing and closing time of the big winning opening in one round based on the big winning opening control table.
In the case of the winning prize opening 2 opening / closing patterns 1 to 3, since the execution time of one round is short, a series of images are displayed from the start to the end of the special game state instead of every round. A round command corresponding to the number of rounds is not transmitted.
If the winning opening information is not the winning opening 2 opening / closing patterns 1 to 3 (step B962; NO), a round command corresponding to the number of rounds in the special gaming state is prepared (step B963), and an effect command is set. Processing (step B964) is performed.

Thereafter, it is determined whether the starting round is the first round (1R) (step B965). If it is the first round (step B965; YES), the big prize opening information is the big prize opening 1 (first variation). (Winning device 1027) It is determined whether it is an open / close pattern (step B966).
Here, since there are three types of opening / closing patterns from the big winning opening 1 opening / closing pattern 1 to the big winning opening 1 opening / closing pattern 3 as the opening / closing patterns of the big winning opening 1 (first variable winning apparatus 1027), in step B966 It is determined whether the winning prize opening 1 is one of the open / close patterns 1 to 3.
When the winning prize opening information is the winning opening 1 opening / closing pattern (step B966; YES), the control pointer (S, E) corresponding to the first round (1R) of the winning opening 1 opening / closing pattern is set (step S970), the process proceeds to step B980 in FIG.
Note that the same operation is performed in the first round for each of the winning prize opening 1 opening / closing patterns 1 to 3.
If the big prize opening information is not the big winning opening 1 opening / closing pattern (step B966; NO), it is determined whether the big winning opening open information is the big winning opening 2 opening / closing pattern 4 (step B967).

  If the winning opening information is the winning opening 2 opening / closing pattern 4 (step B967; YES), the control pointer (S, E) corresponding to the first round (1R) of the winning opening 2 opening / closing pattern 4 is set. (Step B968), the process proceeds to Step B980 in FIG. Further, when the winning opening 2 information is not the winning opening 2 opening / closing pattern 4 (step B967; NO), the control pointer (S, E) corresponding to the first round (1R) of the winning opening 2 opening / closing pattern 5 is set. (Step B971), and then the process proceeds to Step B980 in FIG.

On the other hand, when the started round is not the first round (1R) (step B965; NO), it is determined whether the started round is 2 to 11 rounds (step B972), and the started round is 2 to 11 rounds. If it is round (step B972; YES), it is determined whether or not the special prize opening information is a special prize opening 2 opening / closing pattern (step B973). If the winning opening information is not the winning opening 2 opening / closing pattern (step B973; NO), the control pointers (S, E) corresponding to 2 to 11 rounds of the winning opening 1 opening / closing pattern are set (step S97). B974), and then the process proceeds to step B980 in FIG.
If the winning opening information is the winning opening 2 opening / closing pattern (step B973; YES), the control pointers (S, E) corresponding to the second and subsequent rounds of the winning opening 2 opening / closing pattern are set (step S97). B975), and then proceeds to step B980 in FIG.

  If the started round is not 2 to 11 rounds (step B972; NO), it is determined whether or not the big prize opening information is a big prize opening 2 opening / closing pattern (step B976). When the winning opening information is the winning opening 2 opening / closing pattern (step B976; YES), the control pointers (S, E) corresponding to the second and subsequent rounds of the winning opening 2 opening / closing pattern are set (step S976). B975), and then proceeds to step B980 in FIG. Further, when the special winning opening information is not the special winning opening 2 opening / closing pattern (step B976; NO), it is determined whether the special winning opening 1 is the special winning opening 1 opening / closing pattern 2 (step B977).

When the winning prize opening information is the winning prize opening 1 opening / closing pattern 2 (step B977; YES), the control pointers (S, E) corresponding to the 12th round and after of the winning prize opening 1 opening / closing pattern 2 are set (step S97). B978), and then the process proceeds to step B980 in FIG.
If the winning opening 1 is not the winning opening 1 opening / closing pattern 2 (step B977; NO), the control pointers (S, E) corresponding to the 12th and subsequent rounds of the winning opening 1 opening / closing pattern 3 are set ( Step B979), and then the process proceeds to Step B980 in FIG.

  In step B980 of FIG. 168, the start value (S) of the set control pointer is saved in the jackpot control pointer area (step B980), and the set control pointer end value (E) is set in the jackpot control pointer upper limit area. Save (step B981). Then, solenoid information setting processing (step B982) is performed, and it is determined whether or not the special winning opening opening information is the special winning opening 1 opening / closing pattern (step B983).

When the winning opening opening information is the winning opening 1 opening / closing pattern (step B983; YES), the winning opening opening process transition setting process 1 is performed (step B9824), and the fanfare / interval process is terminated.
If the winning opening information is not the winning opening 1 opening / closing pattern (step B983; NO), the winning opening opening process transition setting process 2 is performed (step B984), and the fanfare / interval process is terminated.
As a result of the above processing, there are three types of opening / closing patterns from the grand prize opening 1 opening / closing pattern 1 to the grand prize opening 1 opening / closing pattern 3 as the opening / closing patterns of the grand prize opening 1 (first variable prize winning device 1027). As the opening / closing patterns of the mouth 2 (second variable winning device 1034), there are five types of opening / closing patterns from the winning prize opening 2 opening / closing pattern 1 to the winning prize opening 2 opening / closing pattern 5, and any one of these opening / closing patterns. Will be set.

[Solenoid information setting process]
Next, details of the solenoid information setting processing (step B982) in the above-described fanfare / interval processing will be described with reference to FIG.
In the solenoid information setting process, first, a big winning opening control address table is set (step B991), and an address of the big winning opening control table corresponding to the big hit control pointer is acquired (step B992). After that, the output data is acquired and saved in the special winning opening solenoid output data area (step B993), the opening / closing time value is acquired and saved in the special figure game process timer area (step B994), and the solenoid information setting process is performed. finish.
With this process, the opening and closing of the special winning opening and its time are set.

[Large winning opening open process transition setting process 1]
Next, the details of the process for setting the process for setting a large winning opening during the fanfare / interval process 1 described above (step B984) will be described with reference to FIG.
In the process for setting a process for opening a special prize opening, first, the process number is set to “4” relating to the process for opening a special prize opening (step B1001), and the process number is saved in the special game process number area (step B1001). Step B1002). Thereafter, a signal related to the start of opening of the special winning opening 1 is saved in the test signal output data area (step B1003), and information on the special winning opening count number area for storing the number of winning entries to the special winning opening is cleared (step B1004). . Then, a special winning opening 1 controlling flag is saved in the special winning opening discrimination flag area (step B1005), and the special winning opening open process transition setting process 1 is ended.

[Large winning opening open process transition setting process 2]
Next, details of the process for setting the process for setting a special winning opening during the fanfare / interval process 2 (step B985) will be described with reference to FIG.
In the process for setting a process for opening a special prize opening, first, the process number is set to “4” relating to the process for opening a special prize opening (step B1011), and the process number is saved in the special game process number area (step B1011). Step B1012). Thereafter, a signal related to the opening of the special winning opening 2 is saved in the test signal output data area (step B1013), and the information of the special winning opening count number area for storing the number of winning entries to the special winning opening is cleared (step B1014). . Then, the special winning opening 2 controlling flag is saved in the special winning opening discrimination flag area (step B1015), and the special winning opening open process transition setting process 2 is ended.

[Processing during the grand prize opening]
Next, details of the special winning opening opening process (step B513) in the above-described special figure game process will be described with reference to FIG.
In the big prize opening opening process, first, the big hit control pointer is updated by +1 (step B1021), and it is determined whether the value of the control pointer has reached the value of the control pointer upper limit area (step B1022).
When the value of the control pointer does not reach the value of the control pointer upper limit value area (step B1022; NO), solenoid information setting processing (step B1029, see FIG. 169) is performed. Thereby, the opening / closing mode of the big prize opening according to the updated control pointer is set. Then, the process for setting a process for opening a special prize opening is performed (step B1030), and the process for opening a special prize opening is ended.
As shown in FIG. 174, in the special winning opening open process transition setting process 3, the process number is set to “4” related to the special winning opening open process (step B1041), and the processing number is set in the special game process number area. Save (step B1042), and finish the process of setting the process for setting the special winning opening open process 3.

  Returning to FIG. 172, when the value of the control pointer reaches the value of the control pointer upper limit value area (step B1022; YES), the big prize opening information is the big winning opening 2 short opening pattern (big winning opening 2 opening pattern 1). ~ 3) is determined (step B1023). If the winning prize opening information is a winning opening 2 short opening pattern (step B1023; YES), a winning prize remaining ball processing transition setting process (step B1028) is performed, and the process of opening the winning opening is ended. In this case, a series of images are displayed from the start to the end of the special game state, and no interval command or ending command is transmitted.

If the special winning opening release information is not the special winning opening 2 short opening pattern (step B1023; NO), the current round number in the special game state being executed and the round number upper limit value in the round number upper limit area of the RAM Are compared to determine whether the current round is the final round (step B1024). If it is not the final round (step B1024; NO), an interval command relating to the interval between rounds is prepared (step B1025), an effect command setting process (step B1027) is performed, and a winning prize remaining ball processing transition setting process is performed. (Step B1028) is performed, and the process for opening the special winning opening is completed.
If it is the final round (step B1024; YES), an ending command relating to display control of the ending display screen at the end of the special game state is prepared (step B1026), and an effect command setting process (step B1027) Is performed, and a special winning opening remaining ball process transition setting process (step B1028) is performed, and the special winning opening open process is terminated.

[Large winning ball remaining ball processing transition setting processing]
Next, details of the big winning opening remaining ball processing transition setting process (step B1028) in the above-described big winning opening releasing process will be described with reference to FIG.
In the winning prize remaining ball processing transition setting process, first, the processing number is set to “5” related to the winning ball remaining ball processing (step B1051), and the processing number is saved in the special game processing number area (step B1051). B1052). Thereafter, the winning prize remaining ball processing time (for example, 1380 ms), which is the time required for the remaining ball processing, is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step B1053). Then, in order to close the opening / closing member 1027b of the first variable winning device 1027 or the opening / closing member 1034a of the second variable winning device 1034, the first big winning port solenoid 1132 or the second big winning port 2 solenoid 1133 is turned off. The off data is saved in the large winning opening solenoid output data area (step B1054), and the large winning opening remaining ball processing transition setting processing is ended.

[Large winning ball remaining ball processing]
Next, details of the big winning opening remaining ball process (step B514) in the above-described special figure game process will be described with reference to FIG.
In the winning ball remaining ball processing, first, the current round number reaches the upper limit value by comparing the current round number in the special game state being executed with the round number upper limit value in the RAM round number upper limit area (final). Round)) is checked (step B1061).
If the current round in the special gaming state is not the final round (step B1061; NO), the current round number and the interval time corresponding to the special winning opening information are saved in the special game processing timer area (step B1062). ), The fanfare / inter-interval process transition setting process 2 (step B1063) is performed, and the winning prize remaining ball process is terminated.
The interval time is set to the time corresponding to the current round number and the special winning opening opening information (for example, 68 ms for the special winning opening 2 opening / closing patterns 1 to 3). The interval period between rounds is a period from the end of the round to the time that the winning ball remaining ball processing time (for example, 1380 ms) elapses, and further from the elapse of the winning ball remaining ball processing time until the interval time elapses. For example, if the winning prize opening 2 opening / closing patterns 1 to 3 are used, the time is 1448 ms.

On the other hand, when the current round in the special gaming state is the final round (step B1061; YES), the game mode flag is loaded from the special-purpose game mode flag saving area that stores the probability state when the special result is derived. (Step B1064). Then, the ending time corresponding to the loaded flag and the special winning opening release information is saved in the special game processing timer area (step B1065), and the big hit ending process transition setting process (step B1066) is performed, and the big winning prize remaining ball The process ends.
As described above, the ending period (ending time) is set based on the big prize opening information and the game mode flag at the time of the big hit instead of the symbol information.
The ending period (ending time) is not limited to the above, and may be set based on symbol information, for example.

The ending period from the end of the final round to the end of the special gaming state is that the winning ball remaining ball processing time (for example, 1380 ms) elapses from the end of the final round, and the ending time from the elapse of the winning ball remaining ball processing time. This is the period until elapses. For example, the special winning opening 2 opening / closing pattern that is selected when the special result is 2R probability variation and the special result is not in the short-time state at the time of deriving the special result, that is, in the production mode that is selected in a mode other than the short-time state at the time of deriving the special result. If it is 1, the ending time is 21020 ms. Therefore, the length of the ending period is 22400 ms, including 1380 ms that is spent as the winning ball remaining ball processing time before this ending time, and the ending effect is executed on the display device 1041 or the like during this ending period.
Also, the special winning opening 2 opening / closing pattern selected when the special result is 2R probability change and the time is short when the special result is derived, that is, when the special mode is the effect mode selected in the short time when the special result is derived. If it is 2, the ending time is 20 ms. Therefore, the length of the ending period is 1400 ms, including 1380 ms that is spent as the winning ball remaining ball processing time before this ending time.

[Fanfare / interval process transition setting process 2]
Next, the details of the fanfare / interval process transition setting process 2 (step B1063) in the above-described winning prize remaining ball process will be described with reference to FIG.
In the fanfare / interval process transition setting process 2, first, “3”, which is a process number related to the fanfare / interval process, is set (step B1071), and the process number is saved in the special game process number area (step B1072). ).
Next, a signal related to the end of opening of the big winning opening 1 (first variable winning apparatus 1027) is saved in the test signal output data area (step B1073), and the opening end of the big winning opening 1 (second variable winning apparatus 1034) is saved. The signal is saved in the test signal output data area (step B1074). Then, the special winning opening determination flag area is cleared (step B1075), and the fanfare / interval process transition setting process 2 is ended.

[Big jackpot end process transition setting process]
Next, details of the jackpot end process transition setting process (step B1066) in the above-described winning prize remaining ball process will be described with reference to FIG.
In the jackpot end process transition setting process, first, “6” is set as the process number related to the jackpot end process (step B1081), and the process number is saved in the special game process number area (step B1082). Thereafter, a signal relating to the opening completion of the special winning opening 1 (first variable winning apparatus 1027) is saved in the test signal output data area (step B1083), and a signal relating to the opening completion of the special winning opening 2 (second variable winning apparatus 1034). Is saved in the test signal output data area (step B1084).

Next, information on the special winning count area for storing the number of winning prizes is cleared (step B1085), and information on the round number area for storing the number of rounds in the special gaming state is cleared (step B1086). ), Information on the round number upper limit area for storing the upper limit value of the round number in the special gaming state is cleared (step B1087).
Then, the information in the round number upper limit information area for storing the flag for determining the upper limit value for the number of rounds is cleared (step B1088), and the big winning opening opening information area for storing the flag for determining the opening information for the big winning opening is stored. The information is cleared (step B1089), and the information in the big hit control pointer area for setting the opening / closing mode of the big prize opening is cleared (step B1090). After that, the big hit control pointer upper limit value area for storing the end value of the big hit control pointer is cleared (step B1091), the big winning opening discrimination flag area is cleared (step B1092), and the big hit end process transition setting process is ended. To do.

[Big hits end processing]
Next, details of the jackpot end process (step B515) in the above-described special figure game process will be described with reference to FIG.
In the jackpot end process, first, the probability variation determination flag set based on the type of special result that triggered the current special gaming state is set when the high probability state is set after the special gaming state ends. It is determined whether the data is high probability (step B1101).
If it is not high probability data (step B1101; NO), jackpot end setting processing 1 is performed (step B1012). Since this is a state that is not a high-probability rush, a process for shifting to a mode that shortens the time after the big hit ends is set.
On the other hand, when the data is high probability data (step B1101; YES), jackpot end setting processing 2 is performed (step B1103). Since this is a state of high probability rushing, it sets processing for shifting to a mode in which probability fluctuation (high probability start) occurs after the big hit.
Next, a probability information command corresponding to the special figure game mode flag is prepared (step B1104), and an effect command setting process (step B1105) is performed.

Next, as a process for saving information necessary for managing the effect mode in the game control device 1054, first, an effect mode information setting table corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is set (step B1106). Then, with reference to the set production mode information setting table, the production mode number of the production mode set after the end of the special gaming state is acquired and saved in the production mode number area (step B1107). Further, the effect remaining speed of the effect mode set after the end of the special gaming state is acquired and saved in the effect remaining speed region (step B1108), and the next mode transition to the effect mode set after the end of the special gaming state is performed. Information is acquired and saved in the next mode transition information area (step B1109).
Thereafter, a command corresponding to the new effect mode number is prepared (step B1110), the command is saved in the effect mode command area (step B1111), and an effect command setting process (step B1112) is performed.
Next, the payout jackpot signal command area is cleared (step B1113). Since this is the big hit end, the signal during the big hit is cleared. Next, the command corresponding to the probability state to be transferred is saved in the payout gaming state command area (step B1114). If you enter the probability fluctuation, turn on the information of “Big hit + short time” and “During probability change”, and if you enter the short time instead of the probability change, “Big hit + short time” and “Short time” Information is turned on. All information that is not turned on is turned off. In addition, all models that do not have probability fluctuations / shortening of time are turned off. Next, special figure normal process transition setting process 3 is performed (step B1115), and the big hit end process is terminated.

[Big jackpot end setting 1]
Next, details of the jackpot end setting process 1 (step B1102) in the above jackpot end process will be described with reference to FIG.
When the routine is started, a signal related to the start of time reduction is saved in the test signal output data area in step B1121. The signals related to the start of a short time in this area are as follows.
・ Turn on special symbol 1 fluctuation time reduction status signal
・ Turn on special symbol 2 fluctuation time reduction status signal
-Normal symbol 1 high probability state signal ON
・ Turn on the normal signal 1 fluctuation time reduction state signal
・ Turn on the normal extension 1 signal

Next, in step B1122, the ordinary figure high probability & ordinary power support flag is saved in the ordinary figure game mode flag area, and in step B1123, the special figure low probability & hourly flag is saved in the special figure game mode flag area.
Next, in step B1124, the probability information command (time reduction) is saved in the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery, and in step B1125, the time reduction fluctuation initial value (eg, 70) is saved in the time reduction fluctuation area, and the process returns.
By the above processing, after the special gaming state is ended, the probability state of the special figure variation display game becomes the normal probability state and the time shortened state. In addition, by setting an initial value (eg, 70) of the time variation number in the time variation region, the time reduction state ends when the special figure variation display game is executed a predetermined number of times (eg, 70 times).

[Big hit end setting process 2]
Next, details of the jackpot end setting process 2 (step B1103) in the above jackpot end process will be described with reference to FIG.
When the routine starts, a signal relating to the start of high probability is saved in the test signal output data area in step B1131. The signals for the high probability start in this region include:
・ Turn on special symbol 1 high probability state signal
・ Turn on special symbol 2 high probability state signal
・ Turn on special symbol 1 fluctuation time reduction status signal
・ Turn on special symbol 2 fluctuation time reduction status signal
-Normal symbol 1 high probability state signal ON
・ Turn on the normal signal 1 fluctuation time reduction state signal
・ Turn on the normal extension 1 signal

Next, in step B1132, the ordinary figure high probability & ordinary power support flag is saved in the ordinary figure game mode flag area, and in step B1133, the special figure high probability & hourly flag is saved in the special figure game mode flag area. Thereafter, the probability information command (high probability) is saved in the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery in step B1134, the time shortening variation frequency area is cleared in step B1135, and the jackpot end setting process 2 is ended.
By the above processing, after the special game state is ended, the probability state of the special figure variation display game becomes a high probability state and the time is reduced until the next special result mode is derived.
That is, a specific game in which the game control device 1054 can generate a specific game state (short-time state) that extends a period during which the normal variation winning device 1026 is in an open state for a predetermined period after the special game state ends. It serves as state generation control means.

[Special Figure Normal Process Transition Setting Process 3]
Next, details of the special figure normal process transition setting process 3 (step B1115) in the above jackpot end process will be described with reference to FIG.
When the routine is started, “0” (corresponding to the process number related to the special figure normal process) is set in step B1141, and the process number (here, “0”) is set in the special figure game process number area in step B1142. Save. Next, in step B1143, a signal relating to the end of the jackpot is saved in the test signal output data area.

Here, the signals relating to the end of the jackpot are as follows.
・ Turn off the condition device operating signal
・ Off signal during continuous operation of equipment
・ Off signal per special symbol or signal per special symbol 2
Next, in step B1144, the probability variation determination flag area is cleared, in step B1145, the pointer area of the round LED indicating the number of rounds of the big hit is cleared, and in step B1146, the number in the short time is saved in the game state display number area. Then, in step B1147, the fraud monitoring period flag is saved in the big prize opening 1 fraud monitoring period flag area, and in step B1148, the fraud monitoring period flag is saved in the big prize opening 2 fraud monitoring period flag area. The process transition setting process 3 ends.

[Direction command setting processing]
Next, details of the effect command setting process (step B1112) in the above-described jackpot end process will be described with reference to FIG. The effect command setting process is a process common to the command setting process in other processes.
In the production command setting process, first, in step B1151, the status of the production serial transmission buffer is read. This reads the state of a buffer that temporarily holds a command to be transmitted to the effect control device 1053. Next, in step B1152, it is determined whether or not the effect serial transmission buffer is full. If it is full, no more commands can be transmitted to the effect control device 1053, and the process returns to step B1151 and waits.
On the other hand, if the effect serial transmission buffer is not full in step B1152, the process proceeds to step B1153, and command data (MODE (upper byte)) is written in the effect serial transmission buffer.

After step B1153, the process proceeds to step B1154 to read the status of the effect serial transmission buffer. In step B1155, it is determined whether or not the effect serial transmission buffer is full. If the effect serial transmission buffer is full, the process returns to step B1154 and waits.
On the other hand, if the effect serial transmission buffer is not full in step B1155, the process proceeds to step B1156, and command data (ACTION (lower byte)) is written in the effect serial transmission buffer. After step B1156, the effect command setting process is terminated.
Thus, by transmitting the command to the effect control device 1053 through serial communication, the burden on the game control device 1054 can be reduced, and the command analysis can be made difficult. Further, the command transmission timing is advanced and the number of data lines can be reduced. Furthermore, in the effect control device 1054, it is not necessary to take in commands in the strobe, and the burden can be reduced. A command is also transmitted to the payout control device 1230 by serial communication (details will be described later).

[Design variation control processing]
Next, the details of the symbol variation control process (steps B517 and B519) in the above-described special figure game process will be described with reference to FIG.
The symbol variation control process is a process for controlling the variation of special symbols such as the first special symbol and the second special symbol and setting the display data of the special symbols. In the symbol fluctuation control process, first, it is checked whether the special figure fluctuation control flag relating to the special figure to be controlled (for example, the first special figure) is changing among the first special figure and the second special figure ( Step B1161).
If the special figure changing flag is changing (step B1162; YES), a symbol display table (for fluctuation) corresponding to the special figure (for example, the first special figure) to be controlled is acquired (step B1162). B1163).
Here, the information defined on the variation control table prepared in the special figure game process is as follows.
・ Lower address of the fluctuation control area ・ Pointer of the display table 2 (for stoppage) ・ Pointer of the display table 1 (for fluctuation) Next, of the first special figure and the second special figure, the special figure (e.g. The blinking control timer according to 1 special figure) is updated by “−1” (step B1164), and it is determined whether the value of the timer is 0, that is, the time is up (step B1165).

  When the value of the blinking control timer is not 0 (step B1165; NO), display data corresponding to the value of the target variation symbol number area is acquired (step B1168). When the value of the blinking control timer is 0 (step B1165; YES), the blinking control timer initial value is saved in the blinking control timer area to be controlled (step B1166), and the first and second special figures are saved. Among them, the fluctuation symbol number related to the control target special figure (for example, the first special figure) is updated by “+1” (step B1167), and the display data corresponding to the value of the target fluctuation symbol number area is acquired ( Step B1168). Thereafter, the acquired display data is saved in the target segment area (step B1169), and the symbol variation control process is terminated.

  On the other hand, when the special figure changing flag is not changing (step B1162; NO), the symbol display table (for stopping) corresponding to the special figure to be controlled (for example, the first special figure) is acquired (step B1170). . Then, display data corresponding to the value of the target variation symbol number area is acquired (step B1171), the acquired display data is saved in the target segment area (step B1169), and the symbol variation control process is terminated. As a result, among the special figure 1 display and special figure 2 display which are LED segments in the collective display device 1035, the special figure display (for example, the special figure 1 display) to be controlled corresponds to the symbol number. Will be displayed.

Next, a description will be given of a flowchart relating to the usual game processing. Here, “step C” is used as a step number.
[Normal game processing]
First, the details of the usual game process (step B121) in the above-described timer interrupt process will be described with reference to FIG.
In the usual game process, the input of the gate switch 1122 is monitored, the whole process related to the usual figure change display game is controlled, and the display of the ordinary figure is set.
First, the gate switch monitoring process (step C1) for monitoring the input from the gate switch 1122 is performed. The details of the gate switch monitoring process (step C1) will be described later.
Next, a public power prize winning switch monitoring process (step C2) for monitoring the input from the second start port switch 1121 is performed. The details of the general power prize winning switch monitoring process (step C2) will be described later.

Next, if the usual game process timer is not 0, "-1" is updated (step C3). Note that the minimum value of the normal game processing timer is set to zero. Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the normal game process timer has become 0 (step C4).
If the value of the usual game process timer is 0 (step C4; YES), that is, if it is determined that the time has expired or has already expired, the ordinary figure referred to branch to the process corresponding to the ordinary game process number. A process of setting the game sequence branch table in the register (step C5) is performed, and a process of acquiring the branch destination address of the process corresponding to the usual game process number is performed using the table (step C6).
Then, after performing the process of saving the return address after the branch process to the stack area (step C7), the game branch process (step C8) is performed according to the game process number.

In step C8, if the game process number is “0”, the start of fluctuation of the normal fluctuation display game is monitored, the start of fluctuation of the normal fluctuation display game, the setting of effects, A usual figure process (step C9) for setting information necessary for the execution is performed.
Note that details of the normal map routine process (step C9) will be described later.
If the game process number is “1” in step C8, a process for changing the normal map (step C10) for setting information necessary for performing the process for displaying the normal map is performed.
The details of the normal map changing process (step C10) will be described later.
In step C8, if the game process number is “2”, if the result of the normal variation display game is a win, it is determined whether or not the normal variation winning apparatus 1026 is being supported (during the short-time state). In response to the setting of the opening time of the corresponding electric train and the setting of information necessary for performing the processing during the normal map, a normal map display process (step C11) is performed.
Details of the normal map display process (step C11) will be described later.

In step C8, if the game process number is “3”, the process during the normal map processing for setting the information necessary to continue the process during the normal map or to perform the general electric ball remaining ball process ( Step C12) is performed.
The details of the normal processing (step C12) will be described later.
If the game process number is "4" at step C8, the ordinary electric ball remaining ball process (step C13) for setting information necessary for performing the end process for the normal map is performed.
The details of the ordinary electric ball remaining ball process (step C13) will be described later.
If the game process number is “5” in step C8, a normal figure end process (step C14) for setting information necessary for performing the normal figure normal process (step C9) is performed.
The details of the normal hit end process (step C14) will be described later.
Then, after preparing various tables for controlling the fluctuation of the normal symbol by the general symbol display (collective display device 1035) (step C15), the control of the variation of the normal symbol by the general symbol display (collective display device 1035) is prepared. The symbol variation control process (step C16) is performed, and the regular game process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step C4 that the value of the usual game process timer is not 0 (step C4; NO), that is, the time is not up, the process proceeds to step C15 and the subsequent processes are performed.

[Gate switch monitoring processing]
Next, details of the gate switch monitoring process (step C1) in the above-described ordinary game process will be described with reference to FIG.
In the gate switch monitoring process, first, it is checked whether or not there is an input to the gate switch 1122 (step C21). If it is determined that there is an input to the gate switch 1122 (step C21; YES), the number of reserved drawings is acquired and it is determined whether or not the number of reserved drawings is less than an upper limit (for example, 4) (step C22). ). If it is determined that the number of reserved maps is less than the upper limit (step C22; YES), a process of updating (+1) the number of reserved maps is performed (step C23).

Then, after performing the process (step C24) of calculating the address of the random number storage area corresponding to the updated number of pending reservations (step C24), the process of extracting the winning random number and saving it in the random number storage area of the RAM (step C25) To complete the gate switch monitoring process.
Further, when it is determined in step C21 that there is no input to the gate switch 1122 (step C21; NO), or when it is determined in step C22 that the number of reserved drawings is not less than the upper limit value ( Step C22; NO) The gate switch monitoring process is terminated.

[Penden winning switch monitoring process]
Next, details of the general power winning switch monitoring process (step C2) in the above-described general game process will be described with reference to FIG.
In the general power prize winning switch monitoring process, first, whether the normal fluctuation display game is in a winning state and the normal fluctuation winning apparatus 1026 is performing a predetermined number of (for example, three) opening operations (whether the normal figure winning game is in progress). It is checked whether or not (step C31). When it is determined that the normal map is being reached (step C32; YES), it is determined whether or not there is an input to the second start port switch 1121 (shown as a start port 2 switch in the flowchart; the same applies hereinafter) (step). C32) If it is determined that there is an input to the second start port switch 1121 (step C32; YES), a process of updating (+1) the count number of the utility counter (step C33) is performed.

Next, it is determined whether or not the count number of the updated utility counter has reached an upper limit value (for example, 9) (step C34), and it is determined that the count number has reached the upper limit value (step C34; YES). Then, a pointer (a hit end value) is loaded from the normal control pointer upper limit value area per hit (step C35). Then, the loaded pointer is saved in the normal control pointer area per ordinary figure (step C36), the ordinary figure game processing timer is cleared (step C37), and the ordinary power prize winning switch monitoring process is terminated.
In other words, if there is a pay-per-use prize exceeding the upper limit value during the normal hit state, the hit end value is saved in the middle control processing pointer area at that time, and the normal hit state is not complete. Let it finish.

  In step C31, it is determined that the map is not being hit (step C31; NO), or in step C32, it is determined that there is no input to the second start port switch 1121 (step C32; NO). ) Alternatively, when it is determined in step C34 that the count number has not reached the upper limit value (step C34; NO), the general power prize winning switch monitoring process is terminated.

[Usually normal processing]
Next, details of the usual figure routine process (step C9) in the above-mentioned usual figure game process will be described with reference to FIG.
In the ordinary map routine processing, first, it is determined whether or not the number of reserved drawings is “0” (step C41). If the number of reserved drawings is “0” (step C41; YES), After shifting to C62 and performing the normal chart normal process shift setting process 1, the normal chart normal process is terminated. The normal figure normal process transition setting process 1 performs a process for repeating the normal figure normal process next time, and will be described in detail later.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step C41 that the number of reserved maps is not 0 (step C42; NO), a random number is loaded from the random number storage area (for reserved number 1) in the RAM (step C42). It is determined whether the probability of the hit result in the variable display game is higher than usual (that is, at the time of high probability of usual figure), that is, whether the time is short (step C43).
If it is not the time of normal probability (step C43; NO), it is determined whether the value of the hit random number matches the low probability determination value that is the determination value at the time of normal probability (step C44). If the value of the hit random number does not match the low probability determination value (step C44; NO), the shift information is saved in the hit flag area (step C45), and the shift stop symbol number is set in the normal stop symbol (step C45). C46), the random number storage area (for holding number 1) per common map is cleared to 0 (step C51).
On the other hand, if the value of the hit random number matches the low probability determination value (step C44; YES), the hit information is saved in the hit flag area (step C49), and the hit stop symbol number is set to the normal stop symbol. (Step C50), the random number storage area (for holding number 1) per common map is cleared to 0 (Step C51).

  In step C43, when the normal probability is high (step C43; YES), the high probability lower limit determination value in which the value of the hit random number is the lower limit value among a plurality of consecutive determination values used when the normal probability is high. If the value of the hit random number is not less than the high probability lower limit decision value (step C47; NO), a plurality of consecutive decision values used when the value of the hit random number is normally high It is determined whether it is larger than the high probability upper limit determination value that is the upper limit value in (C48).

If the value of the hit random number is not larger than the high probability upper limit determination value (step C48; NO), that is, if it is a win, the hit information is saved in the hit flag area (step C49) and the hit stop symbol is hit with the normal stop symbol. A number is set (step C50), and the random number storage area (for holding number 1) per common map is cleared to 0 (step C51).
In step C47, when the value of the hit random number is less than the high probability lower limit determination value (step C47; YES), or in step C48, the value of the hit random number is larger than the upper limit determination value (step C48; YES). ), That is, in the case of an error, the error information is saved in the hit flag area (step C45), the error stop symbol number is set in the normal symbol stop symbol (step C46), and the random number storage area per universal symbol (holding number 1) Is cleared to 0 (step C51). That is, the determination value that determines that the hit of the normal figure is the same when the values of the hit random numbers coincide with each other is a single value when the normal figure has a low probability, and a plurality of continuous values when the normal figure has a high probability.

After clearing the random number storage area (for holding number 1) per ordinary figure to 0 (step C51), the stop symbol number is saved in the test signal output data area (step C52). Then, a decorative common pattern variation pattern command corresponding to the stop symbol is prepared (step C53), and an effect command setting process (step C54) is performed. As a result, it is possible to produce an effect corresponding to the common map display game on the display device 1041 or the like.
After that, the random number storage area per usual figure is shifted (step C55), the free area after the shift is cleared to 0 (step C56), and the usual figure holding number is updated by "-1" (step C57). That is, in accordance with the execution of the usual map change display game related to the oldest number of reserved maps 1, the process of moving up the ranks of the numbers 2 to 4 of the reserved maps after the reserved number 1 I do. As a result of this processing, the value for the number of reserved maps in the random number storage area from 2 to 4 is shifted from the value for the number of reserved maps in the random number storage area to 1 for the number of reserved maps in the random number storage area. Will be. Then, the value for the usual figure reservation number 4 in the random number storage area per ordinary figure is cleared, and the usual figure reservation number is decremented by one.

  Next, it is determined whether the power transmission support is in progress (during a short time state) (step C58). If the power transmission support is not in progress (step C58; NO), the fluctuation time when there is no power transmission support (for example, 10 seconds). ) Is set (step C59). If the power transmission support is in progress (step C58; YES), a normal map change time (for example, 1 second) during the power transmission support is set (step C61). Then, the normal chart process transition setting process (step C60) is performed, and the normal chart routine process is terminated.

[Usual map transition process 1]
Next, the details of the normal figure normal process transition setting process 1 (step C62) in the above normal figure normal process will be described with reference to FIG.
When the routine is started, “0” (corresponding to the processing number related to the normal figure normal process) is set as a process number for shifting to the normal figure normal process in step C71, and the normal figure game process number area is processed in step C72. Save the number (here "0"). Next, in step C73, the fraud monitoring period flag is saved in the normal power fraud monitoring period flag area, and the process returns. As a result, the normal process is shifted to the normal processing next time.

[Process transition setting process during normal map change]
Next, the details of the process for setting the process of changing the normal map in the normal process of the normal map (step C60) will be described with reference to FIG.
When the routine is started, “1” (corresponding to the process number related to the process of changing the normal map) is set in step C81, and the process number (here, “1”) is set in the normal game process number area in step C82. Save. Next, in step C83, a signal related to the start of normal diagram change (for example, the normal symbol 1 change signal is ON) is saved in the test signal output data area, and in step C84, the changing flag is saved in the normal figure change control flag area. Next, in step C85, the flashing control timer initial value (for example, 200 ms), which is the initial value of the timer of the flashing cycle of the general display (the general display LED of the collective display device 1035), is saved in the general flashing control timer area. Then, the process transition setting process during normal map change is terminated. As a result, the process shifts to the normal map change process next time.

[Processing during normal map changes]
Next, the details of the process of changing the normal map (step C10) in the above-described normal game process will be described with reference to FIG.
When the routine is started, a process for setting transition to a normal map display process is performed in step C91. This is a setting for shifting to the normal map display processing, and details will be described later. After this processing, it returns.

[Transition setting process during normal map display]
Next, the details of the normal map display process transition setting process (step C91) in the above-described normal map change process will be described with reference to FIG.
When the routine is started, “2” (corresponding to the processing number related to the processing for displaying the normal map) is set in step C101, and the processing number (here “2”) is set in the general game processing number area in step C102. Save. Next, in step C103, a normal map display time is set (for example, 600 ms). Next, in step C104, the normal figure display time is saved in the normal figure game processing timer area, and in step C105, a signal related to the end of the normal figure change (for example, the normal symbol 1 fluctuation signal is OFF) is saved in the test signal output data area. . Next, in step C106, the stop flag is saved in the usual figure fluctuation control flag area and the process returns. As a result, the process moves to the normal map display process next time.

[Processing during normal map display]
Next, the details of the normal map display process (step C11) in the above-described normal game process will be described with reference to FIG.
In the process of displaying a normal map, first, a process of loading a hit flag (hit information or out-of-game information) set in the normal process of normal map (step C111) and clearing a hit flag area in the RAM (step C112) is performed. Do.
Next, it is determined whether or not the loaded hit flag is hit (step C113). If it is determined that the hit flag is not hit (step C113; NO), the process branches to step C122, and the normal processing transition setting process 1 is performed. (Described with reference to FIG. 188), and the process for displaying the normal map is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step C113 that the hit flag is a win (step C113; YES), a process (step C114) is performed to determine whether the power transmission is being supported (during time reduction).
If the normal power support is not in progress (step C114; NO), the normal power open time (for example, 100 ms) when there is no general power support is saved in the normal game processing timer area (step C115). Further, the hit start pointer value (control pointer value) when there is no ordinary power support is saved in the control pointer area during the normal figure (step C116), and the hit end pointer value (control pointer value) when there is no ordinary power support is saved. Save in the control pointer upper limit area per figure (step C117). As a result, an opening mode of the normal variation winning device 1026 in the normal operation state is set, and for example, it is possible to open twice. Thereafter, a normal process transition setting process (step C121) is performed. This is a setting for shifting to the normal processing during the normal map, and details will be described later. After this processing, it returns.
The hit start pointer value (control pointer value) when there is no ordinary power support is set to “0”, the hit end pointer value is set to “2”, and the hit start pointer value (control pointer value) at the time of ordinary power support is “ 3 ”and the hit end pointer value is set to“ 9 ”.

  On the other hand, when the ordinary power support is in progress (step C114; YES), the ordinary power release time (for example, 1352 ms) at the time of the ordinary power support is saved in the ordinary game processing timer area (step C118). Further, the hit start pointer value (control pointer value) at the time of normal power support is saved in the control pointer area during the normal call (step C119), and the hit end pointer value (control pointer value) at the time of normal power support is saved to the normal map. Save in the middle control pointer upper limit value area (step C120). As a result, the opening mode of the normal variation winning device 1026 in the short-time state is set, and, for example, four opening is possible. After that, a normal process transition setting process (step C121) is performed, and the normal chart display process is terminated.

[Normal processing transition setting process per ordinary figure]
Next, the details of the process for setting the transition to the normal map process (step C121) in the process for displaying the normal map will be described with reference to FIG.
When the routine is started, a process number “3” (corresponding to a process number related to the normal process per ordinary figure) is set in step C131, and a process number (here, “3”) is set in the ordinary game process number area in step C132. Save. Next, in step C133, a signal related to the start of the normal signal (for example, the signal per normal symbol is turned ON) and a signal related to the start of the normal electric operation (for example, the normal electric accessory 1 in-operation signal is turned ON) are output in the test signal output data area. To save. Next, in step C134, ON data is saved in the ordinary power solenoid output data area, and in step C135, the ordinary power count number area for storing the number of winnings in the normal variation winning device 1026 is cleared. The normal power fraud winning number area for storing the number of wins to the normal variation winning device 1026 in the monitoring period is cleared, and in step C137 the fraud monitoring period flag (unfair monitoring of the normal variation winning device 1026 is displayed in the normal power fraud monitoring period flag region). Save outside the period) and return. As a result, the next time, the routine shifts to the normal processing.

[Usual processing per map]
Next, the details of the normal hit processing (step C12) in the above-described normal game processing will be described with reference to FIG.
In the middle processing per map, first, the processing control pointer per base map is loaded and prepared (step C141), and then the value of the loaded control pointer per base map is set in the middle control pointer upper limit value area per base map. It is determined whether or not a value (value of hit end: for example, “4” or the like) has been reached (step C142).
If the value of the control pointer during normal map does not reach the value of the control pointer upper limit value area during normal map (step C142; NO), the control pointer during normal map is updated by +1 (step C143), The normal electric operation transition setting process (step C144) is performed, and the process during the normal map is terminated.
Further, when the value of the control pointer during normal maps reaches the value of the control pointer upper limit value area during normal map (step C142; YES), the process control pointer during normal maps in step C143 is determined. Without performing the process of updating (+1) the area, the normal power operation transition setting process (step C144) is performed, and the normal process is terminated.

[Normal electric operation transition setting process]
Next, details of the normal power operation transition setting process (step C144) in the above-described normal process will be described with reference to FIG.
The general electric operation transition setting process is a process for performing drive control of the general electric solenoid 1131 for opening and closing the normal variation winning device 1026, and the process branches according to the value of the control pointer.
When the routine starts, branching is performed using the control pointer in step C151. Here, the process branches according to the value of the control pointer loaded and prepared in step C141. Specifically, if the value of the control pointer is 0, 3, 5, or 7 in step C151, the process moves to step C152 to control the blockage of the normal variation winning device 1026. The wait time (for example, 2800 ms or 1000 ms) after closing of the corresponding normal variation winning apparatus 1026 is saved in the ordinary game processing timer area, and the ordinary electric solenoid output data area is turned off in order to turn off the ordinary electric solenoid 1131 in step C153. Set off-data and end the normal operation transition setting process. As a result, the closing time after the normal variation winning device 1026 is opened becomes the above-mentioned wait time, and the normal variation winning device 1026 is blocked during this period.

  On the other hand, if the value of the control pointer is any one of 1, 4, 6, and 8 in step C151, the process proceeds to step C154 to control the release of the normal variation winning device 1026, and therefore the normal corresponding to the control pointer is used. The normal power open time (for example, any one of 100 ms, 5200 ms, and 1352 ms), which is the open time of the variable winning device 1026, is saved in the normal game processing timer area, and the normal power solenoid 1131 is turned on in step C155. The ON data is set in the solenoid output data area, and the normal power operation transition setting process is terminated. As a result, the opening time of the normal variation winning device 1026 becomes the above-mentioned normal power opening time, and the normal variation winning device 1026 is opened during that period.

  If the value of the control pointer is any of 2 and 9 in step C151, the process proceeds to step C156 to end the release control of the normal variation winning device 1026, and the ordinary electric ball remaining ball process (step C13) is performed. In order to do this, “4” is set as the process number. Next, in step C157, the process number (here, “4”) is saved in the usual game process number area. Next, in Step C158, the ordinary power remaining ball processing time (for example, 600 ms) is saved in the ordinary game processing timer area, and then in Step C159, the off data is set in the ordinary power solenoid output data area in order to turn off the ordinary power solenoid 1131. Save and end the normal operation transition setting process.

[Penden residual ball processing]
Next, details of the ordinary electric ball remaining ball process (step C13) in the above-described ordinary game process will be described with reference to FIG.
When the routine starts, in step C161, a normal process end process transition setting process is performed. This is a setting for shifting to a normal hit end process, which will be described in detail later. After this processing, it returns.

[Usual map end process transition setting process]
Next, the details of the normal call end process transition setting process (step C161) in the above-described ordinary electric power remaining ball process will be described with reference to FIG.
When the routine is started, “5” (corresponding to the process number related to the end process per ordinary figure) is set in step C171, and the process number (here, “5”) is set in the ordinary game process number area in step C172. Save. Next, in step C173, the normal ending time (for example, 100 ms) is saved in the normal game processing timer area, and in step C174, a signal related to the end of the operation of the normal variable winning device 1026 (for example, the normal electric accessory 1 active signal is output). OFF) is saved in the test signal output data area. Next, in step C175, the common power count number area for counting the number of winnings to the normal variation winning device 1026 is cleared. Then, in step C176, the normal control pointer area per normal map is cleared, in step C177, the normal control pointer upper limit value area per normal map is cleared, and the normal chart end process transition setting process ends. As a result, next time, the process shifts to the end process for each figure.

[End processing per regular map]
Next, the details of the normal game end process (step C14) in the above-described general game process will be described with reference to FIG.
When the routine is started, a normal process transition setting process 2 is performed in step C181. This is a setting for shifting to normal processing, which will be described in detail later. After this processing, it returns.

[Usuzu usual process transition setting process 2]
Next, details of the normal figure normal process transition setting process 2 (step C181) in the above-mentioned normal figure end process will be described with reference to FIG.
When the routine is started, “0” (corresponding to the process number related to the normal routine process) is set in step C191, and the process number (here “0”) is set in the normal game process number area in step C192. Save. Next, in step C193, a signal related to the end of the normal symbol (for example, the signal per normal symbol is OFF) is saved in the test signal output data area. Next, in step C194, a fraud monitoring period flag (a flag that defines the fraud monitoring period of the normal variation winning device 1026) is saved in the normal power fraud monitoring period flag area, and the process returns. As a result, next time, the routine shifts to normal processing.

G. Operation of Control System Next, the control contents of the payout control device 1230 will be described with reference to FIGS. 200 to 259.
[Main processing of payout control device]
First, the main process of the payout control device 1230 will be described with reference to FIG.
Here, the flowchart of the payout control device 1230 will be described using “step D” as the step number.
This main process is started based on the fact that the CPU 1231 is forcibly reset. That is, when the power switch 1181 of the power supply device 1058 that supplies power to the payout control device 1230 is turned on, a reset signal is issued from the power supply device 1058 at a predetermined timing (during a predetermined reset period when the power is turned on). When input to the control device 1230 and the reset terminal of the CPU 1231 is turned on and then the reset signal is released, the CPU 1231 is activated. Similarly, when the power is restored from the power failure, the reset signal is turned on and then released, and the CPU 1231 is activated. Further, when the operator wants to initialize the RAM 1233 of the payout control device 1230, the power switch 1181 is turned on while the RAM clear switch 1182 (initialization switch) of the payout control device 1230 is turned on. There is a need. Note that the RAM 1233 is denoted as RAM in FIG.

When the CPU 1231 is activated, interrupts are first prohibited, the CPU peripheral circuits (including the serial port) built in the CPU 1231 are initialized, and off data (corresponding to “0” of the binary signal) is output to all output ports. Signal) and permits access to the RAM 1233 (steps D1 to D4).
Since each output port is turned off (reset) by the reset signal, it is not always necessary to output the off signal to each output port in software, but step D3 is provided here just in case. .

After step D4, it is then determined in step D5 whether the RAM clear signal is on. This is to determine whether the power is turned on by turning on the power switch 1181 while turning on the RAM clear switch 1182 (initialization switch) of the payout control device 1230. That is, it is determined whether the RAM clear signal is on by turning on the power while pressing the RAM clear switch 1182. If the RAM clear signal is not on, the process proceeds to step D6. If the RAM clear signal is on, the process jumps to step D10.
The determination in step D5 is performed when the RAM clear switch 1182 is pressed, because all data such as the RAM 1233 and the CPU 1231 are cleared and initialized. Is not taken into the payout control device 1230. For this reason, the operation of the RAM clear switch 1182 is determined in step D5.

  First, when the RAM clear signal is not on (when the power is not turned on while pressing the RAM clear switch 1182), whether or not all the values in the power failure inspection areas 1 and 2 of the RAM 1233 are normal power failure inspection area check data in step D6. If it is normal, the process proceeds to step D7 assuming that the power is restored (when the power is restored), and if abnormal (if not stored normally), the process proceeds to step D10. The power failure inspection area check data is set in step D22 described later. In this step D6, since it is determined whether or not the power failure has been restored by using a plurality of check data in this way, the determination of whether or not the power failure has been restored is made with high reliability.

Next, in step D7, the checksum of the data in the RAM 1233 is calculated, and in step D8, it is compared with the checksum at the time of power-off, and it is determined whether or not the value is normal (match). If the checksum is not normal (that is, the data in the RAM 1233 is corrupted), the process proceeds to step D10, and if the checksum is normal, the process proceeds to step D9.
In step D9, a process for power failure recovery (initial value setting) is executed. That is, all the power failure inspection areas are cleared, the checksum area is cleared, and the areas related to error and fraud monitoring are reset. Next, the process proceeds to step D13.
The command at the time of power failure recovery (power failure recovery command) includes information notifying the state at the time of power failure (game state, rest state, settlement state). For example, when there is a power outage during a break, information indicating that the user is taking a break (for example, the same as a break start flag in FIG. 234 described later) may be included in the power failure recovery command. The presentation control device 1053 that has received the command via the game control measure 1054 at the time of power failure recovery, for example, resumes the display on the display device 1041 that notifies that the break is being performed at the time of the power failure after the power failure recovery. In addition, when there is a power failure during settlement, information indicating that settlement is in progress is included in this power failure recovery command, and this effect control device 1053 that received this command via the game control measure 1054 at the time of power failure recovery. For example, the display on the display device 1041 for notifying the settlement being executed at the time of a power failure is resumed after the power failure is restored. Thereby, the player can clearly recognize that the state at the time of the power failure is stored in the RAM 1233 and the state is resumed at the time of the power failure recovery, and the player does not feel uneasy at the time of the power failure recovery.

On the other hand, if the RAM clear signal is ON in step D5 (when the power is turned on while pressing the RAM clear switch 1182), the process jumps to step D10 and performs the processing after step D10 including step D10. .
When processing proceeds to step D10 and subsequent steps, processing such as initialization of data in the RAM 1233 of the payout control device 1230 is performed. That is, in step D10 and step D11, all RAM 1233 areas to be used are cleared. Specifically, in step D10, all work areas in the RAM 1233 are cleared, and in step D11, all stack areas are cleared. Next, in step D12, initial values are set in areas where initial values need to be set. This is a process for setting an initial value upon power-on in an area to be initialized. Thereafter, the process proceeds to Step D13.
As described above, since the RAM 1233 is initialized before the nighttime monitoring information is taken into the payout control device 1230, the nighttime monitoring information at the time of power-off is not lost, and the security is high.

Next, when the process proceeds from step D9 to step D13, or when the process proceeds from step D12 to step D13, the processes after step D13 are performed including this step D13.
When processing proceeds to step D13 and subsequent steps, it is first determined in step D13 whether or not authentication is completed. This is because the gaming machine ID (both main control ID and payout ID here) is sent to the external management device 1091 which is a third party organization via the card control unit 1015 via the payout control device 1230, where it is checked against the authentication list. Then, it is determined whether the verification result OK is found and the authentication is completed. Note that the authentication completion is determined based on the state of the internal status register of the CPU 1231, for example. This is because the authentication completion information from the external management device 1091 is transmitted to the payout control device 1230 via the card unit 1015 and stored in the internal status register of the CPU 1231, for example. If the authentication is not completed in step D13, the process stands by in step D13. If the authentication is completed, the process proceeds to step D14. In step D14, night monitoring information reception processing is performed. In this process, the output signal of the night monitoring switch 1126 is taken into the payout control device 1230 (details will be described later).
The night monitoring information from the night monitoring switch 1126 is output to the payout control device 1230 in response to a request from the payout control device 1230. The night monitoring information may be stored in the RAM 1233 or a register of the CPU 1231.

After step D14, the process proceeds to step D15, and for example, a CTC (Counter / Timer Circuit) circuit provided in the CPU 1231 is activated. The CTC circuit is a circuit for timer interruption.
Next, in step D16, an interrupt is permitted, and when proceeding to next step D17, the number of times of power-off detection signal check (for example, twice) is set, and whether or not the power-off detection signal is turned on in next step D18. If it is determined to be on, the process proceeds to step D19 for final determination of power failure, and if it is not on, the process returns to step D17. During normal operation, steps D18 to D17 are repeated.

Then, when proceeding to Step D19, it is determined whether or not the power-off detection signal is kept on for the number of times of the check. If negative, it is determined that a power failure has not occurred, and the process returns to step D18.
When the power-off detection signal is turned on, this power-off detection signal may be used as an NMI interrupt signal to interrupt the current process and forcibly execute the power failure process after step D20. However, in the configuration of this example, since the power-off detection signal is turned on multiple times at step D19, the power-off detection signal is temporarily and instantaneously caused by noise or the like even though no power failure has actually occurred. There is an advantage that it is not erroneously determined that a power failure has occurred when the power is turned on.

In step D20, after interrupting is prohibited, all outputs are turned off in the next step D21 (off data is output to all output ports), and then a power failure information setting process is executed in step D22. In the power failure information setting process, the power failure inspection area check data 1 is saved in the power failure inspection area 1 and the power failure inspection area check data 2 is saved in the power failure inspection area 2. That is, check data for restoration confirmation is saved in the power failure inspection areas 1 and 2.
After step D22, the checksum of the data in RAM 1233 is calculated in the next step D23, and the calculated checksum is saved in a predetermined checksum area in step D24, and then access to the RAM 1233 is prohibited in step D25. Then wait.
In addition, the power failure process of the above steps D20-D25 is performed before a power supply voltage falls below the operating voltage of CPU1231 by a power failure (a normal power supply interruption is included).

[Night monitoring information reception processing]
Next, the night monitoring information reception process (step D14) in the main process will be described with reference to FIG.
When this routine is started, in step D31, the night frame opening / closing information is received from the night monitoring switch 1126 and stored. The night frame opening / closing information includes information (frame opening information) indicating whether or not the opening of the front frame 1004 is detected at night, and monitoring information on the removal of the game control device 1054. The reception of the night frame opening / closing information corresponding to the presence / absence of the detection of opening is determined. The night frame opening / closing information is information indicating whether or not the opening of the front frame 1004 is detected at night. The number of times of opening the night frame described later indicates how many times the opening of the front frame 1004 is detected at night. It is information which shows.
Next, in step D32, the information on the number of times of nighttime frame opening is received from the nighttime monitoring switch 1126 and stored. Next, in step D33, the board removal information is received from the nighttime monitoring switch 1126 and stored. The board removal information is removal monitoring information of the game control device 1054 (corresponding to the board), and is information indicating whether or not the game control device 1054 is removed at night. The information is stored in the RAM 1233, for example. After step D33, the night monitoring information reception process is terminated.

[Timer interrupt processing (payout) of the payout controller]
Next, timer interruption processing (payout) of the payout control apparatus 1230 will be described with reference to FIG.
This timer interrupt process (payout) is started by the processes of steps D15 and D16 in the main process described above, and is repeatedly executed at a predetermined timer interrupt period.
In the timer interrupt process, first, in step D41, register saving and interrupt prohibition are executed as necessary, and then the input process in step D42 is executed. In this input process, each of the aforementioned sensors (launch ball detection switch 1160, out ball detection switch 1161, first safe ball detection switch 1162, second safe ball detection switch 1163, first sealed ball detection switch 1164, second sealed ball) Sphere detection switch 1165, glass frame opening switch 1125, night monitoring switch 1126, radio wave sensor (frame) 1127, etc.) are read.
Specifically, the output value of each sensor is determined at each timer interruption period, and when the output value of the same level continues for the specified number of times (for example, twice), the level of this output value is detected by each sensor. Read as deterministic value of signal. Specifically, the state of each sensor is read and level data and edge data are generated. Further, when it is read that any one of the sensors is on, a flag (input flag) indicating that is set.
Here, the night monitoring switch 1126 detects the opening of the front frame 4 and the removal of the game control device 1054 at night (when the main power is not supplied to the gaming machine), but the normal state (main power is supplied to the gaming machine). Even when the front frame 4 is released or the game control device 1054 is removed.

Next, output processing is executed in step D43. This is to collectively output data to ports other than communication. Communication (for example, communication with the game control device 1054) is performed using a transmission buffer or the like.
Next, switch monitoring processing is performed in step D44. This monitors the input flags set as described above (input flags such as the launch ball detection switch 1160, the out ball detection switch 1161, the first safe ball detection switch 1162, the second safe ball detection switch 1163, etc.) It performs processing for enclosing ball control such as subtraction of the number of balls that accompanies the launch and increase / decrease of the number of board surfaces.
The details of each processing of Step D44 to Step D59 including Step D44 will be described later in a subroutine.

Next, in step D45, an error / fraud monitoring process is executed. This is a process for monitoring an undetected error of each sensor, small ball fraud monitoring, magnetic ball fraud monitoring, nighttime monitoring fraud monitoring, and the like.
For example, the types of error and fraud monitored in this error / fraud monitoring process are as follows.
・ Glass frame open (glass frame 1005 open)
-Front frame open (front frame 1004 open)
・ Switch abnormality (connector disconnection, switch failure, etc.)
・ Board ball number error ・ Encapsulated ball number error ・ Frame radio wave fraud ・ Small ball fraud monitoring ・ Magnetic ball fraud monitoring ・ Night monitoring fraud monitoring

The enclosing ball number error includes the following.
(A) Enclosed ball number shortage error (b) Enclosed ball number excessive error (c) Enclosed path error

Next, the process proceeds to step D46 to perform main control command reception processing. This is to receive a command (main control command) from the game control device 1054 (details will be described later).
Next, a main control ID reception process is performed in step D47. This is to receive the main control ID from the game control device 1054.
Next, card unit command reception processing is performed in step D48. This is for receiving a command from the card unit 1015.
Next, a launch control process is performed in step D49. This controls the launch of the game ball, and controls the drive of the ball feed solenoid 1172, the launch solenoid 1173, and the like.
Next, a polishing apparatus control process is performed in step D50. This controls the operation of the polishing apparatus 1306 for polishing the encapsulated sphere.
Next, a feeding device control process is performed in step D51. This controls the operation of the feeding device 1302 for feeding the encapsulated ball.
Next, in step D52, the number-of-balls management process is performed. This is to manage the number of balls held for winning and the use of counting balls.
Next, a ball removal control process is performed in step D53. This is to perform control when the enclosing ball is pulled out.
Next, a settlement control process is performed in step D54. This is to monitor a payment instruction from the card unit 1015 and perform processing related to payment (details will be described later).
Next, a break control process is performed in step D55. This performs processing necessary for the start and end of a break.
Next, LED editing processing is performed in step D56. This is a process for displaying various LEDs (for example, an error display LED 1067, a ball count indicator 1040, an LED built in the counting switch 1311, etc.).

Next, main control command transmission processing is performed in step D57. This is because a command is generated based on information from various sensors input to the payout control device 1230 and information such as the pressing state of the counting switch 1311, and the main control command is sent from the payout control device 1230 to the game control device 1054. The transmission process is performed.
Next, card unit command transmission processing is performed in step D58. This is based on a command received from the card unit 1015, and performs a necessary process such as a recovery response or a card insertion response or a process of transmitting a gaming machine ID to the card unit 1015.
Next, a game stop signal editing process is performed in step D59. This is to edit the game stop signal such as turning on the game stop signal to stop the game during the settlement process or communication abnormality, or turning off the game stop signal when the game is possible. , Processing of instructions taking the form of signals instead of commands.
Thereafter, in order to resume the main routine, the register saved at step D60 is restored, the interrupt is permitted at step D61, and the process interrupted at the interruption is restored (returned).

[Main control command reception processing]
Next, the main control command reception process D46 in the timer interrupt process (payout) will be described with reference to FIG.
In this process, a command transmitted from the game control device 1054 to the payout control device 1230 is received and saved.
When this routine is started, it is determined in step D71 whether or not there is game information reception. In a broader sense, game information is one command, and game state information is also included in one command. The type information and the prize ball information are also one of the commands. However, the type information, the prize ball information, etc. are not described like the type information command with a command attached, but are simply described as the type information.
If no game information is received in step D71, the main control command reception process is terminated and the process returns. On the other hand, if game information is received in step D71, the process proceeds to step D72, and the type information and prize ball information are read from the game information reception buffer.

Here, as described above, the type information is composed of a data type and a data number, and the prize ball information is composed of the number of prize balls and the number of winning prizes. The more detailed configuration is as follows. .
The data type of the type information distinguishes the types of no information, start opening, big winning opening, winning opening, symbol stop count, and the data type is represented by the upper 4 bits as follows.
-0: No information-1: Start port (including the first and first start ports)
・ 2: Grand prize opening (including 1st big prize opening and 1st big prize opening)
・ 3: Prize winning opening (General winning opening)
* 4: Symbol stop count The lower 4 bits indicate the data number for each data type.
-0: No information-1-15: Data number On the other hand, the prize ball information represents the number of prize balls for each data type in the upper 4 bits as follows.
-0: No information-1-15: Number of winning balls In addition, the lower 4 bit data represents the number of winnings for each type.
-0: No information-1-15: Number of winnings Next, the game state information represents various game states as follows.
・ Signal status of external information system ・ Illegal information such as radio wave and magnet fraud ・ Launch stop information

After step D72, it is determined whether or not the type information and prize ball information read from the game information reception buffer in step D73 is “no information”. As described above, since the type information and the prize ball information include a bit indicating “no information”, the determination is made based on the value of the bit.
If it is determined in step D73 that “no information”, the process jumps to step D83 to determine whether or not all commands have been received. If all the commands have not been received in step D83, the process returns to step D72 to repeat the loop. If it is determined in step D83 that all commands have been received, the process proceeds to step D84.

On the other hand, if it is not “no information” in step D73 (if there is information), the process proceeds to step D74 to determine whether or not the type information = winning system. This determines whether or not the type information read out from the game information reception buffer and the type information of the prize ball information is information indicating winning at the start opening, the big winning opening, and the winning opening that are winning information. Is. The information other than the winning system includes, for example, the number of symbol stops.
If the type information = winning system in step D74, the process proceeds to step D75, and a winning ball number area corresponding to the type of winning hole is set. In the prize ball number area, for example, the type area assigns an address such as setting the type indicated by the command (starting opening, big prize opening, winning prize opening) in the prize ball number area. Therefore, the address of the prize ball number area corresponding to the command received from the game control device 1054 this time is acquired.
For example, if the command received from the game control device 1054 this time is type information and prize ball information, by acquiring the address of the prize ball number area assigned to the type of prize ball represented by the type information, The number of prize balls represented by the prize ball information is read out, and the “number of prize balls” is decoded and saved as a value meant by the command (see step D77).
Next, the process proceeds to step D76, where it is determined whether or not the number of winning balls is zero. If the number of winning balls = 0, there is no current winning ball number, so the process jumps to step D83. If the number of winning balls is not 0 in step D76, a new value indicating the number of winning balls is written in the winning ball area in step D77. Here, by overwriting the previous data, the value indicating the current number of winning balls is written in the winning ball number area.

Next, in step D78, a winning number area corresponding to the type of winning opening is set. In the winning number area, for example, the type area is set by assigning an address to the type information such as setting the type indicated by the command (start opening, big winning opening, winning opening) in the winning number area. Therefore, the address of the winning area corresponding to the command received from the game control device 1054 this time is acquired.
For example, if the command received from the game control device 1054 is type information or prize ball information this time, by acquiring the address of the winning number area assigned to the type of the winning mouth in the type information, The number of winning prizes in the winning ball information is read out, and the “winning quantity” is decoded and saved as a value that the command means (see step D80).
Next, the process proceeds to step D79, and it is determined whether or not the number of winning prizes = 0. If the number of winnings = 0, there is no current winning number, and the process jumps to step D83. If the winning number is not 0 in step D79, the value of the current winning number is added to the previous winning number area value in step D80 to obtain a new winning number area value. That is, the current data is added to the previous data so that “the value of the previous winning number area + the value indicating the current winning number” = the value of the new winning number area.
This is because the number of winnings is transmitted from the game control device 1054 to the payout control device 1230 during a reception interval of every 200 ms, so that a plurality of commands may be received during 200 ms. Is to add the number of winnings. For example, there is a possibility that the game ball may continuously win the winning prize opening while the big winning opening is open during the big hit.

After step D80, it is then determined in step D83 whether all commands have been received. If all the commands have not been received in step D83, the process returns to step D72 to repeat the loop. If it is determined in step D83 that all commands have been received, the process proceeds to step D84.
On the other hand, if the type information is not a winning system in step D74, the process branches to step D81 to determine whether the type information is the number of symbol stops. This is because, if the type information of the type information read from the game information reception buffer and the prize ball information is not winning information, the information other than the winning type includes, for example, the number of symbol stops. It is to judge whether there is. If the type information is the number of symbol stops in step D81, the process proceeds to step D82, and the value indicated by the data number corresponding to the number of symbol stops in the type information is written in the symbol stop number area. Here, by overwriting the previous data, the value indicated by the data number (current symbol stop count) is written in the symbol stop count area. Thereby, it is updated to the latest number of symbol stops. After step D82, the process proceeds to step D83. Further, if it is determined in step D81 that the type information is not the number of symbol stops, the process proceeds to step D83.
In step D83, it is determined whether or not all commands have been received. If all commands have not been received in step D83, the process returns to step D72 to repeat the loop. If it is determined in step D83 that all commands have been received, the process proceeds to step D84.

If it is determined in step D83 that all commands have been received and the process proceeds to step D84, it is determined whether or not gaming state information has been received. This is to determine whether or not the reception of the game state information is stored in the game information reception buffer since the processing related to the type information and the prize ball information among the information read from the game information reception buffer is completed.
If no gaming state information is received in step D84, the main control command receiving process is terminated. On the other hand, if the game state information is received in step D84, the process proceeds to step D85 to set the start address of the game state information storage area. Since the game state information storage area is configured so that a plurality of information can be stored, the area can be divided by address, so that a plurality of game state information read from the game information reception buffer is sequentially stored in the game state information storage area Address is set from the top.
Next, at step D86, the game state information is read from the game information reception buffer, and at step D87, the read game state information is saved at the start address of the game state information storage area.
Next, in step D88, the address of the game state information storage area is updated to the next address. Thereby, preparation for storing the next game state information is completed. Next, in step D89, it is determined whether or not reception of all gaming state information has been completed. If reception of all gaming state information has not been completed in step D89, the process returns to step D86 to repeat the loop. In this manner, the next information of the plurality of pieces of game state information is read from the game information reception buffer and stored in the game state information storage area designated by the next address (updated address). . By repeating such a loop, all the game state information is read from the game information reception buffer and saved at a plurality of addresses in the game state information storage area. As a result, the payout control device 1230 knows the latest gaming state (for example, external information system signal state, radio wave, illegal information such as magnet fraud, launch stop information).
If it is determined in step D89 that all the game state information (all the plurality of game state information) has been received, the process proceeds to step D90, and the main control command received flag is set. Thereby, by referring to the set of the main control command received flag, it is possible to confirm that the reception of all the game state information is completed in other processes. After step D90, the main control command reception process is terminated.

[Main control ID reception processing]
Next, the main control ID reception process D47 in the timer interruption process (payout) will be described with reference to FIG.
In this process, the main control ID transmitted from the game control device 1054 to the payout control device 1230 is received and saved.
When this routine is started, it is determined in step D101 whether or not a main control ID has been received. If no main control ID is received in step D101, the main control ID receiving process is terminated. On the other hand, if the main control ID is received in step D101, the process proceeds to step D102, and the head address of the main control ID storage area is set. The main control ID storage area is configured so that a plurality of data (for example, chip code, manufacturer code, model code, etc.) of the main control ID can be stored so that the area can be divided by address. Addresses for sequentially storing a plurality of data of the main control ID read from the main control ID storage area are set from the top.

Next, in step D103, one of the plurality of data of the main control ID is read from the main control ID reception buffer, and the read data is saved in the head address of the main control ID storage area in step D104. Next, in step D105, the address of the main control ID storage area is updated to the next address. Thereby, preparation for storing the next main control ID is completed. Next, in step D106, it is determined whether or not reception of all data (all of the plurality of data of the main control ID) has been completed. If reception of all data has not been completed in step D106, the process returns to step D103. Repeat. As a result, the next data among the plurality of data of the main control ID is read from the main control ID reception buffer and stored in the main control ID storage area specified by the next address (updated address). By repeating such a loop, all data of the main control ID is read from the main control ID reception buffer and saved at a plurality of addresses in the main control ID storage area.
If it is determined in step D106 that reception of all data of the main control ID has been completed, the process proceeds to step 107, and an ID transmission flag is set. Thereby, by referring to the set of the ID transmission flag, it can be confirmed in other processes that the main control ID may be transmitted. After step D107, the main control ID reception process is terminated.

[Card unit command reception processing]
Next, the card unit command reception process D48 in the timer interrupt process (payout) will be described with reference to FIG.
In this process, a command (card unit command) transmitted from the card unit 1015 to the payout control device 1230 is received and saved.
When this routine is started, it is determined in step D111 whether or not a card unit command has been received. This is determined by whether there is a card unit command in the card unit command reception buffer.
If no card unit command is received in step D101, the card unit command receiving process is terminated. On the other hand, if a card unit command is received in step D111, the process proceeds to step D112 to set the top address of the card unit command storage area. The card unit command storage area is configured so that multiple card unit commands can be stored by address so that multiple card unit commands to be read from the card unit command reception buffer can be sequentially stored in the card unit command storage area. The address for storing is set from the top.

Next, in step D113, a command (card unit command; hereinafter the same in this flowchart) is read from the card unit command reception buffer, and the read command is saved in the head address of the card unit command storage area in step D114. In step D115, the address of the card unit command storage area is updated to the next address. This prepares you to save the next command. Next, in step D116, it is determined whether or not reception of all commands (all of a plurality of commands existing in the card unit command reception buffer) is completed. If reception of all commands is not completed in step D116, step D113 is performed. Return to and repeat the loop. As a result, the next command is read from the card unit command reception buffer and stored in the card unit command storage area designated by the next address (updated address). By repeating such a loop, all commands existing in the card unit command reception buffer are read from the card unit command reception buffer and saved at a plurality of addresses in the card unit command storage area.
If it is determined in step D116 that all card unit commands have been received, the process proceeds to step 117, where a card unit command received flag is set. As a result, by referring to the set of the card unit command received flag, it is possible to confirm that all card unit commands have been received in other processes. After step D117, the card unit command reception process is terminated.

[Switch monitoring processing]
Next, the switch monitoring process D44 in the timer interrupt process (payout) will be described with reference to FIG.
In this process, the input flags of various switches are monitored, and a process for enclosing ball control such as subtraction of the number of balls and the increase / decrease of the number of balls on the board are performed.
When this routine is started, an out-sphere detection switch monitoring process is performed in step D121. This is a process for monitoring the out-ball detection switch 1161, which is a non-winning sensor, and details will be described later in a subroutine.
Next, a safe sphere detection switch monitoring process is performed in step D122. This is a process for monitoring the first safety ball detection switch 1162 and the second safety ball detection switch 1163 which are winning sensors, and details will be described later in a subroutine.
Next, in step D123, a shot ball detection switch monitoring process is performed. This is a process for monitoring the firing ball detection switch 1160 as a subtraction sensor, and details will be described later in a subroutine.
After step D123, the switch monitoring process is terminated.

[Out ball detection switch monitoring process]
Next, the out-sphere detection switch monitoring process D121 in the switch monitoring process will be described with reference to FIG.
When this routine is started, it is first determined in step D131 whether or not the out sphere detection switch 1161 has been turned on (that is, whether or not an out sphere has been detected). If the out ball detection switch 1161 is on, the process proceeds to step D132 and the value of the out number is updated (incremented) by “+1”.
Next, the routine proceeds to step D133, where it is determined whether or not a board surface ball number error is in progress. If the board surface ball number error is in progress (specifically, if a board surface ball number error flag in FIG. 213 described later is set), step. The process proceeds to D134, and if the board ball number error is not in progress (specifically, the board ball number error flag in FIG. 213 described later is cleared), the process proceeds to Step D135.
In step D134, it is determined whether or not a glass frame open error is in progress. If a glass frame open error is in progress (specifically, if a glass frame open error flag in FIG. 215 described later is set), the process returns. If the glass frame opening error is not in progress (specifically, if a glass frame opening error flag in FIG. 215 described later is cleared), the process proceeds to step D135.
In step D135, the value of the board ball number is updated (decremented) by “−1”, and the process returns.

  According to this routine, every time one out ball is collected, one board ball number is subtracted. However, if there is a board surface ball number error and a glass frame opening error, the glass frame 1005 is opened and it is considered that the board surface ball number error (such as a ball jam in the game area) is being solved. The subtraction of the number of surface balls of D135 is not executed. When the operation for eliminating the board surface ball number error (ball jam in the game area, etc.) is completed and the glass frame 1005 is closed, the board surface ball number is cleared by an error release switch monitoring process of FIG. D193).

Note that the out balls detected in step H131 include both game balls that have been fired and have become safe (winning) and game balls that have been out (no winning). That is, the number of outs means the number of all game balls that are discharged and collected from the game area.
Further, even if a board surface ball number error occurs due to steps D133 and D134, if the glass frame 1005 is not opened, step D135 is executed and the board surface ball number is updated. When the player hits the front surface of the glass frame 1005 or when the game ball is resolved by the collision of the game balls, the error is released without operating the error release switch 1068. Troublesome for both shoppers and shop assistants.

[Safe ball detection switch monitoring process]
Next, the safe ball detection switch monitoring process D122 in the switch monitoring process will be described with reference to FIG.
A first safe ball detection switch 1162 and a second safe ball detection switch 1163 are arranged on a frame portion on the back side of the game board 1020, and these switches 1162 and 1163 detect only safe balls of the game board 1020. Therefore, in the safe sphere detection switch monitoring process, processing related to the first safe sphere detection switch 1162 and the second safe sphere detection switch 1163 is performed.
When this routine is started, it is first determined in step D141 whether or not the first safe ball detection switch 1162 is turned on. If not, the routine jumps to step D147 and relates to the second safe ball detection switch 1163. Transition to processing.
On the other hand, if the first safe ball detection switch 1162 is on, the process proceeds to step D142 to update (increment) the value of the safe number by “+1”. Next, in step D143, the value of the out number is updated (incremented) by “+1”.
Next, the process proceeds to step D144 to determine whether or not a board surface ball number error is in progress. If the board surface ball number error is in progress (specifically, if the board surface ball number error flag of FIG. The process proceeds to step D145, and if the board ball number error is not in progress (specifically, the board ball number error flag in FIG. 213 described later is cleared), the process proceeds to step D146.
Proceeding to step D145, it is determined whether or not a glass frame opening error is in progress. If the glass frame opening error is in progress (specifically, if a glass frame opening error flag in FIG. The process jumps to D147, and if the glass frame opening error is not in progress (specifically, if the glass frame opening error flag in FIG. 215 described later is cleared), the process proceeds to step D146.
In step D146, the value of the board ball number is updated (decremented) by “−1”, and the process proceeds to step D147.

  According to the processing from step D141 to step D146, every time one safe sphere is detected by the first safe sphere detection switch 1162, the safe number is updated by "+1" and the out number is also "+1". Updated. Each time one safe number is detected, one board ball number is subtracted. However, if there is a board surface ball number error and a glass frame opening error, the glass frame 1005 is opened and it is considered that the board surface ball number error (such as a ball jam in the game area) is being solved. The subtraction of the board sphere number of D146 is not executed. When the operation for eliminating the board surface ball number error (ball jam in the game area, etc.) is completed and the glass frame 1005 is closed, the board surface ball number is cleared by an error release switch monitoring process of FIG. D193).

Note that the safe ball detected in step H141 is a game ball that has been fired and becomes safe (wins), and does not include a game ball that is out (no wins).
However, since the number of outs means the number of all game balls that are discharged and collected from the game area, the game balls that have been fired and become safe (winning) are also included in the balls that are discharged and collected from the game area Therefore, in step D143, the value of the number of outs is updated by “+1”.
In addition, even if a board surface ball number error occurs due to the steps D144 and D145, if the glass frame 1005 is not opened, step D146 is executed and the board surface ball number is updated. When the player hits the front surface of the glass frame 1005 or when the game ball is resolved by the collision of the game balls, the error is released without operating the error release switch 1068. Troublesome for both shoppers and shop assistants.

When the process proceeds to step D147 through step D146, the process proceeds to a process related to the second safe ball detection switch 1163.
That is, it is determined in step D147 whether or not the second safe ball detection switch 1163 is turned on. On the other hand, if the second safe ball detection switch 1163 is ON, the process proceeds to step D148 to update (increment) the value of the safe number by “+1” and update the value of the out number by “+1” in step D149. (Increment).
Next, the routine proceeds to step D150, where it is determined whether or not a board surface ball number error is in progress. If the board surface ball number error is in progress (specifically, if a board surface ball number error flag in FIG. 213 described later is set), step. The process proceeds to D151, and if the board ball number error is not in progress (specifically, the board ball number error flag in FIG. 213 described later is cleared), the process proceeds to step D152.
In step D151, it is determined whether or not a glass frame opening error is in progress. If the glass frame opening error is in progress (specifically, if a glass frame opening error flag in FIG. 215 described later is set), a return is made. To do. On the other hand, if the glass frame opening error is not in progress (specifically, if a glass frame opening error flag in FIG. 215 described later is cleared), the process proceeds to step D152.
In step D152, the value of the board ball number is updated (decremented) by “−1”, and the process returns.

  According to the processing from step D147 to step D152, every time one safe sphere is detected by the second safe sphere detection switch 1163, the safe number is updated by "+1" and the out number is also "+1". Updated. Each time one safe number is detected, one board ball number is subtracted. However, if there is a board surface ball number error and a glass frame opening error, the glass frame 1005 is opened and it is considered that the board surface ball number error (such as a ball jam in the game area) is being solved. The subtraction of the board sphere number of D146 is not executed. When the operation for eliminating the board surface ball number error (ball jam in the game area, etc.) is completed and the glass frame 1005 is closed, the board surface ball number is cleared by an error release switch monitoring process of FIG. D193).

Note that the safe ball detected in step D147 is a game ball that has been fired and becomes safe (wins), and does not include a game ball that has been out (no win).
However, since the number of outs means the number of all game balls that are discharged and collected from the game area, the game balls that have been fired and become safe (winning) are also included in the balls that are discharged and collected from the game area Therefore, in step D149, the value of the number of outs is updated by “+1”.
Further, even when a board surface ball number error occurs due to steps D150 and D151, if the glass frame 1005 is not opened, step D152 is executed and the board surface ball number is updated. When the player hits the front surface of the glass frame 1005 or when the game ball is resolved by the collision of the game balls, the error is released without operating the error release switch 1068. Troublesome for both shoppers and shop assistants.

[Launching ball detection switch monitoring process]
Next, the firing ball detection switch monitoring process D123 in the switch monitoring process will be described with reference to FIG.
When this routine is started, it is first determined in step D161 whether or not the shot ball detection switch 1160 has been turned on (that is, whether or not a game ball to be fired has been detected). If the shot ball detection switch 1160 is on, the process proceeds to step D162 to update (decrement) the value of the number of held balls by “−1”. The number of balls held here is the number of balls held managed inside the payout control device 1230 (payout control board). The process of step D162 is performed because it is necessary to decrement the number of balls held by one with the launch of the ball.
Next, in step D163, the value of the board ball number is updated (incremented) by “+1”, and the process proceeds to step D164.

According to the routine from step D161 to step D163, each time one game ball is fired, the number of board balls is incremented by 1, and the number of possessed balls is decremented by one. The number of board balls is the number of game balls that have been fired and not collected, that is, the number of game balls that are falling mainly on the game board surface (in the game area). Here, the process of step D162 constitutes a firing subtraction process for reducing the number of possessed balls (game value) in response to the game balls being launched into the game area.
Next, in step D164, the number-of-balls display light counter is updated (incremented) by “+1”, and in step D165, “−1” is saved in the display-based updated ball number storage area corresponding to the light counter. This is because it is necessary to display the change in the number of balls that accompanies the launch of the ball on the number-of-balls display 1040, so that the value of the ball number display light counter is updated (incremented) by “+1” and advanced. “−1” accompanying the launch of the ball is stored in the display updated possession ball number storage area corresponding to the advanced light counter, and the stored “−1” is subtracted from the display possession ball number to display the updated possession ball It is a number.
That is, the amount of change for displaying the number of balls to be displayed for each change event on the number-of-balls display 1040 (six 6-segment LEDs can be displayed to display a 6-digit value (number of balls)). Although it is stored in the display updated possession ball number storage area, here, the number of possession balls is reduced by one due to the launch of the ball, so “−1” is stored in the display update possession ball number storage area. .
After step D165, the process returns. As a result, the number of balls held is decremented by “1” and the display of the ball holding number display 1040 is updated.

[Error / Unauthorization monitoring processing]
Next, the error / injustice monitoring process D45 in the timer interrupt process will be described with reference to FIG.
When this routine is started, the error release switch monitoring process in step D171, the enclosed ball number monitoring process in step D172, the winning number abnormality monitoring process in step D173, the frame opening error monitoring process in step D174, and the frame switch abnormality in step D175 Monitoring process, board surface ball number error monitoring process in step D176, frame radio wave fraud monitoring process in step D177, small ball fraud monitoring process in step D178, magnetic ball fraud monitoring process in step D179, and night monitoring fraud monitoring process in step D180. Returns after executing sequentially.
Details of the monitoring processes in steps D171 to D180 will be described later.

[Error release switch monitoring process]
Next, the error release switch monitoring process D171 in the error / injustice monitoring process will be described with reference to FIG.
When this routine is started, it is first determined in step D191 whether or not the error release switch 1068 has been turned on. Proceeding to step D192, it is determined whether or not a board surface ball number error is in progress. The process proceeds to D193, and if the board ball number error is not in progress (specifically, the board ball number error flag of FIG. 213 described later is cleared), the process returns.
In step D193, the number of board balls is cleared (that is, the data on the number of board balls is returned to the zero state), and in step D194, the enclosed ball number confirmation request flag is set. Next, in step D195, an initial value is set in the enclosing ball number confirmation wait timer, and the process returns.

  Here, when the board ball number is cleared to zero by the process of step D193, the determination result of step D201 of FIG. 212 described later becomes negative, and the encapsulated ball number excess error flag is cleared in step D202. In this case, the determination result in step D221 in FIG. 213 to be described later is also negative, and the board ball number error flag is cleared in step D223. However, an encapsulated ball number excess error, which will be described later, has occurred, and this encapsulated ball number excess error has not actually been resolved (for example, the glass frame 1005 is opened to release the clogged ball in the game area and the glass frame 1005 , And the error release switch 1068 is turned on, but if the number of encapsulated balls continues to be excessive as a whole), the enclosing ball number confirmation determination process executed as will be described later (after step D207 in FIG. 212) ), For example, step D210 is executed, and the error flag of the excessive number of encapsulated balls is set again.

  Therefore, according to the routine of FIG. 211, when the error release switch 1068 is turned on, the number of board balls is cleared and the above-mentioned board ball number error flag is released. As a result, there is an abnormality that causes the number of board balls to exceed the specified number due to clogging of game balls (board board ball number error), or an enclosed ball number error (enclosed ball number excess error, enclosed ball number insufficient error, enclosure path error error). When this occurs, a store clerk or the like of the amusement hall opens the glass frame 1005 and manually closes the glass frame 1005 after resolving clogging (or lack of balls), and then turns on the error release switch 1068. This error detection state (the state where the error flag is set) is automatically canceled. Therefore, there is an effect that the error can be canceled accurately and smoothly.

In other words, the error detection state cannot be canceled simply by turning on the error cancel switch 1068, and it cannot be canceled unless the ball clogging or the like is actually resolved (since it is confirmed in step D192 that there is no board ball number error). ), The accuracy of error cancellation increases. Moreover, in order to improve this accuracy, no further operation is essential, so that smooth error cancellation can be realized. Further, in the process of FIG. 211, the error flag (for example, the excessive number of encapsulated balls error flag or the board ball number error flag) is not cleared, but the condition for clearing the board ball number is set in step D193. The various error detection states described above related to the encapsulated sphere are canceled. For this reason, the error detection status cancellation process for a large number of error flags (enclosed ball count error, encapsulated ball count error, encapsulated path error error, board ball count error flags) is substantially realized with a small number of steps. As a result, the processing is simplified.
In addition, after the error is released, the number of encapsulated spheres is confirmed and the number of encapsulated spheres is normal. Since the error flag is canceled after confirming (FIG. 212), there is an effect that the accuracy of error cancellation can be further improved.

  In addition, if a board ball error occurs and the glass frame 1005 is opened to try to resolve it manually, the game ball that has been clogged will collide with a game nail in the game area and jump out of the game area. May end up. Thus, even when the game ball is lost without being collected from the out-ball inlet 1023, the number of board balls is cleared in step D193, so that the number of board balls is determined to be greater than or equal to the prescribed number in step D221 described later. Since the game can be resumed unless it is determined that there is an insufficient number of encapsulated balls in Step D208, Step D212, and Step D214, which will be described later, problems such as the player feeling dissatisfied are avoided. It should be noted that even if the glass ball 1005 is opened in steps D134 and D135, the number of board balls is not updated even if the glass ball 1005 is opened. Therefore, when the glass frame 1005 is opened, the error release switch 1068 is set. It is necessary to operate and clear the error. Further, by clearing the board ball number in step D193, the board ball number error is eliminated, so the board ball number is in a positive state even though there is no game ball on the board. Therefore, it does not develop into a problem that a board ball number error occurs frequently even though it is in a normal state.

In addition, the operation | work for eliminating the factor (ball clogging, a ball shortage, a ball excess) of a board surface ball number error or an enclosed ball number error can be performed as follows, for example. First, for example, a clogged ball (a so-called grape or the like) on the board surface (the front surface of the game board 1020 including the game area 1022) applies a shock by pushing, pulling, or impacting a ball clogged manually by opening the glass frame 1005. It can be resolved by letting it flow down.
If the number of encapsulated balls is excessive, the front frame 1004 is opened in addition to the glass frame 1005 as necessary, the above-mentioned ball feeding device is manually operated to send the ball to the launch position, and the ball sent to the launch position. The ball can be eliminated by discharging the balls one by one out of the machine. Also, when the number of encapsulated balls is insufficient, the glass frame 1005 is opened, and a ball from the outside of the machine (supplemented ball) is inserted into the game area 1022 from the board side to flow down (for example, flow into the out ball inlet 1023). Can be resolved.
Further, in the fifteenth embodiment, when the number of encapsulated balls is excessive, the clerk operates the deball switch 1183 to remove the encapsulated balls from the upper passage 1303 via the bypass passage 1304 as in the case of replacing the enclosed balls. A mechanism that collects in the collection box 1345 through the passage 1305 may be used. In addition, when the number of encapsulated balls is insufficient, a new game ball may be supplied from the supply box 1343 to the upper passage 1303.

[Encapsulated ball number monitoring process]
Next, the enclosed ball number monitoring process D172 in the error / injustice monitoring process will be described with reference to FIG.
When this routine is started, it is first determined in step D201 whether or not the number of board balls is less than zero. If less than zero, the process proceeds to step D203, and if not less than zero, the process proceeds to step D202. In step D202, since the number of balls on the board is not less than zero, the enclosed ball number excess error flag is cleared, and the process proceeds to step D204. On the other hand, in step D203, since there is an abnormal state in which the number of balls on the board is less than zero and a ball has been illegally thrown into the board, an excessive ball number error flag is set, and the process proceeds to step D204.

In step D204, it is determined whether or not there is a request for confirmation of the number of encapsulated balls (that is, whether or not a flag for confirming the number of encapsulated balls is set). The process jumps (ie, does not execute) and returns.
The enclosed ball number confirmation request flag is set, for example, when the power is turned on (including when the power failure is restored), when the error release switch 1068 is pressed, or when the frame opening error returns to normal.
In step D205, if the enclosed ball number confirmation wait timer is not "0", "-1" is updated. Since the enclosing ball number confirmation weight timer is set to the initial value in step D195 described above, it is decremented.
Next, at step D206, it is determined whether or not the enclosing ball number confirmation wait timer is “0”. If it is not “0”, the process returns. When the routine is repeated and the enclosing ball number confirmation wait timer becomes “0”, the process goes to step D207 to clear the enclosing ball number confirmation request flag. Next, in step D208, it is determined whether or not the minimum enclosed ball number detection switch (that is, the first enclosed ball detection switch 1164) is turned on. If it is turned on, the process proceeds to step D209, and if not, the process proceeds to step D212. move on.

Then, when proceeding to Step D209, it is determined whether or not the maximum encapsulated ball number detection switch (that is, the second encapsulated ball detection switch 1165) is turned on. Proceed to step D211. When the routine proceeds to step 210, since both switches 1164 and 1165 are both on and it is an enclosed ball number excess error, the enclosed ball number excess error flag is set, and then the process returns.
On the other hand, when the process proceeds to step D211, the number of encapsulated spheres is in the normal range (that is, the minimum and maximum and less than or equal to the maximum). Here, error flags other than the encapsulated ball number excess error flag (that is, an encapsulated ball number insufficient error flag and an encapsulated path abnormality error flag described later) are cleared, and the process returns.

Setting the flag means setting the flag, and clearing the flag means setting the flag not set (not set).
In addition, to cancel the state where the overfilled ball number error flag is set (error detection state of overfilled ball number error), as described in FIG. 211, the glass frame 1005 is opened to eliminate the cause of the error. However, it is necessary to close the glass frame 1005 and press the error release switch 1068 after that (for example, to remove an extra ball). The same applies to other enclosing ball number errors (encapsulated ball number shortage error and enclosing path error error). Even if the glass frame 1005 is simply opened and closed and the error cancel switch 1068 is pressed, the excess ball error flag is cleared by steps D201 and D202 of this routine (FIG. 212), but the cause of the error has been eliminated. If there is no excess (the number of encapsulated balls is excessive), then the process after step D207 of this routine (FIG. 212) is executed, and the encapsulated ball number excess error flag is set again by step D210 of them. become.

On the other hand, if the determination in step D208 is NO and the process proceeds to step D212, it is determined whether or not the maximum enclosing ball number detection switch (that is, the second enclosing ball detection switch 1165) is on. If not, the process proceeds to step D214. When the process proceeds to step D213, the second enclosed ball detection switch 165 is turned on even though the first enclosed ball detection switch 1164 is not turned on. For example, the above-described upper passage 1303 is clogged with a ball. Since it is considered abnormal, the enclosed path abnormality error flag is set, and then the process returns.
If the process proceeds to step D214, the number of encapsulated spheres is insufficient (that is, less than the minimum), so the encapsulated sphere number insufficient error flag is set and the process returns.

[Panel ball number error monitoring processing]
Next, the board ball number error monitoring process D176 in the error / injustice monitoring process will be described with reference to FIG.
When this routine is started, it is first determined in step D221 whether or not the number of board balls is equal to or greater than the specified number. If it is equal to or greater than the specified number, the process proceeds to step D222. Here, the specified number is a value of 1 or more, for example, ten. This is because, if there are generally 10 or more board balls, there is a game problem, and it is considered that the flow of game balls is stagnant to some extent. The prescribed number is not limited to 10, and the optimum value varies depending on the gaming machine.
In step D222, the board ball number error flag is set and the process returns. On the other hand, when the process proceeds to Step D223, the board ball number error flag is cleared and the process returns.
According to this routine, when the number of board balls increases abnormally due to a ball jam in the game area or the like, the determination result of step D221 becomes affirmative, and a board board ball number error flag is set in step D222. An error occurs. When the ball clogging is resolved and the board ball number returns to normal, the determination result of step D221 becomes negative, and the board ball number error flag is cleared in step D223, and the error detection state of the board ball number error is set. Canceled.

  When a board surface ball number error occurs, error information is output to the hall computer 1086 or the like via the card unit 1015. However, even if a board surface ball number error occurs, the game ball cannot be fired alone (see FIG. 222 described later). ). Thereby, it becomes impossible to fire the game ball (that is, the game) due to mere clogging of the ball in the game area (when the number of encapsulated balls is normal), and a problem such as dissatisfaction by the player is avoided. However, when another error that should not continue the game (for example, an error of insufficient number of encapsulated balls) occurs along with the board ball number error, the game ball cannot be fired (see FIG. 222 described later).

[Winning number abnormality monitoring process]
Next, the winning number abnormality monitoring process D173 in the error / injustice monitoring process will be described with reference to FIG.
When this routine is started, it is first determined in step D231 whether or not a main control command has been received. If no main control command has been received, the process returns.
On the other hand, if the main control command is received, the process proceeds to step D232, and it is determined whether or not the difference between the winning number and the safe number is equal to or larger than a predetermined number (for example, five). This is by reading the number of winnings determined on the game control device 1054 side from the main control command received in the previous step D231, and the first safe ball detection switch 1162 and the number of winning winnings input to the payout control device 1230. The total number of safe numbers detected by the two safe ball detection switch 1163 is compared, and the winning number and the safe number (here, each of the safe numbers detected by the first safe ball detection switch 1162 and the second safe ball detection switch 1163). The total number) is checked, and if the difference is greater than or equal to a predetermined number, it is determined that there is an abnormality.
That is, the number of winnings sent from the game control device 1054 and the safe number counted on the payout control device 1123 side are compared to monitor the presence or absence of an abnormality.

If the difference between the winning number and the safe number is greater than or equal to the predetermined number in step D232, the process proceeds to step D233, and the winning number abnormality flag is set. The state where the difference between the number of winnings and the number of safes is a predetermined number or more is, for example, a so-called winning port of the game board 1020 (for example, the first starting winning port 1025, the second starting winning port 1026, the general winning ports 1028 to 1031). Incorrect acts such as fishing balls and other illegal acts such as picking a ball and then pulling out the ball (actually, there is no winning of the ball at the prize opening, just turning on the winning sensor) or illegal winning sensors using radio waves On the other hand, the number of winnings increases due to fraud to turn on, but the actual number of safes is small.
This can be determined by increasing the difference between the number of winnings determined on the game board 1020 side and the safe number detected on the payout control device 1230 side (5 or more in this embodiment).

After step D233, it is determined in step D234 whether or not the winning number abnormality monitoring timer has become “0”. Even if the difference between the winning number and the safe number becomes equal to or greater than a predetermined number, the winning ball addition is not stopped immediately, but is counted by a winning number abnormality monitoring timer (set to an initial value in step D235 described later). Monitoring is continued until “0” is reached. During a big hit, there may be a case where a game ball is temporarily won in the first variable winning device 1027 temporarily. Therefore, even if the winning number abnormality flag is set, the winning ball addition is not stopped immediately.
If the winning number abnormality monitoring timer is not “0” in step D234. Proceeding to step D236, the winning number abnormality monitoring timer is updated by "-1." On the other hand, if the prize number abnormality monitoring timer is “0” in step D234. Proceeding to step D235, an initial value (for example, 15 seconds) is set in the winning number abnormality monitoring timer, and at step S236, the winning number abnormality monitoring timer is updated by "-1."

  After step D236, it is then determined in step D237 whether or not the prize number abnormality monitoring timer has reached “0”. If the timer has not reached “0”, the process returns and the routine is repeated. If it is determined in step D237 that the prize number abnormality monitoring timer has become “0” by repeating the routine, the process proceeds to step D238, where a prize ball addition stop flag is set. This is because the difference between the winning number and the safe number is equal to or larger than the predetermined number, and the difference between the winning number and the safe number is equal to or larger than the predetermined number only for the period set to the initial value (for example, 15 seconds) of the winning number abnormality monitoring timer. Since the abnormal period of continuation has continued, it is determined that there is a high possibility of fraud, and a prize ball addition stop flag is set to stop the process of adding the number of winning prizes to the number of possessed balls. After step D238, the process returns.

On the other hand, if the difference between the winning number and the safe number is not equal to or larger than a predetermined number (for example, 5) in step D232, the process branches to step D239 to clear the winning number abnormality flag, and the winning number abnormality monitoring timer is set in step D240. Clear “0” and return.
This is because the difference between the winning number and the safe number is not equal to or greater than the predetermined number, so it is determined that it is within the normal gaming state range and the winning number abnormality flag is cleared, and the winning number abnormality monitoring timer is also cleared to “0”. Is.

[Frame open error monitoring processing]
Next, the frame opening error monitoring process D174 in the error / injustice monitoring process will be described with reference to FIG.
When this routine is started, it is first determined in step D251 whether or not the state of the glass frame opening switch 1125 for detecting the opening of the glass frame 1005 (front frame) is the same as in the previous process. If not the same, in step D252, the glass frame opening monitoring timer initial value (for example, a value corresponding to 100 msec) is set in the glass frame opening monitoring timer, and then the processing proceeds to step D253.
Proceeding to step D253, if the glass frame open monitoring timer is not zero, an update process ("-1" update) is performed to reduce the value of the glass frame open monitor timer by one cycle of the timer processing period, and then to step D254 The process proceeds to determine whether the value of the glass frame open monitoring timer has become zero. If it is zero, the process proceeds to step D255, and if not, the process jumps from step D255 to D257 and proceeds to step D258.

  In these steps D255 to D257, the open / close state of the glass frame 1005 is monitored by the state of the glass frame open switch 1125, and the same state continues for a predetermined time (for example, 100 msec) corresponding to the initial value of the glass frame open monitor timer. For the first time, the open / close state of the glass frame 1005 is determined by the processing after step D255. Thereby, the open / closed state of the glass frame 1005 is determined with high reliability. That is, for example, even when the signal of the glass frame opening switch 1125 fluctuates instantaneously due to noise or the like, it is possible to prevent the open / close state of the glass frame 1005 from being erroneously determined.

Proceeding to step D255, it is determined whether the state of the glass frame opening switch 1125 corresponds to the opening state of the glass frame 1005. If the glass frame opening switch 1125 is in the open state, the glass frame opening error flag is set in step D256, and then the process proceeds to step D258. If it is not in the open state (that is, if it is in the closed state), the glass frame open error flag is cleared in step D257, and then the process proceeds to step D258.
Next, when proceeding to Step D258, the front frame 1004 is subjected to the same processing as Steps D251 to D257, and then returns.
In the flowchart shown in FIG. 215, for convenience of explanation, the front frame 1004 is represented as a main body frame, and the night monitoring switch 1126 that detects the opening of the front frame 1004 is represented as a main body frame open detection switch. This is because it is easier to understand that the detection of the opening of the front frame 1004 is performed by the body frame opening detection switch in contrast to the detection of the opening of the glass frame 1005 by the glass frame opening switch 1125. Further, since the glass frame 100 may be referred to as a front frame, the front frame 1004 is also referred to as a main body frame.

Returning to the description of the flowchart, in step D258, it is determined whether or not the state of the night monitoring switch 1126 that detects the opening of the front frame 1004 is the same as in the previous process. If not, in step D259, the main body frame opening monitoring timer initial value (for example, a value corresponding to 100 msec) is set in the main body frame opening monitoring timer, and then the process proceeds to step D260.
Proceeding to step D260, if the body frame release monitoring timer is not zero, an update process ("-1" update) is executed to decrease the value of the body frame release monitoring timer by one cycle of the timer processing period, and then to step D261. The process proceeds to determine whether the value of the main body frame open monitoring timer has become zero.
In these steps D258 to D261, the open / close state of the front frame 1004 is monitored according to the state of the night monitoring switch 1126, and the same state continues for a predetermined time (for example, 100 msec) corresponding to the initial value of the main body frame open monitoring timer. For the first time, the open / closed state of the front frame 1004 is determined by the processing after step D262. Thereby, the open / closed state of the front frame 1004 is determined with high reliability.

Proceeding to step D262, it is determined whether the state of the main body frame open detection switch (night monitoring switch 1126) corresponds to the open state of the front frame 1004. If it is open, the main body frame open error flag is set in step D263. The process proceeds to step D265 later, and if it is not in the open state (that is, if it is in the closed state), the main body frame open error flag is cleared in step D264, and then the process proceeds to step D265.
In step D265, it is determined whether or not it is the moment of normal return from the frame open error state. The frame open error here refers to an open error of both the glass frame 1005 and the front frame 1004. Therefore, the determination in step D265 is a state in which any one frame or both frames are open. From this, it is determined whether both are in the closed state.
If it is not the moment of normal return from the frame open error state in step D265, the frame open error monitoring process is terminated and the process returns. Then, the routine is repeated, and if it is determined in step D265 that it is the moment when the frame has returned to normal from the frame opening error state, the process proceeds to step D266, and the enclosing ball number confirmation request flag is set. As described above, the enclosed ball number confirmation request flag is set when, for example, the power is turned on (including when the power failure is restored), the error release switch 1068 is pressed, or the frame opening error returns to normal. This corresponds to the case where the frame opening error is set when it returns to normal. When the enclosing ball number confirmation request flag is set, it is determined whether or not there is a confirmation request for the enclosing ball number in the enclosing ball monitoring process (FIG. 212), and the enclosing ball number is confirmed.
Next, in step D267, an initial value is set in the enclosing ball number confirmation wait timer. This is the same as the processing in step D195 (FIG. 211) described above. After step D267, the frame opening error monitoring process is terminated.

[Frame switch error monitoring processing]
Next, the frame switch abnormality monitoring process D175 in the error / illegal monitoring process will be described with reference to FIG.
The frame switch abnormality monitoring process is a process for monitoring abnormalities such as connector disconnection, disconnection, and short circuit of various switches connected to the payout control apparatus 1230, as in the case of the game control apparatus 1054 (main control board). The target switch is, for example, a proximity switch as shown below.
First enclosure ball detection switch 1164, second enclosure ball detection switch 1165
Out ball detection switch 1161
First safe ball detection switch 1162 and second safe ball detection switch 1163
-Launch ball detection switch 1160
・ Polishing inlet switch 1321
-Lifting entrance switch 1332
-Lifting outlet switch 1334

When this routine is started, first, in step D271, it is determined whether or not the state of the switch abnormality signal is the same as in the previous process. This determination is made based on a signal output from the proximity interface IC in the peripheral circuit of the CPU 1231 in the payout control device 1230, for example.
If the determination result in step D271 is YES (same as in the previous processing), the process proceeds to step D273. If not, the switch abnormality monitoring timer is set to the switch abnormality monitoring timer initial value (for example, a value corresponding to 100 msec in step D272). ) Is set, the process proceeds to step D273.
When the process proceeds to step D273, if the switch abnormality monitoring timer is not zero, an update process ("-1" update) is performed to decrease the value of the switch abnormality monitoring timer by one cycle of the timer processing period, and then the process proceeds to step D274. It is determined whether the value of the switch abnormality monitoring timer has become zero. If it is zero, the process proceeds to step D275, and if it is not zero, the process returns.

In step D275, it is determined whether the switch abnormality signal is in an abnormal state. This is to determine whether an abnormality such as connector disconnection, disconnection, or short circuit has occurred in the various switches described above. If it is determined in step D275 that the switch abnormality signal is in an abnormal state, the process proceeds to step D276 where the frame switch abnormality flag is set and the process returns.
On the other hand, if the switch abnormality signal is not in an abnormal state in step D275, the process proceeds to step D277 to clear the frame switch abnormality flag, and then returns.
The frame switch abnormality flag generates a command based on various error flags in a main control command transmission process shown in FIG. 241, which will be described later, and sends the command to the game control device 1054. The game control device 1054 sends the command to the effect control device. In response to this command, for example, the presentation control device 1053 is used when notifying the display device 1041 of an error state (for example, an error state that the frame switch is abnormal).

[Frame radio fraud monitoring processing]
Next, the frame radio wave fraud monitoring process D177 in the error / fraud monitoring process will be described with reference to FIG.
When this routine is started, it is first determined in step D281 whether the radio wave sensor (frame) 1127 is on. If the radio wave sensor (frame) 1127 is on, it is determined that an illegal radio wave for the payout control device 1230 and the frame is detected, and the process proceeds to step D282, where the wait timer initial value (for example, 60 seconds) is set as the radio wave illegal weight timer. Save to area. The reason why the initial value is set in the radio wave improper wait timer is that even if the radio wave sensor (frame) 1127 no longer detects the illegal radio wave, it is treated as illegal while the timer value is present.
Next, in step D283, the frame radio wave fraud flag is set, and the process returns. Thereby, when the radio wave sensor (frame) 1127 is turned on, according to the main control command transmission process shown in FIG. 241, which will be described later, as in the case described in the frame switch abnormality monitoring process, the presentation control device 1053 is finally controlled by, for example, An error is notified on the display device 1041.

  On the other hand, if the radio wave sensor (frame) 1127 is not turned on in step D281, the process branches to step D284, and if the radio wave illegal weight timer is not zero, the value of the radio wave illegal wait timer is decreased by one cycle of the timer processing cycle. (Update "-1") After executing the process, the process proceeds to step D285, where it is determined whether the value of the notification timer has become zero. If it is not zero, the process returns. If it is zero, the frame radio wave is invalid in step D286. Clear the flag and return. The notification timer counts a period during which error notification is continued.

[Small ball fraud monitoring processing]
Next, the small ball fraud monitoring process D178 in the error / fraud monitoring process will be described with reference to FIG.
When this routine is started, it is first determined in step D291 whether or not the minimum enclosed ball number detection switch (first enclosed ball detection switch 1164) is on. Since the first enclosed ball detection switch 1164 is a sensor for detecting the minimum number of enclosed balls, the first enclosed ball detection switch 1164 is set as the minimum enclosed ball number detection switch in step D291.
If the minimum enclosing ball number detection switch is turned on in step D291, the process proceeds to step D292, and the timer initial value (the initial value of the small ball detection timer) is saved in the small ball detection timer area. The timer initial value is set to 20 ms, for example.

Next, the process proceeds to step D293, where a small ball passage monitoring flag is set. In step D294, it is determined whether the small ball passage is being monitored. If the small ball passage monitoring flag is set, it is determined that the small ball passage monitoring is in progress. If small ball passage monitoring is being performed in step D294, it is determined in step D295 whether the small ball sensor 1342 is on. The small ball sensor 1342 is turned on when the game ball is a regular ball. However, when the game ball is an abnormal ball (small ball), the small ball sensor 1342 passes the small ball sensor 1342 and the abnormal ball (small ball). ) Is not detected and the detection signal does not turn on.
If the small ball sensor 1342 is on, it is determined that the game ball is a regular ball, so the small ball detection timer is cleared in step D296, and the small ball passing monitoring flag is cleared in the following step D297, and then the return. To do.
In this way, when the small ball sensor 1342 is turned on when the minimum enclosed ball number detection switch (first enclosed ball detection switch 1164) is turned on, it is determined that the game ball is a regular ball, and the small ball detection timer is cleared. The small ball passage monitoring flag is also cleared.

On the other hand, if the minimum enclosed ball number detection switch is not turned on in step D291, the process jumps to step D294. Accordingly, at this time, the small ball passage monitoring flag is not set.
If the small ball passage monitoring is not in progress in step D294, the small ball fraud monitoring process is terminated and the process returns.
Further, if the small ball sensor 1342 is not turned on in step D295, it is determined that the game ball is an abnormal ball (small ball), the process branches to step D298, and the small ball detection timer is updated by “−1”. Next, in step D299, it is determined whether or not the value of the small ball detection timer has become zero. If it is determined in step D299 that the value of the small ball detection timer has become zero by repeating the routine, a small ball incorrect flag is set in step D300, a ball removal request flag is set in step D301, and then the process returns. .
Thus, while the small ball passage monitoring flag is set, the small ball sensor 1342 must be turned on even though the minimum enclosed ball number detection switch (first enclosed ball detection switch 1164) is turned on. For example, it is determined that the game ball is an abnormal ball (small ball), and when it is determined that the game ball is an abnormal ball (small ball), a small ball illegal flag is set and a ball removal request flag is set.
That is, when an abnormal sphere (small sphere) is detected, the small sphere fraud flag is not cleared. Further, when the ball removal request flag is set, the ball removal of the encapsulated ball is performed.

[Magnetic sphere fraud monitoring processing]
Next, the magnetic sphere fraud monitoring process D179 in the error / fraud monitoring process will be described with reference to FIG.
When this routine is started, it is first determined in step D311 whether or not the feed outlet switch 1334 is on. The feed outlet switch 1334 is disposed on the outlet side of the feed device 1302 and detects a sphere discharged from the feed device 1302. When the feed outlet switch 1334 is turned on, the feed device 1302 turns the ball from the feed device 1302. Is discharged to the upper passage 1303 and passes above the electromagnet 1341.
If the feed outlet switch 1334 is turned on in step D311, the process proceeds to step D312, and the initial value of the magnetic sphere detection timer (for example, 200 ms) is saved in the magnetic sphere detection timer area. Next, a magnetic ball passing monitoring flag is set in step D313, and an initial value (for example, 500 ms) is set in the electromagnet operation timer in step D314.

Next, in step D315, it is determined whether the magnetic ball passing is being monitored. If the magnetic sphere passage monitoring flag is set, it is determined that the magnetic sphere passage is being monitored. If the magnetic ball passing monitoring is being performed in step D315, it is determined in step D316 whether or not the maximum enclosed ball number detection switch (second enclosed ball detection switch 1165) is on. Since the second enclosed ball detection switch 1165 is a sensor that detects the maximum number of enclosed balls, the second enclosed ball detection switch 1165 is set as the maximum enclosed ball number detection switch in step D316.
If the maximum enclosed ball number detection switch is turned on in step D316, the process proceeds to step D317, where the magnetic ball detection timer is cleared, and in step D318, the magnetic ball passing monitoring flag is cleared.
Next, if the electromagnet operation timer is not zero in step D319, the value of the electromagnet operation timer is updated by “−1”, and it is determined in step D320 whether or not the electromagnet operation timer has become zero. If the electromagnet operation timer is not zero in step D320, the electromagnet ON output data (electromagnet 1341 is turned on) is set in step D321, and the process returns. On the other hand, if the electromagnet operation timer is zero in step D320, the electromagnet off output data (electromagnet 1341 is turned off) is set in step D321, and then the process returns.

On the other hand, if the feed outlet switch 1334 is not turned on at step D311, the routine jumps to step D315. Therefore, at this time, the magnetic ball passage monitoring flag is not set.
On the other hand, if the passing of the magnetic sphere is not being monitored in step D315, the process jumps to step D319. Therefore, at this time, it is not determined that the maximum enclosing ball number detection switch is ON, and fraud monitoring of the magnetic sphere is not determined.
Further, if the maximum enclosing ball number detection switch is not turned on in step D316, it is determined that there is a possibility of abnormality, and the process branches to step D323 to update the magnetic sphere detection timer by “−1”, and in step D324. It is determined whether the value of the magnetic sphere detection timer has become zero. If not, the routine jumps to step D319 and repeats the routine. If it is determined in step D324 that the value of the magnetic sphere detection timer has become zero by repeating the routine, a magnetic sphere illegal flag is set in step D325, a sphere removal request flag is set in step D326, and then The process proceeds to step D319. The processes after step D319 are as described above.

In this way, when the feed outlet switch 1334 is turned on and the ball is discharged from the feed device 1302 to the upper passage 1303 and can pass through the upper side of the electromagnet 1341, the game ball is a normal non-magnetic ball. If the electromagnet 1341 is turned on for a predetermined time TD (for example, 500 ms), it is not attracted. Since the time until it passes through the maximum enclosing ball number detection switch) is shorter than the predetermined time TD, it is determined as a regular non-magnetic sphere.
On the other hand, if the game ball is an illegal magnetic ball, it is attracted when the electromagnet 1341 is turned on for a predetermined time TD, so that the ball discharged through the feed outlet switch 1334 and discharged into the upper passage 1303 is the first one. Since the time until the two enclosing ball detection switch 1165 (the maximum enclosing ball number detection switch) passes is longer than the predetermined time TD, it is determined that the ball is an illegal magnetic body.
Therefore, when the electromagnet 1341 is turned on for a predetermined time TD, the sphere passing through the feed outlet switch 1334 and discharged to the upper passage 1303 passes through the second enclosed sphere detection switch 1165 (maximum enclosed sphere number detection switch). If the time until the time exceeds the predetermined time TD, it is determined that the ball is an illegal magnetic ball, and the magnetic ball illegal flag is set in step D325, and the ball removal request flag is set in step D326. Become.
Further, if it is determined that the ball is an illegal magnetic sphere, the magnetic sphere illegal flag is not released (cleared). Furthermore, it is determined that the ball is an illegal magnetic body and the ball removal request flag is set, so that the enclosed ball is removed.

[Night monitoring fraud monitoring processing]
Next, the nighttime monitoring fraud monitoring process D180 in the error / fraud monitoring process will be described with reference to FIG.
When this routine is started, it is first determined in step D331 whether or not night monitoring information has been set. If the result of the night monitoring information has already been determined and set based on the output of the night monitoring switch 1126, it is not necessary to perform the same processing twice after the power is turned on. In order to perform the nighttime monitoring fraud monitoring process only, the determination in step D331 is performed.
If the night monitoring information has been set in step D331, the night monitoring fraud monitoring process is terminated and the process returns. On the other hand, if the night monitoring information has not been set, the process proceeds to step D332 to determine whether or not the night frame is open.
Here, in step D31 of the night monitoring information reception process shown in FIG. 201 described above, the night frame opening / closing information is received from the night monitoring switch 1126 and stored. The night frame opening / closing information includes information (frame opening information) indicating whether or not the opening of the front frame 1004 is detected at night, and the monitoring information on the removal of the game control device 1054. Therefore, nighttime frame opening refers to the case where the opening of the front frame 1004 is detected at nighttime.

Therefore, in step D332, it is determined whether or not the opening of the front frame 1004 is detected at night. If it is determined in step D332 that the nighttime frame is open (when the opening of the front frame 1004 is detected at night), the flow proceeds to step D333, and the timer initial value (for example, 60 seconds) of the nighttime illegality notification timer is indicated. Save to the timer area. The nighttime fraud notification timer counts a period during which nighttime fraud is reported. Next, the nighttime illegal flag is set in step D334, and the process proceeds to step D335.
When the nighttime fraud flag is set, according to the main control command transmission process shown in FIG. 241, which will be described later, as in the case of the frame switch abnormality monitoring process, the display control unit 1053 finally controls the display device 1041, for example. Error notification (for example, notification of nighttime frame opening error).
On the other hand, if there is no nighttime frame release in step D332, the process proceeds to step D336, the nighttime illegal flag is cleared, and the process proceeds to step D335.

Proceeding to step D335, it is determined whether or not there is board removal.
Here, in step D33 of the night monitoring information reception process shown in FIG. 201 described above, the board removal information is received from the night monitoring switch 1126 and stored. The board removal information is removal monitoring information of the game control device 1054 (corresponding to a board), and is information indicating whether or not the game control device 1054 is removed at night. Therefore, the board removal is a case where it is detected that the game control device 1054 is removed at night.
Therefore, in step D335, it is determined whether or not removal of the game control device 1054 is detected at night.
The nighttime monitoring switch 1126 includes a disconnection detecting means 1353, and the disconnection detecting means 1353 is a loop in which the current of the backup power supply 1351 is a payout control device 1230 → a game control device 1054 → a payout control device 1230 → a nighttime monitoring switch 1126. In the case of flowing through a connected route (disconnection monitoring route), it is detected that the route is not disconnected and the game control device 1054 is not removed, and the current of the backup power supply 1351 is detected through this route. If it is not flowing, it is detected that the game control device 1054 is removed because the route is broken. In this case, the state in which the disconnection is detected can be detected not only by detecting the removal of the game control device 1054 but also by detecting the disconnection state of the route even when the payout control device 1230 is removed, for example. become.
Therefore, in the process of step D335, not only the removal of the game control device 1054 but also the removal of the payout control device 1230 may be determined.
By doing so, it is possible to monitor the unauthorized removal of the payout control device 1230 at night and perform processing such as error notification.

If it is determined in step D335 that there is board removal, the process proceeds to step D337, and the timer initial value (for example, 60 seconds) of the nighttime fraud notification timer is saved in the nighttime fraud notification timer area. Next, the nighttime illegal flag is set in step D338, and the process proceeds to step D339.
When the nighttime fraud flag is set, as in the case of step D334 described above, an error notification is finally given by, for example, the display device 1041 under the control of the effect control device 1053 (for example, notification of a removal error of the game control device 1054). Will be.
On the other hand, if there is no substrate removal in step D335, the process jumps to step D339. Therefore, the nighttime illegal flag is not set at this time.
In step D339, fraud level information is generated from whether or not the nighttime frame is opened, the number of times the frame is opened, and the board removal information. This is performed so that the payout control device 1230 determines the unauthorized level from the night monitoring information received from the night monitoring switch 126 and outputs the determined unauthorized level to the card unit 1015. There are 0 to 3 fraud levels (described above in the description of the configuration of the payout control device 1230).
Next, the process proceeds to step D340, where the generated information is saved in the night monitoring fraud level area, the night monitoring information set flag is set in step D341, and the process returns. By setting the night monitoring information set flag, it is not necessary to perform the same process twice after the power is turned on.

(Launch control process)
Next, the firing control process D49 in the timer interrupt process (payout) will be described with reference to FIG.
When this routine is started, a firing permission condition setting process is performed in step D351. This sets conditions for enabling the launch of a sphere, details of which will be described later (FIG. 222). Next, in step D352, it is determined whether or not the firing is permitted. The firing permission state is determined based on a later-described firing permission state flag (FIG. 222). If the firing permission state flag is set, it is determined that the state is in a firing permission state, and the process proceeds to step D354 to update the firing control timer by “−1”. Next, in step D355, it is determined whether or not the firing control timer is equal to or greater than an upper limit value (for example, 600 ms). If greater than or equal to the upper limit value, the firing control timer is cleared to 0 in step D356, and then the process proceeds to step D357. On the other hand, if the launch control timer is not greater than or equal to the upper limit value in step D355, the process jumps to step D357.
In step D357, the firing control timer determines whether it is the ball feed timing.

Here, in the launch control, the launch control is performed at intervals of one cycle of 600 ms (that is, the launch is limited to 100 shots per minute) at intervals of 600 ms. The operation timings of the feed solenoid 1172 and the firing solenoid 1173 are set as follows. The firing control timer counts a period of one cycle (600 ms) and is repeated every time the upper limit value (600 ms) is reached.
The ball feed solenoid 1172 is turned on for 100 ms from the starting point of one cycle (600 ms), and then the ball feed solenoid 1172 is turned off for 500 ms. In addition, when 300 ms elapses from the starting point of one cycle (600 ms), the firing solenoid 1173 is turned on for 200 ms. Therefore, the firing solenoid 1173 is turned off at a timing of 500 ms from the starting point in one cycle (600 ms). Therefore, in one cycle (600 ms), the on-operations of the ball feed solenoid 1172 and the firing solenoid 1173 are all completed by the timing of 500 ms from the starting point, and for the remaining 100 ms (100 ms before the end point). During the period, the ball feed solenoid 1172 and the firing solenoid 1173 are off.
Therefore, when the ball is in a firing stop state (at the end of one cycle), the launch solenoid 1173 does not stop immediately at this timing (at the end of one cycle), but only 100 ms before that. This is a setting for controlling the firing solenoid 1173 to be turned off at the timing.
Thus, the period of 100 ms before the end of one cycle is a period in which both the ball feeding solenoid 1172 and the firing solenoid 1173 are off, and this is neither firing nor feeding the ball. It becomes a state. This is to prevent the ball from passing through the fired ball detection switch 1160 and subtracting the number of balls held when the ball is fed in a period of 100 ms before the end of one cycle. is there.

In step D357, it is determined whether or not the launch control timer is at the ball feed timing. As described above, this is only 100 ms from the start point of one cycle (600 ms) in one cycle (600 ms) of launch control. Since the ball feed solenoid 1172 is set to be turned on, it is determined whether or not the timing (launch control timer is 1 ms to 100 ms).
If the firing control timer is not the ball feed timing in step D357, the process proceeds to step D358, the off data of the ball feed solenoid 1172 is set, and then the process proceeds to step D359. On the other hand, if the launch control timer is the ball feed timing in step D357, the process proceeds to step D360, the on data of the ball feed solenoid 1172 is set, and then the process proceeds to step D359.

In step D359, the firing control timer determines whether or not it is the firing on timing. As described above, when 300 ms elapses from the starting point of one cycle (600 ms), the firing solenoid 1173 is set to be turned on for 200 ms. 500 ms) is determined by the firing control timer.
If the firing control timer is not the firing timing in step D359, the process proceeds to step D361, where the off data of the firing solenoid 1173 is set, and then the process returns. On the other hand, if the firing control timer is the firing timing in step D359, the process proceeds to step D362, where the ON data of the firing solenoid 1173 is set, and then the process returns.
On the other hand, if the firing is not permitted in step D352, the process proceeds to step D533, where it is determined whether or not the firing control timer is “0”. If the firing control timer is not “0”, the process proceeds to step D354, and the processes after step D354 are executed as described above. If the firing control timer is “0” in step D533, the process branches to step D363 to set the off data of the ball feed solenoid 1172, and the off data of the firing solenoid 1173 is set in step D364, and then the process returns. .

[Launch permission condition setting process]
Next, the firing permission condition setting process D351 in the firing control process will be described with reference to FIG.
When this routine is started, it is determined in step D371 whether or not the card unit connection is OK. If OK, the process proceeds to step D372, and if not OK, the process proceeds to step D384. In step D371, the voltage of the input (VL input) connected to the power supply line of the card unit 1015 via the card unit connection terminal plate 1052 is turned on (that is, the voltage is higher than the specified value). For example, if the card unit connection confirmation flag indicating that the card unit 1015 is powered on and connected to the payout control device 1230 is set, it is determined that the card unit connection is OK.
If the process proceeds to step D384, since the card unit connection is not OK, the firing permission state flag is cleared and the routine is terminated. Therefore, at this time, the launch of the ball is not permitted.
On the other hand, if the card unit connection is OK in step D371, each condition from step D372 to step D382 is determined, and if all the conditions are satisfied, the firing permission state flag is set in step S383 and the routine Exit. Therefore, at this time, the launch of the sphere is permitted.

The conditions from Step D372 to Step D382 will be described. First, when proceeding to Step D372, it is determined whether or not a firing stop instruction has been received. If the firing stop instruction has been received, the process proceeds to step D384, where the firing permission state flag is cleared and the process returns.
On the other hand, if the firing stop instruction has not been received in step D372, the process proceeds to the determination processing in steps D373 to D382.
In the determination process of steps D373 to D382, if the determination result is affirmative in each determination, the process proceeds to step D384 without executing the subsequent determination process, and the determination result is negative in each determination of steps D373 to D382. The next determination process is sequentially executed, and when the determination result of the last step D382 is negative, the process proceeds to step D383.

  In step D373, whether the number of held balls is zero, in step D374, counting, in step D375, in settlement, in step D376, in rest, in step D377, in an insufficient number of encapsulated balls, or in step D378 Whether an encapsulated ball number excess error is occurring, an enclosing path abnormality error is occurring at step D379, a frame is being opened at step D380 (front frame 1004 is being opened), an illegal act is occurring at step D381, or the number of encapsulated balls is at step D382 Whether or not confirmation is in progress is determined.

Here, the determination as to whether the account is being settled is made by a settlement control process number described later. For example, when the settlement flag is set, it is determined that the settlement is in progress. If the settlement control process number is 0, it is determined that settlement is not in progress. Further, whether or not a break is occurring is determined by a break control process number described later. For example, when a break flag is set, it is determined that a break is in progress. If the break control process number is 0, it is determined that the break is not being performed.
Next, the determination whether the enclosing ball number shortage error is occurring is set in the above-mentioned step D214, and the determination whether the enclosing ball number excessive error is occurring is set in the above-mentioned steps D203 and D210. Whether the enclosing ball number excess error flag and the enclosing path abnormality error are occurring is determined based on the enclosing path abnormality error flag set in step D213 described above.

The determination of whether the frame is open (front frame 1004 is open) is based on the nighttime fraud flag set in step D334. In this determination, if the flag is set, it is determined that the frame is open, and if it is cleared, it is determined that the frame is not open.
In addition, for example, whether or not the illegal act is occurring is determined by the error monitoring process of the game control device 1054, and it is determined that the illegal action has occurred because the magnet command, the vibration is illegal, and the radio wave is illegal. Determined.
Whether the enclosing ball number is being checked is determined based on whether or not the enclosing ball number confirmation request flag is set.

In step D384, the emission permission state flag is cleared, and then the process returns. When the firing permission state flag is cleared, the firing control circuit 1236 is inhibited from operating the firing solenoid 1173, and the ball cannot be fired (launch non-permitted state). In this firing non-permitted state, even if there is a proper firing operation (the touch sensor 1174 is turned on and the firing volume 1171 is operated), the firing solenoid 1173 is not activated and the ball is not fired.
On the other hand, in step D383, after setting the firing permission state flag, the process returns. When the firing permission state flag is set, the firing control circuit 1236 is permitted to actuate the firing solenoid 1173, and the ball can be fired (launching permitted state).

  According to the above-described firing permission condition confirmation process, if the card unit connection confirmation is not OK because the card unit 1015 is not connected (or the card unit 1015 is not powered on) or the like, it is unconditionally fired. The permission state flag is cleared and the launch is not permitted. When the firing stop instruction has not been received, the conditions of steps D373 to D382 (the number of held balls is zero, the counting, the settlement, the rest, the error of any of the encapsulated balls is occurring, the front frame If any one of opening, fraudulent behavior, and confirmation of the number of encapsulated spheres is established, the launch permission state flag is cleared and the launch is not permitted. Further, even when a firing stop instruction is received, the firing permission state flag is cleared and the firing is not permitted.

[Polishing device control processing]
Next, the polishing apparatus control process D50 in the timer interrupt process (payout) will be described with reference to FIG.
When this routine is started, it is determined in step D401 whether or not the power-on polishing timer = 0. The power-on polishing timer is a timer that counts the polishing period because the encapsulated sphere is polished by operating the polishing apparatus 1306 for a certain period when the pachinko machine 1001 is turned on.
When the power is turned on, the polishing apparatus 1306 is initialized. In this initial setting, the upper switching solenoid 1336S is operated so that the upper switching valve 1336 opens the bypass passage 1304, and the lower switching valve 1310 is moved to the polishing inlet passage. The lower switching solenoid 1310S is operated so as to open 1319 (the enclosed ball flows into the polishing apparatus 1306).

If the polishing timer at power-on is not 0 in step D401, the process proceeds to step D402, where it is determined whether there is an input from the polishing inlet switch 1321. The polishing inlet switch 1321 detects the inflow of the sphere into the polishing apparatus 1306. In step D402, it is determined that there is an input at the rising edge of the detection signal. If there is an input of the polishing inlet switch 1321 in step D402, the number of polishing balls is updated by "+1" in step D403, and then the process proceeds to step D404. Since the number of polishing balls represents the total number of balls to be polished from now on, the count is incremented each time the balls pass through the polishing inlet switch 1321.
On the other hand, if there is no input of the polishing inlet switch 1321 in step D402, the process jumps to step D403 and proceeds to step D404.
Proceeding to step D404, it is determined whether or not there is an input from the feed inlet switch 1332. The feed inlet switch 1332 detects the inflow of the sphere into the feed device 1302, but in step D404, it is determined that there is an input at the rising edge of the detection signal. If there is an input of the feed inlet switch 1332 in step D404, the number of polishing balls is updated by "-1" in step D403, and then the process proceeds to step D406. Since the number of balls to be polished represents the total number of balls to be polished from now on, the number of balls that have been polished is decremented each time the balls pass through the feed inlet switch 1332.
On the other hand, if there is no input of the feed inlet switch 1332 in step D404, the process jumps to step D405 and proceeds to step D406.
If the power-on polishing timer = 0 in step D401, the process jumps to step D406.

In step D406, stop data of the polishing pad motor 1323 is set. As a result, the polishing pad motor 1323 is stopped. Next, in step D407, it is determined whether the polishing pad unit switch 1324 is in an ON state. The abrasive cloth unit switch 1324 detects the attachment of the abrasive cloth unit. If the abrasive cloth unit switch 1324 is not in the ON state, it is determined that the abrasive cloth unit is not attached to the polishing apparatus 1306, and the process jumps to Step D426. To do. The polishing cloth unit winds up the polishing member 1314 that polishes the encapsulated sphere, and the polishing member 1314 can be replaced by replacing the polishing cloth unit.
On the other hand, if the polishing pad unit switch 1324 is in the ON state in step D407, the process proceeds to step D408 to determine whether the power-on polishing timer = 0. If the power-on polishing timer is not 0, the power-on polishing timer is updated by “−1” in step D409. As a result, the power-on polishing timer is counted down. Next, at step D410, it is determined whether or not the polishing pad motor timer = 0. The polishing cloth motor timer is for counting the period during which the polishing cloth motor 1323 winds up the polishing member 1314.

If the polishing pad motor timer = 0 in step D410, the process jumps to step D415, and if not, the polishing pad motor timer is updated by “−1” in step D411. As a result, the polishing cloth motor timer is counted down.
In step D412, rotation data of the polishing pad motor is set. As a result, the polishing pad motor 1323 rotates. After step D412, the process proceeds to step D415.
On the other hand, if the power-on polishing timer = 0 in step D408, the process branches to step D413 to set the off data of the upper switching solenoid 1336S. As a result, the upper switching solenoid 1336S stops operating, and the upper switching valve 1336 closes the bypass passage 1304. Therefore, the sphere flowing down the upper passage 1303 does not flow into the bypass passage 1304 but is guided toward the launching device 1037 so that it can be fired. After step D413, the process proceeds to step D414.
In step D414, it is determined whether the number of polishing balls = 0. This is detected by the polishing inlet switch 1321, and it is determined whether or not the number of polishing balls representing the total number of balls to be polished by the polishing apparatus 1306 has become zero. It progresses to D415 and the process after step D415 is performed. If the number of polishing balls = 0, the process jumps to step D426.

In step D415, it is determined whether the polishing apparatus 1306 is operating. If the polishing apparatus 1306 is not in operation, the polishing apparatus in-operation flag is set in step D416, and the polishing motor monitoring timer is cleared to 0 in step D417, and then the process proceeds to step D418. The process in step D416 is performed only once when the polishing apparatus 1306 starts to move, and is an initial setting when the operation of the polishing apparatus 1306 is started. On the other hand, if the polishing apparatus 1306 is operating in step D415, the process jumps to step D418.
In step D418, rotation data of the polishing motor 1312 is set. As a result, the polishing motor 1312 rotates. In step D418, the rotation data of the polishing motor 1312 is set, but when there is an abnormality in the polishing motor 1312, the stop data is overwritten on the rotation data.

Next, in step D419, it is determined whether or not there is an input to the polishing motor switch 1322. The polishing motor switch 1322 detects the operation of the polishing motor 1312. If there is an input to the polishing motor switch 1322 in step D419, the polishing motor monitoring timer is cleared to 0 in step D420. The polishing motor monitoring timer is for monitoring an abnormality of the polishing motor 1312.
Next, in step D421, the lower switching solenoid 1310S is switched to the polishing side. This is to operate the lower switching solenoid 1310S so that the lower switching valve 1310 opens the polishing inlet passage 1319 (the enclosed ball flows into the polishing apparatus 1306). To switch to ". As a result, the polishing inlet passage 1319 is opened and the sphere in the lower passage 1301 flows into the polishing apparatus 1306 by gravity. As a result, the sphere that has flowed into the lower passage 1301 from the out passage 1331 or the bypass passage 1304 is guided by gravity to the polishing inlet passage 1319 and flows into the polishing apparatus 1306, where the sphere polishing is performed. However, in the state in which the off data of the upper switching solenoid 1336S is set in step D413, the sphere flowing down the upper passage 1303 does not flow into the bypass passage 1304, but is guided toward the launching device 1037 so that it can be fired. Therefore, it flows down the game area 1020 and flows into the lower passage 1301 from the out passage 1331, and is guided to the polishing inlet passage 1319 and flows into the polishing apparatus 1306.

After step D421, the process proceeds to step D422. On the other hand, if there is no input to the polishing motor switch 1322 in step D419, the process jumps to step D422. In step D422, the polishing motor monitoring timer is updated by “+1”. Thereby, the polishing motor monitoring timer is counted up. The polishing motor monitoring timer stops updating at a specified value described later.
Next, in step D423, it is determined whether or not the polishing motor monitoring timer is equal to or greater than a specified value (reference value for determining abnormality of the polishing motor 1312). If the polishing motor monitoring timer is not greater than the specified value, the polishing apparatus control process is terminated and the process returns. As a result, the polishing of the encapsulated sphere is continued.
On the other hand, if the polishing motor monitoring timer is greater than or equal to the specified value in step D423, it is determined that an abnormality has occurred in the polishing apparatus 1306 (eg, clogged balls), and the process proceeds to step D424 to set the stop data for the polishing motor 1312. . As a result, the rotation of the polishing motor 1312 stops. Even if a time longer than the specified value has elapsed since the start of rotation of the polishing motor 1312, if there is no input to the polishing motor switch 1322, it is determined that there is an abnormality such as a ball clogging and the polishing motor 1312 is stopped. .
Next, in step D425, the lower switching solenoid 1310S is switched to the non-polishing side. This is to operate the lower switching solenoid 1310S so that the lower switching valve 1310 closes the polishing inlet passage 1319 (blocks the enclosing ball from flowing into the polishing apparatus 1306). 1310S is switched to the non-polishing side ". As a result, the polishing inlet passage 1319 is closed, and the balls in the lower passage 1301 do not flow into the polishing apparatus 1306, and the ball polishing ends. After step D425, the polishing apparatus control process is terminated and the process returns.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in step D407 that the polishing pad unit switch 1324 is not in the on state and the process jumps to step D426, or in step D414 that the number of polishing balls is determined to be 0 and the process jumps to step D426, the process proceeds to step D426. To clear the polishing device operating flag. Next, the process proceeds to step D424, the stop data of the polishing motor 1312 is set, and after the lower switching solenoid 1310S is switched to the non-polishing side in step D425, the polishing apparatus control process is terminated and the process returns. Therefore, when the polishing cloth unit is not attached to the polishing apparatus 1306 (the polishing cloth unit switch 1324 is in an OFF state) or when the number of polishing balls becomes zero, the polishing motor 1312 is stopped and the enclosing balls are put into the polishing apparatus 1306. No longer flows.

[Feeding device control processing]
Next, the feeding device control process D51 in the timer interruption process (payout) will be described with reference to FIG.
When this routine is started, it is determined in step D431 whether or not there is an input from the feed inlet switch 1332. The feed inlet switch 1332 detects the inflow of the sphere into the feed device 1302, and in step D431, it is determined that there is an input at the rising edge of the detection signal. If there is an input from the feeding inlet switch 1332 in step D431, the number of feeding balls is updated by “+1” in step D432, and the process proceeds to step D433. Since the number of balls to be transported represents the total number of balls to be transported from now on, the count is incremented each time the balls pass through the material transport switch 1332.
On the other hand, if there is no input of the feed inlet switch 1332 in step D432, the process jumps to step D432 and proceeds to step D433.
Proceeding to step D433, it is determined whether or not the feed inlet switch 1332 has been on for a predetermined time. Here, the continuation of the ON state is determined based on the level of the detection signal at the feed inlet switch 1332. For example, if a ball stays at the feed inlet switch 1332, there is a possibility that the ball is clogged. Therefore, if the on / off state of the feed inlet switch 1332 continues for a predetermined time, it is determined that there is an abnormality (for example, clogged balls, etc.), and the process branches to step D447. When branched to step D447, as will be described later, stop data for the feed motor 1333 is finally set (step D446), and the feed motor 1333 is stopped.

On the other hand, if the on state of the feed inlet switch 1332 does not continue for a predetermined time in step D433, the process proceeds to step D434, and it is determined whether there is an input of the feed outlet switch 1334. The feed outlet switch 1334 detects the outflow of the ball from the feed device 1302, but in step D434, it is determined that there is an input at the rising edge of the detection signal. If there is an input from the feed outlet switch 1334 in step D434, the number of feed balls is updated by "-1" in step D435, and the process proceeds to step D436. Since the number of balls to be transported represents the total number of balls to be transported from now on, the count of the balls that have been transported is decremented each time the balls pass through the transport outlet switch 1334.
On the other hand, if there is no input of the feed outlet switch 1334 in step D434, the process jumps to step D435 and proceeds to step D436.

  Proceeding to step D436, it is determined whether or not the feed outlet switch 1334 remains on for a predetermined time. Here, the continuation of the ON state is determined based on the level of the detection signal at the feed outlet switch 1334. For example, if a ball remains at the feed outlet switch 1334, there is a possibility that the ball is clogged. Therefore, if the feed outlet switch 1334 remains on for a predetermined time, it is determined that there is an abnormality (for example, a clogged ball, etc.), and the process branches to step D447. When branched to step D447, as will be described later, stop data for the feed motor 1333 is finally set (step D446), and the feed motor 1333 is stopped.

On the other hand, if the ON state of the feed outlet switch 1334 has not continued for a predetermined time in step D436, the process proceeds to step D437, and it is determined whether or not the number of fed balls is zero. This is to determine whether or not the number of reed balls detected by the reed inlet switch 1332 and indicating the total number of balls to be relocated by the reed device 1302 has disappeared. For example, the process proceeds to step D438, and the processes after step D438 are executed. If the number of thrown balls = 0, the process jumps to step D447. When branching to step D447, the feed motor 1333 is finally stopped.
In step D438, it is determined whether the feeding device 1302 is operating. If the feeding device 1302 is not in operation, the feeding device operating flag is set in step D439, and the feeding motor monitoring timer is cleared to 0 in step D440, and then the process proceeds to step D441. The process of step D439 is performed only once when the feeding device 1302 starts to move, and is an initial setting at the start of operation of the feeding device 1302. On the other hand, if the feeding device 1302 is operating in step D438, the process jumps to step D441.
In step D441, rotation data of the feed motor 1333 is set. As a result, the feed motor 1333 rotates. In step D441, the rotation data of the feed motor 1333 is set, but when the feed motor 1333 is abnormal, the stop data is overwritten on the rotation data.

Next, in step D442, it is determined whether or not there is an input to the feed motor switch 1335. The feed motor switch 1335 detects the operation of the feed motor 1333. If there is an input to the feed motor switch 1335 in step D442, the feed motor monitoring timer is cleared to 0 in step D443. The feed motor monitoring timer is for monitoring an abnormality of the feed motor 1333.
Next, in step D444, the feed motor monitoring timer is updated by “+1”. Thereby, the feed motor monitoring timer is counted up. The feed motor monitoring timer stops updating at a specified value described later.
Next, in step D445, it is determined whether or not the feed motor monitoring timer is equal to or greater than a specified value (a reference value for judging abnormality of the feed motor 1333). If the feed motor monitoring timer is not greater than the specified value, the feed device control process is terminated and the process returns. As a result, the encapsulated ball is continuously fed.

  On the other hand, if the feed motor monitoring timer is equal to or greater than the specified value in step D445, it is determined that an abnormality has occurred in the feed device 1302 (for example, a clogged ball, etc.), and the process proceeds to step D446 to stop data for the feed motor 1333. Set. As a result, the rotation of the feed motor 1333 is stopped. This is because if there is no input to the feed motor switch 1335 even if a time longer than the specified value has elapsed since the start of rotation of the feed motor 1333, it is determined that there is an abnormality such as a ball clogging and the feed motor 1333 is stopped. Is. After step D446, the feeding device control process is terminated and the process returns.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step D433 that the feed-in entrance switch 1332 is on for a predetermined time, and in step D436, it is determined that the on-off switch 1334 is on for a predetermined time, step D437. When it is determined that the number of transported balls is 0, in any case, the process jumps to step D447, clears the transporting device operating flag in step D447, and then proceeds to step D446 to obtain stop data of the transport motor 1333. Set.
Therefore, when the feed-in switch 1332 remains on for a predetermined time, when the feed-out switch 1334 remains on for a predetermined time, or when the number of reeds is 0, in any case The rotation of the feeding motor 1333 stops and the enclosing ball does not flow into the feeding device 1302.

[Number of balls management processing]
Next, the number-of-balls management process D52 in the timer interruption process (payout) will be described with reference to FIG.
When this routine is started, it is determined in step D451 whether or not a prize ball addition stop flag is set. If the prize ball addition stop flag is not set, the process proceeds to step D452, and if the prize ball addition stop flag is set, the process jumps to step D462. In step D452, the top address of the winning area is set. The winning number area is configured so that a plurality of winning numbers can be stored, so that the area can be divided by address. Address for storing the number of winning balls corresponding to the number of winning balls acquired in this way) in the winning number area is sequentially set from the top.
Next, at step D453, it is determined whether or not the value of the winning number area is “0”. If it is not “0”, the value of the winning ball number area corresponding to the winning number area is loaded at step D454.

Here, the number of winning balls associated with winning is as follows, and how much the winning opening (the number of winning) is sent from the game control device 1054 as a winning ball command, so in step D454 The process reads out the number of winning balls corresponding to the type of winning opening.
・ First big prize opening 1027a = 13 ・ Second big prize opening 1034a = 10 ・ Starting prize opening 1025 = 3 ・ Starting prize opening 1026 (general power) = 1 piece ・ General winning prize openings 1028 to 1031 = 10 pieces Note that the processing in step D454 is performed when the number of balls held is not updated at once (see step D455 described later) when there are a plurality of winnings, but the number of balls held increases in units of winning. This is to display the number of balls held. In this way, the number of balls held per winning unit increases, so there is an advantage that it is easy to understand for gaming machines.
Next, the process proceeds to step D455, where the value loaded in step D454 (current winning ball number) is added to the number of balls held to obtain a new number of balls, and in step D456, the ball number display light counter is updated by "+1". . Next, in step D457, the number of winning balls is saved in the display updated holding ball number storage area corresponding to the light counter. This is because the change in the number of balls needs to be displayed on the number-of-balls display 1040 when there is a prize ball associated with winning, so the value of the number-of-balls display light counter is updated (incremented) by “+1”. ), The number of prize balls for winning is stored in the display updated number-of-balls storage area corresponding to the advanced light counter, and the stored number of prize balls is added to the number of balls for display for display. This is the number of updated balls.
That is, the amount of change for displaying the number of balls to be displayed on the number-of-balls display 1040 for each change event is stored in the display updated number of balls to be stored. For example, the number of possessed balls increases accordingly, so that the number of winning balls is stored in the display updated possessed ball number storage area. As a result, the number of prize balls is added to the number of balls held, and the display of the ball holding number display 1040 is updated.

It should be noted that the display updated number-of-balls storage area is configured by a multi-byte area like a command reception buffer, and the number of balls held is increased or decreased in the order of writing. That is, data (number of winning balls) to be added to the number of holding balls for display on the holding ball number display 1040 is stored in the ring buffer format area in order of winning. The size of the storage area in the ring buffer format is set to a size corresponding to the maximum number of prize balls per unit time (for example, the number of prize balls per unit time in the big hit round). For example, the size is set to about 32 bytes.
Next, the process proceeds to step D458, where it is determined whether the number of balls updated in step D455 is equal to or greater than the upper limit value (for example, 250,000), and if it is equal to or greater than the upper limit value, it is determined in step D459. The number of balls upper limit (250,000) is updated and registered as a new number of balls, and the process proceeds to step D460. If it is not equal to or greater than the number of balls held, the process proceeds to step D460 without executing step D459.

Proceeding to step D460, the address of the winning number area is updated to the next area. Thus, preparation for reading the value of the next winning number area is completed. Next, in step D461, it is determined whether or not all the winning number areas have been checked. If all the winning number areas have not been checked in step D461, the process returns to step D453 to repeat the loop. In this way, the next winning number out of the plurality of winning numbers is read from the winning number area and stored in the winning ball number area corresponding to the winning number specified by the next address (updated address). The value is loaded and added to the number of balls held. By repeating such a loop, the check of all areas of the winning number area is completed, and the value stored in the winning ball number area corresponding to all the winning numbers is loaded to the number of balls held. Will be added.
On the other hand, if the value of the winning number area is “0” in step D453, there is no value to be added to the number of balls held, so the process jumps to step D460 to update the address of the winning number area to the next area. Thereafter, the process of step D461 is performed.
Then, when it is determined in step D461 that all the winning number areas have been checked, the process goes to step D462 to perform a count switch monitoring process, and in a subsequent step D463, a count ball use monitoring process is performed. These steps D462 and D463 perform processing for monitoring the counting switch 1311 and monitoring the use of the counting ball, and will be described in detail later.

Next, in step D464, data corresponding to the number of held balls is saved in the test signal output data area, and in step D465, data corresponding to the counted number of balls is saved in the test signal output data area, and the number of held balls management process is completed. To do.
According to the number-of-balls management process, the number of balls and the number of display balls increase by the number of prize balls as long as the number of balls does not exceed the upper limit of the number of balls by the processing of steps D455 to D458. . The number of balls for display is data in a storage area of the RAM 1233 for storing the number of balls to be displayed on the ball number display 1040.

[Counting switch monitoring process]
Next, the count switch monitoring process D462 in the number-of-balls management process will be described with reference to FIG.
When this routine is started, it is first determined in step D471 whether or not the counting switch 1311 is on. If the counting switch 1311 is on, it is determined that the player intends to count the number of balls held by pressing the counting switch 1311, and the process proceeds to step D472, where an initial value (for example, 2 seconds) is set to the counting stop timer during counting. Set. This is to set the firing stop period in order to stop the launch of the ball while counting the number of balls.
In addition, during the launch of the ball, for example, it is assumed that the launch control by the payout control device 1230 and the touch sensor 1174 are turned on.

Next, in step D473, the count switch-on timer is updated (incremented) by “+1”, and in step D474, it is determined whether the count switch-on timer is greater than or equal to the upper limit value. The count switch-on timer counts the elapsed time from when the player presses the count switch 1311.
The upper limit value in step D474 corresponds to a time during which all the number of balls can be counted, and is set to 6 seconds, for example. If the count switch-on timer is greater than or equal to the upper limit value in step D474, the process proceeds to step D475 and the count switch-on timer is kept at the upper limit value. This means that if the counting switch-on timer is set to a value larger than the time value (for example, 6 seconds) at which the total number of balls can be counted, the upper limit value is kept so that the timer does not loop. It is.
After step D475, the process proceeds to step D476. On the other hand, if the count switch-on timer is less than the upper limit value in step D474, the process jumps to step D475 and proceeds to step D476.

In step D476, it is determined whether or not the count switch-on timer is equal to 1 second. If the count switch-on timer is equal to 1 second, the process proceeds to step D477. Step D476 is a determination for setting the number of units of counting in the processing after step D477 when the count switch-on timer is 1 second. The time of counting switch-on timer = 1 second corresponds to the minimum time for counting the number of balls held by pressing the counting switch 1311. Therefore, the operation of the counting switch 1311 in a time shorter than 1 second is invalid, and the counting of the number of balls is not started. Since less than 1 second may cause the player to touch the counting switch 1311 by mistake, it is invalidated to prevent malfunction.
If it is determined in step D476 that the count switch-on timer is not 1 second, this time jumps to step D480 without setting the number of units for counting. On the other hand, if the count switch-on timer is 1 second, the process proceeds to step D477 to set the number of units for counting.

In the processing after step D477, the number of units for counting is determined as follows. The unit number of counting is a numerical value (hereinafter referred to as a unit count value) indicating how many balls are counted in units of one second, for example.
Proceeding to step D477, it is determined whether or not the number of balls is “1000” or less. If the number of balls is “1000” or less, the process branches to step D491 to set “50” as the unit count value, and then proceeds to step D480. On the other hand, if the number of held balls exceeds “1000” in step D477, the process proceeds to step D478 to determine whether the number of held balls is “10000” or less. If the number of held balls is equal to or less than “10000”, the process branches to step D492 to set “100” as the unit count value, and then proceeds to step D480.
On the other hand, if the number of held balls exceeds “10000” in step D478, “1000” is set as the unit count value in step D479, and the process proceeds to step D480.
Next, in the case of proceeding to Step D480, it is determined whether or not the number of possessed balls is “0”. If it is not “0”, the process proceeds to Step D481 and the subsequent steps to count the number of retained balls. If the number of balls held is “0” in step D480, the process returns (no counting is performed).

When the processing proceeds to step D481 and subsequent steps, it is first determined in step D481 whether or not the count switch-on timer has a timing value for performing unit counting.
The value of the timing for performing the unit counting is that the operation of the counting switch 1311 is invalidated because the operation of the counting switch 1311 is invalidated when the minimum time for counting the number of balls held by pressing the counting switch 1311 is less than 1 second. It is a time of 1 second or more and a timing with 0.5 second as a unit break after 1 second. Specifically, the timing corresponds to a timer value indicating 1.0 seconds, 1.5 seconds, 2.0 seconds, 2.5 seconds,.
Therefore, the processing of step D481 is performed at the timing of 0.5 sec as a unit break, that is, 1.0 sec, 1.5 sec, 2.0 sec, 2.5 sec,. Value of timing for performing unit counting).

Here, the number of units of counting described above will be described. Since the counting method of the number of balls in Example 15 is the same as that of FIG. 87 described above, it will be described with reference to FIG.
In the fifteenth embodiment, as shown in FIG. 87, “pressing time” indicates the operation time (pressing time) of the counting switch 1311, and how the count is calculated with respect to the range of the “pressing time” and the number of balls held. FIG. 87 shows how this is done.
Specifically, it is as follows. The following unit count value corresponds to “count unit”.
・ Pressing time of the counting switch 1311 = less than 1 second: invalid regardless of the range of the number of balls held: 1.0 second:
(A) Counting 50 balls when the number of balls is 1000 or less (meaning unit count value = 50, the same applies hereinafter)
(B) Counting 100 balls from 1001 to 10,000 balls. (C) Counting 1000 balls from 10001 balls. After that, every 0.5 seconds:
(B) Count 50 balls when the number of balls is 1000 or less. (B) Count 100 balls when the number of balls is between 1001 and 10,000. (C) Count 1000 when the number is 10001 or more. .0 seconds:
(B) Count all balls with 1,000 or less balls (b) Count all balls with 1001 to 10,000 balls (c) Count all balls with 10001 balls or more

  As described above, in the fifteenth embodiment, the time of unit counting is determined by dividing the pressing time of the counting switch 1311 every 0.5 seconds. As described above, the operation of the counting switch 1311 is invalidated for less than 1 second to prevent the counting switch 1311 from malfunctioning. Regardless of how many balls are held, the count time of the count switch 1311 is all counted for 6.0 seconds.

Now, returning to the flow, if the count switch-on timer is the value at which the unit count is performed in step D481, it is determined that the number of balls possessed by the operation of the count switch 1311 is determined, and the process proceeds to the subsequent step D482, where It is determined whether the number is less than the unit count value. If the number of held balls is less than the unit count value, the number of held balls at that time is replaced with the unit count value in step D483. This is to simplify the counting process by replacing the remaining number of balls at that time with the unit count value when the number of balls remaining is less than the unit count value.
After step D483, the process proceeds to step D484. On the other hand, if the number of possessed balls is not less than the unit count value in step D482, the process jumps to step D483 and proceeds to step D484.

In step D484, “counting ball number + unit count value” is set as the counting ball number, and this is stored in the RAM 1233 of the payout control device 1230. In this way, the counting ball number is updated when the counting switch 1311 is operated.
Next, in step D485, “number of balls held−unit count value” is set as the number of balls held this time, and this is stored in the RAM 1233 of the payout controller 1230. In this way, the number of balls held when the counting switch 1311 is operated is updated.
In this way, in this example, both the number of held balls and the number of counted balls are managed by the payout control device 1230 (the card unit 1015 is simply transmitted with data of the number of held balls and the number of counted balls. Only to let you know).
Next, the process proceeds to step D486, and the number of possessed balls display light counter is updated by “+1”. Next, in step D487, the "-unit count value" is saved in the display updated possession ball number storage area corresponding to the light counter, and then the process returns. This is because, when there is subtraction of the number of balls that accompanies the count, it is necessary to display the change in the number of balls in the number-of-balls display 1040. Update (increment) and advance, store the updated number of possessed balls for display corresponding to the advanced light counter, store the subtracted number of the number of balls with the count (in this case, the unit count value), and store the stored unit count value This is subtracted from the number of holding balls for display to obtain the updated number of holding balls for display.
In this case, the amount of change for displaying the number of balls for display on the number-of-balls display 1040 for each change event is stored in the display updated number of balls to be stored. Therefore, the number of balls held is subtracted by that amount, and the subtraction number (here, the unit count value) is stored in the display updated ball number storage area. As a result, the number of balls held is subtracted by the unit count value, and the display on the ball holding number display 1040 is updated.
That is, each time the number of balls is counted, it is subtracted from the unit count value and stored as the number of balls for display in the storage area of the RAM 1233 for storing the number of balls held, and for display stored in the storage area of the RAM 1233 Based on the number of balls (data), the number of balls after counting is displayed on the ball number display 1040.

Next, a description will be given of a case where the determination at each step branches to a route different from that described above.
If the count switch 1311 is not on in step D471, it is determined that the player has not pressed the count switch 1311 or has pressed the count switch 1311 but released for a moment, and the process branches to step D488. If it is not “0”, the timer is updated (decremented) by “−1”.
This is when the player has not pressed the counting switch 1311 at all. Since the process returns after steps D489 and D490 described later, counting of the number of balls is not started, but if the player intends to start counting the number of balls by pressing the count switch 1311, Since a grace period (for example, 2 seconds) is provided so that the counting of the number of balls can be continued even for a moment when the counting switch 1311 is turned off, counting is performed to count the grace period. The medium firing stop timer is updated (decremented) by “−1”.
On the other hand, if the firing stop timer during counting is “0”, it is determined that the player has not pressed the counting switch 1311.

After step D488, it is determined in subsequent step D489 whether or not the counting stop timer is “0”. If the firing stop timer is not “0” during counting, the process returns and the routine is repeated. As described above, when the player intends to start counting the number of balls held by pressing the count switch 1311, even if the count switch 1311 is turned off for a moment during counting, the count switch 1311 is held. Although a grace period is provided so that the counting of the number of balls can be continued, NO in step D489 is a case where the grace period is counted.
On the other hand, if the counting stop timer is “0” in step D489, the process proceeds to step D490, the count switch-on timer is cleared to “0”, and the process returns. In this case, the player has not pressed the counting switch 1311 at all, and the counting of the number of balls is not started.

  Next, when it is determined in step D481 that the count switch-on timer is not the timing value for performing the unit count, the process branches to step D493, where it is determined whether the count switch-on timer is the timing value for performing the total count. judge. As shown in FIG. 87, the timing of total counting is that when the pressing time of the counting switch 1311 is 6.0 seconds, all the balls are counted regardless of the number of balls. Therefore, the timing (that is, 6.0 seconds). Therefore, if it is not the value of the timing when the pressing time of the counting switch 1311 becomes 6.0 seconds in step D493, the routine ends and returns, and the timing when the pressing time of the counting switch 1311 becomes 6.0 seconds. If it is a value, the process proceeds to step D494, where “counted ball number + number of held balls” is set as the counted ball number and stored in the RAM 1233 of the payout control device 1230.

If it is a case where the total number of held balls is counted and the game is to be finished and settled, the counting switch 1311 is pressed to count the number of held balls to obtain the counted number of balls, and then the operation display device 1007 By touching the return button 304 (similar to the first example) on the screen of the message / operation area 306 (same as the first example), all of the number of possessed balls (here, all the counted number of balls) are recorded. The game card is discharged from the card unit 1015. Accordingly, since this time corresponds to the time of payment, the payout control device 1230 transmits data of the total number of balls (number of balls held + number of balls counted) to the card unit 1015 at the time of payment.
Therefore, when performing the total counting of the number of balls, it is determined in step D493 that the count switch-on timer has a timing value for performing the total counting, and the process proceeds to the following step D494. “Number of balls + number of balls held” is set as the number of balls counted and stored in the RAM 1233 of the payout control device 1230. After the number of held balls is cleared to “0” in step D495, the process returns.
By the processing from step D493 to step D495, all the number of balls held is counted and saved in the counting ball number area, and thereafter, the number of balls held is cleared to “0”.

[Counting ball use monitoring process]
Next, the counting ball use monitoring process D463 in the held ball number management process will be described with reference to FIG.
When this routine is started, it is first determined in step D501 whether a counting ball use command has been received. The counting ball use command is sent from the card unit 1015 to the payout control device 1230. When the counting ball use switch arranged on the operation display device 1007 is operated, the number of counting balls can be obtained by one operation. This is a request command for moving a predetermined amount (for example, 100 balls) of balls to the number of possessed balls. Therefore, in step D501, the counting ball use switch is pressed, and it is determined whether or not the player has requested the movement of the ball from the counting ball number to the number of possessed balls and whether or not the counting ball use command has been received.
If the counting ball use command has not been received in step D501, the counting ball use monitoring process is terminated and the process returns.
On the other hand, if the counting ball use command has been received in step D501, the process proceeds to step D502, and the counting ball use command received flag is cleared.
Next, in step D503, it is determined whether or not the counted ball number is “0”. If “NO” in the determination in step D503, since the counted ball number is “0”, it is determined that the movement to the number of held balls cannot be performed, and the routine is ended and the process returns.

If the determination in step D503 is YES, it is determined that there is a counting ball and it is possible to move to the number of holding balls, the process proceeds to step D504, and whether or not the counting ball number is “100” or more. Determine. If the number of counting balls is “100” or more, “100” (that is, 100 counting balls) out of the number of counting balls is set as the number of counting balls used in step D505. As a result, 100 balls out of the number of counted balls move to the number of possessed balls. After step D505, the process proceeds to step D506.
On the other hand, when the counting ball number is less than “100” in step D504, the process branches to step D512, and all the counting ball numbers are set as the counting ball use number. As a result, all the counted balls move to the number of balls held.
This is because when a counting ball use switch is operated once, a predetermined amount (for example, 100) of balls is moved from the counting ball number to the number of holding balls. This is because it can be moved to the number of balls held.
After step D512, the process proceeds to step D506.

In the case of proceeding from step D505 to step D506 or proceeding from step D512 to step D506, in step D506, the sum of the “number of balls held + the number of counting balls used” is the upper limit value of the number of balls held by design (for example, 250,000) ) Is exceeded, and if it exceeds the upper limit value of the number of balls, in step D507, “the upper limit value of the number of balls—the number of balls” is updated and registered as a new count ball use number. Proceed to D508. In practice, it is considered that the number of balls held + the number of counting balls used does not exceed the upper limit of the number of balls (for example, 250,000). This is to prevent the number from disappearing.
On the other hand, if the sum of “the number of balls held + the number of counting balls used” is less than the designed upper limit value (for example, 250,000) in step D506, the process jumps to step D508.

When the process proceeds from step D506 or step D507 to step D508, “number of balls held + number of counting balls used” is updated as a new number of balls in step D508, and “number of counting balls−counting balls used” is subsequently updated in step D509. "Number" is updated as a new number of counting balls. This is because the ball is moved from the counting ball number to the holding ball number by operating the counting ball use switch, so that the values of the holding ball number and the counting ball number are updated in accordance with the situation.
After step D509, the ball number display light counter is updated by "+1" in step D510. Next, after the “counting ball use number” is saved in the display updated ball number storage area corresponding to the light counter in step D511, the process returns. This is because the change in the number of balls needs to be displayed on the number-of-balls display 1040 when there is an addition of the number of balls due to the operation of the counting ball use switch. Is updated (incremented) by "+1", and the updated number of balls to be stored corresponding to the advanced light counter is added to the number of balls held by the operation of the counting ball use switch (here, the number of counting balls used) ) And the stored number of used counting balls is added to the number of holding balls for display to obtain the updated number of holding balls for display.
In this case, the amount of change for displaying the number of balls for display on the number-of-balls display 1040 for each change event is stored in the display updated ball number storage area. If the number of possessed balls is added, the number of possessed balls increases by that amount, and the added number (the number of counted balls used here) is stored in the display updated possessed ball number storage area. As a result, the number of balls held is added by the number of balls used, and the display on the ball holding number display 1040 is updated.

According to the counting ball use monitoring process, when the counting ball use switch is operated once, a predetermined amount (for example, 100 balls) moves from the counting ball number to the holding ball number. Further, if the number of counted balls is less than a predetermined amount (for example, 100), all the counted balls move to the number of possessed balls.
Therefore, the player can taste the game sensation of the concept of moving the ball from the ball box to the upper plate as well as increasing the number of balls that can be fired by returning from the counted ball number to the number of balls held. is there.

[Ball removal control processing]
Next, the ball removal control process D53 in the timer interruption process will be described with reference to FIG.
When this routine is started, it is determined in step D521 whether or not the ball removal control timer is “0”. The ball removal control timer is for counting the time for removing the ball of the encapsulated ball. If the ball removal control timer is “0”, the process proceeds to step D522 to determine whether or not there is a ball removal request. The ball removal request is issued when the ball removal switch 1183 is turned on or when an error occurs such that an abnormal ball (for example, a wrong magnetic ball or a wrong small-diameter ball) is detected as an enclosed ball.
If there is a ball removal request, the ball removal request flag is cleared in step D523, and the initial value of the ball removal control timer is set in subsequent step D524. The initial value here is set to the time required to remove the encapsulated sphere.
Next, on output data of the ball removal solenoid 1344S is set in step D525, and on output data of the upper switching solenoid 1336S is set in step D526, and the process returns.

By the processing of step D525, the ball removal solenoid 1344S is turned on, the end of the bypass passage 1304 is opened by the ball removal valve 1344, and the ball in the bypass passage 1304 flows into the ball removal passage 1305 and is collected in the collection box 1345. It will be. Further, by the processing of step D526, the upper switching solenoid 1336S is turned on, and the upper switching valve 1336 opens the end portion of the upper passage 1303 (the communication portion with the bypass passage 1304) so that the ball in the upper passage 1303 can be removed from the bypass passage 1304. It will be allowed to flow into.
Therefore, the sphere of the upper passage 1303 is guided to the bypass passage 1304, passes through the bypass passage 1304, flows into the sphere removal passage 1305, and is finally collected in the collection box 1345 (ie, the sphere of the enclosed sphere). Is removed).
When the ball removal of the encapsulated ball is performed as described above, if the determination in step D521 is NO (that is, if the ball removal control timer is not “0”), the process branches to step D527 and the ball removal control is performed. The timer is updated by “−1”. Thereby, the ball removal control timer is counted down. Next, in step D528, it is determined whether or not the ball removal control timer is “0”. If the ball removal control timer is not “0”, the routine is terminated and the ball removal control process is repeated.

By repeating the ball removal control process, when the ball removal control timer becomes “0” in step D528, the process proceeds to step D529, where the off output data of the ball removal solenoid 1344S is set, and in step D530, the upper switching solenoid 1336S is turned off. Set the output data and return.
As a result of the processing in step D529, the ball removal solenoid 1344S is turned off and the end of the bypass passage 1304 is closed by the ball removal valve 1344 so that the balls in the bypass passage 1304 do not flow into the ball removal passage 1305. The inflow of the sphere will be blocked. Further, by the process of step D530, the upper switching solenoid 1336S is turned off, the upper switching valve 1336 closes the end portion of the upper passage 1303 (the communication portion with the bypass passage 1304), and the ball in the upper passage 1303 becomes the bypass passage 1304. It will not flow into. Thereby, the ball removal of the encapsulated sphere is completed.
On the other hand, if there is no ball removal request in step D522, the process jumps from step D522 to step D529, sequentially executes the processes of step D529 and step D530, and returns. Therefore, in this case, the encapsulated sphere is not removed.

[Settlement control processing]
Next, the settlement control process D54 in the timer interrupt process will be described with reference to FIG.
When this routine is started, branching is performed based on the adjustment control process number in step D541. In this case, if the settlement control process number is 0, the settlement start monitoring process (details will be described later) in step D542, and if the settlement control process number is 1, the settlement write completion monitoring process (details will be described later) in step D543. If the control process number is 2, a payment completion monitoring process (details will be described later) is executed in step D544, and then the process returns. The initial value of the settlement control process number is set to 0, for example, in step D9 of the main process.
The settlement control process number may be 0, 1, 2,..., But may be 1, 2, 3,..., And if this is done, when the area of the RAM 1233 is cleared The process of setting 0 as the initial value can be omitted.

[Checkout start monitoring process]
Next, the settlement start monitoring process D542 in the settlement control process will be described with reference to FIG.
When this routine is started, it is first determined in step D551 whether or not a settlement start flag is set. The settlement start flag is set when a “settlement start request” command is received from the card unit 1015. If the settlement start flag is not set in step D551, the settlement start monitoring process is terminated and the process returns.
On the other hand, if the settlement start flag is set in step D551, the process proceeds to step D552, and the settlement start flag is cleared. The clearing start flag is cleared because the settlement starts because the settlement start flag is set. In order to prepare for the next settlement, the settlement start flag is cleared. Next, in the step D553, a settlement in progress flag is set.

Next, in step D554, “the number of held balls + the number of counted balls” is set as the number of holding balls. The number of balls held for display here is the total number of balls held by the player. This is to count all the number of possessed balls and the number of counted balls that the player has acquired to make the number of possessed balls for display. This is because of the settlement. That is, when the return button 304 is pressed to request the return of the game card, it is necessary to automatically perform payment. This is because the number of balls for display is transmitted to the card unit 1015.
The reason why “the number of balls held + the number of balls counted” is used as the number of balls for display is that the number of balls for display is displayed on the number-of-balls display 1040 until the settlement is completed. The number of balls for display is stored in a storage area of the RAM 1233 for storing the number of balls to be displayed on the ball number display 1040.

  Next, in step D555, a timer initial value (for example, 2 seconds) of the settlement writing completion monitoring timer is set. The settlement writing completion monitoring timer is a timer for setting a timeout in the response from the card unit 1015. Next, in step D556, the settlement write completion monitoring process number is set in the settlement control process number, and then the process returns. Therefore, in the settlement control process, the next time, the routine proceeds to the settlement write completion monitoring process routine.

[Checkout completion monitoring process]
Next, the settlement write completion monitoring process D543 in the settlement control process will be described with reference to FIG.
When this routine is started, first, the settlement write completion monitoring timer is updated (decremented) by “−1” in step D561, and it is determined whether or not the timer has become “0” in step D562. If the settlement write completion monitoring timer is not “0”, the process proceeds to step D563 to determine whether settlement settlement completion is received from the card unit 1015. The receipt of the payment writing completion is determined by whether or not a payment writing completion command is received from the card unit 1015, for example. If payment completion is not received from the card unit 1015, the process returns and the routine is repeated.
If it is determined in step D563 that the completion of payment writing has been received from the card unit 1015, the process goes to step D564 to clear the number of held balls to “0” and to clear the counted number of balls to “0” in step D565. This is because the card unit 1015 side completes the payment writing (that is, records all the total number of balls (the number of balls held and the number of balls counted) in the game card), and the record is held in the game card. This is because the number of held balls and the number of counted balls may be cleared to “0”.
Next, in step D566, the settlement completion monitoring process number is set in the settlement control process number, and the process returns. Therefore, in the settlement control process, the next time, the routine proceeds to the settlement completion monitoring process routine.

  On the other hand, if the settlement write completion monitoring timer is “0” in step D562, the settlement write completion cannot be received from the card unit 1015 within the predetermined time counted by the settlement write completion monitoring timer. Therefore, the process branches to step D567 and the settlement write failure flag is set. Next, in the step D568, the settlement in progress flag is cleared. Next, in step D569, the settlement start monitoring process number is set in the settlement control process number, and the process returns. Therefore, in the settlement control process, the next time, the routine proceeds to the settlement start monitoring process routine.

[Checkout completion monitoring process]
Next, the settlement completion monitoring process D544 in the settlement control process will be described with reference to FIG.
When this routine is started, it is first determined in step D571 whether a settlement end flag is set. The settlement end flag is set when a “settlement end request” command is received from the card unit 1015. If the settlement end flag is not set in step D571, the settlement end monitoring process is terminated and the process returns.
On the other hand, if the settlement end flag is set in step D571, the process proceeds to step D572, and the settlement end flag is cleared. The settlement end flag is cleared because the settlement ends because the settlement end flag is set, so that the settlement end flag is cleared in preparation for the end of the next settlement. Next, in the step D573, the adjusting flag is cleared.

In step D574, the card removal waiting flag is cleared. The card withdrawal waiting flag is set in the “card return response process” described later, and is set in the process of paying out the game and returning the game card from the card unit 1015. It is something to clear.
Next, in step D575, a timer initial value (for example, 2 seconds) is set in the number-of-balls display timer. The number-of-balls display timer is a timer for providing a time for displaying the number of balls on the number-of-balls display 1040 at the time of payment. That is, the number-of-balls display timer is configured to end a blinking display of the number of balls held on the number-of-balls display 1040 when the time is up (to be described later, “ball number LED editing process”). reference). And, the initial value is set in the number-of-balls display timer is settled in the LED of the number-of-balls display 1040 for a short time after the game card is ejected from the card unit 1015 (the initial value of the timer). This is to prepare for flashing the number of balls held.
Next, in step D576, the settlement start monitoring process number is set in the settlement control process number, and then the process returns. Therefore, in the settlement control process, the next time, the routine proceeds to the settlement start monitoring process routine.

[Break control process]
Next, the break control process D55 in the timer interrupt process will be described with reference to FIG.
When this routine is started, first, branching by the break control process number is performed in step D581. In this case, if the break control process number is 0, a break start monitoring process (described later in detail) in step D582 is executed, and if the break control process number is 1, a break end monitoring process (described in detail later) is executed in step D583. Then return. The initial value of the break control process number is set to 0, for example, in step D9 of the main process.
The break control process number may be 0, 1, 2,..., But may be 1, 2, 3,... The process of setting 0 as the initial value can be omitted.

[Break start monitoring process]
Next, the break start monitoring process D582 in the break control process will be described with reference to FIG.
When this routine is started, it is first determined in step D591 whether or not a break start flag is set. The break start flag is set when a “break start request” command is received from the card unit 1015. If the break start flag is not set in step D591, the break start monitoring process is terminated and the process returns.
On the other hand, if the break start flag is set in step D591, the process proceeds to step D592, and the break start flag is cleared. Clearing the break start flag starts the break because the break start flag has been set, so that the break start flag is cleared to prepare for the next break. Next, a break flag is set in step D593.
When the break flag is set, control for displaying “breaking” on the screen of the operation display device 1007 is executed by a process not shown in the figure, and the player or the store clerk is notified that the break is in progress. The On the other hand, when the break flag is cleared, the indication “breaking” disappears, and it is notified that the break has ended.
Next, after setting the break end monitoring process number in the break control process number in step D594, the process returns. Therefore, in the break control process, the next time is a shift to a break end monitoring process routine.

[Break end monitoring process]
Next, the break end monitoring process D583 in the break control process will be described with reference to FIG.
When this routine is started, it is first determined in step D601 whether or not a break end flag is set. The break end flag is set when a “break end request” command is received from the card unit 1015. If the break end flag is not set in step D601, the break end monitoring process is terminated and the process returns.
On the other hand, if the break end flag is set in step D601, the process proceeds to step D602 to clear the break end flag. The break end flag is cleared because the break ends because the break end flag is set, so that the break end flag is cleared in preparation for the next break end. Next, the break flag is cleared in step D603.
Next, after setting the break start monitoring process number in the break control process number in step D604, the process returns. Therefore, in the break control process, the next time is shifted to a break start monitoring process routine.

[LED editing process]
Next, the LED editing process D56 in the timer interrupt process will be described with reference to FIG.
When this routine is started, an error display LED editing process (step D611), a ball count LED editing process (step D612), and a count ball count LED editing process (step D613) are sequentially executed, and then the process returns.
Here, in the error display LED editing process, setting of display data for lighting or blinking the error display LED 1067 arranged in the payout control device 1230 when a predetermined error occurs is executed.
In the ball number LED editing process, setting of display data for performing various displays on the ball number display 1040 is executed (details will be described later).
In the counting ball number LED editing process, setting of display data for performing various displays on the counting ball display 1313 is executed.

[Error LED editing process]
Next, the error LED editing process D611 in the LED editing process will be described with reference to FIG.
When this routine is started, first, at step D621, it is determined whether any error is occurring. Some kind of error is any of various errors such as opening of the front frame 1004, removal of the main board (game control device 1054), fraudulent radio wave, and abnormal enclosed ball.
If any error is occurring in step D621, the process proceeds to step D622, and the display data of the error having the highest display priority among the generated errors is set. For example, if errors such as the opening of the front frame 1004, the removal of the main board (game control device 1054), and the error of the enclosed ball occur as some errors, the error about the removal of the main board (game control device 1054) is the most. Since it is considered that the error needs to be dealt with, this main board (game control device 1054) removal error is set as display data of the highest display priority error. As a result, the error display LED 1067 arranged in the payout control device 1230 blinks (or may be lit) as a substrate (game control device 1054) removal error has occurred. After step D622, the process returns.
On the other hand, if any error is not occurring at step D621, the process branches to step D623 to set display data at normal time. This notifies that it is normal, that is, no error has occurred. After step D623, the process returns.

[Number-of-balls LED editing process]
Next, the number-of-balls LED editing process D612 in the LED editing process will be described with reference to FIG.
When this routine is started, it is first determined in step D631 whether a card unit unconnected error has occurred. If it has occurred, the process proceeds to step D638, and if not, the process proceeds to step D632. The determination of the card unit unconnected error is performed based on, for example, a card unit connection confirmation flag, as in step D371 described above.
When the process proceeds to step D632, it is determined whether an enclosure system switch error has occurred. If it has occurred, the process proceeds to step D638. The enclosed system switch abnormality error is a switch abnormality with respect to the enclosed system switches (launched ball detection switch 1160, out-ball detection switch 1161, first enclosed ball number detection switch 1164, second enclosed ball number detection switch 1165).
In step D638, display data for displaying a notification of an enclosed system switch abnormality error or a card unit unconnected error is set by the number-of-balls display 1040, and the process returns.

When the process proceeds to step D633, it is determined whether the account is being settled (including a settlement or waiting to be taken out of a game card). If the settlement is in progress, the process proceeds to step D639. If the settlement is not in progress, the process proceeds to step D634. Whether or not payment is in progress is determined based on, for example, the above-described payment flag.
In step D639, it is determined whether or not payment writing completion is waiting. If payment payment completion is waiting, the process proceeds to step D640, and a display for moving and blinking the number of balls held by the ball number display 1040 is displayed. Set data (ball number display movement blinking data) and return. As a result, the waiting ball number display on the holding ball number display 1040 moves and blinks while waiting for the completion of payment writing.
If it is not waiting for the completion of payment writing in step D639, the process branches to step D641, and display data (ball number display blinking data) for blinking the number of balls held by the ball number display unit 1040 in step D641. Set and return. As a result, even when the payment is in progress, when the payment writing is not waiting for completion (that is, when the writing to the game card is completed), the number of balls held on the number-of-balls display 1040 flashes. become.

On the other hand, when the process proceeds to step D634, it is determined whether the value of the number-of-balls display timer is not zero. If it is not zero (when time is not up), the process proceeds to step D642, and if it is zero (time is up). In the case), the process proceeds to Step D635. The number-of-balls display timer is a timer that is set at the end of settlement in step D575 (FIG. 232) in the settlement completion monitoring process described above.
If it is determined in step D634 that the value of the number-of-balls display timer is not zero (the time is not up) and the process proceeds to step D642, the number of balls to be blinked is displayed by the number-of-balls display 1040 in step D642. The number-of-balls display blinking data is set, and in the subsequent step D643, the number-of-balls display timer is updated (decremented) by “−1”. Thereby, the number-of-balls display timer is counted. Next, at step D644, it is determined whether or not the value of the number-of-balls display timer has become zero. If not, the routine returns and the routine is repeated. If the value of the number-of-balls display timer becomes zero (counts up), the process proceeds to step D645 to clear the number of balls for display, and then proceeds to step D647, and the number-of-balls display 1040 as described later. Set the turn-off data to turn off the light, and then return.
The processing from the above steps D633, D634, D639 to D645 until the checkout process is started by pressing the return button 304 of the operation display device 1007 until the game card is removed and the number-of-balls display timer counts up. During the period from the start of payment to waiting for the completion of payment writing, the number of balls held on the number-of-balls display 1040 moves and blinks. When the payment is completed, the number of balls held on the number-of-balls display 1040 flashes. Become.

On the other hand, if it progresses to step D635, it will be determined and determined whether it is during a break, and if it is during a break, it will progress to step D646, and if it is not during a break, it will progress to step D636. The determination as to whether or not the user is taking a break is made based on the above-described break flag, for example.
In step D646, break display data for displaying that the player is on the ball with the number-of-balls display 1040 is set, and the process returns.
When the process proceeds to step D636, it is determined whether the game is in progress (the player is seated). If the game is being played, the process proceeds to step D647, and if not, the process proceeds to step D637. Whether or not a game is in progress is determined by determining that a game is in progress if a game card is inserted in the card unit 1015, and determining that a game is not in progress if not inserted.
In step D647, the number-of-balls display data setting process is performed, and then the process returns. This is a process for displaying the number of balls on the number-of-balls display 1040, which will be described in detail later.
In step D637, the turn-off data of the number-of-balls display 1040 is set, and the process returns. In addition, you may make it perform a demonstration display with the number-of-balls display 1040 instead of light extinction.

According to this routine, the number of balls held is basically displayed on the number-of-balls display 1040 during the game, but when a card unit unconnected error or an encapsulated system switch error occurs, an error display is displayed. A display indicating that the payment is being performed during the checkout and a display indicating that the break is being performed during the break are executed on the holding ball number display 1040, respectively. And when it is not in any of these states, the number-of-balls display 1040 performs a turn-off display.
In addition, while waiting for the completion of payment writing from the start of payment, the number of balls held on the holding ball number display 1040 will move and blink. Control is performed.
In this embodiment, the data setting process for the display on the number-of-balls display 1040 is collectively processed in this routine for all displays other than the number-of-balls display. For this reason, there exists an effect which can simplify a process and can reduce cost.

[Number of balls display data setting processing]
Next, the number-of-balls display data setting process D647 in the number-of-balls LED editing process will be described with reference to FIG.
When this routine is started, first, if the number-of-balls display update timer is not “0” in step D651, the timer is updated (decrement) by “−1”, and in step D652, the number-of-balls display update timer is “ Whether or not “0” is determined. This is because the number-of-balls display update timer is set to an initial value (for example, 300 ms) in step D658, which will be described later, and "-1" is updated (decremented) from the initial value, and the timer is set to "0". It is determined whether or not.

If the decision result in the step D652 is YES, the process advances to a succeeding step D653 to judge whether or not the number-of-ball display lead counter is equal to the number-of-ball display light counter. This is to determine whether or not the current number of balls has been read from the number-of-balls display number storage area in which the number of balls is stored. If the result of the determination in step D653 is NO, it is determined that the number-of-balls display read counter is not equal to the number-of-balls display light counter and that the current number of balls has not been read from the number-of-balls display number storage area. The process proceeds to step D654.
Next, in step D654, the number-of-balls-displaying lead counter is updated (incremented) by “+1”. Load it. Next, in step D656, the number of updated balls loaded in step D655 is added to the number of holding balls for display to be updated to the current number of holding balls for display. That is, “the number of holding balls for display + the number of updates” is updated to the number of holding balls for display this time.

In step D657, data corresponding to the number of updates is saved in the test signal output data area. The number of updates here corresponds to the number of prize balls, and the process of step D657 corresponds to a process of outputting a test signal relating to the addition of the number of prize balls to the number of balls held to the outside. This is to output a test signal related to the addition of the number of winning balls to the number of balls held in accordance with the update of the number of balls held by the number-of-balls display 1040. As a result, the external test apparatus can more reliably capture data relating to the addition of the number of prize balls to the number of balls held.
Next, the process proceeds to step D658, and the initial value of the number-of-balls display update timer (for example, 300 ms) is saved in the number-of-balls display update timer area. For example, 300 ms is set as the initial value here.
Here, the initial value = 300 m is an interval of updating the number of balls (a predetermined period (0.3 seconds)) when the number-of-balls display 1040 (game value display means) displays the number of balls of the player. (Interval).

This is because the RAM 1233 as an internal memory stores the change in the number of balls held by the player, and subtracts the fired ball and repeats the addition of the number of prize balls to determine how much the player has the number of balls. In contrast to this, updating the number of balls held in the number-of-balls display 1040 is different from that in which the RAM 1233 updates and stores the number of balls in real time. This is because control is performed so that the updated number of balls is displayed at intervals of a predetermined period (for example, 0.3 seconds).
That is, the payout control device 1230 subtracts the number of balls fired from the number of balls held and adds the number of prize balls by processing based on the game program, so that the RAM 1233 stores real-time changes in the number of balls held. However, the update of the number of balls when the number-of-balls display 1040 displays the number of balls of the player is that the RAM 1233 updates and stores the number of balls in real time. In contrast, control is performed so that the updated number of balls is displayed at intervals of a predetermined period (for example, 0.3 seconds).

Next, the process proceeds to step D659, and it is determined whether or not the number of balls for display is “0”. If the number of holding balls is not “0”, the process proceeds to step D660, and LED display data corresponding to the number of holding balls updated in step D656 is set. This is to set data to be displayed on the LED of the number-of-balls indicator 1040 that can display six digits (number of balls) by arranging six 7-segment LEDs. Therefore, if there are 6 LEDs to be displayed, data for 6 digits is set. After step D660, the process returns. Thereby, the current number of balls (the updated number of balls) is displayed on the number-of-balls display 1040.
On the other hand, if the number of holding balls for display is “0” in step D659, the process branches to step D663 to determine whether or not the number of counted balls is “0”. If the number of counted balls is not “0”, the process proceeds to step D664, the blinking display data of the number of held balls “0” is set, and the process returns. Thereby, when the counted number of balls is not “0”, the display of the number-of-balls display 1040 blinks.
On the other hand, if the counted ball number is “0” in step D663, the process proceeds to step D665, the lighting display data of the holding ball number display “0” is set, and the process returns. Thereby, when the number of counted balls is “0”, the display of the number-of-balls indicator 1040 is turned on.

  On the other hand, if the number-of-balls display update timer is not “0” in step D652, the process jumps to step D659. Accordingly, at this time, the processing after step D659 is executed. In this case, the display of the previous number of balls is continued by the number-of-balls display 1040. However, since the processing of steps D659 and D663 to D665 is performed, even if the number of balls held is “0”, it depends on the presence / absence of the number of balls counted. The display mode of the holding ball number display 1040 is different. When the counting ball number is not “0”, the display of the holding ball number display 1040 blinks “0”, and when the counting ball number is “0”, the holding ball number The “0” display on the display 1040 is lit.

Returning to step D653, if the determination result in step D653 is YES, the number-of-ball display lead counter is equal to the number-of-ball display light counter, and the current number of balls held from the number-of-balls display number storage area. Branching to step D661, where the current number of balls is updated to the number of balls for display in step D661, and then the data without prize balls is saved in the test signal output data area in step D662. .
When the processing of step D661 is performed, in order to prevent a shift between the display data regarding the number of balls and the internal data, when there is no data to be added (the number of balls to be added), it is periodically performed. The process to match the number of balls held inside.
The process of step D662 corresponds to a process of outputting a test signal relating to the number of prize balls to the outside, and in particular, a test signal relating to the number of prize balls when there is no prize ball. This is to output a test signal relating to the number of winning balls in accordance with the update of the number of holding balls on the holding ball number display 1040, but also output data without winning balls to an external test device. It is possible. As a result, the external test apparatus can more reliably capture data relating to the number of prize balls. After step D662, the process proceeds to step D658, and the processes after step D658 are executed.

[Counting ball LED editing process]
Next, the counting ball number LED editing process D613 in the LED editing process will be described with reference to FIG.
When this routine is started, it is first determined in step D671 whether or not the counting ball number is "0". If the counting ball number is not "0", the process proceeds to step D672 and the counting ball number LED is turned on. Data is set, and then the process proceeds to step D674. As a result, the counting ball display 1313 is turned on. Since the counting ball display 1313 displays whether or not there is a counting ball, when the lighting is turned on, it is understood that there is a counting ball (exists).
On the other hand, if the counting ball number is “0” in step D671, the process proceeds to step D673 to set off data of the counting ball number LED, and then proceeds to step D674. As a result, the counting ball display 1313 is turned off. Thereby, it turns out that there is no counting ball.

In step D674, the output data of the counting LED corresponding to the counting status is set, and then the process returns. This sets data for controlling the lighting mode (including blinking) of the counting LED built in the counting ball display 1313 according to the status of the counting ball (including presence / absence).
Specifically, data setting is performed as follows.
・ Counting not possible: Red lighting ・ Counting possible: Blue lighting (or blinking)
・ Counting: Green blinking “No counting” means no counting ball, and “Countable” means that there is a counting ball. By performing the process of step D674, the lighting mode (including blinking) of the counting LED built in the counting ball display 1313 changes finely according to the status of the counting ball, which is advantageous to the player.
In this manner, the counting ball display 1313 is turned on (including blinking) and turned off according to the presence / absence of the counting ball, notifying the player of the presence / absence of the counting ball and counting, and displaying the operation. Using the counting ball use switch on the screen of the apparatus 1007, it is notified whether or not the movement from the counting ball number to the holding ball number is possible (for example, counting is possible and blue lighting is performed). Here, the counting ball display 1313 performs simple display regarding the counting ball number to the player by turning on (including blinking) and extinguishing, and the operation display device managed by the card unit 15 for details of the counting ball number. Displayed at 1007. Note that the counting ball display may be configured by several LEDs (for example, six) to notify the approximate counting ball number.

[Main control command transmission processing]
Next, the main control command transmission process D57 in the timer interrupt process will be described with reference to FIG.
When this routine is started, it is first determined in step D681 whether or not a main control command has been received. If no main control command has been received, the process branches to step D703.
Here, in the fifteenth embodiment, the communication between the payout control device 1230 and the game control device 1054 (main board) is configured such that the game control device 1054 serves as a primary station and performs bidirectional communication. In other words, the payout control device 1230 transmits to the game control device 1054 based on the command received from the game control device 1054. In addition, since the two-way communication is performed periodically (for example, every 200 ms), for example, if a command from the game control device 1054 does not come to the payout control device 1230 for 1 second, In step D681, the reception of the main control command is confirmed.
In the communication between the card unit 1015 and the payout control device 1230, the card unit 1015 becomes the primary station.
On the other hand, if a main control command is received in step D681, the process proceeds to step D682, where a command is generated based on various errors and illegal flags, and stored (for example, stored in the RAM 1233). Examples of various errors and illegal flags include the following.
・ Glass frame 1005 open ・ Front frame 1004 open ・ Prize number abnormality ・ Incorrect addition detection ・ Radio fraud ・ Switch abnormality ・ Night frame open

Next, the process proceeds to step D683, and the command generated in step D682 is written in the gaming machine frame information transmission buffer. The gaming machine frame information transmission buffer is a buffer for temporarily storing commands to be transmitted from the payout control device 1230 arranged in the gaming machine frame to the gaming control device 1054.
Next, in step D684, a command is generated and stored based on the pressed state of the count switch 1311 and the card removal waiting flag. Waiting for card removal refers to a period of waiting for a player to remove a game card when the game card is ejected from the card slot 1201 of the card unit 1015 at the time of payment.
Next, the process proceeds to step D685, and the command generated in step D684 is written in the gaming machine frame information transmission buffer.

Next, in step D686, it is determined whether the touch sensor 1174 is off, whether the number of held balls = 0 in step D687, or whether the number of counted balls = 0 in step D688. If YES in D686 to D688, that is, if the touch sensor 1174 is OFF in step D686, the number of held balls = 0 in step D687, and the number of counted balls = 0 in step D688, the process proceeds to step D689. .
This is because when the touch sensor 1174 is off because the player is not touching the launch handle 1011, the number of balls held is zero, and the number of counted balls is zero, the gaming machine is not operating. Therefore, it is determined that energy saving (energy saving; hereinafter the same) is necessary, and the process proceeds to step D689.
Therefore, in step D689, a command with a power saving transition request is generated and stored. Thereby, when a command with a power saving transition request is sent to the game control device 1054, the command is sent from the game control device 1054 to the effect control device 1053, and for example, the display device 1041 is controlled by the effect control device 1053. The screen becomes the energy saving mode and power consumption is suppressed.

After step D689, the process proceeds to step D690.
On the other hand, if any one of Step D686 to Step D688 is NO, that is, it is determined that the touch sensor 1174 is turned on at Step D686, the number of held balls is at Step D687, and the number of counted balls is at Step D688. If there is one, there is a possibility that the gaming machine is operating, so it is determined that energy saving is not necessary, and the process branches to step D691. In step D691, a command without a power saving transition request is generated and stored, and then the process proceeds to step D690. As a result, a command without a power saving transition request is sent to the game control device 1054, and for example, control such that the screen of the display device 1041 enters the energy saving mode is not performed.

When the process proceeds from step D689 or step D691 to step D690, in step D690, the command set in step D689 or step D691 is written in the gaming machine frame information transmission buffer. Thereby, the command set in step D689 or step D691 is sent to the game control device 1054.
Next, the process proceeds to step D692, where a command is generated based on the break-related flag and the settlement-related flag, and stored. As the checkout related flag, for example, there is a card removal waiting flag, and a command is generated based on this card removal waiting flag. There is an instruction command to be displayed on the display device 1041. Accordingly, it is possible to notify the player not to forget to take the game card.
Next, the process proceeds to step D693, and the command generated in step D692 is written in the gaming machine frame information transmission buffer.

Next, the process proceeds to step D694, where a command is generated based on the number of balls possessed and stored. This is a command for informing the number of balls held. Next, the process proceeds to step D695, and the command generated in step D694 is written in the gaming machine frame information transmission buffer.
Next, the process proceeds to step D696, where a command is generated based on the number of counted balls and stored. This is a command that informs the number of counted balls. Next, the process proceeds to step D697, and the command generated in step D696 is written into the gaming machine frame information transmission buffer.
Next, the process proceeds to step D698, where a command is generated and stored based on the firing intensity information. This is because the player can adjust the launch intensity of the game ball by touching the launch operation handle 1011 and fixing the launch volume 1171 at a desired position, and the game ball can be adjusted from the position of the launch volume 1171. Therefore, the command is generated based on the emission intensity information (position of the emission volume 1171). As a command to be generated, there is a command for displaying the launch intensity of the game ball. By sending the command to the game control apparatus 1054, the effect control apparatus 1053 finally displays the launch intensity of the game ball on the display apparatus 1041. The production will be performed. By doing in this way, the present launch intensity can be notified to a player, for example. Further, at the time of payment, a notification is made to prompt the user to return the firing volume 1171 to the initial position.
Next, the process proceeds to step D699, and the command generated in step D698 is written in the gaming machine frame information transmission buffer.

Next, in step D700, an initial value (for example, 1 second) is set in the main control command reception monitoring timer. The main control command reception monitoring timer is used to determine whether the main control command has been received. If no command is received within the range of the initial value set in the main control command reception monitoring timer, the main control command reception monitoring timer The command is judged to be abnormal.
Next, in step D701, the main control command reception abnormality flag is cleared. In step D702, the main control command received flag is cleared, and then the process returns.
On the other hand, if the main control command is not received in step D681, the process branches to step D703 as described above. If the main control command reception monitoring timer is not "0" in step D703, "-1" is updated. As a result, the main control command reception monitoring timer is counted. Next, at step D704, it is determined whether or not the value of the main control command reception monitoring timer has become zero. If not, the routine returns and the routine is repeated. If the value of the main control command reception monitoring timer becomes zero (counts up) in a state where no main control command is received (if the determination in step D704 is YES), the main control command reception abnormality flag is determined in step D705. Set. As a result, when the main control command is not received within the range of the initial value set in the main control command reception monitoring timer, the main control command reception abnormality flag is set. In the process of returning to NO in the determination of step D704 and returning and repeating the routine, when the main control command has been received, the determination of step D681 is YES and the process proceeds to step D682, so the main control command reception abnormality flag is Not set.

  In this embodiment, the game control device 1054 and the payout control device 1230 are separately configured. However, when the game control device 1054 and the payout control device 1230 are integrally configured with one main control board. A command (for example, a command during error recovery) is transmitted from the main control board to the effect control device 1053, and the effect control device 1053 that receives the command receives a predetermined display (for example, as described above) based on the received command. The display device 1041 performs a control to execute “displaying error recovery confirmation”. Similarly, when the game control device 1054 and the payout control device 1230 are separately configured as in the present embodiment, commands from the payout control device 1230 are sent via the game control device 1054 to the effect control device. The presentation control device 1053 receives the same command and controls the display of the display device 1041 based on the command. That is, a command transmitted from the payout control device 1230 to the game control device 1054 (main control board) is transmitted to the effect control device 53 via the game control device 1054, and the display control device 1053 is based on the command by the effect control device 1053. Display control is performed.

[Card unit command transmission processing]
Next, the card unit command transmission process D58 in the timer interrupt process will be described with reference to FIGS.
When this routine is started, it is first determined in step D711 whether or not a card unit command has been received. If no card unit command has been received, the process branches to step D730. The card unit command is a command transmitted from the card unit 1015 to the payout control device 1230.
If a card unit command is received in step D711, the process proceeds to step D712, and the command is loaded from the card unit request command area.
The commands transmitted from the card unit 1015 to the payout control device 1230 include, for example, a communication start request, a communication end request, and a status information request as described above. The process of step D712 reads (loads) what kind of request the command received from the card unit 1015 is from the card unit request command area. Next, the command loaded from the card unit request command area in step D712 is determined in each processing of step D713 to step D726.

Specifically, it is determined in step D713 whether the command is a recovery request. Note that the recovery request means a recovery request command, and the same applies to the following commands.
In step D714, it is determined whether the command is a recovery detail request. Similarly, in step D715, the command is a communication start request, in step D716, the command is a communication end request, in step D717, the command is a status information request, in step D718, the command is a card insertion notification, or in step D719, the command is In card return notification, in step D720, the command is a break confirmation, in step D721, the command is a break start request, in step D722, the command is a break end request, in step D723, the command is a settlement check, or in step D724, the command is a settlement start In step D725, it is determined whether the command is a settlement end request, and in step D726, the command is a count use request.

As a result of determining the command loaded from the card unit request command area in each processing of step D713 to step D726, if the determination is NO in all steps, the process goes from step D726 to step D727. In step D727, it is determined whether or not the ID transmission flag is set. If the ID transmission flag is set, a gaming machine ID transmission process is performed in step D728. As a result, the main control ID and the payout ID are transmitted to the card unit 1015. After step D728, the process proceeds to step D729.
On the other hand, if the ID transmission flag is not set in step D727, the process jumps to step D728 and proceeds to step D729. In step D729, after the card unit received flag is cleared, the process returns.

  If no card unit command is received in step D711, the process branches to step D730 as described above. If the card unit command reception monitoring timer is not "0" in step D730, "-1" is updated. As a result, the card unit command reception monitoring timer is counted. Next, at step D731, it is determined whether or not the value of the card unit command reception monitoring timer has become zero. If not, the routine returns and the routine is repeated. If no card unit command is received and the value of the card unit command reception monitoring timer becomes zero (counts up) (if the determination in step D731 is YES), the card unit command is received in step D732. Set an error flag and return. Thereby, when the card unit command is not received within the range of the initial value (set in step D747) set in the card unit command reception monitoring timer, the card unit command reception abnormality flag is set. . Note that if the determination in step D731 is NO and the card unit command has been received in the process of repeating the routine, the determination in step D711 is YES and the process proceeds to step D712, so the card unit command reception abnormality flag is not set.

Next, a case where the determination result is YES in each processing of step D713 to step D726 will be described.
First, if the command is a recovery request in step D713, the process branches to step D733 to perform recovery response processing (processing for notifying recovery information: details will be described later), and then proceeds to step D747.
If the command is a recovery detail request in step D714, the process branches to step D734 to perform recovery detail response processing (processing for notifying detailed recovery information: details will be described later), and then proceeds to step D747.
If the command is a communication start request in step D715, the process branches to step D735 to perform communication start response processing (processing for notifying communication start of the payout control device 1230: details will be described later), and then proceeds to step D747.
If the command is a communication end request in step D716, the process branches to step D736 to perform communication end response processing (processing for notifying the end of communication of the payout control device 1230: details will be described later), and then proceeds to step D747.
If the command is a status information request in step D717, the process branches to step D737 to perform a status information response process (a process for notifying the status information of the gaming machine: details will be described later), and then proceeds to step D747.
If the command is a card insertion notification in step D718, the process branches to step D738 to perform card insertion response processing (processing for notifying receipt of card insertion notification: details will be described later), and then proceeds to step D747.
If the command is a card return notification in step D719, the process branches to step D739 to perform a card return response process (a process for notifying reception of a card return notification: details will be described later), and then the process proceeds to step D747.

If the command is a break confirmation in step D720, the process branches to step D740 to perform a break confirmation response process (a process for notifying a break confirmation result (whether break is possible): details will be described later), and then proceeds to step D747.
If the command is a break start request in step D721, the process branches to step D741 to perform a break start response process (a process for notifying the start of break: details will be described later), and then proceeds to step D747.
If the command is a break end request in step D722, the process branches to step D742 to perform a break end response process (a process for notifying the end of the break: details will be described later), and then proceeds to step D747.
If the command is a payment confirmation in step D723, the process branches to step D743 to perform a payment confirmation response process (a process for notifying a payment confirmation result (whether payment is possible): details will be described later), and then proceeds to step D747.
If the command is a settlement start request in step D724, the process branches to step D744 to perform settlement settlement response processing (processing for notifying settlement start: details will be described later), and then proceeds to step D747.
If the command is a settlement end request in step D725, the process branches to step D745 to perform settlement settlement response processing (processing for notifying settlement settlement: details will be described later), and then proceeds to step D747.
If the command is a count use request in step D726, the process branches to step D746 to perform a count use response process (a process for notifying the use of count balls (addition to the number of balls held): details will be described later), and then step Proceed to D747.

When the process proceeds from step D733 to step D746 to step D747, an initial value (for example, 3 seconds) is set in the card unit command reception monitoring timer in step D747. The card unit command reception monitoring timer is used to determine whether or not a card unit command has been received. If a command is not received within the range of the initial value set in the card unit command reception monitoring timer, the card unit command reception monitoring timer The command is judged to be abnormal.
Next, in step D748, the card unit command reception abnormality flag is cleared, and then the process proceeds to step D727, and the processing similar to the above is performed after step D727.

[Recovery response processing]
Next, the recovery response process D733 in the card unit command transmission process will be described with reference to FIG.
Here, in the fifteenth embodiment, when communication between the payout control device 1230 and the card unit 1015 is cut off, the game state information (the number of held balls, the number of counted balls, during the big hit, during the probable change, and the time reduction) In other words, the recovery process is performed in order to achieve the matching of the middle,. The recovery process includes a recovery response process (step D733) of the payout control device 1230 corresponding to the recovery request from the card unit 1015, a process (not shown) of the card unit 1015 corresponding to the recovery response, a recovery detail request, and a recovery detail request. The recovery detailed response process (step D734) of the corresponding payout control device 1230 and the process (not shown) of the card unit 1015 corresponding to the recovery detailed response are performed. Below, the detail of a recovery response process is demonstrated first.
When this routine is started, a serial number is first loaded from the card unit command storage area in step D761, and the serial number is updated by "+1" in step D762. The serial number is a serial number in response to a command received from the card unit 1015, and is added (incremented) every time a command is transmitted to the card unit 1015. Similarly, the card unit 1015 updates the serial number by “+1” at the time of transmission. If you check the serial number, you can see if there is a missing transmission or reception. The serial number is composed of, for example, 1 byte (256 bits).
Next, the process proceeds to step D763, and the serial number updated in step D762 is written in the card unit transmission buffer. In step D764, a recovery response code command is set. This is a response to the recovery request and is a code meaning “notify recovery information”.
Next, the process proceeds to step D765, and the command set in step D764 is written in the card unit transmission buffer. As a result, a recovery response command is transmitted to the card unit 1015.

In step D766, the card ID is loaded from the card ID storage area. This is because the game card unique ID transmitted from the card unit 1015 at the start of the game (when the card is inserted) is stored as a card ID in the card ID storage area in the RAM 1233 of the payout control device 1230. The card ID is read out from. In addition, when a game result (the number of balls, etc.) is written in a game card and settled, the card ID stored in the payout control device 1230 is sent to the card unit 1015 so that the card unit 1015 is inserting the card ID. This is in order to prevent fraud by collating with the game card ID.
Next, the process proceeds to step D767, and the data loaded in step D766 is written into the card unit transmission buffer. As a result, the card ID stored at the payout control device 1230 at the start of the game (at the time of card insertion) is transmitted from the payout control device 1230 to the card unit 1015.
In step D768, the card insertion time is loaded from the card insertion time storage area. This is because the time when the game card is inserted into the card insertion slot 1201 of the card unit 15 is stored in the card insertion time storage area in the RAM 1233 of the payout control device 1230, so that the card insertion time is read from the card insertion time storage area. It is.
Next, the process proceeds to step D769, and the data loaded at step D768 is written into the card unit transmission buffer. As a result, the card insertion time is transmitted from the payout control device 1230 to the card unit 1015.

Next, in step D770, the previous last transmission serial number is loaded from the transmission command storage area. This is because the serial number of the “status information response” last transmitted to the card unit 1015 when the previous payout control device 1230 and the card unit 1015 are connected is stored in the transmission command storage area. Is read out. Next, the process proceeds to step D771, and the data loaded in step D770 is written into the card unit transmission buffer. As a result, the last transmission serial number of the previous time is changed from the payout control device 1230 to the card unit 1.
Is transmitted to 015.
As described above, in the recovery response process, in response to the recovery request from the card unit 1015, the card ID stored at the start of the game, the card insertion time, and the last serial number of the “status information response” transmitted to the previous card unit 1015 are stored in the card. Processing to transmit to the unit 1015 is performed.
In response to this recovery response, the card unit 1015 compares the card ID and the card insertion time with its own, and if it is OK, checks the status information stored by itself from the last serial number of the “status information response”. If they do not match, a detailed recovery request is made. If they match, a detailed recovery request is not made.
Further, when the card ID and the insertion time are different from the own one, there is a possibility that the player is different or illegal, so that the recovery detail request is not made. In the detailed recovery request, the final serial number transmitted to the payout control device 1230 and the number added to the number of held balls not received by the payout control device 1230 are sent.

[Detailed recovery processing]
Next, the recovery detail response process D734 in the card unit command transmission process will be described with reference to FIG. This processing is performed in response to the detailed recovery request from the card unit 1015 as described above.
When this routine is started, first, in step D781, the number of added balls is loaded from the card unit command storage area, and in step D782, “number of held balls + number of added balls” is set as a new “number of held balls”. The number of added balls is data to be added to the number of possessed balls by lending or using counting balls, and corresponds to the amount that the payout control device 1230 cannot receive.
Next, in step D783, the serial number is loaded from the card unit command storage area, and in step D784, the serial number is updated by "+1". The serial number is a serial number when responding to a command received from the card unit 1015, and is added each time a command is transmitted to the card unit 1015.

Next, the process proceeds to step D785, and the serial number updated in step D784 is written in the card unit transmission buffer. As a result, the updated serial number is transmitted to the card unit 1015. Next, a recovery detail response code command is set in step D786. Here, since the command transmitted from the card unit 1015 to the payout control device 1230 is a “recovery detail request”, a recovery detail response command that means “notify detailed recovery information” is set as the response. Become.
Next, the process proceeds to step D787, and the command set in step D786 is written into the card unit transmission buffer. As a result, a recovery detail response command is transmitted from the payout control device 1230 to the card unit 1015.
Next, the process proceeds to step D788, where various recovery information stored as previous gaming machine information is loaded and written to the card unit transmission buffer. As a result, the various recovery information stored as the previous gaming machine information is transmitted from the payout control device 1230 to the card unit 1015.
Next, the process proceeds to step D789, where various recovery information is generated as the latest gaming machine information and written to the card unit transmission buffer. As a result, various types of recovery information generated as the latest gaming machine information are transmitted from the payout control device 1230 to the card unit 1015. After step D789, the process returns. Note that the card unit 1015 receives the recovery detail response and updates the information stored in the card unit 1015 to the latest gaming machine information.

In this way, by executing the recovery response process of FIG. 244 and the recovery detailed response process of FIG. 245, when the communication cannot be normally performed between the dispensing control device 1230 and the card unit 1015 due to a communication abnormality or the like, the card A recovery process for matching data between the unit 1015 and the payout control device 1230 is performed.
Recovery is performed in two stages. The first stage is the recovery response process of FIG. 244, and the conditions for data recovery are confirmed by the process in the first stage. This includes a recovery request and a recovery response.
Then, in the processing on the card unit 1015 side, a recovery request is transmitted to the payout control device 1230. As a response process of the payout control device 1230 to the above, the payout control device 1230 transmits a recovery response to the card unit 1015, where the recovery response includes the last last transmission serial number to the card unit 1015, the stored card ID, and the insertion time. Is included.
The second stage is the detailed recovery response process of FIG. 245. In this second stage process, if the condition for data recovery is OK, data recovery is performed. This includes a recovery detail request and a recovery detail response.
In the processing on the card unit 1015 side, a recovery detail request is transmitted to the payout control device 1230. The detailed recovery request includes the previous last transmission serial number to the payout control device 1230 and the added ball number data to the number of held balls. Then, as a response process of the payout control device 1230 to the above, the payout control device 1230 adds the number of added balls received from the card unit 1015 to the number of held balls, and the card unit 1015 adds the previously transmitted various data and the latest various data. Send to. In this way, data matching between the card unit 1015 and the payout control device 1230 is taken.

Also, between the payout control device 1230 and the game control device 1054, and between the payout control device 1230 and the card unit 1015, in addition to the above-described recovery response processing and recovery detailed response processing, the flowchart shown in FIG. Encrypted communication is performed on both sides including this process.
Therefore, by encrypting and transmitting / receiving information targeted for fraud such as game value information (for example, counting ball information), this information can be illegally read or rewritten from a communication line or a communication terminal. Can be prevented.

[Communication start response processing]
Next, the communication start response process D735 in the card unit command transmission process will be described with reference to FIG.
When this routine is started, a serial number is loaded from the card unit command storage area in step D801, and the serial number is updated by "+1" in step D802. The function of the serial number is as described above. In the other flowcharts, the serial number function is the same.
Next, the process proceeds to step D803, and the serial number updated in step D802 is written in the card unit transmission buffer. As a result, the updated serial number is transmitted to the card unit 1015.
In step D804, a communication start response code command is set. Here, since the command transmitted from the card unit 1015 to the payout control device 1230 is a “communication start request”, a communication start response command that means “notify payout control device communication start” is set as the response. It will be.
Next, the process proceeds to step D805, and the command set in step D804 is written into the card unit transmission buffer. As a result, a communication start response command is transmitted from the payout control device 1230 to the card unit 1015. After step D805, the process returns.

[Communication end response processing]
Next, the communication end response process D736 in the card unit command transmission process will be described with reference to FIG.
When this routine is started, a serial number is loaded from the card unit command storage area in step D811, and the serial number is updated by "+1" in step D812. The function of the serial number is as described above.
Next, the process proceeds to step D813, and the serial number updated in step D812 is written in the card unit transmission buffer. As a result, the updated serial number is transmitted to the card unit 1015.
In step D814, a communication end response code command is set. Here, since the command transmitted from the card unit 1015 to the payout control device 1230 is a “communication end request”, a communication end response command meaning “notify the end of communication of the payout control device” is sent as the response. Will be set.
Next, the process proceeds to step D815, and the command set in step D814 is written in the card unit transmission buffer. As a result, a communication end response command is transmitted from the payout control device 1230 to the card unit 1015. After step D815, the process returns.

[Status information response processing]
Next, the status information response process D737 in the card unit command transmission process will be described with reference to FIG.
When this routine is started, CU (card unit) state information is loaded from the card unit command storage area in step D821, and then the process proceeds to step D822. The data loaded in step D811 is loaded into the CU (card unit) state information area. Save. In step D823, the number of added balls is loaded from the card unit command storage area, and in step D824, “number of held balls + number of added balls” is set as a new “number of held balls”. The number of added balls is data to be added to the number of held balls by lending or using counting balls.
In step D825, CU (card unit) error status information is loaded from the card unit command storage area. Next, the process proceeds to step D826, and the data loaded in step D825 is saved in the CU (card unit) error state information area.
In step D827, the serial number is loaded from the card unit command storage area, and in step D828, the serial number is updated by "+1". The function of the serial number is as described above.

Next, the process proceeds to step D829, and the serial number updated in step D828 is written in the card unit transmission buffer. As a result, the updated serial number is transmitted to the card unit 1015. In step D830, a status information response code command is set. Here, since the command transmitted from the card unit 1015 to the payout control device 1230 is a “status information request”, a status information response command that means “notify game machine status information” is set as the response. become.
Next, the process proceeds to step D831, and the command set in step D830 is written into the card unit transmission buffer. As a result, a status information response command is transmitted from the payout control device 1230 to the card unit 1015.
Next, the process proceeds to step D832, where various game machine state information is generated as a response command and written to the card unit transmission buffer. As a result, various gaming machine state information generated as a response command is transmitted from the payout control device 1230 to the card unit 1015. Next, the process proceeds to step D833, where all transmitted response commands are saved. After step D833, the process returns.

[Card insertion response processing]
Next, the card insertion response process D738 in the card unit command transmission process will be described with reference to FIG.
When this routine is started, after loading the card ID from the card unit command storage area in step D841, the process proceeds to step D842, and the data loaded in step D841 is saved in the card ID storage area. Next, after loading the card insertion time from the card unit command storage area in step D843, the process proceeds to step D844, and the loaded data is saved in the card insertion time storage area in step D843.
In step D845, the serial number is loaded from the card unit command storage area, and in step D846, the serial number is updated by "+1". The function of the serial number is as described above.

Next, the process proceeds to step D847, and the serial number updated in step D846 is written in the card unit transmission buffer. As a result, the updated serial number is transmitted to the card unit 1015. In step D848, a card insertion response code command is set. Here, since the command transmitted from the card unit 1015 to the payout control device 1230 is “card insertion notification”, a card insertion response command meaning “notification of receipt of card insertion notification” is set as the response. become.
Next, the process proceeds to step D849, and the command set in step D848 is written into the card unit transmission buffer. As a result, a card insertion response command is transmitted from the payout control device 1230 to the card unit 1015 to the card unit 1015. After step D849, the process returns.

[Card return response processing]
Next, the card return response process D739 in the card unit command transmission process will be described with reference to FIG.
When this routine is started, a serial number is loaded from the card unit command storage area in step D861, and the serial number is updated by "+1" in step D862. The function of the serial number is as described above. Next, the process proceeds to step D863, and the serial number updated in step D862 is written into the card unit transmission buffer. As a result, the updated serial number is transmitted to the card unit 1015.
Next, a command for a card return response code is set in step D864. Here, since the command transmitted from the card unit 1015 to the payout control device 1230 is “card return notification”, a card return response command that means “notify receipt of card return notification” is set as the response. become.
Next, the process proceeds to step D865, and the command set in step D864 is written into the card unit transmission buffer. As a result, a card return response command is transmitted from the payout control device 1230 to the card unit 1015.

Next, after loading the card ID from the card unit command storage area in step D866, the process proceeds to step D867, and the loaded data is written in the card unit transmission buffer in step D866. As a result, the loaded card ID is transmitted to the card unit 1015.
Next, after loading the card insertion time from the card insertion time storage area in step D868, the process proceeds to step D869, and the loaded data is written in the card unit transmission buffer in step D868. As a result, the loaded card insertion time is transmitted to the card unit 1015.
Next, in step D870, a card removal waiting flag is set, and then the process returns.

[Break confirmation response processing]
Next, the break confirmation response process D740 in the card unit command transmission process will be described with reference to FIG.
When this routine is started, a serial number is loaded from the card unit command storage area in step D881, and the serial number is updated by "+1" in step D882. The function of the serial number is as described above. Next, the process proceeds to step D883, and the serial number updated in step D882 is written in the card unit transmission buffer. As a result, the updated serial number is transmitted to the card unit 1015.
In step D884, a break confirmation response code command is set. Here, since the command transmitted from the card unit 1015 to the payout control device 1230 is “break confirmation”, the response is a break confirmation response command that means “notify break confirmation result (whether break is possible)”. Will be set.
Next, the process proceeds to step D885, and the command set in step D884 is written in the card unit transmission buffer. As a result, a break confirmation response command is transmitted from the payout control device 1230 to the card unit 1015.

Next, the following determination is performed in each processing of Step D886 to Step D892.
That is, whether the settlement process is being performed in step D886, whether the count switch-on timer is not 0 in step D887, or whether an error / injustice has occurred in step D888. In step D889, it is determined whether there is a ball on the board, whether the touch sensor 1174 is on in step D890, a customer waiting demonstration in step D891, or whether the number of balls held is 0 in step D892.
If all the processes in steps D886 to D890 are NO, YES in step D891, and NO in step D892, it is determined that a breakable condition is satisfied, and the process proceeds to step D893, where a breakable code command is set. .
Next, the process proceeds to step D894, and the breakable code command set in step D893 is written into the card unit transmission buffer. As a result, a breakable code command is transmitted to the card unit 1015. After step D894, the process returns.

On the other hand, if any one of the processes in steps D886 to D890 is determined to be YES, it is determined that a breakable condition is not satisfied, and the process proceeds to step D894. If even one of the determinations of NO in step D891 and YES in step D892 is satisfied, it is determined that a breakable condition is not satisfied, and the process proceeds to step D895.
When the process proceeds to step D895, a command for a non-breakable code is set. Next, the process proceeds to step D894, and the command of the non-breakable code set in step D895 is written in the card unit transmission buffer. As a result, a command of a break impossible code is transmitted to the card unit 1015. After step D894, the process returns.

[Break start response processing]
Next, the break start response process D741 in the card unit command transmission process will be described with reference to FIG.
When this routine is started, a break start flag is set in step D901. Next, a serial number is loaded from the card unit command storage area in step D902, and the serial number is updated by "+1" in step D903. The function of the serial number is as described above. Next, the process proceeds to step D904, and the serial number updated in step D903 is written in the card unit transmission buffer. As a result, the updated serial number is transmitted to the card unit 1015.
Next, a break start response code command is set in step D905. Here, since the command transmitted from the card unit 1015 to the payout control device 1230 is a “break start request”, a break start response command that means “notify break start” is set as the response.
Next, the process proceeds to step D906, and the command set in step D905 is written into the card unit transmission buffer. As a result, a break start response command is transmitted from the payout control device 1230 to the card unit 1015. After step D906, the process returns.

[Break end response processing]
Next, the break end response process D742 in the card unit command transmission process will be described with reference to FIG.
When this routine is started, a break end flag is set in step D911. Next, in step D912, the serial number is loaded from the card unit command storage area, and in step D913, the serial number is updated by "+1". The function of the serial number is as described above. Next, the process proceeds to step D914, and the serial number updated in step D913 is written in the card unit transmission buffer. As a result, the updated serial number is transmitted to the card unit 1015.
In step D915, a break end response code command is set. Here, since the command transmitted from the card unit 1015 to the payout control device 1230 is a “break end request”, a break end response command meaning “notify the end of break” is set as the response.
Next, the process proceeds to step D916, and the command set in step D915 is written into the card unit transmission buffer. As a result, a break end response command is transmitted from the payout control device 1230 to the card unit 1015. After step D916, the process returns.

[Checkout confirmation response processing]
Next, the settlement confirmation response process D743 in the card unit command transmission process will be described with reference to FIG.
When this routine is started, a serial number is loaded from the card unit command storage area in step D921, and the serial number is updated by "+1" in step D922. The function of the serial number is as described above. Next, the process proceeds to step D923, and the serial number updated in step D922 is written in the card unit transmission buffer. As a result, the updated serial number is transmitted to the card unit 1015.
In step D924, a settlement confirmation response code command is set. Here, since the command transmitted from the card unit 1015 to the payout control device 1230 is “checkout check”, a checkout confirmation response command meaning “notify the checkout check result (whether or not checkout is possible)” is sent as the response. Will be set.
Next, the process proceeds to step D925, and the command set in step D924 is written into the card unit transmission buffer. As a result, a payment confirmation response command is transmitted from the payout control device 1230 to the card unit 1015.

Next, the following determination is performed in each processing of Step D926 to Step D934.
That is, whether rest processing is being performed in step D926, whether the count switch-on timer is not 0 in step D927, or whether an error / injustice has occurred in step D928. Whether there is a ball on the board in step D929, whether the touch sensor 1174 is turned on in step D930, whether the launch intensity of the ball is a predetermined value or more in step D931, whether the customer is waiting for a demonstration in step D932, or whether the number of balls held is 0 in step D933 In step D934, it is determined whether the number of counted balls = 0.
If NO is determined in each process from step D926 to step D931, YES is determined in step D932, YES is determined in step D933, and NO is determined in step D934, it is determined that a condition that can be settled is satisfied, and the process proceeds to step D935. Set the command.
In order to satisfy the conditions that can be settled, it is sufficient that the number of possessed balls or the number of counted balls remains. For example, the number of held balls may be zero and the number of counted balls may not be zero. This is to cope with such a situation because the player may count all the number of possessed balls acquired in the game game and move to the counted number of balls. In addition, one of the conditions that can be calculated that the firing strength of the sphere is not greater than or equal to a predetermined value in step D931 is that the payment can be made when the player returns the firing volume 1171 to the initial position after the game is over. Because it is.
Next, the process proceeds to step D936, and the command of the accountable code set in step D935 is written into the card unit transmission buffer. As a result, a command for a code that can be settled is transmitted to the card unit 1015. After step D936, the process returns.

On the other hand, if any one of the processes in steps D926 to D931 is YES, it is determined that a condition that can be settled is not satisfied, and the process proceeds to step D937. If even one of the determinations NO in step D932 and YES in step D934 is satisfied, it is determined that a condition that can be settled is not satisfied, and the process proceeds to step D937.
In step D937, a non-adjustable code command is set. Next, the process proceeds to step D936, and the command of the non-adjustable code set in step D937 is written in the card unit transmission buffer. As a result, a command with an unaccountable code is transmitted to the card unit 1015. After step D936, the process returns.
If the number of held balls is not 0 in step D933, the process jumps to step D934 and proceeds to step D935 to set a command for a payable code. Therefore, when the number of held balls is not 0, that is, when there is a number of held balls, it is possible to settle.

[Settlement start response processing]
Next, the settlement start response process D744 in the card unit command transmission process will be described with reference to FIG.
When this routine is started, a settlement start flag is set in step D941. Next, the serial number is loaded from the card unit command storage area in step D942, and the serial number is updated by "+1" in step D943. The function of the serial number is as described above. Next, the process proceeds to step D944, and the serial number updated in step D943 is written in the card unit transmission buffer. As a result, the updated serial number is transmitted to the card unit 1015.
Next, in step D945, a settlement start response code command is set. Here, since the command transmitted from the card unit 1015 to the payout control device 1230 is a “settlement start request”, a settlement start response command meaning “notification of settlement start” is set as the response.
Next, the process proceeds to step D946, and the command set in step D945 is written into the card unit transmission buffer. As a result, a settlement start response command is transmitted from the payout control device 1230 to the card unit 1015. After step D946, the process returns.

[Checkout completion response processing]
Next, the settlement completion response process D745 in the card unit command transmission process will be described with reference to FIG.
When this routine is started, a settlement end flag is set in step D951. Next, in step D952, a serial number is loaded from the card unit command storage area, and in step D953, the serial number is updated by "+1". The function of the serial number is as described above. Next, the process proceeds to step D954, and the serial number updated in step D953 is written in the card unit transmission buffer. As a result, the updated serial number is transmitted to the card unit 1015.
Next, in step D955, a settlement end response code command is set. Here, since the command transmitted from the card unit 1015 to the payout control device 1230 is a “payment end request”, a settlement end response command that means “notify the end of payment” is set as the response.
Next, the process proceeds to step D956, and the command set in step D945 is written into the card unit transmission buffer. As a result, a payment completion response command is transmitted from the payout control device 1230 to the card unit 1015. After step D956, the process returns.

[Counting response processing]
Next, the count use response process D746 in the card unit command transmission process will be described with reference to FIG.
When this routine is started, a count use command received flag is set in step D961. Since this is a response when a count use request command is received from the card unit 1015, a count use command received flag is set.
Next, in step D962, a serial number is loaded from the card unit command storage area, and in step D963, the serial number is updated by "+1". The function of the serial number is as described above. Next, the process proceeds to step D964, and the serial number updated in step D963 is written in the card unit transmission buffer. As a result, the updated serial number is transmitted to the card unit 1015.
Next, in step D965, a count use response code command is set. Here, since the command transmitted from the card unit 1015 to the payout control device 1230 is a “count use request”, the response means “notification of use of count ball (addition to number of balls)”. Use response commands will be set.
Next, the process proceeds to step D966, and the command set in step D965 is written into the card unit transmission buffer. As a result, a count use response command is transmitted from the payout control device 1230 to the card unit 1015. After step D966, the process returns.

[Game machine ID transmission processing]
Next, the gaming machine ID transmission process D728 in the card unit command transmission process will be described with reference to FIG.
When this routine is started, an ID transmission start code is written in the card unit transmission buffer in step D971. The ID transmission start code is start (start) information for indicating that information to be transmitted is an ID. As a result, the ID transmission start code is transmitted to the card unit 1015. In addition, the card unit 1015 receives the ID transmission start code, so that the information to be sent is the ID.
In step D972, the chip identification code of the main control chip is written in the card unit transmission buffer. The chip identification code of the main control chip is a code indicating that the next command group is a division of information on the main control chip in the game control device 1054. As a result, the chip identification code of the main control chip is transmitted to the card unit 1015.
In step D973, the head address of the main control ID storage area is set. The main control ID storage area is configured so that a plurality of data in the main control ID (for example, data such as chip ID, manufacturer code, product code, etc.) can be stored, and the area can be divided by address. Since the plurality of data of the main control ID received from is sequentially stored in the main control ID storage area, the address for loading these data is set from the top.

Next, the process proceeds to Step D974, and one data of the main control ID stored in the main control ID storage area corresponding to the head address set in Step D973 is loaded. For example, if a plurality of data of the main control ID is composed of a chip ID, a manufacturer code, a product code, etc., and these data are stored for each address in the main control ID storage area, for example, the chip ID at the head address When the storage area is designated, the chip ID is loaded.
Next, the process proceeds to step D975, and the data (eg, chip ID) loaded in step D974 is written into the card unit transmission buffer. As a result, the loaded data (for example, chip ID) is transmitted to the card unit 1015.
Next, in step D976, the address of the main control ID storage area is updated to the next address. As a result, the data of the next address among the plurality of data of the main control ID is designated.

Next, in step D977, it is determined whether or not transmission of all data has been completed. This is because the main control ID is composed of a plurality of data (for example, chip ID, manufacturer code, product code, etc.), and it is determined whether or not all of the plurality of data has been transmitted to the card unit 1015. is there. If transmission of all data is not completed in step D977, the process returns to step D974 to repeat the loop, and when transmission of all data is completed, that is, a plurality of data of the main control ID (for example, chip ID, manufacturer code) , Product code, etc.) is completely transmitted, the process returns to step D978.
In this way, the main control ID transmission process is performed. When the process proceeds to step D978 and subsequent steps, a payout control ID transmission process is performed.
Here, in the fifteenth embodiment, the information of the main control ID has a variable length depending on the situation, so that the above steps D974 to D977 are looped. As the main control ID information, for example, when only the chip ID is sent to the card unit 1015, or when the chip ID, the manufacturer code, and the product code are sent, the number of data to be sent differs depending on the situation. Since it becomes a variable length depending on the situation, such a structure is adopted.
Note that, in the gaming machine ID transmission process, all information of the main control ID (for example, all data such as chip ID, manufacturer code, product code, etc.) may be transmitted to the card unit 1015 each time.

When the process proceeds to step D978, a process of sending a payout control ID is executed in the processes of steps D978 to D983.
First, in step D978, the chip identification code of the payout control chip is written in the card unit transmission buffer. The chip identification code of the payout control chip is a code indicating that the following command group is a division of information on the payout control chip in the payout control device 1230.
The part having the identification code indicates not a piece of information read from a chip (for example, a payout control chip) but a fixed value command indicating a classification. As a result, the chip identification code of the payout control chip is transmitted to the card unit 1015.
Next, in step D979, the chip code (chip ID) of the payout control chip is written in the card unit transmission buffer. As a result, the chip code (chip ID) of the payout control chip is transmitted to the card unit 1015.
Next, in step D980, the manufacturer identification code of the payout control chip is written into the card unit transmission buffer. As a result, the manufacturer identification code of the payout control chip is transmitted to the card unit 1015.

Next, in step D981, the manufacturer code of the payout control chip is written in the card unit transmission buffer. As a result, the manufacturer code of the payout control chip is transmitted to the card unit 1015.
In step D982, the product identification code of the payout control chip is written in the card unit transmission buffer. As a result, the product identification code of the payout control chip is transmitted to the card unit 1015.
In step D983, the product code of the payout control chip is written in the card unit transmission buffer. As a result, the product code of the payout control chip is transmitted to the card unit 1015.
In this way, the payout control ID transmission process is performed.
In the fifteenth embodiment, the processing for sending all the information (chip ID, manufacturer code, product code) to the card unit 1015 is executed for each piece of payout control chip information. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the processing may be such that only the chip ID can be sent in the same manner as the main control ID described above. Further, in this embodiment, the information of the payout control chip has a fixed length.
After step D983, the process proceeds to step D984, the ID transmission flag is cleared, and the process returns.

[Game stop signal editing process]
Next, the game stop signal editing process D59 in the timer interrupt process will be described with reference to FIG. This process is to edit the game stop signal such as turning on the game stop signal or turning off the game stop signal. This process is not a command but an instruction that takes the form of a signal. When started, first, in steps D991 to D996, a process is performed to determine whether or not the conditions for stopping the game (game stop conditions) are satisfied. If all of the game stop conditions are not satisfied, that is, If all the determination results in the process are NO, it is determined that the game cannot be stopped by stopping the game, and the output data of game stop signal OFF is set in step D997. As a result, the game is not stopped. After step D997, the process returns.
On the other hand, if at least one game stop condition is satisfied, that is, if the determination in steps D991 to D996 shows a YES determination result that prevents the game from continuing, the process branches to step D998. To set the game stop signal ON output data. As a result, the game is stopped. After step D998, the process returns.

Here, the game stop conditions include the following six conditions. That is, the checkout process is not being performed (determined in step D991), the break process is not being performed (determined in step D992), the authentication error is not occurring (determined in step D993), and the communication abnormality is not occurring (determined in step D994). ), The glass frame 1005 is not open (determined in step D995), and the main body frame (front frame 1004) is not open (determined in step D996).
Note that whether or not the adjustment process is being performed may be determined by referring to the adjustment-in-progress flag set in step D553 described above, for example. Further, whether or not an authentication error is occurring is determined by transmitting a gaming machine ID to the card unit 1015 and then receiving, for example, a verification result in the external management device. The verification result is OK or NG.

Next, the operation of Embodiment 15 will be described.
First, the operation of the display mode of the number of balls held at the time of power failure recovery will be described.
FIG. 260 is a diagram for explaining the display of the number of balls held at the time of restoration of a power failure, and in particular, the display mode of the number of balls held display 1040 at the time of settlement is described.
In FIG. 260, timing t51 indicates the start of the game. Now, before the game start timing t51 (before the game starts), the number-of-balls display 1040 is turned off and the number of balls is not displayed (the number of balls is “0”). Further, before the game starts, the value of the number of balls held in the number-of-balls memory (RAM 1233) is also “0”.
Next, when the player inserts a game card into the card insertion slot 1201 of the card unit 1015 or inserts a bill into the cash insertion slot 1202 at timing t51 (FIG. 260 shows the operation of the game card or cash insertion at the H level. At the timing of the game start, the pachinko machine 1001 side also determines that the game is started based on the signal from the card unit 1015, and the number-of-balls display 1040 is turned on. At this time, since the number of held balls is 0 immediately after the game card or the cash is inserted, the data in the held ball number memory and the counted ball number memory are both “0”, and the held ball number display 1040 has a plurality of LEDs. “0” is turned on.

Next, after the game is started, the number of possessed balls is generated. For example, when the number of possessed balls = 125, the data of the possessed ball number memory becomes 125, and the number of possessed balls display 1040 has the number of held balls of “125”. Lights up. Further, when the number of balls held increases or decreases as a result of the game, the data in the ball holding memory changes accordingly, and the ball holding number display 1040 lights and displays the changed number of balls. For example, when the number of balls held becomes 5000, the data in the ball holding number memory becomes 5000, and the number of balls held display 1040 lights up the number of balls held of “5000”.
Next, when the player starts the checkout at the timing t52, specifically, when the return button 304 of the operation display device 1007 is touched for the end of the game, the checkout process is started and the total number of balls (here, the number of balls held = 5000) is recorded on the game card. Specifically, when the player presses the return button 304, the card unit 1015 transmits a payment instruction to the payout control device 1230 to start the checkout. When the payout control device 1230 receives the checkout instruction, the total number of balls held The (number of balls held + number of balls counted) data is transmitted to the card unit 1015, and the card unit 1015 starts the process of recording the total ball number data on the game card.

When such a settlement is started, the number-of-balls display 1040 changes the display mode from the lighting display to the movement blinking. The moving blink display of the number of balls is continued until the writing (recording) of the total number of balls on the game card is completed.
Next, when the writing of the total number of balls to the game card is completed at timing t53, the number-of-balls display 1040 changes the display mode from the blinking movement to the simultaneous blinking. For example, “5000” blinks. However, the number of balls held in the internal memory is cleared to “0”.
Thereafter, the game card is ejected from the card unit 1015 when a predetermined period T51 elapses from the timing t53 at which the writing of the total number of balls to the game card is completed, and at a timing t54.
Specifically, when the card unit 1015 finishes recording the total number-of-balls data for the game card, the card unit 1015 notifies the payout control device 1230 to that effect, and the payout control device 1230 stores the information (for example, stores it in a predetermined area of the RAM 1233). ) Clearing the data such as the number of possessed balls, the number of counted balls, etc., the settlement ends, and the game card is returned at timing t54. At this time, the number-of-balls display 1040 blinks “5000” simultaneously.
Next, when a predetermined period T52 elapses from the timing t54 when the game card is discharged and the timing t55 is reached, the number-of-balls display 1040 turns off the “5000” display that has been flashing simultaneously.
Since the RAM 1233 of the payout control device 1230 is backed up by a backup power source, even if a power failure occurs, the data in the holding ball number memory and the counting ball number memory are retained during the power failure.

In this way, when the settlement of the number of balls is started at the time of settlement with the game card, the display of the number of balls on the number-of-balls display 1040 is changed from the lighting display to the movement blinking display, When the number recording is completed, the number-of-balls data is cleared and the display on the number-of-balls display 1040 is changed to flashing simultaneously. Then, when a predetermined period T51 elapses from completion of writing to the game card, the game card is discharged. In addition, the simultaneous blinking continues until the predetermined period T52 elapses after the game card is discharged, and thereafter, the number-of-balls display 1040 is turned off.
Therefore, when recording of the number of balls held on the game card is completed, the display mode of the ball number indicator 1040 is changed (change from moving blinking to simultaneous blinking), so the number of balls held is recorded on the game card even from the outside. It is convenient for the player because it can recognize that the game has been performed.
Further, since the number of balls held in the changed mode (simultaneously flashing) is continued for a predetermined period (T52) after the game card is discharged, it is convenient for the player to check the number of balls settled during that time.
Since the difference in the processing state at the time of payment as described above can be expressed only by changing the display mode of the number-of-balls display 1040. Control efficiency is good.
Furthermore, since the number-of-balls data of the gaming machine (pachinko machine 1001) is cleared when recording of the number of balls on the gaming card is completed, the number-of-balls data is not duplicated and security is high.

The inventive concept of the above configuration is expressed as follows.
In an enclosed ball type gaming machine that performs a game by circulating the enclosed game ball,
A ball number display device capable of displaying the number of balls of the player;
Display control means for controlling the display of the number-of-balls display device,
The display control means includes
When the game card is recorded and discharged to settle the number of balls held,
When the recording of the number of balls held on the game card is completed, the display mode of the number of balls held in the ball number display device is changed,
An encapsulated ball type gaming machine characterized by continuing display of a changed mode until a predetermined period after the gaming card is discharged.

The specific inventive concept of the above configuration is expressed as follows.
The display control means
When the settlement of the number of balls is started, the display of the number of balls on the ball number display device is changed from lighting display to moving blinking display,
When recording of the number of balls on the game card is completed, the display on the ball number display device is changed to flashing simultaneously,
The enclosed ball type gaming machine characterized in that the simultaneous flashing is continued until a predetermined period elapses after the gaming card is discharged.

This background will be described.
In the enclosed ball type gaming machine, the number of balls held is settled by operating a return button or the like, and the number of balls held is recorded on the game card.
However, when the game is ended in the enclosed ball type gaming machine, it may be difficult for the player to adjust the number of balls held.
In addition, the number of balls possessed is recorded on the game card, but the player may be anxious about whether or not the number of balls possessed is recorded on the game card.
In order to notify the player of the record on the game card as described above, complicated controls and devices are required.
Therefore, in this embodiment, by performing control such that the completion of recording of the number of balls held on the game card is expressed only by the difference in the display mode of the ball number display 1040, the control efficiency is high and the player Can make it easy to understand how to adjust the number of balls.

Next, the operation of the display mode of the number of balls at the time of power failure recovery will be described by dividing into section a, section b, section c, and section d in FIG.
<Display when power failure is restored in case of power failure in section a>
The section a is a period from the game start timing t51 to the settlement start timing t52. In this section a, the number of balls held increases or decreases depending on the game result, the data in the ball holding memory changes accordingly, and the ball holding number display 1040 lights and displays the changed number of balls. For example, when the number of balls held becomes 5000, the data in the ball holding number memory becomes 5000, and the number of balls held display 1040 lights the number of balls held “5000”. If a power failure occurs in this state, the RAM 1233 of the payout control device 1230 is backed up by a backup power source during the power failure. Therefore, even if a power failure occurs, the data in the holding ball count memory and the counting ball count memory are retained during the power failure. Yes.
Next, when recovering from the power failure during the period a, the data of the holding ball number memory and the counting ball number memory are retained even during the power failure, so if the data of the holding ball number memory is “5000” at the time of power failure recovery, Based on the data, the number-of-balls display 1040 immediately displays “5000” and lights up.
Therefore, the number of balls held before the power outage is maintained, and when recovering from the power outage, the number of balls held before the power outage is immediately displayed by the lighting of the number-of-balls display 1040. Can be resumed with peace of mind.

<Display when power failure is restored in case of power failure in section b>
The section b is a period from the payment start timing t52 to the completion timing of writing data (total number of balls) to the game card. In this section b, for example, a power failure occurs when the number of balls held is 5000, so the settlement process is interrupted. However, the data in the holding ball number memory is 5000, and if a power failure occurs in this state, the RAM 1233 of the payout control device 1230 is backed up by a backup power source during the power failure. The data of the number memory and the counting ball number memory are retained. Therefore, 5000 of the data of the holding ball number memory is retained.
Next, when recovering from the power failure during the period of section b, the payout control device 1230 reads the data (5000 pieces) of the number-of-balls memory from the RAM 1233 and displays the number of balls on the number-of-balls display 1040. The number-of-balls display 1040 displays the number of balls held “5000” in a moving and blinking manner. In addition, due to the recovery from the power failure, the checkout process is resumed, and when the total number of balls to be written to the game card is completed, the number-of-balls display 1040 changes the display mode from moving blinking to blinking simultaneously. change. For example, “5000” is displayed blinking simultaneously. However, the number of balls held is cleared to “0” in the internal memory. Thereafter, when the writing of the total number of balls to the game card is completed, the game card is discharged from the card unit 1015 (specifically, the card slot 120).

<Display when power failure is restored in case of power failure in sections c to d>
In the sections cd to d, the timing t54 at which the game card is ejected from the timing t53 at which writing of the data (total number of balls) to the game card is completed and the timing at which the ball count indicator 1040 is completely extinguished. This is the period up to t55.
In these sections c to d, for example, when the writing of data to the game card is completed and the number of balls held is 0, the power failure occurs, so the settlement process is completed. Further, the number-of-balls data is cleared (the number-of-balls data in the RAM 1233 is cleared) when the recording of the number of balls data to the game card is completed.
Next, when recovering from the power failure during the period from cd to d, the payout control device 1230 determines that the data writing to the game card has been completed, turns off the number-of-balls display 1040, and displays the number of balls held. Control not to display. Therefore, when a power failure occurs after the number of balls held on the game card is completed, the number-of-balls display 1040 operates so as not to display (turn off) the number of balls held at the time of recovery.
In addition, when recovering from a power outage during the period of section c, the game card was not discharged at the time of the power outage (must be discharged from the card slot 1201 of the card unit 1015; the same applies hereinafter), so the power was recovered from the power outage. Later, the payout controller 1230 operates to eject the game card.
On the other hand, when recovering from a power failure during the period d, since the game card has already been discharged at the time of the power failure, the payout control device 1230 does not perform the operation of discharging the game card after recovery from the power failure. It should be noted that the ball number indicator 1040 operates so as to be extinguished at the time of recovery from a power failure in any of the periods c and d.

In this way, at the normal time when a power failure does not occur during the settlement process, the number-of-balls display 1040 changes the display mode from the lighting display to the movement blinking at the start of the settlement, and the number of balls is moved. The blinking display continues until writing (recording) of the total number of balls to the game card is completed (that is, settlement is completed), and when the number of balls to be recorded on the game card is completed, the number-of-ball display 1040 moves and blinks. The display mode is changed from display to simultaneous flashing display, and the number-of-balls display 40 continues the changed display mode (simultaneous flashing display: simultaneous flashing of “0” display, for example) until a predetermined period after the game card is discharged. To do.
On the other hand, if a power failure occurs after recording of the number of balls held on the game card is completed, the number-of-balls display 1040 does not display the number of balls and is turned off at the time of recovery even after recovery from the power failure.
Therefore, in the normal state, the number-of-balls display 1040 continues the display while changing the display mode from the blinking movement to the simultaneous blinking for a predetermined period after the completion of the settlement, so that the player records the number of balls held on the game card. When the power failure occurs after recording the number of balls on the game card is complete, the ball number indicator 1040 turns off without displaying the number of balls at the time of recovery. Although the player takes the card home, a state in which the number of balls is displayed by the number-of-balls display 1040 can be avoided, and confusion can be prevented.
Further, since the above-described operation can be handled only by changing the display mode of the number-of-balls display 1040 and its backup (backup of the number-of-balls data), the process becomes simple and the control efficiency is good.

The inventive concept of the above configuration is expressed as follows.
In an enclosed ball type gaming machine that performs a game by circulating the enclosed game ball,
A ball number display device capable of displaying the number of balls of the player;
Display control means for controlling the display of the number-of-balls display device,
The display control means includes
When the game card is recorded and discharged to settle the number of balls held,
When the recording of the number of balls held on the game card is completed, the display mode of the number of balls held in the ball number display device is changed,
While continuing to display the changed mode until the predetermined period after the game card is discharged,
Enclosed ball type characterized in that when a power failure occurs after recording of the number of balls held on the game card is completed, control is performed so that the number of balls held in the ball number display device is not displayed at the time of recovery from the power failure, but is turned off. Gaming machine.

This background will be described.
In a conventional gaming machine, for example, one disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2007-215608, updating of common information (for example, the display mode of the ball number indicator, the ball number data, etc.) at the time of settlement by the card unit is a series. After completing the communication procedure.
However, in a sealed ball game machine, if there is a power failure while the number of balls is being settled, the number of balls held (stored in internal memory (for example, RAM)) and the number of balls held will not be displayed depending on the timing of the power failure. There was a risk of alignment.
Therefore, in this embodiment, during normal times (except during a power failure), the display of the number of balls is changed from lighting to moving and blinking at the start of payment, and when the number of balls held is recorded on the game card, The display is changed from moving blinking to simultaneous blinking, and the number-of-balls display 40 keeps the changed display mode (simultaneous blinking) until a predetermined period after the game card is discharged, so that the player holds the game card on the game card. Recognize that the number of balls was recorded, making it convenient.
In addition, when the power failure is recovered after completing the recording of the number of balls held on the game card, the number of balls held display is not performed and the number of balls held display 1040 is turned off. It is possible to avoid the situation where the number of balls held is displayed even though the player is taking home, and to prevent confusion.

Next, the display operation of the counting ball number at the time of power failure restoration will be described.
FIG. 261 is a diagram for explaining operations of the display device 1041 (main liquid crystal display device) and the sub liquid crystal display device 1033 at the time of power failure recovery.
Here, the display device 1041 (main liquid crystal display device) and the sub liquid crystal display device 1033 constitute an effect display device, but the main liquid crystal display device (display device 1041) and the sub liquid crystal display device 1033 as the effect display device are used. Liquid crystal devices capable of displaying images not only in 2D (2D) display but also in 3D (3D) display are used.
As a configuration capable of 3D display, for example, a naked-eye 3D display is used. The autostereoscopic 3D display is designed to display different images on the right and left eyes on a single screen by superimposing a plate-shaped lens called lenticular lens and a vertical stripe filter (aperture grill) called parallax barrier on a normal display. It is.
Note that the main liquid crystal display device (display device 1041) and the sub liquid crystal display device 1033 as presentation display devices use a liquid crystal device that displays only 2D (two-dimensional) display and does not perform 3D (three-dimensional) display. It may be. In this case, the 3D display character appears on the liquid crystal screen as a normal 2D display. Further, stereoscopic display (3D computer graphics) may be performed on a 2D display. A three-dimensional display in this case, for example, a three-dimensional character is also expressed as a 3D character.

In FIG. 261, timing t61 indicates a point in time when the main power supply is turned on upon recovery from a power failure. That is, when the main power supply is turned on at the time of recovery from the power failure at timing t61, the power supply to the game control device 1054, the payout control device 1230, the production control device 1053, etc. and each electronic component is started, Processing such as conversion is performed.
When a predetermined period T61 elapses from timing t61, the initialization of the CPU in the effect control device 1053 is completed, and the screen of the sub liquid crystal display device 1033 can be displayed.
Next, at timing t62, a power failure recovery command is transmitted from the game control device 1054 to the effect control device 1053.
The display device 1041 (main liquid crystal display device) has a black screen during the period from the power-on timing t61 to the timing t62 at which the power failure recovery command is received.
Next, in response to an instruction from the effect control device 1053 at the timing t62, the display device 1041 displays “Now recovering from power failure” on the screen.
Next, when the initialization of the accessory device (for example, the production accessory device 1036) is completed at the timing t63, the display device 1041 stops the display of “currently recovering from power failure”, and the normal display screen (for example, the demonstration display). Screen).

On the other hand, the sub liquid crystal display device 1033 operates as follows.
When the main power supply is turned on at the timing t61 along with the restoration of the power failure, since the initialization of the CPU in the effect control device 1053 is not completed during the period from the timing t61 until the predetermined period T61 elapses, the sub liquid crystal display device The screen 1033 remains black and is a so-called black screen.
Next, when the predetermined period T61 elapses, the initialization of the CPU in the effect control device 1053 is completed, and the screen of the sub liquid crystal display device 1033 can be displayed, and is stored in the sub liquid crystal display device 1033 by the effect control device 1053. The number of counted balls is displayed. On the other hand, when the counting ball number is zero, the counting ball number 0 (zero) is displayed.
The number of counting balls is stored in the counting ball number memory of the RAM 1233 in the payout control device 1230 with a backup power source, but is also stored in the game control device (main board) 1054 and the effect control device 1053 with a backup power source. Yes. The game control device (main board) 1054 and the effect control device 1053 are configured to include, for example, a RAM with a backup power source.
Here, the sub liquid crystal display device 1033 can display the number of counted balls without receiving the power failure recovery command from the game control device 1054. That is, the sub liquid crystal display device 1033 can display the number of counted balls regardless of whether or not a power failure recovery command is received.
Next, at timing t62, the effect control device 1053 receives the power failure recovery command and instructs the display device 1041 (main liquid crystal display device) to display during power failure recovery. Since the sub liquid crystal display device 1033 can display the number of counted balls without receiving a power failure recovery command, the display of the number of counted balls is continued even at timing t62.
Next, when the initialization of the accessory device or the like is completed at timing t63, the sub liquid crystal display device 1033 displays the normal display screen (for example, the counting ball is displayed when there is a counting ball number, and the model name when there is no counting ball number). And the screen that displays the number of special figure hold.

Next, specific examples of screens of the display device 1041 (main liquid crystal display device) and the sub liquid crystal display device 1033 will be described with reference to FIG.
In FIG. 262, FIG. 262 (a) is a normal time and shows a state in which there is no counting ball. A special figure (here, a decorative special figure) is displayed. In addition, the fourth symbol Z is displayed on the display device 1041, but the number of holds HR is not displayed.
On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 262 (a), on the sub liquid crystal display device 1033 arranged on the side of the display device 1041, the model name is displayed as “CRXX”, and the reserved number display is “special”. “FIG. 1: 0” and “Special Figure 2: 0” are displayed. “Special figure 1: 0” means that the number of holdings of special figure 1 is 0, and “Special figure 2: 0” means that the number of holdings of special figure 2 is 0.
When there is no counting ball, not only the display of the model name but also an effect display linked with, for example, the display device 1041 (main liquid crystal display device) is performed. As such an effect display, for example, when there is no counting ball, “2D child character” is displayed on the display device 1041 or the sub liquid crystal display device 1033.

  Next, when the game progresses, a counting ball is generated as shown in FIG. 262 (b), and when the number of reserves is generated, a special figure (decoration) is displayed on the display device 1041 with a symbol of “1, 2, 3”, for example. Special figure) is stopped and displayed, and the fourth symbol Z is displayed on the display device 1041, and four hold numbers HR are displayed. In this case, since there is a counting ball, the model name disappears on the sub liquid crystal display device 1033, information on the counting ball is displayed such as “5000 counting balls”, and “special number” is displayed as the holding number display. “FIG. 1: 4” and “Special Figure 2: 0” are displayed. “Special figure 1: 4” indicates that the number of reserved figures in special figure 1 is four.

Thereafter, when a power failure occurs, the screens of both the display device 1041 and the sub liquid crystal display device 1033 disappear and the operation is stopped. However, since the RAM 1233 of the payout control device 1230 is backed up by a backup power source even during a power failure, the data of the holding ball number memory and the counting ball number memory are retained during the power failure. Therefore, the data 5000 in the counting ball number memory is retained. Further, as described above, the number of counted balls is also stored in the game control device (main board) 1054 and the effect control device 1053 with a backup power supply.
Next, when the main power is turned on along with the restoration of the power failure, when a predetermined period T61 elapses from the main power on timing t61 as shown in FIG. 261, as shown in FIG. After the initialization of the CPU is completed, the screen of the sub liquid crystal display device 1033 can be displayed, and the number of counting balls stored in the counting ball number memory is displayed on the sub liquid crystal display device 1033. In this case, since the number of counting balls was 5000 before the power failure, the display of the counting ball number “5000 counting balls” is resumed on the sub liquid crystal display device 1033. When there is no counting ball number, the counting ball number 0 is displayed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 261, at timing t62, a power failure recovery command is sent from the game control device 1054 to the effect control device 1053, and the display device 1041 displays “Now recovering from power failure” on the screen. Thereby, the player can easily know that the power failure is being restored.
After that, when the initialization of the accessory device or the like is completed at timing t63, the display device 1041 stops displaying “Now recovering from power failure” and shifts to a normal display screen (for example, a demonstration display screen).

As described above, the effect control device 1053 controls the effects of the display device 1041 (main liquid crystal display device) and the sub liquid crystal display device 1033, and includes a RAM with a backup power source, and further includes a game control device (main board) 1054. A RAM with a backup power supply is provided, and at the time of power failure recovery, the display device 1041 (main liquid crystal display device) displays “recovering power failure” in accordance with the control of the effect control device 1054 according to an instruction from the game control device (main board) 1054. The sub liquid crystal display device 1033 displays the stored number of count balls (stored in the effect control device 1053) (the number of count balls is 0) without an instruction from the game control device (main board) 1054. The following effects are obtained.
Since the number of counted balls is stored in the game control device (main board) 1054 and the effect control device 1053, security is high.
Further, even when there is an abnormality in the game control device (main board) 1054 during a power failure, the number of counted balls stored in the effect control device 1053 can be displayed on the sub liquid crystal display device 1033. I know that there is no, and I am safe.
In particular, when the number of counted balls is managed by the game control device 1054 or the payout control device 1230, if there is a problem with the game control device 1054 or the payout control device 1230 at the time of a power failure, Data) may be lost, but in this embodiment, even if there is a malfunction in the game control device 1054 or the payout control device 1230 at the time of a power outage, the performance control device 1053 stores the counted number of balls, so the power failure recovery Since the number of counted balls is displayed on the sub liquid crystal display device 1033 promptly sometimes, a great sense of security can be given to the player, and the reliability can be improved.

The inventive concept of the above configuration is expressed as follows.
It is possible to play the game by circulating the enclosed game balls and to control the game control device for managing the progress of the game and the display device for the effect based on the command from the game control device. In a sealed ball game machine equipped with a production control device,
A main liquid crystal display device, a sub liquid crystal display device, and a RAM having backup means as the display device for presentation,
The production control device
In response to an instruction from the game control device, the main liquid crystal display device is controlled so as to display during power failure recovery upon recovery from power failure,
The sub liquid crystal display device is controlled so as to display the number of counted balls stored in the RAM at the time of recovery from a power failure even if there is no instruction from the game control device. Type game machine.
Here, the display device 1041 constitutes a main liquid crystal display device, and the display device 1041 and the sub liquid crystal display device 1033 constitute an effect display device.
The number of counted balls stored in the RAM of the effect display device is stored including the state of the number of counted balls of zero.

This background will be described.
In conventional gaming machines such as those disclosed in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2006-325929, the number of balls that can be fired and the number of balls that can be fired (corresponding to the number of balls counted in this publication) Display on a liquid crystal display).
However, in the conventional gaming machine described in the above publication, there is a possibility that an unexpected situation may occur during a power failure.
That is, in the enclosed ball type gaming machine, when the counting ball is managed by the main board (game control apparatus) or the payout board (payout control apparatus), the main board (game control apparatus) or the payout board (payout control apparatus) at the time of power failure If there is a problem, the number of counted balls may be lost, which may cause anxiety to the player.
Therefore, in this embodiment, the sub liquid crystal display device 1033 is stored (stored in the effect control device 1053) of the counted number of balls even if there is no instruction from the game control device (main board) 1054 when the power failure is restored. The display (including the display of the counting ball number 0) is performed to eliminate the possibility that the counting ball number disappears, and to give the player a sense of security.
Next, as a modification of the fifteenth embodiment, the sub liquid crystal display device 1033 may be configured not only to display the number of counted balls but also to display the number of balls, for example. This is convenient because the player knows the number of balls held in addition to the number of counted balls.

Next, an operation for detecting an illegal sphere (magnetic sphere) will be described.
FIG. 263 shows an operation timing chart for detecting an illegal sphere (magnetic sphere).
When the pachinko machine 1001 is started and the power supply device 1058 starts supplying power when the amusement store is opened, the payout control device 1230 (payout substrate) operates the polishing device 1306 for a predetermined period when the power is turned on to polish the encapsulated sphere. Is executed.
That is, the dispensing control device 1230 performs initial setting of the polishing device 1306 at power-on timing t71. In this initial setting, the upper switching solenoid 1336S is operated so that the upper switching valve 1336 opens the bypass passage 1304, and The lower switching solenoid 1310S is operated so that the switching valve 1310 opens the polishing inlet passage 1319 (the enclosed ball flows into the polishing apparatus 1306).
In FIG. 263, the state in which the upper switching valve 1336 opens the bypass passage 1304 and the encapsulated sphere flows into the polishing apparatus 1306 is represented by the upper switching valve 1336 switched to the bypass side (however, abbreviated as bypass side). . Further, the operation in which the upper switching valve 1336 closes the bypass passage 1304 is in a normal state in which the enclosed ball does not flow into the polishing apparatus 1306, and is therefore indicated as the normal side.
At this timing t71, the polishing motor 1312 is activated (ON), and the feeding motor 1333 of the feeding device 1302 is activated (ON). In FIG. 263, the start of the motor is indicated as ON and the stop is indicated as OFF. Moreover, the notation of ON / OFF is the same also about the switch and electromagnet which are mentioned later. As a result, the encapsulated sphere flows into the polishing apparatus 1306 and polishing of the encapsulated sphere is started, and the polished sphere is fed to the upper passage 1303 by the feeding device 1302. Thereafter, the enclosing ball again flows from the upper passage 1303 through the bypass passage 1304 and the polishing inlet passage 1319 to the polishing apparatus 1306, and circulates in the polishing circulation path without firing the enclosing ball.

That is, the encapsulated sphere in the upper passage 1303 is circulated without firing the encapsulated sphere through a path that returns to the upper passage 1303 through the bypass passage 1304, the lower passage 1301, the polishing device 1306, and the feeding device 1302. In the process of the ball circulating in such a circulation path, the electromagnet 1341 is turned on for a predetermined time TD to determine whether or not the game ball is a normal non-magnetic ball.
Therefore, the electromagnet 1341 is turned on at the same time as the feed outlet switch 1334 is turned on at timing t72, and the electromagnet 1341 is kept on for a predetermined time TD (for example, 500 ms). The predetermined time TD corresponds to the fraud determination period.
Here, if the game ball (encapsulated ball) is a normal non-magnetic ball, it is not attracted when the electromagnet 1341 is turned on for a predetermined time TD, so it passes through the feed outlet switch 1334 and is discharged to the upper passage 1303. Since the time until the passed sphere passes through the second encapsulated sphere detection switch 1165 is shorter than the predetermined time TD, it can be determined that the sphere is a normal non-magnetic sphere. Note that the predetermined time TD is set to be slightly longer than the time from when a normal non-magnetic sphere passes through the lifting outlet switch 1334 until it passes through the second enclosed ball detection switch 1165.
In FIG. 263, a case where the ball is determined to be a normal non-magnetic sphere is described as an enclosed sphere detection 2SW (normal).
When a regular non-magnetic sphere passes through the feed outlet switch 1334 of the feeding device 1302 and is discharged to the upper passage 1303, the first non-magnetic ball is discharged at the timing t73 when a predetermined time T71 has elapsed from the timing t72 when the electromagnet 1341 is turned on. 2 Enclosed ball detection switch 1165 is turned on. The timing t73 at which the second enclosing ball detection switch 1165 is turned on is in the area of the predetermined time TD at which the electromagnet 1341 is turned on. Therefore, since the period from the timing t72 when the electromagnet 1341 is turned on to the timing t73 when the second encapsulated ball detection switch 1165 is turned on (predetermined time T71) is shorter than the predetermined time TD, Determined.

On the other hand, if the game ball is an illegal magnetic ball, it is attracted when the electromagnet 1341 is turned on for a predetermined time TD, so that the ball discharged through the feed outlet switch 1334 and discharged into the upper passage 1303 is the first one. Since the time until it passes through the 2-enclosed ball detection switch 1165 is longer than the predetermined time TD, it can be determined that the ball is an illegal magnetic body.
In FIG. 263, a case where the ball is determined to be an illegal sphere of magnetic material is represented as an enclosed ball detection 2SW (abnormal).
When an illegal magnetic ball passes through the feed outlet switch 1334 of the feeding device 1302 and is discharged to the upper passage 1303, the time further from the timing t74 that exceeds the predetermined time TD from the timing t72 when the electromagnet 1341 is turned on. At the timing t75 when elapses, the second enclosed ball detection switch 1165 is finally turned on. The timing t75 when the second encapsulated ball detection switch 1165 is turned on is not in the area of the predetermined time TD when the electromagnet 1341 is turned on, and is a time when the predetermined time TD is exceeded.
Therefore, the period from the timing t72 when the electromagnet 1341 is turned on to the timing t75 when the second enclosed ball detection switch 1165 is turned on (the period from the timing t72 to the timing t75 is referred to as the predetermined time T72) far exceeds the predetermined time TD. Therefore, it is determined as an illegal magnetic sphere.

When it is determined that the ball is an illegal magnetic body, the ball removal solenoid 1344S is immediately turned on at the same timing as the timing t75 when the second enclosed ball detection switch 1165 is turned on, and the end of the bypass passage 1304 is turned on by the ball removal valve 1344. An operation of collecting the illegal magnetic sphere that has opened to the bypass passage 1304 and flowing into the bypass passage 1305 and collecting it in the collection box 1345 is performed. Thereby, an illegal magnetic sphere can be automatically discharged to the outside of the enclosed sphere circulation path.
In FIG. 263, a state in which the ball removal valve 1344 opens the end of the bypass passage 1304 and flows the ball into the ball removal passage 1305 is switched to the ball removal side (however, abbreviated as the ball removal side). It is written. Further, the state in which the ball removal valve 1344 closes the end of the bypass passage 1304 and does not allow the ball to flow into the ball removal passage 1305 is a normal state in which the ball does not flow into the ball removal passage 1305. It is written.

Next, at timing t76, the polishing motor 1312 is turned off and the feed motor 1333 is also turned off. Thereby, the polishing of the encapsulated sphere is completed. Next, at timing t77, the ball removal valve 1344 operates so as to close the end of the bypass passage 1304 and prevent the ball from flowing into the ball removal passage 1305. That is, the ball removal valve 1344 switches the path of the enclosed sphere to the normal side so that the enclosed sphere does not flow into the sphere removal passage 1305. Thereby, the ball removing operation of the enclosing ball is completed.
Next, at a timing t78, the upper switching valve 1336 closes the bypass passage 1304, so that the sealed ball does not flow into the polishing apparatus 1306 via the bypass passage 1304. At this time, since the bypass passage 1304 is closed, the encapsulated ball is guided from the upper passage 1303 toward the launching device 1037, and is in a playable state.
That is, the upper switching valve 1336 passes through the path of the encapsulated sphere so that the encapsulated sphere does not flow into the bypass passage 1304 from the upper passage 1303 and is guided to the launching device 1037 so that the sphere can be launched. Switch to the normal side.

Thus, when the feed outlet switch 1334 detects the encapsulated sphere, the electromagnet 1341 is turned on for a predetermined time (TD), and the time until the encapsulated sphere is detected by the second encapsulated sphere detection switch 1165 is determined as the fraud determination period ( If TD) is exceeded, it is determined that the encapsulated sphere is an illegal magnetic sphere, and the illegal magnetic sphere flows into the sphere extraction passage 1305 by the operation of the sphere extraction valve 1344 and is recovered in the recovery box 1345. The
Therefore, there are the following effects.
It does not require a special detection device for detecting illegal magnetic spheres and is efficient.
In other words, the detection of illegal balls using the feed outlet switch 1334 and the second sealed ball detection switch 1165, which are sensors for detecting a blocked ball and confirming the number of sealed balls, eliminates the need for a special detection device. It is low cost and efficient.
In addition, when an illegal sphere (magnetic sphere) is detected, the encapsulated sphere is removed, so that even if a magnetic sphere is mixed, the illegal magnetic sphere can be quickly eliminated and the magnet illegal It can be effectively prevented.

The inventive concept of the above configuration is expressed as follows.
In an enclosed ball type gaming machine that plays a game using a non-magnetic ball as a sealed ball,
A first encapsulated sphere detecting means arranged in a path through which the encapsulated sphere flows and capable of detecting the encapsulated sphere;
A second encapsulated sphere detecting means that is disposed in a path through which the encapsulated sphere flows and is capable of detecting the encapsulated sphere at a position away from the first enclosed sphere detecting means by a predetermined distance;
An electromagnet is disposed between the first encapsulated sphere detecting means and the second encapsulated sphere detecting means,
The electromagnet is configured to attract a magnetic sphere,
When the first encapsulated sphere detecting means detects the encapsulated sphere, the electromagnet is turned on for a predetermined time, and if the time until the enclosed sphere is detected by the second enclosed sphere detecting means exceeds the fraud determination period, the encapsulated sphere Illegal sphere determination means for determining that is an unauthorized magnetic sphere;
An enclosed ball game machine characterized by comprising:
Here, the feed outlet switch 1334 constitutes a first enclosed sphere detection means, the second enclosed sphere detection switch 1165 constitutes a second enclosed sphere detection means, and the payout control device 1230 constitutes an illegal sphere determination means. To do.

Further, the concept of the invention for removing a ball when an illegal sphere is detected is expressed as follows.
When it is determined by the illegal sphere determining means that the encapsulated sphere is an illegal magnetic sphere,
An encapsulated ball type gaming machine characterized by comprising ball removal path switching means for switching a path so that a ball of a path through which an encapsulated ball flows flows into the ball removal path.
Here, the ball removal valve 1344 and the ball removal solenoid 1344S constitute a ball removal path switching means.

This background will be described.
In a conventional gaming machine, for example, one disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2008-284217, a magnetic sphere detection device (a magnetic sphere magnetized by an electromagnet) is used when a non-magnetic sphere is enclosed. To detect).
However, in the conventional gaming machine described in the above publication, if a sealed ball is made of a non-magnetic material as a countermeasure against fraud with a magnet, a magnet fraud can be prevented, but a special detection device is required. Moreover, when a magnetic ball is mixed, security is lowered and there is a risk of fraud.
Therefore, in this embodiment, when the feed outlet switch 1334 detects the encapsulated sphere, the electromagnet 1341 is turned on for a predetermined time (TD), and the time until the encapsulated sphere is detected by the second encapsulated sphere detection switch 1165 is illegally determined. If the period (TD) is exceeded, it is determined that the encapsulated sphere is an illegal magnetic sphere, and the illegal magnetic sphere is removed and collected. Therefore, even if a magnetic ball is mixed, it is easily discharged, so security is improved and fraud can be prevented.

Next, an operation for detecting an illegal sphere (small sphere) will be described.
FIG. 264 shows an operation timing chart for detecting illegal spheres (small spheres).
Similarly to the case of FIG. 263, when the pachinko machine 1001 is activated and the power supply device 1058 starts supplying power, the payout control device 1230 (payout substrate) operates the polishing device 1306 for a predetermined period when the power is turned on, thereby enclosing the ball. To perform polishing.
That is, at the timing t81 when the power is turned on, the dispensing control device 1230 performs initial setting of the polishing device 1306. In this initial setting, the upper switching solenoid 1336S is operated so that the upper switching valve 1336 opens the bypass passage 1304, and The lower switching solenoid 1310S is operated so that the switching valve 1310 opens the polishing inlet passage 1319 (the enclosed ball flows into the polishing apparatus 1306).
In the operation of the upper switching valve 1336 in FIG. 264, the meanings of “bypass side” and “normal side” are the same as those in FIG.
Further, at this timing t81, the polishing motor 1312 is activated, and the feeding motor 1333 of the feeding device 1302 is activated. Thus, as in the case of FIG. 263, the encapsulated sphere is polished by the polishing device 1306 and transferred to the upper passage 1303 by the feeding device 1302, and then passes through the bypass passage 1304 and the polishing inlet passage 1319 from the upper passage 1303. By flowing into the polishing apparatus 1306, the polishing ball is circulated without firing the encapsulated sphere.

In the process of the ball circulating in such a circulation path, the small ball sensor 1342 determines whether or not the game ball is a regular ball.
The small ball sensor 1342 is provided to determine whether or not the size of the game ball is smaller than a normal one, and detects a normal ball (for example, diameter = 11 mm), but is smaller than the normal one. A small sphere (for example, a diameter = 10.5 mm or less) is not detected.
Next, when the first encapsulated ball detection switch 1164 is turned on at timing t82 and the passage of the ball is detected, if the game ball is a regular sphere, the first encapsulated ball detection switch 1164 is turned on and within a predetermined period T82. The small ball sensor 1342 is turned on at timing t83.
That is, if the game ball is a regular ball, the small ball sensor 1342 is turned on at the timing t83 when the period T81 has elapsed after the first encapsulated ball detection switch 1164 is turned on, and this period T81 is longer than the predetermined period T82. It is getting shorter.
This is because the time from when the ball passed through the feed outlet switch 1334 and discharged to the upper passage 1303 passes through the first enclosed ball detection switch 1164 to pass through the small ball sensor 1342 is substantially constant. This is because time T81 is reached.
In FIG. 264, the case where the game ball is determined to be a regular ball is described as a small ball sensor (normal).

On the other hand, when the game ball is an abnormal ball (small ball), the small ball sensor 1342 is not turned on within a predetermined period T82 after the first enclosed ball detection switch 1164 is turned on. This is because the small ball sensor 1342 is an abnormal ball even if the ball passed through the feed outlet switch 1334 and discharged to the upper passage 1303 passes through the first enclosed ball detection switch 1164 and then passes through the small ball sensor 1342. This is because the (small sphere) is not detected and the detection signal is not turned on.
Therefore, when a game ball is flowing through the upper passage 1303, if the small ball sensor 1342 is not turned on within a predetermined period T82 after the first enclosed ball detection switch 1164 is turned on, the game ball is an illegal ball (small ball). ) Can be determined. As shown in FIG. 264, the small ball sensor 1342 is not turned on even when the timing t87 elapses, and remains off.
In FIG. 264, a case where it is determined as an illegal sphere (small sphere) is described as a small sphere sensor (abnormal).

When it is determined that the ball is an illegal ball (small ball), the ball removal solenoid 1344S is turned on at the timing 84 when the predetermined period T82 has elapsed, and the end of the bypass passage 1304 is opened by the ball removal valve 1344 to bypass the bypass passage 1304. The illegal sphere (small sphere) that has flowed down to the sphere is caused to flow into the ball removal passage 1305 and collected in the collection box 1345. Thereby, the illegal sphere (small sphere) can be automatically discharged to the outside of the encapsulated sphere circulation path.
In FIG. 264, a state in which the ball removal valve 1344 opens the end of the bypass passage 1304 and causes the ball to flow into the ball removal passage 1305 is switched to the ball removal side (however, abbreviated as the ball removal side). It is written. Further, the state in which the ball removal valve 1344 closes the end of the bypass passage 1304 and does not allow the ball to flow into the ball removal passage 1305 is a normal state in which the ball does not flow into the ball removal passage 1305. It is written.

Next, at timing t85, the polishing motor 1312 is turned off and the feed motor 1333 is also turned off. Thereby, the polishing of the encapsulated sphere is completed. Next, at timing t86, the ball removal valve 1344 operates so as to close the end of the bypass passage 1304 and prevent the ball from flowing into the ball removal passage 1305. That is, the ball removal valve 1344 switches the path of the enclosed sphere to the normal side so that the enclosed sphere does not flow into the sphere removal passage 1305. Thereby, the ball removing operation of the enclosing ball is completed.
Next, at the timing t87, the upper switching valve 1336 closes the bypass passage 1304, so that the sealed ball does not flow into the polishing apparatus 1306 via the bypass passage 1304. At this time, since the bypass passage 1304 is closed, the encapsulated ball is guided from the upper passage 1303 toward the launching device 1037, and is in a playable state.
That is, the upper switching valve 1336 passes through the path of the encapsulated sphere so that the encapsulated sphere does not flow into the bypass passage 1304 from the upper passage 1303 and is guided to the launching device 1037 so that the sphere can be launched. Switch to the normal side.

In this way, even if the sphere passing through the feed outlet switch 1334 and discharged to the upper passage 1303 passes through the first encapsulated sphere detection switch 1164 and passes through the small sphere sensor 1342, the encapsulated sphere becomes an abnormal sphere ( Small ball), the small ball sensor 1342 does not detect the abnormal ball (small ball), and the detection signal is not turned on. Therefore, when a game ball is flowing through the upper passage 1303, if the small ball sensor 1342 is not turned on within a predetermined period T82 after the first enclosed ball detection switch 1164 is turned on, the game ball is an illegal ball (small ball). ) And the ball removal valve 1344 is actuated so that the illegal ball (small ball) flows into the ball removal passage 1305 and is collected in the collection box 1345.
Therefore, there are the following effects.
The detection of illegal spheres (small spheres) using the first encapsulated sphere detection switch 1164, which is a sensor for detecting encapsulated spheres and detecting the number of encapsulated spheres, eliminates the need for a special detection device and reduces costs. And efficient.
In addition, when an illegal sphere (small sphere) is detected, the encapsulated sphere is removed, so even if an illegal sphere (small sphere) is mixed, It is possible to effectively prevent fraud due to illegal spheres (small spheres).

The inventive concept of the above configuration is expressed as follows.
In an enclosed ball type gaming machine that circulates and uses an enclosed ball,
A first encapsulated sphere detecting means arranged in a path through which the encapsulated sphere flows and capable of detecting the encapsulated sphere;
A small sphere detecting means arranged in a path through which the enclosed sphere flows and capable of detecting an enclosed sphere having a regular diameter at a position separated by a predetermined distance downstream of the first enclosed sphere detecting means;
If the small sphere detection means does not detect the passage of the sphere even after a predetermined period has elapsed after the first encapsulated sphere detection means detects the encapsulated sphere, the incorrect sphere is smaller than the regular diameter. An illegal sphere determination means for determining that
An enclosed ball game machine characterized by comprising:
Here, the first enclosed ball detection switch 1164 constitutes a first enclosed ball detection means, the small ball sensor 1342 constitutes a small ball detection means, and the payout control device 1230 constitutes an illegal ball determination means.

Further, the concept of the invention for removing a sphere when an illegal sphere (small sphere) is detected is expressed as follows.
When it is determined by the illegal sphere determining means that the enclosed sphere is an illegal small sphere smaller than a regular diameter,
An encapsulated ball type gaming machine characterized by comprising ball removal path switching means for switching a path so that a ball of a path through which an encapsulated ball flows flows into the ball removal path.
Here, the ball removal valve 1344 and the ball removal solenoid 1344S constitute a ball removal path switching means.

This background will be described.
In a conventional gaming machine, for example, one disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2008-284217, a magnetic sphere detection device (a magnetic sphere magnetized by an electromagnet) is used when a non-magnetic sphere is enclosed. To detect).
However, in the conventional gaming machine described in the above publication, if the encapsulated ball is made of a non-magnetic material as a countermeasure against improper use of the magnet, it is possible to prevent magnet fraud. If it is mixed, the security will be lowered and there is a risk of fraud.
Therefore, in this embodiment, even if the ball passing through the feed outlet switch 1334 and discharged to the upper passage 1303 passes through the first sealed ball detection switch 1164 and then passes through the small ball sensor 1342, the sealed ball is abnormal. In the case of a sphere (small sphere), the small sphere sensor 1342 does not detect an abnormal sphere (small sphere) and the detection signal is not turned on. If the small ball sensor 1342 is not turned on within a predetermined period T82 after the first encapsulated ball detection switch 1164 is turned on, the game ball is determined to be an illegal ball (small ball), and the illegal ball (small ball) is removed. To collect. Therefore, even if illegal spheres (small spheres) are mixed, since they are easily discharged, security is improved and fraud can be prevented.

Next, among the effects derived from the configuration of the fifteenth embodiment, the effects derived from the same configuration as that of the first embodiment described above are the same in the fifteenth embodiment, and thus the duplicate description is omitted.
Here, the effect of the night monitoring switch 1126 will be described with respect to the effect derived from the configuration of the fifteenth embodiment.
The nighttime monitoring switch 1126 according to the fifteenth embodiment has the following effects.
(1) The night monitoring switch 1126 according to the fifteenth embodiment outputs the night monitoring information to the payout control device 1230 when there is a request for night monitoring information from the payout control device 1230. Therefore, even when the pachinko machine 1001 is turned on, the night control information is requested from the payout control device 1230 to the night monitoring switch 1126 after the initialization of the payout control device 1230 is completed. The monitoring information can be reliably taken into the payout control device 1230.
(2) Since the night monitoring switch 1126 stores the number of times the frame is opened and the number of disconnections and outputs it to the outside (payout control device 1230), more detailed night monitoring information can be output compared to the first embodiment.
(3) The payout control device 1230 can determine the fraud level from the nighttime monitoring information fetched from the nighttime monitoring switch 1126, so that the number of frame opening times and the number of wire breaks can be grasped in detail, and security can be improved.
(4) Since the payout control device 1230 determines the illegal level from the night monitoring information captured from the night monitoring switch 1126 and outputs it to the card unit 1015, priority is given to a table with a high illegal level (a table with a high possibility of fraud). Can be inspected automatically and is efficient.
(5) Since a single night monitoring switch 1126 can detect a plurality of types of data (frame opening count, disconnection count, etc.) relating to frame opening and main board removal, it is efficient in monitoring nighttime illegal information.

In addition, there are the following as modifications of the night monitoring switch 1126.
<Modification 1>
The night monitoring switch may monitor and store the frame opening time.
In this way, the possibility of fraud at night can be more efficiently confirmed. In other words, nighttime fraud can be monitored more finely, and security is improved.
<Modification 2>
The night monitoring switch itself may store an unauthorized level (information in which the number of times the frame is opened, the number of disconnections, etc. is divided into a plurality of levels).
In this way, since the payout control device 1230 does not require processing for determining the fraud level, the processing load on the payout control device 1230 can be reduced.
"Modification of Example 15"

Next, a modification of the fifteenth embodiment will be described.
FIG. 265 is a diagram illustrating a modified example of the fifteenth embodiment, and this modified example is obtained by changing the arrangement location of the feeding device. .
FIG. 265 is a cross-sectional view showing a circulation path and the like of the game ball in a state where the effect control device 1053 and the like are removed from the back mechanism of the pachinko machine 2001.
In FIG. 265, a lower passage 2301, a feeding device 2302, an upper passage 2303, and a bypass passage 1304 are provided to constitute a circulation path of game balls, and a ball removal passage 1305 is provided on the lower side of the bypass passage 1304. Is provided.
For convenience of explanation, the same constituent members as those in the fifteenth embodiment will be denoted by the same reference numerals as those in the fifteenth embodiment, and a duplicate description thereof will be omitted.
The lower passage 2301 has a structure that is inclined by a predetermined angle so that a sphere gently flows through the lower passage 2301 by its own weight, and is bent in the middle and connected to the inlet of the feeding device 2302.
A polishing device 1306 is disposed below the lower passage 2301. The polishing device 1306 polishes the encapsulated sphere, and when the lower switching valve 1310 in the middle of the lower passage 2301 is open, the polishing inlet passage as shown by the arrow from the lower passage 2301 through the lower switching valve 1310 is shown. While the ball flowing in from 1319 is conveyed by the conveying screw 1320 by the power of the polishing motor 1312, the ball is polished by a polishing member 1314 (for example, a polishing cloth) disposed inside and discharged from the lower outlet 2315. . Note that the sphere discharged from the lower outlet 2315 passes through the lower passage 2301 toward the inlet of the feeding device 2302.

The lower switching valve 1310 includes a lower switching solenoid 1310S. When the lower switching solenoid 1310S is off, the valve body of the lower switching valve 1310 does not slide, and the valve body is urged by a spring to close the polishing inlet passage 1319. Thus, the sphere is prevented from flowing into the polishing apparatus 1306. At this time, the sphere flows from the out passage 1331 or the bypass passage 1304 through the lower passage 2301, passes through the lower passage 2301 as it is, toward the inlet of the feeding device 2302, and does not flow into the polishing device 1306.
In FIG. 265, the symbol “◯” indicates the movement of the game ball (encapsulated ball) together with the arrow.
On the other hand, when the lower switching solenoid 1310S is turned on, the valve body of the lower switching valve 1310 is sucked and slid by the lower switching solenoid 1310S, the polishing inlet passage 1319 is opened, and the ball in the lower passage 2301 is moved to the polishing apparatus 1306 by gravity. Operates to flow in. As a result, the sphere that has flowed into the lower passage 2301 from the out passage 1331 or the bypass passage 1304 is guided by gravity to the polishing inlet passage 1319 and flows into the polishing apparatus 1306, where ball polishing is performed.

The polishing apparatus 1306 is provided with a polishing inlet switch 1321, a polishing motor switch 1322, a polishing pad motor 1323, and a polishing pad unit switch 1324, and these configurations are the same as those in the fifteenth embodiment.
The lower switching valve 1310 described above is arranged in the middle of the lower passage 2301, and an out passage 1331 through which the out ball and the safe ball pass is opened at a position facing the lower switching valve 1310.
A polishing inlet passage 1319 is disposed at a position facing the out passage 1331, and the lower switching valve 1310 is disposed at a position where the polishing inlet passage 1319 desires the lower passage 2301. Further, the upstream side of the lower passage 2301 (the right side in FIG. 265) communicates with the bypass passage 1304.
Therefore, a ball from the out passage 1331 (a ball that goes out of the game board 1020 after the game is finished) and a ball from the bypass passage 1304 can flow into the lower passage 2301.

Either the sphere that has passed through the lower passage 2301 without flowing into the polishing apparatus 1306 or the sphere that has flowed into the polishing apparatus 1306 and finished polishing and discharged from the lower outlet 2315 is directed toward the inlet of the feeding apparatus 2302 and fed. The sphere flowing into the device 2302 is detected by the feed inlet switch 2332.
The feeding device 2302 operates the feeding motor 2333 to feed the ball that has passed through the feeding inlet switch 2332, as shown by the arrow, and discharges it to the upper passage 2303 via the feeding outlet switch 2334. The feed outlet switch 2334 detects a ball discharged from the feed device 2302.
In addition, the feeding device 2302 includes a feeding motor switch 2335, and the feeding motor switch 2335 detects the operation of the feeding motor 2333.

The ball discharged to the upper passage 2303 via the feed outlet switch 2334 flows through the upper passage 2303 and is blocked by the upper switching valve 1336 when the upper switching valve 1336 is closed, and stays in the launching device 1037. It is configured to supply spheres. The launching device 1037 launches a game ball from the upper part of the game board 1020 toward the game area 1022.
The upper passage 2303 has a structure that is inclined by a predetermined angle so that the sphere gently flows through the upper passage 2303 by its own weight. In the upper passage 2303, an electromagnet 2341, a second enclosed sphere detection switch 2165 (encapsulated sphere detection 2SW), a first enclosed sphere detection switch 2164 (encapsulated sphere detection 1SW), and a small ball sensor 2342 are arranged.
Here, the functions of the electromagnet 2341, the second encapsulated sphere detection switch 2165, the first encapsulated sphere detection switch 2164, and the small ball sensor 2342 are the same as those in the fifteenth embodiment.
Therefore, when the feed outlet switch 2334 detects the passage of the ball, the time until the ball passes through the second sealed ball detection switch 2165 without being affected by the electromagnet 2341 after the electromagnet 2341 is turned on for a predetermined time. The former is influenced by the electromagnet 2341 by comparing the time until the electromagnet 2341 is turned on for a predetermined time and the sphere is attracted to the electromagnet 2341 and then passes through the second enclosed sphere detection switch 2165. Therefore, it is determined that the sphere of a normal non-magnetic material, and the latter is an illegal sphere of magnetic material because it is affected by the electromagnet 2341.

Whether the game ball is a regular non-magnetic ball or not is determined by the electromagnet 2341 during a predetermined period when the pachinko machine 2001 is turned on (for example, when the store is opened), as in the fifteenth embodiment. . In this predetermined period, the upper switching solenoid 1336S is turned on, the valve body of the upper switching valve 1336 is sucked, the end of the upper passage 2303 is opened, and the ball of the upper passage 2303 flows into the bypass passage 1304. Yes. At this time, the ball removal solenoid 1344S does not operate, and the inlet of the ball removal passage 1305 is closed by the ball removal valve 1344. Further, when the pachinko machine 2001 is turned on, the polishing apparatus 1306 is also operated to polish the encapsulated sphere.
Accordingly, the encapsulated sphere of the upper passage 2303 circulates along a path that returns to the upper passage 2303 again through the bypass passage 1304, the lower passage 2301, the polishing device 1306, and the feeding device 2302. In the process of the ball circulating in such a circulation path, the electromagnet 2341 is turned on for a predetermined time TD to determine whether or not the game ball is a normal non-magnetic ball.

In this case, if the game ball is a regular non-magnetic ball, it is not attracted when the electromagnet 2341 is turned on for a predetermined time TD, so that the ball discharged through the feed outlet switch 2334 and discharged into the upper passage 2303 Since the time until it passes through the second enclosed ball detection switch 2165 is shorter than the predetermined time TD, it can be determined that the ball is a normal non-magnetic sphere. Here, the predetermined time TD is set to be slightly longer than the time from when the normal non-magnetic sphere passes through the lifting outlet switch 2334 until it passes through the second enclosed ball detection switch 2165.
On the other hand, if the game ball is an illegal magnetic ball, it is attracted when the electromagnet 2341 is turned on for a predetermined time TD, so that the ball passed through the feed outlet switch 2334 and discharged into the upper passage 2303 is the first. Since the time until it passes through the 2-enclosed ball detection switch 2165 becomes longer than the predetermined time TD, it can be determined that the ball is an illegal magnetic body.
Therefore, when the electromagnet 2341 is turned on for a predetermined time TD, the time until the ball passing through the feed outlet switch 2334 and discharged to the upper passage 2303 passes the second enclosed ball detection switch 2165 is set to the predetermined time TD. If exceeded, the payout control device 1230 determines that the ball is an illegal magnetic body, turns on the ball removal solenoid 1344S, opens the end of the bypass passage 1304 with the ball removal valve 1344, and is in the bypass passage 1304. The sphere is caused to flow into the ball removal passage 1305 and collected in the collection box 1345.

In addition, a replenishment box portion 2343 is connected to the upper passage 2303 between the feed outlet switch 2334 and the second enclosed ball detection switch 2165, and the replenishment box portion 2343 replenishes the upper passage 2303 with a new game ball. Is possible.
It should be noted that if the ball feeding inlet switch 2332 does not detect a ball passing through the rod feeding inlet switch 2332 for a certain period of time or more when the polishing apparatus 1306 is operating, it is determined that there is an abnormality such as a clogged ball in the polishing apparatus 1306. You may make it avoid that the grinding motor 1312 of 1306 continues rotating.

Here, the sphere fed by the feeding device 2302 and discharged to the upper passage 2303 through the feeding outlet switch 2334 (or the sphere supplied from the supply box portion 2343 and discharged to the upper passage 2303) Since the passage 2303 has a structure that is inclined by a predetermined angle, the momentum of the sphere flowing down is reduced, and the passage 230 moves down gently. Then, the first enclosing ball detection switch 2164 (enclosed sphere detection 1SW), the second encapsulated sphere detection switch 2165 (encapsulated sphere detection 2SW), and the small ball sensor 2342 are sequentially arranged by the dead weight of the sphere flowing into the upper passage 2303. Is blocked by an upper switching valve 1336 that passes through the upper passage 2303 that is normally closed (except when the ball is removed) and is guided toward the launcher 1037 from the launcher 1037 to the upper part of the game board 1020. Fired towards.
The upper switching valve 1336 includes an upper switching solenoid 1336S. When the upper switching solenoid 1336S is off, the valve body of the upper switching valve 1336 does not slide, and the valve body is urged by a spring so that the upper passage 2303 The end (the communication portion with the bypass passage 1304) is closed so that the sphere does not flow into the bypass passage 1304. At this time, the sphere is guided from the upper passage 2303 toward the launching device 1037 and is prevented from flowing into the bypass passage 1304.
On the other hand, when the upper switching solenoid 1336S is turned on, the valve body of the upper switching valve 1336 is sucked and slid by the upper switching solenoid 1336S, and the end of the upper passage 2303 (the communication portion with the bypass passage 1304) is opened to open the upper passage. The sphere at 2303 is operated to flow into the bypass passage 1304 by gravity. As a result, the sphere of the upper passage 2303 is guided to the bypass passage 1304 by gravity and is not supplied to the launching device 1037.
The operation of the upper switching solenoid 1336S is performed by operating the ball removal switch 1183 of the payout control device 1230. When the ball removal switch 1183 is turned on, the upper switching solenoid 1336S is turned on and the upper passage 1303 is operated. The sphere of the upper passage 2303 is allowed to flow into the bypass passage 1304.

A ball removal valve 1344 is provided below the bypass passage 1304. The ball removal valve 1344 includes a ball removal solenoid 1344S. When the ball removal solenoid 1344S is off, the valve body of the ball removal valve 1344 does not slide, and the valve body is urged by a spring so that the end of the bypass passage 1304 is provided. The (communication portion with the ball passage 1305) is closed so that the ball does not flow into the ball passage 1305. At this time, the sphere is guided from the bypass passage 1304 toward the lower passage 2301 and is prevented from flowing into the sphere removal passage 1305.
On the other hand, when the ball removal solenoid 1344S is turned on, the valve body of the ball removal valve 1344 is sucked and slid by the ball removal solenoid 1344S, and the end of the bypass passage 1304 (the communication portion with the ball removal passage 1305) is opened and bypassed. The sphere in the passage 1304 is operated to flow into the sphere removal passage 1305 by gravity. As a result, the sphere in the bypass passage 1304 is guided to the ball removal passage 1305 by gravity and does not flow into the lower passage 2301.
Then, the sphere guided from the bypass passage 1304 to the sphere removal passage 1305 is collected in the collection box 1345.
The bypass passage 1304 is formed in a spiral shape in order to relieve the falling pressure of the game ball.

The operation of the ball removal solenoid 1344S is performed by operating the ball removal switch 1183 of the payout control device 1230. When the ball removal switch 1183 is turned on, the ball removal solenoid 1344S is turned on and the bypass passage 1304 is operated. The end portion of the bypass passage 1304 is opened, and the ball of the bypass passage 1304 is caused to flow into the ball removal passage 1305 to be recovered in the recovery box 1345.
As described above, when the ball removal switch 1183 is turned on, the upper switching solenoid 1336S is also turned on. Therefore, both the upper switching solenoid 1336S and the ball removal solenoid 1344S are turned on by turning on the ball removal switch 1183.
In this case, when the clerk performs the ball removal of the encapsulated ball, when the store clerk operates to turn on the ball removal switch 1183, both the upper switching solenoid 1336S and the ball removal solenoid 1344S are turned on, and the upper switching solenoid 1336S is turned on. The ball 2303 flows into the bypass passage 1304, and the ball removal solenoid 1344S is turned on, whereby the ball in the bypass passage 1304 flows into the ball removal passage 1305 and is collected in the collection box 1345 via the ball removal passage 1305. doing.
For example, in the case of replacing the enclosed ball that has been used for a long time, the store clerk operates the ball removal switch 1183 so that the enclosed ball passes from the upper passage 2303 through the bypass passage 1304 and passes through the ball removal passage 1305 as described above. 1345 will be collected. Further, when an irregular sphere (a non-magnetic sphere or a small sphere smaller than a regular sphere) is detected, the ball is automatically removed and the encapsulated sphere is collected in the collection box 1345.

Now, returning to the description of the small ball sensor 2342 arranged in the upper passage 2303, the small ball sensor 2342 is provided to determine whether or not the size of the game ball is smaller than the regular one. The sphere sensor 2342 detects a regular sphere (eg, diameter = 11 mm) (detection signal is on), but does not detect a small sphere smaller than the regular one (eg, diameter = 10.5 mm or less) (the detection signal is off). As it is). In addition, the small ball sensor 2342 is disposed adjacent to the first enclosed ball detection switch 2164.
The small ball sensor 2342 determines whether or not the game ball is a regular ball during a predetermined period when the pachinko machine 2001 is turned on (for example, when the store is opened). Further, when the pachinko machine 2001 is turned on, the polishing apparatus 1306 is also operated to polish the encapsulated sphere.
During the predetermined period, the upper switching solenoid 1336S is turned on, the valve body of the upper switching valve 1336 is sucked, the end of the upper passage 2303 is opened, and the ball of the upper passage 2303 flows into the bypass passage 1304. Yes. At this time, the ball removal solenoid 1344S does not operate, and the ball removal passage 1305 is closed by the ball removal valve 1344.
Therefore, the encapsulated sphere of the upper passage 2303 circulates along a path of returning to the upper passage 2303 again via the bypass passage 1304, the lower passage 2301, and the feeding device 2302. In the process of the ball circulating in such a circulation path, the small ball sensor 2342 determines whether or not the game ball is a regular ball.

In this case, if the game ball is a regular ball, the small ball sensor 2342 is turned on within a predetermined period (for example, see FIG. 264 (T82)) after the first enclosed ball detection switch 2164 is turned on. This is because the time until the sphere passing through the feed outlet switch 2334 and discharged into the upper passage 2303 passes through the first enclosed sphere detection switch 2164 and then passes through the small ball sensor 2342 is substantially constant. This is because the predetermined time T81 (see, for example, FIG. 264) is reached.
On the other hand, when the game ball is an abnormal ball (small ball), the small ball sensor 2342 is not turned on within a predetermined period after the first enclosing ball detection switch 1164 is turned on (for example, see FIG. 264 (T82)). This is because the small ball sensor 2342 is an abnormal ball even if the ball passed through the feed outlet switch 2334 and discharged to the upper passage 2303 passes through the first enclosed ball detection switch 2164 and then passes through the small ball sensor 2342. This is because the (small sphere) is not detected and the detection signal is not turned on. Therefore, when a game ball is flowing through the upper passage 2303, the small ball sensor 2342 is not turned on within a predetermined period (for example, see FIG. 264 (T82)) after the first enclosed ball detection switch 2164 is turned on. The payout control device 1230 determines that the ball is a wrong ball (small ball). If it is determined that the ball is a wrong ball (small ball), the ball removal solenoid 1344S is turned on, and the end of the bypass passage 1304 is opened by the ball removal valve 1344 for bypassing. The balls in the passage 1304 are caused to flow into the ball removal passage 1305 and collected in the collection box 1345.
The operation of turning on the ball removal solenoid 1344S and opening the end of the bypass passage 1304 with the ball removal valve 1344 to cause the ball in the bypass passage 1304 to flow into the ball removal passage 1305 is referred to as “ball removal”. It may be said that the ball removal solenoid 1344S of the valve 1344 is switched to the ball removal side to remove the enclosed ball.

Next, the collection of the balls that have been played on the game board 1020 will be described. In the launching device 1037, the balls supplied from the upper passage 2303 are sent one by one to the firing position by the ball feed solenoid 1172 (see FIG. 109). It fires from the upper part of the board 1020 toward the game area 1022 by a firing solenoid 1173 (see FIG. 109). In addition, since the launching device 1037 directly launches a ball from the upper part of the game board 1020 toward the game area 1022, no foul ball is generated.
The ball launched toward the game area 1022 passes through the game area 1022 to generate a game result, and is collected from the game board 1020 to the outside (here, outboard).
At this time, the ball that won the first start winning opening is detected by the first start opening switch 1120, and the ball that won the first starting winning opening is detected by the second start opening switch 1121, and the first variable winning apparatus 1027 The ball that won the first big prize opening 1027a is detected by the lower count switch 1124, the ball that won the second big prize opening 1034a of the second variable prize winning device 1034 is detected by the upper count switch 1125, and the general prize opening 1028 is further detected. -1031 winning balls are detected by the winning opening switches 1123a to 1123d. The switches 1120 to 1123a to 1123d, 1124, and 1125 are disposed on the back side of the game board 1020.
In addition, a first safe ball detection switch 1162 and a second safe ball detection switch 1163 are arranged on the left and right of the back side of the game board 1020 in the frame part on the back side of the game board 1020. These switches 1162, 1163 are Only safe balls of the game board 1020 are detected (out balls are not detected). However, the safe ball of which winning opening is detected depends on the behavior of the sphere because the first safe sphere detection switch 1162 and the second safe sphere detection switch 1163 are arranged on the left and right, but the first safe sphere detection The sum of the spheres detected by the switch 1162 and the second safe sphere detection switch 1163 matches the total sum of the safe spheres.

On the other hand, the game result is not safe and the ball that is out (out ball) is detected by the out ball detection switch 1161 and flows into the out path 1331. Similarly, the out ball detection switch 1161 is arranged on the back side of the game board 1020. Then, the safe balls and the out balls that have ended the game on the game board 1022 are collected in the out passage 1331 as the collected balls and discharged to the lower passage 1301.
Therefore, the spheres collected in the out passage 1331 are spheres having an out number which is a concept including a safe (winning) sphere and an out (out) sphere, and the sphere having the out number passes through the game area 1022. It is a ball (collected ball) that generates a game result and is collected from the game board 1020 to the outside (here, outside (out): not outside the gaming machine). That is, the number of outs is calculated by the total number (recovered spheres) obtained by the three sensors “out sphere detection switch 1161 + first safe sphere detection switch 1162 + second safe sphere detection switch 1163”.
Then, the above-mentioned recovered balls normally flow into the polishing apparatus 1306 from the lower passage 2301 and are polished. Then, the recovered balls are fed upward by the feeding apparatus 2302 and pass through the upper passage 2303 to the launching apparatus 1037. Return. Further, when the polishing apparatus 1306 is abnormal, the lower switching solenoid 1310S of the lower switching valve 1310 does not operate, and the lower switching valve 1310 closes the polishing inlet passage 1319 so that the balls do not flow into the polishing apparatus 1306. As it is, it passes through the lower passage 2301 toward the inlet of the feeding device 1302 and does not flow into the polishing device 1306.

Next, an appropriate range of the number of encapsulated balls will be described.
The first enclosed sphere detection switch 2164 is provided to detect a sphere located at a position lower than the second enclosed sphere detection switch 2165 on the relatively downstream side of the upper passage 2303. On the other hand, the second encapsulated ball detection switch 2165 is a sphere located higher than the first encapsulated ball detection switch 2164 on the relatively upstream side of the upper passage 2303 (upstream side of the first encapsulated ball detection switch 2164). It is provided to detect. The first enclosed ball detection switch 2164 is a sensor that detects the lower limit of the number of balls enclosed as a game ball, and the second enclosed ball detection switch 2165 detects the upper limit of the number of balls enclosed as a game ball. It is a sensor. This is because it is necessary to encapsulate the balls in the pachinko machine 2001 without excess or deficiency, and check that the current number of encapsulated balls is more than the minimum and less than the maximum, respectively. It is provided to confirm that there are encapsulated balls.
The upper passage 2303 is formed in a structure bent at the front side of the first enclosed ball detection switch 2164, and the upper passage 2303 at the downstream side of the bent structure, that is, the downstream side of the first enclosed ball detection switch 2164 is a sphere. It has a function as a feed channel, and the enclosing balls are arranged one by one.
The upper passage 2303 may or may not be provided as an integral flow path including the ball feed flow path.

Of the circulation path through which the enclosing sphere circulates, the upper passage 2303 is inclined downward or downward toward the vicinity of the launch position as shown in FIG. 265 with the vicinity of the launch position of the launch device 1037 being the lowest position. The first enclosed ball detection switch 2164 is arranged so as to detect the game ball at the first position in the upper passage 2303, and the second enclosed ball detection switch 2165 is more than the first position in the upper passage 2303. It arrange | positions so that the game ball in the 2nd position of an upstream may be detected.
Here, the first position indicates that the most upstream game ball is stored in the upper passage 2303 when the number of game balls is stored in the upper passage 2303 by the minimum value within the appropriate range of the number of enclosed balls (the number of enclosed game balls). The position is detected by the 1 enclosing ball detection switch 2164. In addition, the second position is such that when a number of game balls exceeding the appropriate range of the number of encapsulated balls are accumulated in the upper passage 2303, the second encapsulated ball detection switch 2165 detects the game ball and is within an appropriate range of the number of encapsulated balls. When a maximum number of game balls are stored in the upper passage 2303, the second enclosing ball detection switch 2165 is set to a position where no game ball is detected.

In addition, at least a part (preferably the whole) of the above-mentioned upper passage 2303 among the flow path of the encapsulated ball to be circulated can visually recognize the game ball inside from the outside (at least from the back side of the pachinko machine 2001). It has become. Thereby, the state of the flow of the sphere in the upper passage 2303, the presence or absence of the occurrence of clogging, and the state of the number of encapsulated spheres can be visually confirmed. For example, the flow path of the encapsulated sphere (upper passage 2303) is formed of a transparent or translucent member, or an internal viewing opening (such as a thin slit or a plurality of minute holes) that is large enough to prevent the sphere from flowing out. ) Is formed of a predetermined number of members, so that the internal sphere can be visually recognized from the back side of the pachinko machine 2001.
Although detailed illustration is omitted, for example, the entire back side wall of the upper passage 2303 may be made of a transparent member so that the entire interior of the upper passage 2303 can be visually recognized as shown in FIG. Preferably, at least in the upper passage 2303, an internal sphere can be visually recognized from the outside, whereby the number of enclosed spheres can be visually confirmed. In addition, a mark may be formed near the upper passage 2303 so that an accurate determination as to whether or not the number of encapsulated balls is appropriate can be made by this visual check. For example, marks (indicating signs: for example, inverted triangular marks in FIG. 265) 2346 may be formed near the upper passage 2303 at a predetermined number of 30 positions of the enclosing sphere. In this way, when a sphere is added when the encapsulated sphere is insufficient, it is easy to understand because it is sufficient to add up to the mark 2346. Also, in the case of an excessive number of encapsulated spheres, it is easy to understand because it is sufficient to pass through the sphere to this mark 2346.

In the configuration shown in FIG. 265, the state in which the encapsulated ball is dropped into the game area 1022 and does not flow into the polishing apparatus 1306 is the upper passage 2303, the firing device 1037, the game area 1022, the out passage 1331, the lower passage 2301, and the feeding device. The enclosed ball circulates through a path 2302 and an upper passage 2303, and a game is played. The state in which the encapsulated ball falls while playing a game game and circulates through the above path without polishing the encapsulated ball is called “in encapsulated ball game circulation”.
On the other hand, when the encapsulated sphere is polished during the game with the encapsulated sphere, the encapsulated sphere is dropped into the game area 1022 and flows into the polishing apparatus 1306 to be a path for polishing the ball. 2303, the launching device 1037, the game area 1022, the out passage 1331, the lower passage 2301, the encapsulated sphere flows into the polishing device 1306 from the lower passage 2301 through the lower switching valve 1310, and then the sphere is polished. The route passes through the lower passage 2301 by the feeding device 2302 and reaches the upper passage 2303, and the game is played while circulating the encapsulated ball. A state in which the encapsulated ball falls while playing a game game and circulates through the path while polishing the encapsulated ball is referred to as “encapsulated ball polishing game circulation”.
In the modification of the fifteenth embodiment, unlike the first embodiment, the polishing of the encapsulated sphere is basically controlled not only when the power is turned on but also during the normal game. This is to polish the encapsulated sphere well, and the encapsulated sphere is polished while being circulated during the game.
The reason for polishing the encapsulated sphere even when the power is turned on is to polish the encapsulated sphere once a day even on a stand that is not in operation. That is, in the modified example of the fifteenth embodiment, when the encapsulated sphere is caused to flow into the polishing apparatus 1306 without circulating through the game area 1022 and the sphere is circulated, such as when the power of the pachinko machine 2001 is turned on, the upper passage 2303 is bypassed. Through the passage 1304 and the lower passage 2301, the encapsulated sphere flows into the polishing apparatus 1306 from the lower passage 2301 through the lower switching valve 1310 to polish the sphere, and then passes through the lower passage 2301 and is fed by the feeding apparatus 2302. The encapsulated sphere circulates along a route that is sent to the upper passage 2303. The state where the encapsulated sphere does not play a game game and circulates the above path while polishing the encapsulated sphere is called “encapsulated sphere polishing / circulating”.

As described above, in the modified example of the fifteenth embodiment, the arrangement location of the feeding device 2302 is changed. As in the fifteenth embodiment, the encapsulated sphere is polished during a predetermined period when the power is turned on. During the game game, the encapsulated sphere is also polished.
Similarly to the fifteenth embodiment, small spheres or magnetic spheres smaller than regular spheres are detected as illegal spheres, and when illegal spheres are detected, the spheres can be automatically removed and collected. As in the case of 15, security can be improved.
Furthermore, according to the modification of the fifteenth embodiment, when selecting the placement location of the feeding device 2302, the degree of freedom of the selection location can be increased. Moreover, according to the structure of FIG. 265, the upper part and left side part of the back surface of a pachinko machine can be utilized effectively.

Next, a modified example of the present invention will be described.
The present invention may be modified as follows.
(1) In some of the above embodiments, the winning display device is separated from the collective display device. However, the installation place where the winning display device is separated is limited to the lower part of the game board and the center case. For example, you may attach to the upper part of a game board, or a big prize opening.
In the case of a model with a small installation space, it may be advantageous to separate in this way.
(2) Alternatively, the winning display device may be separated from the collective display device and installed in a frame of a gaming machine other than the place disclosed in the above embodiment. In this case, the winning display device becomes a frame element, As a board, the cost is reduced.

(3) Variations in the display method of the winning display device are not limited to those disclosed in the above embodiments.
For example, in each of the above embodiments, when the game ball is won at the winning opening, the number of winning balls is displayed on the winning display device only for a predetermined period. However, the present invention is not limited to this. Control may be made so that the winning display (displaying the number of winning balls) on the display device is not turned off (if it is an LED, the lighting is continued). For example, when a ball jam error at a winning opening is detected, control is performed to keep the winning display on the prize display device lit until the ball jam is eliminated.
In this way, you can easily recognize where the ball jam error at the prize opening occurred at the prize winning number display (lit) on the prize display device, and you can quickly respond to the ball jam error. Convenient.
The inventive concept of the above configuration is expressed as follows.
The display time control means is
A gaming machine, wherein when an error relating to winning occurs, the display of the number of winning balls on a winning display device is controlled so as not to be erased for a certain period of time.

(4) In the above embodiments, the medium control unit (for example, the card unit 15) is attached to the gaming machine (for example, the pachinko machine 1), but the medium control unit may be built in the gaming machine. Good (ie, a media control unit may be provided as part of the gaming machine). For example, in the first embodiment, the game card is inserted into the card unit. However, a mode in which the game card is inserted into the gaming machine (pachinko machine 1) (a mode in which the gaming machine also functions as a card unit) may be used.
(5) The storage medium may be a card (such as a magnetic card or an IC card) as in the above embodiment, but is not limited to a card type. For example, it may be a USB memory. Alternatively, it can be read and written without contact.

(6) Moreover, even if it says an enclosed ball type, it does not need to be the structure which a game ball does not come out of a game machine main body at all. For example, a mode in which the game ball once goes out of the pachinko machine, is polished by an external polishing apparatus, and is then returned to the pachinko machine again.

(7) Further, even if the game ball is used in a circulating manner, it does not have to be completely circulated in the gaming machine. There is a function to manage the number of balls held by electronic data and supply game balls to the launch position inside the game machine, so that even if the player does not throw in the actual game balls or pays out as rental balls, The present invention can be applied to any gaming machine that can play a game by launching.
(8) Further, the number of possessed balls as the game value that is a profit of the player does not necessarily have to be treated as the number of game balls. For example, 1 point, 2 points, etc. are treated as points, and for example, “100 points” may be displayed. In this case, the relationship between the number of prize balls and the number of points is not limited to the relationship of 1 point for each prize ball. There can be aspects. Instead of “point”, another unit name such as “point” may be used.

(9) The firing subtraction process for reducing the game value in response to the game ball being fired may not necessarily be executed. For example, there may be a mode in which a game ball can be launched without reducing the number of balls during a period in which a predetermined condition is satisfied.
(10) The polishing apparatus for polishing the game ball may polish the game ball by a pellet method using pellets instead of the polishing cloth. In the pellet system, a large number of pellets as an abrasive smaller than the game ball are put in a polishing apparatus and polished while being transported together with the game ball.

Next, the scope of application of the present invention will be described.
(1) The present invention can be applied not only to an enclosed ball type gaming machine but also to a normal (current) gaming machine.
The second display device (touch panel type liquid crystal display) is disposed in a so-called saucer portion of a gaming machine and can be applied to the one managed by the card unit.
(2) Similarly, the present invention can be applied not only to the enclosed ball type gaming machine but also to a normal (current) gaming machine, but may have the following configuration.
In other words, the second display device (touch panel liquid crystal display) may be arranged in the tray portion of the gaming machine and managed by a gaming machine (for example, an effect control device) instead of the card unit.
In this case, the operation display for performing operation / display related to the ball lending is managed by the card unit, and is provided as a separate device from the second display device (corresponding to the operation display device in the embodiment).

(3) The present invention can be applied to all enclosed ball type gaming machines as long as the gaming machine includes the first display device and the second display device. For example, as long as the enclosed ball type gaming machine uses a pachinko ball to play a game, it is not limited to the example of the enclosed ball type gaming machine as in each of the above embodiments, and each of the above embodiments includes the internal configuration and control. Even if the configuration of the substrate is different, it can be applied to any enclosed ball type gaming machine.
Moreover, if it is an enclosed ball type gaming machine, the present invention can be applied to the following modes (4) to (6).
(4) The present invention can also be applied to an enclosed ball type gaming machine equipped with a display device capable of displaying a decorative special figure different from the collective display device for displaying the special figure as an enclosed ball type gaming machine. The present invention can be widely applied to encapsulated ball game machines provided with a video device such as a liquid crystal display as a display device.
(5) The display device for the decorative special drawing only needs to be able to change the display content, and the image may be configured to change the screen content by character display, video display, or the like.
(6) The display device for the decorative special figure is not limited to a display device using liquid crystal, but can change the display contents such as an organic EL, a cathode ray tube, a dot LED, a 7-segment LED, a device using a bending material such as electronic paper. Any material can be used as long as it can be produced.

  The embodiment disclosed this time should be considered as illustrative in all points and not restrictive. The scope of the present invention is defined by the terms of the claims, rather than the description above, and is intended to include any modifications within the scope and meaning equivalent to the terms of the claims.

1, 1a to 1n, 401, 501, 2001 Pachinko machine (enclosed ball game machine)
33, 1033 Sub liquid crystal display device (production display device)
40, 403, 1040 Ball number indicator (ball number display device)
41, 1041 Display device (main liquid crystal display device, display device for production)
54, 1054 Game control device 230, 230D, 1230 payout control device (display control means)

Claims (1)

A game control device capable of enclosing a predetermined number of game balls in a gaming machine main body, launching the enclosed game balls into a gaming area and playing a game, and managing the progress of the gaming machine With
The game control device determines whether the game result is in a predetermined profit state or any other state, and in the case of a predetermined profit state, the player's profit is increased in correspondence with a predetermined number of prize balls. Let
In the enclosed ball type gaming machine that plays the game by circulating the enclosed game ball by collecting the game ball that has passed through the game area and guiding it to the launch position,
A ball number display device capable of displaying the number of balls of the player;
Display control means for controlling the display of the number-of-balls display device,
The display control means includes
An enclosed ball type gaming machine characterized in that a display mode of a ball holding number display device is changed according to the number of balls held.

Images